This is a reproduction of a library book that was digitized

by Google as part of an ongoing effort to preserve the

information in books and make it universally accessible.

https://books.google.com
 /2
WILS
GOVU
1 2 B 1
D 101.20 : 5-12 В 1/2
FM5- /2
UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA
LIBRARIES

A T E E R
GIN
APR 3 1978

CO M B EN
GOVERNMENT PUBLICA DIVISION
U.S. DEPOSITORY DOCUMENT
D- 295

S
MO L 12B LS
L V E
SKI L E

n d 2
la

I E R ' S A L
SOL D MA N U

HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

COMMANDER'S ATTENTION

Distribute this manual to each soldier in MOS 12B , skill level 1 through
4.

The Soldier's Manual is designed to tell the soldier which tasks he must
be able to perform to be MOS qualified . If the soldier masters the
tasks in this manual , he should progress readily to positions of respon-
sibility commensurate with his demonstrated degree of proficiency and
motivation .

Initial distribution of Soldier's Manuals will be " pushed" down to the

unit level , based upon assigned strength in the particular MOS and skill
level . In the event additional manuals are needed by the unit for MOS
study , libraries or other training needs , these may be requested by
sending completed DA Form 17 ( Request for Publications ) directly to the
US Army Publications Center , 2800 Eastern Boulevard , Baltimore , Maryland
21220 .

The individual soldier is responsible for retaining and maintaining his

manual . Soldier's Manuals are designed on the modular system . Each
skill level manual builds upon the other . As an example , a skill level
3 soldier needs manuals 1 through 4. Levels 1 through 3 tell the level
3 soldier what he needs to know for proficiency at his present skill
level . The skill level 4 manual tells him what he must be able to do at
the next skill level . He needs all four manuals to learn all he needs to
know .

Upon promotion to grades E5 , E6 or E7 , the soldier must order his next

higher level manual directly from the U. S. Army Engineer School . A
pre - addressed form for this purpose has been included at Appendix C.

This Soldier's Manual was prepared by the United States Army Engineer
School .

Kell
JAMES, L. KELLY
Major General , USA
Commandant

i
FM 5-12B1 / 2

RESERVE COMPONENTS

ARMY NATIONAL GUARD -

ARMY RESERVE

This information is for you , the Reserve component soldier . This Sol-
dier's Manual , as published , is representative of the critical tasks to
be performed by the Active Army soldier in your MOS using equipment
available in the Active Army inventory .

Most tasks in this manual are applicable to you without changes . How-
ever , some tasks may require modification , due to differences in the
equipment , facilities , and training time available to you . Future pub-
lications of Soldier's Manuals will undergo a review process . This man-
ual will be included in that review and change sheets will be published
and distributed to your unit . Changes to make the manual more applica-
ble to Reserve components will also be considered . In the meantime , you
will be using this manual along with your Active Army counterpart .

Many tasks that you learned in BCT and AIT are in this manual . There
are other critical tasks that you are responsible for learning on your
own . Training references and materials are available and can be pro-
vided to you through your unit . It is to your advantage to seize the
initiative NOW , and check these out . Your performance rating in your
duty position will be based on your ability to perform all the critical
tasks for which you are accountable .

ii
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REMEMBER :
LEVEL

YOUR SERGEANT MAJOR IS THE UNIT'S PRINCIPAL

COUNSELOR FOR QUESTIONS THAT ARISE PERTAINING
TO CAREER PROGRESSION AND THE TRAINING OF THE
ENLISTED SOLDIER .

CBT CBT ENGR BRIDGE SPEC CSM ADM SPEC

ENGINEER SR SGT

OOZ

12Z5 E9

E8/9
5
SKILL

B4
12 12E4
12C4
4 E7 E7 E7

12B3 12C3 12E3

3 E6 E6 E6

12B2 12C2 12E2

K2 E5 E5 E5

12
B1
12
C1 12E1
1 E1 -E4 E1 -E4 E1 -E4

TRAINEE

Career progression scale for Combat Engineer career management field.

iii
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Essayons B

The Army Corps of Engineers was formally organized in 1779 and is one of
our country's oldest military organizations . The present Corps was con-
stituted in 1802 and charged with the responsibility for conducting a

military academy at West Point , New York . Until it was turned over to
the Army - at - large in 1886 , West Point was an engineering school managed
by the Chief of Engineers .

The primary mission of the Corps of Engineers has always been to provide
combat support to our fighting Army . In all the wars in which the
United States has participated , the Corps has fought in the front lines
in addition to having constructed the field military installations ,
roads , bridges , and fortifications the Army has needed to do its job .
Engineer troops were first in action among American forces in World War
I and suffered the first casualties . They were the first ashore in Nor-
mandy in World War II , clearing the beaches for the Infantry , and car-
ried out three - fourths of all major landing operations throughout that
global conflict . Combat Engineers -- in their actions during the battle
of the Bulge and at the Remagen bridgehead --played a decisive role in
the final defeat of Nazi Germany .
General MacArthur's statement that World War II was " an engineer's war "
is an indication that American military engineering was a major element
in gaining the ultimate victory . During the Korean War , Army Engineers
built strategic air bases , supply and communications facilities , and air
raid warning systems throughout the world . In Vietnam , Engineer battal-
ions constructed coastal port complexes , roads , logistical bases , air-
fields , encampments with supply depots , and evacuation and surgical hos-
pitals . Today , as members of the Corps , you are continuing to carry on
the proud tradition begun by the early Engineers . If you have the apti-
tudes and interests , engineering can be a satisfying and rewarding pro-
fession . The opportunities are many , and the need for you is real .

iv
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

FIELD MANUAL
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
No. 5-12B1 / 2 Washington , D.C. , 29 November 1977

SOLDIER'S MANUAL

COMBAT ENGINEER , MOS 12B , SKILL LEVELS ONE AND TWO

Page

CHAPTER 1. INTRODUCTION
f
-

Section I. General
a
Objective ...
1-1
Scope .. .. 1-1
Tools For Advancement ...
1-1
How to Use Your Manual .......... ... 1-1
Comments ... 1-2

II . Career Development

Enlisted Personnel Management System ...........

1-3

Your Place in the Army as a Combat Engineer ........ 1-3

Combat Engineer Career Management Field ............
1-4
The Skill Qualification Test and Enlisted Eval-
uation Report and How They Affect Your Career ..... 1-4
Military Occupational Specialty Training ........... 1-6
How to Supplement Training on Your Own ............. 1-7

Eligibility for Promotion to Skill Level Two ....... 1-8

Training to Meet Promotion Requirements ............ 1-8

CHAPTER
2. CRITICAL TASKS

Section I. The Task List

General 2-1
What Is a Task List ? ........ 2-1

Tasks for Skill Level One Combat Engineer .......... 2-1

2-5
Tasks for Skill Level Two Combat Engineer .......
...

Section II . Task Summaries

2-7
What the Task Summary Does ... .....

Individual Task Summaries ..

2-7

V
FM 5-12B1 / 2

CHAPTER 3. TASKS FOR ADDITIONAL DUTY POSITIONS

General ..... ....... 3-1

Task Summaries 3-1

APPENDIX A. CONSOLIDATED LIST OF REFERENCES ............ • A- 1

B. QUESTIONNAIRE ....... .. B- 1
C. SOLDIER'S MANUAL REORDER CARD C- 1

For sale by the Superintendent of Documents, U.S.Government Printing Office

Washington, D.C. 20402 Price $11.00
Stock Number 008-020-00669-6

The wording in this manual should not be construed

to discriminate between the sexes . In order to
avoid a repetitious use of the terminology ,
"he/ she , " the terms , "he , " "him , " and "his , " as well
as "men , " are intended to include both the masculine
and feminine gender . Any exceptions to this usage
will be so noted .

vi
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
1
CHAPTER 1

INTRODUCTION

Section I. GENERAL

o Objective

The objective of this manual is to senior NCOs and other leaders are
help you qualify as a Combat Engi- the tools you can use to your ad-
neer , Military Occupational Speci- vantage and to the Army's benefit .
alty (MOS ) 12B . You should be able
to perform your mission more effec- Manuals . Soldier's Manuals
tively with a minimum of supervision are designed on the modular system .
after you have been trained in all Each skill level manual builds upon
the tasks outlined in this manual . the preceding one ( s ) . For example ,
You should also be able to pass the a skill level 3 soldier needs manu-
tests by which your proficiency as a als 1 through 4. Levels 1 through 3
Combat Engineer will be evaluated . tell the level 3 soldier what he
As a soldier holding a certain skill needs to know at his present skill
level , you will then be responsible level . The skill level 4 manual
for-- tells him what he must be able to do
at the next skill level . The point
-

Performing the tasks unique is , he needs all four manuals to

to the skill level you are learn all that he needs to know .
holding . Upon promotion to grades E5 , E6 or
E7 , the soldier must order his next
-

Training soldiers holding higher level Soldier's Manual di-

the lower skill levels in rectly from the US Army Engineer
lower skill level tasks . School . You will find a pre - ad-
dressed order form for the higher
0
Scope level Soldier's Manual in Appendix
C. Meanwhile , you are responsible
This manual describes what your su- for keeping and updating all the
pervisors and the US Army expect you Soldier's Manuals that you have re-
to know and be able to do as a Com- ceived .
bat Engineer , MOS 12B . In addition
to explaining your job tasks , the Officers and Senior NCOs .
manual presents the management and If, for any reason , you do not un-
training systems set up to let you derstand any part of this manual or
achieve your full potential for pro- would like to know more about ad-
motion and a rewarding career as a vancement opportunities , see your
professional soldier . NCOIC , First Sergeant , Sergeant Ma-
jor , Platoon Leader or Commander .
• Tools for Advancement These people are experts in helping
younger soldiers learn about train-
The Army wants and needs well- ing , training evaluation and the
trained soldiers who desire to ad- system for getting ahead in the
vance through the ranks . This man- Army . So take advantage of their
ual and the willing assistance of knowledge , experience and expertise .

1-1
FM 5-12B1 /2
Ο How to Use your Manual duty positions may require the sol-
dier to perform certain additional
Chapter 1 introduces you to the man- tasks , depending upon the particular
ual and explains the Enlisted Per- job requirements of that specific
sonnel Management System ( EPMS ) , the duty position , MOS , and skill level .
Skill Qualification Test ( SQT ) , the For example ,
Army Training system , the MOS career
progression pattern , the promotion -

A soldier at Skill Level 2 may be

system , and how the manual will aid assigned to a duty positon normally
you during your career in the US filled by a soldier of higher skill
Army . level . In this instance the soldier
at Skill Level 2 will be required to
Chapter 2 contains , in Section I, perform certain
the list of critical tasks for which supervisory / administrative / technical
you at a specific skill level in duties usually associated with the
your MOS will be responsible . The higher skill level .
task list indicates , for each task ,
the task number , task title , and -

A soldier may be required to per-

page number where the task summary form an additional duty , such as
for that task may be found . While radio- telephone operator ( RTO ) , or
the critical tasks are grouped by light vehicle operator .
skill level , this does not imply
that the critical tasks listed are
only applicable to that particular 0 Comments
listed skill level . The critical
tasks in your Soldier's Manuals are After you have used this manual long
cumulative as the skill level in- enough to give it a good tryout , we
creases . For example , you at Skill would like your comments . Complete
the pre - addressed questionnaire at
Level 3 are not only responsible for
the tasks listed for Skill Level 3 , Appendix B and submit it with any
other recommended changes or com-
but are also responsible for all the
critical tasks listed for Skill ments you might have . Place your
Level 1 and Skill Level 2. This comments on DA Form 2028 ( Recom-
cumulation of tasks continues mended Changes to Publications and
through all skill levels . To qual- Blank Forms ) , listing the specific
ify for promotion ( E - 5 and above ) , page , paragraph and line of the text
you must master the tasks for the in which you recommend the change .
Also state the reason for each com-
grade to which you are seeking pro-
ment so that we can better under-
motion , as well as the tasks for the
grade in which you are currently stand and evaluate it . Forward your
serving . When you reach Skill Level completed questionnaire and any com-
5 you will be responsible for all ments to the following address :
the critical tasks for your MOS .
Section II contains the detailed
training outlines for all the tasks
listed in Section I.
Commandant
Chapter 3 contains " add- on" or "ad- US Army Engineer School
ditional " tasks . Not all Soldier's ATTN : ATSE - TDI
Manuals will have a Chapter 3. The Fort Belvoir , VA 22060
purpose of this chapter is to pro-
vide for those critical tasks that

are duty - position related . Some

1-2
 FM 5-12B1 /2

NOTE

Before you read any further , we suggest that you flip through
the pages of this manual , using the table of contents as a
guide , to get an overall idea of the type of information it
contains .

Section II . CAREER DEVELOPMENT

0 Enlisted Personnel Management

System lower grades while further merging
others at higher grades .
The Enlisted Personnel Management
System ( EPMS ) is the basis for the Provide continuing training
professional development of every throughout the soldier's career .
enlisted soldier's career . The
overall goal of EPMS is to promote What does this mean to you? This
career progression and professional- system makes it possible for you to
ism . To achieve this goal , train- look to the future and see a realis-
ing , evaluation , classification , and tic , clear and viable career pro-
promotion will be controlled under a gression path from Private to Ser-
singular , well - coordinated system . geant Major . By understanding the
programs that make up EPMS and by
Developed through the cooperative planning for professional develop-
efforts of the Army's Military Per- ment , you can progresS through a
sonnel Center (MILPERCEN ) , the challenging and rewarding Army са-
Training and Doctrine Command reer . Your progress will depend , of
(TRADOC ) and the major Army commands course , on the extent to which you
(MACOM) , EPMS places special empha- use the system and the degree of
sis on soldiers becoming and remain- excellence that you demonstrate in
ing proficient in their respective your performance .
career management fields through
both formal and informal training . 0 Your Place in the Army as a Com-
bat Engineer
The objectives of EPMS are to :
-

Now , let us discuss how you

-

Provide a logical and usable and your job as a combat engineer

road map guiding soldiers by the fit into the Army and how you will
most direct route from E - l to E - 9 . progress up the ladder in the Combat
Engineer Career Management Field .
-

Eliminate promotion bottle- The success of the Army's mission

necks and afford fair promotion op- depends on how well each soldier
portunity for all enlisted men and performs the job . All jobs in the
women in the same grade . Army are important , but the most
important job for you is combat en-
-

Broaden soldier skills , make gineering . Why? First of all be-

assignments more flexible , and pro- cause now it is your job and your
vide greater challenge by decreasing responsibility alone to see that you
the number of MOS by means of elimi- do it well . Second , your unit and
nating and combining some at the the Army are depending on you .

1-3
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

How well you carry out your ment in grade and responsibility .
responsibilities will not only de- This system operates very informally
termine the success of your own са- at skill level 1. All you have to
reer , but will also help to achieve do is convince your supervisor that
the Army's mission . It boils down you know how to do your job and are
to everyone pulling his share of the doing it satisfactorily . The infor-
load . As you well know , things are mation contained in your Soldier's
a lot tougher when one has to do the Manual will help . When you reach
work of two . The climb up the lad- the grade of E - 4 ; however , you are
der is going to be competitive and required to take a formal test
tough . Get ready for the challenge ! called the skill qualification test
Set your goals and use this book to No. 2 ( SQT 2 ) for your MOS . This
your advantage , because this book test measures your ability to per-
will help you make the climb up the form selected critical tasks for
ladder to success . skill levels 1 and 2. Master the
tasks in your Soldier's Manual and
Combat Engineer Career Management you will be prepared for your SQT .
Field

Once , you have been promoted to

Education , training , experience and grade E- 4 , you will be required to
other abilities are grouped into take an SQT at least once every 2
career management fields ( CMF ) for years . The exact dates for your SQT
personnel requiring similar , related will be announced by your unit .
and sometimes complementary
knowledge . The figure on page iii SQT 2 will be the first SQT you will
depicts the career progression scale take after you have been promoted to
for the Combat Engineer career man- E-4 . It will sample your ability to
agement field . It shows how you can perform both skill level 2 and skill
move up as you receive more training level 1 tasks . After your SQT has
and become more experienced . It been scored and analyzed , you will
also shows the relationship between be given a detailed SQT report that
enlisted grades and skill levels . will explain your score and how it
To be eligible for promotion , you compares with the scores achieved by
must first qualify for a higher
all other soldiers in your grade and
skill level . MOS . Your score will place you in
one of the three major categories .
NOTE
If you achieve a high enough
After you achieve the grade of E - 7 score , you will become eligible for
(Skill Level 4) you will compete the award of skill level 2 , and you
with all soldiers in the Combat Eng will have taken a giant step toward
ineer Career Field ( CMF - 12 ) for pro getting promoted to E- 5 .
motion to E- 8 in MOS 12250 .
If you achieve a minimum
Ο The Skill Qualification Test and passing score ( not enough to qualify
Enlisted Evaluation Report and How for skill level 2 ) , you will verify
They Affect Your Career your qualification to retain skill
level 1 in your MOS . You will then
The enlisted evaluation system oper- be able to retake the SQT , 1 year
ates to evaluate your ability to do later , in order to be eligible for
the job , your attitude toward the the award of skill level 2 and be-
job , and your potential for advance- come eligible for promotion .

1-4
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

}
-

If you fail to achieve a The written component is the re-

minimum passing score , you may not quired written test which tests be-
be able to reenlist , and you may be tween 30 and 50 tasks in your MOS ,
subject to other personnel actions using action- oriented questions . It
such as reclassificatin to a differ- is less costly to administer than
ent MOS or even elimination from the the hands - on test , because one test
Army . proctor can administer the test to
as many as 25 or 30 individuals at
Once you have been awarded skill the same time . Also , the answer

level 2 , you should immediately set sheets are machine scorable . On

your sights on skill level 3 . Pre- some tasks , the written test does
not provide full assurance that the
pare yourself for SQT 3 by mastering
the skill level 3 tasks and keeping individual can perform the task
yourself proficient on the tasks for under field conditions . For these
skill levels 1 and 2. The same tasks , hands - on testing is prefera-
procedure will be true in attaining ble .
skill levels 4 and 5. Keep two
The hands - on component tests your
things in mind about SQTs :
ability to perform critical tasks
with , or on , the actual job equip-
-

Your next SQT will be aimed ment or simulators . Although more

one skill level higher than the pay time consuming than the written com-
grade in which you are serving . ponent to administer , the hands - on
component is the preferred type of
testing for manipulative skills such
as vehicle operation .
-

Regardless of your grade and

skill level , you will remain respon- The performance certification compo-
sible for either performing or su- nent is the rating of your perfor-
pervising the tasks required at all mance of a task on the job by the
lower skill levels . military supervisor . The supervisor
may substitute this rating in the
The other part of the enlisted eval- SQT for hands - on testing when the
uation system is your enlisted eval- latter is too costly , too time con-
uation report or EER . The EER is suming and/ or the equipment is not
used by your supervisor to report readily available .
information about your duty perfor-
mance that cannot be evaluated by Not all SQTs will have all three
the skill qualification test . Your parts . SQT 4 and 5 , for example ,
attitude toward your job , how well usually will not contain a hands - on
you work with others as a team mem- part because the NCOs job is nor-
ber , and your leadership ability are mally more supervisory than techni-
among the rated characteristics . If cal . Approximately 60 days prior to
you get along with others and do your SQT , you will receive an SQT
your job satisfactorily , your EER's notice that will identify the tasks
will be good . to be tested and explain how they
will be tested .
Your SQT may have three parts : writ-
ten , hands - on , and performance cer- Your SQT will require no more than 8
tification . All parts will be based hours to take -- no more than 4 hours
on the tasks listed in your Sol- for the hands - on part ( if used ) , and
dier's Manual and will sample your no more than 4 hours for the written
ability to perform those tasks . part .

1-5
FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Soon after you take your SQT , you Promotion to the next higher
will receive two scores . One of grade .
them will be your SQT score ; and the
-

other , the numerical rating of your Reclassification into a dif-

EER . These will be used to compare ferent MOS .
you with all other soldiers in the
Army having the same MOS , skill
-

Retention in the Army .

level , and pay grade . Each score
will be broken down to show your -

Reenlistment .
strengths and weaknesses in military
and technical areas . Pay particular Military and civilian
attention to those areas in which schooling .
you fall below average . These are
areas in which you should apply ex- Ο
Military Occupational Specialty
tra effort before the next rating Training
period . These scores are very in-
portant and will in a large degree -

Levels of Training . You

determine the progress of your Army will recall that earlier we dis-
career . They may determine your cussed the five skill levels and
eligibility for : related pay grades . There are also
five levels of training . Table 1-1
-

Retention of your present shows the relationship between the

MOS and skill level . level of training and the pay grade
at which you receive that training .
This training is always aimed at
-

Award of the next higher preparing you for the next pay grade
skill level in your MOS . or skill level .

Table 1-1 . Relationship Between Training Level and Pay Grade

at which Training is Received
TRAINING LEVEL TRAINING PAY GRADE

SENIOR E8 -E9
Sergeants Major Academy
SENIOR Extension Training E7

ADVANCED Advanced Noncommissioned Officer E6

Course

BASIC Basic Noncommissioned Officer E5

Course/ Combat Arms ( BNCOC/ CA)

PRIMARY Primary Noncommissioned Officer E4

Course/ Combat Arms ( PNCOC/ CA )

ENTRY El-E3
One Station Unit Training ( OSUT )

1-6
 FM 5-12B1 /2
-

The Commander's Role in for learning . You are also respon-

Training sible for learning some tasks on
your own--building on skills that
The commander is responsible for you acquired in Entry Level Train-
training his unit to accomplish its ing .
assigned missions . This responsi-
bility encompasses both the collec- If you do not understand a particu-
tive training of the unit ( as a lar task , ask your supervisor to
whole ) and the individual training explain it and to assist you in ob-
of the soldier . taining the appropriate study aids
and references so that you may study
As you know , training for unit mis- and practice it . The senior NCO's
sions can be conducted through use and officers in your unit use your
of the applicable Army Training and Soldier's Manual to help them plan
Evaluation Program ( ARTEP ) . The your training and to evaluate your
ARTEP prescribes the tasks , condi- skills . Ask them for advice and
tons , and standards which serve as a assistance . They want to help you .
guide in the training and evaluation Remember , it really doesn't matter
of your unit . where , when , or how you first
learned a task . The important ques-
To a large extent , though , your tion is -- How well can you do it now ?
unit's ability to meet ARTEP stan-
dards is dependent upon the manner Ο How to Supplement Training on
in which you , the individual sol- Your Own
dier , are able to perform your
duties . The commander will insure You can use the manuals on Combat
that you are trained in the individ- Engineering as study material for
ual skills which are inherent in the on- the - job experience ( OJE ) pro-
your unit's mission . gram in your unit . These manuals
are listed as references in Appendix
The commander cannot , of course , A of this manual . These DA publica-
conduct the complete individual tions are available through normal
training of each soldier assigned to publication supply channels . Here
his unit . You must accept the re- are a few additional ways you can

sponsibility of training yourself in study on your own .

some tasks .
-

Training Extension Courses .

-

Your Role in Training Several Training Extension Courses

( TEC ) that deal with combat engi-
You experienced your first formal neers are being fielded to assist
training shortly after you entered you in your MOS training . The TEC
the Army . This Entry Level Training are effective new training aids de-
was designed to prepare your for signed to guide you through the
your first assignment . The tasks various tasks within your MOS . Ap-
you learned in these courses will be pendix A contains a listing of vari-
found in this manual . There are ous TEC packages you can receive .
other critical tasks ; however , that These are available to you through
you did not learn at entry level , your unit training section or your
and they must be learned in the local learning resource center .
unit. These are the tasks in which
your commander must give you train- -

Correspondence Courses . You

ing and which you are responsible can also take correspondence courses

1-7
FM 5-12B1 / 2

your First Sergeant , training NCO your ability to perform your

and the education center . job by the ratings you re-
ceive on this report . It
Ο Eligibility for promotion to also shows your supervisor's
Skill Level Two and your commander's opinion
of your attitude and job
You are now ready to become a leader potential .
in the Combat Engineer MOS , 12B .
So , what does this mean to you ? It You should ask your supervi-
means that you have now mastered all sor what is expected of you
the tasks associated with skill to obtain a high EER score ,
level 1, and that your supervisor and then do your best to
and commander feel you are profi- satisfy the requirements .
cient enough to be promoted to skill
level 2 .

To be qualified for promotion :

-

You must take the level 2 Ο

Training to Meet Promotion Re-
SQT during the first test quirements
period after becoming an E4
and attain the current cut- Now that you know the requirements
off score for your MOS on for promotion , it is time to get
that test . The test is a started toward that next stripe .
random sampling of the tasks Remember , many of the tasks which
found in the 12B1 / 2 Sol- you must now be concerned with are
dier's Manual , with a suffi- the same as those tasks you mastered
cient number of skill level at skill level 1 , with the exception
2 tasks to establish your that now you must often perform some
qualifications for that supervisory tasks . To assist you in
skill level . the performance of your supervisory
duties , you will attend the Basic
-

You must meet the current Noncommissioned Officer Course / Com-

time - in- service and time- in- bat Arms ( BNCOC/ CA ) -- once you have
grade requirements . been promoted to grade E5 . This
course will expose you to the tech-
You must appear before a
niques of leadership so that you can
board of commissioned and effectively perform as a noncommis-
noncommissioned officers sioned officer . It will be con-
that will evaluate you on ducted at a division- or army - level
such characteristics as job NCO academy and will be approxi-
knowledge and personal ap- mately 4 weeks in length . Emphasis
pearance . will be on leadership principles ,
techniques of leadership and train-
-

You must be rated by your ing . The information on the pages

supervisor and commander on that follow explain all the skill
your performance . They do level 2 tasks . Learn them well and
this by completing your en- before long , you will be taking that
listed efficiency report next step up the ladder towards the
(EER) . The Army monitors top . Good luck !

1-8
 FM 5-12B1 /2

CHAPTER 2

CRITICAL TASKS

Section I. The Task List

0 General . Now that you have Task List below .

learned something about your job--
its qualifications , duties and op- Ο What is a Task List ? A task list
portunities for advancement --we will is a listing of the various actions
tell you what specific training you that an individual must perform to
need to become a qualified Combat successfully carry out the mission
Engineer and how your training is of his unit . It describes work .
evaluated . So , let's take a look at The seventh digit of all skill level
the tasks critical to all duty posi- 1 tasks is the numeral "1 , " while
tions in skill levels 1 and 2 of MOS the seventh digit of all skill level
12B . These are presented in the 2 tasks is the numeral , " 2 " .

Ο Tasks for Skill Level One Combat Engineer

051-191 FIRST AID Page

1001 Apply the four life- saving measures (clear the air 2-8
passages , stop the bleeding , treat for shock , protect
the wound)
1005 Administer artificial respiration 2-17
1006 Immobilize fractures 2-23
1007 Perform first aid for special wounds 2-37
1002 Apply first aid measures for burns 2-40
1003 Apply preventive measures to reduce climatic injuries 2-42

FIELD HYGIENE
1063 Employ field hygiene and sanitation measures 2-47

NUCLEAR , BIOLOGICAL , AND CHEMICAL

1031 Maintain protective mask and accessories 2-50
1032
Put on a protective mask 2-52
1033
Take cover as protection against NBC hazards 2-57
1034
Decontaminate self and individual equipment 2-60
1035 Administer antidote to a nerve agent casualty 2-62
1036
Apply 'artificial respiration to a chemical agent casu- 2-63
alty
1037
Determine personal needs and personal hygiene in a 2-65
chemical environment

2-1
FM 5-12B1 / 2
1038 Identify NBC hazards and take appropriate actions 2-68

COMMUNICATIONS
1517 Maintain field telephones ( TA- 1 and TA-312 ) 2-79
1518 Install / operate field telephones ( TA- 1 and TA- 312 ) 2-81
1519 Maintain tactical FM radios ( AN/ PRC- 77 , AN/VRC- 64 , and 2-84
AN/ GRC - 160 )
1520 Prepare/ operate tactical FM radios ( AN / PRC- 77 , AN/ VRC- 2-86
64 , and AN/GRC- 160 )
1521 Communicate , using proper radio/ telephone procedures 2-90

LAND NAVIGATION
1481 Identify terrain features ( natural and manmade ) on the 2-94
map
1483 Locate a point on a map 2-96
1486 Measure ground distance 2-99
1490 Orient a map to the ground by map - terrain association 2-102
1485 Navigate , using a map 2-103

OFFENSE
1402 Move as a member of a fire team 2-104
1403 Move under direct fire 2-106
1405 React to indirect fire 2-111
1406 React to flares 2-112
1407 Move over , through , or around obstacles 2-114
1245 Estimate range 2-116

DEFENSE
1366 Select temporary battlefield positions 2-117
1364 Construct individual defensive positions 2-119
1365 Clear fields of fire 2-122
1462 Engage hostile aircraft with individual weapon 2-125
1463
Recognize vulnerabilities of enemy armor to individual 2-129
(M16A1 and M203 ) and crew - served ( M60 ) weapons

M16A1 RIFLE
1181 Maintain an M16Al rifle , magazines , and ammunition 2-133
1182 Load and unload an M16Al rifle magazine 2-139
1183 Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear an M16A1 2-142
rifle
1184 Zero an M16Al rifle 2-144
1185 Engage targets with an M16Al rifle 2-146
1186 Prepare and use aiming and firing stakes for the M16A1 2-151
rifle
1187 Maintain AN/PVS - 2 night vision sight 2-153
1188 Conduct surveillance , using an AN/PVS- 2 2-155
1189 Mount / dismount AN/PVS - 2 on M16Al rifle 2-158
1190 Zero AN / PVS - 2 when mounted on M16Al rifle 2-160
1191 Engage a target with a rifle , using AN / PVS - 2 2-162

2-2
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
M203 GRENADE LAUNCHER
1211 Maintain an M203 grenade launcher and ammunition 2-163
1212 Load , unload , and clear an M203 grenade launcher 2-170
1213 Zero an M203 grenade launcher 2-172
1214 Engage targets with an M203 grenade launcher and apply 2-175
immediate action to reduce a stoppage .
1215 Prepare and use aiming and firing stakes for the M203 2-179
grenade launcher

LIGHT ANTITANK WEAPON ( LAW)

1241 Prepare an M72A2 LAW for firing ; restore M72A2 LAW to 2-181
carrying configuration
1242 Engage targets with an M72A2 LAW 2-184
1243 Apply immediate action to correct a malfunction on an 2-188
M72A2 LAW

M60 MACHINEGUN
1196 Maintain an M60 machinegun and ammunition 2-189
1192 Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear an M60 ma- 2-205
chinegun

HAND GRENADES
1301 Maintain hand grenades 2-208
1302 Engage enemy targets with hand grenades 2-210

SECURITY AND INTELLIGENCE

1097 Identify threat vehicles 2-218
1091 Use challenge and password 2-224
1095 Process known or suspected enemy personnel 2-226
1096 Collect / report information SALUTE
-

2-229
1098 Perform guard duty 2-231
1099 Practice noise , light , and litter discipline 2-233

INDIVIDUAL FITNESS
1061 Maintain individual physical fitness appropriate to 2-235
unit mission

051-201 ENGINEER TOOLS

1001 Use and maintain handtools 2-236
1002 Use and maintain pioneer electric tools 2-245
1003 Use and maintain pneumatic tools 2-248

051-193 DEMOLITIONS
1001 2-253
Identify and maintain demolition equipment
1002 Construct a nonelectric ( initiation) detonating assem- 2-263

bly
1003 Prime a demolition block nonelectrically 2-267
1004 Construct an electric ( initiation) detonating assembly 2-270
1005 Prime a demolition block electrically 2-275
1006 Connect electrical firing circuits 2-278

2-3
FM 5-12B1 /2
1007 Prime explosives with detonating cord 2-282
1008 Make detonating cord connections 2-287
1009 Construct a detonating cord firing system 2-289
1010 Install US firing devices on standard military explo- 2-291
sives
1011 Install dual firing systems 2-295
1012 Detonate explosives 2-298

051-192- MINE / COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS

1001 Install the M14 blast antipersonnel mine 2-302
1002 Install the M16Al bounding antipersonnel mine with and 2-305
without tripwires
1003 Install the M18A1 fragmentation antipersonnel mine 2-310
(Claymore) with and without tripwires
1005 Install the M26 antipersonnel mine with and without 2-318
tripwires
1006 Install the M15 heavy antitank mine with and without 2-324
antihandling devices
1007 Install the M19 plastic heavy antitank mine with and 2-333
without antihandling devices
1008 Install the M21 metallic antitank mine 2-337b
1009 Install the Ml one-gallon chemical mine 2-343
1010 Install the M23 chemical mine with and without anti- 2-346
handling device
1011 Disarm the M14 blast antipersonnel mine 2-347
1012 Disarm the M16Al bounding antipersonnel mine equipped 2-348
with and without tripwires
1013 Disarm the M18A1 fragmentation antipersonnel mine 2-351
(Claymore) equipped with and without tripwires
1015 Disarm the M26 antipersonnel mine equipped with and 2-353
without tripwires
1016 Disarm the M15 heavy antitank mine equipped with and 2-357
without antihandling devices
1017 Disarm the M19 plastic heavy antitank mine equipped 2-361
with and without antihandling devices
1018 Disarm the M21 metallic antitank mine 2-362
1019 Disarm the Ml one- gallon chemical mine 2-363
1020 Disarm the M23 chemical mine equipped with and without 2-365
antihandling devices
1021 Locate mines by visual means 2-366
1022 Locate mines by probing 2-369
1023 Locate mines , using the AN/ PSS - 11 mine detector set 2-371
1024 Locate mines , using the AN /PRS- 7 mine detector set 2-377

1025 Neutralize enemy mines 2-382

051-195 FIELD FORTIFICATIONS

1001 Install pickets and make barbed wire/ barbed tape ties 2-384
1002 Install concertina 2-391

2-4
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
051-191 CAMOUFLAGE OPERATIONS
1361 Camouflage/ conceal self and individual equipment 2-395
1362 Camouflage/ conceal equipment 2-399
1363 Camouflage/ conceal defensive positions 2-401

051-197 FIXED BRIDGING

1001 Identify trestle components 2-403
1002 Identify Bailey bridge components 2-408

091-198 RIVER - CROSSING OPERATIONS

1001 Operate a pneumatic assault boat 2-423
1002 Identify M4T6 float bridge components 2-430
1004 Identify LTR ( light tactical raft ) components 2-438
1005 Identify float bridge anchorage system components 2-443
1006 Identify components of bridge erection set , floating 2-451
bridge

051-200 RIGGING
1001 Tie knots and lashings 2-462
1002 Reeve simple tackle systems 2-468

0
Tasks for Skill Level Two Combat Engineer

051-191 LAND NAVIGATION

2482 Determine an azimuth 2-470
2487 Orient a map , using a compass 2-474
2488 Determine a location on the ground 2-475
2489 Determine the elevation of a point on the ground , us- 2-476
ing a map
2491 Locate an unknown point on a map or on the ground by 2-478
intersection
2492 Locate an unknown point on a map or on the ground by 2-481
resection
2484 Navigate , using a compass 2-484

OFFENSE
2425 Control fire team movement 2-486

DEFENSE
2398 Control rate and distribution of fire 2-488

INDIVIDUAL FITNESS
2062 Lead physical conditioning activities 2-491

ORGANIZATIONAL EFFECTIVENESS
2541 Inspect personnel / equipment 2-497
2542
Supervise maintenance on individual and TOE equipment 2-498
2544 Supervise subordinates 2-499
2548 2-500
Solve leadership problems
2571 Conduct a performance - oriented training session 2-503
2547 Prepare the rater's section of an enlisted evaluation 2-505
report

2-5
FM 5-12B1 / 2
051-201 ENGINEER TOOLS
2005 Operate a 3KW generator 2-511

051-193 DEMOLITIONS
2013 Load and transport explosives 2-524
2014 Determine safe distance when firing explosives 2-526
2015 Place wood- cutting charges 2-528
2016 Place steel cutting charges 2-530
2017 Place breaching charges 2-540
2018 Place cratering charges 2-545
2019 Investigate and clear nonelectric misfires 2-552
2020 Investigate and clear electric misfires 2-554
2021 Investigate and clear detonating cord misfires 2-556

051-192 MINE / COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS

2026 Direct a minefield marking party 2-558

051-196 RECONNAISSANCE
2001 Identify limiting slopes 2-563
2002 Identify limiting curves 2-566
2003 Determine stream width 2-569
2004 Determine stream velocity 2-571

051-198 RIVER - CROSSING OPERATIONS

2007 Classify vehicles , using expedient methods 2-573

051-199 CONSTRUCTION
2001 Identify parts of wooden forms for concrete construc- 2-575
tion
2002 Assemble corrugated metal pipe ( CMP ) for culverts 2-580

2-6
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Section II . TASK SUMMARIES

0 What the Task Summary Does dards you are expected to meet .
With all this information in them ,
What is the Task Summary all about ? these summaries serve not only as
Its starting point is the task list complete outlines for your training ;
you have just seen. Each summary but also as the basis for your SQT ,
takes up one of these tasks and that was described earlier . Certain
tells you exactly what you are ex- of the critical tasks listed in the
pected to do to satisfactorily com- task summaries will be used in mak-
plete the task . The summary gives ing up your SQT .
the separate steps that make up the
complete task ( at times , your super- Ο Individual Task Summaries
visor/ trainer may have to change the
order of these steps and tasks as The task summaries that follow are
given in the summary to meet the arranged in the same numerical order
particular needs of your unit ) . The as the tasks that appeared in the
task summary also gives information task listing above . All skill level
that you and your supervisor / trainer 1 summaries are printed on white
need to carry out your training , paper . All skill level 2 summaries
such asthe conditions under which
are printed on yellow paper .
you are to do the task and the stan-

2-7
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1001

TASK :

Apply the four life - saving measures ( clear the air passages , stop
the bleeding , treat for shock , protect the wound ) .
CONDITIONS :

1. Situation 1. Given a simulated , conscious casualty with non- ar-

terial bleeding from a leg or arm wound , field first - aid
a

dressing , and a poncho .

2. Situation 2. Given a training mannequin , adult male . Casu-

alty's wound has stopped bleeding after application of field
first - aid dressing and direct pressure ; casualty becomes uncon-
scious , stops breathing , and has no heartbeat .
STANDARDS :

1. Situation 1. Within 5 minutes :

a. Check the casualty's air passages

b. Stop the bleeding

c. Treat for shock

d. Protect the wound

2. Situation 2. Within 20 seconds :

a. Clear the casualty's air passages

b. Begin to administer mouth - to - mouth resuscitation and closed-

chest heart massage ; continue for 3 minutes

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Soldiers must be trained to treat all casualties , applying the four

life- saving measures .

1. Situation One .

a. Life - saving measure one Clear the air passages and restore
breathing , and heartbeat ( if necessary ) .

(1) Examine the casualty's mouth and remove any material

( fig . 1 ) present ( e.g. , false teeth , mucous , vomit ) .
(Artificial respiration or closed- chest heart massage
may be needed . )

2-8
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 1

(2) Turn the casualty's head to the side to allow for

drainage .

b. Life- saving measure two -

Stop the bleeding .

(1 ) Examine the casualty to determine the location and se-

riousness of all wounds . (The most serious wound

should be treated first . Generally , the most serious
wound is the wound which has the most bleeding . )
(2) Without touching the wound or attempting to clean the
wound , lift clothing away so that the wound is exposed .

(3) Apply a field first - aid dressing to the wound without

contaminating the dressing or further contaminating the
wound ( fig . 2 ) . Application of a first - aid dressing is
the preferred method for stopping the bleeding . De-

tailed instructions for applying the dressing are on

the packaging of the dressing .

2-9
FM 5-12B1 /2

PA
TR
IP
M
A
Figure 2 .

(4 ) Elevate the wound if possible . Use the casualty's hel-

met , pack , rock , or other suitable item . Elevation is
not used if there is a broken bone .

(5 ) Apply pressure with a hand over the bandage until the

bleeding stops . ( Pressure may be required for as long
as 5 to 10 minutes . ) If the pressure dressing , under
hard hand pressure , becomes blood - soaked , indicating
the bleeding is uncontrolled , tourniquet ( fig . 3) is
required to stop the bleeding :

2-10
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 3 .

(a) Place a loop of a sling or belt between the wound

and the heart as close to the wound as possible ,
but not directly over the wound . Except for ampu-
tations , place the tourniquet above the knee or
elbow , if the wound is in the lower leg or arm .

(b ) Tighten the tourniquet to stop the flow of blood .

( c) Bind the end of the sling or belt to prevent it
from coming loose .

(d) Mark a "T " on the casualty's forehead using mud ,

grease pencil or similar substance .
(e) Once applied , do not loosen or remove the tourni-
quet . This should be done only by trained medical
personnel .

(6) If an unconscious casualty must be left unattended , he

should be placed on his stomach with face to the side
( fig . 4 ) . This will prevent the patient from choking
to death on blood or other fluids .

2-11
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 4 .

C. Life- saving measure three -

Treat for shock .

(1 ) Loosen tight clothing at the neck , waist , and feet to

permit easier circulation of the blood ( do not remove
boots ) .

(2) Lay the casualty on his back ( if the wound permits )

with feet elevated 6 to 8 inches . This action also
increases circulation and reduces strain on the heart .

(3) Warm the casualty by placing him on (or wrapping him

in) a poncho . Do not overheat the casualty ( fig . 5 ) .

2-12
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 5 .

(4 ) Assure the casualty by being calm and firm while apply-

ing first aid . If he asks how badly he is wounded ,
tell him that you will get him to a doctor soon .
-

d. Life - saving measure four Protect the wound . The wound

must be protected from both contamination and further in-
jury . In this training case , the wound is sufficiently pro-
tected by application of a pressure dressing . If a bone had
been broken , a splint also would have been required . (See
FM 21-11 for application of splints . )
2. Situation Two . Situation two is a continuation of situation
one. The casualty becomes unconscious , stops breathing , and has
no heartbeat .

a. If a casualty's heart stops beating , you must give him

closed - chest heart massage as well as artificial respiration
immediately . The purpose of this is to artificially provide
circulation in order to keep blood flowing to the brain and
other organs until the heart begins to beat normally .

b. Place the casualty on a solid surface and perform the fol-

lowing actions :

2-13
FM 5-12B1 / 2

(1 ) Position yourself .
(a) Kneel at a right angle to the casualty's chest SO
that you can use your weight to apply pressure on
his breastbone .

(b) Place the heel of one hand on the LOWER half of

the breastbone ( fig . 6 ) . Spread and raise your
fingers so you can apply pressure without pressing
the ribs . Place your other hand on top of the
first . ( If the casualty is a child , omit placing
the second hand over the first . If the patient is
an infant , place only the finger tips of one hand
on the breastbone . )

Figure 6 .

(2 ) Administer closed- chest heart massage .

(a) With your hands in the correct position ((1) (b )

above ) and your arms straight , lean forward to
bring your shoulders directly above the casualty's
breastbone; then press straight downward . Apply
enough pressure to push the breastbone down 1 1/2
to 2. inches ( fig . 7 ) . Too much pressure may frac-
ture the casualty's ribs ; Therefore , do NOT push
the breastbone down more than 2 inches . ( If the
casualty is a child , press the breastbone lightly
with only one hand . If the casualty is an infant ,
press the breastbone lightly with your fingers . )

2-14
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Pressure with hands

BREASTBONE

1½ to 2 inches

HEART

SPINE

Figure 7 .

(b) Release the pressure immediately , lifting the

hands slightly .

(3 ) Administer mouth - to- mouth resuscitation and closed-

chest heart massage .

(a) Clear the air passages , tilt the casualty's head

back so that the neck is extended and his head is
in a chin- up position , and seal his nose ( fig . 6 ) .

(b ) Take a deep breath, open your mouth wide , and make

an airtight seal around the casualty's mouth .
Blow three to five breaths , watching for the casu-
alty's chest to rise . Then rapidly shift your
position and apply 15 closed- chest heart massages
followed by two breaths . Continue this 15 to 2
ratio until a second person arrives to assume one
of the duties .

2-15
FM 5-12B1 / 2

(c) After a few minutes , check for a pulse by placing

your fingers on the casualty's neck or by looking
for movement of the artery in his neck . If only a
weak , irregular pulse or no pulse can be detected ,
elevate the casualty's legs about 6 inches above
the level of his head to help the return of blood
to his heart . Continue the heart massage and the
mouth - to - mouth resuscitation until the casualty is
able to breathe and his pulse returns , until you
are relieved , or until you are positive life is
gone. It may be necessary for you to perform
these resuscitative measures a long time after you
feel the heavy effects of bodily discomfort and
fatigue . Stopping of closed- chest heart massage
or artificial respiration must be a decision made
by the most qualified person , and not because you
are tired .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers

911-441-0026 -F , Basic First Aid Measures : Restoring the Breathing
911-441-0027 -F , Basic First Aid Measures : Restoring the Heartbeat
911-441-0028 -F , Basic First Aid Measures : Stopping the Bleeding ,
Part 1
911-441-0029 -F , Basic First Aid Measures : Stopping the Bleeding ,
Part 2 and Controlling for Shock

2-16
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1005

TASK:

Administer artificial respiration .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditons , with a soldier who has stopped

breathing .

STANDARDS :

Within 20 seconds the casualty will be examined , his air passage

will be cleared , and artificial respiration will be started .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Examine the casualty's head and face to determine which method

of artificial respiration must be used .

0 If there is no sign of severe facial injury , the mouth - to-

mouth method should be used

Ο If the casualty has a severe head wound ( crushed face ) , the

chest pressure arm- lift method must be used

Specific Reference : Para 3-3c , FM 21-11

2. Adjust the position of the casualty to enlarge airway passage ,

(clear the airway ) by using one of the following methods :
Ο Head- tilt method . Immediately place the soldier on his back
with his neck extended and his head in a chin-up position
( fig . 1 ) . If a rolled blanket , poncho , or similar object is
available , place it under his shoulders to help maintain this
position .

0 Jaw-lift method . If the head tilt method is unsuccessful ,

adjust the jaw to a jutting out position ( fig . 2 and 3 ) .
This positioning may be accomplished by either the thumb jaw-
lift method or the two hand jaw-lift method .
-

The thumb jaw - lift is ordinarily the method of choice for

adjusting the jaws unless the nature of the injury pre-
vents its use .

Ο Place your thumb in the soldier's mouth , grasp the

lower jaw firmly , and lift it forward ( fig . 2 ) . Do not
attempt to hold or depress the tongue .

2-17
FM 5-12B1 / 2

The two-hand jaw lift is used if the soldier's jaws are so

tightly closed that the thumb cannot be inserted into the
mouth .

Using both hands , grasp the angles of the lower jaw

just below the ear lobes . Lift the jaw forcibly for-
ward ; then open the lips by pushing the lower lip to-
ward the chin with the thumbs ( fig . 3 ) .

Specific Reference : Para 3-1 and 3-2 , FM 21-11

AIRWAY OPENED
BY EXTENDING
NECK

Figure1

AIRWAY OPENED
FARTHER BY
ADJUSTING JAW

Figure2

THUMB JAW- LIFT

2-18
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

3
Figure

TWO HAND JAW- LIFT

3. Mouth- to - mouth resuscitation method . In this method of artifi-

cial respiration , you inflate the soldier's lungs with air from
your lungs . This can be accomplished by blowing air into his
mouth . The mouth- to - mouth resuscitation method is performed as
follows :

0 With the wounded soldier lying on his back , position yourself

at the side of his head . Place one hand behind the neck to
maintain the head in a face-up position with the head tilted
back as far as possible .

0
Pinch the nostrils together with the thumb and index finger
of your other hand and let this same hand exert pressure on
the forehead to maintain the backward head tilt ( fig.4 ) .
(The nose can also be sealed by pressing your cheek firmly
against it ) .

0 Take a deep breath and place your mouth ( in an airtight seal )

around the soldier's mouth . Blow into the mouth forcefully
to cause the soldier's chest to rise . If the chest rises ,
this indicates that sufficient air is getting into the sol-
dier's lungs . If the chest does not rise , take the following
action :

2-19
FM 5-12B1 / 2

MOUTH-TO- MOUTH RESUSCITATION NOSE SEALED WITH THUMB AND FINGER

OBSERVE RISE AND FALL

OF SOLDIER'S CHEST

HAND BEHIND HEAD

Immediately adjust the jaw and blow harder into the sol-
dier's mouth , making sure that air is not leaking from
around your mouth or out of the soldier's pinched nose .
-

If the chest still does not rise , move the soldier's head
to one side and clear his airway with your fingers . To do
this , open his mouth and run your fingers down the inside
of the lower cheeks , over the base of the tongue , and into
the throat . Move your fingers across the back of the
throat with a sweeping motion to remove any vomit , mucus ,
or foreign bodies .

If the airway is still not clear , roll the soldier onto

his side ; then using the heel of your hand , deliver sharp
blows between the soldier's shoulder blades to dislodge
the foreign body from the airway . Immediatlely inflate the
lungs , and check results .

-
When the soldier's chest rises , remove your mouth from the
soldier's and listen for the return of air from his lungs
( exhalation) . If the exhalation is noisy , elevate his jaw
more .

After each exhalation of air from the soldier's lungs , pinch

his nose again and blow another deep breath into his airway .
Adequate ventilation should be insured on every breath by
seeing the soldier's chest rise and fall and by hearing and
feeling the air escape during exhalation .
-

The first four breaths should be full quick breaths , without

allowing time for full lung deflation between breaths .
Therefore , repeat the mouth- to - mouth resuscitation procedure
at a rate of approximately once every 5 seconds .

2-20
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Continue mouth - to - mouth resuscitation until the soldier re-

gains consciousness , until you are relieved by a medically

trained person , or for at least 45 minutes in the absence of
all life signs . As the soldier starts to breath , adjust the
timing of your efforts to assist him .
-

After a period of resuscitation , the soldier's abdomen may

bulge . This indicates that some of the air is going into
his stomach . Since inflation of the stomach makes it more
difficult to inflate lungs , apply gentle pressure to the
abdomen with your hand at frequent intervals between in-
flations .
-

If your breathing has been very deep and rapid for too
long a period , you may become faint , tingle , or even lose
consciousness if you persist . However , if you administer
only four full quick breaths then adjust your breathing to
the rate of approximately once every 5 seconds with only
moderate increase in normal volume , you will be able to
continue to give artificial respiration for a long period
without experiencing temporary ill effects .
Specific Reference : Para 3-4 , FM 21-11

4. Chest pressure - arm lift method . This method is used when the
mouth- to-mouth method cannot be used because of facial injury .
The chest pressure - arm lift method is performed as follows :
Clear the airway .
Ο Position the soldier on his back .

Q Stand at his head and face his feet . Kneel on one knee and
place your other foot at the other side of his head and
against his shoulder to steady it . If you become uncomfort-
able after a period of time , quickly switch to the other
knee .

Ο
Grasp the soldier's hands , holding them over his lower ris ,
rock forward and exert steady , uniformessure almost di-
rectly downward until you meet firm resista This forces
air out of the lungs .

Ο
Lift his arms vertically upward , stretching them backward as

far as possible . The process of lifting and stretching the

arms increases the size of the chest and forces air out of
the lungs .

0 Position the soldier's head with his fate up and place a

rolled blanket or some other , similar coiect under his
shoulders so that his head will drop back in a chin-up posi-
tion .

2-21
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Replace his hands on his chest and repeat the cycle : press ,
lift , stretch , replace . Give 10 to 12 cycles per minute at a
steady uniform rate . Give counts of equal length to the
first three steps . The fourth or " replace" step should be
performed as quickly as possible .
0 As the soldier attempts to breathe , adjust the timing of your
efforts to assist him . Continue artificial respiration until
the soldier regains consciousness , until you are relieved by
medical personnel , or for at least 45 minutes in the absence
of all life signs .

NOTE : Mouth - to - nose method . This method should be used if you can-
not perform mouth - to - mouth breathing because the soldier has a se-
vere jaw fracture or mouth wound or his jaws are tightly closed by
spasms . The mouth- to - nose method is performed in the same way as
the mouth- to- mouth method except that you blow in the nose and pinch
the lips closed with one hand .

Specific Reference : Para 3-5 and 3-6 , FM 21-11

CHEST PRESSURE
ARM LIFT
METHOD
OF
ARTIFICIAL
RESPIRATION

a HAND ON LOWER RIBS C ARMS LIFTED UPWARD

(b) STEADY PRESSURE DOWNWARD d) ARMS BACKWARD AS FAR AS POSSIBLE

REFERENCE :

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers , chap 3

TEC:
911-441-0026-F, Basic First Aid Measures : Restoring the Breathing

2-22
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1006

TASK:

Immobilize fractures .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with splint materials , cravats ,

pistol belt , and soldiers who have sustained fractures of the arms ,
legs , jaw , collar bone , shoulder , spine and neck .
STANDARDS :

Within 5 minutes , the casualty will be examined , the extent of in-

juries will be determined , and the immobilization procedures will be
started . When immobilized , the fractured bone ( s ) will not move .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Examine casualty for signs and symptoms of a fracture .

Ο
A fracture is easily recognized when the bone is protruding
through the skin , the part is in an unnatural position , or
the chest wall is caved in . Other indications of a fracture
are tenderness or pain when slight pressure is applied to the
injured part , and swelling as well as discoloration of the
skin at the site of the injury . Deep , sharp pain when the
the soldier attempts to move the part is also a sign of a
fracture . Do not encourage the soldier to move a part in
order to identify a fracture , since movement of the part
could cause further damage to surrounding tissues and promote
shock . If you are not sure whether or not a bone is frac-
tured , treat the injury as a fracture .

CLOSED FRACTURE
OPEN FRACTURE

BONE NOT PROTRUDING BONE PROTRUDING

(USUALLY NO BLEEDING)
( USUALLY BLEEDING)

2-23
FM 5-12B1 /2

2. Perform splinting .
Ο
If the fracture is an open one , first stop the bleeding ; then
apply a dressing and bandage as you would for any other wound
If a bone is in an unnatural position or a joint is bent , do
not straighten it . If it is not bent , do not bend it . Use
splint materials such as boards , poles , sticks , rifles ,
rolled newspaper , cardboard or even an uninjured extremity .
Place the splint along the injured extremity insuring that
there is adequate padding between the splint and the limb .
Bind the splint with bandages at several points above and
below the fracture .

3. Immobilize the injured part .

Ο Upper extremities . Figures 1 through 6 illustrate the appli-

cation of splints , slings and cravats for immobilizing and
supporting fractures of the upper extremities . Although pad-
ding is not visible in some of the figures , it is applied
along the injured part for the length of the splint .

PADDING b

SITE
OF FRACTURE

CRAVATS
ABOVE
FRACTURE

CRAVATS
BELOW
FRACTURE

KNOTS
TIED AGAINST CRAVATS
BOARD TO IMMOBILIZE
BOARD ARM

SPLINTS

Figure 1 Board splints applied to fractured arm or elbow when elbow is not bent.

2-24
 FM 5-12B1 /2

BELT , PISTOL BELT ,

AND BANDOLEER

ABOVE
FRACTURE

SITE
OF
FRACTURE

BELOW
FRACTURE

STRIPS FROM
b
CLOTHING OR
BLANKET

Figure 2 Chest wall used as splint for upper arm fracture when no splint is available.

CRAVAT

SLING

SECURED
WITH
SAFETY PIN

Figure
3
Chest wall, sling, and cravat used to immobilize a fractured elbow when elbow is bent.

2-25
FM 5-12B1 /2

CRAVAT

CRAVATS
ABOVE AND BELOW
FRACTURE WITH KNOTS
TIED AGAINST BOARD
PADDING

CRAVAT SLING
BOARD SITE
TO SECURE
SPLINT OF
HAND AND
FRACTURE WRIST

Figure 4 Board splint applied to fractured forearm.

CRAVATS
b
PLACED ABOVE
AND BELOW
FRACTURE
WITH KNOTS
TIED AGAINST
CRAVAT
BOARD

PADDING
SITE OF PADDING
CRAVAT
BOARD TO SECURE FRACTURE IN PALM SLING
SPLINT SPLINT OF HAND

Figure5
Board splint applied to fractured wrist and hand.

2-26
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

OR

STICKS SITE OF
ROLLED IN FRACTURE
MATERIAL
FROM CLOTHING
OR BLANKET
S
H

C
O

TAIL OF
SHIRT

STRIP FROM
CLOTHING
OR BLANKET

Figure6

Fractured forearm or wrist splinted with sticks and

supported with tail of shirt and strips of material.

2-27
FM 5-12B1/ 2

0 Lower extremities . Figures 7 through 11 illustrate the ap-

plication of splints for immobilizing fractures of the lower
extremities . Although the padding is not visible in some of
the figures , it is applied along the injured part for the
length of the splint .

PISTOL BELT
BELT
BANDOLEER
CRAVAT

Figure7 Uninjured leg used as splint for fractured one.

FRACTURED BOARD
KNEE SPLINT

PADDING

CRAVAT TO SECURE ANKLE

(CUPPED UNDER HEEL , CRAVATS PLACED
CROSSED ON TOP OF BOOT , ABOVE AND BELOW
CROSSED ON SOLE OF BOOT , FRACTURE WITH KNOTS
TIED ON TOP OF BOOT) TIED AGAINST BOARD

Figure8 Board splint applied to fractured or dislocated knee.

2-28
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

CRAVAT TO SECURE ANKLE

SITE OF FRACTURE
(CUPPED UNDER HEEL,
CROSSED ON TOP OF BOOT,
CROSSED ON SOLE OF BOOT,
TIED ON TOP OF BOOT).

CRAVAT
TO SECURE
SPLINTS
PADDING CRAVATS PLACED
ABOVE AND BELOW
BOARD FRACTURE WITH KNOTS
SPLINTS TIED AGAINST BOARD

CRAVAT b
TO SECURE
FRACTURED
LEG TO OTHER ONE

Figure9 Board splints applied to fractured lower leg or ankle.

SITE OF
PADDING FRACTURE

BOARD SPLINT

CRAVAT TO
CRAVAT TO SECURE ANKLE
SECURE SPLINT
(PLACED UNDER SPLINTS ,
CROSSED ON TOP OF BOOT,
TIED ON TOP OF BOOT )
b
CRAVATS PLACED
ABOVE AND BELOW
FRACTURE WITH KNOTS
TIED AGAINST BOARD

Figure10 Board splints applied to fractured hip or thigh.

2-29
FM 5-12B1 /2

BLANKET AND POLES

SPLINT APPLIED FOR

FRACTURED THIGH OR
HIP
BLANKET AND POLES

SPLINT APPLIED FOR

b) FRACTURED LOWER LEG ,
KNEE , OR ANKLE
Figure11
Application of splints to lower extremity fractures, using poles rolled in a blanket.

0 Jaw , collarbone , and shoulder .

-

Apply a cravat to immobilize a fractured jaw as illus-

trated in figure 12. Direct all bandaging support to the
top of the soldier's head , and not to the back of the
neck .

2-30
 FM 5-12B1 /2

C
b

Figure12 Applying cravat bandage to jaw.

Apply two belts and two cravats to immobilize a fractured

collarbone as illustrated in figure 13 .

PADDING

BELTS

CRAVAT SLING

SECURED
WITH SAFETY
PIN

Figure13

2-31
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Aply a sling and a cravat to immobilize a fractured or

dislocated shoulder , using the technique illustrated in

figure 14 .

SITE OF
d
FRACTURE

CRAVAT

SECURED
WITH
SAFETY PIN SLING

Figure14

2-32
 FM 5-12B1 /2

0
Spinal Column .
-

It is often impossible to be sure whether or not a soldier

has a fractured spinal column . Be suspicious of any back
injury , especially if the soldier has fallen , or his back
has been sharply struck or bent . If a soldier has re-
ceived such an injury and he lacks feeling in his legs or
lacks the ability to move them , you can be reasonably sure
that he has a severe back injury which should be treated
as a fracture . You must remember that , if there is a
fracture , bending the spinal column can cause the sharp
bone fragments to bruise or cut the spinal cord and result
in permanent paralysis . The spinal column must maintain a
swayback position to remove pressure from the spinal cord .
-

Steps to Follow If the Soldier Is Not To Be Transported

Until Medical Personnel Arrive .

(1) If the soldier is conscious , caution him not to move .

( 2) Leave him in the position in which he is found . Do not
move any body part .

(3 ) If he is lying with his face up , slip a blanket or ma-

terial of similar size under the arch of his back to
support the spinal column in a swayback position ( fig .
15) . If he is lying with his face down , do not put
anything under any part of his body .

FRACTURE

a IN THIS POSITION , BONE FRAGMENTS

MAY BRUISE OR CUT THE SPINAL CORD .
FRACTURE

IN THIS POSITION , BONE FRAGMENTS

b
ARE IN PROPER PLACE AND WILL NOT
BRUISE OR CUT THE SPINAL CORD .

Fracture of spinal column.

Figure15

2-33
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Steps To Follow If the Soldier Must Be Transported to Safe

Location Before Medical Personnel Arrive .

(1) Face-up position . If the soldier is lying with his

face up, transportation must be by litter or a firm
substitute such as a wide board or a flat door longer
than the soldier is tall . Tie his wrists together
loosely over his waistline with a cravat or strip of
cloth . Lay a folded blanket across the litter where
the arch of his back is to be placed . Using a four-man
team ( fig . 16 ) , place the soldier on the litter without
bending his spinal column .
3

4
WRISTS TIED LOOSELY

Placing a soldier with a fractured back onto a litter.

Figure16

2-34
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Neck

A fractured neck is extremely dangerous . Bone fragments

may bruise or cut the spinal cord just as in the case of a
fractured back .

Steps To Follow If the Soldier Is Not To Be Transported

Until Medical Personnel Arrive .

(1 ) If the soldier is conscious , caution him not to move.

Moving may cause death .

(2 ) Leave the soldier in the position in which he is found .

If the neck is in an abnormal position , immobilize it
in this position .

(3 ) If he is lying with his face up , keep his head still ,

raise his shoulders slightly , and slip a roll of cloth
which has the bulk of a bath towel under his neck ( fig .
17a) . The roll should be thick enough to arch the neck
only slightly , leaving the back of his head on the
ground . Do not bend the neck or head forward . Do not
raise or twist the head .

(4) Immobilize the soldier's head ( fig . 17b ) . This may be

accomplished by padding heavy objects such as rocks or
his boots and placing them on each side of his head .
If it is necessary to use his boots , they should first
be filled with stones , gravel , sand or dirt , and tied
tightly at the top .

ROLL OF
CLOTH
Immobilization of a fractured neck.

Figure 17 a

2-35
FM 5-12B1 /2

BOOTS

Figure 17 b

REFERENCE :

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers , para 8-1 thru 8-11

TEC :

911-441-0030 -F , Fractures and Splinting

2-36
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1007

TASK ;

Perform first aid for special wounds .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with individual first aid packet

and soldiers who have sustained wounds of the chest , abdomen , head ,
face , and neck .

STANDARDS :

Within 5 minutes , the casualty will be examined , the extent of in-

juries will be determined , and the first aid procedures will be
started . The procedures will be completed as prescribed in the per-
formance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. If there are chest wounds , examine the casualty carefully to

insure there is no second exit . Remove the casualty's field
first aid packet and remove the dressing . Then have the casu-
alty forcibly exhale ( if conscious ) and hold his breath . Apply a
piece of plastic or foil , such as the dressing wrapper or the
foil - lined lined envelope directly over the wound . Apply the
first aid dressing over the plastic . Then have the casualty or
an assistant apply pressure and secure the bandage around the
body as shown and obtain medical help .

FIELD FIRST AID

DRESSING

COVER DRESSING
COMPLETELY WITH
BANDAGING MATERIAL OR
WRAPPER
EXERT PRESSURE WITH
FOLDED PONCHO AND SECURE
PRESS DRESSING FIRMLY THE OPEN HAND .
IT WITH BELTS.
OVER THE WRAPPER TO
STOP FLOW OF AIR .

2-37
FM 5-12B1 /2

2. Cover an abdominal wound with a sterile dressing and bandage as

shown . Do not touch or attempt to push protruding organs ( such
as intestines ) back into the wound unless it is absolutely nec-
essary to cover the wound . Do not allow the casualty to take
anything by mouth . You may moisten the casualty's lips to les-
sen his thirst . Leave the casualty on his back but turn his
head to one side , since he will likely need to vomit . Watch him
closely to prevent him from choking . Obtain medical help .

DO NOT TRY TO REPLACE COVER WOUND AND ORGANS BANDAGE SECURELY.

PROTRUDING ORGANS WITH DRESSING .

3. A head injury with scalp wound is easily recognized . Injury of

the head without a scalp wound is more difficult to recognize .
--

Suspect a head injury and act accordingly if the soldier

a. Is or has recently been unconscious

b. Has blood or other fluid escaping from his nose or ears

c. Has a slow pulse--below 60 beats a minute

d. Has a headache

e. Is nauseated or vomiting

f. Has had a convulsion

g. Is breathing very slowly

Leave any protruding brain tissue as it is , and apply a sterile

dressing over this tissue . Do not remove or disturb any foreign
matter which may be in the wound . The soldier should be lying SO
that his head is in a position higher than his body .

2-38
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

4. Wounds of the face and neck bleed profusely . First , stop any
bleeding which may cause obstruction of the soldier's upper air-
way. Then clear his airway . There may be pieces of broken
teeth or bone and loose - bits of flesh , as well as dentures , in
his mouth . If the soldier is conscious and desires to sit up,
have him lean forward with his head down , to permit free drain-
age from his mouth . Otherwise , place him in the shock position
for an unconscious person , even though he may be conscious , to
permit drainage from the mouth .
REFERENCE :

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers , para 7-3 thru 7-11

2-39
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1002

TASK:

Apply first aid measures for burns .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in a field location , given a dummy with two burns

(one severe burn and one minor burn) , sodium chloride - sodium bicar-
bonate mixture ( salt packet ) , two sterile dressings , and a canteen
of cold water . The casualty is conscious , is not vomiting , and has
no other wounds . His clothing is not covering the minor burn , but
it is stuck to the severe burn .

STANDARDS :

Within 5 minutes :

1. Determine which burn is severe and which is minor

2. Place a sterile dressing over each burn

3. Administer sodium chloride -

sodium bicarbonate mixture

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Severe burns . A burn is severe when the skin is charred or when

it is blistered over a large area .

a. Protect the burn against further contamination as follows to

lessen the possibility of infection :

(1 ) If clothing covers the burn , cut and lift it gently

away without touching the burn .

(a) Do not try to remove pieces of cloth which have

stuck to the burn or to clean the burn in any way .

(b) Do not pull clothes over the burned area .

(c) Do not break blisters .

(d) Do not put ointment or any medication whatsoever

on the burn .

(2) Place a sterile dressing over the burned area and se-
cure it in place with bandages .

2. Preventing shock : Prevent shock by applying the measures dis-

2-40
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

cussed in the task: Apply the four life - saving measures , Task
No. 1001 .

a. If the casualty is conscious , is not vomiting , and has no

abdominal or neck wound , give him the sodium chloride -

so-

dium bicarbonate mixture included in the first aid kit .

Dissolve one envelope ( 4.5 grams ) of the mixture in one can-
teenful or quart of cool or cold water . Never use warm
water , as this often causes vomiting .

b. Give the solution to the casualty slowly , having him consume

the entire amount over a l -hour period . Should the casualty
become nauseated , stop giving him the solution .

3. Minor burns : Minor burns are of two types :

a. Small burns which include blistering or charring . Since the

skin is most like to break when it is blistered or
charred , cover it with a sterile compress to protect it from
contamination and possible infection . Secure it in place
with bandages .

b. Burns with no blistering or charring . It is not necessary

to cover this type burn with a sterile dressing .
REFERENCES :

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers

TC 21-11 , Pocket Medic--Emergency Aid Guide for Soldiers
TEC :

911-441-0033 -F , Burns and Eye Injuries

2-41
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1003

TASK: Apply preventive measures to reduce climatic injuries .

CONDITIONS :

In the field under extremely adverse climatic conditions , with nor-

mal clothing and equipment for the mission and climate .
STANDARDS :

Recognize the symptoms of climatic injuries ; apply first aid for

them if they develop ; and apply preventive measures to minimize them
according to the procedures outlined in the performance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Recognize early symptoms of injuries caused by extreme weather

conditions .

Ο Cold and wet weather injuries .

-

Trench foot is an injury which results from fairly long

exposure of the feet to wet conditions , generally at tem-
peratures from approximately freezing to 50 ° F . If the
feet are also inactive , the possibility of developing
trench foot is even greater . Trench foot can be very se-
rious ; it can lead to loss of toes or parts of the feet .
Usually a symptom of trench foot is numbness . There may
be tingling or aching sensation or cramping pain . Ifex-
posure of the feet has been prolonged and severe , the feet
may swell so tightly that pressure closes the blood ves-
sels and cuts off the circulation .

Immersion foot is similar to trench foot except in the

manner in It results from immersion
which it is caused .
of the feet in water or constant wetness of the feet for a
prolonged period , usually in excess of 12 hours . Immer-
sion foot will develop more rapidly if the water is below
50° F . It can occur , however , when the feet are exposed
even to warm water for a period exceeding 24 hours . In
immersion foot , the soles of the feet become wrinkled and
white ; standing or walking becomes extremely painful .
Other portions of the body may be similarly affected .
-

Frostbite is the injury of tissue from exposure to cold .

The body parts most easily frostbitten are the cheeks ,
nose , ears , chin , forehead , wrists , hands , and feet .
Frostbite may involve only the skin , or it may extend to a
depth below the skin . Deep frostbite , which is much more

2-42
 FM 5-12B1 /2

serious , requires different first aid to avoid or minimize

the loss of the parts of the fingers , toes , hands , or
feet . Frostbitten skin is whitish , stiff , and numb rather
than painful . For this reason , soldiers must watch one
another's face and hands for signs of frostbite . If the
part has been numb for only a short time , the frostbite
probably involves only the skin ; otherwise assume it to be
deep .

Snow blindness is the effect which glare from an icefield

or snowfield has on the eyes . This condition can occur
even in cloudy weather . In fact , it is more likely to
occur in hazy , cloudy weather than when the sun is shin-
ing .

Ο Extreme heat injuries .

-

Heat exhaustion . This condition is caused by excessive

loss of water and salt from the body . The symptoms of
heat exhaustion are headache , excessive sweating , weak-
ness , dizziness , and muscle cramps . Also , the skin is
pale , cool , moist , and clammy . Heat exhaustion may come
on gradually or suddenly .

Heatstroke . Prolonged exposure to high temperature may

cause heatstroke , which is sometimes referred to as " sun-
stroke . " The first sign of heatstroke may be stoppage of
sweating , which causes the skin to feel hot and dry . Col-
lapse and unconsciousness may come suddenly or may be pre-
ceded by headache , dizziness , fast pulse , nausea , vomit-
ing , and mental confusion .
-

Heat Cramps . These are painful spasms of the muscles ,

usually those of the legs , arms , and abdomen . They may be
either mild or severe . Cramps are due indirectly to loss
of salt from the body .
-

Sunburn . Caused by prolonged exposure to invisible rays

of the sun , sunburn is a painful burn , causing reddening
and/ or blistering of the skin .

2. Apply first aid measures to injuries caused by extreme condi-

tions .

0 Cold and wet weather injuries .

-

If trench foot or immersion foot develops , dry your feet

thoroughly and get to a medical facility as soon as possi-
ble . Avoid walking if possible .

2-43
FM 5-12B1 /2

If frostbite occurs , the following measures must be taken .

First aid measures for frostbite involving only the

skin.

WARNING . DO NOT WARM OR REWARM FROSTBITTEN PARTS BY

SUCH MEASURES AS MASSAGE , EXPOSURE TO OPEN FIRE ,
SOAKING IN COLD WATER , OR RUBBING WITH SNOW .

Parts of the face . Cover the frostbitten part with

your warm hands until pain returns .

Hands . Place each bare hand next to the skin in the

opposite armpit .

Feet . In the most sheltered area available , place

the bare feet under the clothing and against the
abdomen of another soldier .

0
Measures to take when deep frostbite occurs .

Get to a medical treatment facility by the quickest

means possible . If transportation is available ,
avoid walking .
Protect the frostbitten part from additional injury ,
but do NOT attempt to treat it or thaw it in any
way . Thawing in the field increases the possibili-
ties of infection , further damage , and gangrene .
There is less danger in walking on your feet while
they are frozen than after they have been thawed .
Thawing may occur spontaneously during transporta-
tion to the medical facility ; but this cannot be
avoided , as the body , in general , must be kept warm .
-

If snow blindness develops , the casualty's eyes should be

covered with a dark cloth to shut out all light . Hemust
be taken to a medical facility at once .

Ο Injuries caused by extreme heat .

Heat exhaustion .

0 Lay the casualty in a cool shaded area and loosen his

clothing .

Ο If the casualty is conscious , give him cool salt water

to drink . Prepare the salt water by dissolving two
crushed salt tablets ( one- fourth teaspoonful of table
salt ) in a canteen ( quart ) of cool water . The casualty
should drink three to five canteenfuls during period of
12 hours .

2-44
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Heat stroke .

Ο Immediately immerse the casualty in the coldest water

available . If ice is available , add it to the water .

Ο
If a cold water bath is not possible , get the casualty
into the shade , remove his clothing , and keep his en-
tire body wet by pouring water over him . Cool him fur-
ther by continuously fanning his wet body .
Ο
Transport him to the nearest medical treatment facility
at once and continue to cool his body on the way .

Ο When the casualty becomes conscious , give him cool salt

water to drink .

Heat cramps . Give a casualty with heat cramps large

amounts of salt water to drink . If cramps are severe , it
may be necessary to take him to a medical facility for
further treatment .

Sunburn . May be treated as a minor burn by application of

the lubricant from the burn kit .

3. Apply preventive measures to minimize injuries caused by extreme

weather conditions .

0 Keep feet as dry and clean as possible under existing condi-

tions .

Ο Wear proper clothing .

Ο Increase water and salt consumption in extreme heat .

0 Avoid prolonged exposure to the sun without protection .

Ο Wear sunglasses or goggles in areas of unbroken ice or snow .

0 Do not work alone in extremely cold weather .

Do not use alcohol to combat cold . It is not a stimulant .

Keep in good physical condition .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-10 , Field Hygiene and Sanitation

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers
TEC :
911-441-0034 , Snake Bites and Hot Weather Hazards

2-45
FM 5-12B1 / 2

911-441-0035 , Cold Weather Hazards

Correspondence Subcourses :
IN 9 , Medical Subjects
MS 262 , Medical Support of Combat Operations

2-46
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1063

TASK:

Employ field hygiene and sanitation measures .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight or darkness , in a field environment given minimum fa-

cilities .

STANDARDS :

Personal hygiene and sanitation procedures will be followed to avoid

becoming a casualty from disease .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Maintain personal hygiene .

0 Body cleanliness . Wash frequently from head to foot with

soap and water , paying particular attention to the body
creases ( arm pits , and crotch ) , the face , ears , hands , and
feet . At least twice a week the hair and scalp should be
shampooed with soap and water . The hands will be washed
after any dirty work , after each visit to the latrine , and
before touching food . The soldier will be clean shaven
daily .

NOTE : Combs , brushes , and razors should NOT be shared with other
persons .

0 Mouth and teeth . Cleanse the mouth and teeth thoroughly

after each meal with a toothbrush and remove food debris
which has accumulated between the teeth with dental floss ,
stimudents , or tooth pick .

0
Feet . Wash and thoroughly dry feet daily , insure that shoes
are properly fitted , and clean , dry socks are worn .

Specific References : Para 30,31 , and 32 , chap 3 , FM 21-10 ; and TEC

929-441-0042 -F

2. Procure and treat water .

Select water source .

Select a source of water (surface water , ground water ,

rain water) and collect the water .

2-47
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Treat water .

With iodine tablets . Fill the canteen with the cleanest ,

clearest water available , and add one iodine tablet to a
one-quart canteen of clear water ( add two tablets if the
water is cloudy ) . Place the cap on the canteen loosely ;
wait 5 minutes ; then shake the canteen well , allowing
leakage to rinse the threads around the neck of the can-
teen . Tighten the cap and wait an additional 20 minutes
before using the water for any purpose .
-

With calcium hypochlorite . Fill the canteen with water ,

leaving an airspace of an inch or more below the neck of
the canteen . Fill a canteen cup half full of water and
add the calcium hypochlorite from one ampule , stirring
until the powder is dissolved . Fill the cap of a canteen
half full of the solut in the cup and add it to the
canteen , then place ca Οι. Canteen and shake it tho-
roughly . Tighten he ap on the canteen and wait 30 min-
utes before using water or any purpose .

The soldier will keer the water at a rolling

-

Boiling .
boil for at least 15 seconds t nake it safe for drinking .

Specific References : ra 52 and 54 , chap 4, FM 21-10 ; TEC

929-441-0043 - F

3. Clean mess kit .

Ο Clean the mess kit before and after each use by scraping all
food particles from it into a garbage can or pit . Wash it in
hot soapy water , rinse the kit in clear boiling water by dip-
ping it up and down several times and disinfect the mess kit
by dipping it in another container of clear boiling water for
several seconds . Shake the kit to remove excess water and
allow it to dry in the air . Perform these procedures at each
washing .

Specific References : Para 66 , sec 4 , FM 21-10

4. Dispose of waste .

Ο Use unit latrine facilities to dispose of human waste . In

the absence of latrines use an intrenching tool or squad hand
tools to dig a cat hole to dispose of waste . Dig the hole
approximately 1 foot deep , and completely cover and pack it
after use .

Specific References : Para 74 , chap 6 , FM 21-10

2-48
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

5. Protect against disease - carrying insects .

Ο Insure that the body and clothing are free of parasites by

wearing the proper protective clothing , and using insect
bars , insecticides and repellents as needed .

Specific References : Para 37-39 and 41 , chap 3 , FM 21-10

REFERENCES :

FM 21-10 , Field Hygiene and Sanitation

TEC :

929-441-0042 -F , Personal Hygiene : Care of the Feet

929-441-0043 -F , Environmental Hazards , Part 1 : Treatment of Drink-
ing Water

2-49
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1031

TASK :

Maintain protective mask and accessories .

CONDITIONS :

Given an ABC -M17Al protective mask with accessories and items au-
thorized to be stored in the carrier ( per unit SOP ) , a pail of soapy
water , a pail of clear water , several rags , a small brush and TM
3-4240-258-14 .

STANDARDS :

Within 15 minutes .

1. Make a visual inspection of mask , accessories , and authorized

items and note all discrepancies , correcting those not requiring
higher- echelon support .

2. Using procedures outlined in TM 3-4240-258-14 , mask and carrier

will be free of dirt , sand , and grit .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Inspecting Mask and Carrier .

a. Remove the mask from the carrier and check to insure that
only authorized items are stored in the carrier .

b. Check the carrier for superficial dirt , mildew , rips , torn

straps , and missing hardware .

c. Check the facepiece for holes , tears , splits , and signs of

deterioration of rubber parts .

d. Check the filter elements to make sure that they are ser-
viceable and properly installed .

e. Check the head harness for dirt and mildew ; worn , frayed , or
broken straps ; and missing clinch tips .

f. Notify your supervisor of any damage that calls for repair

or replacement of parts .

2. Cleaning the Mask (Without Removing Filter Elements ) .

a. Do not remove the hood if it is assembled to the mask .

2-50
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

b. Remove the voicemitter -

outlet cover , inlet valve caps , and

eye- lens outserts .

c. Clean the mask inside and out with a cloth dipped in warm ,
soapy water (wrung almost dry ) or a brush with soft
bristles , being careful not to wet the filter elements .

d. Rinse with a cloth dipped in warm , clear water ( wrung almost

dry) .

e. Wipe the facepiece with a clean , lint - free cloth or air- dry .

f. If the nosecup valve disks become detached while the mask is

being cleaned , reinstall them and reassemble the mask .

3. Cleaning the Carrier .

a. Empty the carrier pockets .

b. Brush the carrier both inside and outside to remove sand or

grit .

C. If the carrier becomes soiled , clean it with a brush dipped

in clear , cold water .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-40 , Chemical , Biological , Radiological , and Nuclear Defense

FM 21-41 , Soldier's Handbook for Defense Against Chemical and Bio-
logical Operations and Nuclear Warfare
TM 3-4240-258-14 , Operator's , Organizational , Direct Support , and
General Support Maintenance Manual : Mask Chemical - Biological , Field ,
M17Al and Accessories
TEC :

931-061-0065 -A , NBC : Maintenance of the M17 Series Mask

2-51
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1032

TASK:

Put on a protective mask .

CONDITIONS :

In a field location , wearing a protective mask carrier containing a

prefitted M17 protective mask , exposed to CS gas without warning .

STANDARDS :

Put on the protective mask within 9 seconds of the chemical alarm

( if present , the protective hood must be secured under the arms
within an additional 6 seconds ) and remain in the contaminated area
for at least 2 minutes without making further adjustments to the
mask .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Upon becoming aware of a chemical -biological attack , stop

breathing , remove headgear , and open the carrier with the left
hand ( fig . 1) . ( Headgear may be placed between the legs or on
the muzzle of a rifle held between the legs . This is important
in a contaminated area and should be practiced in training . If
dropped , however , continue to mask and decontaminate the equip-
ment afterward . )

"GAS"

Figure 1 .
STOP BREATHING

1 Remove headgear with right hand and

open carrier with left hand. Place
headgear as directed.

2-52
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Hold the carrier open with one hand and with the other grasp the
mask just below the eyepieces and remove the mask ( fig . 2) .

Figure 2 .
2 Hold carrier open with left hand; grasp
facepiece just below eyepieces and
remove mask with right hand.

3. Grasp the facepiece with both hands , sliding the thumbs up in-
side, so that the facepiece is open to the fullest extent ( fig .
3) .

Figure 3 .
3 Grasp facepiece with both hands,
sliding thumbs up inside facepiece
under lower head harness straps . Place
other fingers straight and together
outside facepiece above eyepiece. Lift
chin slightly.

2-53
FM 5-12B1 / 2

4. Place chin in the chin pocket , then pull the head harness over
the head , making sure that all head straps are straight and the
head pad is centered ( fig . 4 ) .

Figure 4 .
"PLACE"

4 Seat chin pocket of facepiece firmly on

chin. Bring head harness smoothly over
head, insuring that head harness straps
are straight and head pad is centered.
5. Smooth the edges of the facepiece on the face with an upward and
backward motion of the hands , pressing out all bulges to get an
airtight seal ( fig . 5 ) .

Figure 5 .
5 Smooth edges of facepiece on face with
upward and backward motion ofhands ,
pressing out all bulges to secure airtight
seal .

2-54
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

6. Clear the mask ( M17 ) by placing the palm of one hand over the
bottom of the outlet valve cover and blowing hard to clear any
e
agent inside the mask ( fig . 6 ) . Clearing the M17Al also re-
quires covering the voicemitter assembly with the other hand .

Figure 6 .
"CHECK"

6 Close outlet valve by cupping heel of

right hand firmly over opening; blow
hard to clear agent from facepiece.
7. Check for leaks by placing the palms of the hands over the two

inlet valve assemblies and breathing in slowly ( fig . 7) . If

there are no leaks , the facepiece will collapse against the
face.

Figure 7 .
7 Block air inlet valve assemblies,
shutting off air supply. Inhale. The
facepiece will collapse if there are no
leaks.
RESUME BREATHING

2-55
FM 5-12B1 / 2

8. Secure the protective hood ( if present) by placing the straps

under arms and attaching the straps to the front of the hood .
Replace the headgear ( fig . 8 ) .

Figure 8 .
" COVER"

8 Replace headgear. Fasten carrier flap .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-40 , Chemical , Biological , Radiological , and Nuclear Defense

TEC :

931-061-0060-F , NBC : The Mask

931-061-0061 -F , NBC : Masking and When to Do It

2-56
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1033

TASK:

Take cover as protection against NBC hazards .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in a field location ;

1. Situation 1. You are providing security near an uncompleted

foxhole , a shelter half is lying beside the position , and you have
just been warned that a spray or large - scale chemical attack is im-
minent .

2. Situation 2. You are manning the caliber .50 machinegun on your

squad's M113 personnel carrier . All hatches are open and you have
just been told that fallout is expected in your area .
3. Situation 3. You are told to expect a nuclear attack in your
area . There is no available cover near your location , so you start
walking toward a culvert approximately 50 meters from where you are
located . The attack suddenly occurs before you can reach the cul-
vert .

STANDARDS :

1. Situation 1. Within 2 minutes , immediately mask , get in the

position , and cover the top .

2. Situation 2. Within 2 minutes , secure all open hatches and re-

main inside the carrier .

3. Situation 3. Immediately fall flat on the ground with your head

away from the direction of the explosion , and cover your hands and
face .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

There may be little or no warning before an NBC attack .

1. Chemical and Biological Attacks .

a. Wear your protective mask during a chemical attack and re-

main masked until told to unmask ( unit SOP ) .

b. Seek position with overhead cover .

c. If possible , cover yourself with a shelter half or poncho .

d. Cover as much of your body as possible .

2-57
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Nuclear Attacks .
a. When nuclear explosion occurs , drop flat on your stomach at

once .

b. When caught in the open with no available shelter , fall flat

on the ground with your head facing away from the explosion
and cover your face and hands . A man who is flat on the
ground is better protected than a standing man .
c. Figure 1 shows degrees of various types of protection from a
nuclear explosion .
ラン
WALLS ARE FAIR PROTECTION HILLS ARE GOOD PROTECTION.

DITCHES ARE GOOD PROTECTION. CULVERTS ARE EXCELLENT

PROTECTION.

DEEP FOXHOLES ARE VERY GOOD DEEP COVERED FOXHOLES ARE

PROTECTION. EXCELLENT PROTECTION.

Figure 1 .

2-58
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

FM 5-15 , Field Fortifications

FM 21-40 , Chemical , Biological , Radiological , and Nuclear Defense
FM 21-41 , Soldier's Handbook for Defense Against Chemical and Bio-
logical Operations and Nuclear Warfare
FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

2-59
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1034

TASK:

Decontaminate self and individual equipment .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in a field location , wearing field clothing , load-

bearing equipment ( LBE ) , protective mask with accessories ( M13 or
M258 decontamination kits ) , and carrying individual weapon .

SITUATION : You are moving as a squad member and have been hit with
a chemical spray attack of an unidentified chemical agent . After
masking , you notice that the agent has landed on your hand , cloth-
ing , and weapon .

STANDARDS :

Within 5 minutes , move to a covered position and accomplish the fol-

lowing :

1. Immediately decontaminate chemical agent in eyes by flushing

with water from canteen ( if necessary )

2. Decontaminate skin with M13 or M258 kit

3. Detect and decontaminate areas of clothing using M13 kit

4. Dust powder from Ml3 kit on weapon and other load - bearing equip-
ment

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Decontaminate Self .

a. Decontamination of Eyes and Face . If your eyes or face have

been contaminated ( for example , from a spray attack ) , you
must immediately try to obtain overhead cover , if mission so
permits , before attempting to decontaminate yourself . You
need shelter to protect yourself from possible additional
contamination during the decontamination process . Decon-
taminate--

(1) Your eyes by turning the face upward and using water
from the canteen to repeatedly flush the eyes .

(2 ) Your skin by using the skin pad from the M13 kit or the
M258 kit . If necessary , use the M13 kit skin pad to
decontaminate the inside of the protective mask that
comes in contact with the skin .

2-60
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

b. Decontamination of Other Exposed Skin . If skin other than

the face has been contaminated , decontaminate with the skin
pad from the M13 kit or soap and water .

2. Decontaminate Equipment .

a. Protective Mask . The external parts of the mask are decon-

taminated with the cloth bag from the M13 kit ; the interior
surface of the mask is decontaminated with the skin pad from
the M13 kit .

b. Clothing . Clothing contamination is detected by using the

cloth bag from the M13 kit after the dye capsule has been
crushed . Use the cutter from the M13 kit to remove spots
larger than 1/8 inch from the clothing .
C. Boots . Treat with vesicant gas - resistant leather dressing
after washing with soap and water .

d. Individual Metal Equipment . Helmets and intrenching tools

are decontaminated with DS2 , soapy water , or the cloth bag
from the M13 kit .

e. Individual Weapons . Decontaminate weapons and ammunition

with the cloth bag from the M13 kit . After decontamination ,
weapons are disassembled , washed , rinsed , dried , and oiled
to prevent corrosion .

f. Web Equipment . If lightly contaminated , decontaminate as in

a above . Equipment that is heavily contaminated with chemi-
cal agents is destroyed and replaced . ( Destruction will be
only on order of the company commander or higher authority . )

REFERENCES :

FM 21-40 , Chemical , Biological , Radiological , and Nuclear Defense

FM 21-41 , Soldier's Handbook for Defense Against Chemical and Bio-
logical Operations and Nuclear Warfare
TEC :

931-061-0065 -A , NBC : Maintenance of the M17 Series Mask

2-61
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBERS : 051-191-1035

TASK:

Administer antidote to a nerve agent casualty .

CONDITIONS :

While wearing a protective mask , given a training automatic injector

and a casualty with nerve agent symptoms ( described or simulated)
(casualty may be tested soldier ) .
STANDARDS :

Within 10 seconds , recognize nerve agent symptoms , inject casualty

( self ) with antidote ( simulated ) , and massage injection area .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Recognize symptoms of nerve agent poisoning : flushed skin with

local sweating and tremors , or tightness of chest and pin- point-
ing of pupils of the eye ( tested soldier would recognize this as
dimness of vision ) .

2. Mask , if not already masked .

3. Remove yellow safety cap from injector .

4. Place green end of injector against casualty's thigh ( or other

large muscle) and push until injector functions .

5. Massage the injection area .

6. Attach expended injector to casualty's shirt collar by bending

needle through material .

7. Repeat steps 3 , 4 , 5 , and 6 at 10- to 20 -minute intervals .

NOTE : Administer no more than two injectors total . This applies to

the new antidote as opposed to atropine .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers , chap 11 , sec III

FM 21-40 , Chemical , Biological , Radiological , and Nuclear Defense
FM 21-41 , Soldier's Handbook for Defense Against Chemical and Bio-
logical Operations and Nuclear Warfare

2-62
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1036

TASK:

Apply artificial respiration to a chemical agent casualty .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight or darkness , in a contaminated area , wearing a field

protective mask with Ml resuscitation tube , and an unconscious
chemical agent casualty ( a dummy may be used for training ) .
STANDARDS :

1. Clear the casualty's upper air passage .

2. Apply artificial respiration until the casualty begins to resist
resuscitation .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Use of Ml resuscitation tube .

1. Place the casualty on his back . Stretch the front of the neck
by lifting up on his chin with one hand ; push the back of his
head down as far as it will go with the other hand .

2. While holding the casualty's chin up , open his mouth and remove
loose dentures ( if any) . Insert a finger and clean out any
foreign matter or mucous that may be in his mouth .
3. Insert the resuscitation mouthpiece between the casualty's lips
and teeth . Completely surround the edge of the mouthpiece with
his lips .

4. Hold the mouthpiece in place by putting the thumb and index

finger over the outside of the casualty's lips and hooking the
remaining fingers under his chin ( fig . 1 ) .

2-63
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure1

5. Pinch the casualty's nostrils closed . Take a deep breath and

blow into the breathing tube mouthpiece until the casualty's
chest appears to rise . Relax the pressure on the casualty's
nostrils and allow him to exhale . Repeat this procedure at a
rate of approximately 12 times a minute until the casualty is
able to breathe for himself .

NOTE : When a casualty begins to breathe for himself , he will auto-

matically resist resuscitaiton efforts .

6. When the casualty can breathe normally , have him hold his breath
for masking .

7. Remove the resuscitation mouthpiece from the casualty's mouth

and put a mask on his face .

8. Remove the resuscitation tube from your mask . Wipe the resusci-
tation mouthpiece as clean as possible and wash it as soon as
conditions permit .
REFERENCE :

TM 3-4240-258-14 , Operator's , Organizational , Direct Support , and

General Support Maintenance Manual : Mask , Chemical - Biological Field ,
M17Al and Accessories

2-64
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1037

TASK:

Determine personal needs and personal hygiene in a chemical environ-

ment .

CONDITIONS :

Given the absence of command guidance and dressed in full chemical

protective clothing/ equipment

STANDARDS :

Demonstrate procedures for drinking water , eating , sleeping , shav-

ing , bathing , changing clothing , and defecating and urinating while
wearing chemical protective clothing/ equipment in a chemical envi-
ronment .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Chemical Protective Clothing . The protective shirt may be worn

open to permit ventilation or closed to provide complete protec-
tion .

2. Protective Mask and Hood . The protective mask may be worn with
the hood open and rolled up to provide ventilation or closed to
provide complete protection .

3. Drinking Water and Eating . Personnel in a chemical environment

normally will drink water individually , as required , but nor-
mally will be fed under unit control .

a. Drinking Water . With training , individuals equipped with

the M17A1 protective mask will run minimum risk of becoming
a chemical casualty if they use the drinking device to drink
water from their canteens . Normally , drinking from and re-
filling the canteen in an area contaminated with a chemical
agent that does not present a vapor hazard can be performed
with only minor decontamination of the canteen cup and water
spigot areas . In other more hazardous situations , the unit
commander makes arrangements for delivery of filled canteens
with caps on , in exchange for empty ones with caps on that
are collected in the contaminted areas . These empty can-
teens are then decontaminated and filled with fresh water .
Individuals equipped with other type protective masks are
instructed to drink water by an expedient method ; such a
method is described below :

(1) Remove the canteen from the carrier , remove the canteen

2-65
FM 5-12B1 / 2

cap and , if necessary , decontaminate exposed threads

with water or the skin pad from the M13 decontaminating
kit.

( 2) Take a few breaths and hold the last one .

(3 ) Close the eyes , pull the protective hood up , grasp

facepiece behind the outlet valve assembly of the pro-
tective mask with the free hand , and pull the facepiece
out and up far enough to provide access to the mouth .

(4) Place the neck of the canteen to the closed lips and
cant it , tilting the head back until the water reaches
the lips , and then fill the mouth with water .

(5) Replace the facepiece , swallow the water , and then

clear the mask .

(6) Rest and then repeat as necessary .

b. Eating . Personnel may be fed on a rotational basis in a

chemical protective shelter , if one is available . Depending
on the situation , the unit commander may authorize a small
percentage of personnel in his unit to remove their masks
and eat , or he may remove some personnel on a selective ba-
sis to an uncontaminated area to eat .

C. Feeding . The feeding of personnel in a chemical environment

depends on the type and extent of the chemical environment
and the situation . The commander has the following options :

(1 ) Feeding in a contaminated area where there is also a

vapor hazard . A protective shelter , such as the M51
positive pressure collective protection shelter , can be
used . If the M51 shelter is used , the unit commander
has the following choices , since this shelter has a
capacity of about 10 individuals :

(a) Feed one squad at a time and rotate the squads .

(b) Feed two or more individuals simultaneously from

each squad .

(2 ) Feeding in a contaminated area where there is no de-

tectable vapor hazard . Groups of personnel can be fed
on a rotational basis , with about 25 percent of them
removing their masks at one time . This is also the
method used when there is a chemical attack threat .

(3 ) Withdrawing personnel from a heavily contaminated area

2-66
 FM 5-12B1 /2

when there is a dangerous vapor hazard . It may be nec-

essary to withdraw personnel to a nearby safe area or
to the rear area for feeding . This method is highly
dependent on the situation , the distances involved , and
the availability of a clear area or of collective pro-
tection shelters .

4. Sleeping , Shaving , Bathing , and Changing Clothing . When operat-

ing continuously in a contaminated chemical environment , person-
nel will need to make some adjustments in their normal routine .
a. Sleeping . Individuals will sleep in chemical protective
clothing and under overhead cover , if possible . If the hood
is fitted properly and is worn correctly with the mask while
sleeping , there will be very little , if any , leakage around
the mask . Two individuals can use the " buddy " system to
periodically check on each other .

b. Shaving . Individuals shave daily , if possible , to insure a

good seal of the protective mask .

C. Bathing . Individuals bathe and change underclothing about

every 2 or 3 days , if possible , to prevent skin rashes when
wearing protective liners .

d. Changing Clothing . Expedendable protective overgarments may

be disposed of and new ones drawn at the unit supply as pre-
scribed , normally weekly . Reusable protective clothing is
exchanged periodically to be laundered , normally every 14
days . Protective clothing is usually exchanged at a desig-
nated field bath unit , mobile bath unit , or personnel decon-
tamination station .

5. Defecating and Urinating . During the removal , opening , and

closing of contaminated outergarments or while squatting over
the latrine in a contaminated environment , the possibility of
transferring contamination to the underclothing or exposed skin
requires special precautions . For this reason , individuals dust
with the cloth pad of the M13 decontamination kit the parts of
the contaminated outergarments that might come in contact with
the skin when the contaminated clothing is partially removed or
opened . After the contaminated outergarments have been opened
or partially removed , individuals remove the protective gloves
before handling undergarments or the bare skin .
REFERENCE :

FM 21-40 , Chemical , Biological , Radiological , and Nuclear Defense

2-67
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBERS : 051-191-1038

TASK:

Identify NBC hazards and take appropriate actions .

CONDITIONS :

In a field environment , during the conduct of a tactical mission

against ( simulated ) enemy
en forces which have an NBC offensive cap-
ability , given your assigned weapon , TOE equipment , and protective
mask with all accessories .

Situation 1 : Upon seeing--

a. Aircraft spraying in the area

b. A mist , droplets , gas , or smoke

c. Rockets , bombs , or artillery rounds landing near your loca-

tion

d. Nearby soldiers displaying any NBC effects

Upon hearing--

a. A low - flying aircraft

b. Explosions near your location

C.
The sound of metal striking metal ( a clanging sound)
d. Someone shout , " Gas ! " or " Mask ! "

Situation 2. Upon seeing any standard NATO NBC markers .

Situation 3. While masked , when directed to identify chemical

agents .

STANDARDS :

Situation 1. Mask , cover all exposed skin , and sound the alarm
( shout , " Gas ! " and , if metal is available , strike metal against me-
tal ) . If nerve agent symptoms are encountered , inject casualty with
antidote .

Situation 2 . Immediately inform your immediate supervisor .

Situation 3. Within 5 minutes , determine without error if V- or G-

type nerve agents or blister agents are present and , if so , which .

2-68
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Methods of Delivery . Chemical and biological agents can be de-

livered in many ways . If you see any of the following , consider
them to be an NBC hazard until proved otherwise .

a. Chemical Agent Delivery . Almost any munition ( e.g. , ar-

tillery shells , bombs , rockets , grenades ) can contain chemi-
cal agents . In addition , aircraft can spray all agents ex-
cept irritant agents which cause vomiting . Candles or pots
similar to our smoke pots can also be used for delivering a
limited number of agents . After delivery , some chemical
agents will look like drops of rain or dew or a smoke or
mist . Others will be unnoticeable .

b. Biological Agent Delivery . Biological agents are those

which are normally thought of as diseases ( any thing from
the common cold to the plague ) . These diseases can be
spread by using the same delivery means listed above for
chemical agents , by release of infected insects , or by being
placed by hand in food or water supplies .

2. Physical Effects of NBC Contamination . The following effects

are listed by type of agent . You need not memorize which ef-
fects apply to which agent , except for nerve agents , just re-
cognize them as being signs of contamination so that you can
protect yourself against them .

a. Nerve Agent Effects . Nerve agents are the most dangerous

chemical agents because they very quickly cause casualties
if inhaled , or delayed casualties if absorbed through the
skin. The two types of nerve agents are G- agents and V-
agents .

(1) G- agents interfere with breathing and cause convul-

sions , paralysis , and death . When they are inhaled ,
their first effects on your body are unexplained runny
nose , tightness in the chest , pinpointing of the eye
pupils , and difficulty in breathing . You will not not-
ice your own pupils pinpointing , but you may notice
dimness of vision . When liquid agent is absorbed
through the skin , there might be sweating and twitching
in the area of the contamination , but the effects nor-
mally will parallel those for exposure to vapor form .
These effects may not always occur or be noticed in the
order given ( particularly when the agent enters your
body through the skin) . However , they are vital warn-
ings and must not be ignored . Without immediate decon-
tamination and first aid , the early effects are usually
followed by further difficulty in breathing , dizziness ,

2-69
FM 5-12B1 / 2

headache , drooling , excessive sweating , stomach cramps ,

and involuntary urination and defecation .

( 2) V- agents affect the body in the same way it is affected

by G-agents , and immediate decontamination and first
aid measures are necessary .

b. Blister Agent Effects .

(1 ) Importance . Blister agents are important because they

cause disabling burns in either vapor or liquid form .
The blister agents include the mustards , arsenicals ,
and phosgene oxime . These agents penetrate the skin
very rapidly ; therefore , you must protect yourself
quickly to avoid injury .

(2 ) Effects . Blister agents damage any exposed skin sur-

face . Light vapor concentrations cause damage that

resembles severe sunburn , and liquids and heavy vapor
concentrations cause blisters . Usually , the eyes and
moist areas of the body are most affected . Blister
agents have greater effects on the body when the skin
is warm and moist , either from physical exertion or
from the weather .

c. Blood Agent Effects . Blood agents cause casualties by inha-

lation . They act rapidly to prevent the blood from trans-
ferring oxygen to body tissue , and the lack of oxygen may
cause suffocation and death . Difficult and slow , or rapid
breathing normally is the first effect . Without first aid ,
convulsions occur and death may follow when a large amount
of the agent is inhaled . Eye and nose irritation , headache ,
and dizziness occur when a small amount is inhaled . A
speedy death may occur or recovery may take place in a few
hours , depending on the extent of exposure . Don your mask ,
as it will provide complete protection against blood agents .

d. Choking Agent Effects . Choking agents cause casualties by

inhalation . They damage the lungs , causing them to fill
with fluids . This prevents oxygen from reaching the body ,
and death may result . The more serious effects usually oc-
cur after a period of time during which there are no symp-
toms . Repeated small exposures over short periods of time
will cause casualties . Your protective mask provides com-
plete protection if donned before exposure .

e. Incapacitating Agent Effects . The physical effects vary ,

but may include increased heart rate , dry skin and mouth ,
blurred vision , and slowing of activity , resulting in tempo-
rary inability to act normally . The mental effects vary ,

2-70
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

but may include confusion , depression , and slowing of mental

activity , resulting in temporary inability to think clearly
and rationally . The protective mask provides protection
against incapacitating agents , if donned before exposure .

f. Riot Control Agent Effects .

(1) General . Riot control agents cause temporary irritat-

ing effects . Vomiting and tear agents are the two
types of such agents . They may be used in conjunction
with other agents to decrease your fighting efficiency
and to lower your ability to protect yourself against
other chemical agents . The protective mask will pro-
vide complete protection against these agents , if
donned before exposure .

(2 ) Vomiting agents . The effects of vomiting agents are

vomiting , coughing , sneezing , pain in the nose and
throat , nasal discharge , and tears . Headache often
follows . As the effects may be delayed several min-
utes , there is a possibility that you may inhale enough
vomiting agent to make you sick before you realize the
agent is present and mask .

(3) Tear agents . Tear agents produce sharp , irritating

pain in the eyes , resulting in an abundant flow of
tears ; the effects wear off quickly . For a short time ,
you may not be able to see . CN , CN solution , and CS
are tear AGENTS . The effects of CS on the eyes are more
intense than the effects of CN ; and in addition , CS
causes sneezing and runny nose , coughing , chest tight-
ness , difficult breathing , and stinging of moist skin .
In high concentration , it may cause nausea and vomit-
ing . CN and CS are used in training exercises to test
the fit and operation of your protective mask and to
prove to you that it can provide complete protection
against inhalation of harmful chemical agents . Figure 1
shows the characteristics of enemy chemical agents and
irritant agents , and defenses against them .

g. Physical Characteristics of Biological Agents . Biological

agents are microorganisms ( germs ) which cause disease in
man , plants , or animals or cause deterioration of material .
They can enter your body through your nose , mouth , and skin ,
depending on the method of agent release .

(1) Biological agents cannot be detected by your five

physical senses .

2-71
 1 INDIVIDUAL2 AGENT3
US
EQUIVALENT
TYPE
OF HOW
NORMALLY
MEANS
OF SYMPTOMS EFFECTS OF
RATE PROTECTION
CHARACTERIS
DECONTAMI SYMBOL
/
AGENT DISSEMINATED
DETECTION MAN
IN MAN
ON ACTION FIRST
AID REQUIRED TICS
THE
IN
NATION NAME FIELD

AGENTS
CHEMICAL
A.
ENEMY
OF
TYPES
Incapacitates
; by
rapid
Very Tabun
-
GA
con
high
if
kills inhalation
;
Aerosol
vapor
or None
.
needed Sarin
-
GB
centration
is through
slow atropine
Give
Difficult
breath Soman
-
CD
inhaled
. .
skin injection
. Protective
mask
,drooling
.ing
FM 5-12B1 / 2

NERVE Artificial and

protective Colorless
nausea
,vomiting Incapacitates
: respiration clothing
.
convulsions
,and if
kills Delayed Or
resucite
Flush
with
eyes
VX
sometimes
dim ;
skin
through be
may
tion water
;use
skin
Liquid
Droplet contaminated
VISION more
rapid kit
pad
M13
from Thickened
skin
not
is necessary
.
.
eyes
through or
with
skin
wash
decontaminated agent
-
C
.
soap
.
water
and
.
time
in
Automatic
chemical
agent :nitrogen
Mustard ,iBlisters
skin
s
alarm
and mustard
early
no up
to
destructive Blistering
chemical
agent hours
delayed Mustard
-
M
droplets
yellow
Pale
symptoms
. per
respiratory with
eyes
Flush droplets
Dark
Nitrogen
--
NM
detector
kits ,mustard
Lewisite ,
days
to
eye use
;
water
skin
track
can
,
cause Protective
mask mustard
BLISTER droplet
Liquid to
detect searing
lewisite more
effects pad
kit
X13
from protective
and
temporary
blind None Lewisite
-
L ,oily
Dark
droplets
vapors
and sting
and
eyes
of ness
.Some
agents .Mustard
rapid or
with
skin
wash .
clothing Mily
-
,oHL
Dark
droplets
ustard
aerosols skin
of
ing lewisite
and soap
.
water
and
sting
form
and lewisite
chemical
agent Phosgene
oxime awelts
, nd
skin
on oxime
phosgene Phosgene
-
CX
droplets
Colorless
paper
detector eyes
of
irritation others
.
eyes
sear very
.
rapid
oxime
to
detect and
nose
liquids
Incapacitates
, ni
amyl
Inhale Hydrogen
AC
BLOOD )(gas
Vapor Convulsions
and kills
high
if Rapid ,Artificial
trite cyanide
.
needed
None Protective
.
mask Colorless
coma concentration respiration
may
is
.
inhaled necessary
.be CK
Cyanogen
--
chloride
,choking
,Coughing For
severe
CHOKING Vapor
gas
(
) and
,
nausea and
Damages Immediate ,
symptoms None
.
needed Protective
.
mask CC
Phogene
-
Colorless
headache
. .
lungs
floods hours
3
.to movement
avoid
.
warm
keep
and

2-72
Temporarily Remove
May
like
look ,
Unpredictable
incapacitates
, excessive soap
with
Wash
INCAPACITATING
Aersol smoke
point
at irrational Delayed .
mask
Protective White
grayish
to
mentally
and in
clothing and
.
water BZ
release
of behavior smoke
.
physically
. temperatures
.
F
°
78
above

IRRITANT
AGENTS5
8.
ENEMY
OF
TYPES
May
like
look ,nausea
Coughing and
Irritates vigorously
Move
VOMITING Aerosol lessen
to soap
with
Wash White
grayish
to
point
at
smoke ,and
vomiting physically Rapid mask
Protective Adamsite
--
DM
of
duration .
water
and .
yellow
smoke
release
of headache .
incapacitates
.
effects

like
look
May
smoke
point
at Irritates wind
the
Face
with
eyes Fluch
,face
,eyes CS
..
CN
and
of
,
release Coughing
and respiratory Instantaneous and
with
skin
IRRITANT Aerosol open
,
not
do Protective
mask cloud
White
control
Piet
turning
color copious
.
tears eyes
,tract
water
. .
agents
less
.Instant and
.
skin "eyes
.ub
eye
irritation

battlefield
the
agents
chemical
of
detection
on
doctrine
US
For
,.paragraph
see
(1),F
7-3b
3-220
M
4.13
,s2
decontamination
and
aid
first
individual
of
details
paragraphs
F21-41
,Fee
4-21
through
orM
riot
characteristics
agent
control
TM
,sdetails
.Fee
3USreference
for
and
chemical
US
equivalent
of
or
convenience
for
only
figure
this
in
used
are
symbols

Figure 1. Characteristics ofand defense against types ofenemy chemical agents and irritant agents.
.
3-215

Mixtures
such
chemical
of
,m
choking
and
agents
nerve
.as
used
be
ay

Although
,they
agents
chemical
considered
not
are
agents
.irritant
combat
in
routinely
used
been
have
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

(2) Biological agents do not produce immediate effects on

your body . The time between exposure to an agent and
the beginning of disease symptoms ( known as the incuba-
tion period) can vary from days to weeks , depending
upon the agent used . Men exposed to equal amounts of
an agent will react differently . Some may escape dis-
ease entirely , others may have very mild attacks , while
still others may become seriously ill .

h. Characteristics of a Nuclear Blast .

(1 ) Nuclear weapons injure in three ways :

(a) Blast injuries Largely mechanical injuries

caused by flying debris , by falling buildings , or
by individuals being picked up and thrown against
objects or onto the ground ; also , in rare cases ,
injuries caused directly by blast overpressures .

(b ) Flash and flame injuries Burns caused directly

-

by heat from the fireball or by secondary fires

that are usually started by blast effects .

(c) Nuclear radiation injuries -

Sickness or death
caused by either initial or residual nuclear ra-
diation .

(2) How nuclear radiation affects your body ( fig . 2 ) .

( a) Nuclear radiation damages body cells . Excessive
exposure results in what is referred to as radia-
tion sickness . You should remember , however , that
exposure to nuclear radiation does not necessarily
mean that you will have radiation sickness . The
damage that nuclear radiation does to the human
body depends on both the amount received and the
time over which it is received . It takes a tre-
mendous amount of nuclear radiation-- either in-
itial or residual-- to harm you seriously . Thus ,
it is entirely possible for you to receive some
exposure to either initial or residual-- nuclear
radiation and suffer little or no effects . In
fact, you receive radiation from natural sources
during your entire lifetime and suffer no ill ef-
fects . The difference , then , is the amount of
nuclear radiation you receive in a given time .

(b) The effects of nuclear radiation are not noticed

during exposure . You may receive an overexposure
and feel perfectly well at first . If you receive

2-73
 Table
Personnel
Exposed
on
Radiation
Nuclear
of
Effects
Expected
18
)The
2083.
STANAG
with
consonance
in
are
table
this
of
contents
(

Estimated
exposure Onset
of Duration
of
symptoms
Initial Incapacitation Hospitalization disposition
Final
rad
)
( symptoms hospitalization
to
70
O None
slight
to Within
hours
6 None None Duty
FM 5-12B1 / 2

incidence
of after
.
exposure
transient
head-
ache
.
nausea
and
Vomiting
up
in
to
percent
5
of
exposed
person-
nel
upper
in
part
.
range
of

70
150
to Transient
mild Approximately None
decrease
slight
to Eventual
hospitalization 20
in
days
30
to deaths
.No
Duty
headache
and tours
3
h
6 o in
conduct
to
ability required
than
less
for upper
of
part .
anticipated
nausea
.Some after normal
to
up
in
duties percent
upper
in
5 range
.
vomiting
up
in exposure
. 25
exposed
of
percent part
.
range
of
to
percent
25 personnel
.Up
5
to
exposed
of percent
become
may
personnel
. combat
.
ineffective

400
to
150 ,
Headaches Within
h
3 ours routine
tasks
Can
;perform Hospitalization
indicated days
90
to
30 Some
antici-
deaths
nausea
and .
exposure
after sustained
per-
or
combat upper
the
in
those
for pated
;probably
formance
complex
of alatent
following
range less
percent
5
than
,
vomiting
tasks
.
hampered
be
may at
of
part
lower
,and
fatigue .
days
30
to
10
of
period range
,increasing
diarrhea
. More
percent
5
than
of percent
50
to
expected
personnel
exposed ;
end
upper
toward
ineffec-
to
combat
become
return
duty
to
tive
,increasing
in-
with questionable
in

2-74
.
dose
creasing
upper
.
range
800
to
400 Severe
nausea 1hour
Within .
tasks
routine
perform
Can ,Subject
sorting
medical
to for
days
120
to
90 Approximately
50
.
vomiting
and exposure
.after Marked
in
reduction indicated
hospitalization .those
surviving percent
at
deaths
.
Diarrhea combat
in
effectiveness for
of
percent
100 lower
of
part
in
early
Fever exposure
of
part
upper exposed
.Latent
personnel range
,increasing
upper
of
part range
.Lasts
than
more period
to
7
.of
days
20 toward
;
end
upper
.
range
dose .
hours
24 occur-
deaths
all
45
within
ring
.
days

Greater
.
800
than Severe
pro-
and Within
1h our combat
in
reduction
Severe for
indicated
Hospitalization days
20
to
Up 100
deaths
percent
longed
vomit- .
exposure
after .At
effectiveness
higher exposed
of
percent
100 occurring
within
diarrhea
,ing doses
,transient period
.Latent
personnel .
days
20
,and
fever
pros- 1
within
incapacitation .less
7ays
than
dof

Figure 2. Expected effects ofnuclear radiation on exposed personnel.

.Con-
tration hour
capa-
by
followed
vulsions
may response
some
for
bility
higher
at
occur until
latent
of
end
.
doses .
period

.
Notes
applicable
are
table
this
in
data
The
1.
individuals
of
groups
to
provision
gfor
of o
.Niven
acorrelation
with
dose
an
effect
.
included
is
individual
:
assumptions
following
the
on
based
are
table
this
in
data
The
2.
waWnitial
exposure
acute
tbody
hours
24
(ineutron
radiation
/ogamma
).and
residual
roithin
hole
(u-rHno
)w,fadults
.troops
radiation
to
exposure
previous
bested
resh
ell
ninjured
ed
ealthy
ith
,pc.Aad
immediate
in
result
(wto
);a1incapacitation
minutes
-r15
likely
exposure
ithin
4,000
9,000
ermanent
immediate
in
result
to
wp ermanent
, ithin
incapacitation
().1
h our
 FM 5-12B1 /2

enough nuclear radiation , such common symptoms as

nausea , vomiting , and a weak feeling will occur
within a few hours . Except in cases of extreme
overexposure , these effects soon disappear . They
may or may not occur again , depending upon the
radiation dose received . If they do recur , it may
Per-
be several days or even 2 or 3 weeks later .
sonnel receiving a slight dose will recover
quickly . Those who receive a moderate dose may be
ill for several weeks or months but will recover .
Only very heavy doses eventually result in death .

3. NBC Protective Action . Immediately upon seeing any of the above

means of delivery or effects on the body--

a. Stop breathing and mask . (See Task No. 051-191-1032 , Put on

a protective mask . )

b. Sound the alarm . Yell " Gas ! " and strike metal against metal
( e.g. , steel pot on vehicle body , entrenching tool against
mess kit ) .

c. Seek cover ( see figure 3 for nuclear only) , cover exposed

skin , and decontaminate . ( See Task No. 051-191-1034 , Decon-
taminate self and individual equipment ; and Task No.
051-191-1033 , Take cover as protection against NBC hazards . )

d. Follow subsequent directives .

a B
ALPHA BETA GAMMA
PARTICLES PARTICLES RAYS

WON'T PENETRATE SOME WILL

WILLGO THROUGH YOU
SKIN GET THROUGH SKIN

CONCRETE

20٢٠٠٦
EARTH 2

PAPER, CLOTHING , A METAL SHEET WILL --WILL STOP AT LEAST

SKIN WILL STOP THEM STOP MOST OF THEM ONE- HALF OF THEM

Figure 3. Types of nuclear radiation.

2-75
FM 5-12B1 / 2

4. ΝΑΤΟ Markers .

a. To protect yourself against the effects of chemical and bio-

logical agents and nuclear radiation , you must know what
areas are contaminated . Standard markers ( fig . 4 ) are used
to mark contaminated areas . Study these markers , until you
can easily recognize them . Remember , however , that contami-
nated areas may not be marked , and you must be alert for any
indication of possible contamination .

CBR MARKERS
28См

M
CHEMICAL
C 20 C
2
M FC BACKGROUND WITH HED
0

ETTERING

NAME OF AGENT IF KNOWN

DATE AND TIME OF DETECTION

BIO BIOLOGICAL
BLUE BACKGROUND WITH REDO
LETTERING

NAME OF AGENT IF KNOWN

DATE AND TIME OF DETECTION

ATOM RADIOLOGICAL
WHITE BACKGROUND WITH BLACK
LETTERING

DOVE RATE
DATE AND TIME OF READING
DATE AND TIME OF BURST
IF KNOWNI

SURFACE OF MARKER FACING SURFACE OF MARKER FACING

AWAY FROM CONTAMINATION CONTAMINATION
(FRONT) (BACK)

CHEMICAL MINEFIELD
(UNEXPLODED MINES)

GASMINES
RED BACKGROUND WITH YELLOW
LETTERING AND STRIPE

CHEMICAL AGENT IN MINE

DATE OF EMPLACEMENT

SURFACE OF MARKER FACING SURFACE OF MARKER FACING

AWAY FROM MINEFIELD MINEFIELD

(FRONT) (
BACK
)

Figure 4. Markers for contaminated

or dangerous land areas.

b. Description . The markers are right - angled isosceles trian-

gles with a base of 28 centimeters ( approximately 11 1/2
inches) and sides of 20 centimeters ( approximately 8
inches ) . The color of the marker and the word on the front
indicate the type of contamination in an area . The words to

2-76
 FM 5-12B1 /2

be used are GAS for chemical , BIO for biological , and ATOM
for radiological contamination . Information concerning the
contamination will be added to the back of the marker . The
identifying colors and words as well as the information to
be placed on the back of each marker are included in figure
4. The standard markers will be made of wood , metal , plas-
tic , composition board , or other rigid materials . If stan-
dard markers are not available , expedients containing the
same information may be made of any suitable material .

c. Use . The markers will be placed above the ground on wires ,

trees , or rocks with the right- angled point downward , and
the front facing away from the contaminated area . Then you
can see the word GAS , BIO , or ATOM , while you are outside
the contaminated area . Where more than one kind of contami-
nation is in an area , the appropriate markers will be used
near each other .

5. Chemical Agent Detector Materials . The following items ( fig . 5 )

are components of some chemical agent detector kits and , in ad-
dition , may be issued to individuals or units . Although these
materials will detect liquid chemical agents , they will also
react with some solvents , as indicated below .

Figure 5 .

PAPER, CHEMICAL AGENT

DETECTOR, VGH , ABC-M8

BOOK OF 25 SHEETS

ABC - M8 CHEMICAL AGENT DETECTOR PAPER

M7A1 VESICANT DETECTOR CRAYON

2-77
FM 5-12B1 / 2

a.
Chemical Agent Detector Paper . ABC-M18 chemical agent de-
tector paper is issued in a booklet of 25 sheets and is a
component of the chemical agent detector kits . The sheets
consist of paper impregnated with chemical compounds that
turn dark green , yellow , or red when in contact with V- or
G- type nerve agents or blister ( mustard ) agents , respec-
tively , in liquid form . This paper must touch the liquid
agent to insure a positive test ; it does not detect vapor .
It is best suited for use on nonporous material ; the test is
not always reliable on porous material , which absorbs the
liquid agent . Because some solvents cause a change in the
color of the paper , it is unreliable for determining the
completeness of decontamination by the use of solvents . A
color chart is included in the booklet to aid in interpret-
ing the tests .

b. Vesicant Detector Crayon . M7Al vesicant detector crayon is

a component of the M18 chemical agent detector kit . Itmay
be used like blackboard crayon and rubbed on equipment or on
a piece of paper to detect contamination by blister ( mus-
tard ) agents . Liquid or high vapor concentrations of blister
agents ( except the nitrogen mustards ) turn detector crayon
from pink to blue . The crayon cannot be used as a reliable
test for other chemical agents because the reactions between
the crayon and other agents are variable .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-41 , Soldier's Handbook for Defense Against Chemical and Bio-

logical Operations and Nuclear Warfare

2-78
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1517

TASK:

Maintain field telephones ( TA- 1 and TA- 312 ) .

CONDITIONS :

Given a TA- 1 and TA- 312 telephone set with appropriate TM .

STANDARDS :

The operator will--

1. Perform before- , during- , and after- operation maintenance on the

telephones IAW instructions in the applicable TM .

2. Identify maintenance deficiencies / shortcomings and correct those

within the operator's capability .
3. Cross - reference uncorrectable faults against the DA Form
2408-14 .

4. Prepare a DA Form 2404 ( Equipment Inspection and Maintenance

Worksheet ) to notify organizational maintenance of previously
unreported correctable faults which require a part .

5. Perform troubleshooting procedures on the equipment IAW the ap-

plicable TM .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Operator maintenance follows procedures outlined in the preven-

tive maintenance services section of applicable TM .

2. To correct deficiencies / shortcomings , refer to applicable TM .

3. Previously reported faults beyond the operator's capability to

repair or those requiring parts are recorded on the Uncorrected

Fault Record ( DA Form 2408-14 ) in the logbook . This form is
completed by organizational maintenance IAW procedures outlined
in paragraph 4-13 of TM 38-750 . Do not fill out the DA Form
2408-14 ; record as outlined below .

4. Faults which the operator cannot correct or which require a part

are recorded on DA Form 2404 IAW procedures outlined in para-
graph 3-4 of TM 38-750 .

REFERENCES :

2-79
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TM 11-5805-201-12 , Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual ,

Including Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists : Telephone Set TA-
312
/ PT
TM 11-5805-243-12 , Operator and Organizational Maintenance : Tele
phone Set TA- 1 / PT
TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )
TEC :
936-061-0137 - J , TA- 312 : Local Battery Operation

2-80
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1518

TASK:

Install / operate field telephones ( TA- 1 and TA- 312 ) .

CONDITIONS :

1. Given an operational telephone set TA- 1 / PT , a set of pliers TL-

13A , an installed wire line WD- 1 / TT , and a telephone switchboard
with an operator at the distant end of the wire line .

2. Given an operational telephone set TA- 312 / PT , a set of pliers

TL- 13A , an installed wire line WD- 1 /TT , and a telephone or
switchboard with an operator at the distant end of the wire
line .

STANDARDS :

1. Connect the wire line to the TA- 1 . Complete a signaling and

communications check so that when the distant operator signals
and transmits , the buzzer rings , the four white luminous mark-
ings show on the visual indicator , and the distant operator's
voice can be heard in the receiver . When the generator lever is
depressed , the distant operator answers and can hear the local
operator when he depresses the press - to - talk switch and speaks
into the transmitter .

2. Connect the wire line to the TA- 312 . Insert two BA- 30 batteries
into the battery compartment . Complete a signaling and comuni-
cations check SO that when the distant operator signals and
transmits , the buzzer rings and his voice can be heard in the
receiver . When the handcrank is turned , the distant operator
answers and can hear the local operator when he depresses the
press - to - talk switch and speaks into the transmitter .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Telephone Set TA- 1/PT ( fig . 1 )

a. Using pliers TL - 13A , strip 1/4 inch of insulation from each

conductor of the wire line

b. Depress the spring - loaded line binding posts and insert one
conductor into each post

C.
Adjust buzzer volume control knob to LOUD position
d. Depress the generator lever to call the distant operator and
ask for a buzzer signal

2-81
FM 5-12B1 / 2

e. When the buzzer sounds , rotate the buzzer volume control

knob until desired volume is obtained , then observe the vis-
ual indicator to see that it shows four white luminous mark-
ings

f. While communicating with the distant operator , depress the

press - to - talk switch when tranmitting and release it when
receiving

g. As a field expedient , the receiver can be used for both

transmitting and receiving
LINE BINDING POSTS
RECEIVER

SIGNAL
INDICATOR

GENERATOR
TRANSMITTER
LEVER
BELT

CLIP

PUSH-TO-TALK
SWITCH
SIGNAL VOLUME CONTROL

Figure1

2.
Telephone Set TA- 312/PT ( fig . 2 )
a. Using pliers TL- 13A , strip 1/4 inch of insulation from each
conductor of the wire line

b. Depress the spring - loaded line binding posts and insert one
conductor into each post

C.
Adjust buzzer volume control knob to LOUD position
d. Place the INT - EXT switch to INT

e. Place the CB LB CBS switch to LB

2-82
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

f.
Insert the BA-30 batteries into the battery compartment , one
up and one down

g. Be sure the handset is seated firmly in the retaining cradle

h. Turn the handcrank rapidly a few turns

i. Remove the handset from the retaining cradle and wait for
the operator to answer

j. Depress the press - to- talk switch to talk , and release it to

listen

k. Request the distant operator to give you a ring back

1. When the buzzer rings , terminate the call and place the
handset in the retaining cradle
EXTERNAL
CIRCUIT
LINE SWITCH
BATTERY
SELECTOR
ACTIVATOR
TERMINALS SWITCH
BAR

LINE
BINDING BUZZER VOLUME
POSTS CONTROL KNOB

RECEPTACLE

EXT- INT
SWITCH

HANDSET

Figure2

REFERENCES :

TM 24-18 , Field Radio Techniques

TM 11-5805-201-12 , Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual ,
Including Repair Parts and Special Tool Lists : Telephone Set TA-
312/ PT
TM 11-5805-243-12 , Operation and Organizational Maintenance : Tele-
phone Set TA- 1 / PT
TEC:

936-061-0137-J , TA- 312 : Local Battery Operation

2-83
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1519

TASK:

Maintain tactical FM radios ( AN/PRC- 77 , AN/VRC-64 , and AN/GRC- 160 ) .

CONDITIONS :

Given the radio set and the appropriate TM .

STANDARDS :

The operator will--

1. Perform before- , during- , and after- operation maintenance on the

radios IAW instructions in the applicable TM .

2. Identify maintenance deficiencies/ shortcomings and correct those

within the operator's capability .
3. Cross - reference uncorrectable faults against the DA Form
2408-14 .

4. Prepare a DA Form 2404 ( Equipment Inspection and Maintenance

Worksheet ) to notify organizational maintenance of previously
unreported correctable faults or repairs which require a part .

5. Perform troubleshooting procedures on the equipment IAW the ap-

plicable TM .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Operator maintenance follows procedures outlined in the preven-

tive maintenance services section of applicable TM .

2. To correct deficiencies / shortcomings , refer to applicable TM .

3. Previously reported faults beyond the operator's capability to

repair or those requiring parts are recorded on the Uncorrected
Fault Record (DA Form 2408-14) in the logbook . This form is
completed by organizational maintenance IAW procedures outlined
in paragraph 4-13 or TM 38-750 . Do not fill out the DA Form
2408-14 ; record as outlined below .

4. Faults which the operator cannot correct or which require a part

are recorded on DA Form 2404 LAW procedures outlined in para-
graph 3-4 of TM 38-750 .

2-84
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )

TM 11-5820-498-12 , Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists :
Radio Sets AN/ VRC- 53 , AN/VRC- 64 , AN/GRC-125 , and AN/GRC- 160 , and
Amplifier- Power Supply Groups OA/ 3633 / GRC and OA- 3633A/ GRC
TM 11-5820-667-12 , Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Parts List : Radio Set AN/ PRC- 77 ( Including Re-
ceiver- Transmitter , Radio RT 841 /PRC-77 )
TEC :

201-113-4501 -F , Preparation of Radio Set AN/PRC-77 for Operation ,

Part 1 , Installation

2-85
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1520

TASK :

Prepare/ operate tactical FM radios ( AN/ PRC- 77 , AN/ VRC- 64 , and AN/
GRC- 160 ) .

CONDITIONS :

Given the operational radio set , an authorized frequency , call sign,

and a distant station within range .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Radio Set AN/ PRC- 77 ( fig . 1 )

a. Inspect radio set to insure that all the following compo-

nents are present :

(1) Harness , electrical

(2) Antenna , AT- 892 / PRC

(3 ) Antenna , AT- 271 / A PRC

(4) Support antenna

(5 ) Handset

(6 ) Bag , cotton duct

(7) Receiver - transmitter RT- 841

(8 ) Battery BA-4386
b. Place radio on control guard and insert the BA-4386 . Do not
break floating connector .

2-86
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

RECEIVER-
HARNESS, ELECTRICAL
TRANSMITTER,
EQUIPMENT ST-138/PRC-25 RADIO

RT-841/PRC-77

BATTERY BOX
CX- 2562/PRC-25

HANDSET
BATTERY
H-189/GR

ANTENNA
AT-271A/ PRC

10.

BAG , COTTON DUCK

SUPPORT, ANTENNA CW-503/PRC-25
AB-591A/PRC

*BATTERY NOT
ISSUED WITH ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑA AT-892/PRC-25
AN/PRC- 77

Figure 1 .

C. Check vent in battery compartment . Depress valve and blow

from the outside ; air should pass through the vent . Release
the valve and blow; air should not flow .

d. Replace battery compartment and close both latches at the

same time .

e. Select the antenna and tighten it down .

NOTE : Do not remove plastic locking device on threads of connector .

f. Connect handset .

g. Select band .

h. Set frequency using the megahertz ( MHz ) and kilohertz ( kHz )

tuning control knobs .

i. Depress push- to- talk switch to transmit and release to

listen .

2-87
FM 5-12B1 /2

2. Radio Set AN/VRC-64 ( fig . 2 )

a.
Inspect equipment to insure that all the following compo-
nents are present :

(1) Amplifier - power supply

(2) Cable assembly , special purpose CX-4655

(3) Receiver- transmitter RT- 841

(4) Mount MT- 1029/ VRC

(5) Antenna AS- 1729

(6 ) Cable assembly CS-4720

(7 ) Cable assembly CG- 1773 /U

(8 ) Cable assembly CX-4722 / VRC

ANTENNA
RECEIVER -TRANSMITTER,
AS- 1729 PRC
RADIO RT-505/PRC- 25
AMPLIFIER-POWER SUPPLY
(P/O RADIO SET
GROUP OA- 3633 (*)/GRC AN/VRC-33 ) OR
RT-841 /PRC-77
P/ O RADIO SET
AMPLIFIER-POWER CABLE ASSEMBLY
AN/VRC-64
SUPPLY SPECIAL PURPOSE, MATCHING UNIT-BASE
AM-2060 ( * )/GRC ELECTRICAL ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ ΜΧ- 6707/VRC
CX-4655/GRC

MAST SECTION

AS- 1730/VRC

ANTENNA
MAST SECTION
TIP CAP ANTENNA

TIE-DOWN
AT-1095/VRC
KIT

Figure 2 .

2-88
 FM 5-12B1 /2

NOTE : Components ( 4 ) , ( 6 ) , ( 7 ) , and ( 8 ) are attached to the vehicle

and are not shown in figure 2 .

b. Connect CX- 4722* to antenna matching unit and to the ampli-

fier- power supply . (Care should be used to prevent damage
of pins in cable and matching unit . ) Aline key in cable to
slot in connector and turn locking device only , not the en-
tire cable end .

c. Connect CG- 1773/ U* from matching unit to face of receiver-

transmitter ; the L - shaped end to receiver - transmitter .

d. Connect CS- 4655 * to the amplifier- power supply and to the

power connector on the receiver- transmitter .

e.
Turn on power at amplifier power supply .

f. Turn on speaker .

g. Turn on receiver - transmitter ( to eliminate rushing noise , go

to squelch position) .

h. Set frequency on receiver- transmitter .

i. Set frequency on amplifier- power supply .
NOTE : If cable CX-4722/ VRC* is broken or missing , step ( i ) can be
completed at base of the matching unit .

j. Connect handset -

press push - to - talk switch to transmit ;

release to listen .

3. Radio set AN/GRC- 160

NOTE : Preparation and operation of this radio set in the portable

configuration is the same as the AN/PRC- 77 . Preparation and opera-
tion of this radio set in the vehicular configuration is the same as
the AN/VRC-64 .

REFERENCES :

FM 24-18 , Field Radio Techniques

TM 11-5820-498-12 , Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists : Radio Sets AN/VRC-
53 , AN/ VRC- 64 , AN/ GRC- 125 , and AN/ GRC- 160 , and Amplifier - Power Sup-
ply Groups OA- 3633 / GRC and OA- 3633A/ GRC
TM 11-5820-667-12 , Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual
Including Repair Parts List : Radio Set AN/PRC -77 ( Including Re-
ceiver - Transmitter , Radio RT 841/PRC- 77 )
*This cable assembly is labeled .

2-89
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1521

TASK:

Communicate , using proper radio / telephone procedures .

CONDITIONS :

You have been given a written message to verbally transmit over an

operational tactical radio .

STANDARDS :

You will communicate , using proper radio / telephone procedures as

outlined in the performance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

In any communication , clarity is the most important factor . Infor-

mation must be transmitted in a manner that precludes any possibil-
ity of misunderstanding . Communicate , using the appropriate proce-
dures outlined below .

1. Transmit PROWORDS where their intended meanings are appropriate ,

as listed below :

PROWORDS LISTED ALPHABETICALLY

PROWORD EXPLANATION
ALL AFTER The portion of the message to which I have refer-
ence is all that which follows •

ALL BEFORE The portion of the message to which I have refer-

ence is all that which precedes •

AUTHENTICATE The station called is to reply to the challenge

which follows .
AUTHENTICATION IS The transmission authentication of this message
is
BREAK I hereby indicate the separation of the text from
other portions of the message .
CORRECTION An error has been made in this transmission .
Transmission will continue with the last word
correctly transmitted .
GROUPS This message contains the number of groups indi-
cated by the numeral following .
I AUTHENTICATE The group that follows is the reply to your chal-
lenge to authenticate .
I SAY AGAIN I am repeating transmission or portion indicated .
I SPELL I shall spell the next word phonetically .
A MESSAGE A message which requires recording is about to
follow , transmitted immediately after the call .
(This proword is not used on nets primarily em-

2-90
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

ployed for conveying messages . It is intended

for use when messages are passed on tactical or
reporting nets . )
MORE TO FOLLOW Transmitting station has additional traffic for
the receiving station .
OUT This is the end of my transmission to you and no
answer is required or expected .
OVER This is the end of transmission and a response is
necessary . Go ahead ; transmit .
RADIO CHECK What is my signal strength and readability , i.e. ,
how do you hear me ?
ROGER
I have received your last transmission satisfacto-
rily , and loud and clear .
SAY AGAIN Repeat all of your last transmission . Followed by
identification data , means " Repeat (portion
indicated ) . "
THIS IS This transmission is from the station whose desig-
nation immediately follows .
TIME That which immediately follows is the time or
date- time group of the message .
WAIT I must pause for a few seconds .
WAIT - OUT I must pause longer than a few seconds .
WILCO I have received your signal , understand it , and
will comply . (To be used only by the addressee .
Since the meaning of ROGER is included in that
of WILCO , the two prowords are never used tog-
ether . )
WORD AFTER The word of the messsage to which I have reference
is that which follows
WORD BEFORE The word of the message to which I have reference
is that which precedes •

2. Transmit isolated letters and abbreviations , and phonetically

spell unusual or difficult words , using the phonetic alphabet as
listed below :

LETTER PHONETIC SPOKEN AS

A ALFA ALFAH
B BRAVO BRA VOH
C CHARLIE CHAR LEE or
SHAR LEE
D DELTA DELL TAH
E ECHO ECK OH
F FOXTROT FOX TROT
G GOLF GOLF
H HOTEL HO TELL
I INDIA IN DEE AH
J JULIETT JEW LEE ETT
K KILO KEY LOH

2-91
FM 5-12B1 / 2

L LIMA LEE MAH

M MIKE MIKE
N NOVEMBER NO VEM BER
0 OSCAR OSS CAH
P PAPA PAH PAH

Q QUEBEC KEY BECK

R ROMEO ROW ME OH
S SIERRA SEE AIR RAH
T TANGO TANG GO
U UNIFORM YOU NEE FORM or
OO NEE FORM
V VICTOR VIK TAH
W WHISKEY WISS KEY
X XRAY ECKS RAY
Y YANKEE YANG KEY
Z ZULU ZOO LOO

Transmit numeral phonetically as listed below :

NUMERAL SPOKEN AS NUMERAL SPOKEN AS

0 ZE RO 5 FIFE
1 WUN 6 SIX
2 TOO 7 SEV EN
3 TREE 8 AIT
4 FOW ER 9 NIN ER

3. Transmit numbers digit by digit , except that exact multiples of

thousands may be spoken as such . However , there are special
cases , such as identifying a specific code group in a coded mes-
sage , when the normal pronunciation of numerals is prescribed ;
for example , 17 would be " seventeen . "
NUMERAL SPOKEN AS

44 FOW - ER FOW-ER
90 NIN - ER ZE - RO
136 WUN TREE SIX
500 FIFE ZE - RO ZE - RO
1200 WUN TOO ZE - RO ZE - RO
1478 WUN FOW - ER SEV- EN AIT
7000 SEV - EN TOU- SAND
1600 WUN SIX TOU- SAND
812681 AIT WUN TOO SIX AIT WUN

2-92
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

FM 24-18 , Field Radio Techniques

TEC : 936-061-0112-F , Radio/ Telephone Procedures : Part 5, Sending and
Receiving Messages
Correspondence Subcourse :
AD 625 , ADA Communications

2-93
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1481

TASK :

Identify terrain features ( natural and manmade) on the map .

CONDITIONS :

Given a standard 1 : 50,000- scale military map which includes examples

of one or more of each of the natural features identified in 1
through 5 below , and which has examples of the use of colors to
identify classes of features as in 6 through 10 below :
1. Hilltop 6. Black
2. Ridge 7. Blue
3. Valley 8. Green
4. Saddle 9. Brown
5. Depression 10. Red

STANDARDS :

Identify one of each type terrain feature marked on the map .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. To identify terrain features , refer to figure 1 .

2. Colors , used to identify a class of features .

1 Black -

The majority of cultural or manmade features .

2 Blue Water features such as lakes , rivers , and swamps .

3 Green Vegetation such as woods , orchards , and vineyards .

4 Brown -

All relief features such as contour lines .

5 Red Main roads , built -up areas , and special features .

HILLTOP

On Map On Ground
Last Closed contour lime When you are located on a hilltop, the
Figure1
ground slopes down in all directions .

2-94
 FM 5-12B1 /2

VALLEY

500
X
X

400
On Ground
OnMap
U or V shaped contour lines with the When you are located in a valley, the
base of the U or V pointing toward ground slopes up in three directions
anddown in one direction.
higher ground

RIDGE

OnGround
On Map
U or V shaped contour lines with the When you are located on a ridge, the
base of the U or V pointing away from ground slopes down in three direct-
higher ground. tions and up in one direction.
SADDLE

X
X

OnGround
OnMap
When you are located in a saddle
Hourglass or figure eight shaped
contour lines. there is higher ground in two
opposing directions and lower ground
in two opposing directions.
DEPRESSION

OnGround
On Map
Indicated by depression contour When you are located in a depression,
lines, with tick marks pointing to there is higher ground in all directions.
ward the lower ground Figure 1

NOTE : Occasionally , other colors may be used to show special infor-

mation . These will be indicated in the marginal information .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

TEC :
930-071-0013 -F , Introduction to Land Navigation

2-95
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1483

TASK:

Locate a point on a map .

CONDITIONS :

Task is performed during daylight under all climatic conditions ,

with 1 : 50,000 scale military map of the area , coordinate scale , pro-
tractor , and pencil .

STANDARDS :

Determine the six- digit grid coordinates for a point on a map to

within 100 meters according to the procedures below

Locate a point on a map , given a six- digit coordinate , using the

military grid reference system to the nearest 100 meters accord-
ing to the procedures below
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Ο Determine the six- digit grid coordinates of a point on a mili-

tary map using the following procedure :
-

Locate the grid in which point A is located ( point A should

be already plotted on your map ( fig . 1 ) .

POINT A
IS IN GRID
SQUARE
9176

77

76
*A
Figure1

75

74
88 89 90 91 92

1/50,000 ΜΑΡ

START HERE AND READ RIGHT THEN UP

2-96
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

The number of the vertical grid line on the left ( west ) side
of the grid square is the first and second digits of the co-
ordinate .

The number of the horizontal grid line on the bottom ( south)

side of the grid square is the fourth and fifth digits of the
coordinate .

A grid coordinate scale divides a grid square more accurately

than can be done by estimation , and the results are more con-
sistent . Also this scale has been designed for the express
purpose of plotting grid coordinates . The 1 : 50,000 scale
subdivides the 1,000-meter grid block into 10 major subdivi-
sions , each equal to 100 meters .
-

To determine the third and sixth digits of the coordinate ,

place the grid coordinate scale on the bottom grid line of
the grid square in which point A is located .
-
Check to see that the zeros of the coordinate scale area are
in the lower right- hand ( southeast ) corner of the grid
square .

Slide the coordinte scale to the left , keeping the bottom of

the scale on the bottom grid line until point A is located
under the vertical ( right - hand ) scale ( fig . 2 ) .

Figure 2 .

77 1000
1000

0
0
5

10 696
THE 6 DIGIT COORDINATE
915761 LOCATES POINT A
TO WITHIN 100 METERS.

75

74000
88000 89 90 31 92

1/50,000 ΜΑΡ

0 Locate a point on a military map by reversing the procedures

above , when given a six-digit military coordinate .

2-97
FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES

FM 21-31 , Topographic Symbols

FM 21-26 , Map Reading
TEC :

930-071-0013 -F , Introduction to Land Navigation

Correspondence Subcourse :
EN 51 , Map and Aerial Photograph Reading
FA 466 , Essentials of Map Reading

2-98
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1486

TASK:

Measure ground distance .

CONDITIONS :

Task will be performed during daylight on level ground . Given a

1 : 50,000 - scale topographic map , straightedge , strip of paper , pen-

cil , a known start and end point .
STANDARDS :

0 Determine the distance , in meters , between two points on a map .

0 Determine the distance between two points by pace count to
within 5 percent of the actual distance .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

0 Determine the ground distance on a map , using the following

procedure :

Refer to figure 1 for straight line distance .

0
88

0
8
B
D
B
A

b
a
PENCIL TICK MARKS
ON PAPER STRIP

TRANSFERRING MAP DISTANCE TO PAPER STRIP

500 0 1000

b
DISTANCE OF
1520 meters

Figure 1 .

2-99
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Lay the strip of paper on the map so that it touches point

A and point B.

0 Make a tick mark on the strip of paper at point A and

point B.

Ο Lay the strip of paper on the meter graphic scale of the

map SO that the tick mark for point B is on one of the
1,000-meter division marks of the scale and the tick mark
for point A is on or between one of the 100 -meter division
marks of the extension scale ( fig . 1 ) .

Ο Read the distance , in meters , between the tick mark for

point A and the tick mark for point B.

Figure 2 .
-

Refer to figure 2 for curve line distance .

Ο Make a tick mark near one end of the strip of paper .

Ο Lay the strip of paper on the map with this tick mark at
point A and aline the edge of the strip of paper with the
road .

At the point at which the road turns , make a tick mark on

the strip of paper and on the map .

0
Keeping the tick marks together , pivot the strip of paper
until it is again alined with the road .
Ο At the point at which the road turns , make a tick mark on
the strip of paper and on the map .

0 Continue this procedure until you reach point B.

2-100
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Lay the strip of paper on the meter graphic scale of the

map SO that the tick mark for point B is on one of the
1,000 -meter division marks of the scale and the tick mark
for point A is on or between one of the 100 - meter division
marks of the exension scale ( fig . 1 ) .

Read the distance , in meters , between the tick mark for

point A and the tick mark for point B.

Ο Determine distance , while moving on foot , by using the following

procedures :

If you do not already know your pace count , you can determine
that COUNT by stepping from the start point to the finish
point on a 100 -meter pace course .
-

To determine the unknown distance between two points , you

can:

Ο Tie a knot in a string for every 100 meters you pace off .

0 Move objects from one pocket to another every 100 meters .

Make marks on a piece of paper every 100 meters .

Count total pace divided by 100 meter pace count .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

TEC :

930-071-0014 -F , Measuring Distances and Azimuths

2-101
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1490

TASK:

Orient a map to the ground by map- terrain association .

CONDITIONS :

Given a map in a field site , under daylight conditions .

STANDARDS :

You must orient the map accurately within 5 degrees .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Look at the map and the ground to find two linear features common to
both , such as hilltops , saddles , valleys , ridges , and depressions .
By alining the features on the map with the same feature on the
ground ( fig . 1 and 2 ) the map is oriented .

‫د‬

Figure 1. An area as viewed

0
from groundposition.
0
15
CE
ME
TE
RY
‫م‬
BASS LAKE
1450
1400
00

0
135
00
11

13 50
12 0
0
12
0

1150

1200
110
.

WI
0 LC
1
5 OX
1

-
00
11
SNAKE CREEK WILCOXWOODS 3.
1100
REFERENCE :
Figure 2. Map ofthe same area as in figure 1.
FM 21-26 , Map Reading

2-102
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1485

TASK:

Navigate , using a map .

CONDITIONS :

Task may be performed in all geographic locations , in any weather

condition , with a topographic map of the area .

STANDARDS :

Navigate , from one point on the ground to a predetermined objective

using a topographic map . Upon arrival at the point , confirm the
correct location by map association according to FM 21-26 .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

0 Recognize basic terrain features depicted on a map .

0
Understand basic color coding of a map .

Use marginal information data found on the map .

0 When a compass is not available , map orientation requires a

careful examination of the map and the ground to find linear
features common to both , such as roads , railroads , fence lines ,
power lines , and mountains . By alining the feature on the map
with the same feature on the ground , the map is oriented .
Ο If you know your present position , select a prominent object on
the map and draw a line from your position to the object on the
map . Rotate the map until the line points to the feature . The
map is now oriented .

0 If you do not know your present position , select two prominent

objects and plot them on the map . Using a straightedge , draw a
line between the two objects . Move to the nearest selected ob-
ject and orient as above .

0 Once you have oriented your map , you may now navigate from where
you are to any location on the map by using terrain features you
can recognize . The more distant the terrain feature , the easier
it is to navigate with accuracy . Once you have arrived at your
objective , you can confirm your location by using map associa-
tion as above .
REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

Correspondence Subcourse :
EN 51 , Map and Aerial Photograph Reading

2-103
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1402

TASK:

Move as a member of a fire team .

CONDITIONS :

In a designated position ( other than team leader) in a moving fire

team wedge formation , in any climatic or terrain condition .
STANDARDS :

Maintain relative position within the wedge with a normal interval

of about 10 meters ; decrease interval only when necessary to main-
tain visual contact with the individual to your left or right front .
React immediately to fire team leader example by performing the same
actions taken by him .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

All training in fire team movement should be conducted by the squad

leader employing both fire teams through the three techniques of
movement . Team members and the team leader must come to know the
individual traits and mannerisms of all team members . More impor-
tantly , the team members must become familiar with the team leader's
techniques , style and leadership methods . The following points of
correct team member movememt should be stressed .

1. Maintain the same position in the team wedge regardless of vary-

ing interval ( fig . 1 ) .

Figure 1 .

TEAM LEADER

10 m

10 m

2-104
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Maintain visual contact .

3. Perform the same actions as the team leader while maintaining

the same relative position .

4. Maintain a normal interval of approximately 10 meters between

yourself and the man next to you , except :

a. Interval should be increased where terrain and vegetation

are open .

b. Interval should be decreased when necessary to insure visual

contact .

5. Move into a modified wedge ( fig . 2) when terrain or vegetation

makes visual contact impossible , when individual rates of move-
ment vary due to the nature of the terrain , or when directed by
the team leader . (When in a modified wedge , the interval be-
tween individuals will vary , depending upon visual contact/
lighting condition . )

Figure 2 .

6. Resume wedge movement formation when conditions necessitating

modified wedge have been passed .

REFERENCE :

TC 7-1 , The Rifle Squads ( Mechanized and Light Infantry) ( How to

Fight )

2-105
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1403

TASK:

Move under direct fire .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , at a field location containing varied terrain and

vegetation , armed with an M16Al rifle or M203 grenade launcher ,
wearing web gear , seasonal uniform , and SCOPES target numbers . You
will be opposed by an aggressor sniper at least 200 meters away ,
armed with an M16Al rifle with a 6X rifle telescope ( SCOPES equip-
ment) and blank ammunition . You will move as a member of a two - man
buddy team over a predetermined route which maximizes use of avail-
able cover/ concealment .
STANDARD :

Within 15 minutes , move to within 100 meters of the aggressor posi-

tion without being hit ( scoped ) .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Select individual movement route ( within your team/ squad route

or axis of advance ) ( fig . 1 ) .

a. Search the terrain to your front for--

-

A gully , ravine , ditch , wall , or similar feature , which is

at a slight angle to your direction of movement . (These
features provide cover and concealment when the low or
high crawl is used . )
-

Hedge rows or a line of thick vegetation . ( These provide

only concealment when the low or high crawl is used . )

Large trees , rocks , stumps , fallen timber , rubble , vehicle

hulks , folds or creases in the ground . ( These provide
cover and concealment for use as temporary battlefield
positions . Use the rush if the area between them has no
concealment . )

Vegetation such as high grass and weeds . (Provides only

partial concealment since use of high or low crawl coudl
reveal your location by the movement of vegetation . You
might have to use the rush . )

b. Select your next position ( and route to it ) , which--

2-106
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Exposes you the least to enemy fire .

Does not require you to cross in front of other members of

your element and mask their fires .

(2

* NUMBERS INDICATE FIRING POSITIONS

* LETTERS INDICATE MOVEMENT TECHNIQUES
(A) HIGH CRAWL
(B) LOW CRAWL
(C) RUSH
(D) IMPROPER MOVEMENT
(SHOULD HAVE USED LOW CRAWL)

Figure 1 .

2-107
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Select individual movement technique .

a. Use the high crawl when--

-

The route you have selected provides cover and concealment

-

Poor visibility reduces enemy observation

-

The terrain/vegetation are suitable only for the low

crawl , but speed is required
b. Use the low crawl when--

The route you have selected provides cover or concealment

less than 1 -foot high

Visibility provides good enemy observation

-

Speed is not required

c. Use the rush when--

You must cross open areas

Time is critical

3. To high crawl ( fig . 2 ) --

a. Keep your body free of the ground and rest your weight on
your forearms and knees . Cradle the rifle in your arms ,
keeping its muzzle off the ground .

b. Move foreward by alternately advancing your right elbow and

left knee , then your left elbow and right knee .

Figure 2 .

4. To low crawl ( fig . 3 ) --

a.
Keep your body as flat as possible to the ground , grasp the
rifle sling at the upper sling swivel , letting the balance
of the rifle rest on your forearm and the butt of the rifle
drag on the ground .

2-108
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 3 .

5. To rush ( fig . 4 ) --

a.
Start from the prone position by slowly raising your head
and selecting your next position .

b. Lower your head , draw your arms in to your body , keep your
elbows down , and pull your right ( left ) leg forward .
C. With one movement , raise your body by straightening the
arms , spring to your feet , and step off with either foot .

d. Run to the next position and , just before hitting the

ground , plant both feet .

e. Fall forward , breaking your fall with the butt of the rifle .

f. Shift the weight of your body to your left ( right ) side ,

place the butt of the rifle in the hollow of your shoulder ,
and then roll into a firing position .

2-109
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2
1
3

5
6

Figure 4 .

NOTE :

1. The rush should expose you for no longer than 3 seconds . If it

takes longer than 3 seconds to reach your next position , hit the
ground halfway across the open area , roll right / left or crawl ,
spring to your feet , and complete your rush . When you run , zig-
zag ; don't run in a straight line . Don't rush from a position
from which you've been firing ; roll right / left or crawl before
springing to your feet . When you complete a rush to a position
providing concealment but no cover ( e.g. , weeds , bushes ) , roll
or crawl to a new position before firing . Bushes do not stop
bullets .

2. When you move as a member of a buddy team , you must communicate

(talk to , watch , signal ) with each other . Insure that one man
covers by fire any movement by the other man . When moving as a
member of a fire team , watch and listen to your team leader ; he
will lead you along the best route ( covered and concealed)
available and insure that covering fire is provided when you
move . STAY WITH HIM AND FOLLOW HIS EXAMPLE .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

2-110
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1405

TASK :

React to indirect fire .

CONDITIONS :

During the hours of daylight or darkness when subjected to artillery

or mortar fire .

STANDARD :

Move rapidly through or around the impact area .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Use training aids such as grenade/ artillery simulators and demo-

lition pits to add realism to training .

2. When training a unit to react to indirect fire , move the element

through an area , initiate simulated indirect fire without warn-
ing , and move rapidly through or around the impact area .

3. As team leader/ squad leader , always maintain control of your

element and move rapidly through the impact area . (Establish
SOP during training and include contingency plans in all frag-
mentary or oral operations orders . )
REFERENCE :

FM 7-10 . The Rifle Company , Platoons , and Squads

2-111
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1406

TASK :

React to flares .

CONDITIONS :

At night , upon hearing a flare rising or when suddenly illuminated

by a ground or overhead flare .

STANDARDS :

React as specified for each situation listed in the performance mea-

sures . Close at least one eye to retain night vision when possible .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

React as follows for each situation :

1. Ground Flares . Move out of the illuminated area , and--

a. When alone , reorient yourself and continue mission .

b. As a member of a combat element , regroup ( by SOP or as in-

structed ) and continue mission .

2. Overhead Flare With Warning ( Sound of Rising Flare ) . Assume a

prone position ( behind concealment when available ) before the

flare bursts .

3. Overhead Flare Without Warning .

a. Get into the prone position , making maximum use of nearby

cover , concealment , and shadows until the flare burns out .
Close one eye to protect your night vision ; observe with the
other ( fig . 1 ) .

b. When crossing wire obstacles where the prone position is not

possible , crouch low until flare burns out .

4. Ground or Overhead Flare While Under Direct Enemy Fire or Fol-

lowed By Direct Enemy Fire . Use fire and maneuver ( select tempo-
rary battlefield position , rush , low , crawl , as specified in
applicable tasks ) as would be done during daylight .

2-112
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

PRONE SOLDIERS

Figure 1 .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual and Patrolling

2-113
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1407

TASK:

Move over , through , or around obstacles .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , at a field location containing a predesignated

route with manmade obstacles ( two walls and two barbed wire en-
tanglements ) . Given one smoke grenade wood , grass mat , or chicken
wire , and a grappling hook . Opposed by an aggressor armed with an
M16Al rifle with 6X telescope ( SCOPES equipment) located at least
200 meters away .

STANDARDS :

Within 20 minutes , move along the predesignated route to within 100

meters of the aggressor without being hit ( scoped ) .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Barbed Wire Obstacles .

a. To cross over the barbed wire , you may put a wood or grass
mat , or chicken wire netting over it . Cross carefully , be-
cause such a mat or net forms an unstable path .

b. To cross under the wire , slide headfirst under the bottom

strands on your back . Push yourself forward with your
shoulder and heels . Carry your weapon lengthwise on your
body . Let the wire slide on the weapon to keep the wire
from catching on clothing and equipment . Inch your way
along , holding the wires with one hand .

C. It it is necessary to cut your way through wire , cut only

the lower strands . Leave the top wire in place to make it
less likely that the enemy will discover the gap . Wrap
cloth , such as rifle patches , around the wire between your
hands and cut partly through the wire . Quietly bend the
wire back and forth until it separates .

2. To go over a wall , roll quickly over the top to avoid going over
upright ( fig . 1 ) . When crossing an obstacle such as a wall , use
the buddy system . One covers while one crosses .

2-114
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

RIGHT
WRONG

Figure 1 .
as
3. Use smoke to cover your advance while crossing the obstacle
an effective method of concealment .
REFERENCES :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

FM 31-50 , Combat in Fortified and Built- Up Areas
TEC:

947-071-0071 -F , Breaching Artificial Obstacles

2-115
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1245

TASK:

Estimate range .

CONDITIONS :

Given personnel , equipment , silhouettes , and/ or vehicles , all sta-

tionary and either partially or fully exposed , at ranges from 50
meters to 3,000 meters during daylight in weather conditons where
all objects are visible .

STANDARD :

State distance to each object with no more than a 20-percent error

in the actual distance .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Appearance - of- Objects Method . The soldier must learn the appear-
ance of various objects ( personnel , vehicles , equipment , silhou-
ettes ) at known ranges in various light and weather conditons ,
noting in particular which details become unrecognizable at each
increase in range and the apparent size of the objects at each
range .

2. Unit- of -Measure Method . Become familiar with the appearance of

100 -meter intervals on the ground .

a. For ranges up to 500 meters , estimate the number of

100 -meter intervals between you and the target ( NOTE : During
training , pace off the actual distance in order to confirm
range sensing . )

b. For ranges between 500 and 1,000 meters , pick a point half-
way between you and the target and determine the distance to
the halfway point as described above . Double the estimate
to find range to target .

c. Learn the effect of terrain ( slopes and dead space) on the

appearance of objects at 100 -meter intervals .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

FM 23-90 , 81 -mm Mortar

2-116
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1366

TASK:

Select temporary battlefield positions .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight or darkness , at an overwatch position , after initial

movement into tentative defensive positions , at a halt during move-
ment , or upon receiving direct fire .
STANDARDS :

Select and occupy a firing position which allows good observation ,

fields of fire , and provides ( in order of priority ) :
1. Cover and concealment , or

2.
Cover only , or

3. Concealment only .

Maintain collective alertness and security while observing noise and

light discipline . Remain as low as possible ( prone where possible )
and look ( aim) around , rather than over , objects .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Select temporary firing or observation positions which take advant-

age of available cover and concealment ( fig . 1 ) .

1. Observe and fire around the side of an object . This conceals

most of your head and body .

2. Stay low to observe and fire whenever possible . You can aim
better and take advantage of concealing vegetation to present
the smallest possible target to enemy observation and fires .

3. When absolutely necessary , select a good background before ob-

serving over the top of an object . Avoid observing over the top
of a ditch unless a suitable background exists .

4. Follow team leader's directions after your initial selection of

temporary battlefield position ; he might reposition you to gain
better team coverage of the area .

2-117
FM 5-12B1 / 2

WRONG
WRONG

RIGHT

RIGHT

WRONG WRONG

RIGHT
RIGHT

WRONG WRONG

RIGHT RIGHT

Figure1
REFERENCE :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

2-118
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1364

TASK :

Construct individual defensive positions

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , given load- bearing equipment with bayonet , scabbard ,

intrenching tool , poncho , and M16Al rifle ; the specific location and
sector of fire of the position to be constructed (NOTE : Position
should afford natural cover such as mounds of earth , stumps , trees ,
rocks , and observation and fields of fire ) ; logs to construct over-
head cover; and 4 hours to complete construction . NOTE : Time may
be adjusted when soil and weather conditions make construction of
positions particularly difficult .
STANDARDS :

Within time specified , completed position must meet the following

specifications :

1. Cover . Affords protection from direct frontal small - arms fire

(by means of a natural or manmade frontal parapet high enough to
protect your head completely while manning your weapon and at
least one M16 - length deep) and from effects of indirect fire
( shrapnel ) ( normally requires at least 12 inches of dirt/ log
overhead protection) .

2. Concealment . Position cannot be easily detected from front

( i.e. , blends with surroundings well enough that an approaching
soldier approximately 35 meters to front (hand- grenade range )
cannot detect it) .
3. Fields of Fire . Limiting stakes are emplaced and correctly de-
fine sector of fire . Occupant in firing position has observa-
tion in sector and fields of fire which have been cleared selec-
tively , but which have not destroyed natural camouflage so that
the position can be detected as specified in paragraph 2 .

4. Size and Shape . Position is armpit deep and at least shoulder

wide ( for occupant ) and provides a cave - like compartment ( with
overhead cover ) big enough for occupant to get under .

5. Optional ( Dependent on Available Time ) . Position includes : gre-

nade sump , sloping floor with shallow trench to facilitate
drainage , elbow holes to stablize firing position and to lower
silhouette when firing , range card , and night firing stakes .

2-119
FM 5-12B1 /2:

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Construction of an individual defensive position should gener-

ally follow this sequence ( fig . 1 ) :

a. Obtain position location and sector of fire from your squad

leader . Put in sector - of- fire stakes .

b. Partially clear fields of fire within your sector and dig a

hasty hole for minimum protection . Be careful not to de-

stroy natural camouflage around your position . Save any cut
foilage , dirt , and grass clumps for camouflage later .

c. Next , dig in . Make hole armpit deep . If you have a natural

frontal parapet , carry away and camouflage dirt from hole ;
if not , make frontal parapet with hole dirt as shown in fi-
gure 1 .

d. Complete clearing fields of fire . Clear only what is abso-

lutely necessary . Get in firing position and check observa-
tion and fields of fire . Save any cut foliage , dirt , and
grass clumps for camouflage of position .

e.
Camouflage position , using available materials ( e.g. , grass
clumps , foliage ) . Make your position blend into surround-
ings . Check camouflage by moving 35 meters to front . If
you can spot it easily , you need more work on camouflage .

f. Construct overhead cover . Use logs or planks which will

support at least 12 inches of dirt . Dig a cave- like area
big enough to get under ( fig . 1 ) .

g. Improve position . Dig grenade sump at 45-degree angle and

at least 2 feet deep . Slope floor of foxhole and dig shal-
low trench to allow for drainage . Dig elbow holes to stab-
ilize firing position and to lower your firing silhouette .
Put in night firing stakes and make a range card . Improve
camouflage . Construct alternate and secondary positions as
directed by your squad leader . Replace dead foliage as
needed to maintain camouflage . Remember , you can always
improve your position .

2-120-
 ٢٠

FM 5-12B1 /2.

PARAPET ONE M16 WIDE

BERM AT TOP
ONE HELMET
OR
ONE BAYONET
WIDE

LEFT RIGHT
LIMIT
LIMIT
STAKE
STAKE

SUPPORTING
LOGS FOR
TWO BAYONET OVERHEAD
WIDE COVER

ARMPIT 1% M16 LONG

DEEP

GRENADE
SUMP

DRAINAGE
TRENCH
45°

Figure 1 .

REFERENCE :

TC 7-50 , Fighting Positions for Infantry Soldiers .

2-121
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1365

TASK:

Clear fields of fire .

CONDITIONS :

Given a partially completed fighting position with an assigned sec-

tor of fire , containing thick underbrush and small- to - medium trees ,
an intrenching tool , an axe , a specified depth or field of fire to
be cleared , and a designated amount of time in which to clear the
field of fire .

STANDARDS :

Within designated time , clear your sector of fire out to the speci-
fied distance so that--

1. Anyone moving through your sector of fire can be seen from your
position .

2. Anyone moving into your sector of fire will not recognize it as

a cleared area .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Clearing fields of fire .

1. In preparing defensive positions for expected contact with the

enemy , clear suitable fields of fire in front of each position .

2. The following principles must be observed :

a. Do not disclose your position by excessive or careless

clearing ( fig . 1 ) .

Figure1
WRONG -TOO MUCH CLEARING . DEBRIS RIGHT - ONLY UNDERBRUSH AND TREES DIRECTLY
NOT REMOVED , ENEMY WILL AVOID IN LINE OF FIRE REMOVED. ENEMY SURPRISED

2-122
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

ORIGINAL TERRAIN

rees

WRONG -AFTER IMPROPER CLEARING Figure1 WRONG-AFTER PROPER CLEARING

b. In areas organized for close defense , start clearing near

your position and work forward .

c. In all cases , leave a thin natural screen of vegetation to

hide defense positions .

d. In sparsely wooded areas , remove lower branches of large

scattered trees .

e. In heavy woods , complete clearing of the field of fire may

not be possible or desirable within the time available .
Restrict work to thinning undergrowth and removing lower
branches of large trees . Clear narrow lanes of fire for
automatic weapons , making sure that you clear in an irregu-
lar pattern that will not reveal the weapons ' positions
( fig . 1 ) .

f. Remove or thin dense brush . It is never a suitable obstacle

and it obstructs the field of fire .

g. Cut weeds only where they obstruct your view .

h. Drag away cut brush , limbs , and weeds to points where they
will not be detected by the enemy or furnish him with con-
cealment .

i. Before clearing the fields of fire , you should make a care-

ful estimate as to how much clearing can be done in the time
available . This estimate often determines the nature and
extent of the clearing to be undertaken , since a field of
fire improperly cleared may afford the enemy better conceal-
ment and cover than if you left the area in its natural
state .

2-123
FM 5-12B1 /2

j. Remove all cuttings .

k. Cover cuts on trees and bushes forward of the position with

mud , dirt , or snow .

1. Insure that no trails are made in your sector of fire as

lanes are cleared .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

2-124
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1462

TASK:

Engage hostile aircraft with individual weapon .

CONDITIONS :

You are under attack or threat of attack by hostile aircraft . You

have your individual weapon .

STANDARDS :

Engage hostile aircraft with individual weapon according to the

procedures in the performance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

0 How the aircraft appears to you depends on your position and the
maneuver of the aircraft .

Attacking aircraft ( fig . 1 ) .

C
B
A

VIEW OF
PLANE
A B C
FROM
POSITIONS

Figure 1 .

2-125
FM 5-12B1 /2

Aircraft after firing run ( fig . 2 ) .

C
B
A

A B C

Figure 2 .

Aim just above nose of attacking aircraft which is coming di-

rectly at you ( fig . 3 ) .

Figure 3 .

2-126
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 An aircraft flying a crossing , or an overhead , course must be

led . The amount of lead depends on the speed of the target
( fig . 4 and 5 ) .

CROSSING COURSE

OVERHEAD
COURSE

ONE FOOTBALL FIELD

12
Firing at fast aircraft with M16

Figure 4

CROSSING COURSE

1000円

OVERHEAD
ONE HALF
COURSE
FOOTBALL FIELD

Firing at slow aircraft with M16.

Figure 5

2-127
 FM 5-12B1 /2

0 Use a firing position appropriate to the situation ( fig . 6

through 10) . Use cover/concealment when possible .

Proneposition.

Standing in shelter. Figure 7

Figure 6

Kneeling(high). Kneeling(low).
M16 with bipod.
Figure 8 Figure 9
Figure 10

Fire only on command unless under direct attack .

0
A large volume of fire is more important than accuracy when en-

gaging aircraft with your individual weapon .

REFERENCES :

TC 23-44 , Small Arms Defense Against Air Attack

2-128
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1463

TASK:

Recognize vulnerabilities of enemy armor to individual (M16A1 and

M203 ) and crew - served ( M60 ) weapons .
CONDITIONS :

Given one of the following weapons : M16Al rifle , M203 grenade

launcher , or M60 machinegun; and a situation in which an enemy tank
or APC ( without dismounted troops) enters your assigned sector of
fire or area of responsibility .
STANDARD :

Engage the armor threat , causing the armor crew to button up and
operate with increased visual deadspace .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Tank Vulnerability . Tank and APC capabilities vary with the

different models , particularly in armament and armor protection ,
but there are vulnerabilities common to all armored vehicles .
Though tank crewmen are vulnerable when exposed , they prefer to
keep hatches open and remain exposed until they come under fire
because , when buttoned-up , the crew must operate with increased
visual deadspace . By taking advantage of this visual deadspace ,
dismounted elements can approach and destroy a tank , using nu-
merous antitank devices . Figures 1 through 5 illustrate visual
deadspace .

1. UNBUTTONED VIEW OUT OF HATCH ( LOADER) .

Figure 1 .

2-129
FM 5-12B1/2

2. VIEW OUT OF LOADER'S VISION BLOCK .

Figure 2 .

3. VIEW OUT OF DRIVER'S VISION BLOCK .

Figure 3 .

2-130
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

OVERHEAD

ww

VISUAL DEADSPACE

Figure 4.

30
' 50'
Figure 5 .
70 ' VISUAL
DEADSPACE

40'

WEAPONS DEADSPACE

E
AL SPAC ER'S TATION
VISU DEAD FROM GUNN S

E
MAIN GUN DEADSPAC
70'
30

WHILE BUTTONED UP
IN DIRECTION OF MAIN GUN
'When buttoned up, a tank is at least 50 percent less effective."

2-131
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. APC Vulnerability . The same considerations that apply to tanks

are applicable ; however , an enemy APC can be destroyed by engag-
ing it from the sides with either the M60 machinegun , using ar-
mor- piercing ammunition , or the M203 grenade launcher , using the
AT round . Furthermore , you may engage the rear of the enemy APC
and rupture the fuel cells , igniting the fuel and destroying the
carrier .

3. Suppressive Fires . Because of the increased density and lethal-

ity of weapons on the modern battlefield , the application of
suppressive fires at all ranges to neutralize the effectiveness
of enemy weaponry has taken on increased importance . Suppres-
sive fires are defined as , " Fires , direct and indirect , brought
to bear on known or likely enemy locations to degrade the en-
emy's abiliity to place effective fire on friendly maneuver ele-
ments . Suppressive fires are categorized as immediate or
planned . " Some examples of the application of suppressive fires
would be to employ artillery and automatic weapons to force en-
emy tank crews to button up . The tank is much less effective
when it is buttoned up , and the ability of its crew to acquire
targets or maneuver the tank is reduced markedly .

4. Engagement .

a. Place range on sights

b. Acquire sight picture and alinement on crew, hatches , or

vision blocks / ports

C. Fire at rapid rates

REFERENCES :

FM 23-3 , Tactics , Techniques and Concepts of Antiarmor Warfare

TC 7-24 , Antiarmor Tactics and Techniques for Mechanized Infantry
TEC :

948-071-0005 -F , Operating the LAW

2-132
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1181

3
TASK:

Maintain an M16Al rifle , magazines , and ammunition .

CONDITIONS :

Given an M16Al rifle , magazine , five rounds of caliber 5.56mm ammu-

nition ( three good rounds and two dented rounds ) , cleaning rod , wire
bore brush , chamber brush , toothbrush , rifle bore cleaner , LSA or
LAW lubricant , rifle patches , and clean dry rags .
STANDARDS :

Within 50 minutes--

1. Inspect weapon and magazine for proper functioning of all parts .

2. Disassemble weapon and magazine .

3. Clean weapon and magazine free of dirt , grease , or carbon which

will impair the operation .

4. Reassemble weapon and magazine .

5. Inspect and clean ammunition with dry cloth .
6. Turn in dented rounds to supervisor .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Inspection .

a.
Rifle . Visually inspect weapon for obstruction , burrs ,
cracks , or any defic
iency which will impair the functioning
of the weapon .

b . Magazine . Damaged magazines or those suspected of damage

should
them .
not be used , and no attempt should be made to repair

c . Ammunition . Check ammunition for serious corrosion , dents ,

loose bullets , and dirt .
2. Disassembly of Weapon and Magazine .
a. Rifle Disassembly .

2-133
FM 5-12B1 / 2

START WITH
SELECTOR
ON SAFE
D
PRESS
BUTTON

1 Remove 2 Open bolt and

magazine eyeball chamber

HANDS PUSH Push take down

POSITIONED SLIP RING pin as far as
FOR REMOVAL DOWN
it goes &

PUSH
SLIP RING
DOWN

4 Pivot upper
3 Remove handguards receiver from
lower receiver

PULL BACK
AND DOWN

5 Pull back 6 Remove 7 Remove charging

charging handle bolt carrier handle
and bolt carrier andbolt

DO NOT OPEN OR
CLOSE SPLIT END
OF PIN

UNLOCKED
POSITION PUSH IN

8 Remove 9 Put bolt assembly in lock

firing pin retaining pin position

2-134
 FM 5-12B1 /2

ூ
க
GIVE CAM PIN A 1/4
IT
TURN AND LIFT OUT

✓ FALLS
OUT
11 Remove bolt cam pin 12 Remove bolt assembly
10 Remove firing pin from carrier
through rear of bolt
carrier

DON'T SEPARATE SPRING

FROM EXTRACTOR

USE FIRINS
PIN

13 Remove 14 Remove extractor 15 Remove sling

extractor pin and spring

16 Push receiver 17 Separate upper and lower receivers

pivot pin

BUFFER

RETAINER

STOP

18 Press in buffer, depress 19 Remove buffer

retainer and release buffer and spring

2-135
FM 5-12B1 / 2

b. Magazine Disassembly.

(1) (1)
1. RELEASE BASE CATCH WITH ROD 2. REMOVE BASE

NOTE : DO NOT
REMOVE FOLLOWER
FROM SPRING

3. JIGGLE SPRING AND FOLLOWER TO REMOVE

3. Care and Cleaning .

a. Cleaning Rifle . Clean and lightly lubricate with LSA the

lugs in barrel extension , bore , and chamber . Clean and
lightly lubricate the bolt carrier . Lubricate slide cam pin
area , piston rings , outside bolt body , and in bolt carrier
key .

CAUTION : Apply only a light coat of LSA to firing pin and

firing pin recess .

Use rifle cleaning compound ( RBC) to clean powder fouling in

the upper receiver . Clean outside surface of protruding gas
tube with a worn bore brush . Coat all other surfaces with
lubricant . Apply a light coat of LSA to buffer , action
spring , and inner surfaces of lower receiver extension . Use
generous amount inside lower receiver and on all components .

b. Cleaning Magazine . Wipe dirt from tube , spring , and fol-

lower , then lightly lubricate the spring .

c. Cleaning Ammunition . Use a clean , dry cloth to wipe dirt

and foreign matter from ammunition . Do not coat with oil .

2-136
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

4. Assembly of Weapon and Magazine .

a. Rifle Assembly.

1. INSERT BUFFER AND 2. JOIN UPPER AND LOWER RECEIVERS

SPERT
SPRING

PUSH
SLIP RING
DOWN

PUSH

SLIP RING
DOWN

3. ENGAGE RECEIVER
PIVOT PIN 4. PUT ON HANDGUARDS

If the spring comes loose, put the large

end of spring in the
extractor and seat .

5. SNAP ON SLING
6. INSERT EXTRACTOR AND SPRING

CAUTION
Don't switch bolts
between rifles

STAGGER RING GAPS

TO STOP GAS LOSS

7. PUSH IN EXTRACTOR 8. SLIDE BOLT INTO CARRIER

PIN

FIRING PIN

Give cam pin a 1/4

turn after assembly .
9. PUT IN BOLT CAM PIN 10. DROP IN AND SEAT

2-137
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

13. HOOK IN THEN PUSH

CHARGING HANDLE
11. PULL BOLT PART WAY
12. PUT IN PIN

Be sure bolt is CAUTION:

still unlocked . Selector lever must be
on safe or semi before
closing upper receiver.

14. SLIDE IN BOLT SHOVE IN CHARGING

15.
CARRIER
HANDLE AND BOLT 16. PUSH IN TAKE-
CARRIER TOGETHER DOWN PIN

b. Magazine Assembly.
IF THE SPRING COMES
LOOSE FROM THE
FOLLOWER , TURN IN
THE PIECES . DON'T
TRY TO FIX IT YOUR-
SELF .

1. JIGGLE SPRING AND FOLLOWER

TO INSTALL
(1)
() (1)
6 MAKE SURE PRINTING
☑ IS ON THE OUTSIDE.
2. SLIDE THE BASE
UNDER ALL FOUR TABS

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16Al Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TM 9-1005-249-10 , Operator's Manual : M16Al Rifle
TEC :

939-071-0010-F , Disassembly and Assembly of the M16Al Rifle

939-071-0011 -F , Maintaining the M16A1 Rifle

2-138
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1182

TASK:

Load and unload an M16Al rifle magazine .

CONDITIONS :

PL Given either a 20- or 30- round M16 rifle magazine , magazine charger ,
and 40 rounds of 5.56mm ammunition .

STANDARDS :

1. Load an M16 magazine , insuring each round is pointed toward the

raised portion of the follower so that the rounds will feed into
an M16Al rifle without causing a malfunction .

2. Unload an M16 magazine without causing damage to the magazine .

1 PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Types of magazines : Either a 20- or 30-round magazine may be

used with the M16Al rifle .

2. Loading :

a. Either magazine may be loaded with any amount of rounds up

to its capacity .

b. Cartridges are loaded into the magazines as illustrated in

figure 1 .

c. Cartridges can also be loaded , utilizing the magazine

charger and strips , as illustrated in figure 2 .

CAUTION : Do not load or attempt to load either magazine with more

rounds than authorized . Overloading will deform the lips of the
magazine and cause malfunctions .

3. Unloading . To prevent damage to the lips of the magazine , re-

move ammunition in the following manner :

a. Hold the magazine in the left hand with the open end away
from the body , nose of the cartridge down ( fig . 3 , step 1 ) .
b. Using the nose of a cartridge , depress the center of the
second round in the magazine allowing the first round to
drop out of the magazine ( fig . 3 , step 2 ) . This process is
repeated until all rounds have been removed from the maga-
zine except the last .

2-139
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 1 .
B

Figure 2 .

2-140
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

PRESS DOWN ON CARTRIDGE

1

PRESS DOWN ON FOLLOWER

Figure 3 .

c. To remove the last round , use the nose of a cartridge and

depress the follower allowing the last round to drop out of
the magazine ( fig . 3 , step 3 ) .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TEC:

939-071-009 -F , Loading and Unloading the M16A1 Rifle

2-141
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1183

TASK:

Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear an M16Al rifle .

CONDITIONS :

Given an assembled and cleared M16Al rifle , a loaded magazine , and a

requirement to expend all rounds in the magazine .

STANDARDS :

1. Situation 1. Load and fire weapon within 5 seconds .

2. Situation 2. When a stoppage occurs , stoppage must be elimi-

nated by using immediate action , and the next round fired within
10 seconds . Then fire all remaining rounds .

3. Situation 3. Unload and clear weapon within 10 seconds .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Load the rifle .

a. With muzzle pointed in a safe direction , insert magazine

containing rounds into magazine housing until magazine catch
is engaged .

b. Tap sharply upward on base of magazine to lock the magazine

in place ( see note at end of paragraph 4 ) .
c. Pull bolt to rear and release , chambering a round .

2. Fire the rifle .

a. Place selector on SEMI setting .

b. Pull trigger to fire weapon .

3. Immediate action to reduce a stoppage ( fig.l ) .

a. Tap upward on the bottom of the magazine to insure that it
is fully seated . Pull the charging handle fully to the rear
( observe for the ejection of a live or expended cartridge ) .
If a cartridge is ejected or if the chamber is empty , re-
lease it ( do not ride the charging handle forward ) . Strike
the forward assist assembly to insure that the bolt is
closed . Attempt to fire the weapon .

2-142
 FM 5-12B1 /2

NOTE: Immediate action is to be applied only one time for a given

stoppage .

b. If the weapon still fails to fire , it must be inspected to

determine the cause of the stoppage , and appropriate action
must be taken .

4. Unload and clear the rifle .

a. Place selector on SAFE .

b. Remove magazine .

C. Open bolt and inspect chamber to insure that no round is

present .

d. Close the bolt .

e. Point weapon down range and pull trigger .

NOTE: Dirt in the magazine release lock is the most likely cause
for a magazine to fail to lock in place .

IF YOUR RIFLE STOPS

FIRING BEFORE YOU DO ...

1 Tap upward on the

magazine to make
sure it's properly
seated.

3If cartridge or case

is ejected or chamber is
2Pull char ging handle clear , release charging
all the way back . Watch handle to feed new round
for ejection of cartridge ( Don't ride the charging
or case. Eyeball chamber. handle.) . 4 Strike forward assist

Figure1 5 Now pull trigger, if

it won't fire, look for
trouble and apply
remedial action .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TM 9-1005-249-10 , Operator's Manual : M16A1 Rifle
TEC:

939-071-0009-F , Loading and Unloading the M16A1 Rifle

939-071-0012- F , Preventing and Correcting Common Malfunctions

2-143
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1184

TASK:

Zero an M16Al rifle .

CONDITIONS :

On a 25 -meter firing range , given an M16Al rifle , magazine , 24

rounds of ammunition , battlesight zero target , sandbag support , shot
group analysis card , and a firing data card .

STANDARDS :

Place the center of a shot group at the X 2.4 centimeters below the
Canadian bull's - eye and have the group touch or fall within a
3 - centimeter diameter circle centered on the X.

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Battlesight Zero Target . The standard 25-meter target ( fig . 1)

is used when determining the battlesight zero for the M16A1
rifle . In order to use the elevation and windage rule effec-
tively , the firer must know the dimensions of the squares on the
target . Vertical and horizontal lines are printed on the tar-
get , forming 1.4- centimeter squares . One click of elevation or
windage will move the strike of the bullet 0.7 centimeter at a
range of 25 meters . Thus , in terms of the 25 -meter target , two
clicks of elevation or windage will move the strike of the bul-
let one square .
2. D etermining the Battlesight
D Zero . The 250-meter battlesight
zero is determined by firing a series of three - round shot groups
at the 25 -meter target . The firer aims at the distinctive aim-
ing point at the bottom center of the black rectangle ( base of
the white cutaway portion) and adjusts his sights until the
center of his acceptable shot group is located 2.4 centimeters
directly below the aiming point ( fig . 2 ) on or around the X.

2-144
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

XM14

* M16A1

NOTE: TWO CLICKS OF ELEVATOR OR WINDAGE WILL MOVE THE

STRIKE OF THE BULLET ONE SQUARE ON THIS TARGET.

Figure 1 .

POINT OF AIM POINT OF AIM

STRIKE OF- STRIKE OF
BULLET BULLET

2.4 CM

25M 250M

Figure 2 .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TM 9-1005-249-10 , Operator's Manual : M16A1 Rifle

2-145
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1185

TASK:
Engage targets with an M16Al rifle

CONDITIONS :

Situation 1 .

a. During daylight on a standard record fire range , given a

zeroed M16Al rifle , 80 rounds of caliber 5.56mm ammunition
( eight magazines of 10 rounds each to engage one target with
one round ) , a requirement to fire Record Fire I and II for
qualification firing , and equipment as outlined in FM 23-9
for Record Fire I and II .

b. During darkness on a standard night record fire range , given

a zeroed M16Al rifle , 72 rounds of caliber 5.56mm ammunition
( 12 rounds for practice firing , two magazines of six rounds
each ; and 60 rounds for record firing , four magazines of 15
rounds each ) , a requirement to fire Night Record Fire , and
equipment as outlined in FM 23-9 for Record Fire- Night .

Situation 2. During daylight on a known distance range (as de-

scribed in para 5 of appendix I , FM 23-71 ) , given a zeroed M16A1
rifle , 50 rounds of caliber 5.56mm ammunition ( 5 magazines of ten
rounds each to engage each target with ten rounds ) , a requirement to
fire , Record Firing , Known Distance ( total rounds 100 ) as outlined
in para 16 ( d ) , appendix 1 of FM 23-71 .

Situation 3. During daylight on a 1,000- inch range , given a zeroed

M16A1 rifle , 42 rounds of caliber 5.56mm ammunition , a requirement
to fire standard course " C " for record fire as outlined in appendix
D of FM 23-71 .

STANDARDS :

Situation 1 .

a. Fire Record Fire I and II and achieve a combined minimum

qualification score of 43 within the minimum time as out-
lined in FM 23-9 .

b. Fire the standard night record fire range and achieve the
minimum qualification score as dictated by the commander .

Situation 2. Fire Known Distance Record Firing Table as outlined in

para 16 , appendix 1 of FM 23-71 and achieve a minimum score of 300 .

2-146
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Situation 3. Fire Record Fire Course "C" , as outlined in appendix D

of FM 23-71 and achieve a minimum score of 11 .

NOTE : For SQT purposes , soldiers who exceed minimum performance

standards will receive extra credit as follows :

ARMS QUALIFICATION SQT POINTS

Unqualified 0
Marksman 1

Sharpshooter -

Expert 3

- PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Assume a stable firing position .

2. The aperture marked " L" is used for ranges beyond 300 meters ;
and the unmarked aperture , for ranges from 0-300 meters .

3. Fire the weapon , using the correct sight picture and alinement
and correct placement of the aiming post .

Figure1

2-147
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

a. Sight Picture . In aiming , the firer is concerned with cor-

rectly pointing his rifle so the projectile will hit the
target when he fires . To do this , he must have the rear
sight , the front sight post , and the target , or aiming
point , in their proper relationship known as sight pic-
--

ture . A correct sight picture is obtained when the sights

are perfectly alined and the aiming point ( target ) is in the
correct relationship to the front sight post ( fig . 1 ) .
Sight picture includes two basic elements : sight alinement
and placement of the aiming point .

b. Sight Alinement . To obtain correct sight alinement , the

sights are alined as shown in figure 2. Notice that the top
center of the front sight post is exactly in the center of
the rear sight aperture . If an imaginary horizontal line
were drawn through the center of the rear sight aperture ,
the top of the front sight post would touch this line . If
an imaginary vertical line were drawn through the center of
the rear sight aperture , the line would bisect the front
sight post . The firer insures that he has perfect sight
alinement by concentrating his attention and focusing his
eye on the front sight post through the indistinct or fuzzy
appearing rear sight aperture . By doing this , any errors in
sight alinement can be easily detected and corrected .

2-148
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Figure 2.

250 METERS 250 METERS

PATH OF BULLET LINE OF SIGHT

25 METERS 25METERS

PERFECT SIGHT PICTURE ERROR IN PLACEMENT OF ERROR CAUSED BY

AIMING POINT IMPROPER SIGHT ALINEMENT
c. Placement of the Aiming Point . The aiming point ( target on
which the firer has alined his rifle sights ) is correctly
placed when it is centered on and appears to touch the top
of the front sight post . If the aiming point is correctly
positioned , an imaginary vertical line drawn through the
center of the front sight post will appear to cut it in
half.

2-149
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

USING LOW LIGHT LEVEL SIGHT SYSTEM

DAYLIGHT FIRING (PROMETHIUM)
AIMING AIMING POINT
IMPACT
POINT Use aperture marked L. Effective range is
250 meters ( original battle sight zero)
22 in
beyond which "Hold-Off" (aiming above
250 M
desired point of impact) must be used. Aim L
•IMPACT POINT about 11 in at 350 meters. 22 in at 460-
350 м
460 M
meters . To become and remain proficient,
practice " Hold-Off"

NIGHT AND LIMITED VISIBILITY

Use unmarked ( 7mm) aperture. Obtain Under certain light conditions, front sight
good sight picture using daylight hours pro- post can be seen, but you can't determine
cedure. After target detection , obtain good whether you are looking through, above, or
sight alignment by centering top of to the side of rear sight aperture. Practice
luminous portion of front sight post within positioning stock against shoulder and
7mm aperture on target (View A), and fire. looking through rear aperture .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TM 9-1005-249-10 , Operator's Manual : M16Al Rifle

2-150
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1186

TASK:

Prepare and use aiming and firing stakes for the M16Al rifle .

CONDITIONS :

As a member of a rifle squad in a defensive position during day-

light , given an M16Al rifle , a magazine and ammunition , with sticks
or rocks and a board or log available in the area and instructions
on the individual's preplanned sector of fire for use during periods
of limited visibility .

STANDARDS :

Using field expedient ( tree branches ) aiming and firing stakes , em-
place and aline these stakes on identifiable probable enemy avenues
of approach , assault positions , and automatic weapons positions to
include left and right limiting stakes ( one may be parapet) indicat-
ing individual's preplanned sector of fire limits so that when the
weapon is employed , using the stakes , rounds--

1. Can be placed in selected target areas / positions .

2. Are all within sector of fire ( FPF or fires on sector limits
must be grazing fire ) .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Physically locate and identify probable enemy positions and ave-

nues of approach .

2. Prepare field expedient aiming , firing , and limiting stakes

(notched stick or tree crotch , rocks , board or log ) which are
able to support the weight of your weapon ( fig . 1 ) .
3. Insure stakes , horizontal log , or board are well seated into the
ground .

4. Place the weapon in the rests ( notched stake , tree crotch , log ,
or board ) and aim the M16Al to hit the desired targets or cover
a sector with grazing fire , and adjust the rests to hold the
weapon in place .

5. To fire , hold the M16Al in the rest with your right shoulder
firmly against the weapon's butt plate .

NOTE : The weapon must be held in the exact position in which it was
held when it was sighted in .

2-151
FM 5-12B1 / 2

GRAZING FIRE

NOTCHED STAKES OR
RIFLE/ AUTOMATIC RIFLE
TREE CROTCHES

INDIVIDUAL SECTOR OF
GRAZING FIRE
HORIZONTAL LOG OR
BOARD

RIFLE/ AUTOMATIC RIFLE

LEFT LIMIT RIGHT LIMIT

STAKE STAKE

NOTCHED STAKE OR
TREE CROTCH

Figure 1 .

6. By using additional stakes or a horizontal board or log you can

lay the weapon for grazing fire along more than one line or to
cover an entire sector , depending on the terrain ( fig . 1 ) .
REFERENCES :

FM 23-12 , Technqiue of Fire of the Rifle Squad and Tactical Applica-

tion
FM 23-31 , 40mm Grenade Launchers , M203 and M79

2-152
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1187

TASK:

Maintain AN/PVS - 2 night vision sight .

CONDITIONS :

Given an AN/ PVS- 2 night vision sight , pail of water (distilled

water , if available ) , lens brush , lens tissue , and clean soft rags .

STANDARDS :

Within 20 minutes , individual will inspect and clean sight so that ,

upon inspection , all foreign matter is removed , lenses are clean ,
all defects that are operator's maintenance are corrected and those
defects noted that are not operator's maintenance are reported to
your imediate supervisor for further disposition .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Inspection of Night Vision Sight

a. Refer to TM 11-5855-203-13 , paragraph 3-4 , when inspecting

sight for defects .

b. In addition to the routine daily checks and services , the

starlight scope should be rechecked and serviced immediately
before going on a mission and as soon after completion of
the mission as possible .

2. Cleaning the Sight

a. Glass Surfaces . Clean the exposed glass surfaces of the

objective lens assembly and eyepiece assembly by removing
loose dirt with a lens brush , and then clean the glass sur-
faces with lens tissue . Saturate the tissue with water to
remove stubborn dirt . ( Use distilled water , if available . )
Dry and polish the lenses with dry lens tissue .

b. Metal Surfaces . Clean all exposed metal surfaces with a

lint- free cloth . If necessary , dampen the cloth with water .
Allow to dry before storing the scope .

c. Rubber Eyeshield . Clean with a wet cloth .

d. Carrying Case . Wipe the inside and outside of the carrying

case with a damp cloth .

e. Shipping Container Liners . Clean exposed surface with a

dampened cloth and allow to dry before use .

2-153
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

f. Shipping Container . Clean with a clean cloth . Dampen cloth

if necessary ,

REFERENCES :

TM 11-5855-203-13 Operator's Organizational and Direct Support

Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists :
Night Vision Sight , Individual Served Weapons AN/ PVS - 2 and AN/ PVS - 2A
TEC :

953-071-0061 -F , AN/ PVS - 2 Starlight Scope

2-154
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1188

TASK:

Conduct surveillance , using an AN/PVS- 2 .

CONDITIONS :

At night , given an AN/PVS-2 in your defensive position and one squad

of aggressor personnel moving within your assigned sector .
STANDARDS :

Detect and report all movement within your sector of observation in

open areas out to 300 meters .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Prepare AN/PVS- 2 ( fig . 1 ) for operation and operate .

9 11

7
5
10

1. RANGE FOCUS RING 7. AZIMUTH ADJUSTMENT KNOB .

2. LENS CAP 8. ELEVATION ADJUSTMENT KNOW
3. OSCILLATOR CAP 9. DIOPTER SCALE
4. POWER SWITCH
10. FOCUS RING
5. BORESIGHT MOUNT ASSEMBLY 11. EYESHIELD
6. BATTERY CAP

Figure 1 .

2-155
FM 5-12B1 / 2

a. Install the battery . ( CAUTION : Make sure the switch is in

the off position before installing battery . )

(1) Step 1 : Remove the battery cap ( 6 ) in a counterclock-

wise direction .

(2 ) Step 2 : Install the battery with the positive terminal

( raised end) into main housing .

(3 ) Step 3 : Install battery cap in clockwise direction onto

main housing . Tighten firmly to insure watertight
seal .

b. To put sight into operation follow these steps . (CAUTION :

Always maintain the lens cap on the objective lens when op-
eration in daylight conditions . )

(1 ) Step 1 : Place power switch ( 4 ) in up position .

(2 ) Step 2 : Set diopter scale ( 9 ) to zero and then adjust

focusing ( 10 ) for sharp sight reticle . Once this ad-
justment is made , no further adjustment should be nec-
essary for the same operator .

NOTE : The operator must press his eye against the eyeshield to open
the rubber security flaps .

(3 ) Step 3 : Adjust range focus ring ( 1 ) for sharp image .

During surveillance , the operator will have to adjust
the range focus to insure sharp image at different
ranges .

C. After operation place the power switch in the off position .

NOTE : Do not repack the sight in the shipping container without re-
moving the battery .

2. Detect the specific target as required . The soldier can detect

movement , observe terrain , the enemy , his own forces , and effec-
tively execute surveillance during offensive and defensive op-
erations with the AN/ PVS- 2 . Viewing capabilities are only li-
mited by ambient light levels . Reflection of light from water
makes viewing capabilities unlimited .

2-156
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TM 11-5855-203-13 , Operator's , Organizational and Direct Support
Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists :
Night Vision Sight , Individual Served Weapons AN/ PVS - 2 and AN/ PVS- 2A
TC 23-11 , Starlight Scope Small - Held or Individual Weapons Mounted ,
Model No. 6060
TEC :
953-071-0061 -F , AN/ PVS - 2 Starlight Scope

2-157
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1189

TASK:

Mount/ dismount AN/PVS- 2 on M16A1 rifle .

CONDITIONS :

Given an AN/ PVS- 2 sight in shipping container , weapons adapter

bracket , and an M16Al rifle ; daylight or with artificial light
source .

STANDARDS :

1. Mounting . Within 5 minutes , the adapter assembly must be se-

cured to the upper receiver , and the sight must be mounted on
the adapter with the two locking knobs of the boresight mount
assembly locked in place .

2. Dismounting . Remove the sight and mounting bracket and return

them to the carrying case .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. To mount M16A1 adapter bracket to the M16A1 rifle , unthread

wingnut (1 ) to thread stop on screw . Pull tab ( 2 ) away from
weapon adapter assembly ( 3 ) . Slide mounting ear (4) under
handle and position weapon adapter assembly flat against top of
receiver and all the way forward . Firmly tighten wingnut (1)
until tab (2) is pulled tightly against handle and weapon
adapter assembly ( fig . 1 and 2 ) .
STEP 1 .
UNTHREAD WING NUT (1 )
4 TO THREAD STOP ON SCREW.
2
STEP 2.

PULL TAB (2) AWAY FROM

WEAPON ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY (3).
1
STEP 3 .
SLIDE MOUNTING EAR (4)
3 UNDER HANDLE AND
POSITION WEAPON
ADAPTER ASSEMBLY IN
PLACE INSIDE OPENING
OF CARRYING HANDLE
STEP 4.
FIRMLY TIGHTEN WING NUT
(1 ) UNTIL TAB (2) IS PULLED
TIGHTLY AGAINST HANDLE
AND WEAPON ADAPTER
ASSEMBLY.

Figure 1 .

2-158
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

D 3

2
1
:

5 1

1. WING NUT
2. THREAD STOP
3. MOUNTING EAR
4. TAB 7
5. PIN STOP
6. WEAPON ADAPTER BRACKET
7. SLOTTED GROOVE

Figure 2 .

2. To mount the AN/PVS - 2 sight to the weapons adapter bracket , re-

move the sight from shipping container . Rotate lock knobs of the
boresight mount assembly rearward ( toward the rubber eyeshield)
until they come to stop on the pins located on the assembly .
Slide the boresight mount assembly into the guide rail of the
adapter bracket from the rear until positioned against the pin
stop of the guide rail . The scope is locked to the adapter
bracket by rotating the two locking knobs of the boresight mount
assembly in a forward direction .
REFERENCES :

TM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TM 11-5855-203-13 , Operator's Organizational and Direct Support
Maintenance Manual Including Repair Parts and Special Tools Lists :
Night Vision Sight , Individual Served Weapons AN/PVS-2 and AN/ PVS- 2A

2-159
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1190

TASK :

Zero AN/ PVS - 2 when mounted on M16Al rifle .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight or darkness , located on a zero firing range , given

an AN/ PVS - 2 mounted on a zeroed M16Al rifle , magazine , 18 rounds of
amunition , silhouette target located 150 meters from the firing
point , M3 bipod and sandbags .
STANDARDS :

The point of aim must be positioned on the center of the shot group .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

To zero the NA/ PVS - 2 at 150 meters :

1. Take a prone , bipod - supported position 150 meters from the tar-
get .

2. Position the rubber eyeshield around the eye .

3. Move power switch to ON position .

4. Set the diopter to zero and then adjust the focus ring for a

sharp sight reticle .

5. Adjust the range focus ring for a sharp image .

6. Sight through the scope and position the aiming dash on the
center of mass of the target .

7. Fire a three- round shot group , keeping the aiming dash on the
identical point on the target each time a round is fired .

8. Check the target and find the center of the shot group in rela-
tion to the point of aim .

9. Adjust the sight reticle by turning the elevation and azimuth

adjustment knobs until the aiming reference dash is on the
center of the shot group . One click of the azimuth or elevation
adjustment knob will move the strike of the bullet 3 inches .
Adjustments are made in the direction of the error from where
the center of the shot group must be .

10. Repeat procedures as outlined in 5 through 9 above until you get

2-160
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

the proper relationship between the point of aim and the center
of the shot groups .

in

AIMING REFERENCE LINE

OF SIGHT RETICLE

WHEN ZEROING THE M16A1 RIFLE AT A

RANGE OF 25 METERS ( 1000 INCHES) THE
POINT OF AIM IS POSITIONED 5.8 CM
LEFT AND 8.5 CM ABOVE THE CENTER
OF THE SHOT GROUP.

CENTER OF SHOT GROUP

MUST BE HERE FOR 2.5
METER ZERO

Figure 1 .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TEC :

953-071-0061 - F , AN/PVS- 2 Starlight Scope

2-161
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1191

TASK :

Engage a target with a rifle , using AN/ PVS- 2 .

CONDITIONS :

Given an M16Al rifle with mounted and zeroed AN/PVS- 2 , one maga-
zine with 18 rounds of 5.56mm ammunition during the hours of dark-
ness on an M16 rifle range with three E- type silhouettes , one each
at ranges of 50-100 , 150 , and 200-250 meters .

STANDARDS :

Fire all 18 rounds within 2 minutes and hit the targets a minimum of
nine times ( two hits must be on each of the targets at ranges other
than 150 meters ) .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Turn the AN/ PVS- 2 on and position the rubber eyeshield around
the eye . ( See Task No. 051-191-1189 , Mount/ dismount AN/PVS- 2 on
M16Al rifle . )

2. Sight through the scope and position the aiming reference line
of the sight reticle on the target . ( See Task No. 051-191-1190 ,
Zero AN/ PVS - 2 when mounted on M16Al rifle . )

3. Fire the weapon utilizing correct marksmanship procedure . (See

Task No. 051-191-1184 , Zero an M16A1 Rifle . )
4. To engage targets at ranges other than 150 meters , hold- off must
be applied .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-9 , M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship

TEC :

953-071-0061 -F , AN/ PVS - 2 Starlight Scope

2-162
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1211

TASK:

Maintain an M203 grenade launcher and ammunition .

CONDITIONS :

Given an M203 grenade launcher , rifle bore cleaner , drycleaning sol-

vent ( not containing acid) , LSA lubricant or weapons lubricating oil
M11 - L - 141078 ( whichever is appropriate ) , bore brush , clean dry rags ,
and an unspecified number of practice ammunition rounds ( some unser-
viceable ) .

STANDARDS :

Within 20 minutes , prepare launcher and ammunition so that upon sub-

sequent inspection :

1. Launcher is properly assembled free of all foreign matter .

2. Launcher has a light coat of oil .

3. Launcher has a heavy coat on working parts .

4. Unserviceable launcher rounds have been turned in .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. General Disassembly of the Grenade Launcher .

a. Clear the weapon by depressing barrel latch and sliding the
barrel assembly forward ( fig . 1) . Inspect the breech to
insure that no round is present . Clear the M16Al rifle .

BARREL LATCH

Figure 1 .

b. Loosen mounting screw and remove the quadrant sight assembly

form carrying handle of the M16/M16Al rifle ( fig . 2 ) .

2-163
FM 5-12B1 / 2

UPPER RECEIVER
ALINEMENT PIN GROUP
QUADRANT SIGHT
AND HOLE
ASSEMBLY CLAMP

MOUNTING
SIGHT BRACKET SCREW

Quadrant sight assembly.

Figure 2 .

c. Remove barrel assembly by depressing the barrel latch and

sliding the barrel assembly forward . From the muzzle of the
M16A1 , count back to the fourth hole on the left side of the
handguard . Insert one end of a section of cleaning rod into
the fourth hole , depress the barrel stop , and slide the bar-
rel assembly off the receiver track . ( Figure 3 shows clean-
ing rod being inserted from right . )

2-164
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

HANDGUARD
AND SIGHT
ASSEMBLY

BARREL NOTE:
ASSEMBLY
DEPRESS BARREL
STOP AND SLIDE
BARREL ASSEMBLY
TO/ FROM LAUNCHER

Figure 3 .

2-165
FM 5-12B1 / 2

d. The second method of removing the barrel assembly is to re-

move the handguard and sight assembly by pushing down on the
slip ring of the M16A1 and pulling down and out on the base
of the handguard . Depress the barrel latch and slide the
barrel assembly forward . Then depress the barrel stop and
slide the barrel assembly from the receiver track ( fig . 4 ) .

2-166
 FM 5-12B1 /2

de

BARREL STOP

Figure 4 .

2-167
FM 5-12B1 /2

2. Cleaning Materials , Lubricants , and Care of the Launcher .

a. Cleaning Materials .

(1 ) Rifle bore cleaner ( RBC ) is used to clean the bore of

the launcher and provides temporary protection from
corrosion .

(2) Any drycleaning solvent that does not contain acid can
be used for cleaning the launcher of dirt , grease , oil ,
or corrosion preventives .

b. Lubricants .

(1 ) Military lubricant MIL- L- 46000A ( LSA) is used for lubri-

cating the launcher at temperatures of -35 ° Fahrenheit
and above .

(2) Lubricating oil , Arctic weather MIL - L - 141078 is used at

temperatures below 0 ° F .

c. Cleaning the launcher and ammunition .

(1 ) Bore . Attach a clean , dry rag to the thong and tho-

roughly moisten the rag with bore cleaner . After
pulling the rag through several times , attach the bore
brush to the thong and pull it through the bore several
times . Repeat , using dry rags , inspecting the rag each
time . Finally , pull a lightly oiled ( LSA) rag through
the bore to leave a light coat of oil inside the bar-
rel . When cleaning the bore , the bore brush and rags
should be pulled from the breech end to the muzzle end .

( 2) Breech insert . Clean the face of the breech insert

retainer with a patch and bore cleaner . Remove the
bore cleaner with dry rags , and then oil the face of
the breech lightly .

(3) All other parts . Use a brush and dry rag to clean all
other parts and surfaces . Apply a light coat of LSA to
the exterior of the launcher after cleaning . For
cleaning the rifle portion of the launcher , refer to
Task No. 051-191-1181 , Maintain an M16A1 Rifle , Maga-
zines , and Ammunition .
(4 ) Ammunition . Wipe any dirt or grime from ammunition
with a dry cloth . If aluminum is corroded , turn it
into the ammunition point . Do not oil ammunition .

2-168
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

3. Assembly Procedure for Grenade Launcher . Assembly procedure for

the grenade launcher merely reverses disassembly steps . For
OTH
disassembly and assembly of the M16Al rifle portion of the wea-
pon refer to Task No. 051-191-1181 , Maintain an M16A1 Rifle ,
Magazines , and Ammunition .
Si
4. Inspection . While cleaning your M203 you should also inspect for
serviceability of parts . If you find a part which you think is
unserviceable , take it to your armorer ; he will make the final
determination on serviceability and replace parts where neces-
sary . If you do not know what to look for insofar as service-
ability is concerned , see the TEC Lessons listed at the end of
this Task Summary .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-31 , 40-mm Grenade Launchers M203 and M79

TM 9-1010-221-10 , Operator's Manual : 40 -mm Grenade Launcher M203
TEC :

940-071-0086 -F , M203 Grenade Launcher : Disassembly , Assembly and

Maintenance
940-071-0088 -F , M203 Grenade Launcher : Zeroing and Target Engagement

2-169
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1212

TASK:

Load , unload , and clear the M203 grenade launcher .

CONDITIONS :

Given one M203 grenade launcher and one dummy round of 40mm ammuni-
tion .

STANDARDS :

Soldier must be able to load , unload , and clear the M203 without
error within 2 minutes .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Loading ( fig . 1 ) .
a. Depress the barrel latch and slide the barrel forward

b. Fully insert round into barrel

c.
Slide barrel rearward , locking it to the breech

d. Place safety in safe position

Loading the M203 Grenade Launcher.

Figurel .

2-170
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Unloading .

a. Depress barrel latch and slide barrel forward

b. Round automatically ejects

c. Slide barrel rearward locking it to the breech

3. Clear the weapon .

a. Depress barrel latch and slide barrel forward

b. Keeping the weapon pointed down range , look into the barrel
to insure there is no round or cartridge case in the barrel

c. Slide barrel rearward , locking it to the breech

REFERENCES :

FM 23-31 , 40mm Grenade Launchers , M203 and M79

TM 9-1010-221-10 , Operator's Manual : 40 -mm Grenade Launcher M203
TEC :

940-071-0086 -F , M203 Grenade Launcher : Disassembly , Assembly and

Maintenance

2-171
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1213

TASK:

Zero an M203 grenade launcher .

CONDITIONS :

Given an unzeroed M203 grenade launcher , five rounds HE or TP ammu-

nition ( for each type sight ) , and a firing range .
STANDARDS :

Gunner will obtain an elevation and windage sight setting ( on both

leaf and quadrant sights ) which will enable him to hit within 5 me-
ters of his point of aim at a distance of 200 meters with two con-
secutive rounds .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Sight leaf zeroing :

a. Select a target at 200 meters .

b. Place the sight leaf in upright position .

C. Place the center mark of the windage scale on the index line
on the rear of the sight base .

d. Loosen the elevation adjustment screw on the sight leaf and

place the index line of the sight leaf on the center eleva-
tion mark on the sight mount .

e. Tighten elevation adjustment screw on the sight leaf .

f. Take a supported prone position .

g. Aline target with the 200 -meter increment of the sight leaf
and the front post sight of the rifle .

h. Fire a round , observe the impact , and make necessary sight

adjustment .

(1 ) Turning the sight windage screw clockwise moves the

strike of the round to the left ; turning the windage
screw counterclockwise moves the strike to the right .
One increment in either direction equals 1 1/2 meters
at a range of 200 meters .

(2) Raising the sight leaf increases range; lowering it

2-172
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

decreases range . One increment equals 10 meters at a

range of 200 meters .

i. Fire one or more rounds and make necessary adjustments after

each round until a round has landed within 5 meters of the
target .

j. Fire a confirming round .

2. Quadrant sight zeroing .

a. Select a target at 200 meters .

b. Insure that the sight is correctly mounted on the carrying

handle of the rifle .

C. Move the front sight post and rear sight aperture from the
closed to the open position .

(1 ) Depress the rear sight retainer and slide the rear

sight aperture to the left or right until the wide in-
dex line of the rear sight aperture is alined with the
edge of the sight aperture arm .

(2) Move the front sight post to its highest position and
then back off 2 1/2 turns .

d . Move the sight latch rearward and reposition quadrant sight

arm to zeroing range ( 200 meters ) .

e.
Take a supported prone position .

f. Aline target with the front and rear sights , using correct
sighting and aiming procedures .

g. Fire a round , observe the impact , and make necessary sight

adjustment .

(1 ) For range adjustment , turn front sight post clockwise

to decrease range and counterclockwise to increase
range . One full turn equals 5 meters at a range of 200
meters .

(2) For windage adjustment , press sight aperture retainer

and move rear sight aperture away from barrel to move
trajectory of the projectile to the left . Move the
rear sight aperture toward barrel to move trajectory to
the right . One notch on the rear sight aperture equals
1 1/2 meters at a range of 200 meters .

2-173
FM 5-12B1 /2

h. Fire one or more cartridges and make necessary adjustments

after each round . When a round has landed within 5 meters
of the target , the weapon is zeroed .

i. Fire a confirming round .

NOTE : If the individual has not zeroed after firing five rounds , his
weapon will be inspected to insure that it is assembled and func-
tioning properly . After checking the weapon , the individual may be
given another opportunity to zero .
REFERENCES :

FM 23-31 , 40mm Grenade Launchers M203 and M79

TM 9-1010-221-10 , Operator's Manual : 40 -mm Grenade Launcher M203
TEC :

940-071-0088 -F , M203 Grenade Launcher : Zeroing and Target Engagement

2-174
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1214

TASK:

Engage targets with an M203 grenade launcher and apply immediate

action to reduce a stoppage .

CONDITIONS :
fa
On a live fire range , given seven practice rounds , one unmarked
dummy round , an M203 grenade launcher , instructions to load and en-
gage all four targets until all ammunition is expended , and a target
area consisting of :

POSITION TARGET RANGE

Kneeling Supported Window 90-100 meters

Bunker 105-115 meters

Troops in an Open
Emplacement 275-300 meters
Foxhole or
Bunker Supported Troops in the Open 325-350 meters

STANDARDS :

Within 6 minutes , the firer will apply immediate action to reduce

any stoppage which might occur and hit three of the four targets . A

hit consists of :

1. Placing a round through the window

2. Hitting the front of the bunker

3. Hitting within 10 meters of troops in open emplacement

4. Hitting within 10 meters of troops in the open
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Sighting consists of sight alinement and getting a sight picture

( fig . 1 ) .

2. Aiming .

a. The firer obtains a correct sight alinement and then shifts

his focus to the target for a correct sight picture . As the
trigger is pressed , continue shifting eye focus .

2-175
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2 2

Figure 1 .

b. Firer should use controlled breathing just as he would when

firing the rifle .

3. Pointing Technique . To use the pointing technique , bring the

weapon to a modified underarm firing position , With both eyes
open , concentrate your vision on the target , keeping the flash
suppressor of the rifle in the lower part of the field of view .
Point the flash suppressor of the rifle at the target . To make
corrections in elevation and deflection , sense the impact of the
round and make appropriate changes in the weapon system .

4. Sensing .

a.
Sensing is an instantaneous determination by the grenadier
as to where the grenade explodes with respect to the target .
Sensings are made in both range and deviation to the nearest
5 meters , since the casualty radius of the HE round is 5
meters .

b. Range sensings are made as follows :

--

(1) Short If the grenade bursts between the grenadier

and target .

(2) Over --

If the burst is over the target .

--

(3) Target Grenade hits any portion of target .

--

(4) Range Correct The grenade is slightly left or right

of the target , but at correct range .

(5 ) Doubtful If the grenade is at range

--
correct but
grenadier cannot make a positive sensing .

2-176
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

c. Deviation sensings are RIGHT , LEFT , or LINE .

5. Adjustment of Fire .

a. Adjustment of fire is the action taken by the grenadier us-

ing sensing , sight manipulation , and an adjusted aiming
point to insure a second round hit .

b. When using the sight leaf , the grenadier simply changes his
sight alinement or uses an adjusted aiming point .

c. If the first grenade impacts more than 25 meters over or

short of the target , adjust the range quadrant to bring the
next grenade on target .

6. Range Determination ( See Task No. 051-191-1245 , Estimate

Range ) .

7. Failure to Fire . After a failure to fire due to the possibility

of a misfire or hangfire , the following precautions must be ob-
served until the round has been removed from the weapon and
cause of failure determined ( fig . 2 ) :

a. Shout "MISFIRE ! " keeping the weapon trained on the target ,

and keeping all troops clear of the muzzle .

b. Wait 30 seconds from the time of failure to fire before op-

ening the breech for unloading procedures .

C. Exercise extreme caution during unloading procedures ; where

circumstances permit , either catch the ejected round or re-
duce the distance of free fall to the ground .

d. After the round has been removed from the receiver , deter-
mine whether the round or the firing mechanism is defective .
Examine the primer to see if it has been dented . If the
primer has not been dented , the firing mechanism is at
fault . The round may be reloaded and fired after the cause
of the failure to fire has been corrected .

e.
If the primer has been dented , keep the round separate from
other ammunition until it can be properly disposed of .

f. Shouting "MISFIRE ! " should apply only to training situa-

tions .

2-177
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Malfunction Probable Cause Corrective Action

Failure to fire .. Safety on Place in fire position .

Empty chamber Load Weapon .
Faulty ammunition Reload.

Water or excess lubricant in firing pin well. Hand cycle wpn several times to include
pulling the trigger .
Worn or broken firing pin .. Replace.*
Dirt or residue in firing pin recess. Clean.
Burned sear on firing pin Replace.*
Dirty firing pin well opening Clean firing pin well opening. *
Weak or broken firing pin spring Replace.*

Failure to cock Broken sear Replace.*

Improper assembly of cocking lever . Reassemble . *
Loose ,broken , or missing cocking lever spring pin Replace.*

Failure to lock Excess plastic on breech end of barrel assembly Trim excess plastic until barrel assembly
will lock . *

Dirty follower assembly or receiver cavity Clean.

Failure to Faulty ammunition. Reload.

chamber. Dirty chamber Clean bore and chamber .

Failure to Defective extractor on spring or spring pin . Replace.*

extract. Remove from barrel.
Ruptured cartridge case

Failure to eject Worn, broken, or missing ejector spring or re- Replace.*

tainer.
Safety fails to Broken or worn safety or missing spring pin ..... Replace.*
stay in
position.

Sight will not Sightmounting machine screw loose . Tighten screw or replace if dented or
stay in selected broken.
position.

*Procedures to be accomplished by DS/GS Maintenance.

Figure 2 .

NOTE : Ranges of the M203GL follows :

1. Maximum range 400 meters ( approx . ) .

2. Masimum effective range ( area target ) ----

350 meters .

3. Maximum effective range ( point target ) ---

150 meters .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-31 , 40mm Grenade Launchers , M203 and M79

TM 9-1010-221-10 , Operator's Manual : 40 -mm Grenade Launcher M203
TEC :
940-071-0088 -F M203 Grenade Launcher : Zeroing and Target Engagement

2-178
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1215

TASK:

Prepare and use aiming and firing stakes for the M203 grenade
launcher .

CONDITIONS :

Given an M203 grenade launcher , during daylight , in a defensive po-

sition with a requirement to engage targets , using field expedients
during periods of limited visibility .

STANDARDS :

During daylight , locate and identify deadspace , probable enemy ave-

nues of approach and assault positions . Construct aiming and firing
stakes that , when used , will cause rounds to impact on targets dur-
ing periods of limited visibility .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Short stakes are driven into the ground to control lateral move-
ment of the weapon . Against these deflection stakes , two addi-
tional stakes are emplaced for elevation . A small amount of
earth is scooped out of the ground to make a slight depression
for the toe of the weapon stock . An additional stake is driven
into the ground to absorb the weapon's recoil when it is fired .
At no time does the weapon touch the firer's shoulder ( fig . 1 ) .

2. For each additional target selected , step 1 will be repeated .

NOTE : It is recommended that no more than three expedient firing

devices be constructed at each firing site .

DEFLECTION STAKES

RECOIL STAKE

GRENADE LAUNCHER

ELEVATION STAKES

2-179
FM 5-12B1 /2

REFERENCE :

FM 23-12 , Technique of Fire of the Rifle Squad and Tactical Applica-

tion

2-180
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1241

TASK:

Prepare an M72A2 LAW for firing ; restore M72A2 LAW to carrying con-
figuration .

CONDITIONS :

Given an M72A2 LAW ( NOTE : Expended LAW may be used) .

STANDARDS :

1. Preparation for Firing .

a. Within 30 seconds , a visual prefiring safety inspection is

conducted . Do not extend/ fire damaged LAW .

b. Within 30 seconds , the launcher is extended and locked in

position , backblast area cleared , launcher placed on the
firer's shoulder in firing position and the safety handle is
moved to the ARM position .

2. Restoration to Carrying Configuration . Placed on safe , the

launcher tube is collapsed , sights are in the down position , and
sling assembly and pull pin are replaced .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. To prepare the launcher for firing :

a. Inspect the M72A2 LAW to insure that all seals are intact
and that the tube has not been cracked , punctured , or
crushed . Check the pull pin and trigger safety handle to
verify proper placement . Damaged LAW should not be fired .

b. Remove the pull pin and rotate the rear cover downward ( fig .
1A) , allowing the front cover and sling assembly to fall
free . Do not discard the sling assembly until the rocket is
fired . Extend the launcher by grasping the rear sight cover
( fig . 1B) and sharply pull the launcher to the rear until
locked into position ( fig . 1C ) .
c. Place the weapon on the shoulder ( fig . 2A) , check the back-
blast area and move the safety handle to the ARM position
( fig . 2B) . If friendly soldiers are in the backblast area ,
warn them and wait for them to get out of the area before
arming the launcher .

2-181
FM 5-12B1 / 2

A B

PREPARING TO
REMOVAL OF SLING ASSEMBLY
EXTEND LAUNCHER

SLING ASSEMBLY

LAUNCHER EXTENDED

Figure 1 .
ARMING THE LAUNCHER

A
B

PLACE LAUNCHER ON SHOULDER

C MOVING SAFETY TO " ARM" POSITION

Figure 2 .

2-182
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. To restore the launcher :

a. Return trigger safety handle to safe position .

RAC
b. Depress barrel detent and collapse launch tube .
DIA
c. Guide front and rear sight into position .

d. Replace sling assembly .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-33 , 66mm HEAT Rocket M72A1 , M72A1El , and M72

TEC :
948-071-0005 -F , Operating the LAW

2-183
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1242

TASK:

Engage targets with an M72A2 LAW .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , on a suitable firing range , given an M72A2 LAW

launcher tube with M190 subcaliber device and seven M73 rockets
(three rounds for stationary target phase and four rounds for moving
target phase ) , a series of stationary targets located between 75 and
250 meters from firer which will be presented in a combination of
frontal , flank , or oblique views . A moving [ 8 to 24 KMPH ( 5-14
MPH ) ] target location between 75 and 200 meters from the firer which
is presented in a flank view .

STANDARDS :

Firer will achieve :

1. Two target hits of three rockets fired at stationary targets .

2. Two targets hits of four rockets fired at moving targets .

PERORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Sights

a. Rear sight . The rear sight consists of a flip- up leaf with

a small hole in it . The leaf should be as close to the eye
as possible and the front sight viewed through the hole when
sighting ( aiming ) .
b. Front sight ( fig . 1 ) . The front sight is a clear plastic
flip-up leaf . On the sight there is a vertical range line
with ranges from 50 to 350 meters indexed in 25 meter incre-
ments , two curved stadia lines (DO NOT USE THE STADIA
LINES ) , and lead crosses .

2. Estimating Range . The first step in target engagement is to

determine the range to the target . This should be done using
visual range estimation ( see Task No. 051-191-1245 , Estimate
range) aided by the use of a range/ sector card . A range / sector
card is a rough drawing of the terrain in your defensive sector
which shows easily recognized reference points ) terrain features
or objects ) and the distance to each ( paced off or measured when
possible ) . If there are no usable reference points available ,

2-184
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

VERTICAL RANGE LINE

50

100 +

150

42
LEAD CROSS 200 +
ock
DOT
+
75
250
00 RANGE MARK 土
(5 土
300
STADIA LINES

土
-350

Figure 1 .

stakes can be erected at known ranges to serve the same purpose .

3. Sighting

a. Stationary targets . After determining the range , you sight

on stationary targets by :

(1 ) Locating the range mark on the vertical range line cor-

responding to the estimated range ,

(2) Placing that point on the center of target mass (fig .

2 ) , and

(3 ) Firing .
NOTE : Consider all front/ rear views as stationary targets , even if
moving .

10

2-185
FM 5-12B1 / 2

FRONTAL

50

+ 100 +

150

200

"
土

250

+
+

300

+ +

350

2a.

Figure 2 .
b. Moving targets . After determining the range , you sight on
moving targets by :

(1) Estimating target speed ( table 1) as slow or fast .

(2 ) Applying appropriate lead using lead cross directly
opposite estimated range , and

(a) For slow targets , lead cross should be on center

of mass ( fig . 3 ) .
FLANKING 30

+ 100 +

150

+ +
Stationary targets at an
estimated range of200 meters.
+

250

Figure 3 .
+ +

300

+ +

350
NIMA

2b.

2-186
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

For fast targets , lead cross should be on front

(b)
edge of target ( fig . 4 ) .
FLANKING OBLIQUE
50 50

+
+ 100 + + 100

150 150

200 + 200

+
+

250 250 Slow targets at a

+ + range of 200 meters.
+ +

300 300

+
+ + +

350 -350

3b.
За.

Figure 4 .

(3) Firing .

NOTE : If there is no lead cross at your estimated range , use an

imaginary lead cross which alines with those present on the sight .
ESTIMATE TARGET SPEED AS :

SLOW for :

a. Vehicles moving 5 mph (8 kph) or less .

b. All oblique targets where you see more of the front/ rear
than side .
FAST for:

All targets ( except b above ) traveling faster than 5 mph (8

kph) .

4. Trigger Squeeze . The trigger is unique in that it is a bar lo-

cated on the top of the launcher . To fire , pressure must be
applied straight down . The gunner should apply a steady , smooth
squeeze downward with fingertips only .
REFERENCES :

None presently available .

2-187
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1243

TASK :

Apply immediate action to correct a malfunction on an M72A2 LAW .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight or darkness , in a field location , given an M72A2

LAW; and attempt to fire the weapon having resulted in a misfire .
STANDARDS :

Within 2 minutes , apply immediate action and attempt to fire the

LAW . If the weapon still fails to fire , take appropriate action and
dispose of the weapon in accordance with unit SOP .

NOTE : Time factors and safety precautions apply only to training .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Immediate action .

a. Resqueeze the trigger . If round does not fire , wait 10 sec-

onds .

b. Place trigger safety handle on SAFE while keeping LAW

trained on the target , then remove from shoulder .

c. Wait 1 minute , depress detent and collapse launcher about 4

inches .

d. Re- extend launcher and place it on shoulder .

e. Arm , aim , and attempt to fire .

2. LAW fails to fire after use of immediate action .

a. Keep LAW aimed at target for 10 seconds .

b. Place LAW on SAFE and keep it aimed on target for 1 minute .

c. DO NOT COLLAPSE LAUNCHER .

d. Dispose of launcher as directed by unit SOP .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-33 , 66mm HEAT Rocket M72A1 , M72A1El , and M72

TEC :

948-071-0005 - F , Operating the LAW

2-188
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1196

TASK:

Maintain an M60 machinegun and ammunition .

CONDITIONS :

Te During daylight , given an M122 tripod-mounted caliber 7.62mm M60

machinegun , cleaning kit , lubricant , rag , and 100 rounds of linked
caliber 7.62 -mm ammunition .

STANDARDS :

Within 50 minutes perform general disassembly , inspection , lubrica-

tion , cleaning of the caliber 7.62-mm M60 machinegun and M122 tripod
mount . Upon completion of assembly , all deficiencies noted that can
be corrected by the gunner are to be corrected , and all deficiencies
should be noted on DA Form 2404 , and the weapon should operate cor-
rectly when a function check is performed . In addition , all ammuni-
tion should be properly linked , cleaned , and dry .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Disassembly , cleaning , inspection , lubrication , and assembly should

be performed in the following manner :

1. General Disassembly : In general disassembly the machinegun is

disassembled into its eight major groups , buffer and operating
rod group , bolt assembly , trigger mechanism group , barrel group ,
cover tray and hanger group , forearm assembly , and receiver
group ( fig . 1 ) . General disassembly begins with the bolt for-
ward , the cover closed , and the safety on SAFE . CAUTION : Be-

fore the gun is disassembled it must be cleared .

2-189
 BARREL
1.
GROUP HANGER
AND
TRAY
COVER
5.
GROUP BUFFER
6.
OPERATING
AND
GROUP
ROD
TRIGGER
2.
MECHANISM
GROUP LATCH
PIN
HINGE
A. BUFFER
A.
RETAINING
YOKE
SPRING
LEAF
A. PIN
COVER
HINGE
B. BUFFER
ASSEMBLY
B.
RETAINING
B.
PIN SPRING
C. DRIVING
SPRING
C.
GUIDE
ASSEMBLY
TRIGGER
C.
MECHANISM
GRIP
ASSEMBLY SPRING
C. SPRING
D.
STOCK
GROUP
3. ASSEMBLY
COVER
D. OPERATING
E.
ROD
ASSEMBLY
FM 5-12B1 / 2

FOREARM
4.
ASSEMBLY CARTRIDGE
E.
ASSEMBLY
TRAY
FEED ASSEMBLY
BOLT
7.
RECEIVER
8.
1

2
B

A
↑
3

4 5
0000000000 A
D

2-190
B
E
B
A C
6

Figure
1

ய
8
7
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

a. Removing the stock group .

(1) Raise the hinged shoulder rest and insert the nose of a
cartridge into the latch hole ( fig . 2 ) .

(2) With the latch depressed , remove the stock by pulling

it directly to the rear .
b. Removing the buffer and operating rod group and the bolt
assembly . The buffer and operating rod group and the bolt
assembly . The buffer and operating rod group consists of
the buffer retaining yoke , buffer , driving spring guide ,
driving spring and the operating rod assembly ( fig . 1 ) ,
group 6 ) .
(1 ) Press lightly with the palm of the hand against the
exposed buffer . Remove the buffer retaining yoke from
the top of the receiver ( fig . 3 ) .

hinged shoulder rest

0 000

latch hole

latch

Figure2

(2) Withdraw the buffer slowly . Allow the drive spring to

1
push out until the end of the drive spring guide is
showing at the rear of the receiver ( fig . 4 ) .
(4) Pull the driving spring guide and spring from the re-

ceiver and separate them .

2-191
FM 5-12B1 / 2

retaining yoke

buffer

✓ recess

Figure 3 .

drive spring guide

nood

buffer plunger
)

Figure 4 .

2-192
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

actuating cam roller

Figure 5 .

(5) With the left hand grasp the pistol grip and pull the
cocking handle to the rear until the bolt is separated
from the barrel socket . Continue to pull the operating
rod and bolt to the rear by pulling on the cam roller
(fig . 5 ) .

(6) When the operating rod and bolt are about 4 inches out
of the receiver , grasp them securely to prevent the
bolt from rotating , and remove them from the receiver
(fig . 6) . Relax the grip and allow the bolt to rotate
slowly .

(7) Grasp the bolt in one hand with the bolt face toward
the body , operating rod on top , grasp the operating rod
securely in the other hand . Push forward on the oper-
ating rod , pivot the front of the operating rod up , and
disengage it from the bolt ( fig . 7 ) .

2-193
FM 5-12B1 / 2

bolt

operating rod

Figure 6 .

operating rod

bolt

Figure 7 .

c. Removing the trigger mechanism group . The trigger mechanism

group consists of the trigger mechanism grip , leaf spring ,
and retaining pin; this pin is interchangeable with the sear
retaining pin .

(1) Press in on the rear of the leaf spring and rotate the
rear end up to clear it from the sear retaining pin
(fig . 8 ) . Pull to the rear to disengage the front
notch from the retaining pin .

(2) Remove the retaining pin by pushing it to the left .

2-194
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

leafspring

sear pin rear notch front notch

trigger housing pin

front of leaf spring

d Figure 8 .

(3 ) Slide the trigger mechanism group slightly forward ,

rotate the front of the housing down , and remove it
( fig . 9 ) .

recess

holding notch

ing ! x
efo

Figure 9 .
eft .

2-195
FM 5-12B1 / 2

recess

holding notch

Figure9

d. Removing the barrel assembly . The barrel assembly consists

of the barrel , flash suppressor , front sight , bipod assem-
bly ;, and the gas system . Push in on the barrel locking
lever plunger and raise the barrel locking lever to the ver-
tical position ( fig . 10 ) . Remove the barrel assembly by
pulling it straight to the front .

2-196
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

barrel lock lever

barrel group

Figure10

e.
Removing the cover , tray , and hanger group .
(1 ) With the feed cover raise , use a pointed object and
unlock the hinge pin latch , and push it out of its
recess .

(2) Remove the hinge pin by pulling it from left to right .

(3) Lift the feed cover from the receiver group .

(4 ) Raise the tray and hanger group from the receiver

group .

f.
Removing the forearm assembly .

(1 ) Turn the receiver so that the top is down .

(2) Insert a pointed object into the latch hole at the bot-
tom rear of the forearm assembly .

(2) Press down on the pointed object to release the forearm

latch , raise the rear of the forearm assembly slightly
and remove it to the front .

8. The receiver group . The receiver group consists of the re-

ceiver , rear sight assembly , cocking handle , and carrying
handle . General disassembly of the M60 is completed after
the removal of the other seven groups from the receiver
group .

2-197
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Cleaning :
a. The weapon must be clean at all times .

(1) The M60 must be cleaned immediately after firing and on

two consecutive days thereafter .

(2) If the weapon is not used , it should be inspected

weekly and cleaned as necessary , but in any case , it
should be cleaned every 90 days .

(3 ) The bore and other powder fouled parts are cleaned with
cleaning compound solvent ( CR ) . Do not wipe dry ; on
third day after firing , clean with rifle bore cleaner
(RBC) and wipe completely dry .

(4) All other parts , except for the rubber , are cleaned
with regular cleaning solvent which must be removed
immediately .

b. Insure proper care and use of the barrels .

(1) In order to prolong the life of the barrels , to retain

accuracy , and to allow continuous firing for prolonged
periods , two barrel assemblies are issued with each
gun .

(2) During continuous firing , the barrels are changed every

10 minutes , when firing at the sustained rate of 100
rounds per minute , every 2 minutes when firing at the
rapid rate of 200 rounds per minute ; and every minute
when firing at the cyclic rate wheich is in excess of
550 rounds per minute .

3. Inspection ( machinegun and tripod ) :

a.
A detailed inspection checklist can be prepared by consult-
ing the technical manual and field manual .

(1 ) This will give you correct nomenclature .

(2) It will also give you the correct functioning for the
various parts .

b. Before inspecting the M60 , have it disassembled into its

eight major groups with the spare barrel , case , and accesso-
ries readily available .

c. Begin with the shoulder gun stock , which is the first part
7
removed during disassembly .

(1 ) Check the rubber coating for cracks or flaking , an in

2-198
 FM 5-12B1 /2

dication that an improper cleaning fluid has been used

extensively .

(2 ) The shoulder gun stock latch , located in the lower half

of the metal stock plate , must be under spring tension
since it locks the shoulder gun stock to the receiver
assembly securely .

(3 ) Also check the hinged shoulder rest to insure that it

remains in the up ( or down) position .

d. Next check the buffer assembly , consisting of the buffer

retaining yoke and the buffer . Check the yoke for cracks or
serious distortions . Check the buffer for spring tension by
placing the buffer plunger on a hard surface and pressing
down . It should be firm and spring back .

e. To inspect the operating rod assembly , start with the oper-

ating rod .

(1 ) Check the frame that holds the operating rod yoke

roller for cracks .

(2) Make sure that the pin holding the yoke roller is
covered by a metal ident to prevent its loss .

(3 ) Move to the bolt and inspect the locking lugs for

chips .

(a) If they are excessively chipped in the front , the

unit armorer is authorized to take an india stone
and smooth it .

(b) If they are chipped in the back , turn the bolt in

for replacement .

(4) If the extraction claw is chipped , the extractor must

be replaced .

(5 ) Check the bolt plug for cracks

(6) Insure that the bolt is properly reassembled because

frequently gunners incorrectly reassemble the firing
pin and housing .

(7 ) The driving spring guide, poses no particular problem

except that on some older weapons a separation of the
spring guide shaft from the buffer receptacle has ос-
curred so just attempt to separate these parts and make
sure that they are tight .

2-199
FM 5-12B1 /2

(8 ) The driving spring is serviceable even though it may be

slightly bent ; however , if it has a distinct kink , it
must be replaced .

f. Then move to the trigger group .

(1 ) Again check the rubber coating on the grip itself .

(2 ) The trigger and the sear should move freely when the
safety is in the FIRE position .

(3 ) When in the S position , both parts may move , but only

slightly ; if excessive movement is noted , check the
sear recess in the safety lever for cracks or wear .

(4) Also make sure that the sear is assembled properly , and
is not excessively worn .

g. Inspect the barrel assembly for cracks in the barrel socket ;

make sure that the barrel lock engages properly .

(1) The flash suppressor may have some side to side move-

ment , but there should be no up and down movement . If

in doubt , have the armorer check it .

(2) The front sight must be tight .

(3 ) The gas system of the M60 is designed to be self- clean-

ing and is not disassembled by the gunner unless he has
first determined that it is dirty . He does this by
tilting the barrel end forward and listening for the
piston to fall . If dirty , it is cleaned only enough to
remove the excess carbon ; it should never be cleaned
with abrasives and even when clean will probably still
be somewhat gray in color .

h. The largest part of the weapon is the receiver assembly .

(1 ) Begin by checking the rear sight to insure that there

is a total of 10 mils deflection . ( 5 left , 5 right)
and that the clicks are positive with no "dead mils . "
Check the range scale to insure it is legible and not
broken . Check the elevation knob for positive clicks
and no " dead mils . " Check the slide release to insure
it moves freely and locks properly .

(2) In the cover assembly , all moving parts should be under

spring tension . These are the belt rollers , belt hold-
ing pawl , belt feed claws , cartridge guides , and cam
lever .

2-200
 FM 5-12B1 /2

(3 ) Check the reinforcement bar of the cartridge tray where

the actuating cam roller comes in contact to insure
that it is not cracked .

(4) The cocking handle and slide should move freely in the
cocking handle guide .

(5 ) All rails on the inside of the receiver should be

straight and alow the operating parts to move freely .

i. The M122 tripod mount and the traversing and elevating mech-
anism are almost trouble free ; however , you should inspect
to:

(1) Insure that all the legs will extend , the rear legs
lock .

(2) Insure all latches are under heavy spring tension .

(3) Insure that the mil readings on the traversing bar are
legible and the bar is not bent .

4. In general assembly the 8 main groups are replaced in order of

disassembly .
a. Replacing the forearm assembly .

(1 ) To replace the forearm assembly , guide the forearm as-

sembly over the operating rod tube , insuring that the
operating rod tube does not strike the baffles inside
the forearm assembly . Aline the recess in the forearm
assembly with the end of the operating rod tube .

(2) Tap up on the bottom rear of the forearm assembly with

the palm of the hand to lock into position .

b. Replacing the cover , tray , and hanger group .

(1 ) To replace the tray and hanger , aline the guides to the

left of the feed cover mounting lugs .

(2 ) To replace the cover , insert the cover spring in the

well in the receiver group and aline the cover with the
mounting lugs .

(3) Insert the hinge pin from the right side and then in-
sert the hinge pin latch from the left side .

c. Replacing the barrel group . Insure that the barrel lock

lever is in the vertical position ( fig . 10 ) . Put the rear

2-201
FM 5-12B1 / 2

of the barrel through the forearm assembly and aline the gas
cylinder nut with its recess in the forearm assembly . Lower
the barrel lock lever .

d. Replacing the trigger mechanism group .

(1) Engage the holding notch of the trigger mechanism in

its recess in the bottom of the receiver ( fig . 9 ) .
Rotate the front of the mechanism up and aline the
holes of the mechanism with the mounting bracket on the
receiver .

(2) Insert the retaining pin from the left . Attach the
leaf spring ( fig . 8 ) by placing the open end of the
leaf spring on the forward retaining pin , and then en-
gage the hooked end to the sear pin .

e. Replacing the bolt . With the camming slot up , hold the bolt
securely in one hand with the face of the bolt toward the
body . With the other hand position the rear of the operat-
ing rod yoke against the rear firing pin spool ( see fig .
11 ) . Push on the operating rod , compressing the firing pin
spring , and position the operating rod yoke between the fir-
ing pin spools . Holding the operating rod and bolt in one
hand , proceed to f below .

f. Replacing the operating group in the receiver .

(1) While holding the operating rod and bolt with one hand ,
with the other hand , push forward on the rear of the
bolt , causing the bolt to rotate until the locking lugs
are in a vertical position ( see fig . 11 ) .

(2) With the cam roller up , push the operating rod and bolt
into the receiver until the end of the operating rod is
even with the rear of the receiver ( fig . 12 ) .

(3 ) Put the drive spring guide into the drive spring , then
put the opposite end of the drive spring in the recess
of the operating rod . Pull the trigger and push in the
drive spring until the head of the guide is about an
inch from the receiver ( fig . 4 ) .

2-202
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

operating rod yoke

bolt

rear firing pin spool

Figure11

bolt

operating rod

Figure 12

g. Replacing the buffer assembly .

(1 ) Put the buffer plunger into the drive spring guide ( fi-
gure 4 ) . Push forward on the buffer until the operat-
ing rod and bolt go fully forward .

(2) Push in on the buffer until the recesses on the buffer

are alined with the recesses in the receiver . ( fig . 3 ) .

2-203
FM 5-12B1 / 2

h. Replacing the stock . Aline the guide rails of the stock

with the guide rails on the receiver . Push forward until
the stock is fully seated . A distinct click will be heard
when the latch engages .

i. Correct assembly . A function check must be performed to

insure that the M60 is correctly assembled . Place the saf-
ety on fire . Pull the cocking handle to the rear , cocking
the M60 ; close the cover , place the safety on safe and pull
the trigger ( should not fire) ; place the safety on FIRE and
pull the trigger while holding the cocking handle to allow
the bolt to ease forward .

5. Ammunition : Ammunition should be clean and dry . One bandoleer

should be carried on the machinegun and two bandoleers by the
machinegunner . All other ammunition remains in the can until
use is imminent .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-67 , Machinegun 7.62 - mm , M60

TEC Lessons 941-071-0078-F thru 941-071-0080 -F , Mechanical Training
M60 Machinegun

2-204
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

me
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1192
rd
De
TASK :

Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear an M60 machinegun .

the
CONDITIONS :

an
Given an assembled and cleared M60 machinegun , and any amount of
linked caliber 7.62- mm ammunition , and a requirement to expend all
rounds in the belt . ( Dummy round may be inserted in belt for train-
ing purposes . )

STANDARDS :

10
1. Situation 1 : Load and fire weapon within 5 seconds .

2. Situation 2 : When a stoppage occurs , stoppage must be elimi-

nated by using immediate action and the next round fired within
10 seconds * . Then fire all remaining rounds .

3. Situation 3 : Unload and clear weapon within 5 seconds .

*Only if round is ejected .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Loading

a. Place the safety on the FIRE position .

b. Pull the bolt to the rear .

c.
Return the cocking handle to the forward position , and place
the safety on the SAFE position .

d. Raise the cover and insure that feedtray , receiver , and

chamber are clear .

e. Place the first round of the belt in the feedtray groove and
close the cover , INSURING THAT THE ROUND REMAINS IN THE
FEEDTRAY GROOVE .

2. Unloading . Pull the bolt to the rear , place the safety on the
SAFE position , and return the cocking handle to the forward po-
sition . Raise the cover and remove any ammunition or links from
the feedtray .

3. Clearing the Gun .

2-205
FM 5-12B1 /2

a. After the gun is unloaded :

(1 ) The cover , feedtray , receiver , and chamber are checked

to insure they are clear .

( 2) The safety is placed on the FIRE position , the trigger

is pulled , bolt is eased forward with right hand , and
the safety is placed on the SAFE position .

(2) The safety is placed on the FIRE position , the trigger

is pulled , bolt is eased forward with right hand , and
the safety is placed on the SAFE position .

b. The gun is clear during mechanical training instruction with

the bolt forward , safety on the SAFE position , and the cover
raised . During live fire exercises , a cleaning rod is run
through the bore until the end is visible in the receiver
and is then removed .

4. Immediate Action . Immediate action iis the action taken to re-

duce the stoppage without investigating the cause . This action
must be accomplished within 10 seconds , when the barrel is hot
enough to cause a cookoff. Two hundred rounds fired in a
2-minute period may heat the barrel sufficiently to cause a co-
okoff . If a stoppage occurs :

a. Pull cocking handle to the rear .

b. Observe for ejected round , brass or link ( if nothing is

ejected , keep handle to rear and perform actions listed in
paragraph 5 below ) .

c. Return handle to forward position .

d. Aim on target and attempt to fire .

NOTE : If round fires , action is complete . If round does not fire :

Hot barrel -
wait 15 minutes* and then perform remedial ac-
tion , paragraph 6 below .

5. Failure to eject during immeidate action .

a. Keeping handle to the rear , place weapon on SAFE .

b. Open cover and remove linked ammunition .

c. Inspect chamber .

d. Close cover .

2-206
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

e. Move safety to FIRE and attempt to fire .

NOTE : If round fires or if barrel is not hot and round does not
fire , remove barrel and then remove cartridge ( round) by inserting a
cleaning rod from muzzle of weapon or using a cartridge extractor .
If barrel is hot and round does not fire , first wait 15 minutes* ,
then remove round in same way . After round ( cartridge ) is removed ,
determine cause of failure to fire and extract ( remedial action) .

a. Unload and clear weapon .

b. Inspect gun and ammunition to determine cause of stoppage .

c. Correct cause of stoppage , reload , re - lay on target , and

attempt to fire .
S
* 15 minute waiting period does not apply in actual combat .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-67 , Machinegun 7.62-mm , M60

TM 9-1005-224-10 , Operator's Manual , M60 Machinegun
TEC Lesson 941-071-0078 -F , The M60 Machinegun Mechanical Training
1
Part 1
TEC Lesson 941-071-0079 -F , The M60 Machinegun : Mechanical Training
Part 2
TEC Lesson 941-071-0080-F , The M60 Machinegun : Mechanical Training
Part 3
TEC Lesson 941-071-0083 -F , The M60 Machinegun , Prefire Procedures
TEC Lesson 941-071-0085 -F , Malfunctions and Stoppages , M60 Machine-
gun

2-207
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1301

TASK:

Maintain hand grenades .

CONDITIONS :

Given any standard issue hand grenade .

STANDARDS :

Within 10 minutes :

1. Inspect grenade for all obvious defects .

2. Correct all authorized defects to render the grenade effective .

3. Use correct procedure for carrying grenades as outlined in FM

23-30 .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Inspecting hand grenade for defects .

a. Check to insure that fuze is not unscrewed from body of gre-

nade .

b. Check for position of safety clip .

c. Remove dirt or grime from grenade with dry or damp cloth .

2. Attaching grenades to ammo pouches .

a. After checking the fuze for tightness , hold the web carying
sleeve on the side of the ammunition pouch and slide the
grenade's safety lever into the sleeve .

b. Be sure the pull ring or the safety pin is pointing down-

ward .

C. Wrap the carrying strap around the neck of the fuze , includ-
ing the safety lever and the pull ring , and snap the carying
strap to the carrying sleeve .

d. While moving , check the grenade to make certain the fuze is

tight and the carrying strap is secure .

2-208
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

FM 23-30 , Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals

TEC Lesson 942-071-0002 -F , Hand Grenade Maintenance and Identifica-
tion

TE

2-209
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1302

TASK:

Engage enemy targets with hand grenades .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in a field location , wearing field clothing , pro-

tective helmet and load - bearing equipment ( LBE ) , and carrying your
individual weapon and basic load of ammunition .

SITUATION 1 : Given instructions to pick up two fragmentation gre-

nades with time delay fuzes , two fragmentation grenades with impact
detonating fuzes , and one offensive ( concussion) hand grenade from a
resupply point containing these grenades and several special purpose
grenades .

SITUATION 2 : After picking up the grenades as directed in situation

1 you encounter , during the conduct of

0 Target 1 -

dismounted enemy troops clustered together at

range of approximately 35 meters . The situation and avail-
able cover will not permit moving closer to the target .
0 Target 2 an enemy emplacement without overhead cover (fox-
-

hole , trench or mortar emplacement ) at a range of 20 meters .

The situation and available cover will not permit moving
closer to the target .

0 Target 3
-

an enemy position with overhead cover (bunker ,

building , cave) which can be approached along a covered
route .

STANDARDS :

SITUATION 1 : Within one minute pick up only the grenades specified .

SITUATION 2 : For each target :

0 within 30 seconds for targets 1 or 2 ( within 15 seconds after

moving to target 3 ) .

0 using no more than two hand grenades for targets 1 or 2 or

one hand grenade for target 3 .

Ο throw at least one grenade so that it explodes within the

effective bursting radius for that target and grenade as
listed below without exposing yourself for more than 3 sec-
onds at any one time .

2-210
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Target Grenade Effective Engagement

Troops in the open Frag ( delay) Within 5 meters of center

Frag ( impact ) Within 5 meters of center
Offensive DO NOT USE

Troops dug in w/ o Frag ( delay ) Inside of position

1
overhead cover Frag ( impact ) Inside of position
Offensive Inside of position

Troops with over- Frag ( delay ) Inside of inclosure

head cover Offensive Inside of inclosure
Frag ( impact ) DO NOT USE
I

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Identification of hand grenades . You must be able to identify

those grenades which you will usually find within your unit by
their shape , color and/ or markings . Figures 1 through 11 will
assist you in becoming familiar with the more common grenades
E
currently available .

Figure 1. M33 FRAGMENTATION HAND Figure 2. M59 FRAGMENTATION HAND

GRENADE. Color/Markings OD with GRENADE. Color/Markings OD with
single yellow band and printing. single yellow band and printing, red safety
lever with word "IMPACT" on it.

க
Figure 3 . M26A1 FRAGMENTATION Figure 4. M67, FRAGMENTATION HAND
HAND GRENADE. Color/Markings - Same GRENADE. Color/Markings - Same as M33.
asM33. *M68 looks the same but has red safety lever
*M57 looks the same but has red safety lever with word "impact" on it.
with word " impact " on it.

2-211
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 5 . Figure 6 .
MK 3A 2 OFFENSIVE GRENADE Figure 6. M34, WP SMOKE HAND GRENADE
Color/Markings - Black w/yellow printing. (STANDARD COLOR AND MARKINGS).
Color/Markings Light green, yellow band
redprinting.
Old Markings - Light gray, yellow band, yellow
printing.

SM
HO
M
R
CS

Figure 7. An-M8, HC SMOKE HAND ma

GRENADE. Color/Markings - Light green,

black printing, white top.
NOTE: M18 Colored Smoke looks the same
but the top is the same color as the smoke. Figure 8. ABC-M7A3, CS RIOT CONTROL
HAND GRENADE. Color/Markings - Gray,
red band(s) and red printing.
NOTE: M6, M6A1, M7, M7A1, M7A2 look the
same only the printed name changes.

ING

Figure 9 .
ABC-M25A2, CS RIOT CONTROL
HAND GRENADE. Color/Markings - Same
as ABC-M7A3
Figure 10. AN-M14, ΤΗ 3 INCENDIARY
HAND GRENADE. Color/Markings - Light
red with black printing.
Old Markings - Gray with purple band and
purpleprinting.

2-212
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 11. MK 1 ILLUMINAting hand

GRENADE. Color/Markings - Unpainted with
black printing.
PE Old Markings - White with black printing.

‫ا‬

*All of these have impact detonating fuze M217 which has a red safety lever
with word IMPACT on it. Notice in figure 2 how the fuze head (M217) is
shorter than the time delay fuze pictured in figures 1, 3, and 4.
2. Uses of hand grenades . Hand grenades can assist you in accom-
plishing six different missions :

a.
To disable or kill personnel
-

Use fragmentation or concus-

sion grenades ( M67 , M68 , M26A1 , M56 , M57 , M33 , M59 or
MK3A2 ) . Fragmentation grenades M68 , M57 , and M59 are fuze
for exploding on impact after 1 second or within 4 seconds
without impact . The other frag grenades (M67 , M26A1 , and
M56 ) and the Offensive ( concussion) grenade MK3A2 will ex-
plode 4 to 5 seconds after the safety lever is released .

b. To signal
-

Use M18 Colored Smoke or M34 WP Smoke . (Extreme

caution should be used if the M34 is used since it can pro-
duce casualties up to 35 meters away from where it
explodes . )

c. To screen ( provide concealment ) Use AN-M8 Smoke Grenade .

-

If the AN-M8 is not available , the M18 Colored Smoke or M34

Smoke may be used although they are not as effective as the
AN-M8 . [ If M34 WP Smoke grenades are used , use caution as
noted in b . above . ]

d. To provide light ( illuminate ) - Use the MK1 .

e. To start fires -

Use the AN-M14 , TH3 Incendiary . ( The M34 WP

Smoke , MK1 and canister shaped riot control grenades can
also start fires but should not be relied upon . ]

f. To control riots or disable without serious injury . Use the

riot control grenades ABC-M7A2 ( canister shaped ) or ABC-
M25A2 ( baseball shaped ) grenades . ( Caution : The ABC-M25A2
is a bursting - type grenade which can cause injury up to 5
meters away . ]

2-213
FM 5-12B1 / 2

3. Throwing hand grenades .

a. The grip . The safest and easiest way to grip a hand grenade
for throwing is to hold it so that the safety lever is held
down by the thumb while keeping the pull ring ( and safety
clip if present ) free and facing the non- throwing hand . ( See
figures 12 and 13. )

Figure 12 . Figure 13 .

b. Body positioning and arming . The two most important points

in accurate throwing of hand grenades are body- target aline-
ment and eye - target focus . these must be practiced often ,
no matter which position is being used . Concentrate on
these and the proper arming of the grenade . Whatever posi-
tion you use , you should be as comfortable and natural as
possible . Before you throw , line your body up with the tar-
get so that your arm swings naturally to it , just as you
would when throwing a baseball . Then as you throw , keep
your eyes on the target until after you release the grenade .

To throw a hand grenade :

(1) Look at the target and judge the distance to it .

(2) Line your body up so you can throw comfortably .

(3) Hold the grenade under your chin and with the index
finger of your other hand pull and twist the pull ring
(at the same time pull the safety clip off the lever
with your thumb ) .

2-214
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

(4) As the pin is removed , look back at your target .

(5 ) Keeping your eye on the target , throw the grenade over-

handed .
(6) Release the grenade after it comes into your field of
vision and follow through

NOTE : One exception to this procedure is the Riot Control grenade

ABC-M25A2 . Since there is no lever you must hold the arming sleeve
down instead . Use the thumb of your throwing hand to do this .

C. Employing hand grenades .

NOTE: This section will address fragmentation and offensive ( con-

cussion) grenades only , since these are the ones you will normally
be required to use . The use of smoke and special purpose grenades
will be addressed at a higher skill level .

(1) Fragmentation grenade with time delay fuze : M67 ( fig .

4) , M26A1 or M56 ( fig . 3 ) and the M33 ( fig . 1 ) . These
grenades are your best all around choice . They can be
thrown a little over 40 meters by most soldiers and
will kill or injure exposed soldiers that are within 15
meters of them when they explode . You should , with
some practice , be able to throw the grenade to within 5
meters of a selected point 35 meters away from you or
within a fighting position 2 meters wide at 20 meters
range . Grenades thrown at these targets may hit and
roll into the target area , but you should practice to
hit the fighting position ' on the fly ' in order to de-
stroy positions with frontal cover . Another technique
which can be employed with these grenades is the cook-
off. To do this you release the safety lever and hold
the grenade for a two count (YOU MUST NOT HOLD IT
LONGER , HOWEVER ) . Then when the grenade s thrown enemy
personnel will not have time to pick it up and throw it
back . In addition , if it is thrown high into the air ,
it can explode over the target ( airburst ) .

(2) Fragmentation grenade with impact detonating fuze :

M68 , M57 and M59 ( fig . 2 ) . Like the time delay gre-
nades these can be thrown about 40 meters and have the
same effect except that they explode as soon as they
hit something . With these , you must hit the target ' on
the fly ' not on a bounce or roll . For safety purposes ,
they do not arm until 1 second after releasing the
lever , SO if you drop it you can still recover it and
throw it . If it hits something before 1 second has
passed and comes to rest , it will explode after 3 or 4
more seconds . This grenade is best used when you want
2-215
FM 5-12B1 /2

to insure enemy soldiers don't return it or on steep

hills where the delay fuze grenade might roll away from
the target .

(3 ) Offensive handgrenade , MK3A2 . This canister- shaped

grenade can also be thrown about 40 meters , but its
effectiveness against targets in the open is not very
good . Against targets in confined spaces such as
rooms , bunkers , or caves , it is the best choice .

d. Safety .

(1 ) Do not modify grenades in any way ( e.g. , tape or wire ) .

(2) Do not attempt to defuze grenades .

(3) Do not remove or use grenades found upside down in

their packing containers .

(4) Do not handle dud grenades at anytime .

(5) Do not attach grenades to clothing or equipment by the

pull ring .

(6 ) When using the cook-off technique , do not hold the gre-

nade for more than two seconds for any reason .

4. Training Tips .
a. Train for results not the process . Distance and accuracy
are the desired results of training , not constant practice
of step - by - step body positions . Concentrate on body- target
alinement , eye - target focus , safety procedures and the end
result -

a target kill .

b. Use training grenades ( of the type similar to the grenades

in your unit's ASP ) with practice fuzes . Use expended prac-
tice fuze heads with safety levers ; safety pin and safety
clip for all training when ' live ' practice fuzes are not
available .

C. Key on not exposing yourself for more than 3 seconds when

throwing grenades .

d. Train to minimum standards and then go on to continually

higher standards and more complicated techniques ( cook - off
and airbursts ) .

2-216
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0D REFERENCES :
way

FM 23-30 , Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals

TEC Lesson 942-071-0001 -F , The Handgrenade -

Types and Uses

Isla
Dut
942-071-0002 -F , Hand Grenade Maintenance and Identification
ot
942-071-0003 -F , The Hand Grenade-

Carrying , Arming , and Throwing

2-217
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1097

TASK:

Identify threat vehicles .

CONDITIONS :

Given a mockup , model , or photograph of the T62, T55 , MBP, BRDM2,

PT76 , BTR- 60PB , and several NATO vehicles .
STANDARDS :

Identify each vehicle observed as being either friendly or threat .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Note these common identification characteristics of both

friendly and threat tanks :

WITH OR WITHOUT MUZZLE BRAKE OR BLAST DEFLECTOR

TUBE
COMMANDER'S CUPOLA

BORE EVACUATOR
TURRET
MANTLET

HULL

DRIVE SPROCKET

IDLER WHEEL
TRACK SUPPORT ROLLERS
TRACK WHEELS
Figure 1.

2-218
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. You must be able to recognize this equipment .

NO MG ON TOP OF TURRET
DOME- SHAPED TURRET

NO RIGHTHAND T - 55
BORE EVACUATOR
CUPOLA Figure 2 .
AT END OF GUN TUBE

7.8'

FIVE ROAD WHEELS;

tr
NO RETURN ROLLERS
29.6' 10.7'

SPACE BETWEEN 1ST

and 2D ROAD WHEEL

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ROLE WHERE ASSIGNED REMARKS

Main Battle 3 per Tank Plt * Improved T-54
Crew
: 4
Tank 10 per Tank Co *
Weight: 36 tons
31 per Tank Bn *
Main Armament: 100mm gun
Ammunition: APHE HEAT HE
95 per Tank Regt
215 per MR Div
Effective Range: 1,500 meters
316 per Tank Div

* 4 per plt/13 per Co/40 per Bn in the tank Bn of the motorized rifle regiment.

BORE EVACUATOR
ONE -THIRD ROUND- SHAPED TURRET
FROM THE MUZZLE
T - 62
END OF GUN TUBE
Figure 3 .
8'
ン =

ROAD WHEEL SPACING

AMMANN

GREATER BETWEEN 3D
✓ AND 4TH AND BETWEEN
31.23- 11'
4TH AND 5TH ROAD WHEELS

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ROLE WHERE ASSIGNED REMARKS

Crew
: 4 Main Battle Same as T-55 Current first
Weight: 36.5 Tons Tank
line threat tank
Main Armament: 115mm Smooth-bore gun
Ammunition: HEAT , APFSDS
Effective Range: 2,000 meters

2-219
FM 5-12B1 /2

PT 76
BOAT- LIKE HULL AND FLAT DECK
Figure 4.

DOUBLE BARREL MUZZLE |

BRAKE AND BORE EVACUATOR

'
7.2

24.8' 10.3'
SIX ROAD WHEELS AND
RETURN ROLLERS

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ROLE WHERE ASSIGNED REMARKS

Crew
: 3
Recon 3 per MR & Tanks Regt Amphibious light
ReconCo tank
Weight: 14 Tons
Gun: 76mm 7 per MR & Tank Div Armor thickness
Ammunition: APHE , HEAT, HVAP Recon Bn equivalent to APC
Effective Range: 1,000 meters

BTR - 60PB
14.5-MM AND 7.62-MM
MACHINEGUNS
Figure 5 .
CONICAL TURRET
VISION PORTS

BOAT- LIKE 9.2

'
10000000

HULL
2000000
000000

EIGHT PNEUMATIC
23.6' 6.9'
WHEELS ( FOUR PER SIDE)

TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ROLE WHERE ASSIGNED REMARKS

Crew
: 2 Motor rifle 3 per MR Plt Armor overhead
Passengers: 8 troops APC 10 per MR Co cover and turret.
Weight: 10 tons 32 per MR Bn
Armament: 14.5 hv MG, 7.62 Co-ax
Wheels: 8
Effective range: 14.5-mm Machinegun - 2,000 meters
Effective range: 7.62-mm Machinegun 1,000 meters

2-220
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

P 23 - MM ZSU- 23-4
Figure 6 .

CYCLIC RATE FIRE

SLANT RANGE OF FIRE (RPM) CONTROL NUMBER ASSIGNED REMARKS
3000 M
4000 Radar Optic 4 per MR and Tk regt AA btry Self propelled,
four barrels

‫ا‬
20
09

57 -MM ZSU- 57-2

Figure 7 .

CYCLIC RATE FIRE

SLANT RANGE OF FIRE ( RPM) CONTROL NUMBER ASSIGNED REMARKS
4000 M 4 per Tk regt AA btry
240 Optic Self propelled,
twinbarrel.

Still held by
some tank
regiments.

2-221
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

BMP
FOUR FIRING PORTS EACH SIDE
Figure 8.
FLAT COMMANDER'S CUPOLA
73- MM CANNON

77

SIX ROAD
WHEELS
221 95΄

THREE UPPER SUPPORT ROLLERS

SHARP SLOPING FRONT
TECHNICAL CHARACTERISTICS ROLE WHERE ASSIGNED REMARKS
:
Crew 3 APC Same as BTR-60PB SAGGER ATGM
Passengers: 8 optional fit
Weight: 12.5 tons
Armament: 73 -mm smooth bore; 7.62 mm co- ax
Effective range: 7:3-mm 700 meters
Some fitted with SAGGER
Tracked
Speed in water: 8km/hr

3 RECON & ATGM VEHICLES

TECH -
CHAR ROLE NUMBER ASG REMARKS
BRDM
CREW: 5 SCOUT 1 PER MR BN HQ HAS AUXILIARY
WEIGHT: 6 TONS CAR 4 PER TK REGT WHEELS WHICH
ARMAMENT: NONE RECON CO CAN BE LOWERED
FIXED WHEELS : 4 4 PER MR REGT FOR OBSTACLE
SPEED IN WATER: RECON CO CROSSING .
10 KM/HOUR 2 PER MR AND TK
REGT CHEMICAL
DEF PL
21 PER MR AND TK
BRDM -2 HAS AUXILIARY
PER MR AND TK
WHEELS WHICH
CREW: 3-4 CAN BE LOWERED
WEIGHT: 7 TONS FOR OBSTACLE
ARMAMENT: CROSSING .
14.5 HV MG
7.62-mm COAX
WHEELS : 4
SPEED IN WATER:
10 KM/HOUR

SAGGER- BRDM

RANGE : 500-3000M MR AND 9 PER MR REGT ONE RPG- 7

WARHEAD: HEAT DIV ANTI- ATGM BTRY PER DETACH
0 GUIDANCE : WIRE. TANK FOR CLOSE
6 SAGGER MISSILES GUIDED 9MR DIV ΑΝΤΙΤΑΝK
MOUNTED ON BRDM WEAPON ATK BN DEFENSE .

Figure 9 .

2-222
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

TC 7-24 , Antiarmor Tactics and Techniques for Mechanized Infantry

TC 30-3 , Equipment Recognition Guide , 11 April 1975
TRADOC Bulletin 2 (unclassified ) , April 1975

2-223
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1091

TASK:

Use challenge and password .

CONDITIONS :

Given current challenge and password and a defensive position with

designated sector of fire . Soldier will be told that enemy and
friendly personnel may enter his sector and that he is to allow
friendly personnel to pass only if they respond with correct pass-
word and to detain ( capture ) other personnel as he is able .
STANDARDS :

Soldier will :

1. Detect and halt personnel in his sector .

2. Challenge them using correct challenge .

a. If given correct password , allow personnel to pass .

b. If not given correct password , attempt to detain ( capture)

personnel as he is able .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

IF ONE MAN DESIRES TO PASS :

1. Seeing or hearing someone approach your position , before that

person gets close enough to pose a threat , command the person to
" Halt ! " Use a clear voice , just loud enough to be heard .
2. Seeing the stranger halt , keep the stranger covered and without
exposing your position , ask " Who is there? " . Again , use a clear
voice but just loud enough to be heard so the enemy won't over-
hear if he's nearby .

3. When the stranger identifies himself , such as "Private Willard,

Messenger , " you order him to "Advance to be recognized . "

4. Maintain your concealed position and keep the stranger covered

with your weapon . When the stranger gets within two or three
meters of you , again order him to "Halt ! " .

5. Issue the challenge in a soft voice and wait for the stranger to
reply with the correct password . Hearing the correct password ,
give permission to pass if you have no other reason for doubt.

2-224
 FM 5-12B1 /2

If doubt still exists , demand further identification or a.

question only a friendly person would be able to answer .

IF A GROUP DESIRES TO PASS :

6. The procedure and precautions for a group are almost the same as
for one man . Seeing or hearing a group approach , before they
are close enough to pose a threat , order them to " Halt ! " .

7. The leader of the group should identify the group , such as

" Friendly Patrol . " Since you don't have the whole group to ad-
vance on you at once , order " Advance one man to be recognized . "

8. When the leader has come forward to be recognized give him the
challenge and get the password in reply .

9. Once you're satisfied that the leader is friendly , have the rest
of the patrol advance one by one and let the leader identify
each man .

10. Person ( s ) not able to give the proper password or identify him-
self to your satisfaction is disarmed and detained . Then notify
your immediate superior .

= REFERENCES :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

FM 22-6 , Guard Duty
TEC Lesson 935-071-1029 - F , Intelligence %24
%, Counterintelligence .

2-225
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1095

TASK:

Process known or suspected enemy personnel .

CONDITIONS :

Given a built-up area with friendly civilians and other friendly

elements , two surrendering aggressors with weapons ( rifles , bay-
onets , pistols , etc. ) and military documents , and a designated pris-
oner of war (PW) collection point 200 meters to the rear .
STANDARDS :

Within 15 minutes , without permitting the prisoners to talk with one

another and without allowing anyone to harm them : remove all weapons
and documents except individual ID papers ; tag prisoners and their
equipment with your complete unit ID , date , time , and circumstances
of capture ; and turn the prisoners ' weapons and documents over to
personnel at the collection point .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Suspected or known enemy personnel must be handled under the follow-

ing rules :

1. SEARCH prisoners ( fig . 1) for weapons and documents as soon as

you capture them . Take weapons to prevent resistance and take
documents , except individual identification papers , to prevent
the prisoners from destroying them . Prisoners from whom per-
sonal property is taken , including personal documents , should be
given a written receipt for the property . Tag documents and
other personal property taken so you know which prisoner had
them . Allow prisoners to keep items needed for their general
welfare or safety such as a protective mask .

Figure 1 .

2-226
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. SEGREGATE them into groups ( fig . 2 ) : officers , noncommissioned

officers , privates , deserters , civilians , female , and political
indoctrination personnel . This prevents the leaders from organ-
izing for a mass escape and from making the rest of the pris-
oners security - minded .

Figure 2 .

3. SILENCE ( fig . 3 ) is essential . Do not allow prisoners to talk

to each other . This helps to prevent plans of escape .

Figure 4 .

2-227
FM 5-12B1 / 2

4. SPEED ( fig . 4) prisoners to the rear . The information they have

does no good until obtained by an interrogator and processed .

Figure 4 .

5. SAFEGUARD the prisoners ( fig . 5 ) as you take them to the rear.

Do not allow anyone to abuse them , but do not allow anyone to
give them cigarettes , food , or water .

Figure 5 .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

TEC Lesson 935-071-1028 -F , Intelligence %3%,
3 Processing Captured Per-
sonnel , Equipment and Documents .

2-228
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

th TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1096

85
TASKS :

Collect/ report information -

SALUTE

CONDITIONS :

Given a tactical situation which includes an unspecified number of

aggressor personnel engaged in any type of activity and an observa-
tion site for the observer between 250 meters and 300 meters from
the aggressors .

STANDARDS :

Render an oral report to your immediate superior which describes

each point of interest expressed by the letters of the key word ,
SALUTE . ( Location may be descriptive need not be grid coordi-
-

nates . )

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Report all information as quickly , completely , and accurately as

possible . The example report below shows how much detail is
included in a complete report .

" Seven men in civilian clothes , one carrying rifle and bandoleer ,
six carrying farm tools , entered the village of Friedberg ( BN223227 )
by SW gate at 211300 August . Same seven men , all with rifles and
bandoleers , left Friedberg by NE gate 211330 August , walking NE on
road to Ogau ( BN214230 ) . "

2. A good way to remember how and what to report about the enemy is
to use the letters of the word SALUTE .

a. S - IZE - the number of personnel observed or comparable size to

a known object if other than personnel .

b. A- CTIVITY-What the enemy is currently doing .

c. L-OCATION - Grid coordinates or reference from a known point
including distance and direction ( or azimuth) from the known
point .

d. U-NIT -Describe any patches and/ or clothing ; or distinctive

signs or symbols or ID numbers on vehicles .

e. T- IME-The time the activity was observed .

f. E-QUIPMENT -Describe or identify all equipment associated

with the activity .

2-229
FM 5-12B1 / 2

3. Both oral and written reports may be accompanied by maps , pho-

tos , overlays , sketches , captured documents , enemy material , or
anything else which may assist in conveying the full meaning of
the information you are reporting .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

TEC Lesson 935-071-1026 -F , Intelligence Lesson 2313,
% Collecting and
Recording Information

2-230
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1098

TASK:
12

Perform guard duty .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight or darkness , at a guard post , with assigned weapon , am-

munition and special orders .

STANDARDS :

Any unauthorized person will be prevented from passing assigned

guard post . General and special orders will be adhered to .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Stand guard mount .

0
To stand guard mount , present a clean and neat appearance in
the proper uniform . Insure weapon is thoroughly clean . Exe-
cute close order drill commands properly ( in accordance with
FM 22-5 ) . Be able to recite the three general orders :

General Orders : All interior guards are required to me-

morize , understand , and comply with the following general
orders :

Number 1. I will guard everything within the limits of my

post and quit my post only when properly relieved .
Number 2. I will obey my special orders and perform all
my duties in a military manner .

Number 3. I will report violations of my special orders ,

emergencies , and anything not covered in my instructions ,
to the commander of the relief .

Specific References : FM 22-6 , Para 10 , 19 through 22 , 32 and 33 .

2. Perform as a sentinel on guard post .

0 When reacting to an inspecting officer , apply general and

special orders . On a post which does not require challeng-
ing , upon recognition of an officer , halt and present arms .

2-231
FM 5-12B1 /2

The special orders will specify the time for challenging .

After an authorized officer has been challenged and re-
cognized , do not salute . Remain in the challenge position
and display appropriate military courtesies until the of-
ficer has passed .

Ο
When using the challenge system , apply general and special
orders . During the time for challenging , all persons will be
challenged when they are about 30 steps from your position,
or at sufficient distance to allow for reaction time . After
challenging , remain in the challenge position until the indi-
vidual challenged is allowed to pass , depart , or is turned
over to the commander of relief .

Ο
Reacting to intruders (unauthorized persons ) , follow general
and special orders . Use only necessary force to apprehend
intruders . The circumstances under which you will fire on
persons or groups failing to heed a challenge will depend
upon the particular situation and the laws of the countries
concerned . In all instances the special orders will be fol-
lowed when reacting to intruders .

Specific References : FM 22-6 , Para 4 and 10 ; App E , Para 5 ; 4P , App

F; Guard Special Orders .

REFERENCES :

FM 22-6 , Guard Duty , Guard Special Orders

FM 22-5 , Drill and Ceremonies , Para 20 through 74

2-232
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1099

TASK :

Practice noise , light , and litter discipline .

CONDITIONS :
i

In daylight or darkness , under field conditions during any tactical

mission forward of " the light line" .
STANDARDS :

A level of noise , light , and litter discipline will be maintained so

that an enemy cannot locate your position .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Know that adequate noise , light , and litter discipline is vital

to survivability in combat .

2. Maintain proper noise , light , and litter discipline by using the

following procedures :

0 Noise discipline :
-

Avoid all unnecessary movement . This includes vehicular

and foot travel .

Metal parts must be taped or otherwise covered to prevent

them from making noise when contacting .
-

Talking must be held to only that level which is necessary

to conduct or plan for conduction of operations .
-

Radios must not be heard . Wire communications should be

used when occupying defensive positions .

0 Light discipline :
-

Allow smoking only when smoker is concealed from all pos-

sible enemy view .
-

If flashlights or other lights are used , they must be

filtered and concealed ( e.g. , underneath a poncho ) .
-

Cover anything that shines or glares -- shiny metal sur-

faces , vehicles , glass , etc.
-

Use all available natural concealment and camouflage on

vehicles , equipment .

2-233
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Litter discipline :
-

Use established collection points , when occupying fixed

positions , for disposal of used food containers , empty
ammunition boxes , old camouflage materials , dirt from de-
fensive positions , etc. During movement , litter will be
carried with the element until it can be disposed of with-
out leaving any trace .

All equipment must be concealed from enemy view .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling,

Chap 2
TEC Lesson 935-071-1029 -F , Counterintelligence

2-234
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1061

upyin TASK :
aineri

tter
Maintain individual physical fitness appropriate to unit mission .
sed CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in clear weather , at a test site established for

the Physical Fitness Test appropriate to your unit .
STANDARDS :

Patri
You must demonstrate , once every 6 months , that you can meet or ex-

ceed the minimum level of physical fitness required of each member

of your unit in accordance with the standards contained in AR 600-9
by :

1. Exceeding the minimum standard score of 60 points on each test

event with a total score of 300 or more points on the appropri-
ate Physical Fitness Test if you are under the age of 40 and are
assigned to a combat or combat support unit .

2. Exceeding the minimum standard total score of 300 or more points

on the appropriate Physical Fitness Test if you are under the
age of 40 and are assigned to a combat service support or TDA
unit .

NOTE : For SQT purposes , all soldiers will be required to take the
Advanced Physical Fitness Test ( APFT) . SQT credit will be awarded as
follows :

APFT SCORE SQT POINTS

0-299 0
300-399 1
400-449 2

450-500 3

REFERENCES :

FM 21-20 , Physical Readiness Training

AR 600-9 , Army Physical Fitness Program

2-235
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-201-1001

TASK:

Use and maintain handtools .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , given TO&E tools and cleaning equipment .

STANDARDS :

Proper techniques and procedures will be applied in the use of engi-

neer handtools . Tools will be maintained such that they are clean,
sharp , undamaged and ready for immediate use .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Use handtools

Ο Use hammers for driving nails , flattening , pounding and shap-

ing . Soldier will use the hammer to perform only the spe-
cific operation for which it was intended .

HANDLE FLUSH (HANDLE " CHOKED" FACE STRIKE AT ANGLE.

WITH EDGE OF AND TOO FAR UP RESULTS IN BENT NAIL
PALM ON HANDLE)

FACE STRIKES
SQUARELY

USING THE HAMMER USING THE HAMMER

(RIGHT) (WRONG)

Using the carpenter's curved-claw hammer.

FINISH
START

Pulling nails with the claw hammer.

2-236
 FM 5-12B1 /2

0
Use a maul for driving wood and a sledge hammer for driving
steel or breaking concrete .

BLACKSMITH'S DOUBLE- FACED SLEDGE

IRON BAND , MAUL

o Use screwdrivers for driving or turning a slotted-head bolt ,

a special -head bolt , or a screw .

SCREWDRIVER

ne 7

INCORRECT FIT
‫انولوم‬
ப CORRECT FIT

0
Use the half hatchet for making rough cuts ; a single-bitted
axe to fell trees or prune trees , cut and trim logs , or split
wood ; and an adz for hewing or smoothing logs .

RIGHT HAND IS GUIDING

OR LEADING HAND

14

(1) (2)

HALF HATCHET
LEFT FOOT IS CLOSER
TO WORK

HNA (3)

Swinging the ax.

(
4)

ADZ

2-237
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Use hand saw ( either cross - cut saw or ripsaw) for finish and
rough cut sawing . Crosscut saw will be used for cutting
cross the grain of the wood and ripsaw will be used for cut-
ting with the grain of the wood . Use one for cutting across
the grain of the wood and ripsaw will be used for cutting
with the grain of the wood . Use one or two - man crosscut
saws for cutting trees , cutting large trees into logs , and
sawing heavy timbers . A nested saw ( keyhole , compass , or
plumbers ) will be used to cut along lines , to start cuts for
larger saws , or to make cuts inside a board or partition
where sawing must start from a drilled hole or small opening .

Using hand saws.

STARTING A CUT WITH Making an inside cut with nested saws.
CROSSCUT SAW

RIPSAW
CUTTING
ANGLE

60°

CROSSCUT SAW
CUTTING ANGLE
45°
KEYHOLE SAW

Using the two- man crosscut saw.

Using the hacksaw.

PULL
GUIDE

GUIDE PULL

2-238
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Use drills to drill holes in wood or steel . Use the proper

drill for the material being drilled .
1

HORIZONTAL BORING

VERTICAL BORING

+++
WRONG RIGHT

Right andwrong way to bore through a board.

1000

WORK SCRAP WOOD

SCALE
TANG
SET SCREW

SCRAP
VISE

ADJUSTABLE CUTTER BLADE

Expansivebit. Using expansivebit.

2-239
FM 5-12B1 /2

Ο Use measuring tools to obtain accurate measurements . Use a

level to obtain a truly horizontal or vertical surface , and a

square when marking boards to obtain a square edge for proper
fit .

FOLDING CRANK

Steel measuring tape. Multiple

-folding rule.

45
°
LEVEL GLASS ( Horizontal test)
PLUMB GLASS (Vertical test)

BUBBLE
SETTING SLIDING T- BEVEL FOR ANGLES
GLASS TUBE

WHEN BUBBLE IS BETWEEN LINES

ON TUBE, WORK IS LEVEL
OR PLUMB

Using the carpenter's level.

MARKING ANGLES ON A BOARD

PP
CHECKING RECTANGULAR
WORK FOR SQUARENESS
MEASURING THE
DEPTH OF A HOLE
TESTING BEVELS

Using the sliding-Tbevel

CHECKING POSITION
OF A HOLE
USING A SET AS A
MARKING GAGE LAYING OFF EQUAL SPACES
TO SET AT A GIVEN
DISTANCE
CHECKING A
45° ANGLE

MEASURING AN ODD
SHAPED PIECE

DESCRIBING A CIRCLE
CHECKING A RIGHT ANGLE
MARKING A BOARD TO
FIT A CLOSE JOINT

Using the Wing Divider

2-240
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

MEASURING

LINE AFFIXED HERE

AT DESIRED
EVELATION

MARKING A BOARD AT RIGHT

ANGLE TO ITS EDGE
INNER EDGE OF SQUARE
TAUT LINE NECESSARY
FOR LINE LEVEL IN USE

0 Use a pick , pick -mattock , 'Ul-handled or long handled shovel

to excavate earth . Use post -hole digger , or earth auger to
drill holes in the ground .

Specific References : TM 5-461 , Chap 2 , Para 24-29 , Para 34 through

47, Fig 22 through 26 , Para 24, 36 , 37, 38 and 40, Fig 35 , Para 49
through 55 , Fig 36 through 45 , Para 83 through 89 , Para 93 through
99 , Para 128 through 136 , Para 75 through 82 , Fig 81 through 97 .

MATTOCK

LONG
POSTHOLE POSTHOLE D-HANDLED HANDLED
AUGER DIGGER SHOVEL SHOVEL

PICK

2-241
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Maintain handtools
Ο
Mark tools by engraving or stamping "US " on each tool if pos-
sible . Unit identifying marks are applied with with paint
using stencil or free hand when stamps or engraving tools are
not available .

0
Paint only handtools that are exposed to weather ( stored out
of doors ) or those tools specified by safety or fire regula-
tions . When handtools are to be painted observe the follow-
ing :

Do not paint faulty tools that may cause injury when later
used .

Do not paint cutting edges and serrated jaws or sections .

-

Do not allow several layers of paint to accumulate on , or

paint to run into knurled or scored places that serve as a
hand hold .

Be careful to keep paint away from the tool's swivels ,

slides , pivots , and other moving parts that require oiling
and free riding .

Ο Wipe all metal parts with a soft cloth containing a light oil
(SAE No. 10 or the equivalent ) . Do not coat nonrusting mate-
rials with oil . Rub linseed oil into wooden parts of hand-
tools until they feel slightly dry on the surface .

Ο Keep all edges sharp and in top condition by whetting , using

an oilstone or combination carborundum stone . Honing ( slip-
stones ) are used to whet concave surfaces . Use the proper
size and shape file to keep a keen cutting edge . Grind tools
if the cutting edge cannot be restored by whetting or filing .
Always wear goggles when grinding a tool to protect eyes from
flying particles and chips .
0 Store tools to prevent them from falling or otherwise injur-
ing personnel , and to protect tools from damaging each other .
Hand tools issued in a special box , case , or other receptable
will be returned to that receptable when stored . A list of
tools that belong in each tool box should be a part of the
toolbox for inventory purposes and to aid in returning each
tool to its proper location . Where one person is responsible
for an individual set of tools , physical security should be
provided to lock the storage area or boxes for each set of
tools .

2-242
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

3. Safety .

Remain alert for any condition that might endanger self or

others . Follow the general safety rules in using handtools :
-

Before using any handtool , inspect it . Repair or replace

loose , splintered , or defective handles ; damaged blades or
parts ; rough edges or burrs ; and any other defects that
lessen the strength of a handtool or make it unsafe for
use .

Store handtools in a suitable storage space , so that the

tools do not injure persons who are storing , removing , or
working with them in the toolroom . Serious injuries can
result from a cluttered toolroom .

Be sure handtools are not dirty , oily , or greasy . Dirt

and grease can cause tools to slip out of the hand or off
the work surface , resulting in injury .
-

Do not carry sharp - edged or pointed tools in pockets or

where they can protrude and cause injury . Types of tools
that can be carried on the person , like the machete and
small twist drill bits should be carried in safe con-
tainers or sheaths .

Do not use tools made of metal and power tools in location

where sources of ignition may cause a fire or explosion .
-

Wear safety goggles or other approved safety type face and

eye protectors when breaking rocks , grinding , striking
metal with metal , drilling , driving wedges , chipping , or
performing similar operations that might result in flying
particles . Be sure others in the vicinity are protected
in the same way .
-

Do not toss tools from one location to another . Do not

drop tools to another level or throw them to another
worker . When handtools cannot be passed between personnel
use suitable containers or ropes .
-
Do not work on electrical circuits while the current is
on. Turn the current off at the fusebox . Even though a
wooden handle may give some protection , the current could
arc and cause body burns as well as damage to the hand-
tool .

2-243
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Do not wear loose or torn clothing that may cause injury

by becoming entangled with handtools .
-

Steady or secure with clamps or vises any loose material

to be cut , sheared , chiseled , or filed , to prevent the
tool from slipping and causing injury .
-

Keep all handtools in good condition , because dull or de-

fective tools can injure the user and others in the vicin-
ity .

Do not swing a chopping or chipping tool until certain

that no one in the vicinity will be endangered by the
backswing ; by a possible glancing - off of the tool; by
chips fying from the work ; or by a toolhead loosening from
impact of the work .
-

Do not allow pointed or edged tools to lie around on work

surfaces , sawhorses , or on the ground in such a position
that persons brushing against them may suffer injuries .
When not in use , all tools should be placed in a toolbox
or in a position that will prevent injury to persons in
the area .

When handtools are being used , fingers or parts of the

body of the worker and all those in the vicinity should
not be exposed to injury by the tools .
-

Use each handtool only for the purpose for which it was
intended . Tools used wrongly can break or be damaged so
that they cause injury .

Never leave power tools running unattended . Be sure all

safety guards are secured and the motor is turned off be-
fore leaving a power tool .

Specific References : TM 5-461 , Para 4 through 14 .

REFERENCES :

TM 5-461 , Engineer Handtools

TEC Lesson 910-171-0013 -F , Maintain Handtools

2-244
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

se
TASK NUMBER : 051-201-1002

TASK:

वार
Use and maintain pioneer electric tools .
CONDITIONS :

In daylight , in a field environment , given an electric tool trailer

with accessories , and necessary maintenance supplies .

STANDARDS :

Observing safety precautions , proper procedures will be applied in

using tools to perform simple construction tasks . Tools will be
maintained in operational condition according to applicable manuals .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Ground all electrical tools and wear goggles and ear plugs while
operating electric tools . Snap all bits into place when using
the electric hammer and tighten all drill bits by using chuck
key when using electric drill .

0 The portable drill .

-

Fit bit into drill and tighten bit in place by using chuck
key . Secure work to be drilled . As the bit approaches
the other side of the work , withdraw drill from hole fre-
quently to remove wood chips and ease up pressure .

Ο The electric hammer .

Slide the bit to be used into the muzzle of the hammer SO

that it snaps into place and is held securely . When using
the cutter type assembly , ease up slightly on the pressure
when nearing the end of a cut .

The impact wrench .

-

Before using the wrench , insure that the wrench's reversi-

ble features are functioning by first connecting wrench to
suitable power source , depressing the on/ off switch , and
allowing the wrench to operate a few seconds noting direc-
tion of rotation . Next , stop the wrench , adjust the
ratchet switch so the direction is reversed , and start the
wrench again . Then place a suitable attachment on driving
anvil , making sure it is secure .

2-245
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Ο The electric circular saw .

Set the saw guide to the correct angle and depth , and in-
sure material to be cut is steadied by its own weight or
is secured firmly by clamping or wedging . When cutting ,
have the saw blade revolving at full speed before it con-
tacts the material . Then , without forcing the saw , apply
firm pressure , to guide the saw through the work .

0 The chain saw .

Before using the chain saw make sure the teeth on the bot-
tom of the chain have been positioned SO that they cut
toward the motor or engine of the saw . Hold the chain saw
against the tree , pile , or timber to be cut , applying
light pressure in guiding the saw through the work . Use
the oiler as required .

0 The electric sander .

Secure the proper attachment to the spindle and insure the

work is secured by weight or clamps . Switch on the sander
so that the attachment is turning before placing it on
work surface and sweep the sander over an 18 inch span
using light pressure . Remove sander from the work surface
before turning off the switch .

Specific References : TM 5-461 , Para 141 , 142, 143 and 148 (c ) .

2. After using electrical power tools , wipe tools clean with a soft
cloth , and use compressed air to blow sawdust and other parti-
cles from areas that cannot be reached with a cloth . Wipe cord
clean , to prevent deterioration from oil or grease . Check the
ground wire connection to make sure it is not loose , and check
the electrical plug for loose prongs or cracked casing . Store
power tools in containers designated for this purpose or in the
tool trailer after coating all metal parts with oil .
Specific References : TM 5-461 , Para 148 .

3. Safety is a very important factor in the use of power tools . In

addition to the safety rules given , observe the following safety
precautions when using power tools .
Ο Before using a power tool , remove all loose accessories like
special wrenches and chuck keys from the tool ; make sure the
tool and its cord are in top working condition; make all nec-
essary adjustments on the tool ; be sure the correct type and
size of tool and accessory have been selected for the job ;
make sure the tool is grounded ; and see that the switch oper-
ates freely and releases positively .

2-246
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Check the voltage specifications to make sure the power is

correct for the electric tool being used . If it is necessary
to use an extension cord for an electric tool , make sure the
cord is the type with a third wire for grounding purposes .
Be sure that the tool's switch is on the OFF position before
it is plugged into the electrical outlet . Do not start the
gasoline- driven chain saw with the clutch engaged . This
saw's fan screen must be in place before operating the saw ,
because this screen prevents injury to the operator and keeps
leaves , twigs , and other material out of the fan .

Ο
While operating a power tool , keep a firm grip on it and give
it full attention . Keep all safety guards in position , and
use safety goggles when necessary . Fasten loose clothing and
remove jewelry or similar items that might catch on the
tool's moving parts . Do not disturb or distract a person who
is operating a power tool , since this can cause injury to
that person as well as those around him .

0
Unplug the power tool when it is not being used , when chang-
ing blades , bits , disks , or other accessories , and when lu-
bricating or greasing the tool . On the gasoline - driven chain
saw , it is necessary to cut off the current by using the
switch to short - circuit the spark plug to the frame , or by
placing a special tab found above the spark plug on the
plug's bare contact point . Never transport a power tool from
job to job while the motor or engine is running .

0 Do not start a power tool in an unventilated area where gaso-

line , naphtha , or other combustible liquids or gases are pre-
sent , because the slightest spark could ignite such gases and
cause serious injury . Electric tools should not be operated
while they are wet or damp . If the tool's surface becomes
wet , dry it thoroughly before using . If the power tool has
been submerged in water or liquid , send it to an experienced
maintenance man for dismantling , cleaning , and baking dry .

When using the electric circular saw , keep in mind that the
dangerous cutting edge of this saw projects below the surface
of the board being cut . Keep the hands , legs , and other
parts of the body away from underneath the work surface ,
since the guard on the portion of the blade under the work
has been slid back to allow the saw to cut .

REFERENCES :

TM 5-461 , Engineer Handtools

TEC Lesson 030-051-6341 , Use/Maintain Pioneer Electric , and Pneu-
matic Tools

2-247
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-201-1003

TASK:

Use and maintain pneumatic tools .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , with 250 cfm compressor , all accessories and cleaning

materials .

STANDARDS :

Pneumatic tools will be used and maintained to accomplish specific

tasks safely without damage to tools or other equipment .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Use pneumatic tools .

0 Use the correct tool to accomplish each construction task

assigned .

Ο Paving breaker .
-

When using the paving breaker hold it down while it is in

operation using only sufficient pressure to keep it in
place ( leaning heavily on it will result in shortened
stroke and less work being performed ) . Wear goggles to
protect eyes from chips and dust .

Specific References : TM 5-331 C, Para 3-11 and Para 3-30 ( b ) .

2-248
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Nail driver .

Start the nail or spike with a hand held hammer before

using nail driver . Keep the nail driver in line with the
nail or spike being driven so as to strike the nail or
spike squarely to minimize the possibility of bending
(25-60 nails can be driven per hour ) . The rivet buster
attachment will be used when cutting the heads of rivets .
Specific References : TM 5-331 C , Para 3-13 and Para 3-30 ( d ) .

Circular woodworking saw .

-

Install the saw blade so that the teeth point toward the
front of the saw. Periodically check oil reservoir and
fill as required . Attach rip fence for ripping lumber .
Specific References : TM 5-331 C, Para 3-14 and 3-30 ( e ) .

0 Chain saw .

Use the chain saw to cut trees or timber up to 24 inches

-

in diameter . Never operate the saw without the guard bar

in place . Insure that the chain has 1/2 inch slack from
the blade at the center and the teeth on the bottom run
point toward the saw .

Specific References : TM 5-331 C, Para 3-15 and 3-30 ( f) .

2-249
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Wood- boring drill .

-

Start the wood-boring drill slowly and hold the drill

firmly and exert only enough effort to counteract the ten-
dency of the drill to rotate . Never attempt to knock a
ship auger out of the chuck , the auger ejector will be
used.

Specific References : TM 5-331C , Para 3-16 and 3-30 (g )

Ο Backfill tamper

When tamping loose earth , wrap the head in burlap . In

gravel , leave the head unwrapped . Allow the tamper to
work at its own speed . Insure the head does not strike
the sides of structures such as culverts , walls , forms ,
etc and never operate the tamper unless the head is in
contact with the material to be tamped .

Specific References : TM 5-331C , para 3-18 and 3-30 ( i )

0 Concrete vibrator .

Use the concrete vibrator to work out voids in freshly

placed concrete . Insert the head into the concrete-keep
it moving at all times . Do not allow it to strike forms
or reinforcing rods . After withdrawing it from the con-
crete , shut it off , and clean it .

Specific References : TM 5-331 C , Para 3-19 and Para 3-30 ( j ) .

2-250
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Maintain pneumatic tools .

Ο Insure each pneumatic tool is properly lubricated by main-
taining the oil level in the tool reservoir or air line
oiler . A thin film of oil accumulating on a sheet of paper
placed in front of the tool's exhaust port indicates proper
lubrication . Oil drops accumulating on the paper, or foam
around the tool's exhaust port , indicates over lubrication .
Insure that the air pressure is maintained . (Sluggish or
erratic operation indicates too much or too little air pres-
sure . ) Keep the tools clean and tool ports unclogged .

Specific References : TM 5-331 C , Para 3-29 , Para 3-30 .

34
3. Observe safety precautions .

Ο Be very careful with compressed air . At close range it is

capable of putting out eyes , bursting eardrums , causing seri-
ous skin blisters , or even killing an individual .

0
In using pneumatic tools it is essential that a firm grip be
maintained on the tool at all times . Insure a good footing
and proper balance at all times while the tool is in use .

Ο The air will be turned off and the tool disconnected when
repairs or adjustments are being made or the tool is not in
use . When disconnecting the tool all pressurized air will be
discharged from the line before the connection is broken .

0
Before connecting a pneumatic tool inspect the hose to assure
that it is in good condition and free from obstructions .
When blowing out the line make certain the end of the hose is
pointed into the air and is secured against whipping . Make
certain all connections are tight before the line is pressur-
ized .

0 The operator must wear protective clothing and equipment ,

such as goggles , gloves , and respirators , appropriate for the
particular pneumatic tool being operated . Conversely , loose
clothing must not be worn while operating the rotary drills
or the chain saw .

0 Operators should release the throttle of the tool at the

first indication that the tool is out of control . If the
tool gets seriously out of control , let it fall .

2-251
FM 5-12B1 /2

REFERENCES :

TM 5-331 C , Rock Crusher , Air Compressor and Pneumatic Tools

TEC Lesson 030-051-6341 , Use/ Maintain Pioneer Electric and Pneumatic
Tools

2-252
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1001

TASK:

Identify and maintain demolition equipment .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with a demolition mission , a

demolition set , and cleaning equipment ( file , whetstone , ten-weight
oil , sandpaper , and steel wool ) .
STANDARDS :

1. Each piece of equipment specified in the performance measures

will be identified by sight and designed use .

2. Each piece of equipment will be maintained in an operational

condition .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Identify demolition equipment .

0
The M1A4 priming adapters is used to secure the blasting cap
in a standard fuze well . It can be used with both electric
and nonelectric detonating assemblies .

PRIMING ADAPTER
ELECTRIC
BLASTING CAP LEAD WIRES

ΜΙΑ4

PRIMING
ADAPTER

DETONATING CORD
OR
TIME BLASTING FUSE

NONELECTRIC
BLASTING CAP

2-253
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 M8 blasting cap holders are metal clips used to attach and

hold a blasting cap to sheet explosive . It is supplied with
the M118 sheet demolition charge and the M186 roll demolition
charge . It is also supplied as a separate item of issue .

BLA
M8 STI
NG
HOL
CAP DER

DETONATING ASSEMBLY

0 Tape , pressure sensitive , is available in rolls 2 inches wide

and 72 yards long . It is to be used to tape charges to dry ,
clean wood , steel or concrete . It will not adhere to dirty ,
wet or oily surfaces or when the surface temperature is below
freezing .

0
Adhesive paste , Ml , is a sticky , putty- like substance used to
attach charges to vertical or overhead flat surfaces . It is
useful in holding charges while tying them in place or , in
some instances without tying . It will not adhere satisfacto-
rily to dirty , dusty , wet or oily surfaces . It loses its
adhesiveness at subzero temperatures and becomes useless if
wet .

0
Adhesive , supplementary , for demolition charge , tube is used
to hold charges when the surface is below freezing , wet or
under water . It is issued in water- resistant , cardboard ,
slide boxes with wooden applicators .

Ο Waterproof sealing compound is used between the time blasting

fuse and a nonelectric blasting cap , to moisture proof primed
dynamite . It does not make a permanent seal and must not be
submerged unless the charge is to be fired immediately .

2-254
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Cap crimper , M2 is used to crimp a nonelectric blasting cap

to time fuse , detonating cord or a standard base . It is also
use to cut time fuse . One leg of the handle is pointed for
punching cap wells in explosives and the other leg has a
screwdriver end . The crimper is made of a soft nonsparking
metal which will conduct electricity .

PUNCH CRIMPING JAW

SCREW DRIVER CUTTING JAW

0 The blasting galvanometer is an instrument used in testing

the electric firing system to check the continuity of the
circuit ( the blasting cap , firing wire , wire connections and
splices ) in order to reduce the possibility of a misfire .
-

The galvanometer must be handled carefully and kept dry .

It should be tested before use by holding a piece of metal
across its two terminals . If this does not cause a wide
deflection of the needle (23 to 25 units) the battery is
weak and should be replaced . Being delicate , the instru-
ment must not be opened except to replace a weak cell .
-

Two types of batteries authorized for use with this galva-

nometer are :

0 BA- 245 / u Special Silver Chloride Dry-Cell ; 0.9v total

voltage ; FSN 6135-128-1632 ; authorized for use at tem-
peratures above 0 ° Fahrenheit .

0
BA- 2245 /u Special Silver Chloride Dry -Cell ; 0.9v total
voltage ; FSN 6135-833-9909 ; authorized for use at tem-
peratures below 0 ° Fahrenheit .

CAUTION : Only the two special silver chloride dry - cell batteries
BA-245/u and BA-2245/u , which produce only 0.9 volts , are to be used
in the galvanometer , as other batteries may produce enough voltage
to detonate electric blasting caps . Because of the tendency to cor-
rode , the batteries should be removed from the galvanometer when it
is not to be used for extended periods .

2-255
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0
The M51 blasting cap test set was developed to replace the
blasting galvanometer for continuity testing of electrical
firing circuits . It is waterproof and may be used at tem-
peratures as low as 40° Fahrenheit . Keep the set dry and
-

handle it with care . Before using the set test it to be sure

it is operational by doing the following :
-

Connect a piece of bare wire between the binding posts .

-

Sharply depress handle while observing the indicator lamp.

If the set is operative , the lamp will flash .
-

Remove wire from the binding posts and test firing cir-
cuits .

Continuity testing is accomplished by connecting firing

circuit to test set binding posts and then depressing
handle sharply . If there is a continuous ( intact) circuit
(even one created by a short ) , the indicator lamp will
flash .

2-256
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

HANDLE

BINDING POST

G
IN
ST ET LAST P
TE S B CA

1
M5

4.5 IN

INDICATOR
LAMP

o The ten cap blasting machine is a small direct current elec-

trical generator that produces enough current ( 15 amperes ) to
initiate 10 electric caps connected in series if the handle
is rotated to the end of its travel . Operate the machine as
follows :

Before fastening the wires to the terminals , try the mach-

ine to see whether it works properly by vigorously twist-
ing the handle as far as possible several times until it
works smoothly .

Fasten the firing wires tightly to the terminals .

-

Insert the left hand through the strap and grasp the bot-
tom of the machine .

Grasp the handle with the right hand and turn it vigor-
ously clockwise as far as possible .

2-257
FM 5-12B1 /2

CAR

TERMINALS

HANDGRIP
STRAP

0 The 30- , 50- and 100-cap machines are similar except for
rated capacity , size and weight . To operate :
-

After connecting the firing wires to the terminals raise

the handle to the top of its stroke .
-

Push the handle down quickly as far as it will go .

2-258
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0
The M32 blasting machine is a smaller lighter machine in-
tended to replace the larger heavier machines . This machine
uses a small alternator which is gear driven by the handle
actuated plunger . When sufficient energy is available in the
capacitors ( this may take three or four strokes of the
handle ) , an internal switching circuit dischrges the electri-
cal energy to the output terminals , and thus to the blasting
circuit . The handle is held against the body of the machine
by a D- ring . The plunger is spring loaded , so that when the
handle is free of the D- ring it is in the READY-TO-FIRE posi-
tion . When the handle is squeezed and the machine success-
fully actuated , a momentary glow is normally visible in the
lamp located on top of the housing between the spring actu-
ated terminals whether connected to a firing circuit or not .

TING
BLAS INE
CH
MA

R NG S
GE RI IP
IN D. CL

0
Firing wire is normally issued in 500 foot coils . It is the
two conductor AWG No. 18 plastic or rubber covered . It is
normally carried and stored on the reel unit RL 39 A.

Annunciator wire AWG 20 in 200 - foot rolls is issued for

making connections between blasting caps and firing wire .
WD- 1 / TT commo wire may also be used , but it has a higher
resistance which increases the power requirement so blast-
ing machines cannot be used with the full rated number of
caps with this wire . As a rule of thumb , use 10 caps less
than the blasting machine rating for each 1,000 feet of
WD- 1 ( commo wire ) used .

2-259
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Reel RL39A consists of a spool that holds 500 feet of wire, a

handle assembly , a crank , an axle and two carrying straps as
shown below .

WINDING
DEVICE

CARRYING
STRAPS

00

REEL

2-260
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Detonating cord clips are used to hold together two strands

of detonating cord either parallel or at right angles to each
other as shown below .

TROUGH
TONGUE

CLIP BEFORE BENDING

BRANCH LINE CONNECTION

SPLICING TWO CORDS

2-261
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Cap boxes are issued to store nonelectric caps during trans-

port . Ten nonelectric caps can be stored in one box. When
caps are stored in the box , the same care in handling MUST be
exercised as when handling the caps themselves .
Ο
Carrying bags are issued for carrying small amounts of explo-
sives to a job site .

0 Pocket knives are also isued for general purpose use such as
cutting explosives , tape , twine , etc.

Specific References : FM 5-25 , para 1-45 thru para 1-58

2. Maintain demolition equipment .

Ο Store each item in its intended compartment of the demolition
chest .

Ο
Remove battery from galvanometer before storage .
Ο
Do not use a tool for anything but its intended use .
Ο Do not allow items to become lost .

If an item is used up or lost , tell your supervisor SO that

it can be reordered .

Keep each item free of moisture , mud , dirt or carrosion .

Coat metal objects that rust with a light coat of oil .

Keep canvas clean , dry and free of mildew .

Touch up or sharpen cutting edges when they become dull .

Do not store a defective tool or instrument in the set , re-
pair it or turn it in for replacrment .

Do not store explosive items in the chest .

Specific References : None

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

2-262
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1002

line
TASK:

Construct a nonelectric ( initiation) detonating assembly .

CONDITIONS :
se
Under any environmental conditions , with time blasting fuse , non-
electric blasting cap , priming adapter , M60 or M2 weatherproof fuse
ignitor , and M2 cap crimpers .
STANDARDS :

The nonelectric blasting cap will detonate when fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Determine the length of time blasting fuse .

0 Cut and discard a 6 - inch length from the free end of the time
blasting fuse to prevent a misfire caused by the exposed
powder absorbing moisture from the air .

0 Cut off a three- foot length of time blasting fuse to check

the burning rate .
-

Light the fuse end using a fuse ignitor , match , or

lighter .
-

Note the time it takes for the fuse to burn .

Compute the burning rate per foot by dividing the time in

seconds by the length in feet .

Cut the time blasting fuse long enough to permit the person
detonating the charge to reach a safe distance by walking at
a normal pace before the explosion . This cut should be made
squarely across the time fuse .

2. Attach the blasting cap to the time blasting fuse .

Ο Take one blasting cap from the cap box , inspect it by looking
into the open end . If any foreign matter or dirt is present ,
hold it with the open end down , and shake it gently or bump
the hand holding it against the other hand .
-

If foreign matter does not come out , discard cap .

-

Never tap the cap with a hard object or against a hard

object .

2-263
FM 5-12B1 /2

Never blow into the cap .

-

Do not insert anything into the cap to remove any dirt or

foreign material .

Ο Hold the time blasting fuse vertically with the square cut
end up and slip the blasting cap gently down over it so that
the flash charge in the cap is in contact with the end of the
time fuse ; if not in contact , it may misfire . Never force
the time fuse into the blasting cap by twisting or any other
method . If the end is flattened or it is too large to enter
the blasting cap freely , roll it between the thumb and
fingers until the size is reduced to permit free entry .

0 After the blasting cap has been seated , grasp the time blast-
ing fuse between the thumb and third finger of the left hand
and extend the forefinger over the end of the cap to hold it
firmly against the end of the time fuse . Keep a slight pres-
sure on the closed end of the cap with the forefinger .

0 Slide the second finger down the outer edge of the blasting
cap to guide the crimpers , and thus obtain accurate crimping,
even in darkness .

BLASTING CAP CRIMPER

FUSE

CRIMPING CAP ON FUSE

Ο Crimp the blasting cap at a point 1/8 to 1/4 of an inch from

the open end . A crimp too near the explosive in the blasting
cap may cause detonation . Point the cap out and away from
the body during crimping .

2-264
 FM 5-12B1 /2

0 Note : If the blasting cap should remain in place several

days before firing , protect the joint between the cap and the
time blasting fuse with a coating of sealing compound or some
similar substance . (As this sealing compound , a standard
issue , does not make a waterproof seal , submerged charges
should be fired immediately . )

3. Attach a priming adapter ( used when available with a demolition

block with threaded cap well ) .

0 Pass the end of the time blasting fuse through the priming
adapter . (The time fuse should move through the adapter
easily . )

0 Note: For long lengths of time blasting fuse it may be more

convenient to pass the end of the fuse through the priming
adapter before crimping the cap onto the time fuse .

4. Attach M60 weatherproof fuse igniter if one is to be utilized .

0 Unscrew the fuse holder cap two or three turns but do not
remove . Press the shipping plug into the igniter to release
the split collet , and rotate the plug as it is removed .

0 Insert the free end of the time fuse in place of the plug
until it rests against the primer .
0
Tighten the cap sufficiently to hold the fuse in place and
thus weatherproof the joint .

2-265
FM 5-12B1 / 2

5. Attach M2 weatherproof fuse igniter if one is to be utilized .

Ο Slide the fuse retainer over the end of the fuse , firmly
seating it , and applying sealing compound at the joint be-
tween the time blasting fuse and the igniter to protect the
open end of the fuse from moisture .

6. Construct expedient igniter if no standard igniter is available .

Split the fuse at the end .

0 Place the head of an unlighted match in the powder train .

7. The completed detonating assembly will look like this .

time blasting fuse igniter

Blasting cap

Priming adapter (if used)

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Chapter 2

TEC Lesson 645-093-7320-F , Prepare a Non- electric Firing System

2-266
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1003

util
TASK:

use

Prime a demolition block nonelectrically .

IN

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with a completed nonelectric

detonating assembly ( with and without a priming adapter ) , demolition
blocks ( with and without threaded cap well) , an M2 crimper , and
string .
in
STANDARDS :

The charge will be primed so that it detonates when fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Demolition block with a threaded cap well and priming adapter

available .

Ο Inspect cap well for foreign material .

Insert cap into cap well .

Screw the adapter into the cap well .

2. Demolition block with a threaded cap well and no priming adapter

available .

Ο Inspect cap well for foreign material .

0
Wrap a string tightly around the demolition block and tie it
securely leaving about 6 inches of loose string on each end
after making the tie .

6 IN
-STRING
CAPWELL-

DEMOLITION
BLOCK

6 IN

2-267
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Insert a blasting cap with fuse attached into the cap well .
1
0 Tie the loose string around the fuse to prevent the blasting
cap from being separated from the block .
Ο NOTE : Do not tie the string so tight that powder train is
broken in the fuse .

STRING

TIME FUSE
DEMOLITION
BLOCK TNT

Blasting cap

3. Demolition block without threaded cap well .

Ο Make a hole in the end of the demolition block with a pointed

nonsparking instrument or the pointed handle on the M2
crimpers large enough to contain the blasting cap .

CRIMPERS

POINTED LEG

0 Using string , wrap several turns around the block and tie any
knot . Position the tie so it will be at the top of the hole
when the fused cap is inserted .
knot
string

hole for blasting cap

2-268
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0
Insert fused cap into hole . ( Note : Never try to force a cap
into an expedient cap well that is too small to admit it
easily . Remove cap and enlarge hole . )
:
Ο
Tie string around the time fuse at the top of hole with two
half hitches .

TIME FUSE

TWO HALF HITCHES

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Chapter 2

2-269
FM 5-1281 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1004

TASK:

Construct an electric ( initiation) detonating assembly .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions ( except for electrical storms , in

the vicinity of FM radio transmissions , or other static electricity
outputs that could detonate electric blasting caps ) , with firing
wire , electric blasting caps , an M51 blasting cap test set or a
blasting galvanometer , and a blasting machine .
STANDARDS :

The electric blasting cap will detonate when fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Lay out firing wire .

0 After locating a firing position a safe distance away from

the charges , lay out the firing wire from the charges to the
firing position .

0 Test the firing wire .

-

When using M51 blasting cap test set :

Check test set by connecting the posts with a piece of

bare wire . The indicator lamp should flash when the
handle is squeezed .

Ο Separate the firing wire conductors at both ends , and

connect those at one end to the test set binding posts .
Actuate test set . The indicator lamp should not flash .
If it does , the firing wire has a short circuit .
Ο Twist the wires together at one end , and connect those
at the other end to the test set posts . Actuate test
set . The indicator lamp should flash . If it does not
flash , the firing wire has a break .
-

When using the blasting galvanometer :

Ο Check galvanometer by holding a piece of metal across

its terminals . If the battery is good , this should
show a wide deflection of the needle , approximately 25
units ( zero ohms ) .

2-270
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Separate the firing wire conductors at both ends , and

touch those at one end to the galvanometer posts . The
needle should not move . If it does , the firing wire
has a short circuit .

Twist the wires together at one end and touch those at

the other end to the galvanometer posts . This should
cause a wide deflection of the needle ( about 6 1/2 ohms
or 23 to 24 units for a 500 - foot length) . No movement
of the needle indicates a break; a slight movement in-
dicates a point of high resistance which may be caused
by a dirty wire , loose wire connection , or wires with
several strands broken off at connections .

Note: Firing wire may be tested on the reel , but should

be tested again after unreeling , which may separate broken
wires unnoticed when reeled .

0 Twist the free ends of the firing wire together to prevent an

electric charge from building up in the firing wire .

2. Test electric blasting caps .

0 Test each blasting cap to be used in the electric firing sys-

tem .

When using the M51 blasting cap test set :

0 Check the test set as described above .

0 Remove the short circuit shunt from the lead wires of

the electric blasting cap .

0 Attach one cap lead wire to one binding post and tie
other cap lead wire to the other post , and squeeze the
test set handle . If the indicator lamp flashes , the
blasting cap is satisfactory . If it does not flash ,
the cap is defective and should not be used . During
the test , always point the explosive end of the blast-
ing cap away from the body .
-

When using the blasting galvanometer :

Ο Check the galvanometer as described above .

0 Remove the short circuit shunt .

Touch one cap lead wire to one galvanometer post and

the other cap lead wire to the other . If the galva-
nometer's needle deflects slightly less than it did

2-271
FM 5-12B1 / 2

when instrument was tested the blasting cap is satis-

factory ; if not , the cap is defective and should not be
used . During the test , always point the explosive end
of the cap away from the body .

Ο Note: If the battery is fresh , the galvanometer should

read 25 units ( zero ohms ) when the instrument is tested
and about 24 units ( about 2 ohms ) when a good blasting
cap is tested .

After each cap has been tested , twist the free ends of the
cap lead wires together or shunt them with the short circuit
shunt provided to prevent an electric charge from building up
in the cap lead wires .

3. Connect series circuit .

0 If two or more electric blasting caps are used , connect their

lead wires into one of the two series circuits described in
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1006

0 If more than 10 blasting caps are used in the series circuit ,

or if the circuit is complicated , it should be tested with
the test set or galvanometer .
-

When using the M51 blasting cap test set , connect the free
ends of the blasting caps lead wires to the test set bind-
ing posts . The indicator lamp should flash .

When using the blasting galvanometer , touch the free ends

of the blasting cap lead wires to the galvanometer posts .
This should cause a wide deflection of the needle .

0 Splice the free cap lead wires to the firing wire .

4. Insert caps into charges . ( See TASK NUMBER 051-193-1005 . )

5. Test entire circuit .

0 Move to the firing position and test the entire firing cir-
cuit with the test set or galvanometer .
-

Splice firing wires to series circuit and move to firing

position .
-

When using the blasting cap test set, connect the free
ends of the firing wire to the binding posts . The indica-
tor lamp should flash . If the lamp does not flash , the
circuit is defective .

2-272
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Ο Note : Since the M51 test set cannot discriminate be-

tween a firing circuit that is properly set up and one
with a short in it , special care must be taken in wir-
ing the circuit to avoid shorting .
-

When using the galvanometer touch the free ends of the

firing wire to the galvanometer posts . This should cause
a wide deflection of the needle . The magnitude of the
deflection depends upon the number of caps and the length
of the firing wire . If there is no deflection , the cir-
cuit is defective .

0 Note: To get a "wide deflection of the needle " the

galvanometer battery should be in good condition .
-

If the firing circuit is defective , shunt wires . Then go

down range and recheck the circuit . If a splice is found
defective , resplice the wires . If a cap is found defec-
tive , replace it . Continue to test all caps and wires in
the circuit , then test the entire circuit again to make
sure that all breaks have been located before attempting
to fire the charge .
i

0 Twist the free ends of the firing wire together .

6. Test operate blasting machine .

0 Test operate the blasting machine several times as outlined
in TM 9-1375-203-15 to insure that it operates properly .

7. Connect the blasting machine .

0 Untwist the free ends of the firing wire and fasten them to
the two posts of the blasting machine .

8. Special precautions .
If two or more electric blasting caps are connected in the
same circuit , be sure that they are of the same type and made
by the same manufacturer . This is essential to prevent mis-
fires , as blasting caps of different manufacturers have dif-
ferent electrical characteristics which can result in some
caps in the circuit not firing because others fire more
quickly and thus break the circuit before the slower caps
have received enough electricity to fire . This is not true ,
however , of the M6 special electric blasting caps - all of
which are made according to the same specifications . Blasting
caps of the same manufacturer may be identified by the label ,
color of the cap , or shape of the shunt .

2-273
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Ο For safety reasons , only one individual should be detailed to

connect the blasting machine to the firing circuit and to
fire the circuit . He should be responsible for the care and
security of the blasting machine at all times during blasting
activities . He also should either connect the blasting wires
in the circuit or check their connection by on- the- spot vis-
ual examination .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Chapter 2

TM 9-1375-203-15 , Operator's , Organizational Maintenance , Direct
Support , General Support , and Depot Maintenance Manual , Electric
Blasting Equipment ;
TEC Lesson : 645-093-7321 -F , Prepare Electric Firing System

2-274
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1005

TASK:

Prime demolition block electrically .

그

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions ( except for electrical storms , in

the vicinity of FM radio transmissions , or other static electricity
outputs that could detonate electric blasting caps ) , with firing
wire , tested electric blasting caps , priming adapter , demolition
blocks ( with and without threaded cap well ) , and M2 crimper .
STANDARDS :

The charge will be primed so that it detonates when fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Demolition block with a threaded cap well and priming adapter

available .

0 Inspect cap well for foreign material .

0 Untwist the free ends of the lead wire and fasten them to the
firing wire .

Pass the lead wires through the slot of the adapter and pull
the cap into place in the adapter .

0 Insert the cap into the cap well of the block and
1
screw the
adapter into place .

2. Demolition block with a threaded cap well and no priming adapter

available .

0 Inspect cap well for foreign material .

0 Untwist the free ends of the lead wire and fasten them to the
firing wire .

0 Insert the electric cap into the cap well and tie the lead
wires around the block by two half hitches or a girth hitch .
Allow some slack in the wires between the blasting cap and
the tie to prevent any pull on the blasting cap .

2-275
FM 5-12B1 /2

PRIMING
ADAPTER

SHUNT
REMOVED

ELECTRIC
BLASTING
CAP GALVANOMETER

TNT

3. Demolition block without a threaded cap well .

0 Make a hole in the end of the demolition block with a pointed
nonsparking instrument or the pointed handle on the M2
crimpers large enough to contain the blasting cap .

0 Follow steps in performance measure 2. ( Note : Never try to

force a cap into an expedient cap well that is too small to
admit it easily . Remove cap and enlarge hole .

2-276
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

ELECTRIC-
TNT BLASTING
CAP

SHUNT
REMOVED

TWO HALF HITCHES

OR
GIRTH HITCH

GALVANOMETER 、

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolition , Chapter 2

TEC Lesson : 645-093-7321 -F , Prepare Electric Firing System

2-277
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1006

TASK:

Connect electrical firing circuits .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions ( except for electrical storms , in

the vicinity of FM radio transmissions , or other static electricity
outputs that could detonate electric blasting caps ) , with prepared
electrically primed charges and appropriate demolition tools and
equipment , using prescribed splicing methods .
STANDARDS :

Every charge in the series circuit will detonate when the circuit is
fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Splice firing wire .

0
Insulated wires , before splicing , must have the insulating
material stripped from the ends . Expose about 3 inches of
bare wire and remove any foreign matter such as enamel by
carefully scraping the wire with the back of a knife blade or
other suitable tools . The wires should not be nicked , cut or
weakened when the wires are pared and multiple strand wires
should be twisted lightly after scraping .

0 Splicing method .
-

Two wires , which have been prepared as described above ,

may be spliced as shown . This is called the Western Union
"pigtail " splice . Two pairs of wires are spliced in the
same manner as the two wire splice . One wire of one pair
is spliced to one wire of the other pair , and the process
is repeated for the other two wires .

2.

2-278
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Splicing two wires ( Western Union

" pigtail" splice) .

0
A short circuit may very easily occur at a splice if certain
precautions are not observed

If pairs of wires are spliced , stagger the two separate

splices and tie with twine or tape .
CAP WIRE TWINE OUTSIDE
INSULATION

(1 )

An alternate method of preventing a short circuit is when

the splices are separated , not staggered .

-- FIRING WIRE

(2)
CAP WIRE

Whenever possible insulate splices from the ground or

other conductors by wrapping them with friction tape or
other electrical insulating tape . This is particularly
necessary when splices are placed under wet tamping . Cir-
cuit splices , not taped or insulated , should not lie on
moist ground . The splices should be supported on rocks ,
blocks , or sticks so that only the insulated portions of
the wires touch the ground . They may also be protected by
inserting them into cardboard cap spools which may be bent
to hold the splice firmly inside .

2-279
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Splices may be protected from damage from pull by tying

the ends in an overhand or square knot , allowing suffi-
cient length for each splice .

KNOT TO KEEP
TENSION OFF SPLICE

Specific References FM 5-25 , chap 2 ; para 2-5 , Fig 2-5 , 2-6

0 Series circuits .

Common series is used for connecting two or more charges

fired electrically by a single blasting machine . A common
series circuit is prepared by connecting one blasting cap
lead wire from the first charge to one lead wire in the
second charge and so on until only two end wires are free ,
then connecting the free ends of the cap lead wires to the
ends of firing wire . Connecting wires ( usually annuncia-
tor wire) are used when the distance between blasting caps
is greater than the length of the usual cap lead wires .
A. COMMON
SERIES
CIRCUIT

- or
Leap frog series is useful for firing ditching charges
any long line of charges . It consists of omitting alter-
nate charges on the way and then connecting them to form a
return path for the electric impulse to reach the other
lead by the firing wire . This brings both end wires out
at the same end of the line of charges , and thus elimi-
nates laying a long return lead from the far end of the
line of charges back to the firing wire .

2-280
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

" LEAPFROG "

by SERIES
CIRCUIT

ALTERNATE CAPS
ARE CONNECTED

Specific Reference ( s ) : FM 5-25 , Chap 2, para 2-6 , Fig . 2-7

:

REFERENCE :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

2-281
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1007

TASK:

Prime explosives with detonating cord .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with designated explosives ,

detonating cord , and appropriate demolition tools and equipment .
STANDARDS :

The charge will be primed so that it detonates when fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Prime demolition blocks .

0 The method which offers the greatest assurance of detonation

is to affix a nonelectirc blasting cap to the end of the
detonating cord and place it in the demolition block similar
to nonelectric priming methods .
0 The common method is to lay one end of a 4-foot length of
detonating cord at an angle across the explosive . The run-

ning end is then given three wraps around the block and the
end laid at an angle . On the fourth wrap , slip the running
end under all wraps parallel to the other end and draw tight .

A. COMMON METHOD

0 An alternate method is to tie the detonating cord around the

explosive block (on top of the booster , if present ) with a
clove hitch with two extra turns . The cord must fit snugly
against the blocks and the loops must be pushed close tog-
ether .

2-282
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

B. ALTERNATE NO.1

0
Another alternate method is to place a loop of detonating
cord on the explosive with four wraps around the block and
loop . The running end is pulled through the eye of the loop
and tightened .

Note : This method is more applicable to short than to

long detonating cord branch lines or primers .

C. ALTERNATE NO. 2

2-283
FM 5-12B1 /2
Pr

0
2. Prime plastic explosives .
Ο To prime plastic explosives with detonating cord , form either
the overhand , triple roll , or Uli knot .

OVERHAND KNOT

TRIPLE ROLL KNOT

8wraps minimum
ULI KNOT

0 Then insert the knot into a block of explosive or a molded

piece of explosive as shown . In either case , insure that
there is at least 1/2 inch of explosive on all sides of the
knot . (When using the Uli knot , a minimum of 1 inch of ex-
plosive must be on the end of the knot . )

TAPE 2. c l m
5 m ( in) in

1.5 cm (2 i min
n)

ELECTRIC OR
NON-ELECTRIC
CAP

RA
NK

2-284
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

3. Prime dynamite .

0 Dynamite cartridges may be primed with detonating cord by

attaching a nonelectric blasting cap to the end of the deto-
nating cord and following any of the methods for nonelectric
priming .

0 Dynamite may also be primed by lacing the detonating cord

through it . This is used chiefly in boreholes , ditching , or
removal of stumps . Punch four equally spaced holes through
the dynamite cartridge and lace the detonating cord through
them as shown .

DETONATING

ELECTRIC OR
NON ELECTRIC
INITIATOR

4. Prime 40-pound ammonium nitrate cratering charge .

0 Pass the end of the detonating cord through the tunnel on the
side of the can .

0
Tie an overhand knot on the portion passed through at least
6- inches from the end .

2-285
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Dual prime . To insure positive detonation of the ammonium

nitrate cratering charge all charges should be dual primed
with a l -pound block of explosive taped to the side of the
charge near the cap well or detonating cord tunnel to
detonate the TNT booster in the center of the charge .
This demolition block may be primed by the same method the
cratering charge is primed . Both charges should be primed
to detonate simultaneously .

5. Prime shaped charges .

Ο Shaped charges are primed with detonating cord by attaching a
nonelectric blasting cap to the end of the detonating cord
and following standard nonelectric or electric priming meth-
ods .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , chapter 2

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , chapter 2
TM 9-1375-213-12 , Demolition Materials
TEC Lesson : 645-093-7322-F , Prepare Detonating Cord Firing System

2-286
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

en
ual
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1008
ide

TASK:
ec

eth
Make detonating cord connections .
bepr
CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with detonating cord , with and

without Ml detonating cord clips , and with M2 crimpers .
STANDARDS :

Detonating cord splices and branch line connections will be made in

accordance with the performance measures .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Splice the ends of detonating cord .

0 A square knot pulled tight is used to splice the ends of

detonating cord . At least a 6- inch length should be left
free at both sides of the knot . When fabric is used to cover
the detonating cord , the fabric must not be removed .
6
IN

6
IN

Ends of detonating cord are spliced by overlapping them about

12 inches , using two clips , one at each end of the overlap ,
and bending the tongues of the clips firmly over both
strands . The connection is made secure by bending the trough
end of the clip back over the tongue .

2-287
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Make branch line connections .

Ο The angle formed by the branch line and the cap end of the
main line should not be less than 90 ° from the direction from
which the blast is coming ; at a smaller angle , the branch
line may be blown off the main line without being detonated .
At least 6 inches of the running end of the branch line is
left free beyond the tie .

TO OTHER CHARGES
MAIN LINE

90°
6IN
BRANCH
LINE

Girth hitch with an extra turn.

0 A branch line is fastened to a main line by means of a girth

hitch with one extra turn . Branch lines of detonating cord
are connected by clipping the branch line with the U- shaped
trough of the clip and the main line with the tongue of the
clip .

BRANCH LINE CONNECTION

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Chapter 2

TM 9-1375-213-12 , Demolition Materials
TEC Lesson: 645-093-7322-F , Prepare Detonating Cord Firing System

2-288
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1009

TASK:

Construct a detonating cord firing system .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with detonating cord , with and

without Ml detonating cord clips , with M2 crimpers , adhesive tape ,
string , and an electric or nonelectric ( initiation) detonating as-
sembly .

STANDARDS :

The ring main and branch lines will detonate when fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Form a ring main . A ring main is made by bringing the main line
back in the form of a loop and attaching it to itself with a
girth hitch with one extra turn or an Ml detonating cord clip .
This will detonate an almost unlimited number of charges . The
ring main makes the detonation of all charges more positive be-
cause the detonating wave approaches the branch lines from both
directions and the charges will be detonated even when there is
one break in the ring main .

2. Connect branch lines .

0 Branch line connections should be made perpendicular to the

ring main using a girth hitch with one extra turn or an Ml
detonating cord clip . Kinks in lines should be avoided , and
curves and angles should not be sharp . Any number of branch
lines may be connected to the ring main . But a branch line
is never connected at a point where the ring main is spliced .
In making detonating cord branch line connections , avoid
crossing lines . However , if this is necessary , be sure to
have at least one foot of clearance at all points between the
detonating cords ; otherwise , the cords will cut each other
and destroy the firing system .

3. Attach an electric or nonelectric ( initiation) detonating assem-

bly .

0 Splice the cap of either detonating assembly to the ring main

using either an Ml detonating cord clip , string , or adhesive
tape . Allow at least a 6 - inch length of ring main free be-
yond the splice .

2-289
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 As an alternate method , splice a 3 - foot length of detonating

cord to the cap of either detonating assembly as above .
Splice the other end of the 3 - foot detonating cord to the
ring main using either an Ml detonating cord clip or a square
knot .

SquareKnot 3 Foot Length Of Detonating Cord

M3

RingMain

Cap Spliced To Detonating Cord

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demotions , Chapter 2

TEC Lesson: 645-093-7322 -F , Prepare Detonating Cord Firing System

2-290
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1010

TASK :

Install US firing devices on standard military explosives .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions with demolition charges ( with or

without cap well ) , MlAl pressure firing device , Ml pull firing de-
vice , M3 pull release firing device , M5 pressure release firing de-
vice , nonelectric blasting caps , and M2 crimpers .
STANDARDS :

Without causing premature detonation , each firing device will be

installed on demolition charges so that the device will detonate the
charge as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install an MlAl pressure firing device .

0 Remove protective cap from base and crimp on a non- electric

blasting cap . (Crimper jaws should be placed no further than
1/4 inch from the open end of the blasting cap . )
Ο
Assemble three pronged pressure head and extension rod if
needed , and screw in top of pressure cap .

0 Attach firing device assembly to demolition charges .

0 Remove safety fork first , and positive safety last .

M1A1 PRESSURE FIRING DEVICE

1 2
LOCKING 3 SAFETY CLIP
SAF ETY CLI
POSITIVE
SAFETY
6 NONE LECTRIC DET CORO
SAFETY BLASTING CAP TAPE

CRIMPER
D

BASE
COUPLING PROTECTIVE CAP
POSITIVE
SAFETY PIN
Initiating pressure 10 lbs or more .
EXPLOSIVE

NONELECTRIC TO ARM Remove satety clip.

BLASTING CAP Then positive safety pin.

Remove protective cap from base

ann crump on nonelectrie blasting
cap. Assemble det cord , nonelectric
blasting cap , and firing device .

2-291
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , Para 1-57i

2. Install an Ml pull firing device .

Ο Remove protective cap

Ο With crimpers , attach nonelectric blasting cap to standard

base. (Crimper jaws should be placed no further than
1/4 - inch from the open end of the blasting cap . )
Ο Attach firing device assembly to demolition charge .

0 Anchor one end of tripwire to stake and fasten other to pull

ring .

0 Remove locking safety pin first , and positive safety pin

last .

1 2 NONELECTRIC 3
STANDARD BLASTING CAP
LOCKING SAFETY BASE
TRIPWIRE FIRST LAST

POSITIVE
SAFETY.
PROTECTIVE CAP

EXPLOSIVE
CRIMPERS
INITIATING ACTION : 3 to 50
TO ARM: Remove locking safety
pull on tripwire Remove protective cap from
pin first, and positive safety pin
standard base and crimp on last.
noielectric blasting cap. Attach
firing device assembly to charge.
Attach anchored trinuure

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , Para 1-57j

3. Install an M3 pull release firing device .

Remove protective cap .

Ο With crimpers , attach nonelectric blasting cap to standard

base. (Crimper jaws should be placed no further than 1/4
inch from the open end of the blasting cap . )

Ο Attach firing device to anchored charge ( must be firm enough

to withstand a pull of at least 20 pounds ) .

Attach one end of pull wire to an anchor and place the other
end in the hole in the winch .

Ο
With knurled knob , draw up tripwire until locking safety pin
is pulled into the wide portion of the safety pin hole .

Ο Remove locking safety pin first and positive safety pin last .

WARNING: Do not attempt to hand neutralize the M3 firing device for

recovery . Boobytraps utilizing M3 firing devices must be neutral-
ized by detonating in place .
2-292
 FM 5-12B1 /2

M3 PULL- RELEASE FIRING DEVICE

1 3

LOCKING SAFETY
POSITIVE SAFETY

TO ARM : With cord, remove

small cotter pin from locking
safety pin, and withdraw lock-
2 ing safety pin . If it does not
PROTECTIVE CAP0
remove easily, adjust winch
TNT winding . With cord, pull out
positive safety pin.
CRIMPERS
NONELECTRIC
BLASTING CAP

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , para 1-57k

4. Install an M5 pressure release firing device

0 Insert a length of 10-gauge wire into interceptor hole .

0 Bend the 10 -gauge wire slightly to prevent it from dropping

out.

0 Remove the small cotter pin from the safety pin .

0
Holding release plate down , replace the locking safety pin
with a length of 16- or 18 -gauge wire . Bend the wire
slightly to prevent it from dropping out .

0 Remove protective cap from base and with crimpers , attach the
nonelectric blasting cap . (Crimper jaw should be placed no
further than 1/4 inch from open end of blasting cap . )

0 Secure the firing device assembly in demolition charge or

explosive device .

0
Emplace charge and firing assembly in a predesignated loca-
tion using the pressure board to insure a solid foundation
for the firing device .

0 Place a restraining weight of at least five pounds onto the

firing device release plate .

0 Remove the improvised locking safety pin first and then the
improvised positive safety pin from the interceptor hole .
The pins should remove easily if the restraining weight is
adequate and positioned properly .

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , Para 1-571

2-293
FM 5-12B1 / 2

M5 PRESSURE-RELEASE FIRING DEVICE

1 SAFETY 3
RELEASE PIN AST MINE
PLATE
HEAVY
THIN
WIRE WIRE

INTERCEPTOR HOLE
TO ARM : Remove thin
INITIATING ACTION :
Lifting 1.59 cm or wire (locking safety) and
then heavy wire (positive
removing restraining
weight (5 lb. or more). safety) from interceptor
hole. FOLLOW ARMING
PROCEDURE CARE-
2 NONELECTRIC FULLY.
BLASTING CAP

CRIMPER
4

STANDARD
BASE

LENGTH HEAVY
-GAGE WIRE
10 WIRE

PLYWOOD PRESSURE
BOARD
TO DISARM : Insert length
of heavy gage wire in
Insert length of 10-gage interceptor hole. Bend
wire in interceptor hole wire to prevent dropping
and holding release plate out. Proceed carefully, as
down, remove safety pin . the slightest disturbance
Replace safety pin with ofrestraining weight may
length of No. 18 wire. detonate mine . Dis-
Assemble сар, firing assemble firing device
device and mine. and mine.

REFERENCE :

FM 5-25, Explosives and Demolitions

TEC Lesson 030-051-6348, Assist in Construction of Boobytraps

2-294
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1011

TASK:

Install dual firing systems .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions (when using an electrical firing

circuit- except for electrical storms , in the vicinity of FM radio
transmissions , or other static electricity outputs ) with electric
and nonelectric blasting caps , time blasting fuse , fuse ignitors ,
detonating cord , firing wire , appropriate demolition charges , appro-
priate demolition tools and equipment , and instructions to construct
electric dual , nonelectric dual , and combination dual firing sys-
tems .

STANDARDS :

The dual firing systems will be installed so that all charges deto-
nate when the systems are fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install an electric dual firing system .

0 This dual firing system consists of two independent electric

circuits , each with an electric blasting cap in each charge ,
so that the firing of either circuit will detonate all
charges . The firing wires of the two circuits should be kept
separated so that both will not be cut by a single bullet or
a single shell fragment . The firing points also should be at
two separate locations .

SYSTEM "A"

FIRING
WIRE

SYSTEM " B "

Electricdual firing system.

2-295
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Install a nonelectric dual firing system .

0 This consists of two independent nonelectric systems for fir-

ing a single charge or set of charges . If two or more
charges are to be fired simultaneously , two detonating cord
ring mains are laid out , and a branch line from each charge
is tied into each ring main .

GIRTH HITCH WITH

ONE EXTRA TURN

NONELECTRIC
BLASTING
TIME FUSE CAPS

DE TONATING
CORD

3. Install a combination dual firing system .

0 The combination dual firing system uses an electric and non-

electric firing system . Each charge is primed electrically
and non-electrically . Both the electric and nonelectric sys-
tems must be entirely independent of each other . The non-
electric system must be fired first .

2-296
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

FIRING WIRE

DETONATING
CORD

NONELECTRIC
BLASTING
CAP
TIME FUSE

TAPE OR STRING
Combination dual firing system.

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Para 2-13 through 2-16

2-297
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-1012

TASK:

Detonate explosives .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions (when using an electrical firing

circuit- except for electrical storms , in the vicinity of FM radio
transmissions , or other static electricity outputs ) , with completed
firing system ( electric , nonelectric , or combination dual ) , on com-
mand of the person in charge .

STANDARDS :

Personnel will be warned of the detonation . The firing system will

be detonated within 30 seconds after the warning is completed .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Warn personnel of the detonation .

Ο A warning will be issued to all personnel in the area to in-
sure safety .

Ο The words " Fire In The Hole" will be shouted loudly three
times as the warning .

2. Detonate a nonelectric firing system .

Ο Use an M60 weatherproof fuse igniter .

This device is designed to ignite time blasting fuse in

all sorts of weather conditions and under water if water-
proofed . A pull on the pull ring releases the striker
assembly , allowing the firing pin to drive against the
primer , which ignites the fuse .

To fire , remove the safety pin , hold the barrel in one

hand , and pull on the pull ring with the other , taking up
the slack before making the final strong pull . In the
event of a misfire , the M60 can be reset quickly without
disassembly by pushing the plunger all the way in and at-
tempting to fire as before . ( It cannot be reset under-
water however , because water can enter the interior of the
nylon case through the holes in the pull rod . The fuse
igniter is reusable if the primer is replaced . )

2-298
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TIME FUSE

VENT
SHIPPING
PLUG

PERCUSSION PRIMER

SMALL WASHER SHIPPING

PLUG
GROMMET

COLLET
LARGE WASHER

M60 weatherproof fuse igniter.

0 Use an M2 weatherproof fuse igniter .

This device was designed as a positive method of lighting
time blasting fuse . It operates effectively under all
weather conditions - even under water if it is properly wa-
terproofed . A pull on the striker retaining pin causes
the striker to hit the primer , igniting the fuse .

2-299
FM 5-12B1 /2

TIME BLASTING FUSE

PRIMER

YHHHH

PRONGED FUSE RETAINER

PLASTIC SEALING COMPOUND

PULL
RING

PAPER TUBE

M2weatherproof fuse igniter.

0 Use expedient methods .

-

If a fuse igniter is not available , light the time blast-

ing fuse with a match by splitting the fuse at the end ,
placing the head of an unlighted match in the powder
train , and then light the inserted match head with a flam-
ing match or by rubbing the abrasive on the match box
against it .

2-300
 FM 5-12B1 /2

3. Detonate an electric firing system .

0 Use the standard blasting machines described in Task Number

051-193-1001 .

0 When a standard blasting machine is not available , other

power sources may be used . The NCOIC will determine what
source and how it will be used ( See Appendix E , FM 5-25 , Ex-
plosives and Demolitions ) .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Para 1-57m , 1-57n , 2-2 , 2-4

through 2-9 , and 5-2

2-301
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1001

TASK :

Install the M14 blast antipersonnel mine .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with an M14 blast antipersonnel

mine , M22 arming wrench , detonator , and entrenching tool .
STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed SO that

detonation will occur as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Inspect the mine .

0 Examine the mine , if the mine is dented , cracked , or other-

wise damaged , do not use it , replace .
Ο Using the M22 arming wrench , unscrew the shipping plug from
detonator well in the bottom of the mine . Retain the ship-
ping plug for future use if required to disarm mine and move
to another location .

0 Visually inspect the position of the firing pin . If it ex-

tends into detonator well it is unsafe to use . Replace ship-
ping plug and set the mine aside .

Inspect detonator well for foreign material . If material is

present , remove carefully by tapping the mine , held up side
down , against the palm of the hand until it is If
removed .
it cannot be removed , replace shipping plug and replace mine .

0 Turn mine so that the fuze with the safety clip is face up
and assure that the yellow indicating arrow points to safe .
2. Insert the detonator .

0 Grasp the mine in one hand and , and with the other pull
firmly on the carrying cord attached to the safety clip and
remove clip .

0 Using the M22 wrench , turn pressure plate clockwise from S to

A ( Safe to Armed ) . If the mine pressure plate snaps downward
so that the top plate is level with the body of the mine , and
the safety clip cannot be inserted , do not attempt to use the
mine ; replace the mine with a new one .

2-302
 FM 5-12B1 /2

0 Turn plate counterclockwise to safe and insert the safety

clip .

Remove detonator holder assembly from the mine box and screw
tightly into the detonator well . Assure the rubber gasket is
tightly wedged between the head and body SO that no water
enters the mine , or the mine may dud .

- 3. Bury the mine .

0 Dig a hole about 4 inches in diameter and just deep enough so

that the pressure plate extends above the ground (about 1 1/2
inches deep ) .

0 Check ground surface at the bottom of the hole and assure

that the ground is sufficiently solid and able to solidly
support the mine when pressure is applied to the pressure
plate . If the ground is too soft , place a block of wood or
other nonmetallic object in the bottom of the hole to support
the mine .

4. Arm the mine .

0 Arm the mine , using the M22 arming wrench and turning the
pressure plate to ( a) arm . Place the mine in the hole .

0 Hold the mine body tightly and remove the safety clip . Re-
tain the safety clip in case it is required later .
4
MITHINFEUZ,EAPEIRNTS,EBGNYRMOALM1
W TS FR DETONATOR

OR M HOLDER

LOADERS LOT
NUMBER

DATE (MONTH AND SAFE POSITION

YEAR) LOADED
BOTTOM

THIS PORTION FOR USE IN

REMOVING SHIPPING PLUG 5/8 IN 3/4 IN
OR DETONATOR HOLDER

SAFETY CLIP 'ARMED POSITION

TOP
(STEEL)

THIS PORTION USED FOR

TURNING PRESSURE PLATE

O IN

2-303
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

1 5

Replace safety clip.

2 Wt ..

3 1/3 oz .
....

Explosive..1 oz . TETRYL 6
Fuze ..

integral
.......

(with Belleville Spring)

Functioning 20 to 35 lb.
Penetrate Boot & Foot

3
Screw detonator into
detonator well .

Unscrew shipping plug

from bottom of mine.
Turn pressure plate to
ARMED position with Bury mine and remove
arming tool . safety clip .
4
8 TO BURY: Pressure plate
should be slightly above
ground level .
TO DISARM: Insert safety
clip and remove detonator .
CAUTION : Repeated
Remove safety clip and turning of arming dial may
check for malfunctioning . cause excessive wear .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , Chap 3 , p 41

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level , App C,
para C-7
TM 9-1345-203-12&P , Landmines

2-304
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1002

TASK:

Install the M16Al bounding antipersonnel mine with and without trip-
wires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with an M16Al bounding antiper-

sonnel mine , M605 fuze , M25 fuzing wrench , tripwire , and entrenching
tool .

STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed both with

and without tripwires so that detonation will occur as designed .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install the mine without tripwires .

Ο Inspect the mine .

Unscrew the shipping plug from the fuze well of the mine ,
using the closed end of the fuzing wrench M25 issued with
the mine .

Examine the fuze well and flash tube for evidence of ob-
struction or foreign matter . To remove obstructions or
foreign matter , turn the mines upside down and gently tap
its bottom . If any mines appear to be damaged or in un-
satisfactory condition , they should be carried to safe a

place and destroyed .

Ο Fuze the mine

Carefully examine the M605 fuze assembly , including the

crimping at the top of the fuze where it touches the top
of the trigger , for evidence of damage . Check the safety
pins to see that they move freely in the safety pin holes .
Be sure the rubber gasket is around the fuze case .
-

Screw the fuze assembly into the fuze well of the mine and
tighten it securely against the rubber gasket , using the
open end of the combination wrench M25 .

0
Bury the mine .
-

Dig a hole about 6 inches deep and 5 inches in diameter .

2-305
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Place the mine in the hole .

Cover the mine up to the bottom of the release pin ring

with soil ( dirt) from the hole , pressing it firmly into
place around the sides of the mine .
-

Leave the release- pin ring and pressure prongs exposed .

-

Arrange the pull cords on the safety pins for easy with-
drawal .

Remove the locking safety pin . After the locking safety

pin is removed , the interlocking pin can be removed from
the positive safety pin , which is located between the
prongs .

Complete covering the mine with dirt until only the pres-
sure prongs are above ground level . Camouflage the in-
stallation .

Remove the positive safety pin , thus arming the fuze . If

positive safety pin is hard to remove , obtain a new fuze .

INSPECT THE MINE AND FUSE

REMOVE SHIPPING PLUG AND SCREW ON FUZE

GROUND LEVEL
3

PRESSURE INSTALLATION
BURY THE MINE

2-306
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Install the mine with tripwires .

0
Inspect the mine . ( See performance measure 1 ) .

0 Fuze the mine . ( See performance measure 1. )

0 Bury the mine and install tripwires .

-

Dig a hole about 6 inches deep and 5 inches in diameter .

i

Lay the mine into the hole so that the tips of the prongs
on the fuze will be just above ground level .
-

Pack dirt tightly around and over the mine just below the
release pin ring .
-

Install two anchor stakes approximately 10 meters from the

mine . Locate the stakes so that the wires , when attached ,
will form a wide "V" . A third trip wire may be installed ,
if directed by the supervisor .
-

Fasten a separate wire to each anchor stake , then fasten

the free ends to the release pin ring of the fuze .
Specific References : FM 20-32 , Appendix C, Para C- 6 ; FM 5-34 ,
Chapter 3 , Page 41a

GREEN WIRE

INE 4-3/4 in

SONNEL 1
1-3/8 in . max

↑
SAND-COLORED WIRE

-4-1 / 16 in

2-307
FM 5-12B1 /2

PRESSURE PRONGS

POSITIVE SAFETY PIN

0.775 IN ACROSS FLATS

HEAD
RELEASE PIN RING
ASSEMBLY

10.64IN

RUBBER GASKET

THREAD 5.9 in

7-1/8 IN

LOAD ASSEMBLY
FLASK IGNITER

WARNING : DO NOT INSTALL THE TRIP WIRES SO TAUT THAT THEY EXERT PULL
ON THE PRESSURE RING , AS THIS MIGHT CAUSE THE MINE TO DETONATE ACCI-
DENTALLY WHEN THE SAFETY PINS ARE REMOVED .

Leave enough slack to the tripwires to allow the top of

the fuze to rotate and receive a direct pull on the re-
lease pin ring from either of the tripwires .
-

Remove locking safety pin , then remove interlocking pin

from the positive safety pin .
-

Arrange pull cords on positive safety for easy withdrawal .

-

Camouflage the installation , being careful not to cover

the pullcord on the positive safety pin .
-

Arm the fuze by removing the positive safety pin . If

positive safety pin is hard to remove , obtain a new fuze .

Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12&P , Para 2-2 .

2-308
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

M16A1 BOUNDING
ANTIPERSONNEL MINES

Tripwire installation

Attach tripwires - first to

anchor, then to pull ring.

Remove locking safety pin

first . The interlocking pins
should fall free. Then
remove positive safety.

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level
TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Landmines

2-309
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1003

TASK:

Install the M18A1 fragmentation antipersonnel mine ( Claymore) with

and without tripwires .

CONDITIONS :

Situation 1 ( without tripwires ) Under any environmental conditions

-

( except for electrical storms , in the vicinity of FM radio transmis-

sions , or other static electricity outputs that could detonate elec-
tric blasting caps ) , with an M18A1 fragmentation antipersonnel mine,
electric blasting cap , firing wire and M57 firing device .

Situation 2 ( with tripwires ) Under any environmental conditions ,

-

with an M18Al fragmentation antipersonnel mine , nonelectric blasting

caps ; detonating cord , M3 or Ml firing device , and M2 crimpers .

STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed both with

and without tripwires so that detonation will occur as designed .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install the mine without tripwires .

Ο Remove mine and accessories from bandoleer . Read instruction

sheet attached to flap of bandoleer .

Ο
Turn the legs on the mine downward and spread them about 45
degrees . Twist legs so that one protrudes ahead of the mine .
The other behind the mine . Position the mine with the sur-
face marked ( front toward enemy ) and arrows on top of the
case pointing in the direction of the enemy or desired area
of fire . Press legs firmly into the ground .

NOTE: To prevent tipping in windy areas or when the legs cannot be

pressed into the ground , carefully spread the legs to the maximum
possible ( approximately 180 degrees ) , so that the legs will be to
the front and rear .

WARNING : TO INSURE NO FRIENDLY FORCES WILL BE ENDANGERED, POSITION

MINE SO THAT IT IS NO CLOSER THAN 100 METERS TO ANY FRIENDLY TROOPS ,
AND 16 METERS FROM YOUR FIRING POSITION IF UNDER COVER .

0 Aim the mine either using the slit - type peepsight or the
knife - edge sight .

2-310
 OF
SIDES
AND
REAR
TO
100M
WITHIN
MINE
COVER
TAKE
MUST
PERSONNEL
FRIENDLY
ALL

16M
MINIMUM
SAFE
DISTANCE
FIRING
SI
O GHT
FNE
IF
UNDERCOVER LI
MINE
IN
6
.

EYE F
.8T
FT
2
./
4-1 .F
6T
AIMING
POINT

FOX
HOLE
50
.
FT

AIMING
POINT .
FT
100 AIMING
STAKE
SLIT
-TYPE
SIGHT
PEEP

150
FT

2-311
2M THE
PT
A
ON
SIGHTED
BE
SHOULD
MINE
F
'8 OINT
HIGH
DISTANCE
A
AT
.,O
FT
150
OF
THE
OF
ONE
R
ALTERNATIVE
.
SHOWN
POINTS

50M
AREA
FRAGMENTATION

GROOVE

M18A1
Mine
Antipersonnel
of
Danger
and
Areas
Casualty
(Eype
M18A1
Mine
Antipersonnel
-Aiming
Slit
quipped
tPeepsight
)with
FM 5-12B1 / 2
FM 5-12B1 / 2

For mines with the slit- type peepsight :

-

0 Select an aiming object ( tree , bush , etc. ) or use an

aiming stake that is approximately 150 feet from the
mine and approximately 8 feet above ground .
Ο
Position your eye approximately 6 inches away from the
mine . Aim by sighting through the slit - type peepsight .
-

For mines with knife edge sight :

Ο Select a point approximately 150 foot in front of the

mine at ground level .

0
Position eye approximately 6 inches to the rear of the
sight . Aim the mine by alining two edges of sight with
the aiming point .

6 ΙΝ .

LIN SIG
E OF HT

150 FT.

NOTE : WHEN AIMING THE MINE THE GROOVE OF THE

SIGHT SHOULD BE IN LINE WITH THE AIMING POINT .
THE AIMING OBJECT SHOULD BE IN THE CENTER OF
THE DESIRED COVERAGE AREA. THE BOTTOM EDGE
OF THE PEEPSIGHT SHOULD BE PARALLEL TO THE
GROUND .

AimingAntipersonnel Mine M18A1 (Equipped with Knife-edge Sight)

2-312
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

NOTE : When aiming the mine the groove of the sight should be in
line with the aiming point . The aiming object should be in the
center of the desired coverage area . The bottom edge of the peep-
sight should be parallel to the ground .

Ο
Unscrew the shipping plug priming adapter and retain for fu-
ture use .

Ο
Remove tape and unroll paper form or plastic spool from elec-
tric blasting cap assembly . Retain form and tape ( or spool )
for possible future use . Hold blasting cap while unwinding
approximately 3 meters of firing wire .

CAUTION : ASSURE THAT THE COMBINATION SHORTING PLUG AND DUST COVER
IS ASSEMBLED TO CONNECTOR OF BLASTING CAP ASSEMBLY BEFORE PLACING
THE BLASTING CAP IN THE DETONATOR WELL .

Ο Wind the firing wire around a stake located approximately 1

meter from the same side of the mine as the detonator well .

Ο Slide slotted end of shipping plug priming adapter on the

firing wires of the blasting cap between the crimped connec-
tions and blasting cap . Pull excess wire through the slotted
end of shipping plug priming adapter , until the top of the
blasting cap is firmly seated in the priming adapter . Then ,
screw the priming adapter and blasting cap into the detonator
well . Recheck the aim of the mine .

Ο Unwind the remaining firing wire to the firing position . If

possible , bury the firing wire to protect it from artillery

or small arms fire , and to prevent easy detection .

0 Test the M57 firing device and blasting cap continuity :

CAUTION : BEFORE AND AFTER COMPLETION OF FIRING DEVICE AND BLASTING

CAP TESTS , ASSURE THAT THE FIRING DEVICE BAIL IS IN THE " SAFE" POSI-
TION .

Remove the dust cover from the connector of the firing

device and female connector of the test set .

Plug the test set into the firing device . Leave the com-
bination shorting plug and dust cover assembled on the
other end of the test set .

Position firing device bail to " fire" position , actuate

handle of the firing device with a firm , quick squeeze ,
and observe flashing of the lamp through test set window .

2-313
FM 5-12B1 / 2

NOTE : The window of the test set should be held near the
eyes when making the checks . This minimizes risk of enemy
observation in the dark and improves the ability of the
operator to see the lamp flashing in bright sunlight .
-

Flashing of the lamp indicates that the firing device is

functioning properly . If the lamp does not flash , the
firing device or test set must be discarded and replaced
with another . After completion of the test place firing
device bail in safe position .

Remove the shorting plug and dust cover from connector of

blasting cap and from the end of the test set . Plug con-
nector of blasting cap into test set . Position firing
device bail to " fire" position and actuate handle .
-

Flashing of test set lamp indicates that the blasting cap

continuity is satisfactory . If the lamp fails to flash ,
determine if there is a break in the firing wire . (If
there is a break , disconnect the firing wire from the test
set and reinstall the shorting plug in the test set and at
the end of the firing wire . Splice the wire or replace
the wire and cap ) .

If there is no evidence of a break in the firing wire ,

remove the test set and connect the firing wire directly
to the firing device for firing .

2. Install the mine with tripwires .

0 Follow the steps in performance measure 1 through the aiming

procedures .

0 Install two anchor stakes approximately 20 meters to the

front of the mine , and space them 10 to 20 meters apart .

Ο Install one stake , to one side of , and approximately one me-

ter from the mine .

0 Crimp a nonelectric blasting cap to either an Ml pull or M3

pull - release firing device .

Ο Fasten the firing device to a length of detonating cord ( ap-

proximately 25 meters long) with tape .
Ο Using tape , wire , twine or cord , fasten the firing device
securely to a firmly emplaced stake .

Ο
Attach tripwire to the anchor stake and fasten the other end
to the winch of the M3 firing device , or the pull ring on the
Ml firing device , whichever is used .
2-314
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

KNIFE-EDGE SIGHT
SHIPPING PLUG PRIMING ADAPTOR

2
PEEP SIGHT
DETONATOR WELL
ARROW

ARROW

MINE M18A1

FRONT
TOWARD ENEMY
그
ELECTRIC BLASTING CAP M4

UNROLLED FIRING WIRE

HANDLE

WINDOW
COMBINATION SHORTING PLUG
AND DUST COVER

SAFE

DUST COVER
FIRE
TO TEST CIRCUIT OR

TO FIRE CIRCUIT

DUST COVER
SAFETY BAIL

Mine, Antipersonnel: M18A1, with Accessories

2-315
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Setup of mine and tripwire .

DETONATING CORD

-FRONT-
TOWARD ENSIAY

STAKE

20M

TRIPWIRE

FIRING DEVICE
STAKE
(WIRED TO STAKE)

Alternate setup of mine and tripwires .

DIRECTION OF FIRE OF MINE

STAKE

FIRING DEVICE
(WIRED TO STAKE) FIRING DEVICE

TIGHT TRIP WIRE (WIRED TO STAKE )

MINE

DETONATING CORD

2-316
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Return to the mine and secure the detonating cord to the

stake leaving approximately a 1 meter overhang .

0
Insert the detonating cord into a second nonelectric blasting
cap and crimp the cap to the detonating cord .

0
Seat the cap ( with detonating cord) in the shipping plug
priming adapter and carefully insert the cap into the well .

0
Secure the cap in the detonator well by carefully screwing
the shipping plug priming adapter into the detonator well .

0 Recheck the mine for proper aim .

0
Arm the firing device by removing the safety pins .

REFERENCES :

TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Landmines , Chapter 2

TEC Lessons :
947-171-0106 - F , Claymore Mines , Introduction
947-171-0107 -F , Electrical Arming and Firing
947-171-0108 -F , Nonelectrical Arming and Firing
947-171-0110-F , Multiple Emplacement and Review

2-317
FM 5-12B1 / 2
1
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1005

TASK:

Install the M26 antipersonnel mine with and without tripwires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with an M26 antipersonnel mine ,

tripwire spool , and entrenching tool .
STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed both with

and without tripwires so that detonation will occur as designed .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install the mine without tripwires .

Inspect the mine for defects , as follows . If defects are

found , report to your supervisor for instructions .
-

Missing , damaged , or improperly assembled components .

-

Cracks in mine body .

-

Improper markings on mine body .

Ο Inspect mine for moisture , mildew , mold , heavy corrosion or

foreign material . If such defects are found wipe mine with a
clean cloth .

Ο Dig a hole in the ground of sufficient size to accept the

complete mine .

0 Remove the ground approximately 1 inch deep for a distance of

approximately 6 inches from edge of mine , to provide knuckle
clearance for turning and removing arming handle .

0 Remove the arming handle from the tripwire spool , by pulling

upward from the spool .

Ο
Close the spread ends of the arming latch retaining pin ( cot-
ter pin) to facilitate removal after the mine is emplaced .
0 Place the mine in the hole , with the cover end upward , SO
that the mine cover lugs extend just slightly above the
ground .

2-318
 FM 5-12B1 /2

0 Pack soil tightly around the mine and level with the top of
the mine body , leaving the cover lugs exposed .

0 Remove the arming latch retaining pin by pulling the ring

straight up .
i

WARNING : DO NOT ARM A MINE THAT IS NOT PLACED IN THE GROUND . ASSURE
THAT THE ARMING LATCH REMAINS FULLY ENGAGED .

0 Assemble arming handle to tabs ( lugs ) on arming latch . Hold

the mine body firmly with thumb and finger of one hand to
prevent rotation of the mine in the ground . Rotate covers
clockwise until it comes to a positive stop ( approximately
1/4 turn) . The arrow on the mine cover will be slighly past
center of red ( A) armed position on the mine body .
WARNING : DO NOT LIFT OR REMOVE THIS MINE FROM THE GROUND DURING
ARMING OPERATIONS . THE
COMPONENTS OF THE EXPLOSIVE TRAIN WILL BE
ALINED AND THE MINE WILL DETONATE IF SUBJECTED TO SHOCK SUCH AS
DROPPING , JOLTING , SHAKING , ETC ; EVEN THOUGH THE ARMING LATCH IS
STILL IN PLACE .

0 Remove the arming latch from the mine by pulling " straight
out" on the arming handle . Retain the arming latch for fu-
ture use .

WARNING : WHEN PERFORMING THE ABOVE PROCEDURES DO NOT EXERT ANY UP-
WARD PRESSURE ON THE ARMING HANDLE WHILE REMOVING THE ARMING LATCH .
SUFFICIENT UPWARD PRESSURE ON THE ARMING HANDLE COULD DETONATE THE
MINE . THE ARMING LATCH WILL USUALLY TEND TO CATCH WHEN PULLED OUT
APPROXIMATELY 1 INCH . CONTINUE PULLING WITH FORCE TO OVERCOME THIS
CONDITION .

0 The mine is now fully armed and subject to instant detona-

tion .

2-319
FM 5-12B1 / 2

M26 ΑΝΤIPERSONNEL MINE

1 5

2 Wt 2.2LBS
Projectiles Pellets
Attach arming handle to
Fuze integral lugs on arming latch ,
Functioning : rotate the cover clockwise
Pressure 14-28 lbs
...

until it comes to a positive

Pull 4-8 lbs
stop (the arrow will point
Bounding Ht 3m to the red letter " A"
Casualty Radius 17m
..
armed).
3

Remove arming handle. (If

tripwire is to be used
install trip-lever; attach
slack wire to lever; and)
place mine in ground flush
with top of ground.
4
Remove arming latch by
pulling straight out with
the arming handle.

7
TO DISARM : Reverse
arming procedure.

Remove arming latch

retaining nin .

2-320
 FM 5-12B1 /2

INETAPERE
RAL
INTEG

2. Install the mine with tripwires .

0
Follow the steps in performance measure 1 through digging the
hole .

0 Remove tripwire spool assembly by pulling away from mine

body .

0
Remove arming handle from tripwire sppol by pulling upward .

0 Remove trip lever from tripwire spool by unscrewing .

0 Remove one or more tripwires , as required , from tripwire

spool by pressing in one of the three plastic tripwire re-
tainers and lifting tripwire ( s ) off top of spool .

2-321
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Retain or replace any unused tripwires on tripwire spool .

Ο Replace tripwire assembly on mine body .

NOTE : Leave spool on mine body during emplacement . Spool helps

to stabilize mine and prevents tilting of mine in ground .
0
Close the spread ends of arming latch retaining pin ( cotter
pin) to facilitate removal after mine is emplaced .

0 Place mine in hole , with cover end upward , so that mine cover
lugs extend just slightly above ground level .

0
Pack soil tightly around and level with top of mine body ,
leaving cover lugs exposed . Leave knuckle clearance approxi-
mately 1 inch deep and 6 inches out from edge of mine body in
a sector necessary for turning and removing the arming
handle .

Screw trip lever ( approximately 4 turns ) into trip - lever cam

until tight .

Ο Cut tape holding coils of wire .

Ο Attach loop end of tripwire ( s ) to loop of trip lever .

Ο Leaving some slack , attach other end of tripwire ( s ) to firm

anchor stake ( s ) .

( If possible , use object of local terrain for staking . )

Ο Remove arming latch retaining pin by pullng ring straight up .

WARNING : DO NOT ARM MINE THAT IS NOT PLACED IN GROUND . MAKE SURE
THAT ARMING LATCH REMAINS FULLY ENGAGED .

NOTE : Pull - ring assembly ( consisting of pull - ring , arming

latch retaining pin , and arming instruction tag , as well
as arming handle should be retained for future use . Do
not discard pull - ring assembly or arming handle in area
where mines are emplaced .

WARNING : DO NOT LIFT OR REMOVE MINE FROM GROUND DURING ARMING OPER-
TATION . THE COMPONENTS OF THE EXPLOSIVE TRAIN WILL BE ALINED AND
MINE WILL DETONATE IF SUBJECTED TO SHOCK SUCH AS DROPPING , JOLTING ,
SHAKING , ETC. , EVEN THOUGH ARMING LATCH IS STILL IN PLACE .

Ο Assemble arming handle to tabs ( lugs ) on arming latch . Hold

mine body firmly with thumb and finger of one hand to prevent
rotation of mine in ground . Rotate cover clockwise ( from S
to A) until it comes in to a positive stop .

2-322
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Blend mine with matching terrain for camouflage and remove

excess soil from immediate area of emplaced mine .

0
Remove arming latch from mine by pulling straight out on arm-
ing handle . Arming latch will usually tend to catch when
pulled out approximately one inch . Continue pulling with
sufficient force to overcome this condition .

WARNING :
WHEN REMOVING ARMING LATCH, DO NOT EXERT ANY UPWARD PRES-
SURE ON THE ARMING HANDLE . ENOUGH UPWARD PRESSURE ON THE HANDLE
COULD DETONATE THE MINE .

WARNING : MINE IS NOW FULLY ARMED AND SUBJECT TO INSTANT DETONATION .

DO NOT EXERT ANY PRESSURE ON MINE COVER , MOVE TRIP LEVER , OR PULL
TRIPWIRE ( s ) . A PULL FORCE OF 4 TO 8 POUNDS OR MORE ON TRIPWIRE OR A
PRESSURE 14 to 28 POUNDS OR MORE ON MINE TOP WILL DETONATE MINE IN-
1 STANTLY .

Specific Reference: FM 5-34 , Chap 3, Table 3-1 ; TM

9-1345-203-12&P , Chap 2 , para 2-4 .

ARMING COVER LUGS ( 2) WITH
HANDLE RAISED DIAMONDS
TAB (2)

ARMING LATCH RETAINING

"A" ARMED PIN ( COTTER PIN )
POSITION
P ARMING LATCH
TO
TRIP LEVER
CAM
PULL RING
ARROW

"S" SAFE
POSITION

ARMING
PUFF
INSTRUCTION
PORT
TAG
COVER

MINE BODY

TRIP
Ntld‫ו‬B‫ו‬ W I‫ה‬
NI‫ע‬ N‫י‬V‫ח‬I‫ל‬
D‫ע‬
‫א‬ ‫מ‬
LEVER
MULENI ONIWAY

ARMING HANDLE

TRIPWIRE

ON SPOOL

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

TM 9-1345-203-12&P , Landmines

2-323
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1006

TASK :

Install the M15 heavy antitank mine with and without antihandling
devices .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with an M15 heavy antitank mine ,

M603 fuze , M20 arming wrench , entrenching tool , firing devices (Ml ,
MlAl , M3 , and M5 ) , and Ml activator .
STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed SO that

detonation will occur as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install the mine without antihandling devices .

Ο Dig the hole about 14 to 15 inches in diameter and about 5

inches deep .
-
Place the soil removed from the hole in a sandbag for re-
use and/ or removal from the minefield .
-

When a mine is to be emplaced in sod , the turf is cut and

rolled back so that it can be replaced over the mine .

NOTE : The mine can be buried or surface laid as required .

Care must be taken to camouflage the emplaced mine whether

buried or surface laid , in a manner that will not inter-
fere with its function or effectiveness .

The base of the mine must be on a firm foundation .

Ο Laying and arming procedure .

Unscrew the arming plug from the mine , using the arming
wrench .

2-324
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

M 20 ARMING WRENCH

Inspect the fuze well and arming plug threads to see that
no foreign material is present . Remove foreign material
when found .

WARNING : ICE IN THE FUZE WELL DURING FREEZING OPERATIONS CAN CAUSE
A SERIOUS ACCIDENT . DURING FREEZING WEATHER MAKE SURE NONE IS PRE-
SENT .

Remove the M603 fuze from its metal shipping container and
inspect it for serviceability . The green end of the deto-
nator must show in the bottom of the fuze .

Remove the safety fork from the cover assembly of the M603
fuze.

FUZE PRESSURE PLATE

SAFETY FORK

2-325
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Insert the fuze into the fuze well of the mine , pushing it
down gently until it seats .

WARNING : NO PRESSURE MUST BE PUT ON THE PRESSURE PLATE OF THE FUZE

WHEN INSERTING IT INTO THE FUZE WELL .

NOTE : If the fuze does not seat remove it and investigate the
cause .

Make sure that the setting knob and shutter on the arming
plug are in the SAFE position .

A N G E R
D D
KARME

SHUTTER IN " SAFE " POSITION SETTING KNOB IN " SAFE " POSITION

CAUTION : THE SETTING KNOB ( DIAL ) ON THE ARMING PLUG SHOULD NEVER BE
LEFT IN THE DANGER" POSITION .

Screw the arming plug with helical spring retainer into

the mine securely using the arming wrench to assure a wa-
tertight seal .
-

Lay the mine on a firm foundation with the top surface of

the pressure plate not more than 1-1/2 inches below the
ground level .
-

Turn the setting knob with red pointer from SAFE , through
DANGER to ARMED . The arming wrench may be used .

2-326
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

KDA
D
NGE
ME R
AR

ミハミ
SETTING KNOB IN " ARMED " POSITION

The spoil from digging the hole is used to bury the mine .
Excess soil is removed in the sandbag . Cover the mine
with a thin mound of 5 centimeter ( 2 inches ) maximum .

Camouflage the mound with twigs , grass or material natural

to the surroundings .

Specific References : FM 5-25 , App C

The mine when installed for pressure activation should

look as shown below .
コ

Specific References : FM 20-32 , App C

2. Install the mine using the Ml pull firing device .

2-327
FM 5-12B1 /2

NOTE : The Ml activator is used with the M15 antitank mine and the
M2 activator is used with the M19 antitank mine .

Ο Dig the hole to the proper depth to bury the mine on a firm
foundation with the top even with or slightly above ground
level . A small trench should also be dug for the firing de-
vice . Soil is placed in a sandbag .

0 Using the arming wrench , install the fuze in the main fuse
well before installing the firing device .

0 Remove the protective caps from the standard base and as-
semble M1 firing device , Ml activator , and mine . The side,
bottom , or both fuze wells may be used to install firing de-
vices .

M1 ACTIVATOR

CAP

STANDARD BASE

POSITIVE SAFETY PIN

ANTITANK MINE

LOCKING
GASKET
SAFETY PIN
PROTECTIVE CAP

M1 PULL FIRING DEVICE

2-328
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Place the mine and firing device in the hole filling in

around the mine leaving a small trench for the firing device .
0 Arm the fuze in the main fuze well .

0 Anchor one end of a tripwire to a stake or other anchor , and

fasten the other end to the pull ring .

0 Remove locking safety pin .

0 Remove positive safety pin .

0 Complete camouflage , removing excess soil using the sandbag .

Specific References : FM 20-32 App D , para D- 2

3. Install the mine using the MlAl pressure- type firing device .
Ο Dig the hole to the proper depth to bury the mine on a firm
foundation with the top even with or slighlty above ground
level . A small trench should also be dug for the firing de-
vice . Soil is placed in a sandbag .

0 Using the arming wrench , install the fuze in the main fuze
well before installing the firing device .

0 Remove the protective cap from the standard base and assemble
the firing device , activator , and mine using the side fuze
well . The tripronged pressure head and extension rod are
used . A pressure base ( board) should be placed under the
firing device .

TRI - PRONGED PRESSURE HEAD SIDE FUSE WELL

M1 ACTIVATOR
CAP
LOCKING
EXTENSION ROD
SAFETY

CLIP
ANTITANK MINE

STANDARD GASKET
BASE
PROTECTIVE CAP

PRESSSURE BASE
POSITIVE SAFETY PIN

0
Place the mine and firing device in the hole filling in
around the mine leaving a small trench for the firing device .

2-329
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Arm the fuze in the main fuze well .

Ο Remove the locking safety clip .

0 Remove the positive safety pin .

0 Complete camouflage , removing excess soil using the sandbag .

Specific References : FM 20-32 , App D , para D - 6

4. Install the mine using the M3 pull relase firing device .

0 Dig the hole to proper depth to bury the mine on a firm foun-
dation , with the top even with or slightly above ground
level . A small trench should be dug for the firing device .
Soil is placed in a sandbag .

0 Using the arming wrench , install the fuze in the main fuze
well before installing the firing device .
0
Remove the protective cap from the standard base and assemble
the firing device , activator and mine .

PROTECTIVE BASE SAFETY PIN

TRIPWIRE
GASKET STANDARD BASE
ANTITANK MINE

ANCHOR CORD

M1 ACTIVATOR
POSITIVE SAFETY PIN

CAP

2-330
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Ο
Place the mine and firing device in the hole filling in
around the mine leaving a small trench for the firing device .
0 Arm the fuze in the main fuze well .

0 Fasten one end of the tripwire to a stake or other anchor and

fasten the other end to the winch of the firing device .

0
Using the winch draw up the tripwire until the locking safety
pin is pulled up into the wide part of the safety pin hole .

LOCKING SAFETY PIN

SMALL COTTER PIN

1
0
Remove the small cotter pin and the locking safety pin .
0
Remove the positive safety pin .
0
Completely camouflage , removing excess soil , using a sandbag .
Specific References : FM 20-32 , Appendix D , Para D-3

5. Install the mine, using the M5 pressure release firing device .

0 Dig hole to proper depth to bury mine on a firm foundation
with the top of the pressure plate even with or slightly
above ground level .

0
Using the arming wrench , install the fuze in the main fuze
well before installing the firing device .

2-331
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Ο Remove protective cap from standard base and assemble firing

device , Ml activator and mine .

NOTE : Insert a length of 10-gauge heavy wire ( wire coat hanger ) in

the interceptor hole , and holding the release plate down , remove
positive safety pin and replace it with a length of 18 -gauge wire .

M15 ΑΝΤΙTANK
MINE

ACTIVATOR

GASKET

THIN STD CAP

SAFETY- BASE
WIRE - PROTECTIVE CAP

M5 PRESSURE- RELEASE
SAFETY FIRING DEVICE
PIN

PRESSURE BASE

Ο Place mine and firing device in the hole using a pressure

board to insure a solid foundation for the firing device .

Arm the fuze in the main fuze well .

0 Cover and camouflage the mine leaving a hole at the side to

remove the safeties .

0 Carefully remove the safety pin ( or wire ) first .

Ο Carefully remove the interceptor pin ( or wire ) last .

0 Complete camouflage , removing excess soil with a sandbag .

Specific References : FM 20-32 , App D , para D- 4

6. A mine does not need to have an activator well to be equipped
with an antihandling device . Pull or pressure release firing
devices may be installed with a second charge under any object .

Specific References : FM 20-32 , para 3-8

REFERENCES :

FM5-34 , Engineer Field Data , Chap 3 , Table 3-1

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level

2-332
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1007

TASK:

Install the M19 plastic , heavy antitank mine with and without anti-
20 handling devices .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with an M19 plastic heavy anti-

tank mine ,
M606 fuze , M2 activator , M22 arming wrench , entrenching
tool , and firing devices ( Ml , MlAl , M3 , and M5 ) .
STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed SO that

detonation will occur as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install the mine without - antihandling devices .

0 Dig a hole about 14 inches square and 5 inches deep with

walls sloping about 45 degrees to avoid bridging .

Ο
The soil from the hole is placed in a sand bag , to be used to
cover the mine .

When the mine is to be emplaced in sod , the turf should be

carefully cut and rolled back so that it can be replaced
over the mine .

Mines and fuzes that are placed on or above the ground

-

surface are camouflaged in a manner that will not inter-

fere with their function or effectiveness .

0
Inspect the mine and fuze for cracks , breaks , or other condi-
tions that may render the mine unsafe . If damage is found
replace mine .

0
Using the M22 wrench remove fuze from fuze well by turning
counterclockwise until free . Lift up from fuze well and
check the fuze well for foreign matter . If present remove
foreign matter by turning mine upside down and shaking .

0 Assure that the setting knob is in the ( S ) safe position and

safety clip is in place . If the setting knob is not in ( s )
position , remove the safety clip and rotate the knob to that
position and re- install the safety clip .

2-333
FM 5-12B1 / 2

NOTE :
The detonator holder loading assembly must not be in the fuze
while the setting knob is being adjusted .

0 Turn fuze bottom side up and remove white plastic shipping

plug from detonator well using the M22 wrench , turning in a
counterclockwise direction . Examine for foreign material
and , if present , remove it .

Ο Visually check the position of the firing pin . If armed

( firing pin centered) , reject fuze . If not armed ( firing pin
point positioned at edge of hole) , continue to next opera-
tion.

DETONATOR HOLDER ASSY

FUZE M606

FUZE WELL-

MINE

MINE, AT, NM, M19

2-334
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

ARMED

NOT ARMED

2-335
FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Remove the safety clip and using the M22 wrench turn to (a)
position . (Do not use excessive force) after striking stop .
Force used should just be enough to overcome the friction
load that is felt during turning from ( s ) to ( a ) .
0 Visually check position of firing pin . If not armed (firing
pin not centered in hole) , reject fuse .
0 Turn to safe ( s ) position , observe the same precautions with
regard to excessive force after striking stop , as indicated
in step above . Visually check position of firing pin . If
still in armed position , reject fuze .

Ο Replace safety clip .

NOTE : For long term emplacement , smear thin layer of silicone

grease Dc6 on top of detonator , detonator holder , and threaded por-
tion of detonator holder .

Turn the fuze bottom side up and assure that the rubber gas-
ket is on the fuze .

0
Assemble detonator holder assembly containing the M50 detona-
tor in the fuze by screwing it into the detonator well .
Tighten assembly by hand and then , using the arming wrench ,
make it secure in the detonator well .

NOTE : For long- term emplacement , coat detonator holder and a 1/2
inch wide area around it with Dc6 or equivalent . Also coat gasket on
fuze

Ο Assemble fuze in the mine by using the arming wrench to turn

the fuze in a clockwise direction .

Screw threaded detonator

into detonator well .

0 Check bottom of hole , and if the ground is soft provide a

firm foundation , such as a wooden board ; no steel or metal
will be used .

2-336
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Cun
0
Lay the mine on a firm foundation in the hole and at suffi-
cient depth to cover the mine with 1 1/2 inch of dirt .
he
NOTE : For long term emplacement , smear a layer of silicone grease
around circumference of fuze where it enters the mine .

0
Remove the safety clip and , with the arming wrench , turn the
setting knob to ( a) armed position . Retain safety clip for
future use , if needed to disarm the mine .

0 Cover the mine with dirt and camouflage as required .

TO BURY: Put mine in

hole with pressure plate at
L
or slightly above ground
level.
10

ㅎ
Place mine in hole, remove
safety fork; and turn dial
E to ARMED .
Complete camouflage

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , Appendix C , Para C- 1 & C-3 .

TM 9-1345-203-12&P , Chapter 2 , Para 2-9 .
FM 5-34, Chapter 3 , Table 3-1 .
2. Install the mine with antihandling devices .
Ο
For the installation and arming procedures of the M19 anti-
tank mine with antihandling devices refer to task number
051-192-1006 , with the exception that the M2 activator will
be used with the M19 antitank mine instead of the Ml activa-
tor .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM 20-32, Mine/Countermine Operations at the Company Level
TM 9-1345-203-12 &P , Landmines

2-337
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2-337a
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1008

TASK:

Install the M21 metallic antitank mine .

CONDITIONS :
1

Under any environmental conditions , with an M21 metallic antitank

mine , M607 fuse, M120 booster , M26 arming wrench , and intrenching
tool .

STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed SO that

detonation will occur as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Dig the hole for the mine about 10 to 12 inches in diameter and
about 6 inches deep .

Recommended burial for pressure fuze AT mines.

TOP OF FUZE BASE

REPLACE SPOIL

WAWIN GROUND LEVEL

2-337b
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο The base of the mine must be on a firm foundation .

Ο
Place soil in a sand bay for reuse and/ or removal from the
mine field .

Specific References : FM 20-32 , app C , para C- 11

2. Install mine for pressure activation , using the M607 fuze with-
out tilt rod .

Remove the mine and components from the packing box .

Ο Replace the extension rod and extension rod adapter , if pre-

sent , in the packing box .

Ο Inspect the mine and components for serviceability .

Ο Check for cracks , dents or other signs of damage .

Ο
Assure that the cotter pin of the fuze pull ring assembly and
the fuze closure assembly are securely in place .

EXTENSION ROD

STOP EXTENSION
ROD ADAPTER

FORK
CLOSURE
ASSEMBLY
PRESSURE
RING

PULL RING
ASSEMBLY

BAND

3/4 IN THREAD

Ο If damaged items are found , replace with a new mine .

Ο Turn mine bottom up and , with the screwdriver end of the M26
arming wrench , remove the closing plug assembly by turning
counterclockwise .

2-338
 FM 5-12B1 /2
그

0
Inspect booster cavity for foreign material . Remove if pre-
sent .

Insert M120 booster , washer side toward the fuze , into the
fu booster cavity .

With the M26 arming wrench , replace the closing plug assembly
by turning clockwise until tight . The gasket of the closing
plug assembly should be against the booster .

NOTE : For long term emplacement , coat the threads of the closing
plug assembly with silicone grease DC6 , or equivalent .

Turn the mine bottom down .

0 With the M26 arming wrench , using the shipping plug end , re-
move
the shipping plug assembly from the fuze hole cavity of
the mine .

0 Inspect the fuze hole cavity for foreign material . Remove

foreign material , if present .

NOTE : For long- term emplacement , coat the fuze threads with sili-
cone grease also .

0 With closure end of the M26 arming wrench , remove the closure
assembly from the M607 fuze . The gasket on the bottom of the
fuze should remain in place .

0 Screw the fuze " hand tight" into the threaded fuze hole of
mine charge cap .

0 Set the mine down . Prepare the hole in the ground if not
already dug ..

0 Check the bottom of the hole to assure that the ground is

solid . If the ground is soft , place a board or other flat
object under the mine to provide a firm foundation .

0 Place the mine in the hole .

0 Press the ground firmly against the sides of the mine , leav-
ing the fuze uncovered .

0 Remove pull ring assembly band , and stop on the fuze . This
arms the mine .

2-339
FM 5-12B1 /2,

BAND

STOP

A BAND AND STOP IN PLACE

PULL RING ASSEMBLY

B PULL RING ASSEMBLY IN PLACE

Ο
Retain the pull ring assembly , band , and stop for future use ,
if needed to disarm the mine .

o Camouflage the mine , using the spoil to cover the top of the
mine by a thin mound of earth of 5 centimeters ( 2 inches ) ,
removing excess spoil and adding twigs , grass or material
natural to the surroundings .

2-340
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

H
ENC ING
ARM
CLOSURE

ASSEMBLY END
WR M-26-

SCREWDRIVER END

SHIPPING
PLUG END

Shipping Plug Assembly

ChargeCap Cover Assembly

Black Powder
Assembly
Expelling Charge
Threaded Fuze Hole Concave
Steel Plate

58
B
FE
33-9

Firing Pin Assembly Firing Pin

Primer M42
Delay Assembly
Delay Element
Booster Cavity
Relay Assembly
Carrying
Strap

BO
OS
T

High Explosive Charge Body

Booster M120

Closing Plug Assembly

Screwdriver Slot

2-341
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12&P , para 2-10

3. Install mine , using the M607 fuze with tilt rod .

Ο Remove all components from the packing case .

Follow the procedure in step 2 until after you have pressed

the ground firmly around the sides of the mine , leaving the
fuze uncovered .

Ο
Assemble the extension rod into the threaded pressure ring of
the M607 fuze . ( Extension rod adapters originally provided
are not required ) .

Ο Assure that the extension rod is vertical and not tilted in

any direction .

NOTE : The use of the extension rod equipped with M607 fuse is pref-
erable where the vegetation cover is sufficient to help conceal the
extension rod .

Ο
Camouflage of extension rods must be completed before the
mine is armed .

Ο Remove the pull ring assembly , band , and stop on the fuze .
This arms the mine .

Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12&P , para 2-10

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level
TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines

2-342
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1009 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK:

Install the Ml one- gallon chemical mine .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions (when using a nonelectrical fir-

ing system ) or under any environmental conditions except for elec-
trical storms , or nearby FM radio transmissions or other static
electricity outputs ( when using an electrical firing system ) , with
protective mask , protective clothing , an Ml one-gallon chemical
mine , detonating cord , electric blasting cap , completed nonelectric
and electric detonating assemblies , and intrenching tool .

STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed SO that

detonation will occur as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING : A PROTECTIVE MASK AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MUST BE WORN WHEN

INSTALLING THE MI ONE - GALLON CHEMICAL MINE .

1. The one - gallon chemical mine consists of an unpainted but marked

1 - gallon metal can for dispersing HD , distilled mustard gas . It
has two copper wires soldiered to one side of the mine for at-
taching a burster charge .

HANDLE
CAP

HD-GAS
COPPER WIRE

EAS - 47

T 63
LO :32

1- GALLON METAL CAN

Mine, land, chemical, 1-gallon.

2-343
FM 5-12B1 / 2
2. Install the mine .

Ο Prepare a hole in the ground , at the designated spot , with a

firm foundation approximately 10 1/2 inches long , 6 1/2
inches wide , and 4 inches deep .
Ο Attach a 4- foot length of detonating cord to the side of the
mine with the copper wires as shown .

MINE, CHEMICAL AGENT BURSTER

HD , 1 - GALLON CHARGE

(DETONATING
CORD)

0 Tape either an electric blasting cap or a length of detonat-

ing cord lengthwise along and in firm contact with the deto-
nating cord burster charge .

0 When using an electric blasting cap , leave the ends of blast-

ing cap wires connected to each other until ready to connect
them to the electrical firing circuit .
-

When using detonating cord attached to an electric or non-

electric ( initiation) detonating assembly , use square a

knot to tie it to the detonating cord burster charge .

0 Place the mine with burster charge attached into the hole .
Lead the detonating cord or blasting cap lead wires out of
the hole .

Ο Cover the mine with approximately 4 inches of earth .

Camouflage the mine .

2-344
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
0 If an electrical firing circuit is used for detonation , con-
nect the blasting cap lead wires into the electrical circuit .
ti
0 If a nonelectric ( initiation ) detonation assembly is used ,
attach a safety fuse of sufficient length for firing person-
nel to move to safety .
de
NOTE : The Ml one - gallon chemical mine dispenses HD mustard agent .
The M13 or the M258 decontamination kits are used to counteract the
effects of blister agents .

Specific References : FM 5-34 , Chap 3 , Table 3-1 ; FM 20-32 , app C,

para C- 17 and fig C- 13 ; TM 9-1345-203-12 & P

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM20-32 , Mine / Countermine Operations at the Company Level
TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines

2-345
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1010

TASK:

Install the M23 chemical mine with and without antihandling device .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with protective mask , protective

clothing , an M23 chemical mine ; M603 fuze , M20 arming wrench , in-
trenching tool , firing devices ( M1 , M1A1 , M3 and M5 ) , and Ml activa-
tor .

STANDARDS :

Without premature detonation , the mine will be installed SO that

detonation will occur as designed .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING : A PROTECTIVE MASK AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MUST BE WORN WHEN

INSTALLING THE M23 CHEMICAL MINE .

1. The M23 chemical mine can be distinguished from the M15 heavy
antitank mine by its chemical markings of three green and one yellow
band painted around the sides and by eight raised projections -- two
each at 90-degree intervals around the outside top of the mine

2. Install the mine without antihandling device .

Ο
See the performance measures for the M15 heavy antitank mine
in task number 051-192-1006 .

3. Install the mine with antihandling device .

Ο See the performance measures for the M15 heavy antitank mine
in task number 051-192-1006 .

NOTE : The M23 chemical mine dispenses VX , a nerve agent . The auto-
matic atropine injectors ( Combo Pin ) are used to counteract the ef-
fects of nerve agents .

Specific References : FM 5-34 , Chap 3 , Table 3-13; FM 20-32 , app C,

para C- 16

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level

2-346
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1011

TASK:

ing 2
Disarm the M14 blast antipersonnel mine .

CONDITIONS :

an-
Under any environmental conditions , with an installed M15 blast
tipersonnel mine , safety clip , arming wrench , shipping plug , and
instructions to hand - neutralize the mine .

STANDARDS :

The mine will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

0 Grasp the body of the mine firmly with one hand and insert the
safety with the other hand .
三

- 0 With the safety clip in place , using the arming wrench , turn the
plate with the arrow pointing from "A" (Armed) to "S" ( Safe )
position . Remove the mine from the hole

0
Turn the mine over and carefully remove the detonator from the
detonator well . Place the detonator in a safe place .

0 Screw the plastic shipping plug into detonator well , and place
the mine aside for disposition .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , table 3-1

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level , para C- 7
TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines , chap 2

2-347
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1012

TASK :

Disarm the M16A1 bounding antipersonnel mine equipped with and with-
out tripwires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with M16Al bounding antiperson-

nel mines equipped with and without tripwires , M25 fuzing wrench ,
safety pins , and instructions to hand - neutralize the mines .

STANDARDS :

The mines will be disarmed and removed without detonating

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING : BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO REMOVE THE MINE , REMOVE THE CAMOU-

FLAGE AND CHECK FOR ANY EVIDENCE OF BOOBYTRAPPING , DAMAGE , MALFUNC-
TIONING , AND SAFETY PINS WHICH CANNOT BE REPLACED . IF ANY SUCH
FAULTS ARE APPARENT , DISCONTINUE ANY ATTEMPT TO DISARM THE MINE .

1. Disarm the mine not equipped with tripwires .

After the mine has been checked , carefully uncover top of

mine .

Ο
Carefully insert the original safety pin , if available , or
length of steel wire or a nail of proper diameter , through
the positive safety pin hole .

Insert safety pin , length of steel wire , or nail through the

locking safety pin hole opposite the release pin ring .

Ο
Carefully dig around the sides and bottom of the mine , always
being alert for boobytraps .

Ο Carefully lift the mine from the hole .

Ο
Unscrew and remove the M605 fuze assembly , using the M-25
wrench .

Ο Replace the plastic shipping plug in the fuze well , and set
the mine aside for disposition .

Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12&P , chap 2 , para 2-2 ( d) 1 thru

12

2-348
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
2. Disarm the mine equipped with tripwires .

0 Check mine and area for boobytraps . If clear , proceed .

0 Carefully uncover top of mine .

Ο Examine mine for evidence of malfunction , damage , or tamper-

ing .

0
If mine does not appear to be damaged or tampered with , care-
fully insert original safety pin , if available , or length of
5
. steel wire or nail of proper diameter through positive safety
pin hole .

0 Insert safety pin , length of steel wire , or nail through

locking safety pin hole , opposite release pin ring .

PRESSURE PRONGS
!

POSITIVE SAFETY PINE

HEAD

ASSEMBLY

- RELEASE PIN RING

7-18 IN

RUBBER GASKET

THREAD INTERLOCKING

SAFETY PIN

LOADING

ASSEMBLY

VIEW SHOWING
FLASH IGNITER INTERLOCKING
SAFETY PIN

Fuze, mine combination: M605.

2-349
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο After safeties have been inserted , cut all slack wires at-
tached to the release pin ring .

Ο
Carefully dig around sides and bottom of mine , always being
alert for boobytraps .

Ο Lift mine from ground .

Ο Unscrew and remove fuze assembly .

Replace plastic shipping plug in fuze well .

Restore mine and fuze to original condition , if possible .

Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , para 2-2

REFERENCE :

TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines

2-350
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1013

TASK:

Disarm the M18A1 fragmentation antipersonnel mine ( Claymore ) eq-

uipped with and without tripwires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with M18A1 fragmentation anti-

personnel mines equipped with and without tripwires , M2 crimpers ,
and instructions to hand- neutralize the mines .

STANDARDS :

The mines will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCES MEASURES :

1. Disarm the mine not equipped with tripwires .

Ο Check mine and area for boobytraps ; if clear , proceed .

WARNING : IF AT ANY TIME DURING DISARMING PROCEDURES THE MINE AP-

PEARS TO BE A DUD OR IS DAMAGED , IT SHOULD BE CONSIDERED UNSAFE . IT
SHOULD BE DESTROYED IN PLACE .

Ο Make sure that the firing device , has not been fired or the
mine run over .

0 Determine type ( s ) of firing device ( s ) . If the mine is eq-

uipped with an M3 pull release - type firing device , do not
attempt to hand- neutralize . Mines equipped with this type
device must be destroyed in place .

0 If only Ml pull - type firing device ( s ) are used , proceed as

follows :

Carefully insert the positive safety pin and then the

locking safety pin into the firing device .

NOTE : If the original safety pins are not available , use wire or
nails having about the same diameter as the originals .
-

Spread the legs of the original safety pins or bend the

wire or nails just enough to prevent accidental loss dur-
ing handling .

0 Using M2 crimpers , cut the detonating cord free of the firing

device .

2-351
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Disconnect tripwire and recover the firing device .

Ο Unscrew and remove the shipping plug priming adapter ( s ) con-

taining nonelectric blasting caps from the mine .

Ο
Using M2 crimpers , cut the blasting cap free of the detonat-
ing cord .

Ο Recover the blasting cap ( s ) and detonating cord . 10

Ο
Reverse shipping plug priming adapter and screw it into the
M18A1 detonater well .

Recover the mine , tripwire and stakes .

Specific References : TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , para 2-3 ; and FM 5-25 ,

para 1-51 and 1-57 j and k

2. Disarm the mine equipped with tripwires .

CAUTION : RENDER THE FIRING DEVICE SAFE BY RETURNING THE SAFETY BAIL
TO THE SAFE POSITION PRIOR TO PERFORMING THE STEPS BELOW .

Ο Disconnect the firing wire from the firing device . Replace

the combination shorting plug and dust cover on the blasting
cap assembly connector , and dust cover on firing device con-
nector .

Ο Unscrew and remove the shipping plug priming adapter contain-

ing the blasting cap from the mine . Remove the blasting cap
and firing wire from the shipping plug priming adaptor .

Ο
Reverse the shipping plug priming adapter and screw the plug
end of shipping plug priming adapter into the cap well .
Ο Remove the firing wire from the stake or around mine leg .
Reroll blasting cap and firing wire on the plastic spool and
secure this assembly with a piece of insulation tape .

NOTE : Assure that all accessories are removed from the mine before
repacking .

Specific References : TM 9-1345-203-12&P , chap 2 , para 2-3g ( 1 ) thru

g(5)

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines

2-352
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1015

TASK:

Disarm the M26 antipersonnel mine equipped with and without trip-
wires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with M26 antipersonnel mines

equipped with and without tripwires , arming latches , and instruc-
tions to hand - neutralize the mines .

STANDARDS :

The mines will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCES MEASURES :

1. Disarm the mine not equipped with tripwires .

0 Replace the arming latch . With the two raised arming handle
tabs ( lugs ) facing upward , slide the arming latch under the
six lugs of the mine cover (from the side opposite the
arrow ) , assuring that the middle prong of the arming latch
(with center slot ) engages the trip lever cam .
WARNING :
DO NOT FORCE THE ARMING LATCH INTO PLACE . IF THE ARMING LATCH
DOES NOT SLIP INTO PLACE AS DESCRIBED ABOVE , THE MINE SHOULD BE
DESTROYED IN PLACE .

0
Remove dirt from around the mine approximately 1 inch deep
21
for a distance of approximately 6 inches from the edge of the
mine to provide knuckle clearance for turning and removing
the arming handle .
Ο Attach the arming handle to the tags or arming latch . Hold
the mine body firmly with the thumb and finger of one hand to
prevent rotation of the mine in the ground .

0 Rotate the cover counterclockwise until it comes to a posi-

tive stop ( approximately 1/4 turn ) . The arrow on the mine
cover will line up approximately with the " S " ( Safe ) position
on the mine body .
WARNING :

DO NOT LIFT OR REMOVE THE MINE FROM THE GROUND DURING DISARMING ,
AND DO NOT USE UNDUE FORCE TO ROTATE COVER .

2-353
FM 5-12B1 /2
Ο
Remove arming handle and insert the arming latch retaining
pin through the holes in the arming latch in the mine body .
It may be necessary to rotate the latch back (up to 1/4 inch)
to aline the holes in the latch and body .
WARNING :
IF DIRT OR OTHER FOREIGN MATTER PREVENTS INSERTION OF THE ARMING
LATCH RETAINING PIN WHILE THE MINE IS STILL IN THE GROUND , PERFORM
THE REMAINING STEPS WITH CARE TO PREVENT ACCIDENTAL ROTATION OF
COVER TO " A" ( ARMED ) POSITION.

Ο Remove the mine from the ground ( only if the arming latch is
installed properly ) .
Ο If the arming latch retaining pin has not been inserted , at-
tempt to insert it . If the pin is inserted , spread the legs
of the pin approximately 40 ° to prevent accidental removal of
pin . If the pin cannot be inserted , set mine aside for dis-
position .

Ο
If an arming latch retaining pin is not available , a piece of
tripwire may be cut , inserted into the hole through the arm-
ing latch and minebody , and the ends twisted together to as-
sure positive lock .

Ο Replace the arming instructions tag to pull ring , replace the

arming handle in tripwire spool , and place mine aside for
disposition .

Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12 &P , chap 2 , para 2-4e ( 1 )

2. Disarm the mine equipped with tripwires .

Ο Check mine and area for boobytraps ; if clear , proceed .

Ο Carefully remove all camouflage from top of mine .

If there is evidence of boobytrapping or mine malfunction , do

not proceed with disarming procedures . Mine or tripwire ( s )
must not be touched or moved , but must be destroyed by EOD
personnel .

Ο If mine is without evidence of boobytrapping or malfunction ,

cut slack tripwire ( s ) near mine , taking care not to move trip
lever or exert pressure on mine cover .

Ο
Replace arming latch as follows : with the two raised arming
tabs ( lugs ) facing upward , slide arming latch under the six
lugs of mine cover ( from side opposite the arrow ) , make sure
that the middle prong of the arming latch ( with center slot )
engages trip lever cam .

2-354
 FM 5-12B1 /2

WARNING :

DO NOT FORCE ARMING LATCH IN PLACE . IF IT DOES NOT SLIP INTO

PLACE AS DESCRIBED ABOVE , MINE SHOULD BE DESTROYED BY EOD PERSONNEL .

0
Remove the soil ( about 1 inch deep and 6 inches out ) from the
mine to provide knuckle clearance when disarming .

0
Hold mine firmly with thumb and finger of one hand to prevent
rotation of mine in ground . Rotate cover counterclockwise
until it comes to a positive stop . The arrow on the mine
cover will line up approximately with the " S " ( Safe ) position
on mine body .
WARNING :

DO NOT LIFT OR REMOVE MINE FROM GROUND DURING DISARMING

OPERATION . DO NOT USE UNDUE FORCE TO ROTATE COVER .

0 Remove arming handle and retain for future use .

0 Insert arming latch retaining pin through holes in arming

latch and mine body . It may be necessary to rotate latch
back ( up to 1/4 inch) to aline holes in latch and body .
WARNING :

IF DIRT OR OTHER MATERIAL PREVENTS INSERTION OF ARMING LATCH

RETAINING PIN WHILE MINE IS STILL IN GROUND , PERFORM REMAINING STEPS
WITH CARE TO PREVENT ROTATION OF COVER TO " A" ( ARMED ) POSITION

0 Remove mine from ground only if arming latch is installed

properly .

0 If the arming latch retaining pin was not inserted ( above ) ,

attempt to insert pin through arming latch and mine body . If
pin is inserted , spread legs of pin approximately 40 ° to pre-
vent accidental removal of pin . If pin cannot be inserted ,
seek advice from your supervisor .

0 Attach the arming instruction tag to the pull ring .

0 Cut or untie slack tripwire ( s ) from anchor stakes .

0 Remove tripwire spool from mine .

Ο Rewind tripwire ( s ) onto tripwire spool .

Ο Remove tripwire loop ( s ) from trip lever and discard loop ( s ) .

0 Unscrew tripwire lever from mine and screw it into tripwire
spool .

Ο Replace arming handle in tripwire spool .

2-355
FM 5-12B1 /2
Replace tripwire spool assembly on mine .
Specific Reference : TM 9-1345-203-12& P , para 2-4
REFERENCE :

TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines

2-356
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1016

TASK :

Disarm the M15 heavy antitank mine equipped with and without anti-
handling devices .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with installed M15 heavy anti-

tank mine equipped with and without antihandling devices , M20 arming
wrench , safety pins/ clips , and instructions to hand - neutralize the
mines .

STANDARDS :

The mines will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING:

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO DISARM AND REMOVE THE MINE , REMOVE CAMOUFLAGE

AND CHECK FOR ANY EVIDENCE OF BOOBYTRAPPING , DAMAGE , MALFUNCTIONING ,
AND SAFETY PIN/CLIP WHICH CANNOT BE REPLACED . IF ANY OF THESE
CONDITIONS IS FOUND TO EXIST, DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISARM THE MINE .

1. Disarm the mine not equipped with antihandling devices .

0 Turn dial to " Safe"

Ο Remove arming plug

Ο Remove M603 fuze from main fuze well

0 Install safety clip on M603 fuze

Ο Inspect fuze well and install arming plug

Ο Remove mine from hole

2. Disarm the mine equipped with the Ml pull firing device .

Ο Uncover the mine carefully .

0 Locate all antihandling devices . Pull or release type firing

devices may be installed with a second charge under any ob-
ject .

Ο Replace the positive safety first .

2-357
FM 5-12B1 / 2

ING EVICE EMO

FIR D D
LL
PU TY

LOCKING SAFETY PIN

TIE DOWN RING

POSITIVE
SAFETY PIN
STANDARD ( REMOVE LAST)
BASE

Ο Replace the locking safety pin .

NOTE : If the safety pins are not available , thin wires can be used .
Ο Cut the tripwire .

0 Using the arming wrench , turn the arming dial to " Safe , " only
when it is known that this will not detonate the mine .

0 Remove and disassemble the firing device , standard base and

activator from the mine .

Ο Remove the fuse from the M15 .

0 Replace safety clips .

Ο Recover mine and firing device .

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , para D- 2

3. Disarm the mine equipped with the MlAl pressure- type firing de-
vice .

Ο Uncover the mine carefully .

Ο Locate all antihandling devices .

Ο Replace positive safety pin first .

Ο Replace safety fork .

2-358
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

SAFETY FORK

POSITIVE
SAFETY PIN

NAILING LEGS

COUPLING BASE

0 Using the arming wrench , turn the arming dial to "Safe"--

only when it is known that this will not detonate the mine .

0 Remove and disassemble the firing device , standard base and

activator from the mine .

0 Remove the fuse from the M15 .

Replace safety clips .

0 Recover mine and firing device .

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , para D- 6 and fig . D- 9

4. Disarm the mine equipped with M3 pull release- type firing de-
vice .

WARNING:
DO NOT ATTEMPT TO NEUTRALIZE FIRING DEVICE FOR RECOVERY . BOOBY-
TRAPS UTILIZING M3 FIRING DEVICE MUST BE NEUTRALIZED BY DETONATING
IN PLACE .

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , para 1-57k ( 6 )

5. Disarm the mine equipped with the M5 pressure release firing

device .

0 Uncover the mine carefully

Locate all antihandling devices

2-359
FM 5-12B1 /2
Ο Insert interceptor pin in interceptor hole and safety pin in
safety pin hole

LOCKING
SAFETY PIN

RELEASE
PLATE INTERCEPTOR OR
IMPROVISED
FIRING PIN
POSITIVE SAFETY
PIN HOLE

LOCKING
SAFETY PIN STANDARD BASE

0 PROTECTIVE
CAP

(ALWAYS REMOVE)

Ο
Using the arming wrench , turn the arming dial to " Safe " when
it is known this will not detonate the mine .

D
Ο Remove and disassemble the firing device , standard base , and
activator from the mine

Remove fuse from the M15

Recover mine and firing device

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , para D-4 and fig . D- 6

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , Chap 3 , page 42a

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions
FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level, para
1-57K

19

EREN
CE

7M 5-3
20-3
2-360
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1017

TASK:

Disarm the M19 plastic heavy antitank mine equipped with and without
antihandling devices .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with M19 plastic heavy antitank

mines equipped with and without antihandling devices , M22 arming
wrench , safety pins / clips , and instructions to hand - neutralize the
mines .

STANDARDS :
0
-0 The mines will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING :

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO DISARM AND REMOVE THE MINE , REMOVE CAMOUFLAGE

AND CHECK FOR ANY EVIDENCE OF BOOBYTRAPPING , DAMAGE , MALFUNCTIONING ,
AND SAFETY PIN/ CLIP WHICH CANNOT BE REPLACED . IF ANY OF THESE
CONDITIONS IS FOUND TO EXIST , DO NOT ATTEMPT TO DISARM THE MINE .

1. Disarm the mine not equipped with antihandling devices .

0 With safety fork , turn dial to " Safe "

Ο Remove mine from hole

Ο Unscrew pressure plate fuze

0 Unscrew detonator from detonator well

Reinsert shipping plug

Ο Replace pressure plate fuze

2. Disarm the mine equipped with antihandling devices ( M1 , M1A1 , M3

and M5 ) .

The procedures are the same as those for the M15 heavy antitank mine
(task number 051-192-1016 ) except the M2 activator , not the Ml acti-
vator ; and the M606 fuze , not the M603 fuze , are utilized with the
M19 plastic heavy antitank mine .
REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , chap 3 , page 42b

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level , app D

2-361
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1018

TASK:

Disarm the M21 metallic antitank mine .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with an installed M21 metallic

antitank mine , M26 arming wrench , and instructions to hand-neutral-
ize the mine .

STANDARDS :

The mine will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING :

BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO DISARM AND REMOVE THE MINE , REMOVE CAMOUFLAGE

AND CHECK FOR ANY EVIDENCE OF BOOBYTRAPPING , DAMAGE , OR MALFUNCTIONING.
IF ANY OF THESE CONDITIONS ARE FOUND TO EXIST , DO NOT ATTEMPT TO
DISARM THE MINE .

1. Disarm the mine when equipped with an M607 fuze .

Attach safety ( pull ring assembly)

Ο Remove Mine from hole

Ο
Remove tilt rod and adapter

Remove fuze

Attach closure assembly to M607 fuze .

Ο Remove the closing plug .

Ο Remove M120 booster from bottom of Mine .

Ο Reinsert closing plug .

REFERENCES :
TM 9-1345-203-12 & P , Land Mines .
FM 20-32 , Mine Countermine Operations at the Company Level .
FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data .

2-362
 FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1019

TASK:

Disarm the Ml one - gallon chemical mine .

CONDITIONS :

2 Under any environmental conditions , with installed Ml one-gallon

hav chemical mines equipped both with electric and nonelectric detonat-
ing assemblies , protective mask , protective clothing , knife , and
instructions to hand - neutralize the mine .

STANDARDS :

The mine will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING : A PROTECTIVE MASK AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MUST BE WORN

WHEN DISARMING THE MI ONE- GALLON CHEMICAL MINE .

1. Disarm the mine when a nonelectric , detonating assembly has been

used .

Remove the blasting cap from the detonating cord .

Ο
Recover the nonelectric ( initiation) detonating assembly .
Use extreme caution when handling blasting caps .

Ο Carefully reroll the detonating cord up to the mine location .

Ο Untie the detonating cord from the detonating cord burster

charge .

Remove dirt covering the mine carefully checking for evidence

of boobytraps .

0 Remove the mine from the hole .

Ο Remove the detonating cord burster charge .

Ο Carefully inspect the mine for leaks .

0 Clean the mine and return to its packing case ( if available ) .

2. Disarm the mine when an electric detonating assembly has been

used .

0 Remove firing wire from blasting machine terminals ( if con-

nected) .

2-363
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο Shunt ( twist ) the ends of the firing wire .
Ο Carefully coil the firing wire ( use a reel if available ) .

Carefully untie the blasting cap lead wires from the firing
wire and shunt ( twist ) the ends .

0
Remove the blasting cap from the detonating cord and reroll
or coil the lead wires . Use extreme caution when handling
blasting caps .

Ο Carefully reroll the detonating cord up to the mine location .

Ο Untie the detonating cord from the detonating cord burster

charge .

Ο
Remove dirt covering the mine , carefully checking the mine
for evidence of boobytraps .

Ο Remove the mine from the hole .

Ο
Remove the detonating cord burster charge .

Ο Carefully inspect the mine for leaks .

Ο
Clean the mine and return to its packing case .

NOTE : The M13 or the M258 decontamination kits are used to counter-
act the effects of blister agents .

REFERENCE :

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level , para

C-16

2-364
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1020

ile TASK:

Disarm the M23 chemical mine equipped with and without antihandling
devices .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with installed M23 chemical

mines equipped with and without antihandling devices , protective
mask , protective clothing , M20 arming wrench , and instructions to
hand - neutralize the mines .

STANDARDS :

The mine will be disarmed and removed without detonating .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

WARNING :

A PROTECTIVE MASK AND PROTECTIVE CLOTHING MUST BE WORN WHEN

DISARMING THE M23 CHEMICAL MINE .

1. Disarm the mine when no antihandling device is installed .

0 See the performance measures for the M15 heavy antitank mine
in task number 051-192-1016 .

2. Disarm the mine when an antihandling device is installed .

TE
0 See the performance measures for the M15 heavy antitank mine
in task number 051-192-1016 .

NOTE : The automatic atropine injectors ( Combo Pin) are used to

counteract the effects of nerve agents .

REFERENCE :

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level , app C

and D

2-365
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1021

TASK :

Locate mines by visual means .

CONDITIONS :

During a daylight movement , with the possibility of enemy mines and

boobytraps in an area using visual means only .
STANDARDS :
Mines will be located so that movement through the area will not
detonate any mines .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

The following techniques are recommended to detect mines and booby-

traps :

Ο Do not wear sunglasses

Ο
Be alert for tripwires in these places :

Across trails

On the shoulders of roads at likely ambush sites

-

Near known or suspected AT or antivehicle mines

-

Across the last route through dense plant growth

-

In villages and on roads or paths into them

-

In and around likely helicopter landing sites

-

In approaches to enemy positions

-

At bridges , fords , and ditches

-

Across rice paddy dikes

Ο Look for mud smears , grass , sticks , dirt , dung or other mate-
rials on roads

Ο Look for signs of road repair

2-366
 FM 5-12B1 /2
Location For Mines

Helicopter Landing Areas Villages

Craters

Open Areas Bridges& Approaches

Shoulders

Roads & Trails

Mined Hard Surfaced Road

/////

Wire to Enemy Mineat Base of Tree

An
Mud Smeared on Road Covering Mines Holes Filled With Asphalt

es

Mine in Tunnel Under Road Wire to Enemy

ti

Mines Along Shoulders

Ο Watch for disturbed tire marks , ruts , or skid marks

Ο Be alert for any signs placed on trees , posts , or stakes

Ο Watch for marks other than signs such as :

Sticks or stones placed in a line

A broken stick placed on a road or trail

-

Clumps of grass placed at intervals

Sticks stuck in the ground

Strings hanging over doorways

2-367
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο
Watch for wires leading from side of road

Ο
Be alert for any odd items in trees , branches , or bushes

0 Watch for odd features on the ground :

Signs of Mines

VacantBuildings
Misplaced Trees
Π
Wilted Leaves
Signs Civilians
AL

Odd Features
Repairs
Odd Bushes

Stakes
3

Tripwires
1
Sticks Ruts

Plant growth will wilt or change color

Rain may wash away cover from pits and traps

Ο Watch the civilians -

where they don't go

Ο
Be careful of enemy flags , banners , equipment , or supplies
left behind

0 Watch for pieces of wood or other junk on a road

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , chap 13 , para 13-2

REFERENCE :

FM 20-32 Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level

2-368
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1022

or b TASK:

Locate mines by probing .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , in an area where mines and trip-

wires are installed , with a non-metallic probe , mine bonnets or

L other suitable marking device , and an assigned probing direction .

Uvi
STANDARDS :

Without detonation , all mines will be located and marked .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Probing is a way of detecting mines by piercing the earth with a

sharp nonmetallic object , such as a sharp piece of wood . Metal
probes should not be used . Probing is the best way to find buried
mines but is slow , careful work , especially in hard or frozen
ground .

CAUTION : WHEN YOU KNOW OR SUSPECT THAT THE MINES HAVE MAGNETICALLY
INFLUENCED FUZES , MAKE SURE THAT YOU DO NOT CARRY ANY IRON OR STEEL
GEAR IN THE IMMEDIATE VICINITY OF THE MINES . ITEMS SUCH AS HELMETS ,
BAYONETS , WEAPONS , AND PISTOL BELTS SHOULD BE KEPT OUTSIDE THE
FIELD .

Prior to probing :
-

Roll your sleeves up and remove watches and rings to in-

crease your overall sense of touch .
0
When probing :
-

Move on hands and knees , or prone . Look and feel upward

and forward to find tripwires and pressure prongs .
-

After looking and feeling , probe every 2 inches ( 5 centi-

meters ) across a1 -meter front . Push the probe gently
into the ground at an angle less than 45 degrees from the
horizontal , putting just enough pressure on the probe to
sink it slowly into the ground .

CAUTION : IF PUSHED STRAIGHT DOWN , THE TIP OF THE PROBE MAY DETONATE
A PRESSURE MINE .

2-369
FM 5-12B1 /2

If the probe does not go into the ground freely , the soil
must be picked or chipped away with the tip of the probe
and the loose dirt removed by hand .
-

When a solid object is touched , stop probing and remove

the earth to find out what the object is .
-

If a mine is found , remove enough earth to show what type

of mine it is , then mark and report its exact location

Probing

(1m)

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , para 13-3

REFERENCE :

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level

2-370
 FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1023

d TASK:

rem
Locate mines , using the AN/ PSS - 11 mine detector set .

CONDITIONS :

00 Under any environmental conditions , with an unassembled AN/PSS- 11

mine detector set packed in its case and instructions to sweep a
designated path through a minefield containing metallic mines .
STANDARDS :

The detector will be assembled and all mines will be located without
causing detonation .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Assemble the mine detector .

0 Loosen the pressure release valve on the front of the case

( opposite handle ) by two counterclockwise turns .
0 Release the spring - type latches that secure the top case of
the mine detector set to the bottom case .

NOTE : When loosening the six spring - loaded latches , place the thumb
against the flat portion of the latch to prevent rebounding of the
latch throw and injury to the fingers .
0 Remove transmitter assembly , head set , search head assem-
blies , and one silver chloride battery from the case .

Remove battery cap from the receiver and transmitter assembly

and insert the silver chloride battery , negative end first .
Connect the battery cap by turning clockwise until snug .
WARNING : NEVER THROW SILVER CHLORIDE BATTERIES INTO A FIRE . THEY
MAY EXPLODE .

2-371
FM 5-12B1 / 2
RECEIVER AND
TRANSMITTER
ASSEMBLY

PREFORMED

PACKING

BATTERY CAP

Connect the extension handle to the search head assembly .

Pull back on the collar to expose the keypin with slot on the
lock ring and slide the collar forward .

0 Extend the handle to the desired length by loosening and

pulling out extensions and retightening collets .

HEADSET

HEADBAND

SHORT HANDLE
FRICTION ADJUSTING

NUT BAND

COUPLING

COLLET(3)
DETECTOR HEAD EXTENSION
HANDLE

0
Attach audio frequency receiver transmitter assembly carrying
case to your pistol belt by using the keeper and slide pro-
vided .

2-372
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0
Put the headset on , making sure that the pressure on earcups
is enough for partial seal against external noises .
2. Tune the detector .

0 With headset on , hold search ( detector) head 5 feet above

ground level , away from all metal .

0 Turn power selector switch to the intermediate position .

CAUTION : DO NOT START THE DETECTOR UNLESS THE DETECTOR HEAD IS AT

LEAST 5 FEET FROM METALLIC OBJECTS . VOLTAGE INDUCED BY METALLIC
OBJECTS CAN SERIOUSLY DAMAGE UNTUNED CIRCUITS .

Ο Aline index mark on fine " x" control knob with related index
mark on control box . Aline fine " R" control knob in like
manner . (2,500 cps ringing signal should be heard in head-
set ) . Adjust control knobs until a minimum null signal is
obtained .

Ο If minimum null is not obtained , turn power selector switch

to LO position and repeat the above step .

FINE " X" CONTROL KNOB

EXTENSION HANDLE

FINE " R " CONTROL KNOB

INDEX MARK (2)

INDEX MARK (2) CONTROL BOX

POWER SELECTOR SWITCH

0
If there is no signal :
-

Check battery for correct installation and inspect cables

and all connections for breaks .

Check color coded modules for faulty operation by process

of elimination . Each module has different plug- in pins .
(A complete set of extra modules is located in the carry-
ing case . )
-

When minimum null is obtained , perform variometer phasing

and sensitivity checks .

2-373
FM 5-12B1 /2

SPARE BATTERY

SHORT HANDLE

DETECTOR
HEAD

QUICK DISCONNECT
VARIOMETER PHASING CHECK .
DEPRESS THE HANDLE TO THE EXTREME END OF ITS TRAVEL SO THAT THE BOTTOM OF THE SHORT HANDLEIS
APPROXIMATELY PARALLEL WITH TOP OF THE DETECTOR HEAD . START SET AND ADJUST FOR MINIMUM NULL
PLACE A BATTERY AGAINST THE SIDE OF THE SHORT HANDLE AT THE QUICK DISCONNECT END SO THATIT IS
PERPENDICULAR TO THE SHORT HANDLE WITH EITHER END FLUSH WITH THE BOTTOM OF THE SHORT HANDLE.
NOTE THE SIGNAL RESPONSE IN THE HEADSET.
DETECTOR HEAD

PHASING
BLOCK

CONTROL BOX TEST DOT

‫ةع‬
VARIOMETER MODULE
ADJUSTING SCREW RECEIVER AND
TRANSMITTER
ASSEMBLY

PLACE THE PHASING BLOCK, FIRST OVER THE WHITE TEST DOT ON THE DECTOR HEAD , AND THEN ON THESIDE
OPPOSITE THE WHITE DOT. NOTE THE SIGNAL RISE IN THE HEADSET. THE SIGNAL RESPONSE WHEN THE
PHASING BLOCK IS PLACED ON EITHER SIDE OF THE DETECTOR HEAD, SHOULD BE LESS THAN THE SIGNAL
FROM THE BATTERY. A NOTICEABLY HIGHER SIGNAL FROM THE PHASING BLOCK INDICATES INCORRECT
VARIOMETER PHASING IN WHICH CASE REPORT THE CONDITION TO ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE .
SENSITIVITY CHECK
TEST THE SENSITIVITY OF THE SET BY SWITCHING THE POWER SELECTOR SWITCH TO HI POSITION AND
HOLDING A COIN (OR OTHER SMALL METAL OBJECT) ABOUT 2 INCHES ABOVE THE WHITE DOT ON THE
DETECTOR HEAD . A DEFINITE INCREASE IN SIGNAL STRENGTH SHOULD BE HEARD IN THE HEADSET.
IF THE SIGNAL RESPONSE IS WEAK, REPLACE THE BATTERY IN THE SET AND REPEAT STEP 1. IF THE SIGNAL
RESPONSE IS STILL WEAK, REPLACE THE MODULES . IF THE SIGNAL REMAINS LOW, REPORT THE CONDITION TO
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE .
NOTE: DO NOT ALLOW RINGS, WATCHES, OR OTHER METALLIC OBJECTS NEAR THE DECTOR HEAD WHILE
CHECKING THE SET. METALLIC OBJECTS WILL GENERATE A SIGNAL IN THE HEADSET.

2-374
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

to
NOTE : If minimum null cannot be obtained , report the condition
organizational maintenance .

3. Search for mines by sweeping :

WARNING : NEVER ALLOW DETECTOR HEAD TO TOUCH OR REST ON TERRAIN DUR-

ING SEARCH OPERATION OF SUSPECTED MINED AREA .

Ο Standing position operation :

Grasp extension handle in hands .

ORMIN

TECR
-

Make wide sweeping motions from left to right while walk-

ing slowly forward .

Sweep in a 3 -meter swing . This gives a 2 -meter clearance

with a 0.5 - meter overhang on each side .

Ο
Prone position operation :
-

Collapse extension handle to desired length and adjust

detector head for proper angle of operation .

Assume the prone positon , supporting weight on the left

forearm .

Holding extension handle in the right hand , use right

forearm as leverage on rear of extension handle to keep
detector head parallel with terrain .

NOTE : Left - handed personnel will reverse the prone position proce-
dure .

Make wide sweeping motions from left to right while crawl-

ing forward slowly .

CAUTION : THE DETECTOR HEAD COVER MUST BE INSTALLED ON THE SEARCH

HEAD WHENEVER THE DETECTOR IS OPERATED ON ROUGH TERRAIN , TO PREVENT
DAMAGE TO THE SEARCH HEAD .
E

2-375
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Ο Adjust position controls for proper operation :

Low position . Used in areas containing shrapnel or metal-

lic fragments . Hold search head 3 to 8 inches above
ground . Detector will signal only large objects at this
adjustment .

Intermediate position . Used in areas strewn with small

metal fragments and to search for small antipersonnel
mines . Hold search head 3 to 8 inches above ground . At
this adjustment , detector is more sensitive than at low
position .
-

High position . Used in nonmetallic soil to detect metal

fuzed mines or nonmetallic fuzes with metal firing pieces .
Hold search head 3 to 5 inches above ground . Detector is
more sensitive than at low position .
Ο
Locate exact position of buried metallic objects .

When a sharp change in signal volume is heard , move the

detector head slowly from side .
-

An increased signal will be noted as either side of the

detector head is passed over the metallic object .
-

A decreased signal will be noted as the center of the de-

tector head moves over the buried object .
-

If no decrease in signal volume is noted as the center of

the detector head moves over the buried object , a satu-
rated condition exists . If this occurs , raise the detec-
tor 1 or 2 inches higher and repeat the sweeping motion .

If necessary , raise the detector head until a definite

change in volume is evident when the detector head moves
over the buried object . At this point , the detector head
is directly over the location of the buried object .
WARNING : ALWAYS KEEP THE DETECTOR HEAD PARALLEL TO THE GROUND DURING
A SEARCH OPERATION . NEVER ALLOW THE DETECTOR HEAD TO DROP OR REST
ON THE GROUND DURING MINE DETECTING OPERATIONS IN A SUSPECTED AREA .

REFERENCES :

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level , para

13-4
TM 5-6665-202-13 , Operator , Organizational and Direct Support Main-
tenance Manual : Detecting Set , Mine ; Aural Indication ; 10-Volt , DC
Operating Power ; Portable Transistorized , with Case , AN/PSS-11 (Po-
lan Models P153 and P158 , Oregon Technical Products Model MD-M, The
VP Company Model VP200 , and Fourdee Model 4D5000 ) , chap 2

2-376
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1024

TASK :

ches
Cts Locate mines , using the AN/PRS- 7 mine detector set .
CONDITIONS :

with
Under any environmental conditions , with an unassembled AN/ PRS- 7
mine detector packed in its case , and instructions to sweep a desig-
nated path through a minefield containing metallic and nonmetallic
mines .

STANDARDS :
Lect

ng p The detector will be assembled and all mines will be located without
tect
causing detonation .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Assemble the mine detector .

Ο Open the pressure relief valve located on the front of the

carrying case opposite the handle and then open the carrying
case by loosening the six latches and lifting off the top
section .

WARNING : WHEN LOOSENING THE SIX SPRING- LOADED LATCHES , PLACE THE
THUMB AGAINST THE FLAT PORTION OF THE LATCH TO PREVENT REBOUNDING OF
THE LATCH THROW AND INJURY TO THE FINGERS .

Ο Remove the search head assembly with short handle attached ,

the long handle assembly with control - box attached , and one
battery .

Ο
Unfasten the four latches which secure the top on the control
box and insert the battery , terminal end toward search head ,
and insert plug into battery ; then close and latch the top of
the control box .

2-377
FM 5-12B1 /2

CARRYING CASE
(TOP HALF)

ARCTIC KIT

HEADSET
BATTERY

SHORT HANDLE

SIGNAL
PROCESSING SEARCH HEAD
MODULE

LONG HANDLE
CARRYING CASE
CONTROL BOX
(BOTTOM HALF )

MineDetecting Set AN/PRS-7 (Protable).

BATTERY CONNECTOR

BATTERY
HOUSING

ARCTIC KIT CONNECTOR

HEADSET CABLE
(WITH SHORTING PLUG /
CAP INSTALLED)

SEARCH HEAD
LATCHES (4) CABLE

MODULE
HOOK

COVER

Control Box Assembly, Top View, Cover Removed.

2-378
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
0 Attach the long handle to the short handle by means of the
quick - disconnect coupling . Engage and compress spring- loaded
coupling and twist 1/4 turn clockwise .

0 Put on the headset with the headband forward . Adjust the

headband and fasten the spring clip on the headset cable to
the clothing .

2. Make preliminary adjustments .

0 Adjust the handle to the desired length by loosening collets ,
extending the sections and tightening collets .

0 Adjust the search head to the desired angle by resting the

search head assembly on the ground , loosen the slotted nut
and move the handle to the angle desired and tighten the slot-
ted nut to secure the handle in position .

3. Check mine detector for proper operation .

0 Set the selector switch on the control box to SEARCH posi-

tion .

0 Hold the search head approximately 5 feet above the ground

and away from nonhomogeneous objects .
Ο Listen for a tone in the headset .

0 Move the search head back and forth over nonhomogeneous ob-
ject and note change in tone in headset . Repeat steps above
for each POINT mode .

0 If a tone cannot be obtained , check for a low battery or a

faulty module .

To check for a low battery , replace the one in use with

the spare in the carrying case . Attempt to obtain tone as
described above . If a tone can now be obtained , the re-
moved battery is dead .
-

To check for a faulty module , remove the top from the con-
trol box . Grasp module on either side with fingers and
work it free . Take care not to damage socket or module .
Position the spare module to aline properly with control
box connector . Insert module into bracket and press
carefully but firmly into connector . Replace and latch
the cover on the control box . After the substitution ,
repeat the process for obtaining a tone . If a tone is
heard , the removed module is defective .

NOTE : If the above process fails to produce a tone , the complete

set should be returned for maintenance .

2-379
FM 5-12B1 / 2
ARCTIC KIT
HOOK
CABLE CONNECTOR COVER
WITH SHORTING PLUG/
CAP INSTALLED COVER LATCH

POINT LOW
- POINT MID
POINT HIGH
OFF SEARCH
HOUSING

SELECTOR SWITCH
NAME PLATE

Control BoxAssembly.

4. Follow the operating procedures given below :

Ο Turn the selector switch from OFF to SEARCH .

0 Hold the search head over homogeneous soil and a low- level
tone should be heard .

0 Hold search head appproximately 1 1/2 inches above the

ground .

0
Sweep the search head from side to side in a 3 -meter swing at
a rate of about 2 to 3 feet per second . With each sweep ,
advance a distance just less than the width of the search
head ( insure that the search head is parallel to the ground
at all times )

NOTE : When desired , the prone position may be used to sweep for
suspected mines ; however , the sweep area will be considerably
smaller .

NOTE : An increase in the initial signal volume ( background signal )

in the headset when the search head is moved over some particular
spot on the ground indicates a lack of continuity in the soil . A
buried mine will give give a sharper , more pronounced signal than
that resulting from a difference in soil .

5. To locate the exact position of a buried mine , proceed as fol-

lows :

Ο If a buried object is indicated , turn the selector switch

from SEARCH to POINT HIGH position .

Ο If necessary , reset the selector switch to a comfortable

listening level : POINT MID or POINT LOW .

2-380
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

NOTE : POINT HIGH produces the maximum sensitivity in the set . It

is effectively used when the soil is nonmagnetic and there is no
metallic scrap or debris to influence operation of the equipment .
POINT MID produces an intermediate sensitivity . It gives best re-
sults for operation over magnetic soil . It is also used to shut out
interference from surface metallic objects .

POINT LOW is useful for operation over terrain covered with metallic
debris and scrap , where a high exclusion factor is desired . Re-
sponses to small metallic objects will be eliminated , but large ob-
jects , such as metallic mines , will yield adequate response .
Use POINT for outlining mines only . Do not search for mines in
mode other than SEARCH . When operating while using the MID or LOW
position , be extremely alert for mine - indicating signals , since
these lower level sensitivities do not disclose the presence of a
mine as quickly as the HIGH level does . Keep the switch in the OFF
position when the detecting set is not in use .
REFERENCES :

FM 20-32 , Mine / Countermine Operations at the Company Level , para

13-4
TM 5-6665-293-13 , Operator , Organizational , and Direct Support Main-
tenance Manual : Detecting Set , Mine ; Portable ; Metallic and Nonme-
tallic ( Litton Systems Model AN/ PRS - 7 , Fourdee Model 4D6000 , chapter
2

TM 5-6665-202-13 , Operator , Organizational and Direct Support Main-

tenance Manual : Detecting Set , Mine ; Aural Indication ; 10 -Volt , DC
Operating Power ; Portable Transistorized , with Case , AN/PSS- 11 ( Po-
lan Models P153 and P158 , Oregon Technical Products Model MD- M , The
VP Company Model VP200 , and Fourdee Model 4D5000 ) , chap 2

2-381
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-1025

TASK:

Neutralize enemy mines .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , in an area where enemy mines

have been located , with demolitions , grappling hook , rope , and in-
structions to destroy the mine in- place or remove the mine by hand
or with grappling equipment .
STANDARDS :

Mines will be removed without injury to personnel .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Mine destruction , removal , and neutralization .

Before a mine is destroyed or removed , traffic will be
stopped . All personnel will be cleared to a safe distance of
300 meters .

0
With standard demolition procedures as referenced in FM 5-25 ,
mines and booby traps can be destroyed in place . A 1-pound
block of TNT or 1 - pound block of plastic explosive placed on
top is enough is detonate a mine .

Ο If it is decided that the mine must be removed , specially

qualified soldiers should be tasked to remove it . This may
be the case when the mine may damage a road , bridge , culvert
or civil structure to excess . Mines of special intelligence
value may have to be removed for study instead of being de-
stroyed in place .

0 If EOD personnel or engineer team leaders are not available

the mine may be removed by grappling hook and rope from a
protected position .

If the mine is detonated , check the crater for other mines .

When the crater is clear , measure its size to learn the
charge weight of the mine .

Ο
Safety

Flak jackets and steel helmets will be worn , with exceр-

tion of mine detector operators .
Only one person will be allowed at the location of a sus-
pected mine .

All mines and explosive devices will be assumed to be eq-

2-382
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
uipped with antihandling devices until proven otherwise .

All troops in the area will be cautioned not to run and to

move only in areas previously cleared .

Specific Reference ( s ) : FM 20-32 , para 18-8 and 18-10

REFERENCE :

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company level

2-383
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-195-1001

TASK:

Install pickets and make barbed wire/ barbed tape ties .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions while in the field , with materi-

als for wire entanglements , a pioneer tool set , barbed wire/barbed
tape gauntlets or heavy leather work gloves , and instructions to
assist in constructing wire entanglements .

STANDARDS :

When installed , the "U" shaped picket will have the holes or concave
side facing the enemy and the eye of the screw type picket will be
to the right as viewed from the friendly side . Each barbed wire and
barbed tape tie will be made correctly in 1 minute per tie .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install pickets .

0 Carry and place pickets at the locations indicated by the

supervisor , with their points toward the enemy . ( fig . 1 ) .

ENEMY

Figure 1.

0 Screw type pickets will be screwed into the ground by a

driftpin , stick , or another picket inserted into the bottom
eye , turning them clockwise . After installation , the eyes
will be to the right side of the picket as viewed from the
friendly side .

0 " U " -type pickets require stake driving cap (FSN

5340-220-8457) to be placed on top to prevent the sledge from
deforming them . The picket will be driven with the hollow
U- shape facing the enemy .
2-384
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
0 Wooden pickets will be driven with a wooden mallet to keep
from splitting them . The points will be sharpened and , when
being driven in hard earth , the tops will be wrapped with
wire to prevent splitting .

NOTE : When installed , the lower notch of the U- shaped picket or the
bottom eye of the screw type picket should be approximately 10 cen-
timeters ( 4 inches ) off the ground to make passage difficult either
over or under the bottom wires .

120
0
Standing trees and stumps may be used as pickets when their
ed locations permit .
Le
Ο When silence is necessary during picket , installation--
-

The drift - pin used to install the screw type picket should
be wrapped in cloth .
-

ed
A piece of rubber tire placed over the driving face of the
hammer will cut down considerably on noise with driven
(U- shaped or wooden) pickets .

0 When the situation permits , the bucket of the front loader

can be used to push U- shaped pickets into the ground .

Specific Reference : FM 5-15 , para 6-4

2. Make barbed wire ties .

Ο
Top- eye tie . The top eye is used to fasten standard barbed
wire to the top eye of screw pickets . It is made in one con-
tinuous movement of the left hand ( fig.2) while the right
hand exerts a pull on the fixed end of the wire . This is a
secure tie , is quickly made , and uses only a short piece of
wire .
MOVE FREE END FREE
UP OVER TOP OF FIXED
END
FREE PICKET END
FIXED FREE
END FIXED
END
END END

PULL TIGHT
WITH THIS HAND

1 BRING WIRE UP INTO EYE 2 THREAD EYE 3 WRAP FREE END

AROUND BACK OF EYE
Figure2

2-385
FM 5-12B1 /2
FIXED
END
FREE
FREE FIXED
END
END END

4 CONTINUE OVER 5 JERK FREE END UP

FIXED END AND INTO EYE THUS
BELOW EYE
Figure 2 COMPLETING TIE
Top-eye tie.

Ο
Intermediate - eye tie . This tie is used to fasten standard
barbed wire to eyes other than the top eye , in screw pickets .
It is made as shown in figure 3. This tie and the other ties
described below require more time to make than the top-eye
tie and each uses several centimeters of wire . In making the
intermediate-eye tie shown in figure 3 , the following points
are especially important :

(a) The right hand reaches over the fixed wire and around
the picket , with the palm down . The left hand holds
the fixed end for tension .

(b) The loops are removed from the free end and wrapped
around the picket .

(c) One side of the loop should pass above the eye and the
other side below the eye .
A = FREE END

B = FIXED END
A B
A

B A B

1. WITH PALM DOWN REACH 2. PULL LOOP BACK AROUND 3. BRING LOOP FORWARD
AROUND PICKET OR POST PICKET AND DOWN OVER FIXED END
OVER FIXED END AND TAKE END OF LOOP GOES BEHIND EYE,
LOOP FROM FREE END A THUS LOOP SPLITS EYES

A B
B
8
A

5. BRING LOOP UP OVER 6. WIND LOOP AROUND FREE

4. CONTINUE LOOP DOWN
FREE END END AT LEAST TWO TURNS
(AND ACROSS TO FREE END) TO COMPLETE FASTENING
Figure
3
Intermediate- eye tie.

0 Post tie . Standard barbed wire is fastened to wooden pick-

ets , or to the steel U- shaped picket with the post tie as
shown . ( fig . 4 ) . The wire should be wrapped tightly around

2-386
 FM 5-12B1 /2

the post to keep the barbs from sliding down . With the U-
shaped picket , the wire wrapping is engaged in a notch in the
picket . The method is essentially the same as that of the
intermediate- eye tie .

FREE END
FREE END FIXED END FIXED END

FREE END FIXED END

1. WITH PALM DOWN REACH 2. WRAP LOOP AROUND POST 3. WRAP LOOP AROUND FREE
AROUND PICKET OR POST ABOVE FIXED END END AT LEAST TWO TURNS
OVER FIXED END AND TAKE TO COMPLETE TIE
20 Figure4
LOOP FROM FREE END
Posttie

Ο
Apron tie . The apron tie is used whenever two wires that
cross must be tied together . It is tied in the same manner
as the post tie except that a wire is substituted for the
post ( fig . 5 ) .

DIAGONAL WIRE DIAGONAL WIRE

FREE END
FIXED END BRING LOOP UP AND OVER
THE TOP OF THE
DIAGONAL WIRE
FREE END FIXED END

1 3

DIAGONAL WIRE
DIAGONAL WIRE
FIXED END
DIAGONAL WIRE FREE END
FIXED END
FIXED END

FREE END
WIND LOOP AROUND
FREE END
FREE END AT LEAST
2 DRAW A LARGE TWO COMPLETE TURNS
LOOP FROM THE
5
FREE END BACK 4

UNDER THE WIRE

Figure
5
Aprontie

Specific Reference : FM 5-15 , para 6-6

3. Make barbed tape ties and splices .

Ο The wrap - around tie ( fig . 6) is used to attach barbed tape to
pickets .
2-387
FM 5-12B1 / 2 .

5
5222

BARBED TAPE DISPENSER

U-SHAPED PICKET

Figure6
Wrap-around tie.

Ο Splice barbed tape .

-

The slotted- end tie ( fig . 7) provides a quick method of

splicing reels of barbed tape by using the connecting
slots at each end of the 50 -meter ( 164- foot ) reel .

Figure7
Slotted end tie.

The wire ring tie may also be used to splice barbed tape
by interlocking the twisted barbs of two separate lengths ,
then completing the splice by affixing one steel wire ring
to each end of the area where spliced , using the steel
2-388
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

wire ring and pliers provided .

WIRE RING TIE

PLIERS

コ
STEEL WIRE RING , Figure
8

0 When handling barbed tape , heavy barbed tape gauntlets should

be used instead of the standard gauntlets . Small metal clips
on the palm and fingers prevent the barbs of the tape from
cutting the leather .

BARBED TAPE - WIRE GAUNTLETS

Specific Reference : FM 5-15 , para 6-3

4. Tighten loose wires , if necessary , by racking ( fig . 9) with a

drift pin or short stick .

Figure 9 Tightening wire by racking.

2-389
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο
Fences are racked to tighten them when they sag after having
been installed for some time .

0 Wires should not be racked at ties or where they intersect

other wires because this makes salvage of the wire very dif-
ficult .

NOTE : Barbed tape must never be tightened by racking . When working

with barbed wire , wear heavy leather gloves or barbed tape gauntlets
and as an added precaution against cuts and scratches , the wire
should be grasped palm down .

Specific Reference : FM 5-15 , para 6-2 and 6-3

REFERENCE :

FM 5-15 , Field Fortifications

2-390
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
Sag
TASK NUMBER : 051-195-1002

TASK:
ther
e wire
Install concertina .

_ _CONDITIONS :
When
ape Under any environmental conditions , with pickets , concertina or gen-
8, eral purpose barbed tape obstacle , wire , gloves or gauntlets , a pio-
neer tool set , and instructions to install either type wire at a
specific location .

STANDARDS :

Concertina will be extended , anchored , and connected together as

specified in the performance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Install pickets at the locations designated by the supervisor as

described in task number 051-195-1001 .

2. Lay out concertina . When carrying a roll of concertina , step

inside the roll , grasp the carrying handles , lift the roll about
waist high and carry it to the required location .

Ο As each roll of concertina is placed in position , its binding

wires are unfastened , but left attached to the hoop at one
end of the roll .

Specific Reference : FM 5-15 , para 6-5 and 6-10

3. Install concertina .

Ο Normally four men , working as a team , open and extend a roll

of concertina .

One man works at each end of the roll and the others are
spaced along its length to insure that it opens evenly .
-

When necessary , two men can easily open a roll of concer-

tina by bouncing it on the ground to prevent snagging as
they open it .
-

Concertina , when opened , should extend 5 to 15 meters

(16.4 to 49.2 feet , depending on the structure ) and about
90 centimeters ( 3 feet) in diameter . Overextending the
concertina will reduce the effectiveness of the obstacle .
The 5 -meter length prevents smaller enemy personnel from
crawling through the wire .
-

Improvised staples may be used to anchor concertina to the

ground .

2-391
FM 5-12B1 / 2

NOTE : Concertina can be improvised , using standard barbed wire con-

certina , or barbed tape concertina .

Ο Concertina is also anchored , using a horizontal strand of

barbed wire as shown below .

HORIZONTAL STRAND OF BARBED WIRE

POSTTIE

DIAMETER OPEN
90 cm(3 ft)

0
Concertinas are joined at a picket , as shown below , to form a
continuous row .

1
2
PLACE BOTTOM PORTION OF
19 PLACE BOTH BOTTOM AND
FIRST COIL OVER PICKET
TOP PORTION OF SECOND
COIL OVER PICKET

PLACE TOP PORTION OF

FIRST COIL OVER PICKET

2-392
 FM 5-12B1 /2
0 When a triple standard concertina fence is erected , the top
row of concertina is secured with plain wire to the horizon-
tal strand of barbed wire of the rear ( friendly ) row .

NOTE : To collapse concertina , two men remove all kinks in the coils
and replace loose clips with plain wire . The men then stand , one at
each end of a roll , place a foot at the bottom of the coil and an
arm under the top of the coil , and walk toward each other , closing
the concertina by feeding the wire over their arms and against their
feet . When closed , the concertina is compressed with the feet and
tied with plain wire bindings .

Specific References : FM 5-15 , para 6-5 .

4. Construct a general purpose barbed tape obstacle ( GPBTO ) .

0 Description . The GPBTO consists of two concentric helical
coils of steel spring tape which are 30 and 24 inches in di-
ameter , respectively . The GPBTO is available in a seven-mod-
ule package containing sufficient tape to erect an obstacle
140 meters long . The obstacle may be emplaced by vehicle , or
individual sections may be detached and manually erected .
Recovery tools and anchor stakes are included in each con-
tainer . GPBTO should be employed as a band , three belts in
depth .
‫ت‬

0
Emplacement . GPBTO is erected by anchoring one end of the
obstacle to the ground and carrying the package along the
desired obstacle path until all the tape is dispensed . Hand
emplacement requires one- twentieth the time; and vehicular
emplacement , one - fiftieth the time required to erect concer-
tina . Further instructions are included with each container .

2-393
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Safety . Gloves should NOT be worn when handling the GPBTO.
While gloves will reduce minor scratches , they tend to give a
false sense of security . The GPBTO barbs are so sharp that
they easily penetrate gloves without sufficient resistance to
give a warning . Consequently , the hand can be punctured
easily when the glove is worn , and it can be very difficult
to extract the barb from the hand if other barbs are tangled
in the glove .

Specific References : FM 5-34 , page 115

5. Keep in mind the special considerations that follow :

Ο Keep individual weapons nearby at all times

Ο Remain silent when working near the enemy

Ο No working on the enemy side of the wire , unless absolutely

necessary

Ο Men not working should lie down near start of work until work
can continue

Specific References : FM 5-15 , para 6-6

REFERENCES :

FM 5-15 , Field Fortificiations

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

2-394
 FM 5-12B1 /2
t TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1361
ad
TASK:

s
Camouflage / conceal self and individual equipment .
E
CONDITIONS :

During daylight hours , given camouflage paint stick ( s ) , individual

weapon , load - bearing equipment ( LBE) , helmet complete with accesso-
ries , a snow suit ( white sheet or mattress cover) if appropriate ,
burlap garnishing strips or cloth strips , charcoal or burnt cloth
residue , and mud ( if appropriate to area ) .
STANDARDS :

Within 15 minutes , shade shiny areas of exposed skin with dark color
and shadow areas with light color . Clothing , load-bearing equipment ,
and weapon outlines will be altered and irregular patterns added to
blend with the predominant color of the background in the area .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. To camouflage exposed skin ( fig . 1 ) :

a.
Paint the shiny areas ( forehead , cheekbones , nose , and chin)
with dark color

b. Paint the shadow areas ( around the eyes , under the nose , and
under the chin) with a light color

c. Paint the exposed skin on the back of your neck and hands
with irregular patterns

d. When applying camouflage , use the buddy system--work with

another man and check each other

Figure 1

2-395
FM 5-12B1 /2
2. Guide for skin camouflage ( fig . 2 ) .

3. Techniques for camouflaging the helmet ( fig . 3 ) .

4. Techniques for camouflaging LBE and weapon ( fig . 4 ) .

Your Skin Color Is: Shine Areas Shadow Areas

Camouflage Forehead, cheekbones Under eyes, under

Light Dark
Material nose and chin nose and chin

Loam and All troops use in areas

light green stick
Useloam Uselight green
with dark green vegetation.

Sand and
All troops use in areas
lacking dark green Uselight green Usesand
light green stick
vegetation.

All troops use only in

Loam and white Useloam Usewhite
snow covered terrain.

Cork charcoal All troops,if camouflage

Use Do notuse
or lamp black sticks not available.

All troops,if camouflage

Light color mud Do not use Usc
sticks not available.

Figure 2

2-396
 FM 5-12B1 /2

(1) Rubber bans , or expedient bands (2) Slits in burlap allow insertion (3) Form disrupted by burlap bows
made from old inner tubes, burlap ofnatural material . tied into slitted cover.
strips, secure naturalmaterials.
(Note position of band.)

Texturingdiminishes shine from (5) Burlap helmet cover pattern (6) A disruptive point pattern, with
steel helmet. pointed to break up solid color the pattern carried across the
before natural materials are curved lines of the edges,
inserted. especially those seen from the
front.

Figure3

Figure4

2-397
FM 5-12B1 / 2

5. Blending is the use of camouflage materials on , over , and around

an object so that it appears to be part of the background . For
example , a soldier can apply stick paint to exposed skin, and
add burlap , paint , and live vegetation to his helmet , clothing,
and LBE so that he will closely resemble or blend into the back-
ground ( fig . 5 ) .

5
Figure
REFERENCES :

FM 5-20 , Camouflage
FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling
TM
TEC:5-200 , Camouflage
937-061-0 030-F , Mater ials
Cover , Camouflage and Concealment , Part 1

2-398
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1362

TASK:

Camouflage/ conceal equipment .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight hours , given any item of military equipment in a

field location , natural camouflage materials ( e.g. , foliage , grass ,
mud , snow ) appropriate to area , camouflage net ( s ) , and basic- issue
pioneer equipment .

STANDARD :

Within 30 minutes , conceal shiny parts , cover remaining areas of the

equipment in irregular patterns , and alter outlines to blend with
the predominant terrain background pattern in the area .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

To camouflage and conceal equipment , follow these examples :

1. Use pattern paint , mud , or similar substance , to cover shiny

areas of equipment in irregular patterns so the item will blend
with the color of natural surroundings ( fig . 1 ) .
2. Use natural materials ( foliage , grass , mud) and manmade materi-
als to alter the shape and size of the equipment ( fig . 2 ) .

0000000
Figure 1

2-399
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure2

REFERENCES :

FM 5-20 , Camouflage
TEC : 937-061-0030 -F , Cover , Camouflage , and Concealment , Part 1

2-400
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-1363

TASK:

Camouflage/ conceal defensive positions .

CONDITIONS :

Before , during , and after construction of a defensive position , as-

signed sector ( s ) of fire and a specific location to construct a de-
fensive position .

STANDARDS :

Before and during construction of the defensive position , continue

camouflage preparation so that construction tools , freshly dug earth
(to include vegetation ) , and workers are not visible to aerial or
ground observers for extended periods . After completion , the posi-
tion will blend with the area so that an approaching soldier ap-
proximately 35 meters to the front (hand-grenade range) cannot de-
tect it .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Before , during , and after construction of defensive position--

a. Approach the position only from the rear , insuring that a
visible trail is not left . Circle the position when moving
to the front so that a trail does not point out the posi-
tion .

b. Do not litter area , make unnecessary noise or , during hours

of darkness , expose any light ..

C. Do not disturb vegetation not used in constructing or camou-

flaging the position . ( Be particularly careful with a vehi-
cle , if you are a driver , to insure that the vehicle does
not leave a trail pointing out the position) .

2. During construction :

a. Place sod from the position in front of proposed parapet

location .

b. Use soil removed from the position to build a parapet and

then cover it with sod in such a manner that it looks nat-
ural and will have a good chance of growing . Excess soil
should be carried well to the rear of the position and hid-
den . ( Soil removed from your position must not be visible
from the ground or from the air ) .

•
If additional vegetation must be used to break up the out-
line of the parapet , obtain some ( similar to that found near

2-401
FM 5-12B1 /2

your position) from far to the rear of your position with

root structure intact , if possible . Do not use so much vege-
tation that the position has more than the surrounding area .
Camouflage the holes or cuts from which vegetation was re-
moved .

3. After construction :

a. Replace dying foliage constantly . ( Change cut foliage at

least every 3 hours when the tactical situation permits ) .

b. If the ground under the weapon's muzzle ( when aimed within

sector of fire from completed position ) is dusty , keep it
moist but not excessively wet .

NOTE : Assigned weapon must be within reach at all times .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-15 , Field Fortifications

FM 21-75 , Combat , Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

2-402
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
POTASK NUMBER : 051-197-1001
e son
TOTASK:
ation

Identify trestle components .

CONDITIONS :
Under any environmental conditions with trestle component sets
ti issued with standard bridge sets ( i.e. , 50 - ton , 60 - ton , and universal
trestle .
STANDARDS :
alme The trestle components will be identified by sight and use .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :
dusty

1. Describe the general characteristics of the three types of

trestles .
S.

Ο Three types of trestles are issued with standard bridge sets-

-the 50 - ton , 60 - ton , and the universal type . The universal
type is replacing the 50 - ton trestle for use with the M4T6
bridge . Trestles provide intermediate supports for multiple
span fixed bridges and accommodate changes in water level
when installed under the end spans . The 50 -ton unit is a
component of the M4 bridge set . The 60 -ton trestle is issued
with the class 60 bridge set . The universal trestle is re-
placing the 50 - ton trestle for issue with the M4T6 bridge set
as the stock permits .

2. Identify trestle components . Table 1 gives a comparison of

trestle components .

Ο Class 60 Trestle . The three types of trestles may be used

interchangeably to support a class 60 load ( fig . 1 ) . Trestles
are used in pairs and fully braced . A class 60 arrangement
is obtained by placing two trestles on 15 - foot centers with
one bay of superstructure between the trestles . The yoke pin
is removed from the deck superstructure as it crosses each
transom , allowing a hinge action and distributing the weight
to each trestle as vehicles across the bridge .
Comparison of Trestle Components.
50-ton 60-ton Universal
Transom:
Overall length 19ft 8 in. 19ft 10/2 in . 20ft 1 in
Weight 1,550lb 945# 910#
Height 3ft3 in. 2ft 3 in 2 ft 058 in
Center- to - center
ofcolumns.
18ft 10 in 18ft 2 in 19ft 0 in
Column:
Diameter 7 in 7 in 7 in
Weight 360 lb (full length)
175 lb (half length)
Height 15ft 6 in ( full length) 20ft 3 in 18ft 0 in

Trestle shoe:
8ft 10 in. (half length)
Weight 215 lb 190 lb 200 lb
Bracing strut length 22ft 0 in. 22ft 0 in 22ft 0 in

2-403
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure1
Class 60 trestle.

0 Universal Trestle . The universal trestle ( fig . 2 ) is used in

place of the 50-ton unit . The trestle proper consists of one
transom , weighing 910 pounds ; two columns ; two shoes weigh-
ing 200 pounds each ; and two chain hoist supporting brackets
weighing 20 pounds each . The top of the transom is fitted
with recesses to accept 22 balk lugs and has 22 horizontal
holes through which the adapter pins are inserted to hold the
balk in place . The transom is pinned to each column . Holes
in the column are on 6- inch centers ; 2 holes in the transom
at 9-inch centers permit 3- inch adjustments in transom
height . The transom is raised or lowered using the chain
hoists and only when the roadway over the transom is clear of
traffic . The hoists are slacked off or removed after the
adjustment has been made .
Ο
Trestle Bracing . Trestle bracing gives lateral and longitu-
dinal stability to trestles . The following trestle- bracing
equipment ( fig . 3 ) is issued with each trestle : four strut
braces , weighing 145 pounds each ; eight clamps , bracing ,
weighing 50 pounds each ; two wrenches weighing 13 pounds
each; and four holdfasts with "D " handle pickets weighing 68
pounds each . The special wrench is used to remove the shot
coupling from the trestle .

2-404
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TRESTLE
BRACING
STRUT

COLUMN RETAINER ASSEMBLY

TRANSOM

BRACING
CLAMP

TRESTLE SHOE ASSEMBLY

Figure 2
Universal trestle.

HOLDFAST

WRENCH FOR
COLUMN- COUPLING NUT
LL OLUMN 5'6
FIFU C , 1 "' ‫י‬
7" DIA.
COLUMN

COLUMN COUPLING NUT

31½ DIA.

BRACING
CLAMP
0
22' "

TRESTLE- BRACING STRUT

Figure3
Trestle bracing accessories.

2-405
FM 5-12B1 /2
Comparison of Trestle Components.
50-ton 60-ton Universal

Transom:

Overall length 19 ft 10/2 in. 20 ft 1 in

19ft8 in.
Weight 1,550 lb 945# 910#
Height 3ft3 in. 2ft3 in 2ft 058 in
Center-to-center
ofcolumns . 18ft 10 in 18ft 2 in 19ft0 in
Column:
Diameter 7 in 7 in 7 in

Weight 360 lb (full length)

175 lb (half length)
Height 15ft 6 in (full length) 20ft 3 in 18ft 0 in
8ft 10 in . (half length)
Trestle shoe:
Weight 215lb 190 lb 200 lb

Bracing strut length 22ft 0 in. 22

ft 0 in 22ft 0 in

Ο The universal trestle adapter is used to secure the deck of

the class 60 bridge on the trestle transom .

2-406
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

--18 ′ -0"

HOIST SUPPORT BRACKET ASSEMBLY

。。。
TRANSOM ASSEMBLY

18'- 678"

TRESTLE BRACE SUPPORT COLUMN ASSEMBLY

TRESTLE BRACE CLAMP ASSEMBLY

TRESTLE SHOE

Class 60 trestle.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , para 6-12a ; fig . 6-17 and 6-18 , para
11-15a and b ( 1 ) ; fig . 11-20 , 11-21 , and 11-22 ; and table 11-5 .
REFERENCE ( S ) :

TM 5-210 , Military Floating Bridge Equipment

2-407
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-197-1002

TASK:

Identify Bailey bridge components .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with the Bailey Bridge compo-

nents specified in the performance measures .

STANDARDS :

The Bailey Bridge components will be identified by sight and use .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

The following bridge parts are used in Bailey bridge construction :

Ο The transom ( fig . 1 ) , is used to support the floor system of
the bridge . It is a 10- inch wide flange steel beam , 19 feet
11 inches long , with a 4 1/2- inch flange and a 5/ 16- inch
cover plate on each flange . It weighs 618 pounds and is car-
ried by eight men , using carrying tongs clamped to the upper
flange or carrying bars inserted through the holes in the
web .

19'
11"

Figure 1
Transom.

Ο The panel ( fig . 2 ) is the basic member of the bridge . It is

a welded high tensile steel truss section 10 feet long , 5
feet 1 inch high , and 6 1/2 inches wide . It weighs 577
pounds and can be carried by six men using carrying bars .
The horizontal members of the panel are called chords .
Transoms are clamped to four seatings on top of the bottom
chord next to the panel verticals .

Both chords have male lugs at one end and female lugs at
the other . Panels are joined end to end by placing panel
pins through the lugs . The panel also has other holes for
which the purposes are explained in figure 2 .

2-408
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

LL
TOP CHORD

VERA
FEMALE LUG

5" '1
MALE LUG

PINS
" OF
4'9
C
воттом CHORD
P
10 C COF INS
'

Figure
2.
Panel pins.

0
The panel pins ( fig . 3 ) , as stated in the paragraph above ,
are used to join panels , and end posts to panels .
LOOT
beam -

The panel pin is 8 5/16 inches long , 1 7/8 inches in di-

dal
ameter , and weighs 6 pounds . It has a tapered end with a
ds A
small hole for a bridge pin retainer ( safety pin) .
d tot
groove is cut across the head of the panel pin parallel to
he hol the safety pin hole . Panel pins should be inserted with
the groove horizontal , to enable the safety pin to be in-
stalled with ease . Pin A is used to connect several ра-
nels together to form a truss . Pin B is used to pin the
end posts of the outer truss in a triple- truss bridge .

SAFETY PIN SAFETY PIN

PANEL PIN SHORT PANEL PIN

V
85/16 " -79/16 "
-
Panel.

id
0
It w
ying
Figure 3. Panel pins .
allet
0
ofc The transom clamp ( fig . 4) is a hinged screw type clamp , 13
1/2 inches high and 8 inches across the top . It weighs 7
pounds .

male
-

The transom clamp is used to clamp the transom to the ver-

ther tical and bottom chords of the panel . It is then tight-
2 ened by the vise-handled screw .
2-409
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure4
Transom clamp.

0
The raker is a 3 - inch I-Beam with a 2 3/8 inch flange . It
is 3 feet 8 5/16 inches long and weighs 22 pounds .
-

The raker ( raker brace ) ( fig . 5 ) is used to connect the end

of the transom to the top of the panels of the inner truss
to prevent the panel from overturning . At each end of the
raker is a hollow dowel for the bracing bolts ; it fits
through a hole in the panel and a hole in the transom .

3'8 5/16"

Rakier
Figure
5

The bracing frame is a rectangular frame , 4 feet 3 inches by

1 foot 8 inches , with a hollow conical dowel on each corner .
It weighs 44 pounds .
-

The bracing frame ( fig . 6 ) is used to brace the inner two

trusses on each side of a double and triple truss bridge .
Bracing bolts attach the bracing frames horizontally to
the top chords of the bridge and vertically on one end of
each panel in the second and third stories , if con-
structed .

4' 3"

1'8"

XX Bracingframe.
Figure6

0 The sway brace ( fig . 7 ) is a 1 1/8 inch steel rod , hinged at

the center , and adjusted by turnbuckle . It weighs 68 pounds .

2-410
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

The sway braces are used to brace the bridge laterally .

At each end of the brace is an eye , through which a pin on
a chain which is connected to the brace is inserted to
secure the panel . The proper tension is then applied by
inserting the tail of an erection wrench in the turnbuckle
and tightening it by screwing the turnbuckle .
The locknut is then screwed up against the turnbuckle to
prevent it from working loose . Two sway braces are re-
quired in the lower chord of each bay of bridge , and all
except the first bay of the launching nose .

fla
S
Figure7
Sway brace.
re

0
The tie - plate ( fig . 8) is a piece of flat steel 2 1/2 by 3/8
by 12 inches , weighing 3 1/2 pounds . It has a hollow conical
its dowel at each end .
etre

The tie- plate is used only in triple- truss construction ;

it is used to secure the second truss to the third truss ,
using the unoccupied raker holes in the panels at each
joint and at the ends of the bridge .

et 3
nea 1 Figure
8
Tieplate.

Ο
2
The bracing bolt ( fig . 9) is 3/4 inch in diameter , 3 1/2
inches long , and weighs about 1 pound . A special lug on its
head prevents rotation when the bolt is tightened . A 1
120
on 1/8 - inch wrench is used to tighten it .
es,
-

The bracing bolts are used to attach and secure rakers to

transoms and panels , bracing frames to panels , and to se-
cure tie plates to panels . It is inserted into the hollow
dowels of the braces to draw parts into proper alinement .

18

Figure9

0ad,b
0 Bracingbolt.

2-411
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο
The chord bolt ( fig . 10) is 1 3/4 inches in diameter , 10 1/2
inches long , and weighs 7 1/2 pounds . It is tapered through
half its length .
-

The chord bolts are used to join the panels one above the
other to form double and triple story bridges . Two bolts
per panel are passed upward through holes in the chords of
the panels and are tightened with the nuts on the lower
chord of the upper story . They are also used to fasten
overhead bracing supports to the top panel chord .

Figure10
Chordbolt.

Ο The stringers ( fig . 11 ) are used to carry the roadway of the

bridge.
-

Each stringer consists of three 4- inch steel I-beams , 10

feet long , joined by welded braces . There are two types
of stringers : plain stringers weighing 260 pounds , and
button stringers weighing 267 pounds . They are identical
except that the button stringer has 12 buttons which hold
the ends of the chess in place .
-

Each bay of bridge uses six stringers : four plain and two
button . The plain stringers are placed in the middle,
and a button stringer on each side , with the button to the
outside of the bridge . The stringers are positioned by
the lugs on top of the transoms .

STRINGER , PLAIN
2
21/ "

2
2

STRINGER , BUTTON

Stringers.
Figure 11
2-412
 FM 5-12B1 /2
0 The chess ( fig . 12 ) is used to form the road surface of the
red bridge . A chess is a board 2 inches by 8 3/4 inches by 13
feet 10 inches and weighs 65 pounds . The chess is notched at
the ends to fit between the buttons of the stringers . Each bay
of bridge contains 13 chess , which lie across the stringers
১ and are held in place by the buttons of the stringer . Chess
are held down by ribands .

13
'10"

‫م‬
Figure 12
Chess

0
The riband ( curbs ) ( fig . 13) are metal curbs 8 inches high
and 10 feet long , and weigh 162 pounds .
dvay
The riband is fastened to the button stringers . It is
aret
used to keep vehicles on the roadway of the bridge .
pom
arei
shi

the Figure13
Riband

Sit 0
The riband bolt ( fig . 14) is a J- type bolt 1 inch in diameter
and 8 5/8 inches long . It weighs 4 1/2 pounds .
-

The riband bolt fastens the riband to the button stringers

and ramps . The hook end of the bolt grips the lower
flange of the outer I-beam of the stringers .

Figure14
Riband bolt.

2-413
FM 5-12B1 / 2
0 The end posts are 5 foot 8 inch columns made of two 4-inch
channels and plates welded together . There are two types ,
male and female , having male and female lugs , respectively.
-

End posts ( fig . 15 ) are used on both ends of each truss of

the bridge to take the vertical shear . End posts have a
step to support a transom outside the panel at each end of
the bridge . In jacking the bridge , the jack is placed
under the step . The lower end of the end post has a half
round block which fits over a bearing .

POST, END , FEMALE

Figure 15 POST, END, MALE

Endpost.

0 The bearing ( fig . 16 ) is a welded steel assembly containing a

round bar , which supports the bearing blocks of the end
posts .

-
The bearing spreads the load of the bridge to the base
plate during assembly of the bridge it supports the bear-
ing block of the rocking rollers . The bar of the bearing
is divided into three parts by sections that act as stif-
feners .

2-414
 FM 5-12B1 /2
of

8
25 "

‫نا‬

1
5"

18"

Bearing Figure 16

0
The base plate ( fig . 17) is a welded steel assembly with bu-
ilt - up sides and lifting-hook eyes on the top at each corner .
The area of the bottom surface of the plate is 13 1/2 square
feet . The base plate weighs 381 pounds , and is large enough
for the bearings at one corner of a single- , double- , or
triple - truss bridge .
-

The base plate is used under the bearings to spread the

load from the bearings over the ground or grillage . The
bearing can slide 9 inches longitudinally on the base
plate . The numbers 1,2 and 3 are embossed on the edge of
the base plate to indicate the position of the plate under
the inner truss of single- , double- , and triple- truss
bridges , respectively .

Figure17
Baseplate.

The ramps ( fig . 18 ) are similar to stringers , but consist of three

5 - inch ( instead of 4- inch ) steel I-beams . They are 10 feet long .
The lower surface of the ramp tapers upward near the end . There are
also two types of ramp : plain , weighing 338 pounds ; and button ,
weighing 349 pounds .

2-415
FM 5-12B1 / 2
The ramps are used as continuation of the stringer at the
end of the bridge and lead from the bridge to the bank .

IRAMP, PLAIN

2
21/ "

22
"

RAMP . BUTTON

Figure18 Ramps

Ο The ramp pedestal ( fig . 19 ) is a built- up welded steel assem-

bly weighing 93 pounds .
-

Ramp pedestals are used to prevent the transoms supporting

multiple- length ramps from overturning and to spread the
transom load over the ground . They are held in place by
spikes or pickets driven through the holes in their base
plates .

2'
3"
" 6
'
1

Figure 19 Ramp pedestal.

Specific Reference : TM 5-277 , para 2-1 thru 2-25

2. The following is a description of the bridge erection equipment

2-416
 FM 5-12B1 /2
riy
1 and its use .

0 The rocking roller ( fig . 20) consists of three rollers housed

in a balanced arm which fits over the bearing and is free to
rock on it. The side rollers on the flanges act as guides
for the trusses .

Rocking rollers distribute the bridge load along the bot-

tom chord of the panel during launching of the bridge .

ROLLER , ROCKING
BEARING
4-5/16"
HIGH

Figure 20 Rocking roller.

0
The plain roller ( fig . 21 ) is 2 feet 1 1/2 inches wide and
consists of a welded housing containing a single roller split
in two .

During launching , plain rollers are placed every 25 feet

behind the rocking rollers and other required places ex-
cept at bank seats . A pair of plain rollers are used as
construction rollers , placed 12 feet 6 inches behind the
rocking rollers and 2 inches below the plane of all other
rollers . The construction rollers are used when assem-
bling the launching nose .

2
' 11/2"

Figure 21 Plain roller.

0 The transom roller ( fig . 22) is a roller having an outside
diameter of approximately 1 7/8 inches (1 1/2- inch extra
heavy steel pipe) and a length of 6 5/8 inches .
-

The transom roller is used to simplify and expedite plac-

ing and removing transoms during assembly and disassembly
of the bridge .

2-417
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TRANSOM ROLLER

Figure22 Transom roller in position.

Ο
The bridge jack ( fig . 23 ) , the jack used to lift the bridge
on and off the rocking rollers , is a mechanical lifting jack
of the type normally used in rigging , railroads , and con-
struction work . It has a lifting range of 15 inches and a
capacity on the top of 15 tons and on the toe , 7 1/2 tons .

NOTE : Jacks of different manufacture have difference spacing (pitch)

between teeth . Where jacks ( fig . 23 ) are used to lift at the same
point , all jacks used must have the same tooth pitch so they can be
operated in unison .

Figure 23 Jack.

2-418
 FM 5-12B1 /2
0
The jack shoe ( fig . 24 ) is a welded assembly which fits over
the bearing and supports the jack . In jacking under the step
of the end posts , they can be placed readily without removing
the jack shoe . It fits over the bearing on the base plate .

Figure 24 Jack shoe.

0 The wrenches provided in the bridge set are illustrated and

described in figure 25 .
Wrench Use

(
1)
11/4 inch offset socket wrench. Tighten bracing bolts.
214 inch offset structural Tighten bracing bolts. (2)
wrench. Tighten riband bolts.
31½ inch offset structural Tighten sway braces (use tail (3)
wrench. ofwrench).
414 inch offset structural Tighten chord bolts.
wrench. 4)
(
5 Reversible ratchet-wrench Tighten bracing bolts (use
handle with 16 inch and 1½ inch socket ). (5)
1½ inch sockets. Tighten chord bolts (use 17/8
inch socket).
a

Figure25 Wrenches. b

Ο The panel lever ( fig . 26 ) is a wooden bar 7 feet 9 inches

long weighing 48 pounds . It has fulcrum near the center and
a lifting link at the end .
-

The panel lever is used in assembling the second and third

trusses after the first truss is in place over the gap .

Figure 26 Panel lever.

2-419
FM 5-12B1 /2
0
The carrying bar ( fig . 27 ) a wooden bar 3 feet 6 inches long
reinforced by a steel band at the middle ; it is used to carry
panels and transoms .

Figure 27 Carrying bar.

The carrying tongs ( fig . 28 ) are steel , and are shaped like
railroad tongs .
-

The carrying tongs are used to carry transoms by clamping

them over the top flange . Two men carry the tongs , each
man grasping one of the two handles .

Figure 28 Carrying tongs.

0 The chord jack ( fig . 29 ) consists of two welded steel frames

which fit on top of the top chord and engage with the plates
which carry the holes for bracing- frame dowels . Each frame
is held in place by bolts .
-

The chord jack is used to spread the jaws of truss and

allow the pins to be inserted in the upper truss .

Chordjack. Figure 29

2-420
 FM 5-12B1 /2
0 The pin extractor ( fig . 30) assists in dismantling the
bridge . It is a steel bar ( lever ) with a jaw on one end .
After the pin has been driven part way out and the recess
under the head of the pin is exposed , the pin extractor grips
the pin head and forces the pin out by a leveling action .

Figure30 Pin extractor.

0 The launching nose link ( fig . 31 ) is about 10 inches long

and 7 inches wide , weighing 28 pounds . The link consists of
two steel frames welded back to back . The sides of the link
have holes into which panel pins can be inserted .
-

The launching nose link is used to overcome the sag occur-

ring during launching of the bridge . The links are placed
one on each side of the launching nose to raise the nose
to its desired height .

Figure 31 Launching nose link.

Two types of templates are provided with the bridge : rocking roller
and plain roller templates .
-

The rocking roller template ( fig . 32 ) weighs 78 pounds and

consists of a timber base with timber strips on top which
surrounds two spaces large enough for rocking roller bear-
ings . At one end of the template are two angle cleats
which are used as measuring points during the bridge site
layout .

2-421
FM 5-12B1 /2

Rocking roller template.

CC
G

)
CC
う

D
Figure32

The plain roller template weighs 22 pounds and consists of

a timber base with timber strips on three sides and a steel
strip on the fourth side surrounding a space large enough
for the base of a single plain roller . It also has metal
cleats at one end for measuring points .

e
6

‫م‬

Plain Roller template.

Figure33

The templates are used to support the plain rollers and

rocking rollers during construction and launching of the
bridge .

Specific References : TM 5-277 , chap 2 , sect II , para 2-26 thru 2-38 .

Specific Reference : TM 5-277 , para 2-1 thru 2-38.

REFERENCE :

TM 5-277 , Bailey Bridge

2-422
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-198-1001

TASK :

Operate a pneumatic assault boat .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , at a river site in support of an

infantry river assault crossing , with a 15-man pneumatic assault
boat and accessories in the carrying case , an infantry squad , and
instructions .

✓ STANDARDS :

The assault boat will be prepared for operation , transported to the

water, launched , loaded , used to carry the squad across the river ,
and repacked .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Describe the general characteristics of the 15 -man landing boat .

Ο The 15-man landing boat is an inflatable assault craft that

is furnished with 11 wooden paddles ; two large foot- held
pneumatic pumps , with hose assemblies ; one small hand-held
pneumatic pump , with hose assembly ; a carrying case ; and a
repair kit . When inflated to its operating pressures of 3
psi for all compartments of the boat except the double-
layered floor , which is inflated to 7 psi , the boat has the
--

capacity for transporting 15 men an engineer crew of three

men plus 12 infantry soldiers with their equipment , up to
--

a combined total weight ( personnel and equipment ) of 3,375

pounds , across rivers or other bodies of water with suffi-
cient room , freeboard , and stability .

Ο The pneumatic assault boat is fabricated from neoprene - coated

nylon fabric . It is divided into ten separate air compart-
ments which provide the buoyancy for the 15 men and equip-
ment . The main flotation tube of the boat is 18 inches in
diameter and is divided into six compartments . The floor
consists of two 3 - inch thick air mats , cemented together , and
individually inflated . A thwart tube connects the main flo-
tation tubes at midship , and a 4- inch diameter spray rail is
located around the periphery of the main flotation tube .

Ο The boat is equipped with a towing bridle and a life line .

It is further equipped with pockets for stowing the pumps and
the repair kit . The stern of the boat is equipped with an
installed transom which can be used for mounting a standard
25 HP outboard motor for propelling the boat in an assault or
river - crossing operation .

2-423
FM 5-12B1 / 2

3
(2
)

1
4
16 7
6
5
9
10 8

)
(14
(11
(
12
)
15

(
13)

1.- BOW BRIDLE 9.- FOOT PUMPS (2 each)

2.- CARRYING HANDLES (8 each) 10.- THWART TUBE
3.- LIFELINE 11. -THWART TUBE INFLATION VALVE

4. - CAIN FLOTATION TUBE INFLATION VALVES (6 each) 12.- SPRAY RAIL TUBE
5. - TRANSOM 13.- SPRAY RAIL TUBE INFLATION VALVE
6.- FUEL TANK HOLDER 14. - INFLATABLE FLOOR

7.- FLOOR INFLATION VALVES (2 each) 15.-MAIN FLOATATION TUBE

8. - HAND PUMP ( 1 each) 16.-REPAIR KIT

Boat, Landing, Inflatable Assault, 15-Man

The following basic items are issued with the boat .

Item Quantity per Boat

CASE , carrying 1

PUMP , air , inflating/

deflating , hand- operated ,
single- cylinder plunger ,
Foot Model , Type 1 ,
complete with 48- inch
long hose and adapters ,
per MIL- P- 12047 2

PUMP , air , inflating/

deflating , hand- operated ,
single cylinder plunger ,
Hand Model , type 11 ,
Size 2 , per MIL- P - 12647 1

PADDLE , boat , laminated

wood , 60 inch long , per
MIL- P - 15737 11

KIT , Repair 1

2-424
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
2. Prepare the assault boat for launching .

Ο Remove boat from carrying case .

Unfold entire boat .

Remove pumps from pump pockets .

Ο Attach pump hose to pump and insert in valves .

Ο Operate pump to required pressures . (Pressures are stenciled

adjacent to each valve . Floor compartments 7 psi ; main
--

tube , spray rail , and thwart 3 psi . )

--

Ο The two foot pumps are to be used for inflating the main
tube , spray rail and thwart . The hand pump is to be used for
inflating the floor compartments after initial inflation of
the floors with the foot-held pumps .

Ο
Check tube pressures with the air gauge furnished and packed
in the repair kit pocket . Do not overinflate .
Ο Return pumps and air gauge to their respective pockets to
2 prevent loss .

Remove paddles from carrying case and place in boat .

Boat is now ready for launching and loading .

3. Direct personnel to carry the assault boat ( upright ) to the as-

sault site and launch .

Ο
( Infantry - engineer boat teams ) carry the inflated boat up-
right to the water . If an outboard motor is to be used , it
is carried by two men and mounted on the transom of the boat
at the water's edge . The equipment is placed in the boat and
personnel enter from either side as the boat is pushed into
the water .

0 Eight handles , four on each side , are provided to facilitate

carrying of the boat in the inflated condition . A life line
is attached securely to the upper , outside part of the flota-
tion tube for emergency purposes . Do not carry the boat by
means of the life line .

4. Direct loading and propelling the boat for either paddling or

when using outboard motors .

Ο The assault boat can operate up to the following maximum cur-

rents , depending on propulsion method .
-

Paddle propulsion ... Fully loaded boat can maintain headway

in 5 - foot per second ( fps ) current .

2-425
FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Motor propulsion ... Fully loaded boat can maintain headway

in 11- foot per second current when propelled by a military
25 HP outboard motor .

Ο
Paddling . A crew of three engineer soldiers is assigned to
each assault boat . The engineer soldier in charge of the
detail is seated in the stern ; his duties are to steer the
boat . The other two engineer soldiers are seated in the bow,
one on either side . They act as paddlers and set the ca-
dence. Four infantry soldiers kneel on one knee along each
side of the boat and assist in paddling . When the far shore
is reached and the infantrymen are discharged from the boat,
the engineers return the boat to the near shore for the next
load . The boat can be propelled by paddling in currents up
to 5 feet per second and maintain headway .

Paddling

Ο Outboard Motor . Two engineer soldiers form the boat crew

when an outboard motor is used . The engineer crewman in
charge of the boat operates the outboard motor and directs
distribution of the load . The other crewman takes his place
at the bow of the boat and assists in launching and beaching
the boat .

CAUTION : When using a standard military outboard motor to propel

the assault boat , accelerate cautiously , apply power gradually , and
never start out at full power , as the transom may be damaged by ex-
cessive initial thrust and the boat may overturn .

2-426
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
inte

eli

OutboardMotor Propulsion

5. Direct deflating and packing of assault boat .

0 Beach boat

0 Remove outboard motor and paddles from boat

0
Remove all foreign matter ( pebbles , sand , mud ) and clean tho-
roughly .

0
Release air by turning valve . Deflate completely , using
pumps

Ο
Place pumps in respective pockets
0 Fold sides of boat inward

0 Fold bow to center

0 Fold stern to center

Ο Fold together

0 Place paddles in carrying case

0 Place folded boat in center of carrying case

0 Fold flaps over boat and secure straps

6. Store assault boat .

0 The boat should be stored in a cool , dry place , out of direct

sunlight

Ο Excessive handling which might cause chafing should be

avoided

0 Do not store near furnace , steam lines , or boilers

0 Do not store near oil or oil contaminated areas

2-427
FM 5-12B1 / 2

FOLDING BOAT

STEP # 1

STEP #2

STEP #3

GO
STEP #4

STEP #5 =

0 F
STEP #6

Do not use packing hooks in moving or stacking cased boats

2-428
 FM 5-12B1 /2
REFERENCES :

FM 31-60 , River - Crossing Operations , para B-3

TM 5-210 , Military Floating Bridge Equipment , para 3-3
Manual for Operation and Maintenance of Boat , Landing , Inflatable ,
C Assault Craft 15 -man Capacity NSN 1940-00-540-5609

2-429
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-198-1002

TASK :

Identify M4T6 float bridge components .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with the M4T6 float bridge com-
ponents specified in the performance measures .

STANDARDS :

The M4T6 float bridge components will be identified by sight and

use .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Identify substructure components .

Ο Float

The 24- ton pneumatic float consists of two identical half-

floats , each 9 by 22 feet , joined stern- to - stern to form a
complete float 9 feet wide , 44 feet long , and 3 feet high .
-

Each half float consists of three tubes divided into four

inflation chambers , fitted with an inflation valve . The
tapered noses or bow ends of the tube are upswept about
40° from the horizontal , and are provided with laced
skirts . This skirt protects the tube during launching and
prevents debris from lodging between the tubes . The half-
float weighs 750 pounds

0 Float connectors .

The sterns of two half- floats are connected by threading a

connecting bar through flaps at the bottom of the floats
and by buckling the criss - cross straps at the top of the
float into D - rings . The connection is made before the
half- floats are fully inflated . The sterns of the two
half floats can be connected with 1 - inch manila rope in
place of the connector bar .

2-430
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

1
STRAPS AND " D" RINGS

STRAPS AND " D " RINGS

om

2
CONNECTING BAR OR ROPE .

Stern -to-stern float connection.

0 Saddle assembly .
-

The saddle assembly for a float includes eight interior

saddle panels , two end saddle panels , and two saddle
beams .

The panels are reinforced with structural steel frames

which serve as bearing surfaces for the saddle beams .
Spring- actuated catches are installed on the frames to
engage the lower flanges of the saddle beams .
-

The end saddle panel is equipped with two extended steel

beams having holes at the outer end to receive the bow
skirt connecting bar which goes through the saddle- assem-
bly outrigger beams .
-

Each saddle beam consists of five individual beams con-

nected by double- pinned joints .

2-431
FM 5-12B1 /2
OUTRIGGER
BEAM
-CENTER-BEAMS

-END BEAM
END
SADDLE PANEL

INTERIOR SADDLE PANEL

Saddle adapters .

The normal saddle adapter provides working space between

the saddle assembly and the balk . Two normal saddle
adapters are used per bay of the bridge . The saddle
adapters are connected to the center saddle beam by the
retainer lugs .

Normal saddle adapter.

The offset saddle adapters are similar to the normal

saddle adapters except , the beams that receive the balk-
connecting stiffener are shifted off center 14 inches .
This is done to accommodate the spacing of the balk in the
reinforced bridge assembly .

Offset saddle adapter.

2-432
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
0
Balk connecting stiffener .
-

The balk connecting stiffeners are made of aluminum sec-

tions 20 feet 10 inches long , 7 inches deep , and approxi-
mately 5 5/8 inches wide; and weigh 250 pounds . They are
secured to the saddle adapters with steel pins and have 26
recesses , spaced 9 1/4 inches apart center- to - center , for
receiving the lugs of the deck balk . The balk- connecting
stiffeners are placed so that the balk pin spring re-
tainers are always facing toward the center of the float .
This is done to facilitate pinning the superstructure from
within the float .

One other reason why the spring retainer side of the stiffener faces
the center of the float is so that , when the pins are knocked out
during disassembly , they will fall into the float , not into the
water.

0
Curb adapter .
-

Steel curb adapters are used to raise normal deck balk

about 6 inches above the level of the basic deck to pro-
vide curbing . The adapters are anchored by pins to the
balk - connecting stiffeners . Each adapter weighs about 15
pounds .

8"

27/8"

9"

Curb adapter.

OUTRIGGER PIPE CLEAT

SLIDING RETAINERS .
END SECTION ČENTER SECTION

HOLE FOR
CONNECTING BAR

Saddlebeam detail.

2-433
FM 5-12B1 /2
BALK CONNECTING
STIFFENER
OUTRIGGER
PANEL SADDLE ADAPTER

CURB ADAPTER

RETAINER LUGS ON
BEARING PLATES

SADDLE BEAM

BALK
CONNECTION PIN
TWO HALF FLOATS

D RING

SADDLE PANELS

CONNECTING BAR
TIE DOWN STRAPS

RETAINER LUG ON SADDLE BEAM

24 Ton float and saddle assembly with two balk in place.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , Chap 6 , Section II , app B , para 2c .

2. Identify superstructure components .

0 There are three types of aluminum deck balk that are used in
the M4T6 bridge .
-

Normal deck balk are 15 feet long and 8 3/4 by 9 1/4

inches in cross - section . Each balk weighs 225 pounds .
Lugs on the lower side enable the balk to be pinned to the
balk- connecting stiffener . The balk are watertight and
will float . Twenty- two normal balk are used in each
floating bay .
SE
CT B
INTION OF ALK
ERI
AT OR LUG

HANDLE HANDLE
14' 1134"

83/4"
END LUGS
INTERIOR LUGS 94"
END LUG

-6'8 5/16 " . 1'7 /

8" 6'8 5/16"

Normal deck balk.

Short deck balk are 8 feet 4 inches long and have the same
cross section as normal balk . Each short balk weighs 122
pounds . Short balk have lugs at the ends only, and are
used to fill gaps in normal balk patterns .

2-434
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

83/4" P

91/4"

8'4
"'
END LUG
Short Deck Balk.

Tapered deck balk are 6 feet 8 inches long and have the
same cross - section and fittings as normal balk at one end .
The other end is tapered and ends in a hinged plate . Each
tapered balk weighs 100 pounds .

Tapered balk are used for sloping approaches to the bridge

CNE deck and also to fill gaps between ends of normal balk .

6'8 " 83/4"

914"
11

Tapered Deck Balk.

in

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , Chap . 6 , Section II

3. Identify abutment components .

☑ 0
The abutment bearing plates are 5 feet 9 3/4 inches long , 1
foot wide , 3 3/4 inches high and weigh 165 pounds . This
plate is factened to the balk-connecting stiffener .

‫ا‬
Abutment bearing plate.

2-435
FM 5-12B1 / 2

BEARING PLATE

Bearing plates in place.

The cover plates are used over joints in the deck at abut-
ments and trestles to protect balk handles from damage by the
metallic lugs on tracked vehicles . Two short cover plates 1
foot 6 inches long , and two long cover plates , 5 feet 4
inches long are required to cover the normal width of the
bridge deck .

LONG COVER PLATE

5' 4"

SHORT COVER PLATE

1 ' 6 ".

Cover plates in inverted position.

2-436
 FM 5-12B1 /2

4. Identify ramps .
0
Four aluminum alloy raft ramps are used at each end of a raft
to provide a sloping approach . Raft ramps are 3 feet 3/4
inch wide and have an effective length of about 3 feet . They
weigh 236 pounds . They are 9 1/4 inches high at the end
which connects to the raft balk .

HANDLE

3' 034"
91/4"

HORIZONTAL PIN
E
2'6" HANDLE
VERTICAL PIN

Raftramp.

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , chap 6 , section II

REFERENCE :

TM 5-210 , Military Floating Bridge Equipment

2-437
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-198-1004

TASK:

Identify LTR ( light tactical raft) components .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with the LTR components speci-

fied in the performanc measures .
STANDARDS :

The LTR components will be identified by sight and use .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Half Ponton . The aluminum alloy half-ponton has an effective

length of 18 feet 6 inches , is 6 feet 8 1/2 inches wide and 2
feet 10 inches high , weighs approximately 650 pounds , and has a
displacement of 6 1/4 tons . Two half- pontons are joined stern
to stern to form a whole ponton , the bow of which is raised ap-
proximately 7 inches higher than the gunwales to help prevent
swamping in swift currents .

Ο The pontons , once joined to make a whole ponton , are used to

support the superstructure of the raft or bridge .

Halfponton. Two half-pontons connected stern to stern.

2. Deck Panel . The deck panel is 12 feet 1 3/4 inches long, 3 feet
6 inches wide , and 1 foot 3/4 inch high , and weighs 565 pounds .
Its effective length is 11 feet . The deck panel is positioned
and retained laterally by four retainer lugs on the pontons .
One end of each deck panel is male and the other female .

The deck panel is used as the roadway of the bridge/ raft

Deck panel.

2-438
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
3. Deck Filler Panel . The deck filler panel is 5 feet 4 7/8 inches
long , 2 feet 7 inches wide , and 6 3/8 inches high; and weighs 95
pounds . Two deck filler panels are used to fill the space be-
tween one set of deck panels . The deck filler panels normally
are retained in position by pintles , but provisions are made for
bolting the deck filler panels to the deck panels .

100

Deck filler panel.

FILLER PANEL
DECK PANEL

CURB
SINGLE CLEAT
108"
1 DOUBLE CLEAT
GUNWALE

PONTON

PONTON
Superstructure implaced on ponton.

4. Curbs . Two sizes of curbs are required . The deck panel curb is
:
used on the normal bay of superstructure and weighs 110 pounds ;
the short ramp curb is used on the ramp and articulator panels
and weighs 20 pounds . The curbs are held in position by holding
lugs that extend from the bottom of the curb and bear directly
on the underside of the top flange of the deck panel . The long
curb dimensions are 9 3/4 inches by 8 9/16 inches by 10 feet 9
3/4 inches . The short curb dimensions are 9 3/4 inches by 8
9/16 inches by 2 feet 10 11/16 inches .

2-439
FM 5-12B1 /2
5. Ramp Panels . Two types of ramp panels are provided ; one to mate
with the male end of a deck panel section , and the other to mate
with the female end . The male ramp is 8 feet long , 3 feet 6
inches wide , and 1 foot 3/4 inch high , and weighs 330 pounds .
The female ramp panel is 7 feet 1/8 inch long , 3 feet 6 inches
wide , and 1 foot 3/4 inch high , and weighs 400 pounds . There
are also ramp filler panels which are used to fill the gap be-
tween the end ramps . These filler panels are 3 feet by 2 feet
by 7 inches by 6 3/8 inches and weigh 65 pounds .

Ramppanel.

6. Articulating Assembly . The articulating assembly is provided to

permit variations in the end span abutment elevations in bridges
and rafts from 41 inches above the horizontal position of the
deck to 19 inches below . This assembly is used between a normal
deck panel and the end ramp panel . The articulator consists of
a male and female section . When these are connected the articu-
lating assembly is 7 feet 4 5/8 inches long overall , 3 feet 6
inches wide , and 1 foot 8 1/4 inches high , and weighs 640
pounds . A connecting pin and adjusting bar are used to join the
two sections . A carrying bar is used to carry the new model
articulating assembly instead of the handles on the old model
assembly .

P (CURB)
(RAM ) (ARTICULATING ASS.)
(RAMP FILLER PANEL)

Completed end section.

2-440
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
7. Anchorages . Fluked , marine anchors of fabricated steel , weighing
otie 30 pounds , are issued on the basis of one per two half pontons .
The anchors are used for anchoring bridges when stream condi-
$3 tions are suitable . They are also carried on rafts as a safety
eet precaution for use in case the raft propulsion fails .

he Ο
Outboard motor brackets are used when propelling rafts with
et outboard motors .

01:

thet
Fluked anchor.
11

Ο
Holdfast with Nine Pickets . Four prefabricated holdfasts for
use as anchorages are issued with the raft set . Nine steel
pickets and a holdfast chain make up each holdfast .

NOTE : The holdfast is used for anchorage for the bridge or raft .
REFERENCE :

TM 5-210 Military Floating Bridge Equipment , chapter 5

2-441
FM 5-12B1/2

2-442
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-198-1005

TASK:

Identify float bridge anchorage system components .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditons , with the float bridge anchorage

system components specified in the performance measures .

STANDARDS :

The float bridge anchorage system components will be identified by

sight and use .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Shore Guys

Shore guys provide a system of anchorage that consists of 1/2

inch or larger wire rope . Cables are attached to the bridge
floats and secured to shore by deadmen or holdfasts . They
are used to anchor the bridge and to aid in construction and
alignment when other systems are to be used .

Ο
There are two types of guys used in the shore guy system .

Approach guys are attached up and down stream to the first

float on each end of the bridge . These approach guys pre-
vent the bridge from creeping due to impact from the vehi-
cle .

Shore guys are attached to every sixth float on the up-

stream side . They are used on the downstream side , nor-
mally attached to every 10th bay , or to every 6th bay when
reversal current exceeds 3 fps . Downstream anchorage
prevents the bridge from shifting off its center line due
to the wind or vehicle moving over the bridge .

2-443
FM 5-12B1 /2
FM 5-1283

DEADMEN LOCATED ABOVE

HIGH WATER LEVEL TO
PREVENT WASHOUT

CURRENT

UPSTREAM SHORE GUYS

(EVERY 6 BAYS)

45°
D

D
D

D
D

APPROACH
GUYS

DOWNSTREAM SHORE GUYS ( EVERY 10 BAYS) NORMAL

(EVERY 6 BAYS) WITH REVERSAL CURRENT UP TO 3 FPS .

SHORE GUYS CONSTRUCTED FROM NOT LESS THAN

1/2 INCH IPS WIRE ROPE

Guy Line Anchor System.

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , para 13-2

2. Kedge Anchor

Ο The kedge anchor is of the form normally associated with an-

chors . It looks like the Navy insignia . It weighs 100
pounds .

2-444
ㅂ
FM 5-12B1 / 2

LOCKING DEVICE
BILL
CROWN
STOCK
SHANK
FLUKE

FISHERMAN'S BEND KNOT

Kedge anchor in position.

Note that the stock is perpendicular to the fluke and arms .

When the anchor is dropped , the stock lies horizontal on the
river bed , forcing the arm to be vertical . As the anchor is
pulled , the angle of the arm to the shank causes the fluke to
dig into the river bed . Therefore , the angle of pull on the
anchor must be low and flat . Its employed in soft riverbeds .

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , para 13-3

3. Fluked Marine Anchor

Normally a lighter anchor , it is issued with the light tacti-

cal raft

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , para 5-3 g ( 1 )

2-445
FM 5-12B1 / 2
4. Deadmen

0 Deadmen are normally timbers or logs which are buried under

the ground . They derive their holding power from the depth
at which they are buried and the amount of face area they
present to earth against the pull of the anchor cable .

CABLE

FACE HEIGHT

DEADMAN

LENGTH
FACE AREA

Specific References : TM 5-210 , para 13-8e ( 1 ) and 13-9

5. Anchor Tower .

0 The tower assembly for a bridge is made up of a tower base , a

pivot unit , one or more tower sections , and tower cap .
-

The tower base provides a spread footing and a socket for

the ball on the pivot unit .

The pivot unit is connected to the bottom of the required

number of tower sections . It serves as a pivot point .

2-446
 FM 5-12B1 /2
Each tower sections is 10 feet 10 inches long .
burial
ront

The tower cap is bolted to the top tower section and has a
3- inch saddle which is alined to receive the main cable .

0
The cap adapter is used for two single cable systems acting
together .

2-447
FM 5-12B1 / 2

It is possible , though , to support as many as three cables

on one tower when the cap adapter is used .

6. Guy Lines

The guy lines are used to guy the towers during erection and
for safety during use of the system . The guy lines used are
1/ 2 - inch wire rope . Four guys are attached to the top of the
tower-- one to each corner . These guys must come off the
tower at a 45-degree angle .

2-448
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
The sketch below shows the tower guys.

7. Cable Clips

0 Fasten cables with cable clips by placing clips on the cables

with the base of the clip on the running ( load carrying) end ,
and the U-bolt bearing on the standing ( loose ) end of the
cables . Space the cable clips as prescribed by the supervi-
sor.

U-BOLT

CABLE

........

CORRECT--MAXIMUM ROPE STRENGTH

SADDLE

NUT Use of cable clips.

8. Erection Arm

0 The erection arm is bolted to the pivot unit and pinned to

the tower base. It is used to steady and align the tower
while the tower is being raised to an upright position . The
erection arm is removed after the main cable is placed on the
saddle .

NOTE : Erection arm connects to tower in one direction only .

2-449
FM 5-12B1 /2
9. Bridle Lines

0 The bridle lines connecting the floats to the overhead cable

are of manila rope that is 3 inches in circumference and 1
inch in diameter ) . They are attached to the cable by a
pulley system called a bridle line connector .
0 Bridle line connector consists of two sheaves : a normal
wooden sheave and an eccentric metal sheave . The bridle line
goes through the wooden sheave . The metal sheave is placed
over the anchor cable . Because the metal sheave is eccen-
tric , it will not roll down the anchor cable when a load is
applied to it. The bridge is aligned by tightening the
bridle line through the wooden pulley sheave .

ECCENTRIC METAL
ANCHOR CABLE
SHEAVE

WOODEN SHEAVES

ROPE GUIDE

BRIDLE LINE

BRIDLE LINE CONNECTOR

Specific References : TM 5-210 , para 13-7 and 13-8

REFERENCE :

TM 5-210 Military Floating Bridge Equipment

2-450
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-198-1006

OFETE TASK:
Cmie
e
Identify components of bridge erection set , floating bridge .
CONDITIONS :
ves:
The Under any environmental conditions , with the bridge erection set
ave components specified in the performance measures .
eave

en : STANDARDS :
tigtz
The bridge erection set , floating bridge , components will be identi-
fied by sight and use .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. The posthole auger is used to bore holes in the ground for

posts , poles , and explosive charges . It is an 8- foot , 3 - inch
long tool that has two shovel - like blades at one end , hinged to
permit them to move enough to grasp the dirt and lift it from
the hole .

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B and FM 5-13 , page 9

2-451
FM 5-12B1 /2
2. The multiple balk- carrying bar is used in a special sling , which
is capable of handling a multiple number of balk , and which is
used with the crane inplacing bridge superstructure . This
sling consists of two multiple balk-carrying bars connected to
four- legged wire rope ( 3/8 - inch diameter , 8 1/2 feet long) . With
this sling , 10 normal balk on 9 1 /4- inch centers can be handled
during one lifting operation of the crane . The crane is capable
of placing the 10 adjacent balk lift on floats . Floats should
be positioned on 15- foot centers using two balk as spacers .

Multiple balk-carrying bar.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B , para 2d

2-452
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
13. A block consists of a metal shell or frame which supports the
and z ends of a pin and houses a grooved pulley or sheave that re-
ructe
volves on the pin . A hook , usually free to revolve , is attached
to one end of the block , and sometimes an eye, or becket , is
etl attached to the other end . Blocks are classified by the length
of their frame in inches and by the number of sheaves or
neis
pulleys . A single block has one sheave ; a double block has two
sheaves . The recommended size rope to use on a block is one
Spacz that fits the groove of the sheave and has clearance to slide or
move easily . When a block is made so that its shell opens on one
side to admit the rope without having to thread the rope over
the sheave , it is called a snatch block .

(CLOSED) (OPEN)

Singlesnatch block.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B and FM 5-13 , page 22

2-453
FM 5-12B1 / 2
4. The crowbar is used for heavy prying and for moving heavy tim-
bers and other large objects for short distances . It can also
be used for loosening rock formations , as a lever for moving
rails , and for breaking up hard earth when digging . The crowbar
that is issued with pioneer tool sets is a steel bar , about 5
feet long , tapered to a rounded point at the end where it is
usually is held . There is a pinch point with a chisel-like,
squared - off wedge at the other end . Some crowbars have the
pinch point set at a slight angle .

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B and FM 5-13 , page 20

5. The pinchbar is used in light ripping and prying jobs . It is

similar to the wrecking bar but it is lighter and used for
lighter work . The pinchbar found in the pioneer sets is a steel
bar , from 26 to 36 inches long , with a tapered point at one end
and a chisel- like pinch point at the other . Some pinchbars have
a short claw at the tapered end .

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B and FM 5-13 , page 20

2-454
 FM 5-12B1 /2
6. The hand- operated wire rope cutter operates by hammer impact .
It is used to cut wire rope cable .

0 Before cutting a wire rope , seize the place where the new
!
ends will be to prevent them from untwisting . The number of
chis
seizings to be applied to each side of the point where the
cut is to be made should equal approximately three times the
diameter of the rope . Example : 3x3 /4 ( dia) = 9/4 or 2 1/4

S ① 2 3

‫ا‬

(
4 5 6
Seizing wire rope.

Ο To use the wire rope cutter , insert the wire rope in the bot-
tom of the cutter with the blade of the cutter coming between
the two central seizings . Push the blade down against the
wire rope and strike the top of the blade sharply with a
sledge hammer several times until cable is cut .

2-455
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Use of wire rope cutter.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B and TM 5-270 , para 15

7. Two standard balk-depressing levers are furnished in the bridge
erection set .

The hand balk depessing lever is a 58 1/2- inch long bar

-

with two chains attach to the large end . The large end
has claw teeth used to adjust the chain length . To use
the hand balk depressing lever , insert the short chain
hook in the balk lifting handle and remove slack in the
chain between thehook and the claw teeth of the balk de-
pressor . Rotate the balk depressor handle in the opposite
direction for the chain to facilitate placement of the
pins,

Hand balk depressor.

2-456
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

00
10

Balk depressor in use.

The hydraulic jack balk depressor consists of 3 - inch aluminum

channels 19 3/4 inches long separated by aluminum and steel
plates 2 5/16 inches wide . A standard 3/8 -inch chain , ap-
proximately 2 feet 4 inches long , with a hook on one end is
15 attached to each end of the device . The length of the chain
being used is adjustable by means of U- slots in the separator
plates . A special trunnion assembly is used to connect the
balk depressing bar to the screw extension head of the 5 - ton
jack . This makes the bar and jack a unit .

Hydraulic jack balk depressor.

2-457
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Hydraulic balk depressor in use."

/ 1/
W

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B and para 2a

8. The deck pin driver is a 48- inch long "T " shaped bar used to
drive the pins in the class 60 bridge superstructure .

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , App B

end that
9. The cable
is us jaw grip
ed for fasten a metal
ising it to withk an eye at one
toola hoo .an eye at one has both
smooth and saw-tooth notched jaws . The jaws arthernged andthe
jawds and
en of one
the jaw
eye . isThe
descab ed is
ignle insdeertalo
to sli ng wee
ed bet n ove
a gro the betwjawseen theand
The tension
tension is applied to the eye- end of the tool .
cable the movable jaw to slide against the cable, gripping the
so it cannot slip .

2-458
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Cablejaw grip.

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , app B and TM 5-461 , chap 11 , para 155

10. The boat hook is of galvanized iron , 9 3/8 inches long , with a
10-foot wooden handle for use with the floating bridges to con-
trol pontons , floats and ribbon bays .

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , app B

11. The hose assembly , rubber , pneumatic , braided , 250 psi test
pressure , has two half coupling , quick disconnects . It is used
with the air compressor to inflate or deflate floats and to sup-
ply air to pneumatic power tools .

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , app B

12. The hydraulic ram pump is hand driven , single - speed , at 10,000
psi operating pressure . It has one 3/4- inch outlet connection ,
and one outlet hose that is 6 feet long . It is used with the
vertical connecting tool to pull the deck tread panels of the
class 60 bridge together to facilitate pinning .

Specific Reference : TM 5-210 , app B

2-459
FM 5-12B1 / 2

13. The vertical connecting tool is hydraulic and hand operated, sp

with a 7-ton capacity . It is used with the pump hydraulic ran full
as a unit . It is used to pull the deck tread of the class 60 fla
bridge together to facilitate pinning .

AT Vertical connecting tool.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , app B.

14. The deck aligning tool is a bar , 4 feet 11 inches long, with a
"U" shaped recess which fits into the class 60 deck tread. A
chain with hook is attached to the bar . It is used to line up
the deck panels to help in pinning the panels .

Deck aligning tool.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , para 7-15a and app B

15. The multiple leg sling consists of two 5/8-inch diameter , 6-foot
long chain joined by a special ring , with a hook at the end of
each . It is used for heavy lifting .

Multiple leg sling.

Specific References : TM 5-210 , para 7-14a , and app B

2-460
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
hand
pbyt
16. A special inflation/ deflation valve permits utilization of the
the full capacity of the 210 -cfm air compressor to speed float in-
flation and deflation .

Inflation-deflation valve.

Specific References : TM 5-210, app B , para 2c

REFERENCES
:

FM 5-13 , Engineer Soldier's Handbook , page 9 , 20, 22

TM 5-210, Military Floating Bridge Equipment
TM 5-270, Cableways , Tramways and Suspension Bridges , para 15
TM 5-461, Engineer Han dtools , Chap 11, para 155

2-461
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-200-1001

TASK:

Tie knots and lashings .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with lengths of rope up to 1

inch in diameter , wooden poles of various sizes , and instructions to
tie the following knots and lashings : square knot , double sheet
bend , bowline , timber hitch , clove hitch , sheepshank , fishermen's
bend , square lashing , shear lashing , and block lashing .
STANDARDS :

Each knot and lashing will be tied correctly within one minute for
each knot and 20 minutes for each lashing .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Tie knots

0
A good knot must be easy to tie , hold without slipping, and
be easy to untie . The choice of the best knot used depends
largely on the job it has to do . You must learn to tie the
following knots and hitches .
-

Square knot . The square knot is used for tying two ropes
of equal size together so they will not slip . Note that
in the square knot the end and standing part of one rope
comes out on the same side of the bight formed by the
other rope . The square knot will not hold if the ropes
are wet of if they are of different sizes . Ittightens
under strain but can be untied by grasping the ends of the
two bights and pulling the knot apart .

NOTE : It makes no difference whether the first crossing is tied

left - over - right or right- over - left , as long as the second crossing
is tied opposite to the first crossing .

PP
HO

2-462
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Double sheet bend . The double sheet bend has greater

holding power than the single sheet bend for joining ropes
of equal or unequal diameter , joining wet ropes , or tying
a rope to an eye . It will not slip or draw tight under
heavy loads . This knot is more secure than the single
sheet bend when used in a spliced eye .

Bowline . The bowline is one of the most common knots and

has a variety of uses , one of which is the lowering of men
and material . It is the best knot for forming a single
loop that will not tighten or slip under strain , and is
easily untied if each running end is seized to its own
standing part . The bowline forms a loop which may be of
any length .

Timber hitch . The timber hitch is used for moving heavy

timber or poles . This hitch is excellent for securing a
piece of lumber or similar objects . The pressure of the
coils , one over the other , holds the timber securely ; the
more tension applied , the tighter the hitch becomes about
the timber . It will not slip but will readily loosen when
strain is relieved .

2-463
FM 5-12B1 /2

Clove hitch . The clove hitch is one of the most widely

used knots . It is used to fasten a rope to a timber,
pipe , or post . It is also used for making other knots .
This knot puts very little strain on the fibers when the
rope is put around an object in one continuous direction.
The clove hitch can be tied at any point in a rope . If
there isn't constant tension on the rope , another loop
(round of the rope around the object and under the center
of the clove hitch ) will permit a tightening and slacken-
ing motion of the rope .

2-464
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Sheepshank . A sheepshank is a method of shortening a

rope , but it also may be used to take the load off a weak
spot in the rope . It is only a temporary knot unless the
eyes are fastened to the standing part on each end .

Fisherman's bend . The fisherman's bend is an excellent

knot for attaching a rope to a light anchor , a ring , or a
rectangular piece of stone . It can be used to fasten a
rope or cable to a ring or post or where there will be
slackening and tightening motion in the rope .

Specific References : TM 5-725 , Para 2-3 and 2-5 FM 5-34 , Page 293 .

2. Tie lashings

You must know how to tie different lashings , and know which
one to use so that it will perform its required function .
-

Square lashing . The square lashing is used to lash two

spars together at right angles to each other . To tie a
square lashing , begin with a clove hitch on one spar and
make a minimum of four complete turns around both members .
Continue with two frapping turns between the vertical and
horizontal spar to tighten the lashing . Tie off the run-
ning end to the opposite spar from which you started with
another clove hitch to finish the square lashing .

2-465
FM 5-12B1 / 2

CLOVE HITCH

0 Shear lashing . The shear lashing is used to lash two

spars together at one end to form an expedient device
called a shears . This is done by laying two spars side by
side , spaced approximately 1/3 the diameter of a spar
apart , with the butt ends together . The shear lashing is
started a short distance in from the top of one of the
spars by tying the end of the rope to it with a clove
hitch . Then eight tight turns are made around both spars
above the clove hitch . The lashing is tightened with a
minimum of two frapping turns around the eight turns . The
shear lashing is finished by tying the end of the rope
with another clove hitch to the opposite spar from which
you started .

2-466
 FM 5-12B1/2
-

Block lashing . Block lashing is used to tie a tackle

block to a spar . First , three right turns of the rope are
made around the spar where the tackle block is to be at-
tached . The next two turns of the rope are passed through
the mouth of the hook or shackle of the tackle block and
drawn tightly . Then three additional taut turns of the
rope are put around the spar above the hook or shackle .
The block lashing is completed by tying the two ends of
the rope together with a square knot . When a sling is
supported by a block lashing , the sling is passed through
the center four turns .

Specific References : TM 5-725 , para 2-3 and 2-7 ; FM 5-34, pages 293
and 289

2-467
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-200-1002

TASK:

Reeve simple tackle systems .

CONDITIONS :

Situation 1 : In daylight or darkness , with two snatch blocks and

3/4- inch rope .

Situation 2 : In daylight or darkness , with two double blocks and

3 /4- inch rope .
STANDARDS :

Situation 1 : A single-block tackle system will be correctly reeved

in 5 minutes .

Situation 2 : A double-block tackle system will be correctly reeved

in 10 minutes .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. General

0 Blocks are laid out for reeving on a clean and level surface
other than the ground to avoid getting dirt into the operat-
ing parts .

0 The rope should be reeved through the blocks so that no part

of the rope chafes another part of the rope .

Blocks should be reeved in a manner that prevents twisting.

After the blocks are reeved , the rope should be pulled back
and forth through the blocks several times to allow the rope
to adjust . to the blocks . This reduces the tendency of the
tackle to twist under a load .

2-468
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
2. Situation 1

Reeve a single-block tackle system , following the numbered sequence

in Figure 1 and the general guidelines given previously .

1
2
3

SINGLE
Figure 1 BLOCK

3. Situation 2

Reeve a double-block tackle system , following the numbered sequence

in Figure 2 and the general guidelines given previously .

2 3 4

DOUBLE
BLOCKS

Figure 2

TM 5-725 , Rigging , para 3-13

2-469
PM 5-1281/2

2-469a
 FM 5-12B1 /2

SKILL LEVEL TWO TASKS

2-4696
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2482

TASK:

Determine an azimuth .

CONDITIONS :

Task is performed during daylight , with topographic map 1: 50,000

scale , coordinate scale , protractor , straightedge , compass , pencil .
STANDARDS :

Determine the grid azimuth between two given points on a map

within 3 ° .

Ο
Determine the magnetic azimuth between two given points to
within 3 ° .

Convert a magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth or a grid azi-

muth to a magnetic azimuth .

Compute the back azimuth of a given azimuth to within 2° or

35 mils .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Determine the grid azimuth between points A and B on a premarked

map using the following procedures :

Ο Locate point A and point B.

Ο Draw a straight line from point A to point B.

0 Place the index of the protractor ( fig 1 ) over the center of

mass (point A) with 0 ° on the protractor at the top and 90°
to the right . The base line of the protractor must be paral-
lel to the nearest north/ south grid line .

Start at the 0 ° point on the protractor and read in a clock-

wise direction until you reach the point where the straight
line intersects the protractor scale .

Ο Read the azimuth from the protractor .

2. Determine a magnetic azimuth between two known points using the

following procedures :

2-470
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

230 325 2020 25 340 345 350 355 5 10 15 20 25 30 13 40

‫و‬
‫رد‬J
3:0
४
300
305
290
295
203

55
8

४
•

75
50
255
260
265
2900
275
270

100
110
105
115
4
1' approx 17.8 mik
00 S
.0 ER
23 ET
M

-
8

95
12
F0
230
235
240
245

125
100
, s
ន 1000 2 1

α 8801250000 561 581 001 541 1 501 091 661 061 πι τι

Figure1

0 Fully open the compass so that the cover forms a straight

edge with the base .

Ο Move the eyepiece to its rearmost position .

Ο Place the thumb of either hand through the thumb loop of the
compass and extend the index finger of the same hand along
the side of the compass .

0
Place the thumb of the other hand between the eyepiece and
the bezel ring and extend the index finger along the side of
the compass .

o Interlock the fingers of both hands underneath the compass to

form a stable platform .

0 Pull your elbows firmly into the sides of your body . This
will place the compass between your chin and belt .
Ο
Standing at a known point , rotate your body and the compass
until the cover of the compass points toward the object to
which the magnetic azimuth is to be determined .

0
Look at the floating dial of the compass and read the mag-
netic azimuth from beneath the fixed black index line .

2-471
FM 5-12B1 / 2

3. Convert a magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth , or a grid azimuth

to magnetic azimuth using the following procedure :

0 Easterly Grid Magnetic ( GM) Angle ( fig 2 ) :

-

To convert a magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth , add the

value of the GM angle to the magnetic azimuth .
-

To convert a grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth , subtract

the GM angle from the grid azimuth .

Ο Westerly Grid Magnetic ( GM) Angle ( fig 2 ) :

EASTERLY G-M ANGLE WESTERLY G -M ANGLE

GM GM

Figure2

To convert a magnetic azimuth to a grid azimuth , subtract

the value of the GM angle from the magnetic azimuth .
-

To convert a grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth , add the

value of the GM angle to the grid azimuth .

0 Compute the back azimuth of an azimuth using the following

procedures :

The back azimuth of a line differs from the azimuth by

exactly 180 ° or 3,200 mils .
-

If the azimuth is less than 180 ° , the back azimuth is the

value of the azimuth plus 180° or 3,200 mils .
-

If the azimuth is 180 ° or more , the back azimuth is the

value of the azimuth minus 180 ° or 3,200 mils .

2-472
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

TC 7-5 , Land Navigation
TEC Lessons :
930-071-0014 -F , Measuring Distances and Azimuths
930-071-0015-F , Connecting Azimuths
930-071-0017 -F , The Lensatic Compass
Subcourses :
EN 51 , Map and Aerial Photograph Reading , I
FA 466

2-473
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2487

TASK :

Orient a map , using a compass .

CONDITIONS :

Given a map and compass in a field environment , under daylight con-

ditions .

STANDARDS :

L
Orient the map to the ground using a compass so that the north-seek-
ing arrow of the compass is within 3 degrees of that shown in the
G-M angle of the declination diagram .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Place the compass on the map so that the cover of the compass is
pointing towards the top of the map . Aline the sighting wire ,
or the straightedge of the compass , over a north- south grid line
and rotate the map and compass together until the north arrow of
the compass points to the same number of degrees as shown in the
G-M angle of the declination diagram .

NOTE : If GM angle is less than 3 degrees , do not line up north ar-

row .

2. An alternate method is to draw a magnetic north line on the map

from any N-S and E-W grid line intersection using the protrac-
tor . Aline the straightedge of the compass along this magnetic
north line and rotate the map and compass together until the
north arrow falls beneath the fixed black index line on the com-
pass .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

2-474
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER ; 051-191-2488

TASK:

Determine a location on the ground .

CONDITIONS :

While at an unknown location on the ground , given a 1: 50,000 scale

military map of the area , a coordinate scale and protractor , and a
requirement to determine the six- digit map coordinates of the loca-
tion .

STANDARDS :
7

Within 15 minutes , determine the coordinates to within 100 meters of

the actual location .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Put the map away .

2. Determine the four cardinal directions ( north , south , east , and

1
west ) by using the lensatic compass .

3. Determine the type of terrain feature on which you are located .

4. Determine what types of terrain features surround the location .

3 5. Orient the map using the lensatic compass .

6. Relate the terrain features on the ground to those shown on the

map .
0

7. Having determined where the terrain features on the ground and

those on the map coincide , determine the coordinate location of
that point using the coordinate scale and protractor .
REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

TEC Lesson :

930-071-0018-F , Land Navigation with a Map and Compass

2-475
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2489

TASK:

Determine the elevation of a point on the ground , using a map .

CONDITIONS :

Given a standard 1 : 50,000 scale military map , pencil , a designated

point on the ground , and a requirement to determine the elevation of
that point .

STANDARDS :

Within 2 minutes of locating the point on the map , determine its

elevation to within half of the value of the contour interval .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

To determine the elevation of a point on a map :

1. Locate the point on the map . (It may already be plotted on the
map , or given as an eight - digit coordinate . )

2. Determine the contour interval of the map from the marginal in-
formation .

3. Locate the index contour line nearest the point for which the
elevation is being sought .
4. Count the number of contour lines that must be crossed to go
from the numbered lines to the point and note direction -- "up"
or " down " .

a. If the point is on contour lines , its elevation is that of

the contour .

b. For points between contours :

(1 ) Points less than one- fourth the distance between lines

are considered to be the same as the elevation of the
nearest line .

(2) Points one - fourth to three - fourths the distance from

the lower line are considered to be at an elevation
half the contour interval above the lower line .

c. To estimate elevation of the top of an unmarked hill , add

half the contour interval to elevation of highest contour
line around the hill .

2-476
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

d. To estimate the elevation of the bottom of a depression ,

subtract half the contour interval from the lowest contour
around depression .

e. On maps that do not show elevation and relief in as much

detail as needed , supplementary contour lines may be used .
Marginal information indicates the interval , and the supple-
mentary lines are used exactly like solid contour lines .

f. Bench marks and spot elevations also indicate points of

known elevation .

REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

TEC Lesson :

930-071-0013 -F , Introduction to Land Navigation

2-477
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2491

TASK:

Locate an unknown point on a map or on the ground by intersection .

CONDITIONS :

In a field location , given a 1 : 50,000 map of the area , compass , co-

ordinate scale and protractor , pencil , and an object or terrain fea-
ture for which you must determine the location ( grid coordinate) .
STANDARDS :

Within 7 minutes ( 15 minutes , if you must measure azimuths ) deter-

mine the 100,000 meter square identification letters and 6 -digit
grid coordinates to within 100 meters .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Intersection is a method used to locate unknown points on a map by

intersecting lines from two known points .

For example : a magnetic azimuth from a known observation post (OP)

to an unknown point is changed to a grid azimuth and drawn on the
map . Another magnetic azimuth from another known OP location to the
same unknown point is changed to a grid azimuth and drawn on the
same map . Where the two lines intersect on the map is the location
of the distant point .

1. Map and Compass Method ( see figure 1 ) .

NOTE : Map not to scale and an easterly G-M angle of 10 ° is used .

a. Determine the G-M angle of the map you are using .

b. Locate and mark your position on the map .

c. Measure the magnetic azimuth to the unknown point (22 ° ) ;

change it to a grid azimuth . If it is a westerly G-M angle
subtract , and add if it is an easterly G-M angle to the mag-
netic azimuth you found . In the example , the G-M angle used
was 10 ° easterly .

d. Place the protractor on the map , insuring that the zero de-
gree indicator on the protractor is pointing to the top of
the map ( north ) and the cross is placed center mass on your
location ( figure 1 ) . Place a tick mark on the number of
degrees you want to plot . Draw a line on the map from your
position on this grid azimuth ( 32 ° ) .

e. Move or call a second known position from which the unknown

point can be seen . Locate this position on the map .

2-478
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

UNKNOWN POINT UNKNOWN POINT

аш
32
°

Δ
OP 1 OP2
OP 2 OP 1 OP
OP2
2

Α. B.

TICK

32
° MARK

N
IO
115 320

CT
325 30 40
330 335 340 345 350 135 0 5 10 15 20 25
15

D
RE

NE
2
I
R
016

DI

LI
४
G

UNKNOWN POINT
305

RS UNKNOWN
0
30
2953

TE
00

ME
POINT
४

60
270
280
260
240
29C
275
265
255
250
285
245

7
2

1000 ,

CENTER
34
° MASS
-2
90

8
OP 1
00

RS
.0

1° APPROX 17.8 MILS TE 8

75

ME

3
一つ
115

४
235

OP 2
25
230

000
४
C. στε στε
213 210 205 200 90 195 145 140
170 175 180 185 190 155 100 105 150

D.
Figure 1

f. Repeat c and d above .

g. Where the lines cross is the location of the unknown point .

2-479
FM 5-12B1 /2
2. Straightedge Method ( when no compass is available ) ( figure 2) .
a. (See task: Orient a map to the ground by map- terrain asso-
ciation -

Task Number 051-191-1490 )

b. Locate and mark your position on the map .

c. Lay a straightedge on the map with one end at user's posi-

tion (A) as a pivot point and rotate the straightedge until
the unknown point is sighted along the edge .

d. Draw a line along the straightedge .

e. Repeat the above procedure at position ( B) , and for a check

on accuracy at a third position .

f. The intersection is the location of the unknown point ( C) .

UNKNOWN POINT

RJ685

B
RJ573 (YOUR POSITION )

Figure 2
Intersection without compass.

REFERENCE :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

2-480
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2492

Πε
TASK:

Locate an unknown point on a map or on the ground by resection .

CONDITIONS :

In the field at an unknown localtion , given a 1 : 50,000 map of the

area, a lensatic compass , straightedge , coordinate scale , pencil ,
and two terrain features visible from your location and identifiable
on the map .

STANDARDS :

Within 7 minutes determine the 100,000 meter square identification

letters and 6 -digit coordinates of your location to within 100 me-
ters of the actual grid coordinates .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

RESECTION is a way to locate one's position on a map . Magnetic azi-

muths are measured to two points on the ground which can be identi-
fied on the map . These magnetic azimuths are changed to grid azi-
muths , and the back azimuths of these grid azimuths are determined .
Next , the converted back azimuths are drawn from the known points on
the map . Where these two/ three lines resect ( cross ) is your loca-
tion .

1. Map and Compass Method ( figure 1 ) .

NOTE : A 10° easterly G-M angle is used in the examples . Map not to
scale .

STEP 1 : Determine the G-M angle of the map that you are using .

STEP 2 : Locate 2 known positions on the ground and mark them on

your map ( figure la ) .

STEP 3 : Measure the magnetic azimuth to one of the known locations :

change this to a grid azimuth ( figure lb ) .

a. If it is a westerly G-M angle , subtract the number of de-

grees in the G-M angle to your magnetic azimuth .

b. If it is an easterly G-M angle , add the number of degrees in

the G-M angle to your magnetic azimuth .

STEP 4 : Change this grid azimuth to a back azimuth .

2-481
FM 5-12B1 / 2

STEP 5 : Place the protractor on the map insuring that the zero de-
grees indicator on the protractor is pointing to the top of the map
(north ) and the index point is placed center mass on this location.
Place a tick mark on the number of degrees you want to plot . Remove
protractor from the map and draw a line on the map from this posi-
tion on the grid back azimuth you found , in the direction of your
unknown position .

STEP 6 : Repeat steps 3 through 5 for a second and third known posi-
tion .

HILL 107 ROAD HILL 107 ROAD

JUNCTION UNCTION

A
B A B

165°

WATER WATER
TOWER MAG AZ 335° TOWER
GRID AZ 345°
GRID BACK AZ 1650
A C C

Figure la. Figure 1b.

STEP 7 : The intersection of the lines is your location ( figure ld) .

HILL 107 ROAD

HILL 107
JUNCTION ROAD
JUNCTION

A
A
B

225
°

MAG AZ -35°
GRID AZ-45°
GRID BACK AZ-225°

295°

WATER
WATER
TOWER
MAG AZ - 105 TOWER
GRID AZ-115°
A C
GRID BACK AZ-295°
C

Figure 1c..
Figure 1d.
Figure 1.
2-482
 FM 5-12B1 /2
the te
2. Straightedge Method ( when no compass is available ) ( optional ) .
is a. Orient the map on a flat surface by the inspection method ,
plot, ( see task : Orient a map to the ground by map - terrain asso-
this ciation ) .
tion
b. Locate 2 or 3 known positions on the ground and mark them on
the map .

c. Lay a straightedge on the map with the center of the

straightedge at a known position as a pivot point and rotate
the straightedge until the known position on the map is
alined with the known positions on the ground .

d. Draw a line along the straightedge away from the known posi-
tion on the ground toward your position .
e. Repeat c above using a second known position .

f. The intersection of the lines is your location .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

2-483
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2484

TASK:

Navigate , using a compass .

CONDITIONS :

Task may be performed in all geographic locations , under any weather

conditions , during daylight or darkness , with topographic map of the
area and compass . References may not be used .

STANDARDS :

Navigate , using a compass from a start point to a finish point , to

within 100 meters of the designated point using techniques and
procedures in the performance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Determine your location on the ground by comparing terrain fea-

tures with those on the map .

2. Orient the map according to the following procedures :

Ο Metallic objects , e.g. , helmet , rifle , etc. , will alter the
position of the magnetic needle of the compass .
Ο Place the map in a horizontal position with the compass
placed parallel to a north- south grid line .
Ο
The cover side of the compass should point to the top of the
map . This will place the index line on the compass parallel
to grid north .

A declination diagram will be formed by the index line and

the compass needle .

Rotate map and compass until the direction of the declination

diagram of the index line and the compass needle match the
direction shown on the declination diagram printed on the
margin of the map .

Ο The map is now oriented .

3. Navigate from one point on the ground to another point using

following procedure :
Ο Locate the start point and finish point on the map and deter-
mine where the start point is on the ground .
Ο
Determine the grid azimuth from the start point to the finish
point on the map .

2-484
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
0 Convert the grid azimuth to a magnetic azimuth .

0
Determine the distance between the start point and the finish
point on the map .

Ο Convert the map distance to pace count .

TE 0 Different types of terrian will affect pacing .

Ο Place the azimuth between the start point and the finish
point under the fixed black index line of the compass .

0 Move to the start point to begin pace count .

Ο When planning the route between points , select terrain fea-
tures that will be encountered by making a map reconnais-
sance .

Make a mental checklist of these features .

Ο Take advantage of the terrain features , both manmade and nat-

ural , while moving along the route and check against your
list .

After reaching the finish point , conduct a detailed terrain

analysis to confirm your location .
REFERENCES :

FM 21-26 , Map Reading

TEC Lessons :
930-071-0014 -F , Measuring Distances and Azimuths
930-071-0018 -F , Navigating with Map and Compass
Subcourse :
EN 51 , Map and Aerial Photograph Reading I

2-485
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2425

TASK:

Control fire team movement .

CONDITIONS :

As a rifle squad fire team leader while conducting movement in a

tactical environment , given specific instructions by the squad
leader as to movement technqiue to be used , the route to the over-
watch position and actions to be taken there .

STANDARDS :

The fire team leader will :

1. React immediately to all of the squad leader's orders/ instruc-

tions .

2. Maintain interval between fire teams ( if in trail team) appro-

priate to movement technique and terrain .

3. When bounding to the overwatch position , make maximum use of the

terrain to provide cover/ concealment for the fire team . ( Slight
deviation up to 50 meters from designated route may be made. )
4. Recognize fire team members ' use of the following ( and correct
when necessary ) :

a. Proper camouflage , cover , and concealment .

b. Individual interval appropriate to terrain and visibility

while maintaining visual contact with all team members .

c. Proper noise and light discipline .

d. Proper security measures ( alert and ready to act ) .

e. Proper response to his lead- by- example actions .

NOTE : Corrections may be made orally or with hand signals .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

The fire team leader must :

1. Understand thoroughly what his mission is .

a. Where his team is to move .

b. By which route .

2-486
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
C. What to do when he gets there .

d. Location of the squad leader

e. Location of the overwatch team .

2. Inform team members of the mission .

3. Be proficient in battle drill techniques and apply the squad

leader's instructions and unit SOPs to include :

a. Proper camouflage , cover , and concealment .

b. Proper individual interval .

c. Proper noise and light discipline .

d. Proper security measures .

e. Proper response to lead- by - example actions .

f. Correct response to hand signals .

4. Maintain contact with squad leader ( visual , radio ) .

5. Use the lead- by- exmaple technique to control the fire team .
a. Control desired interval ( normally , 10 meters between indi-
viduals ) between the fire teams and team members depending
on terrain , visibility , and movement techniques .

b. Make quick visual reconnaissance of your next overwatch ро-

sition designated by the squad leader , and lead the fire
team through the terrain which affords the best cover and
concealment available .

REFERENCE :

TC 7-1 , The Rifle Squads ( Mechanized and Light Infantry )

2-487
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2398

TASK:

Control rate and distribution of fire .

CONDITIONS :

As fire team leader , while conducting any tactical mission , when

fire must be placed on enemy troops or vehicles . ( Tracer ammunition
for the fire team leader's weapon and pyrotechnics may or may not be
available . )

STANDARDS :

The fire team leader will select a method of fire control ( for any
situation encountered) which , when used , will let every member of
his fire team know :

1. When to start/ stop firing .

2. What general area to fire into .

3. How fast ( rate ) to fire .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

All methods and techniques for controlling team fires are dependent
upon collective training of the entire team in order to be effec-
tive . The following guidance , although it is directed at the
" leader " in order to train him in the selection of fire control
methods , must be followed by team training .

The squad/ team leader must be able to have his men open fire or
cease fire at the instant he desires , to adjust fire , to shift all
or part of the fire from one target to another , to regulate the rate
of fire , and to concentrate or distribute fire as required . For
this , the team must practice methods of fire control and develop
teamwork .

1. Signals or Fire Control . There are several ways to control

team/ squad fire . The noise and confusion of battle will limit
the use of some of them . Therefore , leaders must have more than
one method and then use the method or combination of methods
which does the job best .

a. Oral . This is a good method except when the leader is too

far away from his men or the noise of battle makes it impos-
sible for them to hear him .

b. Arm- and- hand signals . This is used when the troops can see
their leader . A11 men in a rifle platoon should know and
practice the standard arm- and-hand signals .

2-488
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
c. Pyrotechnics . In some cases , fire can be started or stopped
by a smoke grenade of a specified color , or by a flare .
d. By example . The most common method a team leader uses to

start his team firing and to direct their fire is by setting

the example . His men hear him shoot and see where he
shoots . They do the same . The leader may use tracers to
help him point out targets to his men .

(1 ) Mark the target : By firing at the center of the target

and the right and left limits of fire , if appropriate .
The two fire team members on the right engage the tar-
get from center to the right limit ; the two men on the
left engage the left half of the target .

(2) Establish the rate of fire : The team leader estab-

lishes the rate of fire by example . His men will copy
his rate of fire :

e. Prearranged event . Men can be told to start shooting when

approaching enemy reach a certain terrain feature . A " com-
mence - fire line" can be a hedgerow , a stream , a ridge , etc.
This helps a unit deliver surprise fire on the enemy .

2. Fire Distribution . Fire distribution is the quickest and best

way to get fire on all parts of a target . Fire must be distrib-
uted to keep all parts of target under suppressive fire . Fire
team leaders put fire on targets or target areas so that the
enemy , whether visible or not , is kept under fire . A squad SOP
may call for the left fire team to engage the left half of a
linear target , or the front half of a column target . This makes
sure that the whole target is engaged , not just those enemy sol-
diers nearest the squad firing . To maximize effectiveness of
team fires :

a. Engage any exposed enemy personnel .

b. When enemy personnel are not exposed :

(1 ) Engage any visible enemy positions at the probable fir-

ing points ( e.g. , bunker ports and doors , top front
edge of trenches , windows , doors , and firing loopholes
in buildings ) .

(2 ) Engage probable battlefield positions ( base of trees ,

stumps , bushes -

anything you would use for cover if

you were in his situation) .

2-489
FM 5-12B1 /2

3. Rate of Fire : The rate of fire for the fire team should be in-
creased until enemy fire is noticeably reduced or stopped. The
rate of fire should then be held at that level until the enemy
positions can be occupied or destroyed or , in the defense , the
enemy attack repulsed .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-75 , Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Patrolling

2-490
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
hou
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2062
st

TASK:

Lead physical conditioning activities .

CONDITIONS :

Given a platoon or company size unit in formation , with a require-

ment to conduct
specified physical activity . ( Activity will be
a

predesignated so that time is available for preparation . )

STANDARDS :

1. Be physically fit to lead physical conditioning activities .

2. Give all preparatory commands to permit the average man to un-
derstand the first one before the second one is given .

3. Be able to form and control the extended rectangular formation ,

circle formaiton , and double- time column ( while performing the
run portion of physical conditioning activities ) .
4. Lead each exercise in accordance with FM 21-20 .

5. Demonstrate each exercise ( at least three repetitions ) with са-

dence .

6. Follow guidance given concerning what , when , where , and how long
activity is to be conducted .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. How to prepare . Once guidance is given concerning the condi-

tioning requirement , preparations must be made .
a. What is the requirement ? You must be familiar with the ex-
ercises in FM 21-20 if leading them is your requirement .
This will require study and practice . It is also your re-
sponsibility to insure that your assistant instructors ( if
available) know the exercises so they can effectively super-
vise and demonstrate . If your requirement is , or includes ,
a conditioning run , you must insure that your road guards
( if used) , pace men , lead rank , and assistant instructors
are proficient enough runners to set a good pace ( and ex-
ample) to the rest of the group .

b. When? An assigned starting time is just that . It is your

responsibility to insure that the requirement does start on
time and a system is set up to deal with late arrivals .
Your assistant instructors should note the name of any indi-
vidual who is late , then place him in the formation . He
still needs to take part in the conditioning; he can be sent

2-491
FM 5-12B1 /2

to his supervisor to explain and be dealt with after the

formation .

C. Where? Once given a location to perform the requirement ,

you must determine if it is feasible to do it there and what
plans must be made to best fit the requirement to the area.
The area must be large enough . If it is a controlled area,
you must insure that only you have planned to use it during
your requirement time period . If the area becomes useless
during bad weather ( for example , knee deep in mud when it
rains ) , an alternate area must be secured .

d. How long?? You will be given a period of time in which to

complete the requirement . Plans should be made with an eye
to coming as close as possible to the required time without
going over it since improper use of time can snowball
through a training day and wreck a unit's schedule and mor-
ale . Timing is a function of practice . Rehearse exercises .
On a run , match a realistic pace to an appropriate distance .
You , not the pace man , are responsible for the pace . Allow
yourself small time leeway and don't make the instructor
a

for the next period suffer for your lack of timing .

2. Preparatory commands and commands of execution . The preparatory
command describes and specifies what is required , and the com-
mand of execution calls into action what has been prescribed .
All preparatory commands are given with a rising inflection .
The interval between commands is long enough to permit the aver-
age man to understand the first one before the second one is
given .

3. Extended Rectangular Formation ( figure 1 ) . The formation used

most frequently for carrying on physical training activities is
the extended rectangular formation ( figure 1 ) . This formation
is the best type to use for large numbers of men because it is
easy to control . The following commands are given to form this
formation .

NOTE : In figure 1 the baseman is represented by a white circle .

a. FALLOUT AND FALLIN ON THE BASEMAN . At this command , all
personnel run to the designated area and re- form . This
procedure is preferred to marching the unit into position .
If more control is desired , the unit may march at double
time to the vicinity of the baseman and then be directed to
fall out and fall in on him . Time is wasted in the field
due to needless maneuvering of troops at quick time in an
effort to position the unit on the exact spot for the exer-
cises

b. A company size unit assumes the extended rectangular forma-

tion from a column of three's or four's at normal intervals
between squads . This extension can also be executed from a

2-492
 FM 5-12B1 / 2'

company mass without interval between platoons . In extend-

ing either a platoon or company size unit take your place at
the head of the column and command .
re

A. FORMING A PLATOON

5PACES 5 PACES
0

PLATOON IN FORMATION ON BASE MAN

PLATOON EXTENDED AND UNCOVERED

B. FORMING A COMPANY -SIZE UNIT

5PACES
18PACES

9 PACES O 9 PACES 9 PACES

POSITION OF PLATOON BASE MEN

PLATOONS IN FORMATION ON BASE MEN

ALL PLATOONS EXTENDED AND UNCOVERED

Figure1
Forming the extended rectangular formation.

2-493
FM 5-12B1 / 2
(1 ) EXTEND TO THE LEFT , MARCH . At this command , the men in
the right flank file stand fast with arms extended
sideward . All other men turn to the left and run for-
ward at double time . After taking a sufficient number
of steps , all men face the front with both arms ex-
tended sideward . The distance between fingertips is
about 12 inches and dress is right .

(2 ) ARMS DOWNWARD , MOVE . At this command , the arms are

lowered smartly to the sides .

(3) LEFT , FACE .

(4 ) EXTEND TO THE LEFT , MARCH . At this command , the men in

the right flank file stand fast with arms extended
sideward . All other men turn to the left and run for-
ward at double time . Spacing is the same as in (1)
above and dress is right .

(5) ARMS DOWNWARD , MOVE . Same as in ( 2 ) above . ( 6 ) RIGHT ,

FACE .

(7) FROM FRONT TO REAR , COUNT OFF . At this command , the

leading man in each column turns his head to the right
rear , calls off " one" and faces the front . Successive
men in each column call off in turn , " two " , " three " ,
" four " , " five " , in the same manner .

(8) EVEN NUMBERS TO THE LEFT , UNCOVER . At this command ,

each even numbered man stride- jumps to the left ,
squarely in the center of the interval . In doing this ,
he swings his left leg sideward and jumps from his
right foot to his left foot and smartly brings the
right into position against the left .

C. To assemble the unit , command : ASSEMBLE TO THE RIGHT ,

MARCH . At this command , all return to their originial posi-
tion in the column at double time and reform on the baseman .

d. It is recommended that the area for grounding equipment and

weapons be at the edge of , or well away from , the area to be
used for exercising . To conserve time and insure proper
position of the unit , the baseman or , if the unit is com-
posed of several platoon size groups , the various baseman
may precede the unit and establish their positions in rela-
tion to the instructor's platform .

4. Circle formation . The circle formation is effective for the

conduct of various exercise activities ( figure 2) . This forma-
tion has an advantage in that the supervision of all men is fa-
cilitated and a moving formation is available which provides
control . Guerrilla exercises , grass drills , and some forms of
running , are examples of activities which are more easily con-

2-494
 FM 5-12B1 /2
d,
ducted in the circle formation than in the extended rectangular
formation .
and !

(6)

Figure2
Thecircle formation.

‫ال‬

a. When a platoon is to form a circle , the commands are CIRCLE

FORMATION , MARCH , FOLLOW ΜΕ . Upon this command the right
flank squad of the column moves forward at double time with
the leader of the platoon group gradually forming a circle
in a counterclockwise direction . Each succeeding file falls
in behind that on the right . After the rough outline of the
circle is formed , the leader commands , PICK UP A FIVE - YARD
INTERVAL . This is to insure the interval between men is
‫أب‬ uniform prior to starting exercises .

b. The group may be halted and faced toward the center , or , if

instruction is not necessary , the exercise activity may be
executed without stopping the platoon .

5. Conditioning run . This is nothing more than a column moving

over a prescribed course at double time . Reflector- vested road
guards must be placed ahead of and behind the column if the
course follows a road or vehicle trail . A designated pace man
runs in the right guide position and , under the direction of the
instructor in charge , sets and maintains the pace for the run .
Routes should be selected and announced , if necessary , in accor-
dance with post and unit SOPs .
1

2-495
FM 5-12B1 /2

6. Leadership Techniques .

a. Unless you experience all of the exercises you cannot appre-

ciate how strenuous they are , what movements are the most
difficult , where the errors in performance are likely to
occur , and what the proper cadence should be .

b. You must give all the men careful supervision and partici-
pate in the exercises to show that you can do them . When
you participate , your assistant instructors should supervise
because it is difficult for you to supervise and exercise
simultaneously .

c. The men should never be kept too long in one position , espe-
cially a constrained one . They should never have to perform
so many repetitions of an exercise that they lose the cor-
rect form . Slight deviations from the proper form reduce
the value of the exercise .

d. Avoid long explanations . As a rule , it should be necessary

to give a full explanation of new exercises only once . Mi-
nor corrections should be made to the entire class while the
exercise is in progress ( for example , " heads up " , "knees
straight " ) . If necessary , follow this correction by the
name of the man who is at fault .

e.
The heavy demand on your voice can be lightened by training
assistant instructors to assume some of the instruction and
by employing mass cadence .

f. Insure each exercise is performed in accordance with FM

21-20 . Review and practice is usually required in order to
perform them properly .

g. Use of a cue card ( 3 x 5 or scrap of paper) is recommended

while leading exercises . This will prevent forgetting any
exercise and help present a smooth period of training .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-20 , Physical Readiness Training

2-496
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2541

TASK:

are
Inspect personnel/ equipment .
CONDITIONS :

Given personnel or equipment to be inspected , specified amount of

k time , inspection site and unit SOP for inspections .
11
STANDARDS :

Within the time specified , find and note deficiencies on personnel

it
or equipment inspected .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :
in

1. Personnel

a. Start at the head . Check headgear , haircut , and shave .

b. Inspect collar insignia and awards .

c. Check gig line and belt buckle .

d. Check footgear .

e. Check uniform for general appearance , fit and patches .

NOTE : Before inspecting , be thoroughly familiar with unit stan-

dards .

2. Equipment :

a. Before inspection , study applicable TM .Pay particular at-

tention to section on preventive maintenance checks and ser-
vices and the basic issue items list .

b. Begin inspection at a readily recognizable point on equip-

ment .

c. Inspect in an orderly sequence . This saves motion and

eliminates chances of missing important items .

d. Note deficiencies as you find them . Don't try to remember

all of them .

e. Inspection should be complete when you return to the start-

ing point .
REFERENCE :

FM 22-5 , Drill and Ceremonies

2-497
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2542

TASK :

Supervise maintenance on individual and TOE equipment

CONDITIONS :

Given personnel , with equipment to be maintained , a maintenance

site , and specified amount of time .
STANDARDS :

Within time specified , direct personnel assigned to your unit in the

proper maintenance of individual or TOE equipment to meet Army stan-
dards as listed in applicable TM or other publications .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

To supervise maintenance on individual and TOE equipment :

1. Determine what is to be maintained .

2. Obtain applicable TM .

3. Brief personnel on maintenance to be performed and standards .

4. Assign tasks as stated in TM , when applicable .

5. Allocate resources if necessary .

6. Spot check ( DO NOT OVER SUPERVISE ) .

7. Obtain assistance if needed .

8. Inspect completed work and make corrections if necessary .

9. Report completion of work to your supervisor .

NOTE : accom-
Be sure that the task is understood , supervised , and
plished .

REFERENCES :

FM 22-100 , Military Leadership

DA Pamphlet 310-1 , Index of Administrative Publications

2-498
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2544

TASK :

Supervise subordinates .

CONDITIONS :

E
Given a mission and resources , to include subordinates , time , and
materials .

STANDARDS :

Accomplish the mission within the required time and to the estab-
lished standards .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Understand the mission . Ask questions if necessary .

2. Explain the mission to subordinates , insuring the explanation is

clear , concise , and complete to include standards .

3. Allocate resources ( subordinates , time , and materials ) .

4. Assign specific tasks to each subordinate .

5. Solicit and consider ideas from subordinates ( mission and time
permitting ) .

6. Allow subordinates to learn by doing ( mission and time permit-

ting ) .

7. Do not be overly fearful of mistakes .

8. Do not oversupervise nor undersupervise . Recognize subordi-

nates ' capabilities ( know your subordinates ) .

9. Check progress and quality periodically .

10. Be decisive .

11. Inspect completed assignment .

12. Recognize subordinates upon mission accomplishment .

13. Report mission accomplishment through the chain of command .

REFERENCE :

FM 22-100 , Military Leadership

2-499
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2548

TASK :

Solve leadership problems .

CONDITIONS :

In garrison or in the field , given leadership problem .

STANDARDS :

Apply leadership principles and problem solving technique to suc-

cessfully solve the problem .

STEPS IN PERFORMANCE :

1. Identify the problem by talking to the individual concerned and

correctly identify the problem to be solved .
NOTE : Identifying the problem may not be easy . Often considerable
time and effort may be expended in an effort to determine what the
real problem is . The more clearly a problem is defined and iso-
lated , the easier it is to arrive at a solution .

Specific References : FM 22-100 , Chap 10 , Pages 10-1 & 10-2; FM

22-101 , Chap 83 TEC Lesson 948-071-0001 -F , 0002-F , 0003 -F .

2. Gather information .

When the problem has been defined . Gather the information

needed to solve the problem . All factors that affect the
problem must be considered . Some of the information may not
bear on the problem at hand . So you must sift through the
information and use only that which applies to the specific
problem . You should also , if time permits , talk to those
directly concerned to gather additional information and , if
possible , solicit their comments and cooperate in seeking the
best solution . You must also realize that a person's atti-
tude may alter information . So , when gathering information ,
consider the attitude of the personnel providing the informa-
tion . Information obtained in confidence during counseling ,
or in the identification of a problem , should as a rule not
be passed on without the soldier's consent . If you are ap-
proached with a problem , try to persuade the soldier to take
it to his company commander or to agree to you doing so on
his behalf . In any case , you should keep the company com-
mander informed in general terms about any conduct , circum-
stance or cause of dissatisfaction which might affect the
discipline or efficiency of his unit . In certain circum-
stances , usually where breaches of discipline are involved,
military responsibilities may require you to disclose and
report specific cases .

2-500
 FM 5-12B1/2

Specific References : FM 22-100 , Chap 10 , Page 10-2 .

3. Develop and list courses of action .

The second phase of the decision making process is the deci-

sion phase . It involves developing courses of action , ana-
lyzing them , and selecting the best one to solve the problem .
The development of courses of action requires an analysis of
the available information SO as to determine whether each
course of action will or will not solve the problem .

Specific References : FM 22-100 , Chap 10 , Pages 10-1 and 10-2 ; TEC

948-071-0001 -F , 0002 -F , 0003 -F , 942-071-0003 -F ; FM 22-101 , Chap 2 ,
Page 2-3 .

4. Analyse the course of action .

0 After the courses of action have been developed , analyze each
one to determine its good and bad points . Through this eval-
uation , the best course of action may be determined . A use-
ful point to remember is that a course of action may appear
worthless in itself , but when it is combined with a second
course of action , it may become the best possible solution ,
therefore , a good decision maker guards against letting his
instinctive first reaction to a problem color his analysis .
(An open mind must be maintained throughout the decision- mak-
ing process ) .

Specific References : FM 22-100 , Chap 10 , Page 10-3 .

5. Select the best course of action .

The decision- making process ends when the decision is

reached . Prior to this , you should discourage differences of
opinion from all parties because honest differences are use-

ful in determining the pros and cons of each alternative .

The key is to encourage objective discussion and to avoid
emotionalism . Although this is a difficult task , you must
train your subordinates to express their views objectively .
This will allow you to make decisions based on what is right
rather than on who is right . If personalities are allowed to
creep into the decision- making process , there is a risk of
having those personalities color the decision . After the
decision is made , all subordinates should support it to the
best of their ability .

Specific References : FM 22-100 , Chap 10 , Page 10-3 .

NOTE : Sometimes the best course of action cannot be followed due to

factors beyond your control . The next best course of action must be
chosen .

2-501
FM 5-12B1 / 2

6. Implement the selected course of action .

Ο Once the decision is made , it is time to act . The decision

must be put into effect and then evaluated to insure that the
desired results are being achieved . Do not be content by
merely initiating actions . Success generally depends upon
your ability and willingness to supervise and check results
of the effort .

Specific References : FM 22-100 , Chap 10 , Pages 10-3 and 10-4;

7. Re- evaluate the course of action decision .

Ο Because a good decision today may not be a good decision to-

morrow , all plans and policies must be continually re-evalu-
ated . Additionally , a decision may create other problems
within the organization , therefore a good decision builds a
feedback mechanism into the plan to evaluate the effective-
ness of his decision .

Specific Reference : FM 22-100 , Page 10-1 .

REFERENCES :

FM 22-100 , Military Leadership , chap 10

FM 22-101 , Leadership Counseling , chap 2
TEC Lessons :

909-071-0038 -F , Counseling , Part 1

909-071-0039 -F , Counseling , Part 2

2-502
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2571

TASK:

Conduct a performance - oriented training session .

CONDITIONS :

Given :

1. A training objective with the following characteristics :

a.
It must be an individual training objective .
b. It must not require the mastery of any intermediate training
objective .
1

C. It must be teachable within 30 minutes and judged by an in-

dividual ( your evaluator / supervisor ) who has demonstrated
mastery of the training objective .

2. No more than 24 hours to prepare the training session .

3. No more than 10 and no less than four trainees who are unable to
perform the training objective .

4. No more than 30 minutes to conduct the training session .

5. All other necessary resources to conduct the training ( for ex-

ample , training aids , an area to conduct the training , etc. ) .

STANDARDS :

1. The trainer must conduct the training in three phases . In Phase

I , he must :

a. Explain the training objective .

b. Insure all trainees understand the training objective .

C. Give appropriate instruction ( e.g. , demonstration , talk

thru ) to prepare the trainees to perform the training objec-
tive .

2. In Phase II , he must give the trainees sufficient time to prac-

tice performing .

3. Phase III , he must test the trainee's ability to perform the

training objective .

4. All trainees who cannot perform the training objective at the

conclusion of the training session must be identified .

2-503
FM 5-12B1 /2
5. The reason( s ) for the failure ( s ) must be identified .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Insure that you clearly understand the training objective which

you are to teach . If you have any questions , ask your evalua-
tor/ supervisor .
a. During Phase I , you inform the trainees . This includes ex-
plaining the training objective , insuring understanding and
a demonstration . ( You may decide to talk the trainees
through the task instead of first demonstrating it . ) Expla-
nation of the training objective must include : the task
which the trainees perform at the end of the session , the
conditions under which they must operate ( for example , eq-
uipment given or denied and terrain ) , and the standard that
they must achieve . Estimate the time it will take to com-
plete Phase I.

b. In Phase II , you allow the trainees to practice performing

the training objective . ( Do not estimate the amount of time
required for this phase at this time . ) c . In Phase III, you
test the trainees to determine if each one can perform the
training objective . Estimate the time that it will take to
test all trainees . All remaining time will be allocated to
Phase II of the training session . If you properly organize
available time , all trainees should be able to accomplish
the training objective within the time estimated .

2. Obtain any training aids that you need . ( You may find it help-
ful to look in appendix C , FM 21-6 , Training Techniques , Aids ,
and Devices . ) If the training objective which you have been
given is contained in the Skill Level 1 , Soldier's Manual , look
at the " training " portion of the training and evaluation outline
for your particular training objective . This should also give
you some helpful information .

3. Rehearse the training session .

4. Conduct the training session ( in three phases as described

above ) .

5. Evaluate the results of the training session . Remember that all

trainees must perform the training objective and that it is
critical to identify those who cannot . Note the reason( s ) for
any failure ( s ) . Reasons for failure might be : insufficient
resources ( time , training aids , etc. ) ; unrealistic standards , or
lack of trainee motivation .

REFERENCE :

FM 21-6 , How to Prepare and Conduct Military Training

2-504
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-2547

TASK:

Prepare the rater's section of an enlisted evaluation report .

CONDITIONS :

Given DA Pamphlet 623-1 , one blank DA Form 2166-5 , and a number 2

lead pencil .

STANDARDS :

Complete parts II and III of the Enlisted Evaluation Report , DA Form

2166-5 , as outlined in DA Pam 623-1 ( Preparation of Enlisted Evalua-
2 tion Reports ) .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Parts I and VII of the report will be completed by the Military

Personnel Officer (MILPO ) . Parts II and III are completed by
you , the rater , and the indorser . Part IV is completed by the
indorser , and Part V is completed by the individual being rated .
NOTE : Part I should be checked by the rater and rated individual
E
for possible discrepancies .

2. Part II .

a. Block A. You will enter the actual duties performed by the

rated soldier , including additional duties . b . Block B.
This block is not applicable to the rater . Will be com-
pleted by the indorser .

A. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DUTIES Soldier performs duty as a member of the Indirect Fire Team .
Engages the enemy with mortar fires when required.

B. INDORSER HAS NOT

OBSERVED AND CAN
NOT RATE SOLDIER 0

c.
Block C. Two selections are possible . Check the appropri-
ate box to indicate frequency of contact , and if applicable ,
also check " reports and records " . The rater will fill in
the line following the " R" only .

C. REPORT DAILY FRFQ REPT &

BASED ON : CONTACT OBSN

10Π 00 00 00
2-505
FM 5-12B1 /2,
d. Block D. Mark the "yes " or " no" block as appropriate . A
"no" response here requires explanation in Block J.

D. SOLDIER SUPPORTS THE

YES NO
ARMY'S EQUAL
R
OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM 00 0
1

e. Block E. Performance Traits . Rate the individual carefully

on each of the ten performance traits by marking the appro-
priate box for each trait . Mark ratings in soft pencil , on
the basis of the given rating scale . Enter the score for
each trait in black ink in the score box at the right hand
column under " R" and enter in the totals box at the bottom
of the locations in Block H. Marking procedures are the
same for Blocks F and Gas in Block E, and the appropriate
E. DUTY PERFORMANCE RANKS SUPERIOR EXCEEDS NEEDS
TRAITS WITH TO OR MEETSJIMPROVE SCORE
MOST DUTY MENTS
VERY
REQUIRE-
BEST
MENTS SomeMuch
5 4 3 2 1 0 R 1

1. Is well informed on all phases of

assigned duties . ( Scope of knowledge RU_00_0_0
1
3
about duties)
미미 미미
2. Carries out orders without con-
stant supervision . ( Dependability in R00 01010 3
performing without supervision) 1

3. Shows interest and enthusiasm

for duties . (Attitude toward duties )
a
R00
I
0,010 3

4. Demonstrates qualities of leader-

ship . ( Exerts positive influence on
others)
R0000_0_0 3
1

5. Seeks out opportunities for self-

improvement . (Effort directed toward RO 0_10_10 3
realization of potential ) 1

6. Displays ability to initiate action

without direction from others . (Ag-
gressive pursuit of methods to im-
R00000 1

prove duty performance)

1
ООООГОО
7. Is successful in working with
others. (Ability to work in harmony
with others )
R0 10 000000 0_00 3
I

8. Personal behavior sets a good

example for others. (High standards
of personal conduct )
R00
1
000000 0_0_0 3

9. Takes pride in dress and appear-

ance. (Neat and military in bearing) R0_0_0_0_10
010_010_00 3
1

10.Is physically fit, as required, for

MOS/grade during combat . ( Physical
condition)
RO_0000 4
1

TOTALS 29

2-506
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

boxes in Block H. If the score for Block E exceeds 40 or is

less than 10 , justify in Block J.

f. Block F. Demonstrated Overall Performance . In this section

you rate the soldier's strengths and weaknessess , using
overall performance . If score exceeds 42 or is below 6 ,
justify in Block J.
F. DEMONSTRATED OVERALL PERFORMANCE
OF ASSIGNED DUTIES

SCORE
Ranks Demonstrates
Supetrot Exceeds e
With to Most Meets Du
Shortcomings
Very Best Requirements
Minor Major

*00 0000000000000 33
1.1 13 42 38 34 33 27 21 15 14 10 6 531

100 000 0000 000000

g. Block G. Advancement Potential . Rate the soldier on abil-
ity to perform in the next higher grade by considering total
capacity in comparison with other individuals of the same
grade and length of service . If score exceeds or meets 22
or is below 10 , justify in Block J.
G. ADVANCEMENT POTENTIAL
IF I HAD THE AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY
TO DO SO, I WOULD : ( DISREGARD TIME IN GRADE
cof

REQUIREMENTS)
Deny
ORE

Promote Promote Continued

Promote Not
Imme- Ahead of Active
With Peers Promote
diately Peers
Duty

00000000000 0 18
31 30 28 26 24 22 18 14 10 75 3 0

0000
00 000 0000000
h. Block H. Scores . You enter the scores from the appropriate
boxes from Blocks E , F and G and total them . The sum of the
scores is added by the indorser .
H. SCORE

BLOCKS RATER INDORSER

E 29

F 33

G 18

REPT SCORE

SUM + =
2=

2-507
FM 5-12B1 /2

i. Block I. Career Development . Recommeendations for logical

career development , such as advanced schooling and special
assignments are appropriate here .
CAREER DEVELOPMENT ( RECOMMENDATIONS ON SCHOOLING AND ASSIGNMENTS)

Recommend DA NCO Development Course for individual.

j. Block J. Comments . Comments must be either typed or neatly

printed .

J. I. COMMENTS ARE MANDATORY TO JUSTIFY RATINGS IN PART II AS FOLLOWS:

a. BLOCK E SCORE BELOW 10 OR OVER 40, BLOCK F SCORE BELOW 6 OR OVER 42, BLOCK G SCORE BELOW 10 Gar

OR OVER 22, OR BLOCK D IF SOLDIER DOES NOT SUPPORT ARMY'S EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM.
b. INDORSER WHO CHECKS BLOCK II B.
2. REMARKS OTHERWISE OPTIONAL

RATER

3. Part III . This entry , except for signature , must be typed or

printed in black ink . Use black ink for signature .
PART III RATER AUTHENTICATION
A. ORGANIZATION AND DUTY ASSIGNMENT B. NAME AND GRADE C. DATE
Section Leader CHARLIE A. DELTA 5Jan76
Co C, 1st Bn, 26th Inf E-6
ΑΡΟ ΝΥ 09039 DSIGNATURE
orlie A. Delta
4. Counseling . After signing the report , you should discuss the
report with the rated soldier and counsel him . After counsel-
ing , you will forward the report to the indorser .
5. See figure 1 for a completed example of an Enlisted Evaluation
Report , DA Form 2166-5 , as filled in by the RATER .

REFERENCE :

DA Pamphlet 623-1 , Preparation of Enlisted Evaluation Reports

2-508
 333333333)
12 ENLISTED EVALUATION REPORT (AR 600-200)

For preparation, see DA Pamphlet 623-1. C. SSN

7777
22422222222

++++ ][+++ ][+ ]+ )

PART I PERSONAL DATA

の
ぱ
×
よ
と
の
月
9
と
×
A. GRADE (ABBR) NAME ( LAST) (FIRST
) (MI) SSN B. TYPE OF REPORT
INIT ANL CR SP
000-00-0000
DOE , JOHΝ Ε .
000
D. ORGANIZATION AND STATION OTHER

Co C, 1st Bn, 26th Inf 0

APO NY 09039 SPECIFY

E. PMOSC F. DMOSC G. SMOSC H. PERIOD.

JF M OF AMJ
REPORT A SO
E A P A CJOLE
MO. A
11C10 11C10 11B10 NBR RYNL GPTVC 1. NONRATED PERIOD
BEGIN 74
YR 76 77 78 79
U
8182838485

JUL
APR

MAY
MAR

AUG
J. DUTY POSITION TITLE MO
J N NO . OF MONTHS

W
Gunner AVED
END NB C
REASON CODES
AUTH PAY GR E-4 YR 74 7677 7879 80 81 82 838485
PART II RATINGS
A. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF DUTIES
Soldier performs duty as rifleman in a mechanized rifle platoon. Disperses small arms fire toward enemy when required to do so.
C. REPORT DAILY FREQ REPT& D. SOLDIER SUPPORTS THE
B. INDORSER HAS NOT YES NO
CONTACT OBSN REC
OBSERVED AND CAN BASED ON: ARMY'S EQUAL
R
NOT RATE SOLDIER 0 OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM
0 1
0 0
E. DUTY PERFORMANCE RANKS SUPERIOR EXCEEDS NEEDS F. DEMONSTRATED OVERALL PERFORMANCE
TRAITS WITH TO OR MEETS IMPROVE SCORE OF ASSIGNED DUTIES
MOST DUTY MENTS
VERY
REQUIRE-
BEST

SCORU
MENTS SomeMuch
Ranks Superior Demonstrates
Exceeds or
5 4 3 2 1 0 R 1 With toMost Shortcomings
MeetsDuty 0
Very Best Requirements
1. Is well informed on all phases of Minor Major
assigned duties. (Scope of knowledge RO 0 0100 3
E

about duties) 1

2. Carries out orders without con

R00 000 000 000 000 33
4443 42
38 34 33 27 21 15 14 10 6 531
stant supervision. (Dependability in R00 0.10.0 3

performing without supervision) 100 000 000 000 000

G. ADVANCEMENT POTENTIAL
3. Shows interest and enthusiasm
for duties. ( Attitude toward duties)
R10 0.00 3
IF I HAD THE AUTHORITY AND RESPONSIBILITY
TO DO SO, I WOULD: ( DISREGARD TIME IN GRADE
SCORE
REQUIREMENTS)
4. Demonstrates qualities of leader-
ship. ( Exerts positive influence on
R00 000 3
Promote Promote
Deny
Continued 0
1 Promote Not
others
) Imme- Ahead of Active
With Peers Promote
diately Peers E
Duty
5. Seeks out opportunities for self-
improvement. ( Effort directed toward R00 3

realization of potential) 1 00000000000 0 18

3130 28 26 24 22 18 14 10 75 3 0
6. Displays ability to initiate action
without direction from others. (Ag- R0.00 0 1
00000 0000 000 0
gressive pursuit of methods to im-
proveduty performance)
0000 H. SCORE
7. Is successful in working with
others. (Ability to work in harmony ROU 00 3 BLOCKS RATER INDORSER
with others)
0000 E 29
8. Personal behavior sets a good
example for others. ( High standards
R
000 3

ofpersonal conduct) 0000000 F 33

9. Takes pride in dress and appear-

ance. (Neat and military in bearing) RO 10010
100_000 3

G 18

10. Is physically fit, as required, for RO REPT SCORE

MOS/grade during combat. ( Physical 10000 4
1
condition)
이이이 SUM
=
2=

TOTALS

2-509
FM 5-12B1 / 2

RATED SOLDIER'S LAST NAME AND SSN

PART II CONTINUED
1. CAREER DEVELOPMENT ( RECOMMENDATIONS ON SCHCOLING AND ASSIGNMENTS)

Recommend DA NCO Development Course for individual.

J. I. COMMENTS ARE MANDATORY TO JUSTIFY RATINGS IN PART II AS FOLLOWS:

a . BLOCK E SCORE BELOW 10 OR OVER 40 , BLOCK F SCORE BELOW 6 OR OVER 42, BLOCK G SCORE BELOW 10
OR OVER 22, OR BLOCK D IF SOLDIER DOES NOT SUPPORT ARMY'S EQUAL OPPORTUNITY PROGRAM.
b. INDORSER WHO CHECKS BLOCK II B.
2. REMARKS OTHERWISE OPTIONAL.

RATER

INDORSER

PART III RATER AUTHENTICATIO:

A. ORGANIZATION AND DUTY ASSIGNMENT B NAME AND GRADE C. DATE
CHARLIE A. DELTA 5 Jan76
Co C. 1st Bn. 26th Inf Sąd Lor
ΑΡΟ ΝΥ 09039 D.

PART IV INDORSER AUTHENTICATION

CharlieA. Delta
A. ORGANIZATION AND DUTY ASSIGNMENT B NAME AND GRADE C. DATF

D.

PART V SOLDIER AUTHENTICATION

A. I HAVE SEEN A COPY OF THIS REPORT COMPLETE THROUGH B. NAME AND GRADE C. DATE

ACTION BY THE INDORSER . I HAVE BEEN COUNSELED CON-

CERNING THE REPORT. D. SIGNATURE

PART VI REVIEWER AUTHENTICATION

A.
SOLDIER WAS RATED BY CORRECT RATER AND INDORSER . NO FURTHER ACTION REQUIRED.
MY REVIEW RESULTS IN ACTION INDICATED BY INCLOSURES.
B.
ORGANIZATION AND DUTY ASSIGNMENT C. NAME AND GRADE D. DATE

E. SIGILATURE

PART VII MILPO CERTIFICATION

A. DATE REPORT ENTERED ON DA FM 2-1 : C. D.
B. SOLDIER'S COPY GIVEN TO SOLDIER TO SOLDIER 0
FORWARDED TO
MAILED TO SOLDIER 0 CERTIFIED MAH NO UIC
MILPO SIGNATURE

2-510
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-201-2005

TASK:

Operate a 3KW generator .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with a 3 kw generator , basic

issue items , DA Form 2404 , required materials / tools , appropriate
information on loads supplied , and applicable technical manual .
STANDARDS :

All operator/ crew level deficiencies will be identified and cor-

rected SO that the generator will operate at rated capacity . All
other deficiencies will be identified and correctly recorded on the
inspection worksheet . The generator will be started and stopped as
outlined in the starting/ stopping procedures for the unit being op-
erated . The generator must be properly grounded . The generator
must supply the required voltage and frequency when placed into op-
eration .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

NOTE : Omit step 1 if the generator is vehicle mounted .

1. Install generator ( when required ) .

Place the generator on solid and level ground . It should be level
in both planes from side to side and front to back .

WRONG

-3

2-511
FM 5-12B1 / 2
NOTE : The level of the set should not exceed a tilt of 15 degrees in
any direction .
On soft soil or sand , use planks , timber or other available material
to prevent the skids from sinking into the ground .

Generator secured.

Provide drainage (when required ) . If the natural slope of the

ground do not provide adequate drainage , dig a trench around the
generator to funnel the water away from the unit .

DRAINAGE TRENCH

Generator foundation and drainage.

2-512
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

ΕΙ

CONNECTOR ( 2 )

LOAD
FUEL TANK
FILLER CAP

...
....
GENERATOR

GROUND TERMINAL
STUD

CONTROL
BOX

BONDING STRAP

SHOCK MOUNTS (4)

ΜΕ 6115-271-14/1-1

Generator set model MΕΡ-016A.

2. Ground the generator .

NOTE : The ground rod supplied with the generator comes in three sec-
- tions ; each section 3 feet long . There should be two couplings , one
driving head and one ground clamp with the rods .
a. Prepare the ground rod for driving by screwing the driving
head into one section of rod .
b. Use a sledge hammer to drive the prepared section of rod
into the ground until approximately 5 inches remain above
ground . Remove the driving head .

c.
Prepare a second section of the rod by screwing the driving
head on one end and a coupling on the other end .

2-513
FM 5-12B1 / 2

d. Screw the prepared section onto the section in the ground

and drive the rod down until approximately 5 inches remain
above ground .

e. Repeat 2c & d for the last section of rod . However , drive

the rod down until 1 foot remain above ground level .

NOTE : If supply issued ground rods are not available you may use
any of the following :

Ο
Steel or iron rod 8 feet long and 5/8 inch in diameter mini-
mum .

0 Copper rod 8 feet long and 1/2 inch in diameter minimum .

0 Galvanized pipe 8 feet long and 3/4 inch in diameter minimum .

0
Copper plate 1 foot square and .06 inch thick minimum .
•

f. Attach the ground wire between the ground electrode and the
ground terminal on the electrode . Securely tighten the
ground clamp ( with wire inserted underneath clamp and be-
tween clamp and electrode) on the electrode and the lock nut
on the ground terminal .
NOTE : If you use insulated covered wire , remove approximately 1
inch of the insulation from both ends . Number 8 AWG copper or num-
ber 6 AWG aluminum minimum size wire must be used .

3. Position output selector switch to support the load .

NOTE : To get to the selector switch you must open the control pa-
nel .

OUTPUT SELECTOR
SWITCH
G
13

SWITCH
KNOB

Voltage conversion (Model MEP 016A)

2-514
 FM 5-12B1 /2
WARNING : Do not force the switch knob if it does not turn freely .
Push down on the handle and turn it simultaneously . Some switches
are spring loaded to hold the knob in position .

For 120 volt single phase current , move switch knob to 120V , 1 PH
position .

For 240 volt single phase current , move switch knob to 240V, 1 PH
position .

For 120 volt , three phase current , move switch knob to 120V , 3 PH
position .

For 120/208 volt , three phase current , move switch knob to 120/208V ,
3 PH position .

NOTE : Determine the voltage requirement before positioning the se-

lector . If you are in doubt about the type loads to be supported ,
ask your supervisor .
2
4. Connect load cable to generator load terminals .

DUPLEX
RECEPTACLE

CONTROL

BOX
LOAD

FUSE ( 2)
LO

LOAD
L1
TERMINAL (4)

L2

L3

B. 60 HZ GENERATOR SET LOAD TERMINALS

WARNING : DO NOT CONNECT LOAD TERMINALS WHILE THE GENERATOR SET IS

OPERATING .

For 120 volt single phase , connect cables to terminals Ll and L2 .

For 240 volt single phase , connect cables to terminals Ll and L2 .

2-515
FM 5-12B1 /2
For 120 volt , three phase , connect cables to terminals Ll , L2 and
L3 . For 120/208 volt , three phase ( four wire ) , connect cables to
terminals LO , L1 , L2 and L3 .

NOTE : Three phase , four wire cable having one wire green must al-
ways have the green wire connected to load terminal LO .

5. Perform before operational checks .

Ο Inspect frame assembly for dents , cracks and other damage .

0 Check for proper ground . Inspect ground stud for damaged

threads .

Ο Inspect shock mounts and bonding strap .

Ο Inspect canvas cover for rips or tears .

Ο Inspect fuel tank and add fuel as required .

NOTE : If you are using an auxiliary fuel source , connect it .

Ο Check the crank case oil level and add oil as required .

NOTE : When adding oil , check the lubrication order for the type
engine oil to use .

Ο Inspect the fuel filter bowl for water and sediment in the
gas. Clean as required .

Ο Inspect air breather service indicator for indication of re-

striction .

NOTE : If the indicator show red , notify your supervisor . Do not

operate the unit until the deficiency is corrected .

Ο Check the battery water level . The water should come to the
bottom of the breathing slits in the battery . Add clean
water as required .

6. Start generator .

a. Electrical start .

Step 1. Turn variable resistor knob ( labeled "Adjust volts " or " in-
crease volts" ) fully counterclockwise .

Step 2. Be sure circuit breaker is in the OFF position .

2-516
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
1,
t

3 VARIABLE RESISTOR
CIRCUITI
BREAKER

STEP 1. PLACE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN OFF POSITION .

STEP 2. TURN VARIABLE RESISTOR KNOB ( LABELED
"ADJUST VOLTS" AND " INCREASE VOLTS" ) FULLY
COUNTERCLOCKWISE.

Step 3. Place the fuel selector valve in set tank or aux tank de-
pending on source of fuel supply .

FUEL SELECTOR
VALVE

POSITION INDICATOR
PLATE

STEP 5. PLACE FUEL SELECTOR VALVE IN

THE OFF POSITION .

Step 4. Place air intake shutter in the proper position , depending

on ambient temperature .

Step 5. Place governor control in start and idle position .

Step 6. Close choke with choke control lever .

Step 7. Place off- run switch in run position .

2-517
FM 5-12B1 /2)

CHOKE CONTROL LEVER

AIR INTAKE
SHUTTER

GOVERNOR

CONTROL

OFF-RUN
SWITCH

FLANGE

STEP 4. PLACE AIR INTAKE SHUTTER IN THE PROPER POSITION , DEPENDING ON AMBIENT TEMPERATURE.
STEP 5. PLACE GOVERNOR CONTROL IN START AND IDLE POSITION .
STEP 6. CLOSE CHOKE WITH CHOKE CONTROL LEVEL.
STEP 7. PLACE OF F - RUN SWITCH IN RUN POSITION .

Step 8 . Hold starting switch in the start position a maximum of 15

seconds or until engine starts .

STARTING
STEP 8 .
SWITCH
HOLD STARTING SWITCH IN THE
START POSITION A MAXIMUM OF
15 SECONDS .
IF ENGINE DOES NOT START, ALLOW
A COOLING OFF PERIOD OF ONE
MINUTE BEFORE ATTEMPTING TO
RESTART.

2-518
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
NOTE : If engine does not start , allow a cooling off period of one
minute before attempting to restart .

Step 9 . Gradually open choke with choke control lever as engine

attains operating temperature .

CHOKE CONTROL
LEVER

STEP 9 .

GRADUALLY OPEN CHOKE WITH

CHOKE CONTROL LEVER AS ENGINE
ATTAINS OPERATING TEMPERATURE .

NOTE : If you must start the generator manually see the operation
instructions for manual starting in TM 5-611-271-14 .

b. Manual start .

Step 1. Wrap starter rope around flange and pull with a steady mo-
tion . Repeat as necessary until engine starts .
Step 2 . Gradually open choke with choke control lever as engine
attains operating temperature .

2-519
FM 5-12B1/2;

CHOKE CONTROL LEVER

FLANGE

STEP 1. WRAP STARTER ROPE AROUND FLANGE AND PULL WITH A QUICK STEADY MOTION .
REPEAT AS NECESSARY UNTIL ENGINE STARTS.
STEP 2. GRADUALLY OPEN CHOKE WITH CHOKE CONTROL LEVER AS ENGINE ATTAINS
OPERATING TEMPERATURE.

Manual starting instructions.

7. Put generator into operation .

Step 1. Place governor control in govern position .

Step 2. Using the variable resistor , adjust until the voltmeter

registers desired voltage . The load meter should read "o" .
NOTE : If there is no voltage indicated on the voltmeter , momentary
press the field flash switch . If there is still no voltage and the
variable resistor is turned all the way clockwise , report the matter
to your supervisor .

Step 3. Observe oil pressure indicator for proper operation .

Step 4. Observe battery charging meter for proper operation .

Step 5. Inspect the frequency meter . It should indicate 60HZ .

2-520
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
NOTE : If the frequency reading is incorrect , manipulate the engine
governor until the desired reading is obtained . If you cannot ob-
tain the correct reading , contact your supervisor .

? Step 6. Place the circuit breaker in the ON position to apply the

load .

Step 7 . Use the current selector switch and the load meter indica-
tions to determine the current draw on each terminal ( excluding ter-
minal " LO" ) and phase . The combined readings of the terminals
should not exceed 100% .

NOTE : All supported loads must be turned on prior to performing

step 5 .

CAUTION :

If the loads supported are all resistive , lights , heating elements ,

etc , the reading should not exceed 80% of the full load current . If
the loads are inductive and resistive mixed , motors , lights , etc ,
the reading should not exceed 100% of the full load . If either load
condition is exceeded , reduce the load or stop the unit and report
to your supervisor .

Step 8. Readjust the variable resistor , if necessary , to compensate

for the current draw .

8. Perform during operation checks .

0 Inspect controls and instruments for damage , loose mounting ,

and normal gage readings and record all deficiencies noted .

9. Stop generator set ( normal stopping ) .

VARIABLE RESISTOR CIRCUIT

1 BREAKER

STEP 1. PLACE CIRCUIT BREAKER IN OFF POSITION .

STEP 2. TURN VARIABLE RESTOR KNOB
(LABELED " ADUST VOLTS" AND "INCREASE VOLTS" )
FULLY COUNTERCLOCKWISE.

2-521
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Step 1. Place circuit breaker in OFF position .

Step 2. Turn variable resistor knob ( labeled " adjust volts " and
" increase volts " ) fully counterclockwise .

OFF - RUN
SWITCH

GOVERNOR
CONTROL

STEP 3. PLACE GOVERNOR CONTROL IN START

AND IDLE POSITION AND ALLOW EN-
GINE TO IDLE 3-5 MINUTES
STEP 4. PLACE OFF - RUN SWITCH IN OFF
POSITION .

Step 3. Place governor control in start and idle position and allow
engine to idle 3-5 minutes .

Step 4. Place Off- run switch in OFF position .

FUEL SELECTOR
VALVE

POSITION INDICATOR
PLATE

STEP 5. PLACE FUEL SELECTOR VALVE IN

THE OFF POSITION .

Step 5. Place fuel selector valve in the OFF position .

2-522
 FM 5-12B1 /2
10. Perform after operation checks / services .

0 Inspect fuel tank strainer for damage .

0 Add fuel as required .

0 Add oil as required .

0 Check battery water level . Add clean water as required .

0 Inspect entire set for serviceability . Correct shortcomings /

Re-
deficiencies that are within your level of maintenance .
port uncorrected faults to your supervisor .

REFERENCE :

TM 5-6115-271-14 , Generator Sets

2-523
FM 5-12B1 / 2 ,
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2013

TASK:

Load and transport explosives .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with squad vehicle , demolitions ,

squad personnel , and instructions to load and transport the demoli-
tions to a work site .

STANDARDS :

The loading and transporting will be accomplished safely in accor-

dance with the performance measures .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Vehicles used for the transportation of explosives shall not be

loaded beyond rated capacity and the explosives shall be secured
to prevent shifting of load or dislodgment from the vehicle in
transit . In all open-body types of vehicles the explosives
shall be covered with a fire- resistant tarpaulin .

2. All vehicles transporting explosives shall be marked with ref-

lectorized placards on both sides and ends with the word EXPLO-
SIVES in white letters not less than 6- inches high on red a

background .

3. Blasting caps or other initiators shall not be transported in

the same vehicle with other explosives , if possible ; otherwise
the caps should be carried in the front and the explosives in
the rear of the truck .

4. Do not roll , drop , throw or subject boxes to rough handling dur-

ing loading .

5. All vehicles used for transportation of explosives shall be in

charge of , and operated by , a person who is of mature mind ,
physically fit , careful , reliable , able to read and write the
English language , and not addicted to the use of intoxicants or
narcotics . He should be aware of the destructive effects of
explosives .

6. No metal tools , carbides , oils , matches , firearms , electric

storage batteries , flammable substances , acids , or oxidizing or
corrosive compounds shall be carried in the bed or body of any
vehicle transporting explosives ..

2-524
 FM 5-12B1 /2 ,

7. Vehciles to be used in the transportation of explosives shall be

in good repair . When steel or part steel bodies are used , fire-
resistant and nonparking cushioning materials shall be employed
to separate the containers of explosives from the metal .

8. Vehicles transporting explosives shall be equipped with not less

than two fire extinguishers placed at strategic points , filled
and ready for immediate use , and of a make approved by the Na-
tional Board of Fire Underwriters for class B and C fires .

9. A vehicle containing explosives shall not be taken into a public

building or repair shop or parked in congested areas .

10. All vehicles shall be checked before transporting explosives and

all electric wiring completely protected and securely fastened
to prevent short circuiting .

11. Vehicles transporting explosives shall be operated with extreme

care and shall not be driven at a speed greater than 35 miles
per hour . Full stops shall be made at approaches to all rail-
road crossings and main highways , and the vehicle shall not pro-
ceed until it is known that the way is clear . This , however ,
does not apply to convoys or protected crossings manned by high-
way flagmen or guards .

12. All vehicles transporting explosives on public highways , roads ,

or streets shall have an authorized driver and helper . No per-
son other than the authorized driver and helper shall be permit-
ted to ride on a truck transporting explosives . No motor vehi-
cle shall be refueled while explosives are on the vehicle except
in an emergency .

- REFERENCE :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , Chapter 5 , Para 5-6

2-525
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2014

TASK :

Determine safe distance when firing explosives .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , while in charge of firing explo-

sives , with installed charges , engineer personnel , and the authority
to fire the explosives .

STANDARDS :

All personnel will be safely positioned at the time the explosives

are fired .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Determine safe distance for personnel in the open .

Ο For charges from 27 to 425 pounds , the distance at which per-

sonnel in the open are relatively safe from missiles can be
determined from Table 1 .

Ο
For charges over 425 pounds the minimum missle hazard dis-
tance is 750 meters .

Ο
For charges placed to demolish solid material , missle- proof
shelters should be provided a minimum distance of 100 meters
away from the demolition site . The shelters should be of
sufficient strength to withstand the heaviest material which
might be thrown on them .

Minimum Safe Distance for Personnel

in the Open

Safe Safe
Pounds distance Pounds distance
of in of in
explosive meters explosive meters

1 to 27 300 150 534

30 311 175 560
35 327 200 585
40 342 225 609
45 356 250 630
50 369 275 651
60 392 300 670
70 413 325 688
80 431 350 705
90 449 375 722
100 465 400 737
125 500 425 and over 750

2-526
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2. Determine safe distance for personnel in missle- proof shelters .

Ο The minimum safe distance is 100 meters .

REFERENCE :

FM 5-25 , chapter 5 , para 5-2 and table 5-1

A

2-527
FM 5-12B1 / 2'
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2015

TASK :

Place wood- cutting charges .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with squad personnel , explo-

sives , a demolition set , a pionner tool set , and instructions from
the squad leader on desired demolition results .

STANDARDS :

The charges will be placed so that upon detonation , the tree will be
cut and the direction of fall will be as planned .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. External charge placement

0 For maximum destructive effect concentrated charges should be

of rectangular configuration , 1 to 2 inches thick and ap-
proximately twice as wide as they are high .
Ο Charges are placed as close to the surface of the timber as
possible .

0 Frequently it is desirable to notch the tree to hold explo-

sives in place .

Ο If the tree or timber is not round and the direction of fall

is of no concern , the explosive is placed on the widest face
so that the cut will be through the least thickness .

0 The tree will fall toward the side where the explosive is
placed , unless influenced by lean or wind .

Ο
To make the direction of fall more certain , a "kicker charge"
(a one-pound block of explosive placed about two- thirds of
the distance up the tree on the side opposite the desired
direction of fall) may be used .

When plastic or sheet explosive is to be used and the direc-

tion of fall is not important and the elimination of stumps
is important , the " ring charge" can be used for trees up to
30 inches in diameter .

The ring charge is placed as a band of explosive com-

pletely circling the tree .

2-528
 FM 5-12B1 /2
-

The width of the explosive band should be as wide as pos-

sible and a minimum of 1/2 inch thick for small diameter
trees , and 1 inch thick for medium and large trees up to
30 inches in diameter .

0
An abatis charge is used to cut trees and leave the stumps
attached to create an obstacle .

Abatis charges are placed approximately 5 feet above the

ground .

The direction of fall of the trees should be controlled as

previously described using a kicker charge .
-

To be effective the obstacle should be at least 75 meters

in depth and the felled trees should extend at a 45. de-
gree angle toward the enemy .

2. Internal charge placement .

0 The charge is placed in a borehole parallel to the greatest

dimension of cross section and tightly tamped with moist
earth .

TAMPING TAMPING
EXPLOSIVE
DOUBLE HOLE SINGLE HOLE
DETONATING CORD TESWAR

Internal timbercutting charge.

Ο For tamped internal charges in boreholes , dynamite is gener-

ally used , as it is most convenient to place because of the
size of the cartridge and is powerful enough because it is
confined .

If the charge is too large to be placed in one borehole , bore

two holes side by side in dimensional timber .
0 On round timber bore the two holes at approximately right
angles to each other , but not to intersect . Both boreholes
are tamped and the charges fired simultaneously .
Specific References : FM 5-25 , Para 3-5 and 3-6 , and Fig 3-1 .
REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , para 2-13

2-529
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2016

TASK:

Place steel- cutting charges .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with squad personnel , explo-

sives , a demolition set , and instructions from the squad leader on
desired demolition results .

STANDARDS :

The charge ( s ) will be placed so that , upon detonation , the steel

member is completely cut .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Cutting steel with explosives .

Ο Important factors .

In the preparation of steel cutting charges , the factors

of type , size and placement of the explosive are important
for successful operations .
-

Placement of the charge in direct contact with the target

and dimensions are the most critical factors in steel cut-
ting .

-
Plastic explosive ( C4 ) and sheet explosive ( M118 ) are the
most desirable as they have high detonation velocity and
other characteristics that give them great cutting power .

Plastic explosive ( C4 ) in the M5Al demolition block can be

cut and molded to fit tightly into the grooves and angles
of the target , particularly structural steel , chains and
steel cables ; but the M112 block ( C4) is more adaptable
because its size and shape allow it to be used , in most
instances , without cutting or reshaping .
-

The M112 block is also more adaptable to steel targets

because its adhesive compound on one face allows it to be
affixed securely to the target .
-

Sleet explosives (M118 or M186 ) , because of its width (3

inches ) , thickness ( 1/4 inch) , and adhesive is more desir-
able for some steel targets than either the M5A1 or M112
demolition blocks .

TNT is adequate , generally available , and cast into blocks

that may be readily assembled and fixed , but not molded

2-530
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
into targets .

2. Direct placement of ribbon charges on structural steel sections .

0
Ribbon charges are used on flat , structural steel ( I beams ,
wide flange beams , plates , etc. ) up to 3 inches in thickness .

0 Charge thickness must be a minimum of 1/2 inch regardless of

steel thickness . Plastic explosive ( C-4 ) must be cut rather
than molded to preserve explosive density .

0 Ribbon charges may be constructed using entire sheets of ml18

sheet explosive or blocks of M112 ( C-4 ) explosive as long as
the minimum charge dimensions are equal to or larger than
required .

0 Correct placement of the ribbon charge requires close target-

to - explosive contact over the entire length of steel to be
cut .

0
On wide- flange or I-beams of less than 2 inches of steel
thickness , a C- shaped charge is placed on one side to cut the
web and half the top and bottom flanges . The other sides of
these flanges are cut by two offset ribbon charges , placed so
that one edge is opposite the C- shaped charge .

C-SHAPED CHARGE
TO CUT WEB AND HALF OFFSET FLANGE
OF TOP AND BOTTOM CHARGE SO THAT ONE
FLANGES EDGE IS OPPOSITE
CENTER OF C-SHAPED
CHARGE TO CUT OTHER
SIDE OF FLANGE

A. BEAMS LESS THAN 2 IN . THICK

0 For beams with steel thickness of 2 inches and over , the off-
set charges are placed so that one edge is opposite the edge
of the C-shaped charge .

OFFSET FLANGE CHARGE

1 SO THAT ONE EDGE IS
OPPOSITE AN EDGE OF THE
C-SHAPED CHARGE TO
CUT OTHER SIDE OF
FLANGE

it
B. BEAMS 2 IN . THICK OR MORE

2-531
FM 5-12B1 /2
0
The charges must be detonated at the same instant , therefore
they must be primed with three exactly equal lengths of deto-
nating cord with blasting caps attached and placed as shown.
It may be necessary when the charge thickness is less than
3/4 inch to place extra explosives around or over the blast-
ing cap .

DETONATE FROM
OUTER EDGE
DETONATE FROM
CENTER

DETONATING CORD
PRIMERS MUST BE
OF EQUAL LENGTH

C. PRIMING

Placement of ribbon charges on structural steel sections.

NOTE : Care must be taken to make sure that opposing charges are

never directly opposite each other , otherwise they tend to neutral-

ize the explosive effect .

3. Direct placement of block explosives on railroad rails

0 If possible , the destruction of railroads should be done at

vulnerable points . These are curves , switches , frogs and
crossovers , which may be destroyed with a small amount of
explosives . This is called the " spot " method . The figure
below depicts 3 typical locations for rail destruction .

2LBS
TOTAL

1LB
TOTAL

1LB
TOTAL

NOTE: USE 1/2 LB FOR RAILS LESS THAN 5 " HIGH USE 1 LB FOR RAILS 5" HIGH OR OVER

Demolition ofrailroadswitches, frogs,and crossovers.

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 Para 4-40 .

2-532
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

gta 4. Direct placement of saddle charges on steel bars .

0 The saddle charge is used on solid cylindrical steel bars up
er
to 6 inches in diameter and on solid rectangular or square
bars up to 8 inches square .

0 Using the M112 block of plastic explosive , cut the charge to

correct shape and dimensions .

Ο Peel the paper cover from the adhesive tape side of the
charge

0 Place the adhesive side against the steel bar where the cut

is desired . Take care to insure that the charge is in inti-

mate contact with the target . It may be necessary to tape
the charge to the target .

NOTE : Saddle charges may be constructed using other plastic explo-

sives such as the M5A1 block , however the explosive should be cut
rather than molded .

5. Direct placement of diamond charges on steel bars .

Ο The diamond charge is used on solid cylindrical steel bars up
to 6 inches in diameter . It is diamond shaped , 1 inch thick ,
with the long axis equal to the cirumference of the bar and
the short axis equal to one -half the bar circumference . It

be
may be used on rectangular or squar bars , but placement
around corner is extremely difficult .
0 Wrap the explosive completely around the target so that the
ends of the long axis touch . It may be necessary to slightly
increase the dimensions of the charge SO this may accom-
plished . If necessary to insure complete contact with the
target , tape the charge to the target .

The diamond charge is primed at the apex of both ends of the

short axis with exactly equal lengths of detonating cord in
conjunction with either nonelectric caps or Uli knots . The
detonating cord is then joined together at the ring main .
The explosive should be cut rather than molded .

6. Direct placement of explosives to cut steel chain .

The recommended placement of charges are depicted below .

0 Notice that the link is to be cut in two places ( one cut on

each side) . If the explosive is long enough to bridge both
sides of the link , or large enough to fit snugly between the
two lengths , use one charge ; but if it is not use two seper-
ately primed charges .

2-533
FM 5-12B1 / 2

POINTS OF DETONATION

SHORT AXIS

TOP VIEW

LONG AXIS

SIDE VIEW

EXPLOSIVE

THICKNESS = 1 INCH:
M112 (C4) BLOCK

END VIEW

POINTS OF DETONATION

SHORT AXIS 1/2

CIRCUMFERENCE

LONG AXIS EQUAL

TO CIRCUMFERENCE

Stresswave method-diamondcharge.

2-534
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

THICKNESS

THICKNESS = 1 INCH
(THICKNESS OF M112 (C4) BLOCK)

END VIEW

LONG AXIS
CIRCUMFERENCE OF TARGET

SIDE VIEW

BASE = 1/2 CIRCUMFERENCE

DETONATION AT APEX OF TARGET
OF LONG AXIS

TOP VIEW

Cross fracture method -saddle charge.

2-535
FM 5-12B1 / 2
P=D
P = POUNDS OF TNT REQUIRED , AND
D = DIAMETER IN INCHES OF STEEL CHAIN TO BE CUT
D = 1 INCH

P= 1
P = 1 POUND OF TNT, IF BLOCK WILL BRIDGE LINK;
IF NOT, USE TWO BLOCKS ONE ON EACH SIDE
OF LINK

1 IN
7

Calculation of charge to cut steel chain.

7. Direct placement of charges on steel bridges .

0 Some general procedures apply to most bridge demolition pro-

jects ; for example : If charges are placed under the bridge
roadway , special precautions must be taken to insure that the
charges will not be shaken loose or initiated by traffic on
the bridge .

0 Hasty charges , which must be placed first because of enemy

interruption , should be located carefully , if possible , so
that they may be included later on into the deliberate prep-
aration of the bridge .
-

Tension members are more difficult to repair than compres-

sion members , because compression members may be replaced
by cribbing while tension members usually require steel
riveting or welding . Thus tension members should be given
priority .
-

Any long steel members that need cutting in only one place
to drop the bridge should be further damaged to prevent
future use .

2-536
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 Make sure charges are placed in the most advantageous

location( s ) to demolish the bridge in accordance with the
extent of destruction required . Some typical charge place-
ments are shown below .

1 Demolition of steel stringer superstructures.

TRANSFORMED CONCRETE AREA

r
SHEAR CONNECTORS
CONCRETE
BREACHING
CHARGE
ROLLED SECTION OR
WELDED BU SECTION

STEEL
CUTTING
CHARGE

COVER PLATE

Chargeplacement on composite steel-concrete stringer.

2-537
 FM 5-12B1 /2

‫م‬
DETONATING
CORD

2-538
ELECTRICAL
WIRE

simple
of
destruction
.Complete
bridge
truss
span
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

1 LB BETWEEN CHANNELS

1/2LB
ON DIAGONALS

10:

1 LB BETWEEN CHANNELS

1 LB CHARGE
ON SWAY BRACING

Demolition of Bailey bridge.

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions , para 3-7 , 3-8 , 3-9, 4-18 , 4-19 ,
4-27 , 4-38 , 4-39
FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , para 2-11

2-539
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2017

TASK:

Place breaching charges .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with squad personnel , explo-

sives , a demolition set , a pioneer tool set , and instructions from
the squad leader on desired demolition results .

STANDARDS :

The charge ( s ) will be placed so that , upon detonation , the obstacle

will be breached .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. In the placement of demolition charges for destruction of piers ,

walls or slabs , the positions for the placement of charges are
rather limited . Unless a demolition chamber is available , the
charge ( or charges ) may be placed against one face of the target
either at ground level , somewhat above ground level , or beneath
the surface .

A charge placed above ground level is more effective than one

placed directly on the ground . When several charges are re-
quired to destroy a pier , slab , or wall , elevated charges are
desired , they are distributed equally at no less than one
breaching radius high from the base of the object to be demol-
ished .
METHODS OF PLACEMENT
DISTANCE
THICKNESS BETWEEN

OF CHARGES
CONCRETE

INTER EXTER-
NAL NAL 1

FEET POUNDS OF TNT FEET FEET

2 2 8 14 16 28 2 4

2 2 15 27 30 54 2
% 5

3 4 22 39 44 78 3 6

3½ 6 35 62 69 124 3
% 7

4 8 52 93 103 185 4 8

4½ 11 73 132 146 263 4

% 9

15 79 142 158 284 5 10

5

5 20 105 189 210 378 5

% 11

6 22 136 245 273 490 6 12

6
% 28 173 312 346 623 6
% 13

7 35 186 334 371 667 7 14

7½ 43 228 410 456 821 7

% 15

8 52 277 498 553 996 8 16

Figure 3-14 . Breaching charges for reinforced concrete.

2-540
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
NOTE : Breaching charges should be places so that there is a free
reflection surface on the opposite side of the target . This free
ree
reflection surface is necessary for spalling to occur .

All charges are thoroughly tamped with damp soil or filled sand-
bags if time permits . ( Tamping must be equal to or greater than
the breaching radius .)

D 0 For piers , slabs , or walls partially submerged in water ,

charges are placed equal to or greater than the breaching
radius below the water line .

TAMPED OR
PLACED IN WATER UNTAMPED
STEMMED
CENTER
FILL
MASS

R
R R

C=1.0 C-1.0 C=1.0 C=1.8

WATER UNTAMPED
EARTH
TAMPING

R
R R

C=2.0 C=2.0 C=3.6

Values of C (tamping factor) for breaching charges.

0 the
In order to transmit the maximum destructive shock into
target , the explosive charge should be placed in the shape of
a flat square , with the flat side to the target .
15

2-541
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Placement of charges for walls and piers

Breaching charges for bridge destruction .

5' DEPTH = T

OVER
20' T
OVER
20'
5'
40lbs BREACHING
CHARGES

T
BREACHING
1
CHARGES Abutmentdemolition (T>5')

Abutmentdemolition (T≤5')

Placement

Pier Demolition

Concrete I beams (prestressed) Concrete I Beams As a result of the thin webs and high
strengths, a special means is needed to destroy these
prestressed beams.

2-542
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

REINFORCED CONCRETE
CURB AND DECK

R
=== METHOD 1

SIDE BREACHING
CHARGES
PRESTRESSED
CONCRETE BEAMS

REINFORCING
STEEL
METHOD 2

SHAPED CHARGES

1
Demolition of prestressed concrete beam superstructures.

TOP BREACH

Concrete T Beam Breach the top, bottom , or side , or cut

SIDE beams with 40 pounds shaped charge .
BREACH

BOTTOM BREACH 40 lb SHAPED CHARGES

Concrete T beam

CUT

Concrete slab (short spans) Concrete Slab (Short Spans) Top breach, bottom breach , or
breach as a big box beam .

Concrete Box Beams (Long Spans) Long prestressed box

beams require special charges as the location of the internal
openings cannot always be determined prior to demolition .
END VIEW In cases of very massive beams of this type, it may be more
Method No. 1 efficient to attack the substructure.

X X ☑ X

X X X X X
Method No. 2
Concrete box beam

2-543
FM 5-12B1 /2
2. Opposed ( counterforce ) charge . This special breaching technique
is effective against comparatively small cubical or columnar
concrete and masonry objects 4 feet or less in thickness and
width .

NOTE : This method is not effective against piers or long obstacles .

The obstacle must also have at least three faces or be free stand-
ing .

Ο Divide the calculated amount of explosives in half to make

two identical charges . The two charges must be placed dia-
metrically opposite each other . This requires accessibility
to both sides of the target so that the charge may be placed
flush against the respective target sides .

≤4 ftl <4 ft
CHARGE
COLUMN CHARGE

DETONATING
CORD
(LENGTH OF CORD
MUST BE EQUAL)

Counterforce charge

Specific References : FM 5-25 , Chapter 3 , Section V , para 3-13 and

3-14 ; FM 5-34 , Chapter 2 , para 2-7 thru 2-10 and table 2-4 & 2-5 .
REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

2-544
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2018

TASK:

Place cratering charges .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with squad personnel , shaped

charges , cratering charges , explosives , a demolition set , a pioneer
tool set , and instructions to prepare craters (hasty , deliberate ,
relieved face , and angled ) at selected locations .
STANDARDS :

The cratering charges will be placed in accordance with the depth

and spacing standards for the hasty , deliberate , relieved face , and
angled craters .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Breach hard surface pavements .

Ο A 1 -pound charge of explosive is used for each 2- inches of

pavement thickness .

Ο The charges must be tamped with material ( earth or filled

sandbags ) twice as thick as the pavement .

Ο
The pavement may also be breached by charges placed in bore-
holes drilled or blasted through it . ( A shaped charge readily
blasts a small diameter hole through the pavement into the
subgrade ) .

0
Concrete should not be breached at an expansion joint because
the concrete will shatter irregularly .

Specific References : FM 5-25 , Para 3-15e .

2. Construct boreholes for cratering charges .

Ο Boreholes may be dug using motorized post hole augers or hand

post hole augers or diggers .

Ο Boreholes may be made using the earth rod kit . It will bore
holes up to 6 feet deep and several inches in diameter in
soft earth or soft shale . It is not usable in frozen ground ,
in rock or other hard material . For instructions to use the
kit see TM 9-1375-200 .

Ο
Use standard shaped charges to blast boreholes in both paved
and unpaved surfaces for rapid cratering with explosives .

2-545
FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Use the 15 pound M2A4 shaped charge detonated at 3 1/2

foot standoff and the 40 pound M3A1 shaped charge deto-
nated at 5 foot standoff to blast boreholes of up to
9-foot open depths with 7- inch and larger diameters in
both reinforced concrete pavements and gravel surface
roads .

0 For maximum effectiveness use the 40 pound M3A1 shaped charge

to blast boreholes in thick reinforced concrete pavements
laid on dense high strength base courses .
Ο
For maximum effectiveness use the 15 pound M2A4 shaped charge
to blast boreholes in reinforced concrete pavement of less
than 6- inch thickness laid on thin base courses or to blast
boreholes in unpaved roads .
-

Most any kind of military explosives including the

40-pound cratering charges can be loaded directly into
boreholes made by the M3A1 and the M2A3 shaped charges .

15% IN

CHARCO DEMOLITION
SHAPED 40 POUNDS
1415 IN 3
16

DEMOLITION へ
?

STANDOFF PED IS-18

M2A3

7 IN

15 IN
M2A3

Typicalshaped charges.

9. IN

M3

2-546
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
t
-

Shape charges do not always produce open boreholes capable

of being loaded directly with 7- inch diameter cratering
charges without widening or removal of some earth . For
road cratering on asphalt or concrete surfaced roadways ,
blasting the boreholes with shaped charges will eliminate
the requirement for first breaching the pavement with ex-
plosives .

Specific References : FM 5-25 , Para 1-36 , 3-15 , Table 1-4 , and Fi-
gure 1-11 .

3. Springing charges

0 To enlarge a drilled borehole for placing a larger charge in

an
enlarged chamber detonate a comparatively small charge in
the bottom . At times two or more springing charges in suc-
cession may be required to make the chamber large enough for
the final charge .
-

After springing a borehole cool it with water , compressed

air , or wait at least two hours between firing and placing
successive charges .

0
To enlarge boreholes in soil use a detonating cord wick .

One strand of detonating cord generally widens the diame-

ter of the hole about one inch .

Firing may be done electrically or nonelectrically .

-

An unlimited number of charges may be fired at one time

using a detonating cord ring main .
-
Use the detonating cord wick in hard soils for best re-
sults .

When you must place successive charges in the enlarged

boreholes , blow out the excess gasses and inspect for ex-
cessive heat .

Specific References : FM 5-25 Para 3-27 .

4. Hasty road crater

0 Make all boreholes the same depth ( at least 5 feet )

0 Space the holes 5 - feet apart across the roadway

0 The crater will extend about 8 feet beyond the end holes .

0 Load boreholes with 10 pounds of explosives per foot of

depth .

2-547
FM 5-12B1 / 2

APP
8 FT ROX

20 FT
5FT F
T
5
F FT
5 T 5 -

5FT

APP
18 FT ROX

CH
AR
50 LB GE
S

Chargeplacement for hasty road crater.

Ο Prime all charges with detonating cord and connect them to

fire simultaneously .

Ο
Underground charges should always be primed with detonating
cord branch lines .

A dual firing system should be used .

When using standard 40 pound cratering charges :
-

Place a one pound charge on the side of the cratering

charge for dual priming .
-

Supplement each charge with 10-pounds of additional explo-

sive to total 50 pounds of explosive per borehole .

Specific References : FM 5-25 , Para 3-16 and figure 3-16 .

5. Deliberate road crater .

Make the boreholes 5 feet apart , center- to- center in a line

across the roadway .

The crater will extend about 8 feet beyond the end holes .
The end holes are 7 feet deep and the others are alternately
5 feet and 7 feet deep

2-548
 FM 5-12B1 /2
0 Two 5 -foot boreholes must not be made next to each other .

0 Two adjacent 7 - foot boreholes may be placed anywhere along

the line of boreholes .

0 Place 80 pounds of explosives in the 7- foot boreholes and 40

pounds of explosives in the 5- foot holes .
0 Prime all charges as for hasty cratering . Dual priming of the
7- foot holes when using two 40 pound standard cratering
charges can be done by independent priming of each 40 pound
cratering charge .

0 Stem all holes with suitable material .

8 FT
APPROX
5 FT

5 FT 25 FT

5 FT

5FT
5 FT
5 FT

7 FT
8 FT
7 FT
APPROX
40LB 7 FT 5 FT
80LB

80 LB 7 FT

40LB
CRATER 80 LB
APPROX
8 FT
DEEP
80 LB

Chargeplacement for deliberate road craters.

Specific References : FM 5-25 , Para 3-17 and figure 3-17 .

6. Relieved face road crater .

0 On dirt or gravel surfaced roads , make two rows of boreholes

8- feet apart spacing the boreholes on 7- foot centers
0 On hard surfaced roads , make the two rows of boreholes
12- feet apart .

0 Stagger the boreholes in the row on the enemy side in rela-

tionship to the holes in the friendly side as shown in figure
3-18 , FM 5-25 .

2-549
FM 5-12B1 /2
ENEMY ROW
-

+ + +

7' 7' 3½'

8'

7' 7' 7'

+ + + +
FRIENDLY ROW

Ο
The enemy row will always contain one less borehole than the
friendly row .

Make the bore holes in the friendly row 5 feet deep and load
with 40 pounds of explosives .

Make the boreholes in the enemy row 4 feet deep and load with
30 pounds of explosive .

8'

ENEMY SIDE
FRIENDLY SIDE

4'
5'

30LB
40LB

25° MINIMUM
40° MAXIMUM
SLOPE
SLOPE

Prime the charges in each row separately for simultaneous

detonation .

0 Detonate the row on the enemy side first .

0 Detonate the row on the friendly side while the earth is
still in the air from the explosion of the enemy row .

0 A delay of 1/2 to 1 1/2 seconds should be allow between the

detonation of the enemy row and the friendly row . Standard
delay blasting caps may be used .

0 Acceptable results can be obtained by firing both rows simul-

taneously if adequate means or sufficient time are not avail-
able .

0 The detonating cord firing system (ring main and branch

lines) of the friendly row must be covered with about 6

2-550
 FM 5-12B1 /2
inches of earth to prevent a misfire due to the shock and
blast when the enemy row of charges is detonated .
Specific references : FM 5-25 , para 3-18 and figure 3-18 .

7. Angled road crater method .

0 When constructing the hasty or deliberate road craters the

boreholes should be placed at about a 45 degree angle to the
road way as shown in figure 3-19 , FM 5-25 .

45°
ANGLE

1 5 FT

Angled cratering method.

Specific References : FM 5-25 , chapter 1 and 2 , para 3-19 .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , para 2-14

2-551
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2019

TASK:

Investigate and clear nonelectric misfires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with misfired demolition charges

primed nonelectrically , explosives , time fuze , detonating cord , non-
electric blasting caps , fuze lighters , a demolition set , and a pio-
neer tool set .

STANDARDS :

The cause of the misfire will be visually determined and corrected

so that detonation can be accomplished .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. The investigation and correction in the clearing of nonelectric

misfires , should be undertaken only by the man that placed the
charge . For a charge primed with a nonelectric blasting cap and
time blasting fuze , the procedure is as follows :

Caution: Delay the investigation of the misfire at least 30 minutes

after the expected time of detonation this should be ample time for
any delayed explosion caused by a defective powder train in the fuze
to take place . Under certain combat conditions , however , immediate
investigation may be necessary .

0 If the misfired charge is not tamped , lay a primed one-pound

charge at the side of the charge , without moving or disturb-
ing it , and fire the charge .
0 If the misfired charge has no more than a foot of tamping,
attempt to explode it by detonating a new 2 pound charge
placed on top of it .

0 If the misfired charge is located in a tamped borehole , or if

the tamped charge is so situated as to make the above method
impractical , the following procedures will be followed :
-

Carefully remove the tamping by means of wooden or non-me-

tallic tools . Avoid accidentally digging into the charge .
NOTE : Compressed air or water ( if available) may be used to blow
tamping from around charge .
-

Assure constant checking of the depth of the borehole from

the ground surface to the top of the charge during digging
to minimize the danger of striking the charge .

2-552
 FM 5-12B1 /2
-

When the charge has been uncovered within 1 foot , insert

and detonate a new 2 pound primer . Whenever possible ,
detonating cord should be used to prime underground
charges and the blasting cap located above ground .

0 An alternate method of reaching a deep misfire charge is to

drill a new hole within one foot of the old one and to the
same depth . A 2 pound primed charge is then placed in the
new hole to detonate the misfired charge .

NOTE : Extreme care is required in drilling the new hole to avoid

striking the old misfired charge or placing the new charge too far
away to induce detonation .

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , Chap 2 , section I , para 2-3 .

REFERENCE :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

2-553
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2020

TASK:

Investigate and clear electric misfires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with misfired demolition charges

primed electrically , explosives , electric blasting caps , firing
wire , a demolition set , and a pioneer tool set .
STANDARDS :

The cause pf the misfire will be visually determined and corrected

so that detonation can be accomplished .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Because of the hazards of burning charges and delayed explo-

sions , electric misfires must be cleared with extreme caution .
A burning charge may occur with the use of electric as well as
noneléctric caps . Misfires of charges primed with detonating
cord fired by electric blasting caps , are covered in task number
051-193-2021 .

0 The following precautions must be taken :

-

If the charge is dual primed electrically and below

ground , wait 30 minutes before investigating to make sure
that the charge is not burning . If the charge is dual
primed above ground , wait 30 minutes before investigating
because a burning charge can set off the second cap caus-
ing the main charge to detonate .

Ο When an electric misfire occurs and the charge is above the

ground and the charge is not dual primed , investigate immedi-
ately . If the system is below ground and not dual primed,
proceed as follows :

Check the firing wire connections to the blasting mechine

or power source terminals to be sure that the contacts are
good .

Make two or three more attempts to fire the circuits , if

no response , attempt to fire again , using another blasting
machine or power source .
-

If detonation does not occur , disconnect the blasting

machine firing wire and wait 30 minutes before further
investigation .

2-554
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Before moving on to the charge site , be sure that the fir-

ing wires at the power source end of the circuit
shunted to avoid any possible static electric detonation .
-

Check the entire circuit , including the firing wire , for

breaks and short circuits .

If the fault is not above ground , remove the tamping mate-

rial " very carefully" from the borehole to avoid striking
the electric blasting cap .

WARNING : MAKE NO ATTEMPT TO REMOVE EITHER THE PRIMER OR THE CHARGE .

If the fault is not located by the removal of the tamping

material to within 1 foot of the charge , place a new elec-
tric primer and 2 pounds of explosive at this point .
-

Disconnect the blasting cap wires of the original primer

from the circuit , and short the caps lead wires .
-

Connect the wires of the new primer in their place .

-

Replace the tamping material .

-

Initiate detonation . Detonation of the new primer will

fire the original charge .

NOTE : In some cases it may be more desirable or expedient to drill

a new hole within a foot of the old one at the same depth to avoid
accidental detonation of the old charge and then place and prime a

new 2 pound charge .

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , Chap 2 , Section II , para 2-8 .

REFERENCE :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolition

2-555
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-193-2021

TASK:

Investigate and clear detonating cord misfires .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with misfired demolition charges

primed with detonating cord , nonelectric and electric blasting caps ,
detonating cord , and a demolition set .

STANDARDS :

The cause of the misfire will be visually determined and corrected

so that detonation can be accomplished .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

When investigating detonating cord misfires the following procedures

will be used :

Ο If a nonelectric blasting cap attached to detonating cord

fails to function , delay the investigation for at least 30
minutes . Then cut the detonating cord main line between the
blasting cap and charge and fasten a new blasting cap on the
detonating cord and fire charge .

If an exposed electric blasting cap fastened to detonating cord

fails to fire , disconnect the blasting machine immediately and in-
vestigate .

Test the blasting circuit for any breaks or short cir-

cuits .

Short the firing wire leads before leaving the firing po-
sition to correct the problem , as described in task number
051-193-2020 and fire charge .

If detonating cord fails to function at the explosion of an

exposed electric or nonelectric blasting cap , investigate
immediately . Attach a new blasting cap to the detonating
cord , taking care to fasten it properly .

Ο If the detonating cord main line detonates but a branch line

fails , fasten a blasting cap to the branch line and fire it
separately .

Ο If the charge is above ground , and the detonating cord lead-

ing to a charge detonates, but the charge fails to explode ,
delay investigation until it is certain that the charge is
not burning .

2-556
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

0 If the charge is buried wait 30 minutes .

If the charge is scattered by the detonation of the original deto-

nating cord , reassemble as much of the original charge as possible ,
place a new charge if necessary , and reprime .

NOTE : Make every attempt possible to recover all explosives scat-

tered by misfires , particularly those used in training exercises .

Specific Reference : FM 5-25 , Chapter 2 , Section III para 2-12 .

REFERENCE :

FM 5-25 , Explosives and Demolitions

2-557
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-192-2026

TASK :

Direct a minefield marking party .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with pickets , barbed wire , mine-

field marking signs , lane signs , wire cutters , gloves or gauntlets ,
sledge hammers , squad personnel , and instructions to mark a mine-
field .

STANDARDS :

The minefield fences ( boundary and lane) and signs (marking and
lane) will be installed in accordance with FM 20-32 .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. The OIC will designate a starting of the rear strip starting

point for the marking party 20 meters to the right and indicates ,
by reference to the minefield sketch and specific terrain
features , the trace (location and direction) of the marking
fence and how any existing fences are to be utilized .
0
NCOIC of the marking party begins working his marking party
in a counterclockwise direction (when the field is laid from
right to left ) .
-

While laying out pickets insure no pickets are closer than

15 meters from the nearest mine .

Install all pickets first .

-

Marking party then encircles the entire field with one

strand of barbed wire to the pickets ( or lines the length
of the needed fence ) .

After the first strand is in place , the marking party in-

stalls the second strand of barbed wire .

Concertina may be used in place of the two - strand barbed

wire fencing .

Specific Reference ( s ) FM 20-32 , Appendix H, para H-5 , H- 9

2. Installation of minefield marking signs and lane signs .
0 Minefield marking signs are hung on the upper strand spaced
approximately 15 meters apart with the word " mines " facing
away from the minefield .

2-558
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Minefields containing chemical mines will , in addition ,

include chemical mine marking signs hung alternately with
the minefield marking signs .
-

If chemical mines have been exploded in the area the

chemical contamination marking sign ( red triangle with
yellow stripe ) will be hung along with the standard mark-
ing signs . This would only occur in laying if a premature
detonation or accidental firing of a mine had occured .

The distance between lane markers and marking signs may be

as short as needed if terrain and visibility conditions
make it necessary .

0 Minefield lanes in rear areas will be fenced on both sides

with the fences linking with minefield perimeter fencing ( or
marking ) at entrance and exists .
-

Lane entrances and exists , as well as passage itself ,

should be marked with signs to indicate the safe and dan-
gerous sides respectively .
-

During time of darkness or bad visibility , lane markers

should be illuminated .

Type of fencing and illumination of minefield lanes in the

forward battle area will be at the directions of the re-
sponsible commander .

In non-English speaking areas , signs in the native lan-

guage must also be posted . ( See fig 1 and 2) .
Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , Appendix H, Para H- 5 .
3. Fencing minefields in the forward area and minefield marking
equipment .

0
Forward area marking of minefields are sometimes fenced only
on the friendly ( rear ) side or on the friendly side and
flanks if necessary to protect friendly troops .
-

Forward area minefields laid out of contact with the enemy

may be completely inclosed .

The minefield marking set contains the necessary components

for marking a safe lane 400 meters through a minefield in-
cluding means of illumination for night marking .
‫ا‬

2-559
FM 5-12B1 /2

MARKING OF MINED TERRAIN

28 cm/11 inches

MINE WARNING SIGN

(WHITE LETTERS ON
RED BACKGROUND)

20 cm
MINES 20 cm
7.9 inches 7.9 inches

WARNING SIGN FOR AREAS CONTAINING MINES

(Spaced at approximately 15 meters)

WAIST HIGH |
15m

MINES MINES

ANKLE HIGH

(
Redwith
yellowStripe)

WIRE FENCING FOR MINEFIELD CONTAINING CHEMICAL MINES

MINES

CONCERTINA FENCING

Figure 1
Minefield Marking Fence

2-560
 m
30

2-561
Figure 2
15
m

(Lights

)
green
EXIT

(Lights-

white
)
LANE
(8
CM
)"20 ISSUED
STANDARD
USE
L:
(ights FLASHLIGHTS
OR
↑ 24
)
"
(
)
green LIGHTS
BETA

ENTRANCE CM
60
10-
FM 5-12B1 / 2
FM 5-12B1 / 2
-

Basis of issue is one per 750 men

-

For further details see supply Catalog N. 9905-97 - CL-E01 .

-

The following components make up the minefield marking

set :

Ο
Battery , dry -

192 ea

Box , wood , 104 lb. load 361/4 inches long , 161/4 inches wide
151/4 inches deep 2 ea -

Ο Filters -

80 ea

Ο Lamp , Incandescent -

160 ea

Nails -

430 ea

Roll , Minefield Marking Light -

4 ea

Ο
Signs , Textile ( Marking ) -

10 Rolls

0 Tape , textile (marking) – 10 rolls -

188 ea

Ο
Wire , steel -

2 rolls

Specific Reference : FM 20-32 , Appendix H, para H-5 , H- 6 , H- 9 .

REFERENCE :

FM 20-32 , Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level

2-562
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-196-2001
HOL
TASK:

Identify limiting slopes .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , with a reconnaissance team and instructions to identify

all limiting roadway slopes with a percent of slope of 5 percent or
greater and to determine the slope of each .
STANDARDS :

All limiting slopes will be identified and each slope will be deter-
mined to within + or two percent .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. General

0 The rise or fall of a ground form is known as slope . Slope

can be expressed as steep or gentle , but these terms are too
general for reconnaissance purposes . The speed at which ve-
hicles or personnel can move is seriously affected by the
slope of the ground , and all vehicles have limitations as to
the steepness of slope which can be negotiated .

0 Reconnaissance personnel compute and report the percent of

slope for critical gradients . Percent of slope is the ratio
of the change in elevation ( vertical distance ) to horizontal
ground distance multiplied by 100 ( fig . 1 ) . Percent of slope
is used to describe slopes which rise or fall . If not shown
by symbol , a rising slope in the direction of travel is pre-
ceded by ( + ) sign , and a falling slope , by a minus ( - ) sign .
Important to remember in computing percent of slope is that
the vertical distance and the horizontal distance must always
be expressed in the same unit of measure .

Ο It should be remembered that slopes of 7 percent or greater

are considered an obstruction to traffic flow .

2. An expedient method of estimating percent of slope is based on

the line of sight of a man and the measurement of ground dis-
tance by use of the pace . The eye level of the average man is
1.75 meters (5 ft , 7 in) above the ground . The pace of the
average man is 75 meter ( 30 in ) .

2-563
FM 5-12B1 /2
B

E
OP
SL
VERTICAL
90° DISTANCE
(V )
d
A
Horizontal Distance (H )

Percent of Slope =
Vertical Distance (V )
X 100
from A to B Horizontal Distance (H )

100m

90°

A
1000m

Example: From A to B Vd
Percent ofSlope =
X 100
Hd
100m
=
X 100
1000m

= +10%

Determining percent of slope.

Figure 1

Note : These measurements should be accurately determined for each

member of a reconnaissance team .
To determine percent of slope , the individual , who stands at the bottom
of the slope and keeps his head and eyes level , sights on a spot up the
slope . This spot should be easily identifiable or , if not , another
member of the team may be sent forward to mark the location . The in-
dividual making the sighting then walks forward to the marked spot
recording the number of paces .
-

This procedure is repeated until the top of the slope is reached

fractions of an eye level height must be estimated . Vertical
distance is then computed by multiplying the number of sightings
by the eye level height . Horizontal distance is computed by
totaling the number of paces and converting to meters by multiplying
by the factor , .75 . Percent of slope can then be calculated by sub-
stituting the values into the percent of slope formula ( fig . 2) .
Because this method considers horizontal ground distance and include
distance as equal , reasonable accuracy may be obtained only for
slopes less than 30 degrees . Moreover , this method requires consid-
erable practice to achieve acceptable accuracy .

2-564
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

ES 1.75m
125 PAC

1.75m
ES
75 PAC

Find: Percent of slope.

Given
: Eye level height =
1.75 m
Pace =
.75m

Answer: Vertical Distance =

2 x 1.75 m
=
3.50 m
Horizontal Distance = (75 paces + 125 paces) x .75
=
150 meters

Percent of Slope = Vertical Distance ( Vd) x100 .

Horizontal Distance ( Hd)
3.50
x100
150

= + 2.34%

Determining percent of slope using line of

sight and pace method.

Figure2

REFERENCE :

FM 5-36 , Route Reconnaissance and Classification , para 2-15 and 2-16

2-565
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-196-2002

TASK:

Identify limiting curves .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , with a reconnaissance team , measuring tape , and in-

structions to identify all limiting roadway curves with a radius of
curvature less than 45 meters and to determine the radius of each .

STANDARDS :

All limiting curves will be identified and each radius of curvature

will be determined to within + or one meter .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. The speed at which vehicles can move along a specified route is

also affected by sharp curves . For reconnaissance purposes ,
curves with a radius of curvature less than 45 meters are re-
ported . Curves with a radius of curvature less than 30 meters
are considered obstructions to traffic flow .

2. A method for determining the radius of a curve ( fig . 1 ) is based

on the formula-

R = c2 / 8m + m/ 2
=
C length of tape
=
m
perpendicular distance from the center of tape to the centerline
( C/ L ) of road

=
r radius of the circle

In the practical application of the formula , m is measured from the

centerline of the curve toward the estimated center of the circle
and c is measured perpendicularly to m, making sure that m is at the
mid-point of c . For example : If c is measured to be 15 meters and
m equals 2 meters , then :

R = c2 / 8m + m/ 2

substituting m =
2

R = c2 / 16 + 1

substituting c =
15

R =
(15 )2 + 1
16

2-566
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
R = 15 meters

५ m

90°

R R

In the practical application of the formula , m is measured from the

centerline of the curve toward the estimated center of the circle and
c is measured perpendicularly to m, making sure that m is at the
mid- point of c. For example: If c is measured to be 15 meters
and m equals 2 meters , then:

R = c2/8m + m/ 2

substituting m = 2

R = c2/16 + 1

substituting c = 15

R =
(15)2 + 1
16

R = 15 meters
Radius of curvature by using formula.
Figure 1

NOTE: When m is equal to 2 meters and R is equal to 30 meters ,

c equals 21.7 meters . Thus , when measuring c and re-
taining m fixed at 2 meters , any value greater than 21.7
meters will give a value of R greater than 30 meters , and
the curve need not be reported .

2-567
FM 5-12B1 /2
3. Another method for determining the radius of a curve is based
upon the following procedure and table

Ο Step 1 : Extend a 30m . ( 100 ft ) measuring tape across the

sharpest point of curvature , C , from centerline to center-
line .

Ο
Step 2 : From the midpoint of C measure the distance from C
to the centerline of the road . This distance is M.

0 Step 3 : Look on the chart below and find the value in the M
column that matches or is closest to the distance measured
for M on the particular curve you are determining the radius
of . Read to the right in the R column to obtain the value of
Ron the radius of the curve .

30m
(100ft.)

Report as an obstruction if: Not an obstruction but revortable if:

M-equals R M-equals R

15.00 meters (49'2" ) 15 meters 3.87 meters (12'8 " ) 31 meters

10.44 m (34'3") 16 m 3.74 m (12'4" ) 32
9.00 m (29'5") 17 m 3.61 m (11'10" ) 33
8.05 m (26'6") 18 m 3.49 m (11'5" ) 34 m
7.34 m (24'1" ) 19 m 3.38 m (11'1") 35
6.78 m (22'3") 20 m 3.28 m (10'9" ) 36
6.31 m (20'8" ) 21 m 3.18 m (10'5" ) 37 m
5.91 m (19'4" ) 22m 3.09 m (10'2") 38 m
5.57 m (18'3") 23 m 3.00 m ( 9'10" ) 39 m
5.27 m (17'3") 24 m 2.92 m ( 9'7" ) 40 m
5.00 m (16'5" ) 25 m 2.85 m ( 9'4") 41 m
4.77 m (15'8" ) 26 m 2.77 m ( 9'1") 42 m
4.55 m (14'11" ) 27 m 2.71 m ( 8'10") 43 m
4.36 m (14'3") 28 2.64 m ( 8'8" ) 44 m
4.18 m (13'9") 29 m 2.58 m ( 8'5") 45 m
4.02 m (13'2
") 30 m

REFERENCE :

FM 5-36 , Route Reconnaissance and Classification , para 2-15 and 2-18

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data
2-568
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-196-2003

TASK:

Determine stream width .

CONDITIONS :

rom Under any environmental conditions , with squad personnel , measuring

tape or rope , compass , and designated sites on a stream ( or river ) .
STANDARDS :
the

The stream width will be determined to within + or -

five feet .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Determine stream width directly .

0 One member of the squad holds an end of a tape or rope (rope

should be used to avoid getting the tape wet) on the near
shore.

Ο Another member of the squad crosses ( wades or uses a 3-man

reconnaissance boat) to the opposite bank and pulls the tape
or rope tight .

The length of tape or rope which corresponds to the stream

width is then measured .

Ο This method is particularly useful during darkness when

lights are prohibited . The width of the stream may be indi-
cated on the tape or rope and measured later in an area where
lights may be used .

2. Determine stream width using a compass .

AZ
AZIMUTH

IM
UT
H

H ( X - 45 °)
UT

X。
IM
AZ

45
(X
+
)°

90° 45°

C B C

Select a prominent object ( e.g. a tree) on the far bank -

Point A

0 Stand at Point B , opposite Point A , and read azimuth X° .

2-569
FM 5-12B1 / 2
Ο
Move up or down the stream on a line at a right angle to azi-
muth X° to a point ( Point C) SO that the azimuth between
Point A and C equals X° +45 ° or X° -45 ° .

Measure the distance from Point B to Point C. This distance

is equal to the distance from Point B to Point A.
0
Determine the stream width by adjusting the measured distance
BC based upon the distance Points A and B are from the
stream bank .

STREAM WIDTH

Specific References : FM 5-36 , Para 2-323 , FM 5-34 , Fig 14-9 , para

14-6 , pg 331 & 332 .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM 5-36 , Route Reconnaissance and Classification

2-570
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-196-2004

TASK:

Determine stream velocity .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with squad personnel , measuring

tape , watch , and designated sites on a stream ( or river) .
STANDARDS :

The stream velocity will be determined to within + or one foot per

second .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. General .

0 Current velocities vary in different parts of a stream . The

current is usually slower near the shore and swifter in the
main channel ; similarly , the current is slower as the stream
widens .

2. Determine stream velocity .

DIRECTION OF CURRENT

C A' B'

A B

Establish a measured distance along the stream bank -

Dis-
tance A to B.

Ο Throw a light object which floats into the stream at Point C.

0 Record the time in seconds the object requires to float from

Point A' to Point B ' . ( This distance equals distance A to
B. )

Repeat the timing procedure several times .

0 Determine the average float time .

2-571
FM 5-12B1 / 2
0
Use the following formula to determine the stream velocity :
-

Measured distance in feet ( AB )

=
Average Float time in seconds Stream velocity in feet
per second

Specific References : para 2-33 , FM 5-36 ; para 14-6 , FM 5-34 .

REFERENCES :

FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data

FM 5-36 , Route Reconnaissance and Classification

2-572
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-198-2007

TASK:

Classify vehicles , using expedient methods

CONDITIONS :

In daylight or darkness , at a river crossing site which has been

designated as an Engineer Regulating Point , with mission directive
and ERP team . (Mission requirements may dictate that this task be
performed at other than an ERP . )

STANDARDS :

Vehicles will be classified to within + 2 of the actual vehicle

weight class as determined by the appropriate expedient method .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Wheeled Vehicles . Expedient classification for wheeled vehicles

may be accomplished by the following method :
-

Assign a temporary class number equal to 85 percent of the

gross weight of the vehicle in tons as follows :

TEMPORARY CLASS ( wheeled vehicles ) = 0.85 Wt where Wt gross weight

of vehicle in tons .

The gross weight of the vehicle may be estimated from the tire pres-
sure and tire contact area if no other means are available .
Wt = (At)(Pt)(N t)
2000

=
Wt Gross weight of vehicle in tons
=
At Average tire contact area in square inches ( tire in contact with
hard surface )
Pt = Tire pressure in PSI
=
Nt Number of tires
NOTE : The tire pressure may be assumed to be 75 psi for 2 1/ 2- ton
vehicles or larger if no tire gage is available . For vehicles hav-
ing unusual load characteristics or odd axle spacing , a more delib-
erate vehicle classification procedure , as outlined in STANAG 2021 ,
is required .

2. Tracked Vehicles . Expedient classification for tracked vehicles

may be accomplished by the following method .

Assign a temporary class number equal to the gross weight

of the tracked vehicle in tons .

TEMPORARY CLASS ( tracked vehicles ) =

Wt
Where , Wt =

gross weight in tons

2-573
FM 5-12B1 /2

Tracked vehicles can be assumed to be designed for approximately

2,000 pounds (one ton) per square foot of their bearing area (most
heavy vehicles are slightly less than this ) . Thus , the gross weight
of the tracked vehicle ( Wt ) can be estimated by mesuring the total
ground contact area of the tracks ( square feet ) and equating this to
the gross weight in tons .

EXAMPLE : An unclassified tracked vehicle has a ground contact area

of 5,500 square inches . Therefore , the area is about 38.2 square
feet , and the class of the vehicle is 38.2 or 39 , since ground con-
tact area in square feet equals approximate weight of a tracked ve-
hicle in tons , which in turn is approxiamtely equal to class number .
3. Nonstandard Combinations . The class number of nonstandard com-
binations of vehicles may be obtained expeditiously as follows :
-
Combination class = 0.9 ( A + B) if A + B is less than or
equal to 60
-

Combination class = A + B if A + B is 60 greater than

-

A Class of first vehicle

=

-
=
B Class of second vehicle
4. Adjustment for Other Than Rated Load . An expedient class may be
given to overloaded or underloaded vehicles by adding to or sub-
tracting the difference in loading , in tons , from the normally
assigned vehicle class . The expedient classification number is
marked with a standard vehicle class sign to indicate temporary
classification as shown .

SINGLE VEHICLE

EXPEDIENT CLASS OVERLOAD

5 ΤΟΝ 8 ΤΟΝ

16 (
1)
9

NORMAL CLASS + OVERLOAD = TEMPORARY CLASS

16 + 3 = 19

REFERENCES :

FM 31-60 , River Crossing Operations , Section II , Chapter 4

FM 5-36 , Route Reconnaissance and Classification , para 2-53 and 3-16
thru 3-20
FM 5-34 , Engineer Field Data , para 5-3 , and pp 128 thru 130

2-574
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Π
TASK NUMBER : 051-199-2001

TASK:

Identify parts of wooden forms for concrete construction .

CONDITION :

In a field environment given a task to assist the squad leader in

constructing wood forms , squad carpenter set , pioneer electric tool
set , required lumber , doubled - headed form nails , nuts and bolts ,
wire , form design and necessary personnel .
STANDARDS :

Identify parts of wooden forms and explain their purpose .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Shoe plate . The shoe plate is nailed into the foundation or

footing and is placed to hold the studs at equal spacing and as
a straightedge to the form .

2. Studs . Studs are normally made from 2x4 or 3x6 material . They
form the solid backing of the sheathing and hold it in aline-
ment .

3. Wales . Hold the panel of the form in a straight line and pro-
vide rigidity and bracing . They are usually made from the same
size materials as the studs . The ends are bolted together and
the joints are spliced with 3 - foot sections of material . This
will form a continuous support horizontally along the forms .

WIRE THRU
SPREADERS
STUD

WALE

TIE WIRE
SHEATHING
STRONGBACK

SPREADER-

SHOE-

BRACE- STAKE-

Form for a concrete wall.

2-575
FM 5-12B1 / 2
4. Spreaders . Hold forms at the proper distance apart until the
concrete is poured . The spreaders are not nailed but are held
in place by the pressure from the tie wires . The spreaders
should be placed near the tie wires . A wire should be attached
to each spreader so they can be pulled out before the concrete
hardens . A convenient way to remove spreader is shown below.

WIRE FOR PULLING

UP SPREADERS

SPREADER

HOLE FOR WIRE

OFF CENTER

FORM

Removing wood spreaders.

5. Tie wires . A double strand of wire is always used . The wires

hold the panels against the spreaders , thus keeping the forms
from spreading apart under pressure of wet concrete . The hole
for the wire should be no more than 1/2 inch in diameter to pre-
vent seepage of the concrete . The individual ties should be the
same spacing of the studs , but never more than 3 feet apart.
Two methods of placing wire ties are shown below .

2-576
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
SPREADER
- PULL WIRE

STUD

WIRE
TWISTED

NAIL

WALER
WEDGE

WOOD SPREADER
SHEATHING
A

SPREADER
PULL WIRE

STUD

SHEATHING
WALER

WOOD SPREADER

Wire ties for wall forms.

2-577
FM 5-12B1 / 2

6. Braces . Braces hold the form in an upright position and prevent Sh

it from moving under pressure . Bracing is not part of the form
ti
design and is not considered as providing additional strength .
The brace should be nailed low on the supporting stake . When
two braces are necessary on the same stud to keep the form se-
cure , both braces should be nailed to the same stake in order to
permt- easy access to the form . If walers are used on the forms ,
the braces may be spaced about 8 feet apart . If not , the braces
should be about 4 feet apart or on every other stud .

7. Stakes . The stakes are driven well into the ground to prevent
movement when pressure is applied . When one stake will not
hold , two may be driven and tied together with a board .

8. Another method of using braces and stakes for easy adjustment is

shown below . The stake is driven into the ground at a slight
angle with the board surface facing the form . The end of the
brace is cut to equal the approximate angle of the stake . By
placing a wedge between the brace and the stake , an "up-and-
down " pressure on the wedge may be used to adjust the form dur-
ing erection . The wedge is secured after the form is adjusted .

W
E
D
G
E

BR
AC
E

Bracing

9. Sheathing (wall forms ) . Sheathing forms the surfaces of the

concrete . It should be as smooth as possible , especially if the
finished concrete surfaces are to be exposed . The sheathing
should be watertight therefore lumber such as tongue and groove ,
plywood or hardboard should be used .

2-578
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
10. Sheathing ( column forms ) . In column forms , sheathing runs ver-

tically to save on the number of saw cuts required . The corner

joints should be nailed firmly to insure water- tightness .

ANCHOR BOLT
TEMPLATE

YOKE SHEATHING TYPE

YOKE LOCK

SCAB TYPE
YOKE LOCK
BATTEN

SHEATHING

BOLT TYPE
YOKE LOCK

FOOTING
FORM

STAKES
1

Form for a concrete column.

11. Batten . Batten are narrow strips of boards ( cleats) that are
placed directly over the joints to fasten the several pieces of
vertical sheathing together .

12. Yokes . The column is small enough ( horizontally) so that brac-

ing is not needed vertically . A rectangular horizontal brace
known as a yoke is used . The yoke wraps around the column and
keeps the concrete from pushing out the form . The yoke can be
locked by sheathing , scab or bolt type lock yoke .
REFERENCE :

TM 5-742 , Concrete and Masonry , Chap 4

2-579
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-199-2002

TASK:

Assemble corrugated metal pipe ( CMP ) for culverts .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with corrugated metal pipe , ball

peen hammer , pinch bar , box end wrenches , tools for notch type pipe ,
nuts and bolts , lumber to construct expedient lever , necessary per-
sonnel , and instructions to assemble CMP for a culvert .

STANDARDS :

Assemble a length of corrugated culvert SO that after completion

each section is lapped one half a corrugation inside the previous
section and both ends have a bottom half overhang of 25 1/2 inches ,
less one- half a corrugation .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

NOTE : There are two types of nestable culverts : notched , having a

notched edge and a plain edge ( figure 5 ) ; and flanged , having
flanges with slotted holes ( figure 7 ) . The two types ARE NOT inter-
changeable . A section of nestable pipe has a semicircular shape and
is 25 1/2 inches long . It has an effective length after overlap of
24 inches for interior sections , and varies in diameter from 8 to 24
inches .

1. Determine tools and fittings required .

A box of fittings and tools , some of which are shown in figure 1,

accompanies the notched type pipe and contains the following : Com-
bination draw and pinch bar , curved-back stitches and stitch- bending
bar for 15- inch and smaller culverts , straight - back stitches and
stitch bending bar for 18- inch to 30- inch culverts , and hook- and- eye
bolts and bolt wrench for 36- inch and larger culverts . The only
fittings necessary to fasten the flange type sections together are
the nuts and bolts accompanying the sections .

2-580
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
DRAWBAR

TYPICAL SECTION OF
INTERCHANGABLE TOP AND BOTтом

STITCH ASSEMBLY HOOK - EY ASSEMBLY

TYPE 1 STITCH
HOOK EYE BOLT
FOR 8 " to 15 " DIA INCL TYPE 2 STITCH
FOR USE WITH 36" DIA
FOR 18 " TO 30 " DIA INCL
CULVERTS OR OVER

Some of the tools and fittings used in assembling the

notched-type mendable pipe.
Figure 1

2. Inspect sections .

0 Check semicircular diameters of all sections for correct

size . Reduce oversize diameters by pressing one edge on
ground , or by using a prop or support to apply leverage pres-
sure ( figure 2 ) . Spread undersize diameters by dropping sec-
tions squarely on their backs ( figure 3 ) . Inspect notches ,
or flanges , on all sections for breaks or bends . Use a pinch
bar to open any closed notches so that the plain edge of the
other section will easily slip into place . Straighten any
bent flanges .

2-581
FM 5-12B1 / 2

EXPEDIENT LEVER PRESSURE

HAND PRESSURE

Two methods of reducing semicircular diameter.

Figure2

DROPPING CULVERT TO SPRING

Increasing semicircular diameter.

Figure3

2-582
 FM 5-12B1 /2

3. Assemble pipes
0 Distribute one bottom and one top section for each two feet
of culvert length along the line where the culvert is to be
assembled . Begin assembly at the outlet end of the culvert
and lap each successive bottom section one-half a corrugation
inside the previous bottom section ( figure 4) . Similarly ,
each successive top section is lapped one- half a corrugation
inside the previous section .

DIREC
TION OF FLOW

Beginning ofassembly. Upstream section is lapped one-half corrugation

inside downstream section for notchedand flanged pipe.

Figure5
In assembly the notched type pipe , the notched edge of the
bottom section can be either to the right or to the left
but , once started , all notched edges of bottom sections
must be on the same side . When two bottom sections are in
place , center the first top section over the joint of the
two bottom sections so that two of the assembly holes in
the top will match two of the assembly holes in the bottom
sections ( figure 5 ) . Use the combination draw and pinch
bar to seat the horizontal joint as shown in figure 1 .
The horizontal joints are secured with either stitches or
hook- and-eye bolts , ( figure 1 ) . Figure 6 shows an assem-
bled section of notched type culvert .
-

In assembling the flange- type pipe ( figure 7 ) , note that

the flange on one side of each section is punched with
holes in the valley , while the flange on the other side
has the holes in the crests . When laying out the bottom
sections , the sections must be placed so the flanges with
holes in the crests are all on the same side of the cul-
vert .

2-583
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure6
Notched type culvert.

Figure7
Completed notched type culvert.

FLANGE TYPE CULVERT

Figure8
Matched assembly holes of bottom and top sections.

REFERENCE :

None available

2-584
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

CHAPTER 3

TASKS FOR ADDITIONAL DUTY POSITIONS

o General Task Summaries

In addition to the normal duties of On the following pages are task sum-
a Combat Engineer , you may be as- maries for the additional duty posi-
signed an additional duty , such as a tions to which a Combat Engineer
radio-telephone operator . These could be assigned . These summaries
additional duties are assigned with- are for any skill level so the sev-
out regard to rank . The performance enth digit is the numeral " 9. "
of the tasks of the additional duty These summaries are for the follow-
is just as necessary to accomplish- ing tasks :
ment of the unit's mission as is
performance of your main tasks .
Therefore , only the best , most
qualified soldiers are selected to
perform them .

ADDITIONAL DUTY POSITION TASKS

051-191 RADIO - TELEPHONE OPERATOR

9522 Maintain tactical FM radios ( AN/ VRC-46 and AN/ VRC-47 ) 3-3
9523 Prepare/ operate tactical FM radios ( AN/ VRC -46 and AN/ 3-4
VRC-47 )
9512 Use a communications - electronics operation instruc- 3-9
tions ( CEOI ) extract to determine call signs , frequen-
cies , and item number identifiers
9513 Authenticate transmissions and encrypt / decrypt numbers 3-18
and grid zone letters , using KAL 61 with KTC 1400 nu-
merical code
9514 Encode and decode messages , using a tactical opera- 3-26
tions code , KTC 600
9516 Establish and enter or leave a radio net 3-31

M60 MACHINEGUN CREWMAN

9197 Zero an M60 machinegun 3-34
9193 Engage targets with an M60 machinegun 3-36
9194 Use aiming and firing stakes for the M60 machinegun 3-40
9195 Construct M60 machinegun position 3-44
9198 Prepare a range card for an M60 machinegun 3-48

3-1
FM 5-12B1 / 2

CALIBER 50 MACHINEGUN CREWMAN

9204 Maintain a caliber .50 machinegun and ammunition 3-56
9206 Load , reduce stoppage , unload , and clear a caliber .503-59
machinegun
9205 Target/ confirm targeting on a caliber .50 machinegun 3-62
9207 Engage targets with a caliber .50 machinegun 3-63
9208 Set headspace and timing on a caliber .50 machinegun 3-65

90MM RCLR CREWMAN

9296 Maintain 90mm RCLR 3-70
9298 Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear 90mm RCLR 3-73
9297 Boresight the 90mm RCLR 3-76
9299 Prepare range card for 90mm RCLR 3-78
9300 Engage targets with 90mm RCLR 3-80
9275 Prepare MAW position 3-83
9276 Camouflage/ conceal MAW position 3-88

WHEELED VEHICLE OPERATOR

9621 Perform operator maintenance on a wheeled vehicle 3-91
9622 Maintain required TAMMS records on a wheeled vehicle 3-93
9623 Perform an ESC (Equipment Serviceability Criteria) 3-94
inspection on a wheeled vehicle

TRACKED VEHICLE OPERATOR

9624 Perform operator maintenance on an APC 3-95
9625 Maintain required TAMMS records on a tracked vehicle 3-97
9626 Perform an ESC (Equipment Serviceability Criteria) 3-99
inspection on an APC
9627 3-100
Operate an APC in water

3-2
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9522

TASK:

Maintain tactical FM Radios (AN/VRC-46 and AN/VRC-47 ) .

CONDITIONS :

Given the radio set and the appropriate TM .

STANDARDS :

The operator will :

1. Perform before- , during- , and after- operation maintenance on the

radios IAW instructions in the -12 TM .

2. Identify maintenance deficiencies/ shortcomings and correct those

within the operator's capability .
3. Cross - reference uncorrectable faults against the DA Form
2408-14 .

4. Prepare a DA Form 2404 to notify organizational maintenance of

previously unreported correctable faults or repairs which re-
quire a part .

5. Perform trouble shooting procedures on the equipment IAW the- 12 ,

TM .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Operator maintenance follows procedures outlined in the preven-

tive maintenance services section of -10 TM .

2. To correct deficiencies / shortcomings , refer to -10 TM .

3. Previously reported faults beyond the operator's capability to

repair or those requiring parts are recorded on the Uncorrected
Fault Record ( DA Form 2408-14) in the logbook . This form is com-
pleted by organizational maintenance IAW procedures outlined in
paragraph 4-13 or TM 38-750 . Do not fill out the -14 ; record as
outlined below .

4. Faults which the operator cannot correct or which require a part

are recorded on DA Form 2408 IAW procedures outlined in para-
graph 3-4 of TM 38-750 .

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )

TM 11-5820-401-12 , Radio Sets AN/VRC-46 and AN/VRC- 47
TEC Lesson:
936-061-0117 -F , RT 524A and R442

3-3
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9523

TASK:

Prepare/operate tactical FM radios ( AN/VRC- 46 and AN/VRC- 47 ) .

CONDITIONS :

Given and operational radio set , an authorized frequency , callsign ,

and a distant station within range .

STANDARDS :

Assemble the radio set and establish communications with the other
radio set .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Radio set AN/VRC-47 ( figure 1 ) .

Figure 1. AN/VRC-47

a. Inspect radio set to insure that all components are present :

(1 ) Receiver - transmitter ( figure 6 ) .

(2) Transmitter 442 ( figure 7 ) .

(3) Antenna AT-912 VRC ( figure 2 ) .

(4) Mountings MT- 1029 /VRC and MT- 1898 /VRC ( figure 3 ) .
(5 ) Cables ( figure 4 ) .

(6) Antenna AS- 1729/VRC ( figure 5 ) .

3-4
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
BASE ANTΕΝΝΑ,
SUPPORT
AB -719/VRC ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ MATCHING.
ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ ΤΙE- DOWN
UNIT MX-2799/VRC
ASSEMBLY
ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ
SPRING CLAMP LEAD
RECEPTACLE RECEPTACLES
SECTION MOUNTING
CONTROL CABLE
ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ CABLE
ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ
LEAD
CONNECTOR

MOUNTING ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ TIP CAP

641/2 ΙΝ. HARDWARE

ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ. ANTENNA
ELEMENT ELEMENT
AT-1095/VRC AT- 1096/VRC
5

C. ANTENNA AT-912/vrc.

Figure 2. Antenna AT-912/VRC, disassembled.

A. MOUNTING MT- 1029/VRC B. MOUNTING MT-1898/VRC

( FOR RECEIVER -TRANSMITTERS). (FOR R-442( *)/VRC

Figure 3. Mountings MT-1029/VRC and MT1898/VRC.

3-5
FM 5-12B1 /2

MS-118A

MS-117A

MS-116A

AB-15/
GR
UG-273/U
(UG -306/U,OPTIONAL) RT-524( * )/VRC:
AS-1729/VRC
R -442( *)/VRC

CG-1773/U
ANT ANT J22
"

CG -1773/U AUDIO J21 J23

J14101 CX-4722/VRC
J11 J12 J13

MT-1898/VRC
UG-273/U
MT-1029 /VRC

CX-4721 /VRC

RED-WHT
CX-4720/VRC CABLING TO
BATTERY
124 VDC) VEHICLE ENGINE
BLU-GRN

M-80/U NOTE: COMPONENTS IN DASHED LINES ARE TYPICAL

OF THOSE USED WITH THE RADIO SET.

Figure 4. Typical cabling diagram for AN/VRC-47.

ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ ELEMENT
AS -1730/VRC
MATCHING UNIT- BASE
ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ MX- 6706/VRC (52 3/8 IN . LONG)
(14 3/8 IN . HIGH )
TIE-DOWN
ASSEMBLY

ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ ELEMENT
AT-1095/VRC ΑΝΤΕΝΝΑ
TIP CAP
(64 1/2 IN . LONG)

Figure5. Antenna AS-1729/VRC, disassembled.

b. Installing , assembling , disassembling , and handling radio

equipment : Refer to chap 2 TM 11-5820-401-12 .
c.
Operation of Receiver- Transmitter 524 ( figure 6 ) .

(1 ) Set power switch to LOW power position .

(2) Set band switch to position A.

(3) Turn MHz and kHz control to desired frequency .

(4) Transmit and receive from a distant station with the

switch in the OFF position .

3-6
 FM 5-12B1 /2
(5) Turn band switch to band B.

(6) Turn MHz and kHz control to desired frequency .

(7) Transmit and receive a message from a distant station .

(8 ) Turn power switch to OFF .

SQUELCH CALL LIGHT ( ORANGE)

DIAL WINDOW
FREQUENCY WRITE- PLATE

HIR

DIAL LAMP
HOLDER BNC RECEPTACLE

BAND
SHUTTER
1
LOUDSPEAKER
MC NUMBERS

KC NUMBERS

COVER CONTAINS WIRING

LATCH
AUDIO ACCESSORY RECEPTACLES

Figure6. RT 524 .

d. R-442 ( figure 7. )

(1 ) Turn power switch to ON position .

(2) Turn band switch to A.

(3) Turn MHz and kHz control to desired frequency .

(4) Receive message from distant station with squelch off .

(5) Receive message from distant station with squelch on .

(6) Turn band switch to B.

(7) Turn MHz and kHz controls to desired frequency .

(8) Receive message from distant station .

(9 ) Turn power switch to OFF .

3-7
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
SQUELCH
CALL
LIGHT
(ORANGE)
BNC
RECEPTACLE BNC
(PARALLEL RECEPTACLE
CONNECTED) (PARALLEL
CONNECTED)
DIAL
LAMP HOLDER

DIAL
53
WINDOW

MC NUMBERS

LATCH

KC NUMBERS AUDIO
ACCESSORY
FREQUENCY' .
RECEPTACLES
WRITE-IN
PLATE

Figure 7. R-442 .

2. Radio set AN/VRC-46 . Same as AN/VRC-47 except delete operation

of R-442 ( figure 8 ) .

Figure 8. AN/VRC-46

REFERENCES :

FM 24-18 , Field Radio Techniques

TM 11-5820-401-12 , Radio Set AN/VRC-46 and AN/VRC- 47
TEC Lessons : 4

936-061-0115 -F , RT 524 and R-442

936-061-0116 -F , RT 524 and R-442

3-8
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9512

TASK:

Use a communications - electronics operating instructions ( CEOI ) ex-

tract to determine call signs , frequencies , and item number identi-
fiers .

CONDITIONS :

Given an extract of the division Communications - Electronics Operat-

ing Instructions ( CEOI ) and an operational FM radio and directions
to determine for a specified day any or all of the following :

1. The frequency ( s ) of specified unit nets .

2. The call sign ( s ) of station( s ) within a given net .

3. Your own item number identifier .

4. Another station identity given his item number identifier .

STANDARDS :

1. Within 1 minute ( for each net ) determine the frequency assigned

by the CEOI to that unit for the day specified and state ( or
show) it to your supervisor .

2. Within two minutes ( for each station) determine the complete

individual ( to include suffix) call sign assigned by the CEOI to
that station for the day specified and state (or show) it to
your supervisor .

3. Within two minutes determine your own item number identifier as

given in the CEOI for the day specified .

4. Within two minutes determine the other station's unit identity .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. General :

a. A Communications -Electronics Operating Instruction ( CEOI )

contains specific instructions for the operation of commu-
nications systems under the jurisdiction of a division head-
quarters , and is the only authorized document from which
subordinate elements will extract information to compile
organization/unit CEOI's for use during tactical training
and contingency operations .

b. Call signs and frequencies will be changed simultaneously

throughout the division . Specific call sign and frequency

3-9
FM 5-12B1 / 2
assignments will not be transmitted in the clear over unse-
cure communications . If such transmission is required the
callsign and frequency assignments must be properly encoded
using the current unit operations code or numeral cipher/ au-
thentication system . All information is listed according to
the day of the month . When determining call signs and freq-
uencies , be sure you look under the right date .

2. To determine call signs : To find the call sign for a given ele-
ment , turn to the index ( figure 1 ) of the CEOI . Follow the left
hand column of items until you find the unit you are looking for
( ie . , 1 / 67th INF , A Co , 1st Plt) after finding the unit , look in
the right column under item number heading to find the correct
page , turn to that page ( figure 3a) . Determine correct time pe-
riod ( 01 ) and look under the column for that time period . After
finding the call sign for that unit ( call signs for 1st plt A Co
1/67 INF is Z5J ) , go back to the index and find the item number
for suffixes ( figure la) . Turning to that item number ( figure
2a) , find plt ldr- located to the left of plt ldr is the two
digit suffix for platoon leader . You now have the five character
call sign for the 1st platoon leader , A Co 1 / 67th INF ( Z5J26 ) .

3. To determine frequencies : Frequencies are assigned to each radio

net according to command echelon . To find the frequency for a
given net , turn to the index ( figure 1 ) and find the organization
you wish to communicate within ( for example : "A " company in the
1/67 INF) . Turn to that item number ( figure 4a) . Look under
the left-hand column until you find the unit you want to commu-
nicate with ( A Co , 1st Plt) after finding the unit look to the
right under the correct time period ( Day 01 ) . The frequency is
47.20 for 1st Plt , A Co , 1/67 INF .

4. Item Number Identifiers . Unknown station call signs can be iden-

tifed by use of item number identifiers . Each station should know
the two- letter identifier for its own net for each time period .
To find your item number identifier follow these steps :

Step 1-Go to the index of your CEOI and find item number identifier
and the page it is located on in the CEOI .

Step 2-Turn to the correct page for identifiers in your CEOI and
read down the appropriate time period column until you find your
CEOI item number . Then follow that line to the far left column of
two- letter identifiers . This is your identifier for that time pe-
riod , and will be used when entering a net outside your own net( s)
in which you do not normally communicate . When so entering a net you
will be asked to identify your station by referring to the item num-
ber identifier , send the two- letter identifier . This provides the
other net with your CEOI item number , and by referring to that item
he can readily identify your station .

3-10
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
Example 1 :
When entering a net in which you do not normally operate , use the
herle following procedure :
ing
Situation : You are the radio operator for the Commander , B Co , 1/69
INF with a requirement to enter the 1-2 ARMD BN CMD net and send a
message to the Commander , Co B , a net in which your Commander does
not normally communicate . ( Time period is 01 , first day of the
month ) . The 1-2 ARMD INF call sign is H4X and your Commander is 9T7 .
ook (Figure 4b and 4d . )

Step 1. Go to the index of your CEOI and find the item number iden-
tifier page , turn to that page and determine your two- letter identi-
fication , (AS . ) Figure 5 .
1日
Step 2 : Call the NCS station ( figure 2 ) : HOTEL FOUR X-RAY TWO EIGHT .
THIS IS YANKEE NINE TANGO DELTA . Refer to ALPHA SIERRA , I HAVE TRAF-
FIC FOR TANGO ZERO ECHO SEVEN , REQUEST PERMISSION TO ENTER NET ,
OVER .

NOTE : Before transmitting , monitor the frequency to insure you do

not cut in on someone else's transmission .

Step 3 : The NCS station will require you to authenticate prior to giv-
ing you permission to enter the net . See task on authentication for
correct procedure . After permission is granted to enter the net ,
send your message .

Example 2 :

You have just received a call from an unknown station . The individ-
ual identified himself by utilizing his call sign of V2F26 and
stated that his item number identifier is AT . It is the second day
of the month ( 02 ) and the individual authenticated correctly when
you challenged him . To find out who the individual is that called
and his unit , follow this procedure .

Step 1 : Go to your index and locate page for item number indentifier
(figure 5 ) . Turn to correct page , then look down left column until
you come to the two digit letter ( AT) . Next go across the page and
find the correct time period ( 02 ) this will then give you the CEOΙ
item number of the unknown unit ( 4E ) .

Step 2 : Turn to the CEOI item number page ( 4E ) . Look under the cor-
1
rect day ( 02 ) for the 1st 3 characters of the unknown call sign
(V2F ) . You find this then to be the recon platoon 1/69 INF (MECH)
BN .

Step 3 : Now to determine the last two characters ( 26 ) is is only

necessary to go the CEOI item for suffixes . Look down the left col-
umn until you find that number ( figure2a) . You can now determine the

3-11
FM 5-12B1 /2

identity of the unknown station ( Platoon leader of the recon platoon

1st Bn , 69th INF ( MECH) BN ) .

NOTE : The CEOI Extract and the Training Section under the Task : Au-
thenticate transmissions and encrypt/ decrypt grid coordinates using
the KAL 61 , may be cut out and used as a training CEOΙ .

3-12
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

Figure 1 .
1A 1B

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A INDEX 1

ITEM ITEM NR

ITEM ITEM NR
1st Ranger Co ( Instructor ) Callsigns
and Frequencies 7
Index 1st Ranger Co Ops Section ( A) Callsigns
Suffixes 2 7A
and Frequencies
21st InfDiv Callsigns and 1st Ranger Co Patrols (A) Callsigns and
3 7B
Frequencies Frequencies
1stBde Callsigns an ! 2d Ranger Co (Instructor ) Callsigns and
4 8
Frequencies Frequencies
1st Bn 66th Inf Callsigns and 2d Ranger Co Ops Section (A) Callsigns
4A and Frequencies. 8A
Frequencies
1st Bn 66th Inf Co's Callsigns 2d Ranger Co Patrols (A) Callsigns and
4B Frequencies 8B
and Frequencies .
1st Bn 67th Inf Callsigns and 3d Ranger Co ( Instructor ) Callsigns and
+C Frequencies 9
Frequencies
1st Bn 67th Inf Co's Callsigns 3d Ranger Co Ops Section ( A) Callsigns
and Frequencies . 4D and Frequencies . 9A
1st Bn 69th Inf (Mech ) Callsigns 3d Ranger Co Patrols (A) Callsigns and
4F Frequencies 9B
and Frequencies .
2d Bn 69th Inf (Mech) Co's Call- 4+ 3d Ranger Co Ops Section (B) Callsigns
9C
signs and Frequencies . and Frequencies .
1/2 Armd Bn Callsigns and 3d Ranger Co Patrols ( B) Callsigns and
4G Frequencies 9D
Frequencies
1/2 Armd Bn Co's Callsigns and 3d Ranger Co Ops Section (C) Callsigns
4H 9E
Frequencies and Frequencies .
7/50 FA Bn Callsigns and 3d Ranger Co Patrols (C) Callsigns and
5 9F
Frequencies Frequencies
21st Avn Bn Callsigns and Div Spares (FtBenning) Callsigns and
6 10
Frequencies Frequencies
Pathfinder Callsigns and Div Spares ( Eglin AFB) Callsigns and
Frequencies 6A Frequencies 10A
INDEX 1of 3
2 of 3

ITEM ITEM NR

Div Spares
Spares (Dahlonega) Callsigns and
Frequencies . 10B
Item Nr Identification 11
Instruction . 12
13
Sound Signals 14
Panel Code.
Pyrotechnic and Smoke Signals . 15
Telephone Nrs . 16

Switchboard Designators. 17
18
Wire Tagging System .
Passwords 19
20
Ops Code
1C Numeral Cipher/Authentication 21
System .

INDEX 3 of 3

3-13
FM 5-12B1 / 2

2A Figure 2. 2C

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A SUFFIXES 2 KTV 601 A SUFFIXES 2

1. G-1/S-1 61. HELO #1

2. G-2
/S-2 62. HELO #2
3. G-3/S-3 63. HELO #3
4. G-4/S-4 64. HELO #4
5. G-5/S-5 65. HELO #5
6. CHIEF OF STAFF/ EXECUTIVE OFFICER 66. HELO #6
7. COMMANDER ( CDR) 67. HELO #7
8. CSM/
SGM 68. HELO #8
9. MAINTENANCE OFFICER 69. HELO #9

10. IG 70. HELO # 10

11. C- E OFF 71. HELO # 11
12. DEPUTY COMMANDER 72. HELO # 12
13. 73. FLT OPS ‫י‬
LNO ( LIAISON OFF )
14. G - 3 / S- 3 OPS 74.
75. SPT LDR
15. BDE SUPPLY OFF
16. ENGR OFF 76. AMBULANCE PLT LDR
17. SURG/MED OFF 77 . CLEARANCE PLT LDR
18. 1SG 78.
19. E-W OFF 79.
20. CHAPLAIN 80.
21. COMSEC CUSTODIAN 81. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 1
22. G-2/S-2 AIR 82. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 2
23. G- 3/S- 3 AIR 83, TEAM/SQD /SEC/DET/TANK # 3
24. CHEM OFF 84. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 4
25. ASST S- 3 85. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 5
26. PLT LDR 86. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 6
27 . PLT SGT 87. TEAM/ SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 7
28. NCS 88. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 8
29. AMMO OFF 89. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET/TANK # 9
30. ALT NCS 90. TEAM/SQD /SEC/DET/TANK # 10

SUFFIXES 1of4 2 SUFFIXES 3of4 2

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A SUFFIXES 2 KTV 601 A SUFFIXES 2

31. TECH SUPPLY OFF 91. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET 11

32. SHOP OFF 92. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET # 12
33. TAC 93. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET # 13
34. HEADQUARTERS COMMANDANT 94. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET # 14
(HQ COMDT) 95. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET #15
35. MOTOR OFF 96. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET # 16
36. ASST FIRE SUPPORT COORDINATOR 97. TEAM/SQD /SEC/DET # 17
37. ASA SSE/ EWE 98. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET # 18
38. MATERIEL OFF 99. TEAM/SQD/SEC/DET # 19
ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU

39. ASA SIG SEC OFFICER ASST

40. RETRANS NCO ASST

41. 1/58 LNO CHIEF NCO

42
. 3/7 LNO DRIVER/ RTO
43. 2/69 LNO FIRE CONTROL TEAM
44. 2/10 LNO
45.
46.
47. AF LNO
48.
49.
50. TOC
51. FO #1
52. FO #2
53. FO #3
54. SURVEILLANCE RADAR
55. COUNTERMORTAR RADAR
56. METRO
57. FDC MAIN
58. FDC JUMP
59. ACFT MAINT OFF
60. FLT LEAD
4of4 2
SUFFIXES 2 of4 2 SUFFIXES

2B 2D

3-14
 FM 5-12B1 /2

3A Figure 3. 3C
LY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY
KTV 601 A CALLSIGNS 4D KTV 601 A CALLSIGNS 4F
1/67 INF BN CO'S 2/69 INF ( MECH) BN CO'S
01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04
ACO MOF V5M O2S T2G A CO V9H T2P G80 Q3A
IST PLT 2.5J Z4A Y90 P6K 1ST PLT YOY G4E S4N M9D
2D PLT R12 P4N S6J H9M 2D PLT J8W T8G W2H U7B
3D PLT T6W J2D K3T H5B 3D PLT W3D C5Z O7P S2E
WPNS PLT J8X L9H Y2Z A4P WPNS PLT B4N G3Y B5J
BOJ
В СО S4A N3B E4C W8D В СО Y9T P6M V6B HOO
1ST PLT MIC N2E P2D W6F 1ST PLT V5X J3F F1V AOW
2D PLT R7E U9C N1A L9T 2D PLT H9A G5J NOT U1V
3D PLT F1Y Z8F H5E M4H 3D PLT R9L N10 E6Q J5F
WPNS PLT N4T M1V S7 F J21 WPNS PLT 14U W4H D3D B3T
C CO 182 F5D U21 252
C CO B3K P8J Y1B K1U
1ST PLT W71 S4L.
1ST PLT R3E B6U HOA K3X
Y3B U6N
2D PLT OOC
2D PLT W2F G4A 04C W4G
QOR Z2Z 19J
3D PLT J61 F1R T3U B7H
3D PLT M4G E8K X8H P6W
WPNS PLT B7N W6S Z6J 14K
WPNS PLT O2H E6L P2K Q70
05 06 07 08
05 06 07 08
A CO H7P 15U P3M X3C
ACO LST G9E Z9R D2X
1ST PLT H2L A1X P8Y L40
1ST PLT F9W T3D WO1 K8L
2D PLT F3V SOK G5E W31
2D PLT Z6C B3C Y4S B9F
3D PLT 05W Y2F K1F D6S
3D PLT C8H X1B J7D 15Y
WPNS PLT L9B M2G 140 R5E
WPNS PLT X2Q F3J L6U P1K
B CO D3Z ZOE N3Q C4D
В СО Y3S MOF L2L X9C
1ST PLT POX N7N R1P COX
1ST PLT LOV K60 H7W O7S
2D PLT 10C B9S U7D J7V
2D PLT G2R XOU S2V Y2H
3D PLT W8Y U9A G2G H2R
3D PLT C9F D21 K5P L90
WPNS PLT P80 S5Y L5Z C6K
WPNS PLT COX MOX Q1E B51
C CO J2M хов E7C U5J
C CO 100 J9Z T8T W2E
1ST PLT S1N D6C R6F YOR 1ST PLT F6N B1C D8H O1T
2D PLT F6Y B4H P1A UOG 2D PLT R7Q P5M D9V D2W
3D PLT D1R S8T C9U C1B
3D PLT U92 A2V U6Q POJ
S2G F6W WPNS PLT X8A IOR X91 B2L
WPNS PLT Q9A Q1T
1/67 INF BN CO'S 4D 1/69 INF ( MECH) BN CO'S 4F

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A CALLSIGNS 4G

KTV 601 A CALLSIGNS
1/69 INF ( MECH) BN 4E 1/2 ARMD BN

01 02 03 04
01 02 03 04
1/2 ARMD BN H4X H4D L1Q T6V
1/69 INF BN Z9Y E60 ROC J6T
HHC H1Y Z7E R7E HHC T50 04X R5C U3K
J6X
T2P A CO K5P V2E P5D JOU
A CO V9H G80 Q3A
B CO Y9T P6M V6B HOO B CO TOE XOJ T9J P8X
C CO S1J N6T S5A L7S
C CO 182 F5D U21 Z5Z
CSC Q9A 01E S1 F W2D CSC W6U F60 VOY W2Z

REDEYE PLT 041 VOC E4A B2V REDEYE X81 L1K 19M $30
RECON PLT X5B V2F M4G E9Q SCOUT PLT S8T X7F AOL V5Q
MORTAR PLT N1F P2G O3N T6P
A/T PLT R3S A2H B7 K E6B
MORTAR PLT F5Q IOC P9P Z6F MEDEVAC EOG T1B BOG N1M

SURVL PLT F7W M31 S3D P8C

MEDEVAC T1B BOC N1M 05 06 07 08
EQ C
1/2 ARMD BN 12U K50 M2T P3H

05 06 07 08 HHC X7V Q2S N5L 05J

1/69 INF BN C7Y R8T 15N T1A ACO S4B S8F H4G N4Q
HHC N2F X5K L5J U3X B CO COF N2D 12H V2A
A CO P3M C CO T8J F6T OOQ E4T
H7P 150 X3C
В СО D32 ZOE C4D CBT SPT СО 03D L1E JOP D21
N3Q
C CO хов E7C SCOUT PLT R21 F2C X6E H40
J2M USJ
CSC C9C F7R 12D 12B MORTAR PLT B2Q ΜΟΙ L.9R XOK

REDEYE PLT X7B G4Y N3Z MEDEVAC S7A P1G L6Y L6B
Q7T
RECON PLT Y1T 09C B8X S6E
W2G 1/2 ARMD BN 4G
A/ T PLT W1Z 15R D7F

MORTAR PLT X1A G8D Z8A KOG

SURVIL PLT 14H K4G G4E B9L
MEDEVAC W8W Q9A C70 C21

1/69 INF ( MECH) BN 4E

3B 3D

3-15
FM 5-12B1 / 2

4A
Figure 4.
4C

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A FREQUENCIES 4D KTV 601 A FREQUENCIES 4F

1/67 INF BN CO'S 2/69 INF ( MECH) BN CO'S

01 02 03 04 01 02 03 04
A CO CMD 47.05 75.20 49.75 51.00 A CO CMD 32.95 39.75 40.80 30.05
1ST PLT 47.20 47.20 47.20 47.20 47.20 47.20 47.20 47.20
1ST PLT
2D PLT 48.60 48.60 48.60 48.60 2D PLT 48.60 48.60 48.60 48.60
3D PLT 48.70 48.70 48.70 48.70 3D PLT 48.70 48.70 48.70 48,70
WPNS PLT 74.55 74.55 43.50 51.85 WPNS PLT 69.30 70.20 71.80 45.95
B CO CMD 52.75 50.35 73.05 53.05 B CO CMD 43.30 45.35 61.05 66.10
1ST PLT 47.90 47.90 47.90 47.90 1ST PLT 47.90 47.90 47.90 47.90
2D PLT 49.60 49.60 49.60 49.60 2D PLT 49.60 49.60 49.60 49.60
3D PLT 47.10 47.10 47.10 47.10 3D PLT 47.10 47.10 47.10 47.10
WPNS PLT 48.05 49.73 50.65 49.73 WPNS PLT 66.50 46.55 33.45 36.25
C CO CMD 58.03 43.50 74.85 53.35 C CO CMD 30.05 33.45 46.35 40.15
1ST PLT 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00 1ST PLT 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00
2D PLT 47.30 47.30 47.30 47.30 2D PLT 47.30 47.30 47.30 47.30
3D PLT 49.70 49.70 49.70 49.70 3D PLT 49.70 49.70 49.70 49.70
WPNS PLT 51.85 73.05 74.55 48.03 WPNS PLT 41.55 34.80 40.60 43.40

1/67 INF BN
4D
2/69 INF ( MECH ) BN
4F

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A FREQUENCIES 4E KTV 601 A FREQUENCIES 4G

1/69 INF ( MECH ) BN 1/2 ARMD BN

01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08
1/69 BN CMD P 40.60 67.15 32.65 42.60 A CO CMD 32.95 39.75 40.80 30.05
1/69 BN CMD A 36.75 69.10 48.35 41.55 1ST PLT 47.20 47.20 47.20 47.20
1/69 ΒΝ A/ L 70.50 36.60 36.35 45.45 2D PLT 48.60 48.60 48.60 48.60
CSC 45.05 40.75 70.20 67.55 3D PLT 48.70 48.70 48.70 48.70
FDC 33.80 33.75 40.45 33.45 WPNS PLT 69.30 70.20 71.80 45.95
MORTAR PLT 69.80 38.75 40.15 68.10 B CO CMD 43.30 45.35 41.05 66.10
MEDEVAC 42.40 42.40 42.40 42.60 1ST PLT 47.90 47.90 47.90 47.90
2D PLT 49.60 49.60 49.60 49.60
3D PLT 47.10 47.10 47.10 47.10
WPNS PLT 66.50 46.55 33.45 36.25
C CO CMD 30.05 33.45 46.35 40.15
1ST PLT 48.00 48.00 48.00 48.00
2D PLT 47.30 47.30 47.30 47.30
3D PLT 49.70 49.70 49.70 49.70
WPNS PLT 41.55 34.80 40.60 43.40

1/69 INF (MECH) BN 1/2 ARMD BN

4E 4G

4B 4D

3-16
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

KTV 601 A ITEM NR IDENTIFIERS 11

01 02 03 04
AA 4 5 6 4B7
AB 5 4A 7 6
AC 4F 6 5 4E
AD 6 3 6A 5
AF 7 6A 7B 4D
AF 4A 4F 8 6A
AG 6A 7 4D 3
AH 4G 4 8A 7
Al 7A 7B 9B 8
AJ 3 4C 4G 8A
AK 7B 8 7A 4C
AL 4H 8A 4E 9B
AM 8A 7A 4B 7B
AN 4C 4G 9A 9E
ΛΟ 9C 9B 9E 4
AP 9 9C +F 9A
AQ 8 411 3 9
AR 9D 8B 9C 4G
AS 4D 9D 9 9D
AT 10 4E 9F 7A
AU 9B 9 4 10B
AV 4E 10 10A 4A
AW 9F 9A +C 8B
AX 9A 9F 10B 10A
AY 4B 10A 8B 10
AZ 10A 10B 4A 9F
BA 9F 4B 10 9C
BB 8B 4D 9D 4H
BC
ITEM NR IDENTIFIERS 11

FOR OFFICIAL USE ONLY

Figure 5.

REFERENCE :

Unit CEOΙ

3-17
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9513

TASK:

Authenticate transmissions and encrypt / decrypt numbers and grid zone

letters using KAL 61 with KTC 1400 numeral code .

CONDITIONS :

Given a KAL 61 with KTC 1400 tables , pencil , paper and an opera-
tional FM radio , and :

Situation 1 : A contacted station which might be an imposter .

Situation 2 : A station requests you to authenticate two phonetic

letters .

Situation 3 : A requirement to encode specific grid coordinates and

transmit them within an otherwise clear text ( uncoded) message .

Situation 4 : A sending station transmits the words " I set" followed

by 8 , 10 or 12 phonetic letters .

STANDARDS :

You will without error select the right KTC 1400 for the day of the
month and :

Situation 1 : Within 15 seconds ( not counting time taken by the other

station ) , transmit using proper radio procedure , a two - letter chal-
lenge and from the reply , determine whether or not the station re-
sponded correctly . ( If station takes more that 5 seconds to re-
spond , challenge again . )
Situation 2 : Within 15 seconds , using correct radio procedure , re-
spond to the challenge with correct authentication . ( If immediately
challenged again , respond correctly within 5 seconds . )
Situation 3 : Within 3 minutes encode , without error , the grid coor-
dinates given and transmit them using proper radio procedure .

Situation 4 : Within 3 minutes decode , without error , the encoded

portion of the received message .

(For test purposes report the results of each of the above to your
supervisor/ evaluator . )

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

NOTE : NEVER self- authenticate using the KTC 1400. If self- authenti-
cation is required use one of the two- letter ( diagraph) found in the
Transmission Authentication Table assigned to your unit .

3-18
 1
NAO
3B
3B
NAO

7 8
ENCRYPTING
FOR
UP
SET
TO

FOR
ONLY
USE
OFFICIAL
select
Randomly
1.
Step
fany
(eor
letters
)two
Zxcept
message 0 4
2
1
5
8
6
3
9
7
SE
T 0 12
8
7
4
3
6
5
9
INDICATOR
E
SIP
)."(S:C ET
XAMPLE
ATDL
C
GN
JOB
MW
EO
UCJ
PFY
RX
SK
HV

KAL
MN
KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC WX
UV
ST
POR YZ

of
"C
letter
first
Find
2.
Step
INDICATOR
LINE
in
SI
the
2 OX
JETV
F
WU
CAD
BFH
MP
SY
NL
10
KRG
(1).
COLUMN

letter
second
the
Find
3.
Step
indicated
of
"P
line
in
Sl
by 1
.Letter
first
SET
is
letter
Sl
second
of
right
the
to
.
LETTER
S
KE
T
3
2
1
0
7
9
8
56
4
② KRG
JETV
F
OX
WU
CAD
BFH
MP
SY
NL
10
:Ifhen
,tNOTE
line
the
in
last
is
letter
Sl
second
the

6
GHJ
DEF
ABC
POR
MN
KL
WX
UV
ST
YZ
.
LETTER
SET
be
will
line
same
in
letter
first
the

3-19
COLUMN
"Fin
LETTER
SET
Find
4.
Step
INDICATOR
.LINE

READER
Position
5.
Step
line
over
GUIDE
SET
by
indicated
"F.Device
.LETTER
encrypting
for
ready
now
is

encrypting
for
up
set
KAL
.61

SET
TO
1.
ENCRYPTIN
FOR
.UP G
1.
Column
Indicator
Line
2.
/First
Set
of
Letter 7.
Set
of
Letter
Second
Indicator Indicator

Guide
Reader
3. 8.
Letter
Set
FM 5-12B1 /2
 NAO
3B

8
7

TO
NUMBERS
ENCRYPT
FM 5-12B1 / 2

FOR
ONLY
USE
OFFICIAL
0 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8
9
Section
Set
1.KAL
in
indicated
as
encrypting
for
61 SE
T 012
3 4 6
5 7 8
9
EO
UCJ
PFY
ATDL
IC
RX
SK
HV
GN
IOB
MW
2
MN
KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC WX
UV
ST
POR
Z
Y
PLAINTEXT
NUMBERS
be
in
encrypted
Step
to
number
Find
1.

KAL618
5
.:READER
on72938
4
)E
(3
GUIDE
XAMPLE JETV
F
CAD
BFH
NL
10
KRG
OX
WU
MP
SY

number
LETTERS
CIPHER
the
of
one
Step
each
for
Substitute
2.
1
be
to
number
below
)gin
5
immediately
line
set
rouped
(the
the
line
SET
same
encrypted
.Continue
from
letters
substitute
to
K 4
until
.EXAMPLE
encrypted
are
group
that
for
numbers
:all SE
0 2
1 3 4 5
T

<
RNAMUS
Bthers
possibility
one
,ois
variants
.using
possible
are
y 2 6 7 9
8 BFH
FJETV
KRG
OX
WU
CAD
MP
SY
NL
IO 5
KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC
UV
ST
POR
MN
YZ
WX

NOTE
: in
same
the
time
a
at
one
encrypted
be
will
Numbers

3-20
3
will
letter
cipher
dorder
.Aifferent
message
the
in
appear
they
numbers
15
than
more
be
.If
repeated
for
used
are
there
be
will
INDICATOR
to
,one
message
same
the
in
encrypted
be
SET
different
a
INDICATOR
SET
used
and
numbers
15
first
the
for
.This
done
be
each
1tmust
of
group
succeeding
numbers
15
o
because
SET
same
in
numbers
15
than
more
of
encrypting
the 3.
Guide
Reader
INDICATOR
.
system
of
security
the
weaken
seriously
can Numbers
Plaintext
4.
Letters
Cipher
5.
2.
NUMBERS
ENCRYPT
TO
 NAO
3B

ZONE
LETTERS
TO
GRID
ENCRYPT
FOR
ONLY
USE
OFFICIAL
0 1 2 3 4 6
5 7 8 9
G

PLAIN-
in
encrypted
be
Step
to
letter
zone
grid
first
Find
1. E 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 9
8
T

RX
SK
HV
GN
IOB
MW
EO
UCJ
PFY
CATDL

KAL
E
TEXT
).:ΝXAMPLE
(6
LETTERS

"
MN
KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC WX
UV
ST
POR YZ

JETV
F
SY
NL
10
KRG
OX
WU
CAD
BFH
MP
letter
in
located
cipher
the
Step
that
for
Substitute
2.
SET
.E.XAMPLE
encrypted
be
to
letter
the
above
directly
:Xline

in
encrypted
to
be
letter
zone
grid
second
the
Step
Find
3.
PLAINTEXT
:R.XAMPLE
).E
(6
LETTERS
SE
6
9
8
7
4
0
3
1
2
5
T

cipher
in
located
the
letter
second
Step
for
Substitute
4. JETV
F
MP
SY
NL
10
KRG
OX
WU
CAD
BFH
UV
ST
POR
MN
KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC WXY
E
:G.XAMPLE
encrypted
be
to
letter
SET
the
above
directly
line

3-21
6

KALUIB
zone
grid
the
both
encrypt
to
used
be
The
will
line
SET
same
coordinates
.
letters
the
and

included
when
messages
in
NOTE
:Grid
be
will
letters
Zone
messages
such
of
understanding
they
the
to
necessary
are
. NO
If
pre-
to
necessary
ENCRYPTED
LETTERS
.WILL
BE
OTHER UTM
Zone
Grid
6.
for
Letters
Plaintext
zone
grid
that
made
be
may
sclude
misunderstanding
,atatement
Designators
message
.
letters
the
in
included
are

ZONE
LETTERS
3.
GRID
ENCRYPT
TO
FM 5-12B1 /2
 3B
NAO 3B
NAO

ARRANGEMENT
TRANSMISSION
AND
MESSAGES
OF

7
.TThis
text
plain
with
used
be
to
designed
is
system
here-
8
FM 5-12B1 /2

will
,most
fore
system
this
using
messages
encrypted
both
include
ONLY
USE
OFFICIAL
FOR
portions
.
plaintext
and 0 1 2 3 4 6
5 7 8 9
KS 4
3 E 0 3
2 4 5 6 7 8 9
as
arranged
be
will
message
your
of
portions
encrypted
The T
9
PFY
C
ATDL
MW
EO
UCJ
GN
IOB
RX
SK
HV
:
follows
5

KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC
MN UV
Wx
ST
POR YZ

the
be
will
two
First
letters
INDICATOR
SET
.
.a )
2
(
JETV
F
CAD
BFH
10
KRG
OX
WU
MP
SY
NL
SET
THE
TRANSMIT
EVER
(NPXAMPLE
)E
LETTER
.:C
PAPA
Is(Tet
as
transmitted
is his
".)CHARLIE
1

,t.Ifhe
included
are
letters
zone
grid
fourth
third
band
EG
zone
grid
encrypted
be
will
letters
.:X XAMPLE
S
KE
(This
-R
X
as
transmitted
".)is
GOLF
AY T
0 1 2 3 4 9
8
7
6
5
2
JETV
F
MP
SY
NL
10
KRG
OX
WU
CAD
BFH
GHJ
DEF
ABC
MN
KL
UV
ST
.POR
YZ
WX
(i.Rncluding
letters
grid
if
fourth
third
emaining
cand 3

3-22
456

numbers
zone
.be
)will
included
not
are
letters
encrypted
EXAMPLE
.(T: his
"R
transmitted
is
NOVEMBER
NAMUS
OMEO
.)
"
SIERRA
UNIFORM
MIKE
ALFA

NOTE
,s:Aigit
-dencrypted
zone
grid
includes
which
location
ix
n
letters
,including
letters
ten
of
consist
will
always
is
which
Sl
the Column
Indicator
Line
1. UTM
for
Letters
Plaintext
6.
would
location
the
behe
.Tencrypted
letters
two
first
entire /First
Set
2.
Letter Designators
Zone
Grid
-R
),X
GOLFause
"Iset
(asAY
ptransmitted
PAPA
CHARLIE Indicator
Set
of of
Letter
Second
7.
Indica-
Set
SIERRA
UNIFORM
ROMEO
".NOVEMBER
MIKE
ALFA Guide
Reader
3. tor
OF
4.
TRANSMISSION
AND
ARRANGEMENT Plaintext
Numbers
4. Letter
Set
8.
MESSAGES Letters
Cipher
5.
 NAO
3B

NAO
3B 8

TO
DECRYPT
ONLY
FOR
USE
OFFICIAL
3
0 1 6
4
7
3
5 8
9 1
K SE
:Cransmitted
location
encrypted
.(TExample
RNAMUS
XG
P 0 12 5
6
4
3
7 8
9
T

RX
SK
HV
GN
IOB
MW
EO
UCJ
PFY
CATOL
X
as RNAMUS
".)CP G
(p,Iset
ause 5
2 ABC
MN
KL
GHJ
DEF ST
POR
WX
UV
Z
Y

JETV
F
10
KRG
OX
WU
CAD
BFH
MP
SY
NL 6
described
Step
using
F
LETTER
SET
Find
1.
C
SI
"athe
sP
in
"STteps
ENCRYPTING
FOR
UP
aSET
.2
3nd
O
1
beginning
"X
letter
third
the
with
Step
message
Decipher
2.
by
/numbers
letters
plaintext
substituting
GUIDE
READER
the
on 4
)for
.(3
letters
cipher
the SE
0
1
3
2 4 9
8
7
5
6
T

KA
2 JETV
MP
SY
NL
10
KRG
OX
WU
CAD
BFH
F 5
6

YZ
WX
UV
ST
POR
MN
KL
GHJ
DEF
ABC

3-23
3

1.
Column
Indicator
Line 6.
UTM
for
Letters
Plaintext
/First
2.
Set
of
Letter Designators
Zone
Grid
Indicator Set
of
Letter
Second
7.
5.
DECRYPT
TO
Guide
Reader
3. Indicator
Numbers
Plaintext
4. Letter
Set
8.
Letters
Cipher
5.
FM 5-12B1 / 2
 3B
NAO 3B
NAO
FM 5-12B1 / 2

A
MAY
: UTHENTICATION
NOTE
ACCOMPLISHED
BE
BEST NOTE
party
Bwillhe
:Toth
.called
challenge
first
make
the
READER
MOVING
BY
COMPLETELY
GUIDE
THE
OF
OUT and
challenge
the
making
must
challenged
being
person
POSITIONING
ELSE
OR
WAY
IT
OBSCURE
NOT
AS
SO
TO reply
correct
the
find
The
making
party
.call
then
may
REPLY
.
LINE counter
hallenge
party
called
-cifferent
athe
dchallenge
.using
AUTHENTICATE
TO
Transmission
Authentication
Challenge
and
Reply
Transmission
hundred
One
Authentication
digraphs
been
have
Step
(etxcept
letters
two
any
Select
)a1.
Z
for
random tosystem
this
in
provided
are
hey
.Tbe
where
cases
used
challenge
EXAMPLE
.:K Y not
it
and
required
is
authentication
that
desirable
or
possible
receiving
Tstation
Transmission
.the
reply
he
Authentication
table
challenge
LINE
the
in
oINDI-
"K
letter
f
numbered
ten
of
consists
containing
columns
.
each
digraphs
Step
first
Find
2.
numbered
been
have
Columns
assignment
the
make
to
Trans-
of

3-24
CATOR
.COLUMN
Authentication
mission
easier
digraphs
columns
.Numbered
should
in
indicated
line the
by
assigned
be
Authority
Controlling
communica-
selected
to
challenge
f
second
"V
letter
Step
o3.
Find
nets
Awithin
cryptonet
his
uthentication
.tions
digraphs
the
letter
ciper
Tdirectly
is
reply
correct
by
. he
first
should
columns
numbered
the
only
,and
once
used
be
with-
challenge
the
under
.second
of
"V
letter
net
Authority's
Controlling
the
in
necessary
.When
becomes
it
to
Authentication
Transmission
use
,the
unused
next
or
first
digraph
letter
"Y
is
challenge
the
of
NOTE
:Iifndicating
first
column
assigned
the
in
used
be
.will
from
the
should
taken
be
reply
tofhe
table
the
,last
line
same
the
as
position
in
letter
line
be
will
and
"A
challenge
line
"Y
.in
second
the
of
letter
but
does
within
econds AUTHENTICATE
TO
6.
Ifreply
not
5schallenged
party
again
using
adthat
party
hallenge
Creply
. ifferent
correctly
challenge
.
 NAO
3B 3B
NAO

THOUGHTS
SECURITY

0 4 5
6 7 8 9 :
security
achieve
to
rules
common
are
Following
1 2 3
VDFJ
A AUM IHC
EL XW GT QK
YNO PS RB
15
encrypted
are
numbers
.message
.Change
after
set
a
CIFN
B WKV ES
BDQ RH XL
YOJ AT UG
PM
ΚΗ
VIN LB
EM
WP
Encrypt
.b
values
brevity
Q
CSXJ CFY OGD
RT UA
IOBS
D JKQ FEG
DP MN CH
XWL VU
RY
TA then
plain
in
it
repeat
decrypt
or
encrypt
and
ever
amc.Nessage
KLPA MJX QDY
CH CW BT
VFE RN UI OS .
language
E

REFERENCE: None
EPA
VUCI
F NXY
TH BQ QGJ
LK WR DS
FM enemy
Avoid
d
the
to
known
information
of
encrypting
.the
NYAO
UFK
G GJW
DT
QI BLH
ES CX
VR
PM
Make
.e
possible
short
as
transmissions
all
K
H HIV
GYC RPS
FO JX QWA
TU EM
NL
DB
DPJ
IBWOA UGY
NH RE VCI
TS FQ
KX
LM listen
fRemember
can
anyone
.that
transmission
your
to
RQF
PCWX
J JVM
OY HS EGD
BN KT IL
UA INSERTING
TABLE
CIPHER
INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
C
K OPK
ASM TDJ
IH
WX NUR
GB OL YE
VF IN
61
KAL
BWRF
JPC
L QON
AV IML
SK
DU
HG
ET
YX out
1.
back
bend
and
device
of
bottom
the
at
flap
Unfasten
MUD
YN
RW
GE
TP
.
way
the
H
M QIA
XLC FVB
SK OJ
and
top
at
lips
the
2.
under
up
face
table
cipher
Slide
KJS
CWOF
N ΧΗΡ
ΑΕ
TN OB
RI
UGY
MD
VL sides
.
device
the
of
NWFD
QBS
0 RJX
YT
PH LU
KE
ICM
AV
OG 3.
,adjust
flap
refastening
Before
top
the
that
to
table
cipher
(+)at
marks
register
precisely
align
will
table
of
bottom
the
PAFT
NSC
P DGR
WX
QM OE
HKI
UB
LV
YJ fastened
is
flap
when
snaps
the
with

3-25
S
Q NGD
JTP WYI
CR
BE UOV
FH
MX
LA
QK
TABLE
AUTHENTICATION
TRANSMISSION
AMRH
NJG
R 10
QUY
SE WB
KDL
PV
XC
FT
01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10
SYWGS
VXE IDC
OA
KQ TPH
BU
NF
ML
JR
HA VX YM WT OE
MY
JR AY RB IP
FOR
BCDL
T AUT
GW
NV PI
SXK HQ
JY
ME
VB
DM ZF MP QV XI TX TF WE VH

RMQD
WVS
U UL
YJX
TG FEK
PB ΟΑ
ΝΗ
IC JP YQ QL MA
SS SG XJ EX AO
JZ

SLC
JT
PD EFQ
IV WM
RN UY SQ VC OR IS BM HN HB VN HW ZK
B
HXG
V OKA
NK UD FU CM YF YN HM NF VK EG
ASLW
YVD
W TRO
BE
CI PFX
HG JO
MN
KU
OD CC WA
UF OC MW GD CD XA
OQ
D
NEQ
X LTV PAS
XB
OC MHJ
KW RF
IG
YU SW MQ QP ES YL ZY SV IB AR ZL

X
YSIC
YGP NFW
VO
JAR
KL
HE QD
BU
TM RG RL
KM GO OF OK BX 11 ND EA

OH
MM QK
RZ NE ZT AN FG GB PB

DAY
17 KTC
1400 A IF DC UV
SB FA VZ MD BD XE HR

ONLY
USE
OFFICIAL
FOR DAY
23 KTC
1400 A

7.
TABLE
SAMPLE FOR
ONLY
USE
OFFICIAL

KTC
1400
.using
the
aNOTE
-:Nuthenticate
self
EVER ais
- uthentication
self
,If
required
Transmission
Authentication
diagraphs
the
in
found
use
letter
two
of
one
Table
.
unit
your
to
assigned
FM 5-12B1 / 2
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9514

TASK:

Encode and decode messages using a tactical operations code , KTC 600

CONDITIONS :

Given a CEOI with Tactical Operations Code , KTC 6003 paper and pen-
cil; and either a message to be encoded or any number of 3 - letter
code groups to be decoded .

STANDARDS :

Using the code set corresponding to the time frame in which the task
is being performed ( day of the month of operation as specified in
the CEOI) encode ( or decode ) the message without error within 30
seconds per code group or word/ phrase .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Use of code sets . Each set of the operations is effective for a

given time frame , not to exceed 48 hours . Time of change will be
directed in the CEOI ( could be days of the month or of any given
operation ) . Sets are used as follows :

EXAMPLE ONLY
SET EFFECTIVE DAYS

(of the month or operation

as directed by the CEOΙ )
1 1 and 2
2 3 and 4
3 5 and 6
4 7 and 8

2. To encode

a. After writing out your message in plain text , turn to the

set used on that day ( see example above ; on the 5th day of
the month ( or operation) you would use set 3 ) .
b. The encoded portion of the operations code is made up of
words and phrases commonly used in a tactical operations
which are arranged in alphabetical order as in a diction-
ary . To the left of each is a 3 - letter code group which is
the code for that word or phrase .

c. Procedure :

(1 ) Find the word or phrase to be encoded .

3-26
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

(2) Identify the 3- letter code group located to the left of

that word or phrase .

(3) Write that code group under the word or phrase where
you have written out the message to be encoded

(4) Repeat this procedure until the whole message is en-

coded .

ette

( EXAMPLE)

Message: My location is near

1 EXI MOVEMENT
DMM MULTIPLE
3-letter group (2) ACB My (1) Plain text word
code MWT
My location is to be encoded
XRF N
VBW N
3-letter group (2) ΝΚΗ Napalm (1) Plain text word
code JDH Near to be encoded
IWR New

My Location is near.
MWT JDH

3. To decode .

a. After receiving and writing down the encoded message , turn

to the code set in effect for that day .

b. The decode portion of the operations code is made up of a

column of 3 - letter code groups in alphabetical order ( AAO ,

ABL , ABY , etc. ) with a word or phrase located to the right
of each .

c. To decode just find the code group and write the word/ phrase
next to it under that group in the encoded message which you
copied .

3-27
FM 5-12B1 / 2

(EXAMPLE)

CodedMessage: MWT JDH

J
3-letter
JCW Here
Plain text word decoded
group code JDH Near
NDU 0

VMM Comma(,)
3-letter MWF Period(.) Plain text word
MWT decoded
group code My location is
MWY Convoy(s)
MXB Effect-ed- ing

MWT JOH

My Location is near.

NOTE : You can save some time when encoding or decoding by going in
alphabetical order . ( When encoding look up all words/phrases start-
ing with A, then B , etc. When decoding look up all code groups be-
ginning with A, then B , etc. ) .

4. Radio procedure :

a. After contact is established , the station sending the en-

coded message uses the following prowords /procedures .
( 1) "Message" . Lets the receiving station know that a mes-
sage is going to be sent THAT REQUIRES RECEIVING STA-
TION to copy .

(2 ) " Groups ----- " . The number of groups in the message is

provided SO that the receiving station can check his
copy . The receiving station should write this number
down .

(3) Groups are transmitted phonetically . Transmission

should be slow with a pause between each group .

3-28
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

EXAMPLE : If station F7 is going to transmit the message . " Excecute plan

B" to station F26 and the encoded message is " BCA ONM ZYX" , the trans-
mission would be : ( -indicates a pause) .

(sending station) " Foxtrot 26 this is Foxtrot 7 , MESSAGE , over "

enve (receiving station) " Foxtrot 26 , over

(sending station) groups tree , -
BRA - VOH CHAR - LEE AL - FAH

-OSS - CAH NO -VEM-BER

MIKE- ZOO - LOO

YANG - KEY ECKS - RAY

-over

b. After the message is received and copied , and before it is

decoded , the following procedures and prowords may be used ;

(1) " Interrogative groups ----- " . Used by the receiving sta-
tion when his group count is not the same as the send-
ing station told him it would be . The receiving sta-
tion's group count follows the word " groups " .

(2 ) Correct , out " -Used by the sending station when the re-

ceiving station's interrogative group count is correct .

(3 ) "Groups----- " followed by a series of phonetic letters-

Used by the sending station when the interrogative
group count is wrong . The right group count follows the
word groups and the 1st letter of each group is sent
again . The receiving station checks these letters
against the message he copied and finds his mistake .

(4) " Say again----- " . Used by the receiving station to ask
the sending station to retransmit a group ( s ) not re-
ceived . The number of the group missed is put in the
blank ( Example " Say again 5 " means that the sending
station should resend the fifth group in the message . )
c. Once the message has been decoded and a word ( or all of the
message ) does not make sense , the receiving station should :

(1) Check to see if he has used the right code set .

(2) If the right code set was used the receiving station
should recontact the sending station and have him check
the code group ( or message ) by using the pro- word " ver-
ify" . ( Examples : "Verify ONM" if ONM when decoded does
3-29
FM 5-12B1 /2
not make sense , or "Verify message " if the whole mes-
sage does not make sense . ) The sending station then
encodes and sends that portion again .

NOTE : Each set in the operations code has " spares " assigned . These
spares can be used if all stations are informed of their meaning in
advance . A word not included in the code or an entire message may be
assigned to a " spare" group .
REFERENCE :

Unit CEOI ( Communicatins -Electronic Operating Instructions) Classi-

fied : Confidential

NOTE : This instruction is not classified insofar as explaining en-

coding and decoding messages .

3-30
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9516

TASK:

Establish and enter or leave a radio net .

CONDITION :

1. Given an operational FM radio set , the appropriate CEOI and act-

ing as the net control station operator .

2. Given an operational FM radio set , tha appropriate CEOI and the

requirement to enter a radio net in which you do not normally
operate .

STANDARDS :

1. The net call sign and any required additional calls will be
transmitted at such a time and in such a manner that will cause
all stations operating in the net to make a responding call to
the net control station .

2. The net control station ( NCS ) call sign , frequency item number
identifier and authenticator will be extracted from the appro-
priate CEOI and transmitted on the radio at such a time and in
such a manner that will cause the net control station to grant
permission to enter the net .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. When establishing a radio net , the following actions must be

accomplished :

a. Extract appropriate call signs , suffixes , and frequency from

the CEOΙ .

b. Prepare and operate the appropriate FM radio set .

c. Identify the net structure and determine that answering se-

quence , and make the appropriate response to the individual
stations ( figure 1 ) .

(1) Establishing a Net .

(a) Proper control by the NCS and adherence to operat-

ing rules by subordinate stations will enable a
radio net to begin , maintain , and exchange mes-
sages with minimum delay . The use of procedure as
prescribed herein must be followed when establish-
ing a net .

3-31
FM 5-12B1 /2

U5 06
V26 F26
U41
1st PitLdr (NET CALL SIGN) 4th PltLdr

K2 Y8
X26 G26

2d PltLdr 3rd PitLdr

U4
17

A BTRY CDR
(NCS)

Figure1.

EXAMPLE : When ready to establish the net , U417 transmits :

U41 - THIS IS ( U4) 17 -OVER .

(b) Each subordinate station then answers the call in

alphabetical- numerical order according to the ab-
breviated callsign . If communication is good , the
receiver stations may drop the callsign of the
calling station and the proword THIS IS .

NOTE : Items enclosed in parenthesis are optional for transmission .

(U4) ( 17) - (THIS IS) (06) F26 - OVER

(U4) ( 17) - (THIS IS) ( Y8) G26 - OVER
(U4) (17) - ( THIS IS) ( U5) V26 - OVER
(U4) ( 17) - ( THIS IS) ( K2) X26 - OVER

(c) The NCS now calls the net to inform all stations
that their transmissions were received satisfacto-
rily , and that he has no messages for them .

(U41) (THIS IS) ( U4) 17-

ROGER - OUT

(2 ) Provided no confusion will result , callsigns other than

the net callsign may be abbreviated by omitting their
first two characters , as shown in the example above .

(3 ) All stations in the net should be prepared to authenti-

cate when challenged .

3-32
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

(4) If any stations in the net do not answer the net call-
sign , the NCS wll make individual calls to those sta-
tions in an attempt to establish communication .

(5 ) If any station in the net is unable to communicate with

the NCS due to faulty equipment or unsuitable loca-
tion, a report will be made to the NCS as soon as pos-
sible by means other than radio .

2. When entering a net in which you do not normally operate , the

following procedure will be used :

NOTE : " T3F07 " wished to enter a net which is controlled by " R7G28 " .

" T3F07" wishes to enter a net which is controlled by " R7G28"

ROMEO SEVEN GOLF TOOATE, THIS IS TANGO TREE FOXTROT ZERO SEVEN - RE-
QUEST PERMISSION TO ENTER THE NET - OVER.

TANGO TREE FOXTROT ZERO SEVEN, THIS IS ROMEO SEVEN GOLF TOO ATE, -
AUTHENTICATE OVER.

ROMEO SEVEN GOLF TOOATE, THIS IS TANGO TREE FOXTROT ZERO SEVEN - I
AUTHENTICATE OVER.

TANGO TREE FOXTROT ZERO SEVEN, THIS IS ROMEO SEVEN GOLF TOO ATE , -
ROGER - IDENTIFY YOUR STATION - OVER.

ROMEO SEVEN GOLF TOO ATE , THIS IS TANGO TREE FOXTROT ZERO SEVEN -
REFER TO ALFA CHARLIE OVER.

TANGO TREE FOXTROT ZERO SEVEN, THIS IS ROMEO SEVEN GOLF TOO ATE -
ROGER - PERMISSION GRANTED TO ENTER THE NET- OUT.

3. Any station desiring to leave a net simply requests permission

to do so from the net control station .

REFERENCES :

FM 24-18 , Field Radio Techniques

ACP - 125 ( D ) , Communications Instructions -- Radio - Telephone Procedure
TEC Lesson :
936-061-0112 - F , RTP : Part 5 , Sending and Receiving Messages

3-33
FM 5-12B1 /2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9197

TASK:

Zero an M60 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , on a live fire range , given a bipod- positioned cal-

iber 7.62 - mm M60 machinegun , an E silhouette target located at a

known range between 300 and 700 meters from the firing position ,
and a 36 - round belt of ammunition .

STANDARD :

Individual will fire one 6- to 9 - round burst , make adjustments , and

hit the target with the confirming burst .

NOTE : If the gunner does not hit the target with the confirming
burst , he repeats the same procedures treating each subsequent burst
as if it were the initial burst unitl the 36 - round belt has been
expended .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. During field zeroing , select a target at a known range between

300 and 700 meters .

2. Place the selected range on the rear sight and aline the windage
index ( windage zero) •

3. Fire a 6 - to 9 - round burst at the target and note where the

burst hits .

4. Make necessary corrections - One click or one mil on the windage

knob moves the line of aim one meter at a thousand meters . Ad-
just deflection by moving the rear sight the necessary number of
clicks in the direction of the target .

5. Estimate how high or low you think the center or the beaten zone
is hitting in relation to the target and make elevation changes
accordingly .

6. After making adjustments , fire a confirming burst . If adjust-

ments were correct , you adjust the range plate so that the cor-
rect range is indexed .

7. If the target is not hit with the confirming burst , repeat the
same procedures treating each subsequent burst as if it were the
initial burst .

3-34
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
REFERENCES :

FM 23-67 , Machinegun 7.62 - mm , M60

TM 9-1005-224-10 , Operator's Manual , M60 Machinegun
TEC Lesson :

941-071-0084 -F , Firing and Zeroing , M60 Machinegun

3-35
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9193

TASK:

Engage targets with an M60 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight on a live fire range , given a zeroed M60 machinegun

(with bipod and tripod ) , an assistant gunner , caliber 7.62-mm ammu-
nition and time allotted per type fire ( app II, tables I, II , III ,
IV , and V , FM 23-67 ) and equipment as outlined in FM 23-67 for Basic
Marksmanship Bipod and Tripod Mounted Gun , Basic ( 10 -meters ) Range ,
and for Transition Firing .

STANDARDS :

Fire on the Basic ( 10-meter) Range and Transition Range and get a
combined minimum qualification score of 115 of which a minimum of 65
points must be achieved at the Basic ( 10 -meter ) Range .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Assume a stable prone firing position .

2. Fire the weapon using the correct sight alignment and picture .
a. Sight alinement : The gunner centers the front sight blade in
the aperture of the rear sight slide with the top of the
front sight blade even with the top of the right slide
( figurel ) .

FRONT SIGHT

REAR SIGHT SLIDE

Figure1.

3-36
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

b. Sight picture: The gunner centers the target over the front
sight blade SO that it appears to rest on top of the front
sight blade and on top of the rear sight slide ( figure 2 ) .

SCORING SPACE

AIMING PASTER

Figure2.

3. Apply correct traversing and search techniques .

a. Traversing : This is moving the muzzle of the weapon to the
left or right to distribute fire laterally . With the bipod-
mounted gun , this is accomplished by selecting successive
aiming points in the target area . The gunner shifts his
shoulders slightly to the right or left for minor changes .
For major changes in direction , he moves his elbows and re-
alines his body to remain directly behind the gun (figure
3) .

b. Searching : This is moving the muzzle of the weapon up or

down to distribute fire in depth and is accomplished by se-
lecting successive aiming points in the target area . To make
changes in elevation , the gunner moves his elbows closer to
gether or farther apart ( figure 3 ) .

4. Use observation and adjustment of fire .

a. Observation of Fire : Machinegun fire is observed by noting
the strike of the projectiles in the target area , by observ-
ing tracers in their flight or , in the case of the 10 -meter
range , by noting the holes made in the target .

b. Adjustment of Fire: When firing the bipod- mounted gun , fire

is adjusted by changing the gunner's body position by using
the traversing and searching method .

3-37
FM 5-12B1 /2

FIXED TRAVERSE SEARCH TRAVERSE &

SEARCH

999999 p

5.
VV SWINGING TRAVERSE

Figure
3.

Apply the adjusted aiming point method for

ment .
FREE GUN

rapid fire adjust-

a. Means of rapidly and accurately adjusting fires without go-

ing through the process of making sight adjustment .
b. If the gunner misses the target with his initial burst , he
selects a new aiming point on the ground the same distance
from the target as the center of impact of the initial burst
but in the opposite direction , and fires a second burst ( fi-
gure 4 ) .

3-38
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

2D BURST

ADJUSTED AIMING POINT

Figure
4.

REFERENCES :

FM 23-67 , Machinegun Caliber 7.62- mm , M60

TEC Lesson :
941-071-0084-F , Firing and Zeroing , M60 Machinegun

3-39
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9194

TASK:

Use aiming and firing stakes for the M60 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

As a gunner , during daylight , in a defensive position with an assis-

tant gunner , given a caliber 7.62 - mm M60 machinegun (bipod and
tripod ) , 100 rounds of ammunition , a designated primary sector of
fire ( FPL optional ) , a secondary sector of fire to include either an
area of graze or three recognizable target areas , and provided with
tree limbs , rocks , logs or boards , axe and luminous tape .
STANDARDS :

Use the following field- expedient methods for laying the M60 ma-

chinegun and confirm correct alinement and elevation to the target

or target areas by firing the weapon after its emplacement .

1. In the designated primary sector , use the aiming- stake technique

tar-
with a tripod- mounted M60 machinegun to engage preselected
get areas ( FPL optional ) .
2. In the designated secondary sector using a bipod , use either :
a. The notched- stake or tree- crotch technique to engage three
preselected target areas within the sector .

b. The horizontal log or board technique to fire an existing

area of graze .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Using the
Us aiming- stake technique ( figure 1) , the following
procedure is used :

a. The gun is aimed to hit the preselected target area .

b. The rear sight slide is raised to its uppermost position in

the rear sight leaf and a strip of luminous tape is placed
at least halfway up the rear of the front sight post ( figure
1) .

c. An aiming stake marked with a strip of luminous tape is

taken 1 or 2 meters forward of the gun position .

d. The gunner sighting the desired target area directs the as-
sistant gunner to aline the stake and drive it into the
ground in such a way that the two pieces of luminous mate-
rial are adjacent ( alined for direction) and top edges of
both pieces of material are level ( alined for elevation)
( figure 1 ) .
3-40
 FM 5-12B1 /2
2. Using the notched- stake or tree- crotch technique ( figure 2 ) , the
following procedure is used .

a. Aim the weapon toward the preselected target area .

b. Place the stock of the weapon in the rests of notched stakes

or tree - crotches and make final adjustment to hit desired
target area .

c. Dig shallow trenches or grooves for the bipod feet to permit

rotation of the bipod feet as the stock is moved from one
crotch or stake to another .

d. The weapon is held and fired using the postion and grip em-
ployed in bipod firing .
PLIABLE METAL STRIP

AIMING
STAKE LUMINOUS TAPE OR PAINT
(WHITE TAPE OR PAINT MAY
LUMINOUS TAPE NEAR BE USED AS A SUBSTITITE)
CENTER OF FRONT SIGHT
REAR SIGHT LEAF
FRONT SIGHT POST
REAR
OFFRONT LUMINOUS TAPE

SIGHT POST ON AIMING STAKE

REAR SIGHT SLIDE

AIMING LINE OF SIGHT

STAKE LUMINOUS SIGHT

GUNNER
MACHINEGUN

Figure 1.

3. When using the horizontal log or board technique ( figure 3 ) , the

following procedure is used .

a. Aim the weapon toward the desired sector of graze .

b. Place a well - seated log or board beneath the stock of the

weapon in such a way that the stock can slide across it
fully .

C. Dig shallow trenches or grooves for the bipod feet to allow

rotation of the feet as the stock is moved along the hori-
zontal log or board .

d. Adjust bipod legs for elevation which provides the best sec-
tor of graze .

3-41
FM 5-12B1 / 2

SECTOR LIMITS AND

SECTOR OF GAZE

Figure2.

TRENCHES FOR BIPOD FEET

‫الم‬

USE OF AIM FOR

PRESELECTED TARGETS

NOTCHED STAKES OR CROTCHES

TRENCHES FOR
BIPOD LEGS

HORIZONTAL LOG OR BOARD

Figure3.

HORIZONTAL LOG OR BOARD USED WITH THE BIPOD

3-42
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
e. Mark the sectors of graze by notching or placing stops on
the horizontal log or board .

f. Bipod firing position and grip are used .

REFERENCE :

FM 23-67 , Machinegun 7.62- mm , M60

3-43
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9195

TASK:

Construct M60 machinegun position .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , given load - bearing equipment with bayonet , scabbard ,

intrenching tool , poncho , an M16Al rifle , an M60 machinegun , the
specific location and sectors of fire of the position to be con-
structed ( NOTE : Position should afford natural cover such as mounds
of earth , stumps , trees , rocks , etc. , and must afford observation
and general fields of fire initially as selective clearing will be-
gin after the hole is dug ) ; logs to construct overhead cover ; and 4
hours to complete construction . NOTE : Time may be adjusted when soil
and weather conditions make construction of positions particularly
difficult .

STANDARDS :

Within time specified , completed position must meet the following

specifications ;

1. Cover-Affords protection from direct frontal small arms fire ( by

means of a natural or manmade frontal parapet , one helmet high
and at least one M16Al length deep) and from the effects of in-
direct fire ( shrapnel ) ( normally requires at least 12 inches of
dirt and log overhead protection) .
2. Concealment - Position cannot be easily detected from the front
( e.g. , blends with surroundings well enough that an approaching
soldier approximately 35 meters to front ( hand grenade range)
cannot detect it . It must also be protected from aerial observa-
tion .

3. Fields of Fire- The gunner must have good observation and fields
of fire in both sectors of fire , without destroying natural.
camouflage .

4. Size and Shape- The position must be armpit deep , L - shaped , and
two bayonets wide ( figure 1 ) , and provide cave- like compartments
with overhead cover for the gunner and assistant gunner .

5. Optional - Position may include : grenade sump , sloping floor with

shallow trench to facilitate drainage , rear parapet for protec-
tion against small arms from the rear ( other friendly positions
or supporting fire from APCs ) and from shrapnel .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Construction of an M60 machinegun position should generally follow

this sequence .

3-44
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

L
FP
2 BAYONETS WIDE

(3)

(2)

(1)

2 BAYONETS WIDE

Figure1.

1. Set up a good hasty position after obtaining the position loca-

tion and sectors of fire from platoon leader . Put in sector- of-
fire stakes .

2. Partially clear fields of fire within your sectors and dig a

hasty hole for minimum protection . Save grass clumps , etc. , for
camouflage later .

3. Next dig in ( figure2 ) .

PRIMARY SECTOR
1 BAYONET
OF FIRE

FPL

Figure2A.

3-45
FM 5-12B1 / 2

L
FP

PARAPET

SECONDARY
SECTOR
OF FIRE 4 PRIMARY
SECTOR
OF FIRE

Figure28.

NOTE : Place the sod forward of where you are building the parapet .
It will help to cover and conceal your position until it is dug .
After the position is completed , use the sod to camouflage the para-
pet .

4. Complete clearing fields of fire . Clear only what is absolutely

necessary . Get in firing position and check observation and
fields of fire .

5. Camouflage position using available materials ( e.g. , grass clumps

foliage , etc ) . Make your position blend into surroundings . Check
camouflage by moving 35 meters to the front . If you can spot it
easily , you need more work on camouflage .

6. Construct overhead cover . Use logs , planks , etc. , which will

support at least 12 inches of dirt . Dig a cave - like area big
enough to get under ( figure 3 ) .
7. Improve postion . Dig a grenade sump at a 45-degree angle at
least 2 feet deep . Slope floor of foxhole and dig shallow trench
to allow for drainage . Construct alternate and secondary posi-
tions as directed by your squad leader . Replace dead foliage as
needed to maintain camouflage . Remember , you can always improve
your position .

3-46
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

FPL TO THE RIGHT

OVERHEAD COVER

FPL TO THE LEFT

OVERHEAD COVER

Figure3.

REFERENCE :

TC 7-50 , Fighting Positions for Infantry Soldiers

3-47
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9198

TASK:

Prepare a range card for an M60 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in a defensive fighting position ( PARFOX) , given a

tripod-mounted M60 machinegun with components , a designated primary
sector of fire ( FPL optional ) and secondary sector of fire ( both
with recognizable targets ) , and paper , pencil , and lensatic compass .
STANDARDS :

Within 15 minutes , individual will prepare a range card which in-

cludes a data section and a sketch section containing both sectors
of fire , the appropriate sketches and military symbols to include :

1. Basic symbol for the machinegun (when an FPL is not assigned ) .

2. Final protective line ( if assigned ) .

3. Limits of the primary sector of fire .

4. Limits of the secondary sector of fire .

5. Friendly positions which are located forward of the FEBA .

6. A magnetic north arrow from the location of the machinegun ,

pointing in the direction of magnetic north .

7. Eight - digit grid coordinates for the gun position , of a magnetic

azimuth and distance from a recognizable terrain feature to the
gun position .

8. Marginal data in corner of sketch , to include :

a. Gun number .

b. Unit designation ( no higher than company) .

c. Date .

9. Likely avenues of approach and target areas which may be recogn-

izable manmade objects or natural terrain features .

a. Targets will be numbered on range sketch in order of prior-

ity and a data section prepared below sketch to include di-
rection , elevation , range , description , and remarks on tar-
gets , if applicable . When data is placed on the traversing
and elevating ( T& E ) mechanism , gun will be aimed on appro-
priate target .
3-48
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
b. When assigned , the FPL is target No. 1. If a PDF is as-
signed , instead of an FPL , it is target No. 1 .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Range card .

a. The range card is prepared and used for three reasons :

(1 ) To permit you to place effective fires on designated

targets during periods of limited visibility ( night ,
fog , smoke , etc. ) .

(2) To facilitate a relief in place by providing the re-

lieving gunner with all of the important information he
needs to respond immediately to enemy action .

(3) To provide information to the platoon leader and com-

pany commander for inclusion in their fire planning .

b. The preparation of a range card will usually be done while

preparing your defensive position . All of the range card
except for the data section will be done before constructing
the parapet and digging in so that fire planning at squad ,
platoon , and company level can be completed as soon as pos-
sible . In addition , it will determine the exact location ,
shape , and position of your parapet and firing platform . The
data section will be completed as soon as the firing plat-
form is dug out and the tripod set in place . Your platoon
leader will provide additional guidance for your priority of
work based on the situation .

2. Preparation of the range card . The following guidance is based

on a situation where the position is prepared and sectors of
fire assigned . In situations where the position must also be
prepared , the preparation of your range card will take longer
since the position must be prepared at the same time . The prior-
ity of work will be assigned by your platoon leader .

a. Orient the card ( could be a field expedient , e.g. , C-ration

boxtop ) so that ( both) the primary ( and if assigned , secon-
dary) sectors of fire can fit on it .

b. Draw a rough sketch of the terrain to the front of the posi-

tion . Include prominent natural and manmade features which
could be likely targets and center the position at the bottom
of the sketch .

c. Fill in the marginal data to include :

(1) Gun number ( or squad ) .

(2) Unit designation ( platoon and company) .

3-49
FM 5-12B1 /2

(3) Date .

d. Use the lensatic compass to determine magnetic north and

sketch in the basic symbol ( figure 1 ) on the card with its
base starting at the machinegun position .

AUTOMATIC
MAGNETIC
WEAPON PRIMARY SECTOR OF FIRE WITH PDF
NORTH

(INDICATES DEADSPACE)

}
FPL
SECONDARY SECTOR OF FIRE

Figure1.

e. Specify the location of the gun position in relation to a

prominent terrain feature . When no such feature exists place
the eight-digit map coordinates of the position near the
point on your sketch representing the position ( figure 2 ) .
If there is a prominent terrain feature within 1000 meters
of the gun , use that feature ( figure 3 ) :

(1) Using the compass , determine the azimuth in mils fron

the terrain feature to the gun position . ( Compute the
back azimuth of an azimuth from the gun to the
feature ) .

3-50
 FM 5-12B1 /2

(2 ) Determine the distance between the gun and the feature

by pacing or from a map .
d
S (3) Sketch in the terrain feature on the card in the lower
left or right hand corner ( whichever is closest to its
actual direction on the ground) and identify it .

(4 ) Connect the sketch of the position and the terrain fea-

ture with a barbed line extending from the feature to

the gun .

(5 ) Write in the distance in meters ( above the line ) .

(6) Write in the azimuth in mils from the feature to the

gun ( below the line ) .

f. Sketch in primary sector of fire with a Principal Direction

of Fire ( PDF ) or a Final Protective Line ( FPL ) .

(1) Primary Sector with PDF ( figure 2 ) .

(a) Sketch in the limits of the primary sector of fire

as assigned ( Sector should not exceed 875 mils-
maximum traverse of the tripod mounted M60 . )

(b) Sketch in the symbol for an automatic weapon ori-

ented on the most dangerous target within your
sector ( as designated by your platoon leader ) .

(2) Primary Sector with an FPL ( figure 3 ) .

(a) Sketch in the limits of the primary sector of fire
-

as assigned . ( Sector should not exceed 875 mils

maximum traverse of the tripod mounted M60 ) .

(b) ) Sketch in FPL on sector limit as assigned . Have

another individual walk the FPL ( if possible , i.e.
enemy situation permits ) and determine dead space
( sections of FPL where individual drops below line
of sight ) . Reflect dead space on sketch by a break
in the symbol for an FPL and write in the range to
the beginning and end of the dead space . Write in
maximum range of graze ( 600 meters if no sharp
rise or fall in terrain at a closer range ) . [The
FPL should be assigned to you only if a good dis-
tance of graze can be obtained . When such a line
of fire exists the primary sector will be as-
signed , based on it with the FPL being the sector
limit colsest to friendly troops . If an FPL cannot
be identifed , a PFD should have been assigned . ]
g. Label targets in primary sector in order of priority . FPL or
PDF will be labeled as 1 ( figures 2 and 3 ) .
3-51
FM 5-12B1 /2

h. Sketch in secondary sector of fire ( as assigned) and label

targets within the secondary sector with the range in meters
from the gun to each . ( The secondary sector will be fired
into , when necessary , by using the bipod- THE TRIPOD , ONCED
EMPLACED FOR FIRE INTO THE PRIMARY SECTOR , SHOULD NOT BE
MOVED . ) Sketch in aiming stakes if they are used .

AIMING STAKE 1 3 Π

300

GUN I
1stPLT

COA
DATE (0845 1038)

NO DIRECTION ELEVATION RANGE DESCRIPTION REMARK

1 L375 0/35 400 POF (WOODEDRJ.) W17/-3
2 R 375 +50/15 500 BARN W3
3 R75 -50/23 350 HEDGE LINE W7

Figure 2. RANGE CARD WITH PRINCIPAL DIRECTION OF FIRE.

3-52
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

(2
AIMING STAKE

60
1

0
3

40
300 00 ilS

0
40 M

35
0
200M
GUN I
1stPLT RJ

CO A 1300 MILS
114
DATE

NO DIRECTION ELEVATION RANGE DESCRIPTION REMARK

1 +50/3 600 FPL -4

2 R 105 +50/40 500 LONE PINE AIMING STAKE

3 L 235 0/28 350 TRAIL JUNCTION W15

Figure 3. RANGE CARD WITH FINAL PROTECTIVE LINE.

3. Preparation of the data section using the T&E mechanism ( figure

4) .

a. On the reverse side of card ( or below sketch if there is

room) draw a data section block ( figure 2 and 3 ) if not a
preprinted card .

b. Preliminary steps :

(1) Center traversing hand wheel .

(2) Lay gun for direction .

(a) FPL lock traversing slide on extreme left or
-

right of bar depending on which side of primary

sector FPL is on • Then aline barrel on FPL by
moving tripod legs . ( No direction entry needed in
data section . )

(b) PDF Aline on primary sector by traversing slide

-

to one side and then move tripod to aline barrel

on sector limit . Aline on PDF by traversing slide
until aimed at center of target .

(3 ) Fix tripod legs in place by digging in or sandbagging .

3-53
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TRAVERSING
HANDWHEEL TRAVERSING SCREW

TOP VIEW, 200

1503
UPPER ELEVATING SCREW $
100
AND PLATE WITH SCALE 50
0 ELEVATING HANDWHEEL
50 WITH SCALE :
LOWER ELEVATING
SCREW

TRAVERSING BAR WITH SCALE

TRAVERSING BAR SLIDE
'5MILS BETWEEN SMALL LINES'
'USE LEFT EDGE TO OBTAIN
DIRECTION READINGS'

4000 (100 100. 2000 400

"

mung 49hu

Figure4.

C. Read direction to each target .

(1) Lay gun on center of target .

(2) Read the number ( to include + or -

sign except for "0" )

above the first visible line on the elevating scale .
(Reading in figure 4 is -50 , since the " -50 , " is the
number above the first visible line . )

(3) Right or left reading is determined by direction of

barrel ( just the opposite of the slide ) .

(4) Enter reading under DIRECTION column of range card data

section ( figure 4 reading is L10 ) .

d. Read elevation for each target .

(1 ) Lay gun on base of target by rotating elevating hand

wheel ( figure 4 ) .

(2) Read the number ( to include + or -

sign except for "0" )

above the first visible line on the elevating scale
( figure 4 reading is -50 ) .

(3 ) Read the number off of the elevating hand wheel which

is in line with the indicator ( figure 4 reading is 3 ) .

3-54
 FM 5-12B1 /2
(4) Enter reading under ELEVATION column of range card data
section by separating the two numbers with a slash ( / ) .
Always enter reading from upper elevating bar (-50 )
first .

e. Enter range to each target under appropriate column in data

section .

f. Enter description of each target under appropriate column in

data section .

g. Fill in REMARK column for each target as needed .

(1 ) Enter width and depth ( in mils ) of linear targets . ( -4

in figure 3 indicates that depressing the barrel 4 mils
will bring strike of rounds down to ground level along
FPL ) .

(2 ) Enter AIMING STAKE if one is used for the target .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-67 , Machinegun 7.62- mm , M60

TEC Lessons :

941-071-0127 -F , Range Cards , Limited Visibility , Part 1

941-071-0128 -F , Range Cards , Limited Visibility , Part 2

3-55
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9204

TASK :

Maintain a caliber •
50 machinegun and ammunition .
CONDITIONS :

During daylight , given an M3 tripod-mounted caliber .50 нв , M2 ma-

chinegun , cleaning kit , lubricant , rag , and 100 round of linked cal-
iber 50 ammunition .

STANDARDS :

Within 50 minutes , perform general disassembly , inspection , lubrica-

tion , and cleaning of the caliber .50 HB , M2 machinegun and M3
tripod mount . Upon completion of assembly , all deficiencies noted
that can be corrected by the gunner are to be corrected ; all noncor-
rectable deficiencies should be noted on DA Form 2404. The weapon
should operate correctly when a function check is performed . In ad-
dition , all ammunition should be properly linked , clean , and dry .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Disassembly , cleaning , inspection , lubrication , and assembly

should be conducted in the following manner :

a. Barrel Group . To disassemble the caliber 50 machinegun ,

turn the cover latch shaft lever and raise the cover group .
Grasp the retracting slide handle with the left hand , palm
down , push the recoiling parts to the rear until the outer
lug on the barrel locking spring alines with the 3/8 - inch
hole in the right sideplate of the receiver . The barrel can
be turned only when the locking lug is alined with the
3/8 - inch hole . Be careful not to damage the threads or bar-
rel locking notches . Unscrew the barrel and place it on the
ground . Allow the bolt to go forward slowly . Care must be
taken to prevent the bolt group from slamming forward with
the barrel removed .

b. Backplate Assembly . To remove the backplate assembly , insure

that the bolt latch release is up . If it is not , push down
on the bolt latch release and turn the buffer tube sleeve
clockwise until the bolt latch releases . The bolt must be
forward before the backplate assembly is removed . If the
bolt is to the rear , push down on the bolt latch release and
let the bolt ride forward by holding the retracting slide
handle . The backplate latch and the latch lock are below the
buffer tube .. Pull out on the latch lock and up on the
latch ; remove the backplate assembly by lifiting it straight
up .

3-56
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
C. Driving Spring Rod Assembly . The inner and outer driving
springs and the driving spring rod are located next to the
right sideplate , inside the receiver . Push in on the head of
the driving spring rod and turn it to the sideplate . Pull
the driving spring rod assembly to the rear and out of the
receiver . A slight pressure is exerted on the driving spring
when the bolt is forward ; however , never attempt to cock the
gun while the backplate is off and the driving spring assem-
bly is in place . If the backplate is off and the driving
spring assembly is compressed , the retaining pin on the
driving spring rod can slip from its seat in the right side-
plate and injure anyone behind the gun .

d. Shoulder Headless Pin ( Bolt-Stud) . Grasp the retracting

slide handle and give it a quick jerk , halfway to the rear ,
to free the bolt from the barrel extension and move the bolt
halfway to the rear . Aline the collar of the bolt stud with
the clearance hole in the bolt slot on the right sideplate
and remove the bolt stud to the right . If the bolt is acci-
dentally moved all the way to the rear , the bolt latch will
engage in the bolt latch notches in the top of the bolt . If
this occurs , raise the bolt latch and push the bolt forward
to aline the bolt stud with the clearance hole .

e. Bolt Group . After freeing the bolt , slide it from the rear
of the receiver . Place the bolt down on its side .

f. Barrel Buffer Group and Barrel Extension Group . To remove

the barrel buffer group and barrel extension group , insert a
pointed instrument through the hole in the lower left corner
of the right sideplate . Push in on the barrel buffer body
spring lock . At the same time , place one hand inside the
receiver and push the barrel extension group and buffer
group to the rear . Remove the barrel buffer group to the
rear . Remove the barrel buffer group and barrel extension
group from the receiver . Separate the two groups by pushing
forward on the accelerator tips .

g. Barrel Buffer Assembly . Pull the barrel buffer assembly from

the rear of the buffer body group . The buffer assembly will
not be disassembled . This completes general disassembly for
limited cleaning and replacement of groups .

2. Maintenance and Inspection , Care , cleaning , and maintenance de-

termine whether or not the gun will function properly when
needed . The bore and chamber must be properly maintained to pre-
serve accuracy . Because of the close fit of working surfaces and
the high speed at which the gun operates , the receiver and mov-
ing parts must be kept clean , correctly lubricated , and free
from burrs , rust , dirt , or grease to insure proper efficient
functioning .

3-57
FM 5-12B1 /2
a. Mount Maintenance . The care , cleaning , lubrication , and ad-
justment of the mount used with the gun are no less impor-
tant . The functioning of the gun and mount together deter-
mine overall effectiveness . All accessories and equipment
used with the gun and mount , including ammunition , must be
properly maintained .

b. Maintenance System . To insure proper care of the machinegun ,

it is necessary to have a system of maintenace or a standing
operating procedure ( SOP) for the frequency of cleaning .
Each gun should be cleaned as soon after firing as possible
and each time it is exposed to field conditions . Under com-
bat conditions , the gun should be cleaned and oiled daily .
Under extreme climatic and combat conditions , it may be nec-
essary to clean and lubricate more frequently . Under ideal
conditions , where the gun is not used and is stored on a
clean , dry place , it may only be necessary to inspect ,
clean , and lubricate every 5 days . The gun should be disas-
sembled , cleaned and lubricated every 5 days . The gun should
be disassembled , cleaned , and oiled in a clean , dry loca-
tion , where it is least exposed to moisture , dirt , etc.
Maintenance and preparation for storage over a longer period
of time is covered in ordnance regulations ( Ord 3SNL A- 1 ) .
If possible , keep the gun covered with a gun cover , canvas ,
tarpaulin , and poncho when not in use .

3. Cleaning Materials .

a. Rifle bore cleaner is used to clean the bore of the machine-

gun barrel after firing . Immediately after using bore
cleaner . dry the bore and any parts of the gun exposed to
the bore cleaner; then apply a thin coat of special preser-
vative lubricating oil .

b. When bore cleaner is not available , hot or cold water can be

used ; however , warm , or hot , soapy water is recommended .
After using soap and water , dry the barrel and apply a thin
coat of special preservative lubricating oil .

4. Lubricating .

a. Special preservative lubricating oil ( PL ) is a thin oil used

for lubricating at normal and low temperatures and for pro-
viding temporary protection against rust . The entire gun can
be lubricated with this oil .

b. Lubricating oil ( LSA) should be used to lubricate all fric-

tion- producing parts of the gun as well as exterior parts
exposed the the elements . LSA will not burn off during fir-
ing or wash off during rain .

c.
Cold climates ( consistently below 0 degrees F. ) : Lubricate
the gun with lubricating oil , Arctic weather ( LAW) and keep

3-58
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
see
it coverd as much as possible . For further information ,
TM 9-207 and FM 31-70 .

d. Hot , humid climates : Inspect the gun more frequently for

signs of rust . Keep the gun free of moisture and lightly
oiled with lubricating oil ( LSA) .

5. Care and Cleaning Before , During , and After Firing .

a. Before firing ( when the situation permits ) , take the follow-
ing steps to insure efficient functioning of the machinegun :

(1 ) Disassemble the gun into its major groups or assem-

blies .

(2) Clean the bore and chamber , but do not oil them .

(3 ) Clean all metal parts thoroughly and apply a light coat

of oil to all metal parts which do not come in contact
with the ammunition .

b. To insure complete removal of powder residue and primer

fouling from the bore of the machinegun barrel , the bore
should be cleaned once each day , for at least three consecu-
tive days after firing . The bore sweats out this fouling or
residue , and cleaning must be repeated until there is no
further evidence of sweating .

6. Care and Cleaning Under Unusual Climatic Conditions . Extreme

cold , hot , dry , and tropical climates affect the gun and its
functioning . Care should be taken under these climatic condi-
tions to insure that the gun is cleaned daily with the pre-
scribed lubricants and protected from the elements by some sort
of cover if possible . Further information on care and cleaning
of the gun under unusual climatic conditions can by found in TM
9-1005-213-10 .

7. Assembly . To assemble the machinegun , replace the groups and

assemblies in reverse order of removal in disassembly .
8. Ammunition . Ammunition should be clean and dry . One belt of am-
munition should remain attached to the weapon , and all other
ammunition remains in the can until use is imminent .
REFERENCES :

FM 23-65 , Browning Machinegun , Caliber .50 HB , M2

FM 31-70 , Basic Cold Weather Manual
FM 9-207 , Operation and Maintenance of Ordnance Material in Cold
Weather
TM 9-1005-213-10 , Operator's Manual : Machinegun , Caliber .50 Brown-
ing , M2
TEC Lesson :
941-071-0116 -F , Caliber .50 Machinegun , Mechanical Training
3-59
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9206

TASK:

Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear a caliber .50 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

Given an assembled and cleared caliber .50 machinegun , a belt of

linked caliber 50 ammunition , and requirement to expend all
a

rounds in the belt . ( A dummy round may be inserted in the belt for
training purposes . )
STANDARDS :

1. Situation 1 : Load and fire the weapon within 10 seconds .

2. Situation 2 : When a stoppage occurs , it must be eliminated by

using immediate action and the next round fired within 10 sec-
onds ( but only if round is ejected) . Then fire all remaining
rounds .

3. Situation 3 : Unload and clear weapon within 10 seconds .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Loading .

a. Insure bolt is forward and cover closed .

b. Insert double loop end of belt in feedway until the first

round is engaged by belt holding pawl .
C. Jerk retracting slide handle to the rear and release it . ( If
bolt latch release is up , return retracting slide handle to
forward position and then release bolt . ) The gun is now
"half- loaded " .

d. To complete loading , jerk retracting slide handle to the

rear a second time and release it . When bolt goes forward
for the second time , the gun is loaded .

2. Unloading and Clearing .

a. Unlock bolt latch release ( if applicable) and raise cover .

b. Lift ammunition belt from feedway .

C. Pull bolt to rear .

d. Insure T- slot and chamber hold no rounds .

3. Firing ( single - shot and automatic ) .

3-60
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
a. Single shot -keep bolt latch release in the up position and
release it manually for each round , then push trigger .
b. Automatic- lock bolt latch release down with bolt latch re-
lease lock .

CAUTION :

Never close cover with bolt to the rear .

Never allow bolt to go forward freely with the barrel out of the
gun . Ease it forward with retracting slide handle .

4. Immediate action : Immediate action is the action taken to reduce

a stoppage without investigating the cause . This action must be
accomplished within 10 seconds when the barrel is hot enough to
cause a cookoff . Two hundred rounds fired in a 2-minute period
may heat the barrel sufficiently to cause a cookoff .

a. If a stopage occurs , immeduately pull the retracting slide

handle to the rear and release it ; observe if the round is
ejected .

b. If a round is ejected , press the trigger and attempt to

fire . If the weapon does not fire and the barrel is hot
enough to cause a cookoff , wait 15 minutes with the bolt in
the forward position to preclude damage or injury in the
event of a cookoff .

c. If a round is not ejected , or after the 15-minute waiting

period , clear the weapon and perform remedial action- inspect
the weapon and the ammunition to determine the cause of the
stoppage .

d. After performing remedial action , reload , re- lay on the tar-

get , and attempt to fire .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-65 , Browning Machinegun , Caliber .50 , M2

TM 9-1005-213-10 , Operator's Manual : Machinegun , Caliber .50 , Brown-
ing , M2
TEC Lesson :
941-071-0119 -F , Caliber .50 Machinegun , Firing
TEC Lesson :
941-071-0116-F , The Cal.50 MG : Mechanical Training

3-61
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9205

TASK:

Target confirm targeting on a caliber .50 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , on a live fire range , given an M3 tripod-mounted

caliber •
50 HB , M2 machinegun , a target located between 400 and
1,000 meters from the firing position , and a 15 -round belt of ammu-
nition .

STANDARD :

Firing single rounds , using no more than the 15 rounds provided ,

adjust the windage and elevation until a round impacts on the tar-
get .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. During targeting/ zeroing , select a target between 400-1,000 me-

ters from the gun position .

2. Place the selected range on the rear sight and aline the windage
index ( windage zero ) .

3. Place the weapon on single shot .

4. Lay gun on target using the traversing and elevating ( T&E) mech-
anism .

5. Fire a single round at the target and note where the round hits .

6. Making necessary corrections while looking through the rear

sight , move the rear sight (windage and elevation) so that the
front sight blade is alined with the point of impact of the
round .

7. Re- lay on the target using the T&E mechanism .

8. Fire a confirming round . If the adjustments were correct , the

round will hit the target .

9. If the confirming round does not hit the target , repeat the same
procedures until targeting is completed or until the 15-round
belt has been expended .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-65 , Browning Machinegun , Caliber .50 HB , M2

TEC Lesson:
941-071-0118 -F , Caliber .50 Machinegun Field Zeroing

3-62
 FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9207

TASK:

Engage targets with a caliber .50 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , on a live fire range with stationary targets

(double E- type silhouettes - l linear , 1 linear with depth , 1 deep
target ) at ranges of 400 , 600 , and 800 meters and a moving target
(4'x6 ' panel) moving at 10 mph at a 45 degree angle to the firing
line at a range of 1,000 meter , given caliber .50
machinegun , one belt of 150 rounds of caliber .50 4xl ammunition and
a requirement to engage all four targets ( approximately 30 rounds
for each stationary and 60 for the moving target ) .
STANDARDS :

The gunner will hit :

1. At least 2 of the 3 stationary targets with a minimum of 2

rounds each .

2. The moving target with minimum of 3 rounds .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Sighting and aiming . When firing from the cupola mount the gun-
ner does not use the sights , he looks over the top of the weapon
and adjusts his fire to the target by the strike of the bullets
on the ground .

2. Observation and adjustment of fire .

a. Observation . The strike of the bullets on the ground may
cause dust to rise which is visible to the gunner ; however ,
during wet weather tracers must be used .

b. Adjustment . The gunner fires low , in front of the target ,

then by changing his body position , walks the strike of the
rounds onto the target . He should fire an 8-10 round burst
each time .

3. Tracking and Leading . The technique of engaging a moving target

is similar to that of engaging a stationary target . However ,
intitially the gun must be oriented ahead of the target a suffi-
cient distance to cause the bullet and target to arrive simulta-
neously at the same point .

4. Cupola ( free gun) firing . The gunner must grasp both spade grips
firmly , lock both elbows to his sides and press his chest
against the spade grips to hold the weapon steady . This position

3-63
FM 5-12B1 / 2

must be maintained throughout firing of each burst , no sights

are employed .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-65 , Browning Machinegun Caliber .50 HB , M2

TEC Lesson :
941-071-0119 -F , The Cal.50 MG : Firing
TEC Lesson:

914-071-0125 -F , Machinegun Target Engagement and Introduction

3-64
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9208

TASK :

Set headspace and timing on a caliber •

50 machinegun .

CONDITIONS :

Given an assembled caliber 50 machinegun ( track or tripod mounted)

with incorrect headspace and timing , and a headspace and timing
gage .

STANDARDS :

Within 10 minutes , the following conditions must be obtained once

the gun is cocked and the bolt is forward :

1. Headspace -With the retracting slide handle pulled back 1/ 16- inch
(so that the barrel extension is not resting against the trun-
nion block ) , the GO end of the headspace gage will enter the
T- slot and the NO GO end will not ( figure 1 ) .

2. Timing-With the NO FIRE timing gage inserted between the barrel

extension and the trunnion block ( with the beveled edge of the
gage on the barrel notches ) , the firing pin will not release
when the trigger is depressed . When the NO FIRE timing gage is
replaced by the FIRE gage , the firing pin will release when the
trigger is depressed ( figure 2) .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Headspace Adjustment with the Gage .

a. Raise the cover . Retract the recoiling parts and screw the
barrel all the way into the barrel extension , then loosen
the barrel a measure of two notches or clicks .

b. Pull the retracting slide handle to its rearmost position .

Hold the handle to the rear and press the bolt latch re-
lease , allowing the bolt to go forward slowly to prevent
damage of parts .
NOTE : Be careful note to depress the trigger , since this will cause the
firing pin to be released .

The firing pin should never be released with the gage in the T-slot as

this could damage the firing pin and gage .

c.
Pull the retracting slide handle back until the barrel ex-

tension is 1 / 16- inch from the trunnion block ( figure 1 ) .

d. Insert the GO end and the NO GO end of the headspace gage in

the T- slot . If the GO end of the gage enters freely down to

3-65
FM 5-12B1 /2
the center ring on the gage and the NO GO end does not en-
ter , headspace is correct ( figure 1 ) .
e. If the GO end of the gage does not enter freely , the barrel
must be unscrewed one notch ( or click) at a time ( check with
the gage after each notch) , until the GO end of the gage
enters freely . To complete the adjustment , attempt to insert
the NO GO end of the gage . If it does not enter , headspace
is correct .

f. If the NO GO end of the gage enters the T- slot , headspace is

too loose . The barrel must be screwed into the barrel exten-
sion ( one click at a time ) , checking with the gage after
each click , until the GO end enters and the NO GO end does
not .

EXTRACTOR

BOLT

HEADSPACE GAGE

Figure1. Inserting the headspace gage

3-66
 FM 5-12B1 /2

BARREL EXTENSION |

EXTRACTOR

TIMING GAGE
TRUNNION BLOCK

Figure2. Inserting the timing gage

2. Checking and/ or Setting Timing .

a. After headspace has been set insure the weapon is cocked and
all moving parts are fully forward . Then push back on the
retracting slide handle with the left hand , making a large
enough separation between the trunnion block and the barrel
extension to insert the " FIRE " gage . Place the beveled edge
of the gage against the barrel notches , then allow the bolt
to go forward by releasing the retracting slide handle .

b. The next step is to remove the backplate . To remove the

backplate you must pull out on the backplate latch lock and
up on the backplate latch and spade grips .

c. Inside the back of the receiver you will see the trigger
lever and timing adjustment nut . Screw the timing adjustment
nut down , to the left , until it rests lightly on the trigger
lever . Apply strong pressure upward on the trigger lever
with your thumb , the weapon should not fire .
d. To set timing , turn the timing adjustment nut up , or to the
right , one click at a time . After each click apply strong
pressure upward on the trigger lever , attempting to release
the firing pin .

3-67
FM 5-12B1 / 2

e. When you hear the weapon fire , turn the timing adjustment
nut up two additional clicks . The reason for the additional
clicks is , there are six clicks of timing between early and
late timing . The weapon has already fired on the first
click , two more will give you a total of three clicks and
approximate center of the proper timing adjustment .

f. Replace the backplate , remove the "FIRE" gage and recock the
weapon . Then push the bolt latch release and ease the bolt
forward .

g. Move to the side of the weapon and push back on the retract-
ing slide handle and insert the " NO FIRE " gage in the same
place the " FIRE" gage was , between the barrel extension and
the trunnion block . The beveled edge of the gage should be
against the barrel notches .

h. Depress the trigger , the weapon should not fire . If the fir-
ing pin is released , the timing is too early . If early tim-
ing exists , the gun will fire two rounds and stop firing
because the extractor does not come far enough forward to
extract another round .

i. To correct early timing , remove the backplate and turn the

timing adjustment nut all the way down until it rests
lightly on the trigger lever and begin again . This time in-
sure that you press up firmly on the trigger lever and begin
again . This time insure that you press up firmly on the
trigger lever each click . If the firing pin does not release
when the " NO FIRE" gage is inserted , remove it and reinsert
the " FIRE" gage. If the firing pin is released when the
trigger is depressed proper timing has been set .

j. There is a field expedient method for setting headspace ;

however , this field expedient method will not be used in
training . To set headspace using the field expedient method ,
screw the barrel in all the way and back off two clicks or
notches . Fire the weapon , if the weapon fires sluggishly ,
unscrew the barrel one more notch , and only one notch and
proceed to fire the weapon .

(1 ) One dime or one dog tag can be used as a " FIRE" gage .
(2) For a " NO FIRE" gage , one nickle and one dime or four
dog tags may be used .

3-68
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
REFERENCES :

FM 23-65 , Browning Machinegun Caliber .50 HB , M2

TM 9-1005-213-10 , Operator's Manual : Machinegun , Caliber .50
Browning , M2
TEC Lesson :
941-071-0117 -F , Caliber •
50 Machinegun , Headspace and Timing

3-69
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9296

TASK:

Maintain 90-MM RCLR .

CONTITIONS :

Given a 90 -mm recoilless rifle , a contour brush , artillery clean-

ing brush ; clean , dry rags ; dry cleaning solvent or mineral spirits ,
and preservative lubricating ( PL ) ( Special ) oil .

STANDARDS :

Within 30 minutes ;

1. Field strip the weapon .

2. Inspect weapon for unserviceable parts .

3. Clean all parts of weapon of foreign particles that will hinder

operation .

4. Lubricate weapon with a light coat of oil .

5. Reassemble weapon .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. General Disassembly of Weapon ( figure 1 ) .

a. Make sure weapon is cleared and not cocked .

b. With breechblock in the closed and locked position , unscrew

firing pin cap and remove firing pin spring .

C.
Rotate the safety 45 degrees counterclockwise from the FIRE
position ; pull up and remove .

d. Pull the hinge block end of the cable assemply forward and
remove it from the hinge block .

e. Unlock and open breechblock . Push downward on hinge pin and

remove both , taking care to keep the breechblock in upward
position •

f. Remove extractor link and extractor .

g. To prevent the sear from dropping down and blocking the

lockring , hold the breechblock with the hinge portion up ,
depress the detent plunger and spring , rotate the lockring
counterclockwise , and remove .

3-70
 FM 5-12B1 /2
h. Turn the breechblock over and remove the sear .

i. Remove the detent plunger and spring .

j. Insert the small end of the hinge pin into the rearward end
of the breechblock housing . Remove the firing hammer and
hammer bushing from the front of the breechblock housing .

2
(1) 7
10
( )
3
11

5 13

4
(1)

6
0
1- FIRING PIN CAP 7 - EXTRACTOR
9
② 2- FIRING PIN SPRING 8 - LOCKRING
3- RECOILLESS RIFLE SAFETY 9 -SEAR
4-HINGE PIN 10- DETENT PLUNGER AND SPRING
5- BREECHBLOCK 12
-HAMMER BUSHING
6- EXTRACTOR LINK 13 -HINGE BLOCK

Figure1.

2. Inspection of Weapon .
a. An external inspection of the weapon is conducted to deter-
mine if it is damaged beyond safe or serviceable limits .
b. Inspect to insure that weapon is assembled correctly ( sec-
tion II , FM 23-11 ) .

c. Inspect for excessively worn components which may result in

a failure to fire .

3. Cleaning and Lubricating Weapon .

a. Use dry cleaning solvent or mineral spirits ( paint thinner)
to clean grease or oil from all metal parts , except those
exposed to powder fouling during firing .
b. Use rifle bore cleaner to clean all armament parts which
have been exposed to powder fouling . After using bore
cleaner , wipe dry and oil lightly .
c. After all parts are cleaned , rinse and dry them thoroughly .
Apply preservative lubricating ( PL ) ( Special ) oil to all

3-71
FM 5-12B1 /2

polished metal surfaces , other than optical equipment .

4. Assembly of Weapon ( figure 1 ) .

a. Holding the breechblock with the hinge portion up , install
hammer brushing and firing hammer .

b. Replace the sear .

C. Replace the detent plunger and spring .

d. While holding the breechblock with the hinge portion up ,

depress the detent plunger and install the lockring , turning
it clockwise until tight ; then turn counterclockwise until
two distinct clicks are heard .

e. Install the extractor and extractor link .

f. With the extractor link in its full extract position , in-

stall the breechblock , making sure that the hinge portion of
the breechblock enters the opening in the hinge block and
engages the recess in the extractor link .

g. Aline the hinge pin holes in the breechblock and hinge

block , then install the hinge pin .

h. Install the cable assembly in the hinge block with the

notched portion that will mate with the safety facing away
from the rifle tube .

i. Position the recoilless rifle safety 45 degrees clockwise

from the FIRE position , push downward , and rotate it clock-
wise to the FIRE position .

j. Install the firing pin spring and firing pin cap .

REFERENCE :

FM 23-11 , 90-mm Recoilless Rifle , M67

3-72
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9298

TASK:

Load , reduce a stoppage , unload , and clear 90 -MM RCLR .

CONDITIONS :

As assistant 90 -mm RCLR gunner , given one other man to act as gun-
ner, cleared , assembled , and boresighted 90 -mm RCLR , one round
(practice) ammunition , a general firing position , an initial fire
command , and a requirement to assist the gunner while engaging a
target .

STANDARDS :

1. Situation 1 : Loader must load and give gunner an " UP " signal
within 60 seconds .

2. Situation 2 : When a stoppage occurs , loader must eliminate stop-

age by using immediate action and give the gunner "UP" within 30
seconds .

3. Situation 3 : Loader must unload and clear weapon within 60 sec-

onds .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

This is a team task : you will be assisted by at least one other

squad member .

1. Loading .

a. Gunner :

(1) Assume a gunner's position ( left side of weapon ) .

( 2) Lay rifle on designated target by adjusting monopod and

bipod ; place right hand on trigger grip .

b. Loader :

(1) Assume a loader's position ( right side of weapon) .

(2) Hold rifle while gunner places his body in position and
adjusts the monopod and bipod .

(3 ) Open the breech , insuring that chamber is clear .

(4) Insert round into chamber , seating it firmly .

(5 ) Close and lock breech .

3-73
FM 5-12B1 / 2
(6 ) Inspect backblast area to insure that it is clear .
(NOTE : Backblast area will be clear . )

(7) Rotate safety to the "F" position .

(8 ) Tap gunner and call "UP" .

c. Gunner fires a designated target , upon command .

2. Unloading and Clearing .

a. Loader:

(1) Open breech and eject expended cartridge .

(2) Inspect chamber ( NOTE: Clear it if necessary . )

(3 ) Call " CLEAR" , and close breech .

(4) Take rifle from gunner's grasp .

b. Gunner :

(1 ) Adjust monopod .

(2) Adjust bipod for shoulder carry .

3. Immediate Action .

a. When the rifle fails to fire , the gunner releases pressure

on the trigger and calls "MISFIRE" . The loader repeats " MIS-
FIRE " , and waits 1 minute . Then the loader unlocks and locks
the breech and calls " UP " . The gunner attempts to fire .

b. Should the rifle fail to fire , the gunner releases pressure

on the trigger and calls "MISFIRE" . The loader repeats "MIS-
FIRE " , and again waits 1 minute . Then the loader opens the
breech and unloades , being careful to catch the round as it
is extracted .

NOTE : If the rifle has been fired continuously for a considerable

length of time , it becomes hot . This might cause the propellent charge
to ignite by cookoff . If the rifle is hot , cool with water before remov-
ing the cartridge . If water is not available , all personnel will leave
their positions until the rifle has cooled ( training only ) .

4. Reduction of Stoppages .

a. If the rifle has misfired a second time and immediate action

procedures fail to reduce the stoppages , it is necessary to
apply additional measures .

3-74
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

b. After unloading the cartridge and placing it in a safe area ,

the gunner and loader should consider the following ques-
tions in determining the cause of the stoppage :

(1 ) What type of stoppage is this ?

(2) What causes this type of stoppage ?

(3) What parts have failed to function ?

C.•
After determining the cause , corrective action is taken .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-11 , 90 -mm Recoilless Rifle , M67

TM 9-1015-223-12 , Operator and Organizational Maintenance
Manual , 90-mm Recoilless Rifle , M67

3-75
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9297

TASK:

Boresight the 90 -MM RCLR .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , given a 90 -mm RCLR , two pieces of thread , a bore-

sight disk , and a selected target beyond 400 meters .
STANDARDS :

Within 5 minutes , aline both the sight and bore on the same target .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Four notches , 90 -degrees apart , are located on the muzzle end of

the 90-mm RCLR . Place two pieces of thread across opposite
notches . The point of intersection marks the axis of the bore at
the muzzle end of the weapon .

2. Insert a boresight disk in the chamber to determine the axis of

the bore at the breech .

3. Select an aiming point beyond 400 meters to any likely target .

With the eye held several inches behind the breech , aline the
axis of the bore on the aiming point by elevating and traversing
the rifle .

4. Look through the telescope and insure that the boresight cross
of the sight reticle is alined on the same aiming point . If the
boresight is not alined , bring it to the aiming point by rotat-
ing the elevation and azimuth correction screws with the screw-
driver end of the combination wrench . Recheck the alinement
through the bore and through the sight . When the sight and the
bore are properly alined on the aiming point , the 90 -mm RCLR is
boresighted ( figure 1 ) .

3-76
 FM 5-12B1 /2

THIS IS WHAT YOU SEE

THROUGH THE SIGHT

THIS IS WHAT YOU SEE

THROUGH THE BORE

Figure1.

REFERENCE :

FM 23-11 , 90-mm Recoiless Rifle , M67

3-77
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9299

TASK:

Prepare range card for 90MM RCLR .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , in a firing position , given a 90 -mm RCLR , a desig-

nated sector of fire , paper , pencil , and compass .
STANDARDS :

Within 10 minutes , prepare a range card which includes a range

sketch of sector of fire consisting of :

1. The weapon position plotted from a known point .

2. Unit designation , time and date of preparation .

3. Dead space .

4. Maximum range line - 400 meters .

5. Sector of fire .

6. Range in meters to likely avenues of approach and covered posi-

tions which are recognizable manmade objects or natural terrain
features , within sector of fire .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. A range card ( figurel ) is an oriented sketch prepared for each

rifle . It shows the position of the rifle , magnetic north ,
ranges , elevations , and directions to prominent terrain feature
by determining the magnetic azimuth from the terrain feature s
and probable targets . By showing the ranges and directions to
nearby objects , it enables the rifle crew to determine quickly
and accurately the data necessary to engage any target in the
sector .

2. Range cards make it possible to fire during periods of limited

visibility and to transfer available information to men of the
relieving unit . The next higher command sometimes uses the range
cards in coordinating fires . Make the range card in at least two
copies and send one to the next higher unit .

3-78
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

STAKE
BLUE
MAG
AZ
G S
R T M
E A A
E K G AZ
N E

3395
850
E
D AK G

M
A

M
1 RE ST00 M AZ
2 7 M
0 M
0 45
2
4 40 M
5 M
0
RIGHT LIMIT OF SECTOR
LEFT LIMIT OF SECTOR --

MAG AZ 5025
MAG AZ 1925 MA 2
G AZ 300 M

GUN
RJ 213
POSITION
1stAT SQD
CO "A"
12JUL 75

Figure 1. 90-mm RCLR Range Card.

3. Construction of Range Cards . Write the unit designation and the

date in one corner of a piece of paper of suitable size . Next ,
place a dot in the approximate center of the piece of paper to
denote the rifle position . Draw a straight line through the dot
to represent magnetic north and so label the line . Identify the
rifle position in relation to some prominent terrain feature by
determining the magnetic azimuth from the terrain feature to the
rifle . Ascertain the distance between them . Plot the location of
this feature on the range card and make a simple sketch of it .
Draw a straight line from it to the rifle , and record along the
line the azimuth and distance from the feature to the rifle .

NOTE :

1. When the 90-mm RCLR is deployed in the defense and a frontal

parapet is used , dead space for the parapet must be shown on the
range card .

2. All range cards will be prepared while sitting behind the weapon
and in the firing position .

REFERENCE :

FM 23-82 , 106 -mm Recoilless Rifle M40A2

(NOTE : No reference for 90 -mm RCLR; Range card for 106 -mm RCLR is
applicable . )

3-79
FM 5-12B1 /2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9300

TASK:

Engage targets with 90-MM RCLR .

CONDITIONS :

During daylight , on a 25-meter subcaliber range , given a 90-mm RCLR

with caliber 7.62 subcaliber device , 400 rounds of caliber 7.62 -mm
ammunition , a requirement to fire course C for qualification firing ,
and equipment as outlined in FM 23-11 for course C.

STANDARD :

Obtain a minimum score of 230 , firing tables I and II twice within

10 minutes .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Range Determination .

a. Range Estimation . The primary method of estimating range

with the 90 -mm RCLR is to use the stadia lines . Stadia lines
are curved lines inscribed on the reticle . They measure dis-
tances by means of angles . To estimate range , the gunner
adjusts the lay of the rifle until the target exactly fits
between the stadia lines . The point on the vertical ( range )
line of the reticle , that corresponds to the center of mass
of the target , indicates the range . The targets in figures 1
and 2 are at a range of 275 meters .

0 0 0 0
100 100 100 100

200 200 200 200

300 300 300 300

400 400 400 -400

500 500 500 500

600 600 600 -600

700 700 700 700

.......
800
.........
.... 800 800 ......... ‫ייין‬ 800

RANGE 275 METERS RANGE 275 METERS

HALF STADIA PICTURE FULL STADIO PICTURE

Figure1. Figure2.

3-80
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
b. Apparent Speed Estimation ( figure 3 ) . The speed at which a
target seems to move toward or away from the line of sight
is called apparent speed . In figure 3 , Tank A has no appa-
rent speed no matter how fast it is moving becausee it is
moving directly toward the gunner . Tank Bhas an apparent
speed equal to its actual speed because it is moving perpen-
dicular to the gunner's line of sight . Tank C , moving at the
oblique , has an apparent speed less than its actual speed .

(APPARENT SPEED - THE SPEED AT WHICH A

TARGET SEEMS TO MOVE TOWARD OR
AWAY FROM THE LINE OF SIGHT)
O LEADS
2LEADS 2LEADS
4 LEADS 4 LEADS

APPARENT 11 12 1
2
SPEED 10
6 LEADS -9 -3- 6 LEADS
MEASURED |
ALONG
NOTE: LEADS ( 5 MILS)
THIS LINE FOR ANGLES OTHER THAN
90' MUST BE ESTIMATED
ON THE SIGHT RETICLE

GUN POSITION GUN POSITION GUN POSITION

TANK A TANK B TANK C

Determining apparent speed Common lead rule

Figure3. Figure4

c. Lead Estimation ( figure 4 ) .

(1) A moving target is lead by the distance it travels from

the time the rifle is fired until the projectile
crosses the path of the target . The number of leads
applied varies with the apparent speed of the target ,
but not the range .

(2) One lead is applied on the sight reticle for each 2 1/2
miles per hour of apparent speed of the target .

(3) As a common lead rule , the number of leads required is

determind by the direction the target is moving in re-
lation to the gun position ( figure 4 ) . Target speed is
assumed to be 15 miles per hour . If the target is mov-
ing directly toward or away from the gun position , no
leads are required .

2. Adjustment of Fire using Burst - On - Target .

a. Use a stationary target between 250-400 meters away . Mark
the burst of the round on the sight reticle . Round will be
over or short .

3-81
FM 5-12B1 / 2

b. Move the burst on the sight reticle to the center of mass of

the target .

REFERENCES :

FM 23-11 , 90-mm Recoilless Rifle , M67

TM 9-1015-223-12 , Operator and Organizational Maintenance
Manual , 90 -mm Recoilless Rifle , M67

3-82
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9275

TASK:

Prepare MAW position .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , given load- bearing equipment with bayonet , scabbard ,

intrenching tool , poncho , and Dragon or 90-mm RCLR ; the specific
location and sector of fire of the position to be constructed ( NOTE :
Position should afford natural cover such as mounds of earth ,
stumps , trees , rocks , etc. , and observation and fields of fire ) ;
logs to construct overhead cover ; and 4 hours to complete construc-
tion . NOTE : Time may be adjusted when soil and weather conditions
make.construction of positions particularly difficult .
STANDARDS :

Within time specified , completed position must meet the following

specifications :

1. Cover-Affords protection from direct frontal small - arms fire ( by

means of natural or manmade frontal parapet one helmet high and
at least one M16 length deep) and from effects of indirect fire
( shrapnel ) ( normally requires at least 12 inches of dirt/ log
overhead protection) .

2. Concealment - Position cannot be easily detected from front ( e.g.

blends with surroundings well enough that an approaching soldier
approximately 35 meters to front (hand grenade range ) cannot
detect it ) .

3. Fields of Fire- Limiting stakes are emplaced and correctly define

sector of fire . Occupant in firing position has observation in
sector and fields of fire which have been cleared sufficiently ,
but which have not destroyed natural camouflage so that the ро-
sition can be detected as specified in para 2 .

4. Size and Shape :

a. Size / Shape for Dragon- Position is chest deep , 26 inches in

diameter ( round hole ) with a 6 - inch bipod platform 18 inches
deep ; provides a cave- like compartment with overhead cover
big enough for occupant to get under .

b. If additional vegetation must be used to break up the out-

line of the parapet , obtain some ( similar to that found near
your position) from far to the rear of your position with
root structure intact , if possible . Do not use so much vega-
tation that the position has more than the surrounding area .
Camouflage the holes or cuts from which vegetation was re-
moved .

3-83
FM 5-12B1 / 2
5. Optional - Position includes : grenade sump , sloping floor with
shallow trench to facilitate drainage , range card , and night
firing stakes .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

Construction of defensive positions for MAW should generally follow

this sequence ( figures 1 and 2 ) :

a. Obtain position location and sector of fire from your squad

leader . Put in sector - of- fire stakes .

b. Partially clear fields of fire within your sector and dig a

hasty hole for minimum protection . Be careful not to destroy
natural camouflage around your position . Save grass clumps ,
etc. , for camouflage later .

c. Next , dig in . For Dragon make the hole chest deep ; for the
90 -mm RCLR , make it armpit deep . If you have a natural fron-
tal parapet , carry away and camouflage the dirt from hole;
if not make the frontal parapet with hole dirt as shown in
figures 1 and 2 .

d. Complete clearing fields of fire . Clear only what is abso-

lutely necessary . Get in firing position and check observa-
tion and fields of fire . Save any cut foliage , dirt , grass
clumps , etc. , for camouflage of the position .

e. Camouflage the position using available materials ( e.g. ,

grass clumps , foliage , etc ) . Make your position blend into
surroundings . Check camouflage by moving 35 meters to the
front and observe the position . If you can spot it easily ,
you need more work on camouflage .

f. Construct overhead cover . Use logs , planks , etc , which will

support at least 12 inches of dirt . Dig a cave- like area big
enough to get under .

3-84
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

PARAPET

BIPOD
PLATFORM
18INCHES
DEEP

CHEST DEEP

PARAPET

TASK 5 CONSTRUCT OVERHEAD COVER

USE THE SAME STEPS

OVERHEAD
DISCUSSED ON PAGES 24
COVER
THRU 27 FOR CONSTRUCTING
OVERHEAD COVER

Figure 1.

3-85
FM 5-12B1 / 2

PARAPET
SECTOR O
SECTOR OF FIRE
FIRE

2M16'S
1M16
LONG
WIDE

BACKBLAST AREA

ARMPIT
DEEP

Figure2.

3-86
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
g. Improve position . Dig a grenade sump at a 45 -degree angle
and at least 2 feet deep . Slope floor of foxhole and dig
shallow trench to allow for drainage . Put in night firing
stakes and make a range card . Improve camouflage . Construct
alternate and secondary positions as directed by your squad
leader . Replace dead foliage as needed to maintain camou-
flage . Remember , you can always improve your position .
REFERENCES :

FM 23-3 , Tactics , Techniques and Concepts of Antiarmor Warfare

TC 7-50 , Fighting Positions for Infantry Soldiers

3-87
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9276

TASK:

Camouflage conceal MAW position .

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , given load - bearing equipment with bayonet , scabbard ,

intrenching tool , poncho , and MAW; the specific position to be
camouflaged ; and 1 hour to complete camouflaging .

NOTE : Time may be adjusted when conditions make camouflage of posi-

tions particularly difficult .
STANDARDS :

Within time specified , camouflaged position must not be easily de-

tected from the front ( e.g. , blends with surroundings well enough
that an approaching soldier approximately 35 meters to front (hand
grenade range ) cannot detect it ) , and it must be protected from ae-
rial observation ( all fresh dirt and other evidence of digging are
covered with grass , leaves , etc. , to blend with the surrounding
vegetation ) .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Approach the position only from the rear , insuring that a visi-
ble trail is not left . Circle around the position when moving to
the front so that a trail does not point out the position .

2. Do not litter the area , make unnecessary noise , or , during

hours of darkness , expose any light .

3. Do not disturb vegetation not used in constructing or camouflag-

ing the position . ( Be particularly careful with a vehicle if you
are a driver , to insure that the vehicle does not leave a trail
pointing out the position . )

4. During camouflaging :

a. Place sod from the position on the parapet in such a manner

that it looks natural and will have a good chance of grow-
ing .

b. If additional vegetation must be used to break up the out-

line of the parapet , obtain some ( similar to that found near
your position) from far to the rear of your position with
root structure intact , if possible , Do not use so much vega-
tation that the position has more than the surrounding area .
Camouflage the holes or cuts from which vegatation was re-
moved .

3-88
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

C. If the position is covered ( see figure 1 ) , camouflage it in

the same manner as the parapet . If it's not covered , you
must camouflage the position using camouflage nets or avail-
able brush , branches , etc. , so that it's not visible from
above ( see figure 2) .

d. Replace dying foliage constantly ; attempt to get sod , small

trees , plants , etc. , used as camouflage to grow , so that
the position will improve as time passes ( see figure 2 ) .

CANVAS OR OTHER MATERIAL

ABOUT 18 INCHES
OF DIRT

MINIMUM 4'

CLEARANCE

TIMBERS OR LOGS ABOUT 8 INCHES

IN DIAMETER

Figure1.

Remember , the position can always be improved .

5. After camouflaging :

a. Insure that the ground behind the MAW is free of leave and
dirt SO that when the weapon is fired , it won't leave an
obvious signature .
b. Do not leave any evidence of digging . Do not leave equipment
lying around . Everything must be concealed or camouflaged .

3-89
FM 5-12B1 / 2

!
-

WRONG

RIGHT

Figure2.

REFERENCES :

FM 5-15 , Field Fortifications

FM 5-20 , Camouflage
TC 7-50 , Fighting Positions For Infantry Soldiers
TC 23-24 , Assault Weapon System , M47 ( Dragon)

3-90
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9621

TASK : Perform operator maintenance on a wheeled vehicle .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with assigned vehicle , basic

issue items , an operator's TM for the vehicle , a lubrication order
for the vehicle , the vehicle logbook , TM 38-750 , and a DA Form 2404 .

STANDARDS :

The individual will :

1. Perform before- , during- , and after- operation maintenance on the

vehicle IAW instructions in the -10 TM .

2. Identify maintenance deficiencies / shortcomings and correct those

within the operator's capability .

3. Cross - reference uncorrectable faults against the DA Form

2408-14 .

4. Prepare a DA Form 2404 to notify organizational maintenance of

previously unreported uncorrectable faults or repairs which re-
quire a part .

5. Lubricate the vehicle IAW the lubrication order .

6. Perform troubleshooting procedures on the vehicle IAW the -10

TM .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Operator maintenance follows procedures outlined in the preven-

tive maintenance services section of the -10 TM .

2. To correct deficiencies / shortcomings , refer to the -10 TM .

3. Previously reported faults beyond the operator's capability to
repair or those requiring parts are recorded on the Uncorrected
Fault Record ( DA Form 2408-14 ) in the vehicle logbook . This form
is completed by organizational maintenance IAW procedures out-
lined in paragraph 4-13 of TM 38-750 : Do not fill out the -14 ;
record as outlined below .

4. Faults which the operator cannot correct or which require a part

are recorded on DA Form 2404 IAW procedures outlined in para-
graph 3-4 of TM 38-750 .

3-91
FM 5-12B1 / 2
5. The vehicle is lubricated IAW the instructions in the lubrica-
tion order .

6. Troubleshooting procedures are outlined in the troubleshooting

section of the -10 TM .

REFERENCES :

TEC Lesson:
510-091-6458 -F , Prepare and Maintain ESC Test and
Checks Part I
TEC Lesson :
510-091-6486 -F , Prepare and Maintain ESC Test and
Checks Part II
TM applicable to specific vehicle
LO applicable to specific vehicle

3-92
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9622

TASK:

Maintain required TAMMS records on a wheeled vehicle .

CONDITIONS :

Given DA Form 2404 , a vehicle logbook , TM 38-750 ; and specific in-

formation pertaining to a vehicle .

STANDARDS :

The individual will :

1. Complete operator entries on the DA Form 2404 IAW TM 38-750 .

2. Complete operator entries on the DA Form 2408-1 ( Daily) IAW TM

38-750 .

3. Compare any faults ( shortcomings ) given as pertaining to the

vehicle with those listed on the 2408-14 to determine if they
have been previously identified and corrective action was taken .

4. Extract data pertaining to unapplied modifications for the vehi-

cle from the DA Form 2408-5 .

5. Extract data pertaining to component miles/ hours from the DA

Form 2408-10 and DA Form 2408-1 ( Daily ) .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. DA Form 2404 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

3-4 of TM 38-750 .

2. DA Form 2408-1 ( Daily ) is prepared IAW procedures outlined in

paragraph 4-5 of TM 38-750 .

3. DA Form 2408-5 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

4-8 of TM 38-750 .

4. DA Form 2408-10 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

4-10 of TM 38-750 .

5. DA Form 2408-14 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

4-13 of TM 38-750 .

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )

TEC Lesson:
510-091-6458-F , Prepare and Maintain ESC Test and Checks , Part I
TEC Lesson :
510-091-6486 -F , Prepare and Maintain ESC Test and Checks , Part II

3-93
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9623

TASK:

Perform an ESC ( Equipment Serviceability Criteria) inspection on a

wheeled vehicle .

CONDITIONS : Under any environmental conditions , with assigned vehicle ,

appropriate tools , logbook ; ESC TM , -10 ( Operator's Manual ) , pencil / pen ,
and DA Form 2404's .

STANDARDS :

Within 2 hours , the vehicle operator will :

1. Perform an equipment serviceability criteria inspection on all
subsystems of the vehicle .

2. Determine and record on the appropriate DA Form 2404 the correct

color rating for each component and subsystem .

3. Assign the lowest subsystem rating to the overall system evalua-

tion .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

The conduct of the evaluation is prescribed in the TM for ESC . The

correct method of recording the results is explained in the TM for
ESC , and paragraph 3-4 of TM 38-750 . A lubrication order may assist
individuals in locating components .

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )

TM applicable to specific vehicle
ESC applicable to specific vehicle

3-94
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9624

TASK:

Perform operator maintenance on an APC .

CONDITIONS :

Under any environmental conditions , with assigned APC ( armored per-

sonnel ' carrier ) , basic issue items , TM 9-2300-257-10 , LO
9-2300-257-12 , the vehicle logbook , TM 30-750 , and DA Form 2404 .

STANDARDS :

The operator will :

1. Perform before- , during- , and after- operation maintenance on the

vehicle IAW instructions in the -10 TM .

2. Identify maintenance deficiencies / shortcomings and correct those

within the operator's capability .

3. Cross - reference uncorrectable faults against the DA Form

2408-14 .

4. Prepare a DA Form 2404 to notify organizational maintenance of

previously unreported correctable faults or repairs which re-
quire a part .

5. Lubricate the vehicle IAW the lubrication order .

6. Perform troubleshooting procedures on the vehicle IAW the -10

TM .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. Operator maintenance follows procedures outlined in the preven-

tive maintenance services section of TM 9-2300-257-10 ( chapter
3 , section III ) .

2. To correct deficiencies / shortcomings , refer to TM 9-2300-257-10 .

3. Previously reported faults beyond the operator's capability to

repair or those requiring parts are recorded on the Uncorrected
Fault Record (DA Form 2408-14) in the vehicle logbook . This form
is completed by organizational maintenance IAW procedures out-
lined in paragraph 4-13 of TM 38-750 . Do not fill out the -14 ;
record as outlined below .

4. Faults which the operator cannot correct or which require a part

are recorded on DA Form 2404 IAW procedures outlined in para-
graph 3-4 of TM 38-750 .

3-95
FM 5-12B1 / 2

5. The vehicle is lubricated IAW the instructions in LO

9-2300-257-12 .

6. Troubleshooting procedures are outlined in the troubleshooting

section of TM 9-2300-257-10 ( chapter 3 , section IV) .

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )

TM 9-2300-257-10 , Operator's Manual ( M113A1 )
LO 9-2300-257-12 , Lubrication Order ( M113A1 )
TEC Lesson :
945-171-0051 , Before Operator Maintenance ( M113A1 ) (M577A1 ) Part I
TEC Lesson :
945-171-0052 , Before Operator Maintenance ( M113A1 -M577A1 ) Part II
TEC Lesson :

945-171-0053 , During Operator Maintenance

(M113A1 /M577A1 )
TEC Lesson :

945-171-0054 , After Operator Maintenance (M113A1 /M577A1 ) .

3-96
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9625

TASK:

Maintain required TAMMS records on a tracked vehicle

CONDITIONS :

Given DA Form 2404 , a vehicle logbook , TM 38-750 and specific infor-

mation pertaining to a vehicle .

STANDARD :

The individual will :

1. Complete operator entries on the DA Form 2404 IAW TM 38-750 .

2. Complete operator entries on the DA Form 2408-1 (Daily ) IAW TM

38-750 .

3. Compare any faults ( shortcomings ) given as pertaining to the

vehicle with those listed on the 2408-14 to determine if they
have been previously identified and corrective action taken .

4. Extract data pertaining to unapplied modifications for the vehi-

cle from the DA Form 2408-5 .

5. Extract data pertaining to component miles /hours from the DA

Form 2408-10 and DA Form 2408-1 ( Daily ) .
PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

1. DA Form 2404 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

3-4 of TM 38-750 .

2. DA Form 2408-1 ( Daily) is prepared IAW procedures outlined in

paragraph 4-5 of TM 38-750 .

3. DA Form 2405-5 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

4-8 of TM 38-750 .

4. DA Form 2408-10 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

4-10 of TM 38-750 .

5. DA Form 2408-14 is prepared IAW procedures outlined in paragraph

4-13 of TM 38-750 .

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS)

TEC Lesson :
510-0901-6453 , Prepare and Maintain DA Form 2400

3-97
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TEC Lesson :
510-0901-6455 , Preparing Form SF91
TEC Lesson :

510-0901-6456 , Preparing and Using DA Form 2404

Part I
TEC Lesson :
510-0901-6457 , Preparing and Using DA Form 2404
Part II
TEC Lesson :

510-0901-6472 , Preparing , Consolidating , and Maintaining Form 2408-1

3-98
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9626

TASK:

Perform an ESC ( Equipment Serviceability Criteria) inspection on an

APC .

CONDITIONS : Under any environmental conditions , with assigned APC ( ar-

mored personnel carrier ) , appropriate tools , logbook , TM 9-2300-257 - ESC
(M113A1 ) TM 9-2300-257-10 ( Operator's Manual , M113A1 ) , LO 9-2300-257-12
(Lubrication Order , M113A1 ) , pencil/ pen , and DA Form , 2404 .
STANDARDS :

Within 4 hours , the vehicle operator will :

1. Perform an equipment serviceability criteria inspection on all
subsystems of the carrier .

2. Determine and record on the appropriate DA Form 2404 the correct

color rating for each component and subsystem .

3. Assign the lowest subsystem rating to the overall system evalua-

tion .

PERFORMANCE MEASURES :

The conduct of the evaluation is prescribed in TM 9-2300-257 -ESC .

The correct method of recording the results is explained in TM
9-2300-257 - ESC , and paragraph 3-4 of TM 38-750 . A lubrication order
may assist individuals in locating components .

REFERENCES :

TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )

TM 9-2300-200-10 , Operator's Manual ( M113A1 )
TM 9-2300-257 -ESC , ( M113A1 )
LO 9-2300-257-12 , Lubrication Order ( M113A1 )

3-99
FM 5-12B1 / 2
TASK NUMBER : 051-191-9627

TASK:

Operate an APC in water

CONDITIONS :

In daylight , at a field location with an unfordable water obstacle ,

given an operational APC ; TM 9-2300-257-10 ; SOP regulations ; safety
equipment as prescribed by TM 9-2300-257-10 and local SOP Regula-
tions .

STANDARDS :

Prepare and drive the APC across the water obstacle without
stalling .

PERFORMNCE MEASURES :

1. Before entry :

a. Check hull drain plugs , pipe plugs , and access plates .

b. Check bilge pump operation .

c. Insure track shrouds are properly installed and in good con-
dition .

d. Insure power plant door is secure .

e. Insure ramp door is secure .

f. Extend and lock trim vane .

g. Make certain periscopes are installed .

h. Turn on interior lights if tactical situation permits .

i. Close cargo and gunner's hatch covers , but not the driver's
hatch cover .

2. Entering water ( with bilge pump operating ) :

a. Do not enter water with waves higher than 1 foot .

b. Select firm , gradual slope ( if not designated ) , free of ob-

stacles .

c. Enter using 1 - range , not exceeding 10 mph .

3-100
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

d. Personnel safety -

Insure load is equally distributed . Know

emergency procedures . Top hatch covers may be opened after
the carrier is waterborne , except on mortar carriers . Accel-
erate and head for shore if carrier shows signs of flooding
or swamping .

3. Driving in water :

a. Shift to 1-2 range .

b. Steer carrier as on land using pivot steer levers instead of

differential steering .

c. Slow- flowing waters ( streams , rivers , bodies of water with

current less than 2 mph ) should be crossed diagonally ,
pointing APC up- current from intended exit point . Alternate
means of crossing are explained in TM 9-2300-257-10 .

4. Stopping in water :

a. Release accelerator pedal slowly while pulling back gently

on pivot steer levers to stop tracks .

b. Release levers ; shift to reverse .

C. Depress accelerator .

d. When carrier has stopped forward motion , release accelera-

tor , shift to neutral .

5. Leaving water :

a. Select exit point ( if not designated) with firm , clear sur-

face and gradual slope .

b. Approach shore so that both tracks strike land at the same

time .

c. Remove foot from accelerator before striking ground .

d. Shift to l-range when tracks strike ground .

e. Use pivot steer levers and l- range until carrier is out of

water .

f. Open hatch covers ( if closed) and retract trim vane .

g. When bilge is clear of water , stop bilge pumps .

REFERENCE :

TM 9-2300-257-10 , Operator's Manual ( Tracked Vehicle ) .

3-101
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
APPENDIX A

CONSOLIDATED LIST OF REFERENCES

Department of The Army Pamphlets (DA PAM)

310-1 Index of Administrative Publications ( Regulations ,
Circulars , Pamphlets , Posters , Joint Chief of
Staff publications , DOD and miscellaneous )
310-2 Index of Blank Forms
310-3 Index of Doctrinal , Training and Organizational
Publications
310-4 Index of Technical Manuals , Technical Bulletins ,
Supply Manuals ( types 7 , 8 , and 9 ) , Supply Bul-
letins and Lube Orders
310-6 Index of Supply Catalogs and Supply Manuals ( ex-
cluding types 7 , 8 , and 9)
310-12 Index and Description of Army Training Devices
350-43 The Soldier's Basic Combat Training Handbook

Field Manuals ( FM)

3-12 Operational Aspects of Radiological Defense

3-50 Chemical Smoke Generator Units and Smoke Opera-
tions
5-15 Field Fortifications
5-20 Camouflage
5-25 Explosives and Demolitions
5-31 ( C ) Boobytraps
5-34 Engineer Field Data
5-35 Engineer's Reference and Logistical Data
5-36 Route Reconnaissance and Classification
7-7 The Mechanized Infantry Platoon and Squad
7-10 The Rifle Company Platoons and Squads
7-20 The Infantry Battalions
17-1 Armor Operations
20-22 Vehicle Recovery Operations
20-32 Mine/ Countermine Operations at the Company Level
21-5 Military Training Management
21-6 How to Prepare and Conduct Military Training
21-10 Field Hygiene and Sanitation
21-11 First Aid for Soldiers
21-20 Physical Readiness Training
21-26 Map Reading
21-40 Chemical , Biological , Radiological and Nuclear
Defense
21-41 Soldiers Handbook for Defense Against Chemical and
Biological Operations and Nuclear Warfare
21-75 Combat Training of the Individual Soldier and Pa-
trolling

A- 1
FM 5-12B1 / 2

22-6 Guard Duty

22-100 Military Leadership
22-101 Leadership Counseling
23-3 Tactics , Techniques and Concepts of Antiarmor War-
fare
23-9 M16A1 Rifle and Rifle Marksmanship
23-30 Grenades and Pyrotechnic Signals
23-31 40mm Grenade Launchers M203 and M79
23-33 66mm Heat Rocket M72A1 , M72A2 and M72
23-67 Machinegun 7.62mm , M60
23-91 Mortar Gunnery
24-18 Field Radio Techniques
24-20 Field Wire and Field Cable Techniques
31-50 Combat in Fortified and Built -Up Areas
31-60 River - Crossing Operations
31-85 Rear Area Protection ( RAP ) Operations
90-7 Obstacles

Technical Manuals ( TM)

3-220 Chemical , Biological and Radiological ( CBR) Decon-

tamination
3-4240-258-14 Operator's Organizational DS and GS Support Main-
tenance Manual : Mask , Chemical - Biological , Field
M17Al and Accessories
5-200 Camouflage Materials
5-210 Military Floating Bridge Equipment
5-220 Passage of Obstacles Other Than Minefields
5-277 Bailey Bridge
5-280 Foreign Mine Warfare Equipment
5-302-1 Army Facilities Components System -

Designs , Vol .
I
5-312 Military Fixed Bridges
5-330 Planning and Design of Roads , Airbases , and Heli-
ports in the Theater of Operations
5-331C Utilization of Engineer Construction Equipment -

Volume C : Rock Crushers , Air Compressors , and

Pneumatic Tools
5-333 Construction Management
5-337 Paving and Surfacing Operations
5-401 Erection Procedures for Building T5 , Arctic , Pre-
fabricated Panelized Wood , 20 Feet X 48 Feet
5-402 Erection Procedures for Building Prefabricated ,
Ready Cut , Round Arch , Frigid , 10 Feet X 48 Feet
5-461 Engineer Handtools
5-551B Carpenter
5-704
Construction Print Reading in the Field
5-725 Rigging
5-742
Concrete and Masonry
5-766 Electric Power Generation in the Field
5-5420-209-12
Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual :
Improved Float Bridge ( Ribbon Bridge )

A-2
 FM 5-12B1 / 2
9-1005-213-10 Operator's Manual : Machine Gun Caliber .50 Brown-
ing M2
9-1005-213-25 Organizational , DS , GS , and Depot Maintenance Man-
ual Including Repair Parts and Special Tool
Lists , Machine Gun Caliber .50
9-1345-203-12 Land Mines
9-2300-257-10 Operator's Manual : Carrier , Personnel , Full
Tracked Armored
9-2320-209-10 Operator's Manual for 2 1 / 2-Ton 6x6 Chassis Truck
9-2320-211-10 Operator's Manual for Truck Chassis 5 Ton 6x6
9-2320-212-10 Operator's Manual for Truck Cargo 3/4 Ton 4x4
9-2320-218-10 Operator's Manual for Truck Utility 1/4 Ton 4x4
9-2320-242-10 Operator's Manual for Truck Cargo 1 1/4 Ton 6x6 ,
M561
9-2320-244-10 Operator Manual for Truck Cargo 1 1/4 Ton 4x4 ,
M715
9-2320-260-10 Operator's Manual for Truck Chassis 5 Ton 6x6
9-2330-213-14 Operator's Manual for Truck Chassis Trailer 1 1/2
Ton , 2 -Wheel
9-2330-234-15 Operator , Organizational , DS and GS Maintenance
Manual for Truck Chassis Trailer 2 1 / 2 -Ton ,
2
-Wheel
9-2330-267-14 Operator , Organizational , DS and GS Maintenance
Manual for Trailer , Tank , Water 400 -Gal , 1
1/ 2-Ton , 2-Wheel
11-5805-201-12 Operator and Organizational Maintenance Manual for
Telephone Set , TA- 312/ PT
11-5805-243-12 Operation and Organization Maintenance : Telephone
Set TA- 1 / PT
11-5820-401-12 Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual :
Radio Sets , AN/ VRC 46 and AN/VRC 47
11-5820-667-12 Operator's and Organizational Maintenance Manual :
Radio Set AN/ PRC 77
38-750 The Army Maintenance Management System ( TAMMS )
55-450-12 Air Transport of Supplies and Equipment : Heli-
copter External/ Loads for Slings , Nylon and
Chain , Multiple Leg

Training Circulars ( TC )
5-200 Camouflage Pattern Painting
6-40-2 The Forward Observer
6-40-4 Fire for Effect
7-1 The Rifle Squads ( Mechanized and Light Infantry )
7-3 The Rifle Platoon
7-3-1 How to Defend With Mechanized Infantry and Light
Infantry Platoons
7-4 The Mechanized Infantry Platoon
7-5 Land Navigation
7-10-10 The Rifle Company
7-50 Fighting Positions for Infantry Soldiers

A-3
FM 5-12B1 /2

8-1 Training in First Aid and Emergency Medical Treat-

ment
8-3 Field Sanitation Team Training
8-5 First Aid Training for Personnel in Basic Training
17-14 Combat Engineer Vehicle M728 , Gunnery
20-32 Don't Blow Up
20-32-1 Hasty Protective Mining
20-32-2 Employment of the M56 Helicopter -Delivered Mine
System
21-3 Soldier's Handbook for Individual Operations and
Survival in Cold Weather Areas
21-5-1 ( No 1 ) Training Management
21-5-2 ( No 2) Performance Oriented Training
21-11 Pocket Medic -Emergency Aid Guide for Soldiers
21-12 Individual Malaria Control
21-26 Don't Get Lost
21-75 Who's Watching You
23-3 To Catch a Tank
23-44 Small Arms Defense Against Air Attack
24-2 Communications - Electronic Operations Instructions ,
The Automated CEOI
30-1 Tactical Cover and Deception
32-05-2PT Communications -Electronics Counter- Countermeasures
Procedures
32-10 How to Train a Combat Battalion to Fight in an
Electronic Warfare Environment
32-11 How to get Out of a Jam .
32-20 Electronic Warfare Training

Lubrication Orders (LO )

5-1940-200-12 Boat , bridge erection , inboard engine : aluminum ,

ged, 27 ft . 1g . (Marinette Marine model A27 and
Highway Products model HP 127B) w/ engine Gray
Marine Express Model 6-244MS
5-1940-221-12-1 & 2 Boat , bridge erection , inboard diesel engine , alu-
minum hull , 27 ft . lt . Aluminum Company of
America (model H1CE27D) w/ engine Detroit Diesel
model 5032-4000
5-2330-200-15 Trailer , basic utility 2 1 / 2- ton
5-2805-201-12 Motor outboard : gasoline , 25 hp ( Johnson models
RDM- 10 , RDM- 11 , RDM 12 , and RDM 14
5-3695-214-15 Saw Chain: pneumatic motor driven 24- inch cut: 1
man , bareframe , w/handle ( Remington Arm
5-3805-200-15-1 Loader, scoop type , diesel engine driven , 4

wheels , hydraulic front loading , vertical lift ,

front dump 2 1/2 cu. yd , air transportable
(Clark models 175A and 175A-M and 175AM23 ) w/ en-
gine Cummins model JT

A
-4
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

5-3805-200-15-2 Loader, scoop type , diesel engine driven , 4

wheels , hydraulic front loading , vertical lift ,

front dump , 2 1/2 cu . yd . air transportable
(Clark models 175A-M and 175A-M23 ) w/ engine Cum-
mins model JT
5-3805-200-15-3 Loader , scoop type , diesel engine driven , 4
wheels , hydraulic front loading , vertical lift ,
front dump , 2 1/2 cu . yd . , air transportable
(Clark models 175A-M and 175A-M23 ) w/ engine Cum-
mins model JT
5-3805-201-12-1 & 2 Loader scoop type : diesel engine 4 wheel drive ,
rear wheel steerable pneumatic tires ; 2 1/2 c .
yd .; w/multi - segment bucket ( Frank G. Hough mo-
del H-90CM) w/ engine Cummins model JT- 6 -B1 .
5-3805-219-12-1 & 2 Loader scoop type , diesel driven , 4 wheels , 2 1/2
cu . yd . ( Hough Model H- 90M) w/ engine Cummins
model . JT- 6 -B1
5-3805-250-12-1 Loader scoop type : d.e.d. 4 wheel drive pneumatic
tired , hinged framed steer , 2 1/2 c . yd . multi-
purpose bucket ( J.I. Case model MW-24 ) w/ engine
J.I. Case model 504BD - T
5-3805-251-12-1 & 2 Loader , scoop type : d.e.d. , 4 wheel drive , pneu-
matic tire hinged frame steer , 2 1/2
5-3895-205-1,2&3 Mixer , concrete ; gasoline driven , end discharge ,
trailer mounted : model 16- S hercules Engine
1xB - 5 or Wisconsin engine model V54D
5-3895-219-20-1,2&3 Mixer , concrete , trailer mounted , gasoline driven ,
16 cu . ft . 16 SM Continental Model YS116 Wiscon-
sin engine model MVF4D
5-3895-221-1 & 2 Mixer , concrete , trailer mounted : gasoline driven
16 cu . ft . ( Chain Belt model HBG ) w/engine Her-
cules model IXB - 3ER
5-3895-342-12-1 & 2 Mixer , concrete , 4 wheel mounted , g.e.d. , nontilt ,
16 cu ft ( T.L. Smith Co. model 499A)
5-4310-345-12 Compressor , rotary , air , d.e.d. , trailer mtd , two
wheel , 250 cfm , 100 psi ( Davey mdl 14m250RPV)
5-6115-270-20 Generator set , gasoline engine : 3KW , ac, 120v ,
single phase , 120/ 240v , single phase , 120v , 3
phase , 60 cycle , skid mounted ( Hollingsworth
model JHGW3B ) w/Wisconsin engine mdl MAENLD
5-6115-282-15 Generator set , gasoline engine : 3KW , ac , 60 cycle ;
cooled , portable tubular frame , skid - shock
mounted ( Hollingsworth model JHGW3C ) w/ Wisconsin
engine mdl MANELD
5-8025 Boat , bridge erection , gasoline powered , aluminum
twin screw , two sections , 27 - ft . with Gray ma-
rine engines , express series ( model 6-244 )
5-9065 Trailer , 2 wheel pole type , slip with bolster , 2
1/2 ton , all makes and models . ( LC 19-75AB - 16 )
9-2300-224-12 Carrier , Personnel full - tracked : Armored M113
9-2300-257-12 Carrier , Personnel , full - tracked , Armored : M113A1

A-5
FM 5-12B1 /2

9-2320-209-12 Truck , Utility : 1/4 ton , 4x4 , M151 , M151A1 , and

M151A2 ; Truck Utility : 1/4 ton , 4x4 , M151 AIC
and M825 ; Truck , ambulance : frontline , 1/4 ton ,
4x4 , M718 and M718A1 and M825 ; truck , ambulance :
frontline , 1/4-ton , 4 x 4 , M718 and M718A1
9-2320-242-12 Truck Cargo : 1 1/4 ton , 6x6 M561 ; Truck ambulance :
1 1/4 ton , 6x6 , M792 launcher , missile : 5 ton ,
6x6 , M812A1 ; Truck , cargo : 5 ton , 6x6 , M813 ,
M814 ; Truck , cargo , Dropside : 5 ton 6x6 , M813A1 ;
Truck , Bolster Logging : 5 ton , 6x6 , M815 ; Truck
Wrecker : 5 ton , 6x6 , M816 ; Truck , Dump , 5 ton ,
6x6 , M817 ; Truck , Tractor : 5 ton , 6x6 , M818 ;
Truck , Tractor Wrecker : 5 ton , 6x6 , M819 ; Truck ,
Van Expansible : 5 ton , 6x6 , M820 , M820A1 ,
M820A2 ; Truck , Stake , Bridge Transporting : 5
ton , 6x6 , M821 model 6P ) c . yd . multipurpose
bucket ( J.I. Case model MW-24B) w/ engine J.I.
Case model AA504BD- T . A27 and Highway Products
model HJP 127B) w/engine Gray Marine Express
model 6-244 MS
9-2320-260-12 Truck , chassis : 5 ton , 6x6 , M809 series , M809 ,
M809A1 , M810 , M811 , M811A2 , M812 ; Truck ,
9-2350-222-12 Vehicle , combat engineer , full - tracked : M728
9-2350-244-12 Carrier , command and reconnaissance , armored :
M114 , M224A1 , M114A1El

Army Training Programs ( ATPs )

Proponent Number Title

USAES 5-25 Engr Combat Units

USAES 5-52 Engr Command Units
USAES 5-114 Engr Construction Battalion and Construction
Support Units
USAES 5-500 Engr Service Organization
TRADOC Bulletins

TRADOC Bul 5 LAW

Firing Tables and Trajectory Chart

DARCOM BRL 0.50 -AD- 1 Machine Gun , Caliber .50 Fixed , M85 on Tank ,
Combat , Full Tracked; 105mm Gun , M60 Ser-
ies Firing Cartridge , Caliber .50 ; ΑΡΙ , Μ8
Cartridge , Caliber .50 ; API - TM- 20 Car-
tridge , Caliber .50 : Ball , M-33 ; Car-
tridge , Caliber .05 ; Tracer M- 17

A-6
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

DARCOM BRL 0.140.50 -H- 3 Machine Gun , caliber .50 ; Browning , M-2
(Heavy barrel , turret type ) on mount ,
machine gun, trailer mounted ; multiple
caliber .50 machine gun , M55 and machine
gun, caliber .503; browning M2 ( Heavy bar-
rel , flexible ) on mount , machine gun,
tripod mounted ; caliber .50 machine gun,
M5 firing , cartridge , caliber .50 ; AP , M2
and cartridge , caliber •
50 : Ball M2
DARCOM BRL 0.50 AA- T- 1 Gun , machine cal . 50 , Browning M-2 ; firing
Chges 1 and cartridge , armor piercing- incinerary cal .
213/ 0.50 , M8
DARCOM BRL 7.62-A- 2 Machine gun , 7.62mm ; M60 on mount , machine
gun; 7.62 mm , M122 and machine gun , 7.62
mm: M73 on tank , combat full tracked ; 105
mm gun , M60 series and rifle 7.62 mm ; M14 ;
firing cartridge , 7.62 mm , Ball Nato , M59 ;
cartridge 7.62 mm , Ball , Nato , M80 ; car-
tridge , 7.62 mm: AP Nato , M61 and car-
tridge , 7.62 mm: Tracer , NATO , M62

TOE

TRADOC 5-35G Engr Combat Battalion Army or Corps

TRADOC 5-36G Headquarters and Headquarters Comp . Engr .
Cbt Bn
TRADOC 5-37G Engr Combat Company , Army or Corps
TRADOC 5-64 Engr Assault Bridge Company (Mobile )
TRADOC 5-74 Engr Medium Girder Bridge Company
TRADOC 5-78 Engr Float Bridge Company
TRADOC 5-79 Engr Assault Float Bridge Company , Ribbon
TRADOC 5-146HO Headquarters and Headquarters Comp , Eng Bat-
talion
TRADOC 5-147HO Combat Engr Co , Eng Battalion Armored , or
Infantry ( Mechanized) Division

Common Tables of Allowances ( CТА)

TRADOC 23-100-6 Ammunition , Rockets , and Missiles for Unit

Training ; Active Army , and Reserve Compo-
nents
DCSOPS 50-900 Clothing and Individual Equipment ( Active
Army , Reserve Components , and DA Civilian
employees )
DCSOPS 50-970 Expendable Items ( except : Medical class V,
Repair Parts )

ROTCM

USAIS 145-30 Individual weapons and marksmanship

A- 7
FM 5-12B1 / 2

Army Subject Schedules

Proponent Number Title
USAES 5-1 Concealment and Camouflage
USAES 5-2 Engineer Power Tools
USAES 5-3 Maps , Compass , Aerial Photography Reading
and Elementary Field Sketching
USAES 5-4 Engineer Reconnaissance
USAES 5-5 Rigging
USAES 5-6 Explosives and Demoltions
USAES Fixed Bridges
USAES 5-8 Floating Bridges
USAES 5-10 Military Road , Airfield and Heliport Con-
struction
USAES 5- MOS Technical and Augmentation Training of
Pioneer 12A10
USAES 5-14 Organization , Mission , Functions , and Cap-
abilities of Engineer TOE Units
USAES 5-15 Assault Phase of River Crossing Operations
USAES 5-16 Quarry Operations
AHS 8-8 Military Sanitation
USAQMS 10-9 Administration Support of Company Elements ,
(QM) Training for Sections and Selected
Personnel
USAIS 17-14-3 Machineguns , Caliber .50 HB , M2 and M2 ( Mod)
USAARMS 17-19- Devices , Training Carrier Personnel Full
Tracked , Armored
USAMPS 19-30 Physical Security
USAIS 21-2 Drill and Ceremonies
AHS 21-3 Field Hygiene and Sanitation
AHS 21-4( 1 ) First Aid
USAIS 21-5 Guard Duty
USAOG& S 21-6 Individual Protective Measures for C , B , R,
and Nuclear Defense
TJAGSA 21-10 Military Justice
TJAGSA 21-15 Code of Conduct
USAIS 21-17 Inspections
USAES 21-19 Field Fortifications
USAIS 21-20 Individual Tactical Training
USAIS 21-22 Marches and Bivouacs
USAIS 21-37 Physical Readiness Training for Men
USAIS 21-40 Land Navigation
USAIS 23-14 Automatic Rifle Markmanship
USAIS 23-20 M- 16A1 Rifle Training
USAIS 23-37 40M Grenade Launder M203
USAIS 23-72 M- 16A1 Rifle Marksmanship
USAIS 23-83 Machinegun , 7.62mm , M-60
USAIS 23-84 M18A1 Antipersonnel Mine ( Claymore )
USAOC& S 29-1 Maintenance Unit Command and Operations per-
sonnel
USAOC& S 29-3 Organizational Maintenace

A-8
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

USAOC& S 29-6 Small Unit Defense

USAOC& S 29-7 Shop Operations

Supply Bulletins ( SBS )

3-30-153 Smoke Pot , HC , 10-pound , Ml ; Smoke Pot , Floating
HC , M4A2 ; Smoke Pot , HC , 30-pound , ABC-M5 : Ser-
viceability Standard
3-30-156 Grenade , Hand , Riot ( CM) , M25A1 and Grenade , Hand ,
Riot ( CN- 1 DM- 1 or CS - 1 ) M25A2 ; Serviceability
Standard
3-1330-1 Grenade , Hand , Smoke , WPM15 Serviceability Stan-
dard
3-1330-2 Grenade Hand and Rifle , Smoke , WP M34 Serviceabil-
ity Standard
3-1330-3 Grenade , Hand : Colored Smoke , M18 , Serviceability
Standard
3-1330-11 Grenade , Hand , Riot , Pocket , CS , XM58 ; Storage
Serviceability Standard
3-1365-11 Smoke Pots ; Floating , SGF2 , AN- M7 ( MK5 -MOD3 ) and
AN - M7A1 ; Storage Serviceability Standard
3-4230-5 Decontaminating and Reimpregnating Kit , Individ-
ual , M13 Serviceability Standard , Long Term
Storage
3-4230-7 Decontaminating Apparatus , Portable 1 1/2 quart ,
ABC -Mil ; Storage Serviceability Standard
3-4240-4 Mask , Protective , Headwound , ABC -M18 , Serviceabil-
ity Standard
3-4240-8 Bag , Water Proofing Protective mask , Ml : Service-
ability Standard
3-4240-13 Mask , Protective , Field , M17A1 ; Mask Protective
field , ABC-M17 Storage Serviceability Standard
3-6665-1 Paper , Chemical Agent Detector VGH, ABC M8 ; Paper ,
Chemical Agent Detector , AN-M6A1 Serviceability
Standard
3-6665-13 Detector Kits Chemical Agent VGH , AN-M15a2A and AN
M15A2N , Storage Serviceability Standard
3-6665-14 Detector Kit , Chemical Agent , ABC-M18A2 , Storage
Serviceability Standard
3-6665-15 Sampling and Analzing Kit , CBR Agent : M19 ; Stor-
age Serviceability Standard
3-6665-17 Indicator , Outlet Valve Leakage , M4A1 and M4A1
Modified ; Storage Serviceability Standard

Task Training Pamphlets ( TTP )

These pamphlets are very helpful in training ARTEP tasks . They can
be obtained from the Director of Training Extension , Training Man-
agement Division , USAES , Fort Belvoir , Va . 22060

4-13 Site Security

4-15 Reconnaissance Patrol
5-15 Route Reconnaissance

A-9
FM 5-12B1 / 2

6-16 Disable a Bridge

6-17 Cratering Roads
7-5 Hasty Minefield Breach
8-8 Layout a Bailey Bridge Site
9-2 River Reconnaissance

TECHNICAL BULLETINS (TBS )

TB 3-4230-207-10 Decontaminating and Reimpregnating Kit , individ-
ual , M13
TB 5-15-1 Prefabricated shelters , bunkers , and emplacement
covers

TB 9-2320-209/ 4 Truck , Cargo 2 1/2 ton , 6x6 M34 , M35A1 and M35A2 :
Fabrication and Installation of Centermounted
Troop Seats
TB 9-2320-218-10-1 Safe Operation of Truck Utility : 1/4 ton 4x4 M151
Series
TB 9-2320-260-20/ 1 Chassis , Truck: 5 ton , 6x6 M809 , w/w
( 2320-050-8841 ) wo/ W ( 2320-050-8842 ) ; M809A1 ,
w/ w ( 2320-050-8941 ) ; M810 , w/ w ( 2320-051-0585 ) ,
wo /w ( 2320-051-0586 ) ; M811 , w/w ( 2320-050-8985 ) ,
wo /w ( 2320-050-8986 ) ; 811A1 w/w ( 2320-050-8984 ) ;
M811A2 wo/w ( 2320-050-9005 ) ; M812, w/w
( 2320-050-9011 ) ; M812A1 , w/w ( 2320-050-9040 ) ;
Truck Cargo 5 ton, 6x6 , M813 , w/ w
( 2320-050-8890 ) , wo / W ( 2320-050-8902 ) , Truck ,
cargo dropside , 5-ton 6x6 , M813A1 , w/w
( 2320-050-8905 ) , wo / w ( 2320-050-8913 ) ; Truck
cargo 5-ton , 6x6 , M814 , w/ w ( 2320-0050-8987 ) ,
wo /w ( 2320-050-8488 ) ; Truck bolster : 5-ton , 6x6
M815 w/ w ( 2320-050-8927 ) ; Truck wrecker : Me-
dium , 5-ton 6x6 M316 , w/w ( 2320-051-0489 ) ;
Truck , dump: 5-ton , 6x6 , M812, w/ w
( 2320-051-0589 ) , wo/ w ( 2320-050-8970 ) ; Truck ,
tractor , 5 -ton , 6x6 M818 , w/w ( 2320-050-8928 ) ,
wo/w ( 2320-050-8984 ) ; Truck , tractor , wrecker :
5 - ton , 6x6 , M819 , w/w ( 2320-050-9004 ) ; Truck ,
van: Expansible , 5-ton , 6x6 M820 , wo/w
( 2320-050-9006 ) , M820A1 , wo/w ( 2320-050-9007 ) ,
M820A2 , wo/w ( 2320-050-9010 ) ; Truck stake :
bridge transporting , 5- ton 6x6 , M821 , w/w
( 2320-050-4015 )
TB 34-9-69 Mine , Antipersonnel , M16 and Fuze Mine combination
TB 34-9-88 Telephone Set TA-43 ( ) /PT , Telephone Set TA- 312 PT
and Telephone Set TA-5003/u . (To 3lwl - 2PT-431 )
TB 34-9-99 Boat , Reconnaissance , Pneumatic , 3 man
TB 34-9-106 Floating Bridge , Aluminum
TB 34-9-173 Boat , Bridge Erection , Inboard engine , Alum . 27 '
TB 34-9-178 Outboard Motor 25 H.P. , Gasoline , with Carrying
Chest
TB ( ORD ) 537 Combat Vehicles and Tactical Transport Vehicles :
Procedures for Starting Engines with Slave
Cables

A-10
 FM 5-12B1 /2

Army Training and Evaluation Programs ( ARTEP )

5-25 Engineer Battalions , Airborne , Airmobile and In-
fantry Divisions
5-35 Engineer Combat Battalion , Corps
5-64 Engineer Bridge Company , Corps
5-145 Engineer Battalion , Armored and Mechanized Divi-
sion

Supply Catalogs ( SC)

1375-94 - CL - P02 Demolition Equipment Set , Explosive Initiating ,
Electric and Nonelectric
5180-90 - CL - NO8 Tool Kit , Carpenter's : Engineer Squad
5180-90 -CL - N10 Tool Kit , Pioneer , Engineer Combat Platoon
5180-90 -CL - N11 Tool Kit , Pioneer Engineer Platoon
5180-90 -CL -N12 Tool Kit , Engineer Squad
5180-90 -CL - N17 Tool Kit , Rigging , Wire Rope : Cutting , Clamping
and Splicing , w/ Chest

Training Extension Course Lessons ( TEC )

For convenience to the user of this manual , the following references

have been grouped within the appropriate subject/ task area .
BATTLEFIELD SURVIVAL

FIRST AID

911-441-0024 - F Basic First Aid Measures : The Lifesaving Steps

911-441-0026 - F Basic First Aid Measures : Restoring the Breathing
911-441-0027 -F Basic First Aid Measures : Restoring the Heartbeat
911-441-0028 - F Basic First Aid Measures
ces : Stopping the Bleeding
Part 1
911-441-0029 -F Basic First Aid Measures : Stopping the Bleeding
Part 2 and Controlling for Shock
911-441-0030 - F Fractures and Splinting
911-441-0031 - F Dressing and Bandages Part 1
911-441-0032 -F Dressing and Bandages Part 2
911-441-0033 - F Burns and Eye Injuries
911-441-0034 -F Snake Bites and Hot Weather Hazards
911-441-0035 - F Cold Weather Hazards

NBC DEFENSE

931-061-0060 -F NBC : The Mask

931-061-0061 - F NBC : Masking and When To Do It
931-061-0062 -F NBC : First Aid Part 1
931-061-0063 -F NBC : First Aid Part 2
931-061-0064 -F Individual Protection and Decontamination
931-061-0065 -F Maintenance of M17 Series Mask

A- 11
FM 5-12B1 /2

FIELD HYGIENE AND SANITATION

929-441-0042 - F Personal Hygiene and Care of the Feet

929-441-0043 - F Environmental Hazards , Part 1 : Treatment of Drink-
ing Water
929-441-0044 - F Environmental Hazards , Part 2 : CO Poisoning

COMBAT PROFICIENCY TECHNIQUES

DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

937-061-0030 - F Cover Camouflage and Concealment Part 1

937-061-0031 - F Cover Camouflage and Concealment Part 2
937-061-0032 - F Cover Camouflage and Concealment Part 3

LAND NAVIGATION

930-071-0013 - F Introduction to Land Navigation

930-071-0014 - F Measuring Distances and Azimuths
930-071-0015 -F Converting Azimuths
930-071-0016 -F Terrain Features
930-071-0017 - F The Lensatic Compass
930-071-0018 - F Navigating With Map and Compass

COMMUNICATION

010-071-1001 - F Introduction to the Squad Radio

010-071-1002 - F Operation of the Squad Radio
201-113-4501 -F Preparation of Radio Set AN/PRC 77 for Operation ,
Part 1 , Installation
201-113-4502 - F Preparation of Radio Set AN/PRC 77 for Operation ,
Part 2 , Operational Checks
201-113-4503 - F Preparation of Radio Set AN/ PRC 77 for Operation ,
Part 3 , Pre-Sets
936-061-0108 -F Initiating and Responding to Radio Calls
936-061-0109 - F Writing Down Messages Received by Radio
936-061-0110 - F Responding to Messages
936-061-0111 -F Preparing Messages To Be Sent
936-061-0112-F Sending and Receiving Messages
936-061-0113 -F Entering and Leaving a Radio Net and Authenticat-
ing
936-061-0116- F Tactical FM Radio : RT524A and R442 Operation
936-061-0131 -F Counter- Jamming Procedures
949-061-0004- F The Call for Fire
949-061-0005 -F Adjustment of Field Artillery Fire Bracketing and
Creeping Part 1
949-061-0006-F Adjustment of Field Artillery Fire Bracketing and
Creeping Part 2

A- 12
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

WEAPONS

939-071-0009 - F Loading and Unloading the M16A1 Rifle

939-071-0010 - F Disassembly and Assembly of the M16Al Rifle
939-071-0011 - F Maintaining the M16A1 Rifle
939-071-0012 -F Preventing and Correcting Common Malfunctions
940-071-0086 -F M203 Grenade Launcher : Disassembly , Assembly , and
Maintenance
940-071-0087 - F M203 Grenade Launcher : Malfunctions and Ammunition
Identification
940-071-0088 -F M203 Grenade Launcher : Zeroing and Target Engage-
ment

941-071-0078 - F The M60 Machinegun Mechanical Training Part 1

941-071-0079 - F The M60-Machinegun Mechanical Training Part 2
941-071-0080 - F The M60 Machinegun Mechanical Training Part 3
941-071-0081 -F The M60 Machinegun : Functioning
941-071-0082 - F Bipod Placement and Tripod Mounting
941-071-0084 -F Firing and Zeroing
941-071-0085 - F Malfunctions and Stoppage
941-071-0115 - F The Caliber .50 Machinegun : Mounting
941-071-0116 -F The Caliber .50 Machinegun : Mechanical Training
941-071-0117 -F The Caliber .50 Machinegun : Headspace and Timing
941-071-0118 -F The Caliber .50 Machinegun : Field Zeroing
941-071-0119 - F The Caliber 50 Machingun : Firing
•

942-071-0001 - F The Hand Grenade -

Type and Uses

942-071-0002 - F Hand Grenade Maintenance and Identification
942-071-0003 - F The Hand Grenade : Carrying , Arming and Throwing
948-071-0005 - F Operating the LAW
948-071-0006 - F LAW ( Engaging the Target )
953-071-0062 - F AN/ TVS - 2 Night Vision Sight For Crew - Served Wea-
pons
953-071-0063 - F AN/ TVS - 2 Engaging the Target

ORGANIZATIONAL EFFECTIVENESS

909-071-0031 -F Fundamentals of Leadership , Part 1

909-071-0032 - F Desirable Traits of a Leader , Part 2
909-071-0033 - F Principals of Leadership , Part 3
909-071-0034 -F Human Behavior , Part 4
909-071-0035 - F Indicators of Unit Effectiveness
909-071-0036 -F Small Unit Leadership
909-071-0037 - F Problems of Small Unit Leadership

ENGINEER TOOLS

662-051-7610 -E Operation of the GED Generator

A-13
FM 5-12B1 /2

VEHICLE OPERATION / MAINTENANCE

510-091-6453 - F Preparing and Maintaining DA Form 2400

510-091-6456 -F Preparing and Using DA Form 2404 , Part 1
510-091-6457 -F Preparing and Using DA Form 2404 , Part 2
510-091-6458 - F Preparing and Maintaining Equipment Serviceability
Criteria ( ESC ) Test and Checks , Part 1
510-091-6471 -F Preparing and Maintaining Equipment Logs
510-091-6472- F Preparing , Consolidating and Maintaining DA Form
2408-1
510-091-6474 - F Preparing , Maintaining and Using DA Form 2408-14
510-091-6486 - F Preparing and Maintaining Equipment Serviceability
Criteria ( ESC) Tests and Checks , Part 2
944-091-6501 - F Systematic Inspection of the 1 1/4 Ton Truck
944-441-0005 -F 2 1/2 Ton Truck Checks and Services
944-441-0006 -E 2 1/2 Ton Truck Before Operation Checks and Ser-
vices
944-441-0007 -E 2 1/2 Ton Truck During and After Operation Checks
and Service
944-441-0008 -F 2 1/2 Ton Truck Tire Changing and Repair
944-441-0009 -F 2 1/2 Ton Truck Operations Under Unusual Condition
944-441-0010 -F Starting with Weak Batteries
944-441-0012 - F Gama Goat Checks and Services , Part 1
944-441-0013 -F Gama Goat Checks and Services , Part 2
944-441-0014 -F Gama Goat Checks and Services , Part 3
944-441-0015 - F Gama Goat Checks and Services Part 4
944-441-0016 - F Gama Goat Checks and Services Part 5
944-441-0017 - F Gama Goat Checks and Services Part 6
944-441-0018 - F Gama Goat Checks and Services Part 7
944-441-0019 -F Gama Goat Five -Wheel Operation
944-441-0020 - F Gama Goat Operation Under Unusual Conditions
944-441-0021 - F Gama Goat Water Operations -Fording Part 1
944-441-0022 - F Gama Goat Water Operations - Swimming Part 2

FIELD FORTIFICATION OPERATIONS

947-071-0068 - F Types and Uses of Artifical Obstacles

947-071-0069 - F Constructing Nonwire Obstacles
947-071-0070 - F Constructing Wire Obstacles

CAMOUFLAGE OPERATIONS

937-061-0030 -F Cover , Camouflage and Concealment , Part 1

937-061-0031 - F Cover , Camouflage and Concealment , Part 2
937-061-0032 - F Cover , Camouflage and Concealment , Part 3

A-14
 FM 5-12B1 /2

RECONNAISSANCE

935-071-1026 -F Collecting and Recording Information

DUTY POSITION

ARMORED PERSONNEL CARRIER OPERATOR

941-071-0115 -F The Caliber •

50 Machinegun : Mounting
941-071-0116 -F The Caliber •
50 Machinegun : Mechanical Training
941-071-0117 -F The Caliber •
50 Machinegun : Headspace and Timing
941-071-0118 - F The Caliber .50 Machinegun : Field Zeroing
941-071-0119 -F The Caliber .50 Machinegun : Firing
953-071-0062 - F AN/ TVS 2 Night Vision Sight For Crew - Served Wea-
pons
953-071-0063 - F AN/ TVS 2 Engaging the Target

Correspondence Subcourses

For convenience to the user of this manual , the following references

have been grouped within the appropriate subject/ task area .

BATTLEFIELD SURVIVAL

FIRST AID

ISS 263 First Aid om Disaster

NBC DEFENSE

ISS 220 Introduction to Chemical and Radiological Opera-

tions and Biological Defense
ISS 221 Chemical and Radiological Operations and Biologi-
cal Defense
ISS 263 First Aid in Disaster

COMBAT PROFICIENCY TECHNIQUES

OFFENSIVE OPERATION

EN 31 Engineer Unit Tactics

DEFENSIVE OPERATION

EN 31 Engineer Unit Tactics

A-15
FM 5-12B1 / 2

LAND NAVIGATION

EN 51 Map and Aerial Photograph Reading I

COMMUNICATION

ISS 281 Signal Communications ( ISS S16)

ISS 282 Division Signal Communications ( ISS S16)
EN 361 Signal Communications for Engineer Units

ORGANIZATIONAL EFFECTIVENESS

ISS 210 Effective Speaking ( Methods of Instruction ) ( ISS

ARM)
ISS 246 Military Leadership ( Advanced ) ( ISS INF )
ISS 248 Military Leadership ( Basic ) ( ISS INF )

INDIVIDUAL FITNESS

ISS 264 Physical Training ( ISS INF )

ENGINEER TOOLS .

EN 34 Field Engineering
EN 501 Combat Engineer- Part I MOS 12B
EN 505 Bridge Specialist I MOS 12C
EN 531 Carpentry I MOS 51B
EN 554 Power Generation Operation I MOS 52B

VEHICLE OPERATION/MAINTENANCE

EN 66 Engineer Equipment I
ISS 269 Division Maintenance Operations ( ISS ORD )
EN 270 Organization Maintenance and Maintenance Manage-
ment ( ISS ORD )

DEMOLITIONS

EN 53 Explosives and Demolitions

MINE COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS

EN 29 Combat Engineering
EN 53 Explosives and Demolitions

A-16
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

EN 61 Landmine Warfare
EN 65 Field Fortifications
EN 502 Combat Engineer- Part II MOS 12B20

SECURITY OPERATIONS

EN 547 Firefighting I MOS 51M

EN 548 Firefighting II MOS 51M
EN 549 Firefighting III MOS 51M
EN 550 Firefighting IV MOS 51M

FIXED BRIDGING

EN 29 Combat Engineering
EN 59 Military Bridges IA
EN 60 Military Bridges IB
EN 353 Military Bridges II
EN 501 Combat Engineer Part I
EN 507 Bridge Specialist Part III
EN 508 Bridge Specialist Part IV

RIVER CROSSING

EN 29 Combat Engineering
EN 31 Engineer Unit Tactics
EN 60 Military Bridges IB
EN 352 Combat Engineering
EN 353 Military Bridges II
EN 508 Bridge Specialist IV MOS 12C

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS OPERATIONS

EN 34 Field Engineering
EN 53 Explosives and Demolitions
EN 65 Field Fortifications
EN 352 Combat Engineering
EN 377 Barrier and Denial Operations

CAMOUFLAGE OPERATIONS

EN 55 Camouflage and Concealment

RECONNAISSANCE

EN 29 Combat Engineering
EN 53 Explosives and Demolitions

A- 17
FM 5-12B1 / 2

EN 54 Engineer Intelligence and Reconnaissance

EN 60 Military Bridges IB
EN 352 Combat Engineering
EN 355 Employment of ADM
EN 501 Combat Engineer-Part I MOS 12B
EN 502 Combat Engineer-Part II MOS 12B
EN 505 Bridge Specialist - I MOS 12C

CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

EN 28 Construction Engineering
EN 34 Field Engineering
EN 60 Military Bridges IB
EN 64 Roads and Airfields I
EN 67 Construction Planning
EN 69 Frame Structures
EN 74 Construction Equipment
EN 113 Construction Print Reading
EN 353 Military Bridges II
EN 365 Road and Airfield II
EN 366 Paving and Surfacing Operations
EN 375 Construction Management
EN 392 Expedient Airfield Surfacing
EN 501 Combat Engineering - Part I MOS 12B

RIGGING

EN 114 Rigging

Training Film , Transparencies , and Slides

First Aid

NUMBER RUN TIME TITLE

TF 8-1586 27 min . Fractures : Introduction
TF 8-2198 24 min . Resuscitative Care of the Severely Wounded
TF 8-2713 15 min . Management of Mass Casualties - Part IX-Burns
TF 8-2762 22 min . Heat Disorders - General Effects of Heat on

Man
TF 8-3021 23 min . First Aid -Part IV Resuscitation , Mouth - to-
Mouth , Mouth- to - Nose
TF 8-3224 25 min . Emergency Airway A Plan of Action ( Emer-
-

gency Restoration of Breathing)

TF 8-3692 20 min . Emergency Medical Care , Control of Bleeding
TF 8-3693 17 min . Emergency Medical Care , Shock
TF 8-4527 21 min . First Aid , Part I , Major Wounds And Frac-
tures
MF 8-9758 25 min . First Aid , Fractures , Basic Principles
MF 8-9960 27 min .
Pulse of Life ( Artificial Resuscitation)

A-18
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

(frames )
TG 8-11-1 42 fr . First Aid
TG 8-11-2 103 fr . Bandaging and Splinting
TG 8-11-3 160fr . Medical Aid in Disaster

NBC DEFENSE
TF 3-2654 8 min . Protective Mask Inspection
TF 3-3203 10 min . Protective Mask Fitting and Drill
TF 3-3204 9 min . Protective Mask Inspection , M17
TF 3-3371 17 min . Introduction to CBR Operations
TF 3-3372 7 min . Masking Procedures in Combat , M17 Protective
Mask
TF 3-3463 15 min . Accessories for Use with the M17 Protective
Mask
TF 3-3464 19 min . Removal and Replacement of the Filter Ele-
ment for the M17 Mask
TF 3-3658 19 min . CB and Neclear Defense Training
TF 3-3753 22 min . Unit CBR Decontamination
TF 3-4614 26 min . Planning and Conducting CBR and Nuclear De-
fense Training
TF 3-3966 28 min . Individual Protection Against Chemical and
Biological Operations and Nuclear Warfare
TF 3-4060 10 min . Components of the M17Al Field Protective
Mask
TF 3-4061 11 min . Accessories for the M17Al Field Protective
Mask
TF 3-4193 8 min. M13 Individual Decontaminating and Reimpreg-
nating Kit
TF 3-4238 24 min . The Nuclear , Biological , Chemical Warning
and Reporting System
TF 3-4269 22 min . Individual Protection Against Nuclear Attack
IF 3-4437 22 min . ABC -M17 and M17A1 Field Protective Masks ,
Individual Care
TF 3-4437 First Aid and Decontamination Procedures for
Chemical Agents
TG 3-1-5 5 fr . M13 Individual Decontaminating and Reimpreg-
nating Kit
TG 3-1-7 11 fr . CBR Decontamination
TG 3-3-1 4 fr . Automatic Atropine Injector
TG 3-4-2 14 fr . Individual Protection from Fallout
TG 3-4-5 36 fr . Defense Against CBR Attack
TG 3-4-6 35 fr . ABC M17 and M17A1 CB Field Protective Masks

FIELD SANITATION
TF 8-1467 15 min . Control of Louse Borne Diseases
TF 8-2295 25 min . Mess Sanitation
TF 8-2762 22 min . Heat Disorders - General Effects of Heat on
Man
TF 8-3595 21 min . The Importance of Field Sanitation to Com-
mand
TF 8-3596 38 min . Field Sanitation
TF 8-3976 27 min . Personal Hygiene in a Hot Climate

A-19
FM 5-12B1 /2

TF 8-3977 25 min . Personal Hygiene in a Cold Climate

T 8-5-1 , thru 30 30 fr . Military Sanitation

TG 8-5-31 39 fr . Military Sanitation Part II
G 8-17 36 fr . Personal Health
TF 10-4780 How to Use Cold Weather Clothing

OFFENSIVE AND DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS

TF 7-2868 27 min . Rifle Squad and Platoon in Defense

TF 7-3022 12 min . Combat Formations and Battle Drill , Rifle
Squads , Part I
TF 7-3024 15 min . Combat Formations and Battle Drill , Rifle
Platoons , Part I
TF 7-3025 13 min . Combat Formations and Battle Drill , Rifle
Platoon , Part II
TF 7-3042 33 min . Rifle Platoon in the Attack
TF 7-3120 28 min . Rifle Company in Defense
TF 7-3137 52 min . Patrolling
TF 7-3645 21 min . Rifle Platoon in Night Attack
TF 7-3661 26 min . Rifle Company Operations Part I , Retrograde
Operations
TF 7-3662 30 min . Rifle Company Operations Part II , Offensive
Operations
TF 7-3674 27 min . Role of the Light Weapons Infantryman Part
I , Rifle Squad in Attack
TF 7-3675 18 min . Role of the Light Weapons Infantryman , Part
II , Rifle Squad in Defense
TF 7-3764 34 min . Survival
TF 7-3959 22 min . Squad Combat Formations and Battle Drill
TF 7-3978 33 min . Rifle Platoon in the Attack of A Fortified
area

TF 7-4288 25 min . Ambush

TF 7-4499 14 min . Rifle Squad Combat Formations

LAND NAVIGATION

TF 5-3718 20 min . Basic Map Reading Part I , Symbols

TF 5-3719 29 min . Basic Map Reading Part II , Grid Distance and
Elevation
TF 5-3720 30 min . Basic Map Reading Part III Direction , Orien-
tation , and Location Without Compass
TF 5-3721 30 min . Basic Map Reading Part IV Direction , Orien-
tation , and Location with Compass
TF 7-4248 25 min . Land Navigation by Terrain Features

COMMUNICATION

TF 11-2747 29 min . Operation of Field Telephone

TF 3480 26 min . AN/PRC 25 & 77 Operation and Operator Main-
tenance

A- 20
 FM 5-12B1 /2

TF 11-4393 9 min . Orientation to C-E Equipment Part II , Tacti-

cal Telephone Sets
TF 11-4533 17 min . Introduction to the Radio Set AN/ GRC 106 &
106A
TF 11-4534 22 min .

(frames)
TG 11-3-8 14 fr . Radio Set AN/GRC 106
TG 11-3-6 13 fr .
TG 11-4-4 2 fr . Telephone Set TA- 312/PT
TG 11-4-12 4 fr . Switchboard , Telephone , Manual SB993 /GT

WEAPONS

TF 7-3319 31 min . Rifle Marksmanship Detection

TF 7-3893 21 min . Weapons of the Infantry
TF 24119 33 min . Hand Grenades and M79 Grenade Launcher
TF 7-4121 26 min . Night Vision Techniques and the Use of the
Metascope and Starlight Scope
TF 7-4584 17 min . Weapon Safety - Part I the M16A1 Rifle
TF 7-4558 9 min . Weapon Safety Part II , the M60 Machinegun
TF 7-4586 10 min . Weapon Safety Part III , the Pistol , Auto-
matic , Cal .45 , M1911A1
TF 7-4587 4 min . Weapon Safety Part IV , the 67 Fragmentation
Grenade
TF 7-4588 13 min . Weapon Safety Part VI , the M18A1 Claymore
Mine
TF 7-4589 10 min . Weapon Safety Part V, the M203 Grenade
Launcher
TF 7-4121 26 min . Night Vision Techniques and the use of the
Metascope and Starlight Scope
MF 7-4669 24 min .

(frames)
TG 7-1-13 27 fr . M60 Machinegun Technique of Fire
TG 7-1-15 10 fr . Antipersonnel Mine M18A1 ( Claymore )
TG 7-1-22 29 fr . Rifle , 5.56mm , M16A1 Mechanical Training
TG 7-1-23 17 fr . 66mm Heat Rocket , M72A1 , M72AlEl , and M72
TF 4-4619 24 min . Rifle M16A1 Operation , Cycle of Functioning
and Immediate Action
TF 9-3334 21 min . Machinegun , Caliber .50 M85 Part I Opera-
tion , Disassembly and Assembly
TF 9-3335 27 min . Machinegun , Caliber .50 M85 Part II Cycle of
Functioning
TF 21-3907 33 min . Rifle M16A1 Part I Care , Cleaning and Lubri-
cation

LEADERSHIP

TF 22-4317 43 min . Leadership for Professional

A-21
FM 5-12B1 / 2

ENGINEER TOOLS

TF 5-3548 18 min . Carpentry Part I , Measuring , Marking , and

Leveling Tools
TF 5-3549 14 min . Carpentry Part II , Chopping and Driving
Tools
TF 5-3550 33 min . Carpentry Part III , Sawing and Boring Tools
TF 5-3551 11 min . Carpentry Part IV Planning and Chiseling
Tools
TF 5-3604 22 min . Engineer Pioneer Tools
IF 5-3631 30 min . Operation of Pneumatic Tools
TF 5-3738 14 min . Operator Preventive Maintenance Services for
Generator Sets

VEHICLE OPERATION/ MAINTENANCE

TF 9-3128 22 min . Daily Crew Maintenance M113 Personnel Car-

rier
TF 9-3852 29 min . Maintenance Procedures , M151 Series 1/4 Ton
Vehicle
TF 9-3957 17 min . Vehicle Operation Under Extreme Weather ,
Part I Cold Weather
TF 9-3958 15 min . Vehicle Operation Under Weather Extremes ,
Part II Desert and Tropics
TF 9-4192 21 min . Maintenance Service Road Test , Part I, (Au-
tomotive )
TF 9-4336 14 min .
Categories of Maintenance
TF 9-4385 14 min .
Truck 5 - ton , 6x6 M809 Operation and Mainte-
nance

TG 9-1-135 24 fr . Preventive Maintenance Wheeled Vehicles

TG 9-1-178 1 fr . Air Cleaners

DEMOLITION

TG 5-10-17 20 fr . Explosives and Demolitions , Part III Firing

Procedures
T 5-10-4 42 fr . Demolition of Bridges and Tunnels
TG 5-10-8 29 fr . Calculation and Replacement of Charges
TG 5-5-1 12 fr . Explosives and Demolition , Part I , Military
Explosives
TG 5-5-2 35 fr . Explosives and Demolition , Part II Methods
of Priming
SFS 5-183 60 fr . , 16 min . Bangalore Torpedo , M1A2
SFS 5-182 95 fr . , 22 min . Safety Precautions in Handling Explo-
sives and Demolition
TF 5-4200 24 min . Demolition , Part IV Calculation of Charges
TF 5-4049 29 min . Demolition , Part III Charge Placement
TF 5-3583 9 min . Demolition , Detonating Cord Priming

A-22
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TF 5-3486 31 min . Bridge Demolition Procedures

TF 5-2449 10 min . Explosives in Combat
TF 5-2282 7 min . Demolitions , M10 Universal Destructor
TF 5-3786 23 min . Demolitions , Part I Nonelectric Priming
TF 5-3787 23 min . Demolitions , Part II Electric Priming
TF 5-2373 21 min . Field Engineering in the Subartic , Part II
Ice Mines , Ice Minefields , Atandap Mines
and Obstacles

MINE COUNTER MINE OPERATIONS

TF 5-1980 11 min . Land Mine Warfare , Part II Siting and Mark-

ing
TF 5-1982 13 min . Land Mine Warfare Part IV Recording and Re-
porting
TF 5-1987 19 min . Land Mine Warfare , Part IX Assault Breaching
TF 5-1989 10 min . Land Mine Warfare , Part XI Behavior in a
Minefield
TF 5-2453 8 min . Land Mine Warfare , Pull - Release Firing De-
vice , M-3
TF 5-2596 20 min . Soviet and Satellite Employment of Mines
TF 5-2597: 18 min . Soviet and Satellite Employment of Booby-
traps
TF 5-2801 21 min . Land Mine Warfare , Part III Laying the Mine-
field
TF 5-2802 29 min . Land Mine Warfare , Part V Arming , Disarming
and Camouflage
TF 5-2803 17 min . Land Mine Warfare Nuisance Mining
TF 5-4256 33 min . Mine and Boobytrap Training
IF 5-4482 22 min . Land Mine Warefare , Part VII Protective
Minefields
SFS 5-119 45 fr . , 10 min . U.S. Heavy Antitank Mine M15
SFS 5-120 42 fr . , 6 min . Soviet TM-41 Antitank Mine
SFS 5-121 42 fr . , 10 minSoviet TMD-B Wooken Box Mine
SFS 5-122
47 fr . , 8 min . Soviet POMZ- 2 Antipersonnel Mine
SFS 5-157 40 fr . , 10 minSoviet PMD-6 Wooden Anti - personnel Mine
GTA 5-4-31 16 charts Mine Detectors
T 5-10-2 3R fr . Mine Warfare Training - Soviet and Soviet Sa-
tellite Mines
SL 5-10-22 22 fr . Minefield Installation
TG 5-10-26 42 fr . US Firing Devices , Boobytraps and Expedients
GTA 5-10-21 62 charts US Land Mines
GTA 5-10-24 37 charts Mine Field Breaching and Clearing Operations
GTA 5-10-27 1 card Mine Card

FIELD FORTIFICATIONS

TF 5-1822 22 min Beach Obstacles

TF 5-2334 17 min . Emplacements , Intrenchments and Shelter ,
Part I , Introduction
TF 5-2372 22 min . Field Engineering in the Subartic , Part II ,
Winter Field Fortifications

A-23
FM 5-12B1 / 2

TF 5-3002 28 min . Construction of Wire Entaglements

TF 5-4122 27 min . Road Obstacles
TG 5-6-1 41 fr . Common Field Fortifications
TG 5-9-2 37 fr . Barbed Wire Obstacles
FS 5-156 39 fr . Wire Entanglements

CAMOUFLAGE OPERATIONS

TF 5-3881 26 min . Individual Camouflage

TF 5-3882 24 min . Small Unit Camouflage
SFS 5-165 34 fr . , 13 min . Camouflage Drape Net Sets
TG 5-1 44 fr . Camouflage

RECONNAISSANCE
TF 5-2973 16 min . Basic Engineer Reconnaissance
TG 5-33 20 fr . Vehicle and Bridge Classification

FIXED BRIDGING

TF 5-1996 17 min . Bridge , Panel , Bailey Type M2 , Part I , Site

Preparation and Layout
TF 5-1997 37 min . Bridge Panel , Bailey Type M2 , Part II, Basic
Construction
TF 5-1998 25 min . Bridge Panel , Bailey Type M2 Part III , Mul-
tistory Construction
TF 5-2333 13 min . Major Bridge Construction
TF 5-2349 7 min . Fixed Bridges , Jacking Down Heavy Girders
TF 5-2350 6 min . Military Fixed Bridges , Nomenclatures , Tim-
ber Trestle Bridges
TF 5-2734 38 min . Panel Bridge Bailey Type M2 , Part IV Multi-
span Bridges and Panel Crib Piers
TF 5-4202 31 min . Timber Trestle Bridge Construction
SFS 5-154 40 fr . , 10 min . Fixed Bridge Maintenance , Part I , Non-
standard Bridges
SFS 5-155 46 fr . , 10 min . Fixed Bridge Maintenance , Part II , Pre-
fabricated Bridges
TG 5-7-2 14 fr . Timber Trestle Bridge
TG 5-7-3 43 fr . Armored Vehicle Launched Bridge
TG 5-7-1 32 fr . Fixed and Floating Bridges , Part I , Prefab-
ricated Bridges
T 5-28-2 35 fr . Timber and LOC Bridges
T 5-30 22 fr . Bridge Construction , Launching Heavy Beans

RIVER CROSSING OPERATIONS

TF 5-2105 19 min . Aluminum Floating Footbridge

TF 5-2683 33 min . The M4T6 Floating Bridge
TF 5-3157 20 min . Engineer Pneumatic Assault Boat
TF 5-3158 20 min . Light Tactical Raft and Bridge
TF 5-3704 26 min . Operation of Rafts
TF 5-3929 24 min . Stream Crossing Expedients Crossing of Per-
sonnel

A
-24
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

TF 5-3841 30 min . Principles of Anchoring Floating Bridge

TG 5-7-1 32 fr . Fixed and Floating Bridges , Part I Prefabri-
cated Tactical Bridges
TG 5-30 49 fr . Bridge Erection Boats
TG 5-34 18 fr . Anchorage and Protective Measures for Float-
ing Bridges
TF 5-4150 19 min . Mobile Floating Assault Bridge/ Ferry ( MAB )

CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

TF 5-1193 21 min . Military Roads , Part I , Road Expedients

TF 5-1198 8 min . Military Roads , Part VI, Gravel and Rock
Surfaces
TF 5-2371 27 min . Field Engineering in the Subartic , Part I,
Winter Roads
TF 5-3847 26 min . Military Roads and Airfields , Part I , Clear-
ing , Grubbing and Earthwork
TF 5-3859 23 min . Military Roads and Airfields , Part II ,
Drainage
TF 5-3860 20 min . Military Roads and Airfields , Part III , Soil
Stabilization
SFS 5-166 50 fr . 15 min . Concrete Construction
TG 5-3-13 28 fr . Concrete
T 5-3-14 31 fr . Masonry
TG 5-3-15 49 fr . Basic Carpentry
T 5-5-5 45 fr . Road and Airfield Construction

RIGGING
TG 5-6-2 17 fr . Advanced Rigging
TG 5-6-3 34 fr . Advanced Rigging , Part II ,
TG 5-6-4 45 fr . Knots
TG 5-18-3 32 fr . Advanced Rigging , Part II Cableway and Tram-
ways
G 5-184 33 fr . Advanced Rigging , Part IV, Suspension
Bridges
TF 7-4647 21 min . Water Operation Safety Training Part II ,
Crossing Steams and Swamps
TF 55-4814 18 min . Block & Tackle , Part I
TF 55-4815 15 min . Block & Tackle , Part II

CONSTRUCTION OPERATIONS

Video Tapes
710-051-0048-B Building Layout ( 22:40 )
9H- 051-0059 -B Critical Path Method I ( 25:37 )
9H- 051-0060-B Critical Path Method II ( 32:57 )
9H- 051-0061 -B Critical Path Method III ( 41:41 )
612-051-0080 -B Engineer Construction Equipment Demonstration
(33:00 )
4A- 730-051-0112 -B Construction Equipment Utilization ( 22:45 )
4A- 051-0116-B 16-5 Mixer Operation ( 17:34)

A- 25
FM 5-12B1 / 2

4A- 051-0126-B Utilization of Earthmoving Grading and Compacting

Equipment ( 14:44 )
710-051-0166-B Reinforced Concrete Construction ( 23:35 )
491-051-0144 -B Trial Batch Method of Mix Design ( 13:00 )
4A - 491-051-0201 -B Field Identification of Soils ( 27:07 )
4A - 730-051-0287 - B Concrete Construction Techniques ( 14:02 )
712-053-0020-B Truss Construction ( 10:57 )
712-053-0030 -B Joints and Splices ( 10:27 )
712-053-0032 - B Interior and Exterior Wall Components ( 22:07 )
712-053-0033 -B Floor Systems ( 20:45 )
712-053-0021 - B Door Construction ( 11:17 )
712-053-0034 -B Foundations ( 11:52 )
712-053-0029 - B Print Reading Symbols ( 15:22 )
712-053-0025 - B Roof and Rafters ( 10:17 )
712-053-0023 -B Stair Layout Part I ( 13:17 )
712-053-0024 -B Stair Layout Part II ( 5:55 )
712-053-0022 - B Window Installation ( 9:22 )
712-053-0036 -B Wood Fasteners ( 24:19 )
730-053-0058 -B Introduction to 250 CFM Air Compressor ( 17:40 )
730-053-041 - B Introduction to T.O. Buiding Construction ( 6:05 )
730-053-0044-B Construction Stakes ( 19:25 )
730-053-0054-B Construction Equipment Introduction Part II
(44:17)
730-053-0056 -B Construction Equipment Introduction Part I ( 50:08 )

DEFENSIVE OPERATIONS
2E - 051-0289 -B I'll Be Camouflaged ( 11:36 )
2E - 030-051-0009 -B Hiding Something Big ( 15:40 )
030-051-0010 -B Camouflage Pattern Painting ( 11:05 )
030-051-0018 - B Smoke Generator M3A3 ( 6:00)
030-031-0036 -B Smoke Pots ( 22:00 )
2E - 041-061-0014 -B Artillery Battery ( 23:25 )
2E - 071-0402- B Conduct in the Defense -A Case Study ( 11:00 )
493-031-0044-B Smoke Pots ( 22:00 )

DEMOLITION

2E - 051-0136-B Demolition Reconnaissance ( 8:52 )

2E - 051-0165 -B Reserved Demolitions ( 37:10)
2E - 071-0088 -B Tactical Employment of Explosives ( 29:27 )
2E - 030-051-0135 - B Bridge Destruction ( 14:08 )
2E - 030-051-0179 -B Military Explosives ( 18:43 )
2E- 030-051-0180-B Basic Priming Systems ( 43:57 )
904-331-0177 -B Demolition Equipment ( 28:00 )
ENGINEER TOOLS

011-331-0168-B Platoon and Squad Pioneer Tools Sets ( 35:03 )

030-053-0013 -B Pneumatic Tools Nail Driver and Wood Borer ( 16.34)
030-053-0015 -B Portable Electric Tool Set ( 21:30 )
030-053-0016-B Introduction and Review of Engineering Tools
(41:53)

A-26
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

030-053-0055 -B Clay Diggers etc. ( 21:18)

612-051-0031 -B Operation of Pnematic Tools ( 17:00 )
612-051-0093 - B Air Tools ( 23:00 )
621-075-0055 -B Pole Climbing Procedures ( Right Handed Climbers )
(2:33)
621-075-0056 -B Pole Climbing Procedures (Left Handed
Climbers ) ( 2:36 )
621-075-0057 -B Pole Descent Procedures ( 1:34)
622-051-0238 -B Operation and Operators Maintenance of Power Gen-
eration Equipment ( 29:00 )
730-053-0104 - B Daily Maintenance Service - 250 CFM Air Compressor
(8:15)

FIELD FORTIFICATION

2E - 071-0415 -B Obstacles and Barriers ( 34:15 )

FIRST AID

010-073-016 -B Hot Weather Indoctrination ( 16:00 )

010-351-0014 -B First Aid , Part I : Snakebite Tourniquet ( 1:50 )
010-351-0015 -B First Aid , Part II : Splinting a Closed Fracture
(3:29 )
010-351-0016 -B First Aid , Part III : Splinting an Open Fracture
(4:40)
010-351-0965 -B Mouth to Mouth Resucitation ( 4:00)
010-351-0973 -B Control Bleeding ( Pressure Bandages and Tourniquet
(9:00)
010-351-0974 -B Treat Fracture of Extremity ( 13:00 )
010-351-0976 -B Treat Chest Wound ( 5:00 )
010-351-0977-8 Treat Abdominal Wound ( 4:00 )
010-351-0979 -B Treat Open Head Wound ( 3:00)
010-351-0980 -B Treat Burns ( 3:00 )
010-351-0982-B Chest Pressure Arm Lift ( 5:00 )
010-551-0321 -B Field Sanitation and Military Hygiene ( 43:00 )
010-551-0446-B The Importance of Field Sanitation ( 40:00 )
600-551-0036 -B Cold Weather Training ( 45:00 )
911-071-0214 -B Review of First Aid ( AIT ) ( 23:32 )

FIXED BRIDGING

2E - 051-0016 -B Bailey Bridge III ( 26:45 )

2E - 051-0186-B Bailey Bridge I ( 32:07 )
2E - 051-0187 - B Bailey Bridge II ( 31:38 )
2E - 030-051-0011 -B Timber Trestle Bridge Construction ( 30:06 )
4A- 030-051-0194 -B Bailey Bridge Construction I ( 15:34 )
4A- 030-051-0195 -B Bailey Bridge Construction II ( 34:40 )
030-051-0311 --B M4T6 Fixed Spans ( 50:02 )
030-053-0006-B Timber Trestle Bridges ( 33:00 )

A- 27
FM 5-12B1 /2

GUARD DUTY

010-071-0017 -B Guard Duty Period 1 ( 24:50 )

010-071-0039 -B Guard Duty Period 2 ( 28:33 )
010-071-0053 -B Guard Duty Test 1 ( 1:16)
010-071-0054 -B Guard Duty Test 2 ( 2:33 )
010-071-0055 -B Guard Duty Test 3 ( 2:46 )
010-071-0056 -B Guard Duty Test 4 ( 1:27 )
INDIVIDUAL FITNESS

9H- 091-0305 -B PT Instruction ( 7:27 )

010-071-0014 -B Why Be Fit ? ( 24:24 )
LAND NAVIGATION

010-071-0061 -B Land Navigation Test 1 , Reading Six Digit Coordi-

nates ( 2:40 )
010-071-0062-B Land Navigation Test 2 , Measuring Staright Line
Distance on a Map ( 3:07 )
010-071-0063 -B Land Navigation Test 3 , Measuring a Grid Azimuth
(1:51 )
010-071-0064-B Land Navigation Test 4, Determining on Azimuth
With the Lensatic Compass ( 2:28 )
010-071-0056 -B Land Navigation Test 5 , Identifying Terrain Fea-
tures on a Map ( 2:48 )
010-071-0094 -B Fundamentals of Map Reading : Distance ( 8:48 )
010-071-0096-B Fundamentals of Map Reading : GM Angle and Diagram
(13:50)
010-071-0097 -B Fundamentals of Map Reading Coordinates ( 12:04 )

LEADERSHIP

2E - 051-0382- B Military Character and Leadership Parts I, II , III

and IV ( 150 : 00 )
5K- 901-051-2264 -B Training Conference ( 31:08 )
030-051-0162B Senior Subordinate Relationship ( NCO ) ( 2:26 )

MINE COUNTERMINE OPERATIONS

2E - 030-071-0136-B Landmine Warfare ( 3:49 )

9B - 071-0545 - B Aerial / Ground Mine Dispensors ( 7:08 )
2E - 050-0138 -B Mine Hardware ( 37:17 )
2E - 051-250 -B Hasty Protective Mining : An Application ( 15:20 )
2E - 051-270 -B Mine Hardware Part I ( 9:10)
010-071-0044 -B Claymore , Test 1 , Installing M18A1 ( 5:23 )
010-071-0045 -B Claymore , Test 2 , Disarming M18A1 ( 2:09 )
030-051-0175 -B Transistorized AN/ PRS 7 ( 17:10)
030-051-0176 -B Detecting Set Mine : Portable Metallic AN/PSS- 11
(28:10)
030-053-0001 -B Antitank Mines , Part I ( 34:34)

A-28
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

030-053-0002 -B Antitank Mines , Part II ( 19:48 )

030-053-0003 -B Antipersonnel Mines , Part I&II ( 54:24 )
030-071-0138 -B U. S. Mines ( 28:07 )

NBC DEFENSE

2E - 051-0131 -B C&B Considerations ( 10:04)

2E - 010-031-0017 -B Accessories for M17Al Field Protective Mask ( 9:00 )
4K- 030-031-0037 - B Radiological Decontamination Exercise ( 24:00 )
010-031-0020 -B CBR Proficiency Test Course ( 12:05)
010-031-0025 -B M- 13 Individual Impregnation and Reimpregnation
Kit ( 8:00 )
010-071-0080 -B CBR Test 1 : Prepare to Move Through a Contami-
nated Area ( 2:06 )
010-071-0081 - B CBR Test ( 1:02)
010-071-0082 -B CBR Test 3 : Reaction to Unknown Liquid Agents
(4:15)
010-071-0083 -B CBR Test 4 : First Aid for a Nerve Agent Casualty
(3:32)
010-071-0084 - B CBR Test 5 : Reaction to Nuclear Blast Without
Warning ( 3:57 )
010-073-0063 -B NBC Warfare Review ( 9:14)
494-051-0268 -B CBR Training - 17 Mask ( 12:00)
94-924-061-0101 -B Basic Effects of a Nuclear Weapon ( 81:00 )

OFFENSIVE OPERATIONS

2E - 051-0125 -B Task Planning for Combat Engineering Missions

(7:06)
2E - 051-0133 -B Briefing Techniques ( 12:20 )
2E - 061-0174 -B Adjustment of Artillery Fire (41:00 )
2E - 061-0299 -B Adjustment of Artillery Fire , Parts I , II & III .
(73:20)
2E - 071-0423 - B Planning and Conducting the Attack ( 9:16 )
010-071-0400 -B Fundamentals of Combat in Built Up Areas ( 10:49 )
2E - 071-0423 -B Planning and Conduct of the Attack ( 9:16)
010-073-0003 - B Patrolling : Conduct a Patrol ( 30:00 )
010-071-0066 -B Individual Tactical Training Test 1 ( 1:50 )
010-071-0067 -B Test 2 ( 4:15)
010-071-0058 - B Test 3 ( 2:37 )
010-071-0069 -B Test 4 ( 1:20)
010-071-0070 -B Test 5 (4:20 )
2E - 071-0412 - B Planning and Conducting the Attack ( 9:16 )
2E - 041-061-0006 - B Duties of the Forward Observer ( 34:00 )

OPERATIONAL EFFECTIVENESS

LEADERSHIP

7B - 051-0183 -B Training Management : Engineer Case Study ( 17:20 )

030-051-0159 -B Counseling Part I ( 2:05 )

A- 29
FM 5-12B1 / 2
030-051-0160-B Counseling Part II ( 1:17)
030-051-0163 -B Selection of Subordinate Leaders ( 2:28 )
030-051-0164-B Assumption of Command ( NCO) ( 2:13)
500-051-0182 -B EPMS and the Combat Engineer CM ( 16:20)
901-051-0049 -B Small Group Conference ( 18:13 )
901-051-0050-8 Counseling ( 47:19 )
901-051-0053 -B Lecture ( 22:00 )
901-051-0055 -B Ungraded Practical Exercise ( 33:03 )
901-051-0056-B Performance Test ( 33:28 )
901-051-0057 - B Speech for Instructors ( 33:39 )
5K-901-051-0169 - B Training Aids ( 14:58 )
5K- 901-051-0170-B Demonstration ( 41:10 )

RIGGING

030-053-0005-B Rigging : Square Lashing , Block Lashing ( 23:12 )

030-053-0007 -B Rigging , Knkots ( 15:24)
030-053-0008-B
Introduction to Rigging ( 29:02 )
030-053-0010-B Use of Wire Rope ( 20:54 )
030-053-0011 - B Hitches ( 16:06 )
062-551-0508 -B Seamanship : Knots , Bends & Hitches ( 25:00 )
062-551-0515 -B Block and Tackle , Part 1 ( 18:00 )
062-551-0516 -B Block and Tackle , Part 2 ( 15:00 )
610-091-0340 -B Rigging ( 9:32 )
612-051-0039 -B Wire Rope I ( 12:00 )
612-051-0040-B Wire Rope II (14:00)
2E - 030-051-0280 -B Rigging Helicopter Lift ( 30:00 )
RIVER CROSSING

2E - 051-0013 -B River Crossing Equipment Demonstration ( 17:06 )

2E - 051-0127 -B Employment of Floating Equipment ( 18:53 )
4A- 051-0161 -B Introduction to Budging Operations ( 34:20 )
2E - 071-0112 - B Stream Crossing Technique ( 25:10 )
2E- 071-0334 -B River Crossing Operations (31:20 )
030-051-0014 -B M4T6 Bridge I ( 44:24)
030-051-0015 -B M4T6 Bridge II ( 26:03 )
2E - 030-051-0130- B Anchorage Systems ( 43:10)
2E - 030-071-0547 - B New Developments in Military Float -Bridging
(11:30)

COMMUNICATION

9H- 101-0150 -B Communications , Part I (48:00)

9-101-0151 -B Communications , Part II ( 46:00 )
9H- 101-0152 - B Communications , Part III (42:00 )
621-061-0109 -B Field Wire Splicing ( 15:00 )
101-061-0209-8 Field Wire Laying and Recovery ( 30:00 )
2E - 051-0153 -B Tactical Communications Requirement ( 2:00 )
010-071-0057 -B Communications Test 1 , Placing telephone TA- 1 into
Operation ( 2:45 )
010-071-0058 -B Communications Test 2 , Placing telephone TA- 312
into Operation ( 3:25 )

A-30
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

010-071-0059 -B Communications Test 3 , Placing Squad Radio Into

Operation and Transmitting a Message ( 5:30 )
010-071-0060 Communications Test 4 Placing AN/PRC 77 Into Op-
eration and Transmitting a Message (4:34)
201-113-0801 -B Establishing Communications ( 33:10)
201-113-0318-B Communication Documents ( 38:00 )

WEAPONS

041-061-0019 - B Preparing M72 LAW for Firing : Aiming , Firing , and

Misfire Procedures ( 12:25 )
041-061-0223 -B The Improved LAW Series M72A1 ( 11:00)
041-061-0261 -B Headspace and Timing .50 Caliber Machinegun
(39:00 )
2E - 071-0652-B Soviet Squad Weapons ( 11:45 )
2E - 071-0160-B Weapons Review : Dissembly and Assembly of M- 60
MG- Set Headspace and Timing 50 Cal MG ( 25:26 )
•

010-071-0004 - B Performance Test M-60 Machinegun ( 11:57 )

010-071-0047 -B Grenade Launcher Test 1 ( 1:33)
010-071-0048 - B Grenade Launcher Test 2 ( 1:08 )
010-071-0049 -B Placing the M- 60 Machinegun Into Operation and
Performing Immediate Action ( 3 min)
010-071-0086 -B Rifle Maintenance Maint of Ml6Al Rifle ( 21:00 )
010-071-005 -B Performance Tests : M79 / 203 Grenade Launchers
(9:09 )

VEHICLE OPERATION/ MAINTENANCE

511-061-0255 -B Equipment Serviceability Criteria (33:49)

2E - 610-061-0288 -B Inspection of Truck , Utility , 4x4 , M151 (21:00)
811-073-0062-B Vehicle Inspection ; Drivers Responsibility
(17:06)
811-073-0039 -B Accident Reporting
811-073-0025 -B Vehicle Fires : Driver's Responsibility ( 12:24 )
611-075-0153 -B How to Inspect a Vehicle ( 11:27 )
811-075-0151 -B How to Pass a Roadside Inspection ( 9:02 )
12E -041-061-0156-B Maintenance Assistance Instruction Team ( MAIT )
610-091-0290-B Operator /Maintenance Services ( M151 ) ( 18:37 )
901-013-0501 -B Equipment Inspection and Maintenance Worksheet , DA
Form 2404 ( 29:55 )

A-31
 FM 5-1281 / 2

APPENDIX B

QUESTIONNAIRE

We would like to have your comments on this publication , after you have
read and evaluated it . The questions below cover a few points on which
your comments would be helpful . Feel free to answer all of them , or
just those on which you have some opinions . Upon completion , please
detach questionnaire and mail to: Commandant , U.S. Army Engineer
School , ATTN : ATSE - TDI , Fort Belvoir , VA 22060 .

NAME/ RANK DATE

UNIT
CURRENT DUTY POSITION
NUMBER OF MONTHS IN CURRENT DUTY POSITION
MILITARY OR CIVILIAN TRAINING ( LIST ) :

1. After reading this manual , what questions do you have about the Com-
bat Engineer's job ?

2. In what ways does this manual help to improve your MOS qualifica-
tions?

a.

b.

c .

3. Are the tasks listed in this manual clearly stated ?

B-1
FM 5-12B1 /2

4. Does this manual clearly explain what is expected of you as a Combat

Engineer at your skill level ? If not , explain where it falls short .

5. Do you think that this manual helps in teaching other Combat Engi-
neers ? If so , list the ways .

a.

b.

c.

6. Does this manual tell you anything about the Combat Engineer MOS
that is new to you? If so , what?

7. What is your opinion on the following questions ?

a. Is this manual current ?

b. What other aspects should this manual cover?

c. What parts should be deleted from the manual ?

8. Do you think that this manual will improve the efficiency of Combat
Engineer training in your unit ? If not , how could the manual be changed
to do so?

B-2
 FM 5-12B1 /2

9. What correspondence courses have you completed ?

a .

b.

c.

d.

10. What additional comments do you have ?

THANKS FOR YOUR HELP

B- 3
FM 5-12B1 / 2

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
DOD-
314

OFFICIAL BUSINESS
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300

COMMANDANT
U.S. ARMY ENGINEER SCHOOL
ATTN: ATSE-TDI
FORT BELVOIR , VIRGINIA 22060

Fold on Dotted Line Staple Open Edge Mail

B-4
 FM 5-12B1 / 2

APPENDIX С

SOLDIER'S MANUAL REORDER CARD

NAME :

GRADE:

MOS:

ADDRESS:

Manual Number & Title

Description of manual if number not known

Number of Manuals Needed

(Print name, grade, and return address on reverse)

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

COMMANDANT
U.S. ARMY ENGINEER SCHOOL
ATTN: MAT DIST BLDG S - 215
FORT BELVOIR , VIRGINIA 22060 POSTAGE AND FEES PAID
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
DOD 314 US.MAIL
OFFICIAL BUSINESS
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300

Special Fourth Class Rate - Book

Soldier's Name
Grade
Mailing Address

C- 1
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
DOD-
314

OFFICIAL BUSINESS

PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $300

COMMANDANT
U.S. ARMY ENGINEER SCHOOL
ATTN : MAT DIST BLDG S - 215
FORT BELVOIR , VIRGINIA 22060

C- 2
 INSTRUCTIONS

High-density MOS Soldier's Manuals, including this manual , are being made avail-
able for purchase from the Superintendent of Documents for appropriate purposes;
such as:

a. To investigate specific duties of an MOS in which you are interested.

b. To voluntarily replace a lost or damaged manual .
C. To obtain a manual quickly should your proponent school or the AG Publica-
tions Center be temporarily out of stock.

ORDER BLANK FOR SOLDIER'S MANUALS Date

AND COMMANDER'S MANUALS

Last Name First Name MI MOS Rank

Address ( Number, street, city, and state) Zip Code

Please send me the following publications:

Unit
Stock Number Publication Number Quantity Total
Price

INCLOSE MONEY ORDER OR CHECK. MAKE PAYABLE TO : SUPERINTENDENT OF DOCUMENTS.

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY

POSTAGE AND FEES PAID

DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
OFFICIAL BUSINESS DOD 314
U.S.MAIL
PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE, $300

Superintendent of Documents
U.S. Government Printing Office
Washington, D.C. 20402

FOLD HERE AND FASTEN AROUND EDGES

 FM 5-12B1 /2

29 NOVEMBER 1977

By Order of the Secretary of the Army:

BERNARD W. ROGERS
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff

Official:

J. C. PENNINGTON
Brigadier General, United StatesArmy
The Adjutant General

DISTRIBUTION :

Active Army, ARNG, and USAR: Special .

Additional Requirements :

Unit Requests - Units requiring additional copies may requisition on DA Form 17 direct from US
Army AG Publications Center, 2800 Eastern Boulevard, Baltimore, MD 21220 .

Soldier Requests - Soldiers may order directly from preparing agency by using preaddressed
reorder blank contained in printed manual .
UNIVERS MINNESO
ITY OF TA

3 1951 D03 774 697 Z